Volume 5 Technical Specifications

PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT

GOVERNMENT OF RAJASTHAN
As Executing Agency
Invites
E-Tender For

“Construction of Rajasthan House”

At
Delhi on EPC Basis
Tender No. : ACE PWD Zone I Jaipur NIT No 09/2022-23
Dated 06.09.2022
Volume-5
Technical Specifications
Instructions to Bidders (Sept, 2022)

Email: [Link]@[Link]
Website – [Link]

Signature of Contractor Page 1 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

INDEX OF VOL. 5 – TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Section Description Page No.

1. 5(a) - Structure Work 3 – 36

2. 5(b) - Architecture & Civil Finishing 37 – 117

3. 5(c) – Plumbing & Sanitary Works 118 – 149

4. 5(d) – Fire Fighting Works 150 – 169

5. 5(e)- Electrical and LV Works 170 - 329

6. 5(f)- HVAC Works 330 - 349

Signature of Contractor Page 2 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

VOL. 5(a)
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
STRUCTURE WORK

Signature of Contractor Page 3 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

PREAMBLE

1) PROJECT DESCRIPTION: -

Construction of Rajasthan House, Delhi

2) OBJECTIVE AND ASSUMPTION: -

The following construction methodology and associated details and procedures are indicative and
can be refined before undertaking the project. This methodology has been prepared to provide a
basis for assessment of the amount of work involved.

The surveying, cutting/ filling and inspection of the sites will be considered as the usual practice and
not included in the methodology.

1.0 GENERAL

The general conditions and special conditions of the contract including the drawings shall be read
in conjunction with these technical specifications, and matters referred to, shown or described in
one are not necessarily repeated in the other. These specifications are comprehensive but may
exceed the requirements of this project.

Notwithstanding the sub-division of the specification into various headings, every part of it is to be
deemed supplementary to every other part and is to be read with it, so far as it may be practicable
so to do, or when the context so permits.

The works shall be carried out based on the latest revisions of “Central Public Works Department-
Specifications” except for items specified in the tender documents. The contractor shall be required
to conduct all site tests and tests from authorized testing laboratory, submit all Manufacturers’ test
Certificates as called for in the specifications.

The contractor shall keep at site, copies of all relevant Standards and Codes of practice referred in
these specifications throughout the period of contract. These shall be the latest editions and shall
include all revisions/addendums thereof.

1.1 PROJECT DESCRIPTION: -

Type of buildings: RCC framed structure. Structure

1.3 FOUNDATION SYSTEM: -

Considering good bearing capacity, Isolated/Combined/Raft foundation may be proposed below

the non-tower as well as in tower area. The contractor shall do extensive soil investigation before
the final detailed design. The site is situated between the main road and for protection of existing
trees may create problem in the area, if excavated conventionally. Hence diaphragm wall shall be
constructed all around the plot before starting the excavation. After making the diaphragm wall,
excavation shall be done in phases vertically and necessary safety measures shall be adopted.

1.4 BRIEF CONSTRUCTION METHODOLOGY:-

The surveying, cutting/ filling and inspection of the sites shall be considered as the usual practice.

Signature of Contractor Page 4 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

1.4.1 APPLICATION

This specification applies to the Civil & Structural works to be executed by the contractor. It is to be
read in conjunction with DBR, General Conditions of Contract, Drawings and such other documents
as specified in SCC comprising part of this contract.

1.4.2 CLEARING

As per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips.

1.4.3 SITE LEVELS

The contractor shall survey the site and shall establish sufficient number of grids and level marks
to the satisfaction of the Engineer-In-Charge, who shall decide on the basis of this information, the
general level of the plot and the plinth, the levels given in the tender drawings are relative / indicative
only.

1.4.4 BENCHMARKS

Prior to Commencement of Construction, the contractor shall in consultation with the Engineer-In-
Charge, establish several site datum benchmarks, their number depending on the extent of the
site. The benchmarks shall be sited and constructed so as to be undisturbed throughout the period
of construction.

1.4.5 SITE INVESTIGATION

The Engineer-In-Charge has got the preliminary soil investigation done and the copy of the report
is for guidance. The contractor shall however inspect the site and study the findings from the trial
pits or bores in order to assess the problems involved in and methods to be adopted for excavation
and earthwork. The contractor shall ascertain for himself all information concerning the sub-soil
conditions, ground water table periods and intensity of rainfall, flooding of the site and all data
concerning excavation and earthwork.

1.4.6 SETTING OUT THE WORK

The contractor shall set out the works and during the progress of the building shall amend any
errors arising from inaccurate setting out.

During the execution of the work contractor must cross check his work with the approved drawings
The contractor shall be responsible for all the errors in this connection and shall have to rectify all
defects and / or errors.

1.4.7 CLEANING UP AND HANDING OVER

Upon completion of the work, all the areas should be cleaned. All floors, doors, windows, surface,
and external development area etc. shall be cleaned down in a manner, which will render the work
acceptable to the PWD-GOR. All rubbish due to any reason shall be removed daily from the site
and an area of at least TEN METRES on the outer boundaries of the premises will be cleaned by
the contractor as a part of the contract. Upon completion of the project, the contractor shall hand
over to the PWD-GOR the following:

Signature of Contractor Page 5 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

A) Certified reports of tests (materials and workmanship)

B) Written guarantee and certificates and
C) Maintenance manuals

1.4.8 TESTS

All materials and methods of tests shall conform to the latest CPWD Specifications with upto date
correction slips, rules, regulations and / or specifications of the following authorities where specified
herein as applicable, Bureau of Indian Standards (BIS) or British Standards code of practice (BS) in
case no equivalent BIS is available. The Engineer-In-Charge will have the option to have any of the
materials tested and if the test result shows that the materials do not conform to the specifications,
such materials shall be rejected.

1.5 EXCAVATION

1.5.1 SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION

[Link] Related Work

A) Clearing, grubbing and removing all vegetation from the site.

B) Excavation including getting out, and necessary dressing to make surface ready to receive
blinding.
C) Filling and back filling and compaction of fills.
D) Removal and disposal of surplus material.
E) Stone soling to roads and paving.
F) Barricading the site of construction from existing facility.

[Link] APPLICABLE STANDARDS

The following standards shall be followed:

A) IS: 3764-1966 Safety code for excavation work.

B) IS: 1498-1970 Classification and Identification of soils for general purposes.
C) Local building regulations and statutory regulations.

1.5.2 DEFINITIONS

[Link] CLEAR:

The removal of trees, scrub and artificial obstructions including fences, concrete slabs, kerb and
channel, remains of old buildings and the likes in it.

[Link] GRUB:

The removal of tree stumps and roots.

[Link] TOP SOIL:

Topsoil is all surface soils, which have sufficient humus to support plant growth without resort to
artificial fertilization.

1.6 SITE QUALITY CONTROL

Signature of Contractor Page 6 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

The contractor shall provide in his quality assurance programme information to show that a system
will be used to ensure that all works carried out under this section will comply with all the requirements
of this section.

1.6.1 ANTIQUITIES

Any ancient carvings, relics, coins or other curiosities discovered during the excavation or other work
shall remain the property of the PWD-GOR and shall be handed over to the PWD-GOR.

1.6.2 SETTING OUT AND CLEARING OF THE SITE

The contractor shall set out the center line of the building or other involved works after clearing the
site and get the same approved from Engineer-In-Charge. The contractor shall assume full
responsibility for proper setting out, alignment, elevation and dimension of each and all parts of the
work.

1.6.3 EXCAVATION CLASSIFICATION

A) Excavate foundation from existing ground level to the formation levels shown in
approved drawing.
B) Excavation to pit working level.
C) Earthworks outside property line if any.
D) Excavation, compaction and backfill to plinth and service trenches.

1.7 CLASSIFICATION OF SOIL / ROCKS

As per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips.

1.7.1 CLASSIFICATION OF SOILS

As per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips.

1.7.2 METHOD OF EXCAVATION

As per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips.

The contractor shall ensure proper methods are adopted tocontrol lathe creation of dust. Method
adopted shall be approved by the Engineer-In-Charge.

1.7.3 STACKING OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS

As per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips.

1.7.4 DISPOSAL / CARTING OF SURPLUS EARTH

Top layer of hard soil free from vegetation, spoils, rocks, boulders for a quantity of approximately
15% of the total excavated earth quantity shall be stocked at locations as directed by the Engineer-
In-Charge for re-use up to a distance of 300m from the periphery of the buildings. The remaining
excavated earth, except for the hard rock excavated, shall be disposed-off including lifting out,
transportation to locations approved by local bodies, government agencies or as directed by the
Engineer-In-Charge as the case may be.

The contractor is responsible for finding suitable dumping yard and for the removal of all sub grade
obstructions, whether indicated or not, wherever it is likely to interfere with execution and
completion of the project.

Signature of Contractor Page 7 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

All surplus and unusable earth shall be carted out and disposed-off outside the site but at a location
approved by local authority and confirming to their specifications.

1.7.5 DEWATERING
As per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips.

1.7.6 SHORING AND STRUTTING

As per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips.

1.7.7 PROTECTION

The contractor shall take all necessary measures for the safety of the excavation, persons working,
tools and plants working in and near the excavation pits, property and people in the vicinity.

Protection and maintenance of all bench marks axis points and other similar reference points if
disturbed and/ or damaged, to be replaced by the contractor.

Location of existing utility lines; if shown on the drawings, is only approximate and only for
interpretation. The contractor shall be responsible of their protection during the duration of the
contract without causing any damage, dislocation, injury and/ or interruption to these utility services.
If so, the same is to be replaced/ restored to their original status.

All the temporary roads, constructions etc. shall be made and maintained according to the
provisions of this contract and as per the instructions of the Engineer-In-Charge upon the
completion of this contract and restore the area in its original condition.

1.8 EARTHWORK - FILLS

1.8.1 GENERAL FILLING

As per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips.

[Link] STRUCTURAL FILLING

As per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips.

[Link] CRUSHED STONE

As per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips.

1.8.2 WATER

Water used for compacting fill or for washing crushed stone shall be clean and free from oil, grease,
organic matter, suspended sediments and other deleterious substances.

1.8.3 BACK FILLING AND COMPACTION

As per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips.

Signature of Contractor Page 8 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

1.8.4 INCLUSIONS IN EXCAVATION

Apart from other factors mentioned elsewhere in this contract, excavation shall also include for the
following:

I) Clearing site.
II) Setting out works as required.
III) Providing shoring and shuttering to avoid sliding of soil and to protect adjacent structures and
subsequently by removing the same.
IV) Collection of excavated spoil and sorting out useful excavated materials and conveying
beyond the structure and stacking them neatly on the site for back filling or re-use as directed.
V) Bailing and pumping out water as required and directed.
VI) Excavation at all depth and removal of all materials of whatever nature wet or dry and
necessary for the construction of foundation underground reservoir etc. and preparing bed
for laying concrete.
VII) Necessary protection including labour, materials, and equipment to ensure safety and
protection against risk or accident.
VIII) Drilling of small holes as directed to explore the nature of substratum if necessary.

1.9 SOLING USED AS SUB-BASE

1.9.1 LOCATION

Soling shall be constructed under floors and other areas where shown in the drawings.

1.9.2 SOLING MATERIALS

As per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips.

1.9.3 PREPARATION OF THE SUB-GRADE BEFORE LAYING SOLING

As per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips.

1.9.4 LAYING AND PACKING THE SOLING STONES

As per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips.

1.9.5 CONSOLIDATION OF THE SOLING

As per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips.

1.10 PRE-CONSTRUCTION ANTI-TERMITE TREATMENT

As per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips.

1.11 CAST IN-SITU CONCRETE

1.11.1 RELATED WORK

A. Concrete formwork

B. Concrete reinforcement

C. Concrete finishing

Signature of Contractor Page 9 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

D. Sealants

As per relevant IS codes

1.11.2 DEFINITIONS

[Link] WATER / CEMENT RATIO

The ratio by weight of water to cement in a mix expressed as a decimal fraction. Water being that
which is free to combine with cement, including free water in aggregate.

[Link] HOT WEATHER

Shade air temperature of 32° C and higher.

1.11.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

[Link] Supervising staff shall have qualifications and experience in the subject.
1.17.3.2The following tests shall be carried out:

I) Mandatory tests as per CPWD specifications on bricks sand, aggregate etc.

II) Testing preliminary test cubes;

III) Testing work test cubes;

1.11.4 STANDARDS

Comply with the following codes, specifications and standards and as shown on the drawings.
I) IS 456: 2000 - Specifications For Plain And Reinforced Concrete.
II) IS 269:1976 or Latest Amendment - Specifications for Ordinary and Low Heat
Portland Cement.

Quality assurance shall be a prime concern for all works

1.11.5 SUBMITTALS

Samples: Slide bearings

1.11.6 MATERIALS

As per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips.

1.11.7 TEST CERTIFICATE

1.11.8 CEMENT

As per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips and relevant IS Codes.

1.11.9 STACKING AND STORAGE OF CEMENT

As per CPWD specification.

1.11.10 AGGREGATE

Signature of Contractor Page 10 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

As per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips and relevant IS Codes.

1.11.11 FINE AGGREGATE

As per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips and relevant IS Codes.

1.11.12 WATER

As per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips and relevant IS Codes.

[Link] The contractor shall make his own arrangements for storing of water if necessary in drums, tanks to
the satisfaction of Engineer-In-Charge. Care shall be taken to ensure that water is not contaminated
in anyway.

1.11.13 MISCELLANEOUS
[Link] Chemical curing compound of approved make to form a membrane or surface which will
disintegrate and flake from that surface over a period of days, commencing at least 7 days after application.

[Link] Vapor barrier and separation layer to underside of concrete slab, as and when necessary, and
grade 10 micron (0.25 mm) thick polyethylene sheets with laps 100 mm on sides and ends.

1.12 TRIAL MIXES

As per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips and relevant IS Codes.

Under special circumstances the conversion of weights to volumes may be allowed by the Engineer-
In-Charge at his sole discretion.

The minimum cement content to be used for the job is as follows:

MIX 43 GRADE 53 GRADE

M 15 280 KG/CUM 280 KG/CUM
M 20 318 KG/CUM 290 KG/CUM
M 25 350 KG/CUM 300 KG/CUM
M 30 388 KG/CUM 335 KG/CUM
M 35 423.5 KG/CUM 375 KG/CUM
M 40 459 KG/CUM 410 KG/CUM

NOTE: 1. In case of OPC cement, 20% cement can be replaced with Fly ash confirming to IS: 3812,
Part-I.
2. These are minimum quantities of Cement to be used irrespective of the design mix.

1.12.1 ASSUMED STANDARD DEVIATION

As per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips and relevant IS Codes.

1.12.2 STANDARD DEVIATION BASED ON TEST RESULTS

As per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips and relevant IS Codes.

1.12.3 CONSISTENCY

As per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips and relevant IS Codes.

Signature of Contractor Page 11 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

When considered necessary by the Engineer-In-Charge, the workability of the concrete shall be
ascertained by compacting factor test and VEE BEE Consistometer method as per IS: 1199-1959.
The computing of values of workability of concrete by above two methods, IS: 456-2000 has to be
referred to.

1.12.4 TEMPERATURE OF CONCRETE

As per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips and relevant IS Codes.

1.12.5 SHRINKAGE CRACKS

Concreting shall be avoided in very warm weather. Under such circumstances, the placed concrete
shall be covered with damp hessian cloth within two hours of placing of concrete.

To achieve good results the concrete shall be immediately covered with a plastic sheet and not
allowed to come into direct wind contact, to eliminate shrinkage cracks.

1.12.6 WORKMANSHIP

All works shall be true to level, plumb and square and all corners and edges in all cases shall be
unbroken and neat. Any work not to the satisfaction of the Engineer-In-Charge will be rejected and
the same should be rectified or removed and replaced with work of the required standard of
workmanship.

1.13 PROPORTIONING, BATCHING & MIXING OF CONCRETE

1.13.1 PROPORTIONING

[Link] AGGREGATE

As per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips and relevant IS Codes.

[Link] CEMENT

As per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips and relevant IS Codes.

The cement shall be considered by weight, for design mix.

[Link] WATER

Only such quantity of water shall be added to the cement and aggregates in the concrete mix as to
ensure dense concrete, specified surface finish, satisfactory workability, consistent with the
strength stipulated for each class of concrete. The water added to the mix shall be such as not to
cause segregation of materials or the collection of excessive free water on the surface of the
concrete.

[Link] WATER/CEMENT RATIO

As per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips and relevant IS Codes.

Signature of Contractor Page 12 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

The actual water cement ratio to be adopted shall be determined in each instance by contractor
and approved by the Engineer-In-Charge.

1.14 PROPORTIONING BY WATER/CEMENT RATIO

The W/C ratio specified for use by Design Mix shall be maintained. Contractor shall determine the
water content / moisture content of the aggregates as frequently as desired by the Engineer-In-
Charge as the work progresses and as specified in IS 2386 (part III) and the amount of mixing
water added at the mixer shall be adjusted as directed by the Engineer-In-Charge so as to maintain
the specified W/C ratio. To allow for the variation in their moisture content, suitable adjustments in
the weights of aggregates shall also be made.

1.15 BATCHING AND MIXING OF CONCRETE

Only Ready Mix Concrete is allowed for all concrete work. Which shall be confirming the CPWD
specification and relevant IS codes.

1.16 ORDINARY CONCRETE

RMC from approved plant shall be used for all concrete works. The capacity and number of mixers
and vibrators required at the site from time to time shall be to the approval of Engineer-In-Charge.
The contractor shall maintain a platform weighing scale of capacity 300 kg with fraction of 100 gm
at the site.

1.16.1 Ordinary Portland cement concrete where specified shall be used.

1.16.2 Proportions [Link], [Link], 1:1.5:3, etc., in the specification refers to the quantity of cement by volume,
dry coarse sand by volume, quantity of coarse aggregate by volume.

1.16.3 Cement shall be weighed, based on 1 cum. of cement weighs 1440 kgs or 1 full bag of cement 50
kgs corresponding to 35 lts by volume.

1.16.4 Correction factors to be applied for bulking of sand when the sand is either wet or moist.

Water cement ratio used shall be just sufficient for the workability of concrete.

Minimum strength of concrete shall be as per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips
and relevant IS Codes.

1.16.5 TESTING

As per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips and relevant IS Codes.

1.17 PLACING OF CONCRETE

As per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips and relevant IS Codes.

1.18 COMPACTION OF CONCRETE

As per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips and relevant IS Codes.

Signature of Contractor Page 13 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

1.19 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS

As per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips and relevant IS Codes.

1.19.1 HORIZONTAL JOINTS IN WALLS:

As per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips and relevant IS Codes.

1.19.2 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS IN GROUND SLABS:

As per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips and relevant IS Codes.

1.19.3 ISOLATION JOINTS:

As per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips and relevant IS Codes.

1.19.4 CONTROL JOINTS:

A) Space at 4 - 7 metre in width for one panel.

1.19.5 FORM BY EITHER:

I. Sawing a continuous straight line in the top of the slab

II. Grooving fresh concrete with hand grooves
III. Placing strips of wood, metal or pre-moulded joint material at joint locations. Top edges of
strips shall be flush with concrete.
Iv. Control joints shall be extended 1/5 to 1/4 times slab thickness into the slab.
1.19.6 VERTICAL JOINTS IN WALLS:

As per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips and relevant IS Codes.

A. Space not exceeding 5m centers and also locate where abrupt changes inthickness or
height occur, at least 2m from corner.

1.20 EXPANSION JOINT

As indicated in drawing or as directed by the Engineer-In-Charge and as per CPWD Specifications

with upto date correction slips and relevant IS Codes.

1.20.1 CURING

As per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips and relevant IS Codes.

1.20.2 FINISHING
As per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips and relevant IS Codes.

On finishing standards and quality / workmanship, the decision of the Engineer-In-Charge shall be
final and binding on all parties.

1.21 INSPECTION AND CORRECTIVE MEASURES

Signature of Contractor Page 14 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

Immediately on removal of formwork, the RCC surface shall be examined by the Engineer-In-
Charge. Till such time, no remedial measures shall be carried out by the contractor. All remedial
actions including breaking, if any, shall be on the instructions of the Engineer-In-Charge. In case of
any violation of this rule, the concrete poured stands rejected. The decision of the Engineer-In-
Charge in this regard shall be final and binding to all parties.

1.22 CRACKS

Cracks observed shall be examined. It shall be kept under observation and a record shall be
maintained for a period of 45 days. It shall be shown to the Engineer-In-Charge and the following
procedure shall be followed:

1.23 QUANTUM OF CUBE TESTING

As per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips and relevant IS Codes.

1.24 ACCEPTANCE OF WORK

It shall be in accordance with in IS:456-2000, SP-23 and SP-24.

1.25 CONCRETING UNDER SPECIAL CONDITIONS

During hot or cold weather concreting should be done as per the procedure set out in IS: 7861 part
I or IS: 7861 part II or as directed by the Engineer-In-Charge.

Fixtures: any fixture, steel angles, holdfasts etc. shall be embedded according to the drawing or as
instructed by the Engineer-In-Charge.

1.26 PRECAST CONCRETE

1.26.1 PRECAST NOMINAL MIX CONCRETE

General:
As per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips and relevant IS Codes.

1.26.2 PRECAST JALI BLOCKS LOUVERS, SHELVES, ETC.

As per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips and relevant IS Codes.

1.26.3 Placing and Compacting of Concrete

As per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips and relevant IS Codes.

1.27 READY MIX CONCRETE

It shall be in accordance with in IS 4926-1976

1.28 BASIS OF SUPPLY

The ready mixed concrete shall be manufactured and supplied on the following basis.

Signature of Contractor Page 15 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

A) Specified strength based on 28-day compressive strength of 15-cm cubes tested in accordance
with IS: 456-1964.

B) When the concrete is manufactured and supplied on the basis of specified strength, the
responsibility for the design of mix shall be that of the manufacturer.

1.29 GENERAL REQUIREMENT

As per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips and relevant IS Codes.

1.30 ADMIXTURES
As per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips and relevant IS Codes.

1.30.1 AIR ENTRAINING AGENT

As per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips and relevant IS Codes.

1.30.2 RETARDING ADMIXTURES

Where specified and approved by Engineer-In-Charge retarding agents shall be added to the
concrete mix in quantities specified by Engineer-In-Charge.
1.30.3 WATER REDUCING ADMIXTURES

Where specified and approved by Engineer-In-Charge water reducing ligno-sulfonate mixture shall
be added in quantities specified. The admixtures shall be added in the form of a solution.

1.30.4 WATER PROOFING AGENT

Where specified and approved by Engineer-In-Charge, chloride and sulphide free waterproofing
agent shall be added in quantities specified.

1.30.5 OTHER ADMIXTURES

[Link] The Engineer-In-Charge may at his discretion instruct the contractor to use any other admixtures
in the concrete.

[Link] If the contractor so wishes to use admixtures, then the following should be adhered to (subject to
Engineer-In-Charge's approval).

(a) No reduction will be allowed to target mean strength when compared to admixture free
concrete of the same class.
(b) Dosage of admixture shall be strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruction.

[Link] The following information about the admixture shall be submitted to the Engineer-In-Charge for
record and approval.
 Long and short term effects of the admixture in the concrete.
 Effect of admixture of concrete permeability.
 Effects of over and under dosage.
 Shortage life and special storage requirements.

[Link] The contractor when requested shall provide the services of a full time field technician of the
admixture manufacturer to advise the proper addition of the admixture to the concrete or
adjustment of concrete mix proportions to meet changing conditions.

Signature of Contractor Page 16 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

[Link] The contractor shall furnish a statement of responsibility from the admixture manufacturer for
their products.

1.31 MISCELLANEOUS WORKS

The following items are not intended to exclude any other items of works required by the contractor,
or that may be required by local code or good construction practice. The following work shall be
included by the contractor as they may not have been detailed specifically on the architectural
drawings and specifications but are required in order that job is completed in every respect:

(1) The supply, maintenance and removal of all temporary rungs, and ramping as necessary on the
site.
(2) All finishes and to the concrete work as shown or specified.
(3) Allowed for the removal of constructions encountered.

(4) The excavation and concrete construction of all sump pits, manholes, drains under slabs, etc. as
described in the specifications and shown on the drawings.

(5) Formwork, reinforcing, embedded items and layout for concrete tank cradles.

(6) All roof mechanical and other building services equipment pads and kerbs at the HVAC and
electrical openings, concrete including dowels, formwork and roughing of concrete.

(7) All fire grading and removal of standing water before the placing of concrete.

(8) Included for all below slab, surface water and drainage, including brick fill, within the tender.

(9) Points and in steel below slabs lightening protection systems as detailed.

(10) The contractor, in the preparation of his bid, is to allow for watertight construction.

(11) Allow for keeping the works clear and tidy at all times and for the removal of debris arising from
the works, and to be disposed-off at locations designated by the Engineer-In-Charge, and frequent
removal off the site. Any surplus concrete deposited at the work front of on the site (concrete
droppings) must be removed by the contractor.

(12) Provisions, hoisting, distribution and fixing of all embedded items required.

(13) Leaving all necessary holes and pockets for steel work beams for lifts and for making good after
installation. Casting in all slots and inserts for fixings to guides and runners to lift shafts.

(14) All trench drain box-cut with necessary recesses and casting in all anchor bolts and providing and
installing trench drains and other embedded items as shown on the drawings.

(15) Include design mix weight and storage box for samples and test cylinders.

(16) Leveling of the floors to proper elevations as shown on the drawings to the tolerances and cambers
and slopes specified including all changes of slab elevation.

(17) All means of transportation of concrete.

(18) Providing and casting into concrete slots to receive masonry or blockwork ties to support all such
walls as shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer-In-Charge.

Signature of Contractor Page 17 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

(19) Forming holes to riser ducts.

(20) Forming necessary cutouts at pipe locations to accommodate electrical, plumbing, sprinkler and
electrical services.
(21) Forming in the concrete members chases for any asphalt "track-in" and/ or flashing and the like.

(22) Provide grout for lift saddle and floor closures prior to setting (setting by others).

(23) Grout pumps and other mechanical equipment as required.

(24) Provide temporary shoring and strutting as required due to the operations of the contractor.

(25) Provide and maintain ladders until stairs are usable.

(26) Provide adequate lighting at all areas

(27) Erect sufficient safety signs, posters and maintain high level of safety during the entire construction
period.

1.32 REINFORCEMENT

As per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips and relevant IS Codes.

1.32.1 INSPECTION

A. Ensure that the reinforcement placing is checked by Engineer-In-Charge.

B. Ensure that the formwork to receive the reinforcement is clean and free from debris.
C. Cracked end of bars to be cut out.

1.33 FORM WORK

As per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips and relevant IS Codes.

1.34 GUIDELINES FOR GOOD WORKMANSHIP

Following are a few points as guidelines for good workmanship in formwork.

1.34.1 Erection of formwork may be from pre-moulded, pre-fabricated, pre-assembled plates or form
reasonable enough to transport and erect at site to correct lines and levels as set at site.

1.34.2 Supports shall be firm and maintained in position by nails, cross bracing, tie-rods, locking bolts,
nuts, etc. It shall be rigid and stiff so as to retain its shape during and after concreting.

1.34.3 Joints shall be water-tight and no cement slurry shall be allowed to get through

1.34.4 Pre-fabricated or site forms shall be assembled so as to de-shutter without any jerk to the green
concrete. For this double wedges shall be used. The wedges shall be nailed. The heads left with,
allowing easy removal while de-shuttering.
1.34.5 Pre-fabricated or site formwork shall be of sufficient thickness with supporting spans in both
directions. These shall be standardized in size for easy replacement and universal use at site

1.34.6 Props shall be of steel only. Its spacing shall be as per design. It shall be vertical and plumbed.
Base shall be of proper steel plate or timber plank for equal distribution of load

Signature of Contractor Page 18 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

1.34.7 In case of multi-storied buildings, any upper floor shall be suitably supported on at least one floor
below the same, or as approved by the Engineer-In-Charge.

1.34.8 Props shall be adequately cross-braced horizontally.

1.34.9 At the design and erection stage following additional points shall be considered and be
incorporated into the setting: -

(a) Opening of cleaning prior to the start of concreting.

(b) Pouring points shall avoid high drops and provide easy access to vibrating needles

1.34.10 Surfaces shall be treated with suitable releasing oil or emulsion prior to the reinforcement laying.
Such releasing oil shall be got approved from the Engineer-In-Charge.
1.34.11 Ensure that forms and adjacent surfaces are thoroughly cleaned to receive concrete.

1.34.12 Locate construction joints in a manner so as not to impair strength and appearance of structure.

1.34.13 Without absolving the details on the above, the contractor shall comply with direction of the
Engineer-In-Charge regarding formwork designing, erection, execution, rotation, maintenance
and reuse.

1.34.14 Following points shall be observed very carefully: -

[Link] Joints of formwork shall be watertight. It is easy to check from the bottom and make sure no light
is visible

[Link] Props shall be on solid base, plumbed, in straight line, braced horizontally and cross

[Link] Tie-bars, bracing and spacers in beams, walls and columns shall be at correct place/location
and fully tight.

[Link] Wedges shall be fully secured and nailed with heads left out for easy removal

[Link] All saw dust, dirt, shavings and any other unwanted material shall be cleaned and hosed out
[Link] Provision shall be made for watching formwork while concreting and any other platform needed
for movement of workers without any disturbance to the reinforcement

[Link] Provision is made for traffic on formwork: not to bear directly on reinforcing steel.

[Link] Number of reuses shall be decided by the Engineer-In-Charge on examining the condition of
formwork after each use. If during concreting any weakness develops or formwork shows any
distress, the work shall be stopped and remedial action taken.

1.34.15 Finishing Formed Surfaces

The Contractor shall:

Repair and patch defective areas with fins and other projections completely removed or
smoothed.

To smooth concrete where fins and other projections have formed moisten concrete surface
within a day after forms have been removed and rub with carborundum brick until surface is a
uniform colour and texture within the projection limits. Not apply cement ground other than that

Signature of Contractor Page 19 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

produced by the rubbing process. Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if
defects cannot be repaired to the satisfaction of the superintendent.

Surface defects shall include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spills, air bubbles,
honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projection on the surface, stain and form tie holes.

The Contractor shall:

Undercut voids larger than 25mm diameter and fill with fresh concrete aft thoroughly wetting
concrete surfaces. Fill small holes and irregularities using 2:1 (Portland cement to fine sand by
volume) grout mixed with approved bonding admixture according to manufacturer’s
specification.

1.34.16 Tolerances

Tolerance is a specified permissible variation from lines, grades or dimensions given in

drawings. Unless otherwise specified, tolerances given in the following sections shall be
permitted.

1.34.17 Tolerance for RCC Buildings

Variation from plumb should be as follows:

A) In the lines and surface of columns, walls, and other vertical members, viz. inside face of
lift shaft, etc. 3 mm per 3.0 metre but not exceeding 10mm for the full height of the
building

B) FOR EXPOSED CORNER COLUMN AND OTHER CONSPICUOUS LINES

IN ANY BAY UP TO 5 MMAXIMUM 3 MM

IN 10 M OR MORE BAYS 5 MM

C) SOFFITS OF SLABS, CEILINGS AND BEAMS

2.5 M BAYS 03 MM
5.0 M BAYS 03 MM
IN 10 M OR MORE 10 MM

D) LINTELS, SILLS, PARAPETS, GROOVES AND OTHER CONSPICUOUS LINES

IN BAY UP TO 5 M MAXIMUM 3 MM
IN 10 M OR MORE 5 MM

E) VARIATION OF THE LINEAR BUILDING LINES FROM ESTABLISHED POSITIONS IN

PLAN AND RELATED POSITION OF COLUMNS, WALL AND PARTITIONS
IN BAY UP TO 5 M MAXIMUM 5 MM
IN 10 M OR MORE 10 MM
F) Deviation from dimensions of footing / foundation:

I. Dimension in plan (+) 50mm

II. Eccentricity in plan: 0.02 times the width of the footings in the direction of
deviation but not more than 50mm

III. Thickness: (+) 0.05 times the specified thickness.

Signature of Contractor Page 20 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

IV. Surface of foundation against ground: -5mm, +10mm

V. Top surface of foundations, bases, piers: +5mm, -20mm

G) Variation in sizes and location of sleeves, opening in walls and floors to be 5 mm (except
for anchor bolts)

H) Variation in cross-sectional dimension of columns and beams and thickness of slabs and
walls -5 mm, +10 mm

1.34.18 VARIATION IN STEPS

IN A FLIGHT OF STAIRS RISERS TREADS

IN FLIGHT OF STAIRS 3 MM 5 MM
IN CONSECUTIVE STEPS 1.5 MM 3 MM

All the tolerances mentioned above shall apply to concrete dimensions only, and not to
positioning of vertical steel or dowels.
1.35 REMOVAL OF FORMWORK

As per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips and relevant IS Codes.
1.36 MISCELLANEOUS WORKS

1.36.1 CLEANING AND OILING OF FORMS

As per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips and relevant IS Codes.

1.36.2 OPENINGS / INSERTS

Contractor shall provide all required openings, pockets, inserts as detailed in drawings. The
contractor shall provide required material and labour for fixing and supporting during concreting. It
is imperative to consider that all openings and pockets shall be de-shuttered with care and all
corners of openings shall be preserved, i.e. shall be in correct line and level. After concreting the
openings shall be secured against any accident by proper covering and guard rail, warning notice,
lighting, etc.

1.37 PLASTERING WORK

As per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips and relevant IS Codes. Norms to be
followed for plastering works over walls made of AAC blocks and thus as per approval by Architect/
Engineer- In Charge 12 mm internal and 15 mm external plaster to be used.

1.38 LIME FOR RENDERING

As per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips and relevant IS Codes.

1.39 STRUCTURAL STEEL MEMBERS: -

As per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips and relevant IS Codes.

1.40 BOLTS AND NUTS

Signature of Contractor Page 21 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

Bolts and nuts shall conform to IS: 1363 or IS: 1364: 2002 as applicable and as shown in the drawing.
Unless otherwise specified nuts and bolt heads shall be hexagonal. Property class of nuts and bolts
shall be compatible. The contractor shall submit test certificates when called for. Wherever shown in
the drawing high strength friction grip bolts (HSFG bolts) and nuts conform to IS: 3757 and IS: 6623:
2004 respectively shall be used. Nuts shall be of at least the strength grade appropriate to the grade
of bolts or other threaded elements with which they are used.

1.40.1 WASHERS

Plain washers shall be made of mild steel conforming to IS: 5369 unless noted otherwise. Minimum
one washer shall be supplied for each bolt and in case of special types of bolts more than one washer
as required for the purpose shall be supplied. Helical spring washer conforming to IS: 6755: 1980
shall be provided for bolts carrying dynamic or fluctuating loads and those in direct tension. Tapered
washers conforming to IS: 5372 & IS: 5374 shall be used for channels & beams respectively. Washers
for high strength friction bolts shall conform to IS: 6649: 1985

1.40.2 WELDING CONSUMABLES

[Link] Covered electrodes (for metal arc welding of structural steel) shall conform to IS: 814 & IS: 2062.
[Link] Filler rods & wires for gas welding shall conform to IS: 1278: 1972

[Link] Base wire electrodes (in submerged arc welding of structural steel) shall conform to IS: 7280:1974
The combination of wire and flux shall comply with the requirements of IS: 3613: 1974

[Link] Filler rods & base electrodes (for gas shield arc welding of structural steel) shall conform to IS:
6419: 1996

[Link] Welding consumables & procedures shall be such that the mechanical properties of deposited
weld metal are not less than the respective minimum values of the parent metal being welded.

1.40.3 STEEL GRATINGS, STAIR TREADS & CHEQUERED PLATES

[Link] Steel grating and stair treads shall be open grid rectangular pattern complying with standard
drawings.

[Link] Steel chequered plates shall conform to IS: 3502.

1.40.4 RECEIPT & STORING OF MATERIALS

As per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips and relevant IS Codes.

1.40.5 MATERIAL TESTS

As per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips and relevant IS Codes.

The Contractor shall submit manufacturers' quality certificates for all the materials supplied by him.
In case, quality certificates are not available or are incomplete or when material quality differs from
standard specifications, such materials shall not be used in the construction. Notwithstanding the
manufacture’s certificate, the Contractor shall also get all appropriate tests conducted in approved
test houses/Labs for such materials as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge and submit the same to
Engineer-in-Charge for his approval. The Engineer-in- Charge may approve the use of such materials
entirely at his discretion

Signature of Contractor Page 22 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

1.40.6 FABRICATION DRAWINGS

Fabrication and erection drawings shall be prepared by the Contractor on the basis of"Approved for
Construction (AFC)" design drawings and Standards.

Fabrication and erection drawings shall be thoroughly checked, stamped "Approved for Construction"
and signed by the Contractor for obtaining approval of the Engineer-in-Charge.

Connections, splices and other details if were not shown on the design drawings shall be suitably
designed and shown on the fabrication drawings based on good engineering practice developing full
member strength. Design calculations for such connections/splices shall be submitted to the
Engineer-in-Charge along with the fabrication drawings
.
The Contractor shall supply two prints each of the final/as built drawings along with their
transparencies to Engineer-in-Charge for reference and record.

1.40.7 FABRICATION

General

Fabrication of structures shall be done strictly as per "Approved for Construction" fabrication drawings
(prepared by the Contractor based on the latest design drawings) and in accordance with IS: 800,
9595 & other relevant BIS Codes and BIS Hand Book SP: 6(1).

Prior to commencement of structural fabrication, undulations in the fabrication yard, if any, shall be
removed and area leveled and paved by the Contractor.

Any defective material used in the work shall be replaced by the Contractor. Necessary care and
precautions shall be taken so as not to cause any damage to the structure during any such removal
and replacement.

Any faulty fabrication pointed out at any stage of work by the Engineer-in-Charge, shall be made
good or replaced by the Contractor.

Tolerances for fabrication of steel structures shall be as per IS: 7215.

1.40.8 FABRICATION PROCEDURE

As per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips and relevant IS Codes.

A. Mechanical Tests

The mechanical testing (such as tensile load tests, bend tests, impact tests etc.) shall be done in
accordance with the relevant standards and as per the instructions of the Engineer-in-Charge.

B. Magnetic Particle/Dye Penetration/Ultrasonic Examination:

The examination shall be done at random as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. Whenever such
tests are directed, the tests shall be carried out on joints chosen by him. The tests shall be carried
out by employing approved testing procedure in accordance with IS: 822 / ASME Section V- 2007.

1.40.9 Bolting

As per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips and relevant IS Codes.

Signature of Contractor Page 23 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

1.40.10 Splicing

As per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips and relevant IS Codes.

1.40.11 SITE (FIELD) ERECTION

[Link] Plant & Equipment

The suitability and capacity of all plants and equipments used shall be to the complete satisfaction of
the Engineer-in-Charge.

[Link] Storing & Handling

All steel work shall be so stored and handled at site so that the members are not subjected to
excessive stresses and any damage.

[Link] Setting Out

One set of reference axes and one bench mark level shall be furnished to the Contractor.

These shall be used for setting out of structures.

The Contractor shall assume complete responsibility for correct setting out of all steelwork,
erecting it correctly as per alignment / levels shown in the drawings and plumb (verticality) of
vertical members.

1.40.12 TOLERANCES

Tolerances for erection of steel structures shall be as per Annexure 'A'

1.40.13 SAFETY & SECURITY DURING ERECTION

The contractor shall comply with IS: 7205 for necessary safety and adhere to safe erection
practices and guard against hazardous as well as unsafe working conditions during all stages
of erection.

Proper access, platform and safety arrangement shall be provided for working and inspection
whenever required.

1.40.14 FIELD CONNECTIONS

[Link] Field Bolting

Field bolting shall be carried out with the care as explained above.

[Link] Field Welding

All field assembly and welding shall be executed in accordance with the requirements for shop
assembly and welding. Holes made for all erection bolts- where removed after final erection
shall be plugged by welding. Alternatively, erection bolts may be left and secured.

Signature of Contractor Page 24 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

1.40.15 SCHEME AND SEQUENCE OF ERECTION

The Contractor shall furnish the detailed scheme and sequence of erection to match with the
project schedule and get the same approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. All necessary
coordination and synchronization shall be done with the civil contractor where civil works are
not included in the scope of structural contractor so as to match with the project schedule.

1.40.16 PAINTING AFTER ERECTION

[Link] Surface preparation by grit blasting

The grit blasting of the surface shall be carried out by compressed air and blasting gun. Clean
screened grit of uniform size shall be used for blasting purpose. For grit blasting, the surface
shall be made free from mill scale, rust, grease, oil or other foreign material and shall appear
to have foreign white base metal roughened texture to form good adhesion of the primer
coating, conforming to Swedish Standards "Sa 2 ½".Compressed air should be free from
moisture and oil. The grit blasted surface shall be applied with primer coat within 3 to 4 hours
or before any trace of oxidation appears on the cleaned surface.

[Link] Primer Application

As per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips and relevant IS Codes.

[Link] Final Paint Application

As per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips and relevant IS Codes.

1.41 ROLLING SHUTTERS

As per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips and relevant IS Codes.

1.42 MASONRY WORKS

1.42.1 MORTAR

The mortar for masonry work shall be cement and C&D Recycled Manufactured Sand (-3mm and
shall be made in small quantities so as to be used up within 30 minutes. The cement and C&D
Recycled Manufactured Sand (-3mm) of the required proportion shall be first mixed dry thoroughly
and water added and mixed to a sufficiently thick consistency as required by the Engineer-In-
Charge. No left over mortar shall be used. Unless otherwise specified the mortar shall be of the
following proportions.

A) One cement and five C&D Recycled Manufactured Sand (-3mm) for 230 mm thick masonry
work and above.

B) One cement and four C&D Recycled Manufactured Sand (-3mm) for piers, half brick walls,
honeycombed brickwork, hollow blocks.

1.43.1 AUTOCLAVED AERATED CONCRETE BLOCK

Signature of Contractor Page 25 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

The autoclaved aerated concrete blocks having oven dry density 550 to 650 kg/cum, fire resistance
minimum 2 hours. The characteristics of AAC block will be conforming to BIS – 2185

BIS–1984: autoclave aerated concrete block BIS – 6041: construction of AAC block masonry

BIS – 6072 – 1971: specification of autoclaved reinforced cellular concrete block masonry

BIS – 6042 – 1969: construction of light weight concrete block masonry

BIS– 6441 – 1972: methods of test for autoclaved cellular concrete products

BIS– 6073 – 1971: autoclaved reinforced cellular concrete floor & roof slabs

BIS– 3809 – 1979: fire resistance test of structure

The blocks shall be stored on the site on a level ground, protected against rain fall and snow fall.

Laying of mortar: the mortar shall not be spread so much ahead of the actual laying of the units
that it tends to stiffen and lose the plasticity there by resulting in poor bond. Consistency as per
requirement of site must be maintained at the point of laying over bed. Mortar joint shall be struck
off flush with wall surface and when the mortar starts stiffening, it shall be compressed tightly.

1.43.2 FLY ASH MASONARY

As per CPWD Specifications.

1.44 WATER PROOFING

1.44.1 STANDARDS

Indian and other International Standards are followed for this section. Any discrepancies or
ambiguities seen shall be brought to the notice of the PWD-GOR and clarification / confirmation
sought. Engineer-In-Charge’s decision shall be final. However, as a general rule, more stringent
specifications shall be followed.

1.44.2 WATERPROOFING SYSTEMS

Note: The waterproofing system for foundation, underground structures and basement (if any) to be
finalized as per soil conditions, water table, basement level and foundation design. The
waterproofing system shall be finalized from the below mentioned systems and approved by the
Architect based on the mentioned criterias.

A) Providing and applying integral crystalline slurry of hydrophilic in nature for waterproofing treatment
to the RCC structures like retaining walls of the basement, water tanks, roof slabs, podiums, reservior,
sewage & water treatment plant, tunnels / subway and bridge deck etc., prepared by mixing in the
ratio of 5 : 2 (5 parts integral crystalline slurry : 2 parts water) for vertical surfaces and 3 : 1 (3 parts
integral crystalline slurry : 1 part water) for horizontal surfaces and applying the same from negative
(internal) side with the help of synthetic fiber brush. The material shall meet the requirements as
specified in ACI-212-3R-2010 i.e by reducing permeability of concrete by more than 90% compared
with control concrete as per DIN 1048 and resistant to 16 bar hydrostatic pressure on negative side.
The crystalline slurry shall be capable of self-healing of cracks up to a width of 0.50mm. The work
shall be carried out all complete as per specification and the direction of the engineerin-charge. The
product performance shall carry guarantee for 10 years against any leakage.
For vertical surface two coats @0.70 kg per sqm
For horizontal surface one coat @1.10 kg per sqm.

Signature of Contractor Page 26 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

B) Providing and applying crystalline mortar by mixing in the ratio of 4.5 : 1 (4.5 parts crystalline
mortar : 1 part water) for the treatment of faulty construction joints, cracks, tie rod holes and
spalled & honeycombed surface of RCC underground structures like basement, water tanks,
bridge deck etc. to ensure water tightness. The crystallie mortar shall conform to the EN 1504-3
having compressive strength Class R4 (45 MPa) and adhesive bond strength Class R3 (?1.5
MPa). The work shall be carried out all complete as per specification and the direction of the
engineer-in-charge. The product performance shall carry guarantee for 10 years.
For sealing cracks and faulty construction joints, routed out/making U-shape groove size
25x25mm and then primed the area with integral crystalline slurry @0.05kg/running meter and
while the surface is tacky filled the groove upto surface with crystalline mortar @1.50kg/running
meter. Once crystalline mortar is touch dry then finally applied two coats of integral crystalline
slurry @0.05kg/running meter per coat.
C) Supplying and installing of 1.2mm thick pre-applied HDPE membrane having puncture
resistance of 1000N as per ASTM E 154), tensile strength of 25 Mpa, and hydrostatic head
resistance not less than 70m water head as per ASTM D 5385 & elongation of 500% as per
ASTM D 412, peel adhesion to concrete of 1200 N/m as per ASTM D 903, Lap peel adhesion >
450N/m as per ASTM D1876. The pre-applied, fully bonded HDPE sheet membrane shall be
loosely laid on PCC and gets bonded to the underneath of the poured concrete of base/ raft slab
and confined retaining wall. The fully bonded HDPE sheet membrane shall consist of a high
performance PE film, self adhesive polymer layer and unique particulate layer with pressure
sensitive adhesive, which bonds fully to the poured concrete of base slab/confined retaining wall.
The membrane shall have minimum of 75mm side laps and end laps which shall be sealed with
double sided adhesive tape.,etc complete as per manufactures specification and instructions.
This system must have 15 years performance warranty and should be 100% backed by
manufacturer as per format attached. In addition to this Providing and applying integral crystalline
(dry shake) of hydrophilic in nature for waterproofing treatment to the RCC structures like
basement raft, foundation slab, sewage & water treatment plant slab, warehouses floor, parking
structures and water tank base slab etc. sprinkled @0.60kg per sqm or higher as recommended
by the manufacturer’s specification over the lean concrete of above cited structures. The material
shall meet the requirements as specified in ACI-212-3R-2010 i.e. by reducing permeability of
concrete by more than 85%, compared control concrete as per DIN 1048 and resistant to 16 bar
hydrostatic pressure on negative side. The crystalline dryshake shall be capable of self -healing
of cracks up to a width of 0.50mm. The work shall be carried out all complete as per specification
and the direction of the Engineer-in-charge. The product performance shall carry guarantee for
10 years against any leakage. This system must have 15 years performance warranty should be
100% backed by manufacturer as per format attached. Works will be executed as per approved
methodology and drawing.
D) Supplying and installing of 1.2mm thick pre-applied HDPE membrane having puncture
resistance of >1100N as per ASTM E 154), tensile strength of 28 Mpa, and hydrostatic head
resistance not less than 70m water head as per ASTM D 5385 & elongation of 600% as per
ASTM D 412, peel adhesion to concrete of 2000 N/m as per ASTM D 903, Lap peel adhesion >
750N/m as per ASTM D1876. The pre-applied, fully bonded HDPE sheet membrane shall be
loosely laid on PCC and gets bonded to the underneath of the poured concrete of base/ raft slab
and confined retaining wall. The fully bonded HDPE sheet membrane shall consist of a high
performance PE film, pressure sensitive adhesive protected with removable plastic film, which
bonds fully to the poured concrete of base slab/confined retaining wall. The membrane shall
have minimum of 75mm side laps and end laps which shall be sealed with double sided adhesive
tape.,etc complete as per manufactures specification and instructions. In addition to this 15 years
performance warranty should be 100% backed by manufacturer as per format attached. Works
will be executed as per approved methodology and drawing. In addition to this Providing and
applying integral crystalline (dry shake) of hydrophilic in nature for waterproofing treatment to the
RCC structures like basement raft, foundation slab, sewage & water treatment plant slab,
warehouses floor, parking structures and water tank base slab etc. sprinkled @0.60kg per sqm

Signature of Contractor Page 27 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

or higher as recommended by the manufacturer’s specification over the lean concrete of above
cited structures. The material shall meet the requirements as specified in ACI-212-3R-2010 i.e.
by reducing permeability of concrete by more than 85%, compared control concrete as per DIN
1048 and resistant to 16 bar hydrostatic pressure on negative side. The crystalline dryshake
shall be capable of self-healing of cracks up to a width of 0.50mm. The work shall be carried out
all complete as per specification and the direction of the Engineer-in-charge. The product
performance shall carry guarantee for 10 years against any leakage. The system must have 15
years performance warranty should be 100% backed by manufacturer as per format attached.
Works will be executed as per approved methodology and drawing.
E) Waterproofing of Retaining Walls: Sealing of Tie Rod Holes: - For patching of tie rod holes,
prepared tie rod hole surface and then primed the area with integral crystalline slurry
@0.070kg/sqm and while the surface is tacky repair and then filled the tie rod holes with
crystalline [email protected] per hole. The crystalline mortar should be tightly rodded into tie rod
holes or packed tightly (For 25x25x25 mm tie rod hole, use 0.040kg to fill the hole). Injection
Grouting wherever required: Injection of Grouting the joints through PVC injection nozzles fixed
@ 1 M c/c or less, using cement slurry grout with Non-shrink grout additive added @ 250 gm
per bag of cement to full saturation etc. Treatment of all concrete construction joints: For sealing
cracks and faulty construction joints, routed out/making U-shape groove size 25x25mm and then
primed the area with integral crystalline slurry @0.05 kg/ running metre and while the surface is
tacky filled the groove upto surface with crystalline mortar @1.50kg/ running metre. Once
crystalline mortar is touch dry then finally applied two coats of integral crystalline slurry
@0.05kg/running metre per coat. Supplying and applying High performance hybrid polyurea
elastomeric waterproofing coating cold applied of spray applied, 2 comp slow setting & with
antiroot property liquid membrane with an elongation of 600% and tensile strength of 12.6 N/mm2
as per ASTM D 2370, crack bridging ability of 3 mm as per ASTM C1305, shore A Hardness of
min. 75 as per ASTM D 2240. The system includes final base preparation, epoxy primer
application and applying SmartCare Ultron or approved equivalent in two coats at 1.5 kg per
Sqm etc, complete as per Manufacturer specifications. Providing & Fixing of 10 mm thick dimple
board of compressive strength not less than 250kN/m2, 600 gram/ m2, high density polyethylene
(HDPE) dimpled protection sheet; over the waterproofing membrane on the retaining walls. The
protection and drainage sheet shall consist of dimpled HDPE sheet with fused on hydrophilic
polypropylene geotextile; confirming to EN 12311-2, etc. complete as per manufacturer
specifications. sheet should be fixed with aluminium strip and drill/ fixing screw pentch etc , it
should be 300 mm above ground level, before soil filling.
F) Kota Stone: Providing and laying integral cement based treatment for waterproofing on horizontal
surface at all depth below ground level for under ground structures as directed by Engineer-in-
Charge and consisting of :
(i) Ist layer of 22 mm to 25 mm thick approved and specified rough stone slab over a 25 mm thick
base of cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement : 3 coarse sand) mixed with water proofing compound
conforming to IS:2645 in the recommended proportion over the leveling course (leveling course
to be paid separately). Joints sealed and grouted with cement slurry mixed with water proofing
compound.
(ii) 2nd layer of 25 mm thick cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement: 3 coarse sand) mixed with water
proofing compound in recommended proportions.
(iii) Finishing top with stone aggregate of 10 mm to 12 mm nominal size spreading @ 8 cudm/sqm
thoroughly embedded in the 2nd layer.
Using rough kota stone.
Providing and laying integral cement based treatment for water proofing on the vertical surface
by fixing specified stone slab 22 mm to 25 mm thick with cement slurry mixed with water proofing
compound conforming to IS:2645 in recommended proportion with a gap of 20 mm (minimum)
between stone slabs and the receiving surfaces and filling the gaps with neat cement slurry
mixed with water proofing compound and finishing the exterior of stone slab with cement mortar
1:3 (1 cement : 3 coarse sand) 20 mm thick with neat cement punning mixed with water proofing

Signature of Contractor Page 28 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

compound in recommended proportion complete at all levels and as directed by Engineer-in-

charge : Using rough kota stone.
Providing and laying integral cement based water proofing treatment including preparation of
surface as required for treatment of roofs, balconies, terraces etc consisting of following
operations:
(a) Applying a slurry coat of neat cement using 2.75 kg/sqm of cement admixed with water
proofing compound conforming to IS. 2645 and approved by Engineer in-charge over the RCC
slab including adjoining walls upto 300 mm height including cleaning the surface before
treatment.
(b) Laying brick bats with mortar using broken bricks/brick bats 25 mm to 115 mm size with 50%
of cement mortar 1:5 (1 cement : 5 coarse sand) admixed with water proofing compound
conforming to IS : 2645 and approved by Engineer-in charge over 20 mm thick layer of cement
mortar of mix 1:5 (1 cement :5 coarse sand ) admixed with water proofing compound conforming
to IS : 2645 and approved by Engineer-in-charge to required slope and treating similarly the
adjoining walls upto 300 mm height including rounding of junctions of walls and slabs.
(c) After two days of proper curing applying a second coat of cement slurry using 2.75 kg/ sqm
of cement admixed with water proofing compound conforming to IS : 2645 and approved by
Engineerin- charge.
(d) Finishing the surface with 20 mm thick jointless cement mortar of mix 1:4 (1 cement :4 coarse
sand) admixed with water proofing compound conforming to IS : 2645 and approved by
Engineerin- charge including laying glass fibre cloth of approved quality in top layer of plaster
and finally finishing the surface with trowel with neat cement slurry and making pattern of
300x300 mm square 3 mm deep.
(e) The whole terrace so finished shall be flooded with water for a minimum period of two weeks
for curing and for final test.“All above operations to be done in order and as directed and specified
by the Engineer-in-Charge : With average thickness of 120 mm and minimum thickness at khurra
as 65 mm.
G) Waterproofing of Podium/ Basement slab top/ landscape area: Surface Preparation: Minor
cleaning work, removal of loose concrete and filling cracks with polymer modified mortar using
SBR polymer, Making of angle fillets all around the periphery of the wall with polymer modified
mortar using SBR polymer. Supplying & grouting the gaps around the pipe / inserts with GP2, a
non shrink cementitious waterproof grout. The “Nahani” trap, etc is to be fitted securely in the
same manner & the gaps around it to be grouted with non shrink Grout. This shall conform the
following standards: ASTM C 109 - 1999 18, ASTM C 1107, Grade C complete as per
instructiions. Providing 3 coats of high solid content 92% polyurethane coating and 40-50 gms
polyester fleece sandwiched between 1st and 2nd coats completely up to the top edge of the
pipe etc. complete as per manufacturer's instructions.
Supplying and applying High performance hybrid polyurea elastomeric waterproofing coating
cold applied of spray applied, 2 comp , antiroot property based liquid membrane with an
elongation of 600% and tensile strength of 12.6 N/mm2 as per ASTM D 2370, crack bridging
ability of 3mm as per ASTM C1305, shore A Hardness of min. 75 as per ASTM D 2240. The
system includes final base preparation, epoxy primer application and applying hybrid Polyurea
or approved equivalent in two coats at 1.2 kg per Sqm etc, complete as per Manufacturer
specifications. Loosely lay 150 GSM Geotextile (non-woven polyester) with a min of 100mm wide
overlap after which drain boards and soiling can be allowed. Laying protective screed of M20
grade 75 mm avg thickness, sandwiching 24 guage wire mesh in concrete with slope 1:100
containing 12 mm, admixed with waterproofing admixture confirming IS:2645, also it should be
broom finish, well compacted, curing for 7 days etc. complete. The screed shall be laid in panels
with 10mm wide construction joint and filling the panel joints with polysulphide sealant / PU
Sealant.
H) Plantation Areas: Only Drainage Board to be added to approved waterproofing systems:
Providing & laying high density polyethylene (HDPE) dimpled protection and drainage sheet;
over the waterproofing membrane on the podium and landscape area. The protection and
drainage sheet shall consist of a dimpled HDPE sheet with a fused on hydrophilic polypropylene

Signature of Contractor Page 29 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

geotextile. flow rate 200 L/Min/M, compressive strength 550 kn/m2, drain boad height should ne
min 13mm.
I) Terraces: (a) Applying a slurry coat of water proofing compound conforming to IS. 2645 and
approved by Engineer-in-charge over the RCC slab including adjoining walls upto 300 mm height
including cleaning the surface before treatment. Supplying and applying flexible, breathable, two
components, polymer modified, cementitious coating system applied in 1 coat using
(hydrophobic, elastomeric, elongation>150% and tensile strength > 1.0 MPa with minimum crack
bridging of 1 mm), to be applied by brush in two coats using 1.3 -1.5 Kg/ Sqm. Rates should
including cleaning of mother concrete surface to remove dust, loosely adhering particles, oil,
grease, etc. completely using suitable means. Making of Corner fillets 50 mm x 50 mm and
repairing all Cracks & Construction Joints by Cutting and filling with SBR Polymer modified
mortar. Waterproofing coating to be terminated on parapet wall in a V groove of size 25 mm x
25 mm atleast 300 mm above FFL which should be sealed with Polymer Mortar. Providing and
laying integral cement based water proofing treatment including preparation of surface as
required for treatment of roofs, balconies, terraces etc consisting of following operations: (b)
Laying brick bats with mortar using broken bricks/brick bats 25 mm to 115 mm size with 50% of
cement mortar 1:5 (1 cement : 5 coarse sand) admixed with water proofing compound
conforming to IS : 2645 and approved by Engineer-in-charge over 20 mm thick layer of cement
mortar of mix 1:5 (1 cement :5 coarse sand ) admixed with water proofing compound conforming
to IS : 2645 and approved by Engineer-in-charge to required slope and treating similarly the
adjoining walls upto 300 mm height including rounding of junctions of walls and slabs. (c) After
two days of proper curing applying a second coat of cement slurry using 2.75 kg/ sqm of cement
admixed with water proofing compound conforming to IS : 2645 and approved by Engineerin-
charge. (d) Finishing the surface with 20 mm thick jointless cement mortar of mix 1:4 (1 cement
:4 coarse sand) admixed with water proofing compound conforming to IS : 2645 and approved
by Engineerin- charge including laying glass fibre cloth of approved quality in top layer of plaster
and finally finishing the surface with trowel with neat cement slurry and making pattern of
300x300 mm square 3 mm deep. (e) The whole terrace so finished shall be flooded with water
for a minimum period of two weeks for curing and for final test.“All above operations to be done
in order and as directed and specified by the Engineer-in-Charge : avg thickness will be 120 mm.
J) Terrace Waterproofing cum insulation system: Providing and applying roof insulation with 40 mm
spray applied PUFF foam, which is a two component system. 2 parts are Polyol and Isocyanate
are used in combination to produce rigid low density polyurethane spray foam. It gives good
thermal insulationwith 40 mm thick impervious sprayed, closed cell free Rigid Polyurethane foam
- over deck insulation conforming to IS - 12432 Pt. III (density of foam being 40-45 kg/ cum), over
a coat of polyurethane primer applied @ 6-8 sqm per litre, The surface on which spray is applied
to be cleaned properly, the moisture content in the surface shall be less than 5% and is to be
dried before the application of spray, Polyurethane chemical (A side and B side) shall be sprayed
in layers to produce overall 40 mm average thick closed cell polyurethane foam over the spraying
surface with the help of appropriate foaming Reactor Machine. Precautions shall be taken to
cover the nearby areas to avoid Spray of PU Foam on the other areas. The termination of spray
at the corners shall be done as per IS:12432 (part 3):2000. 2 Comp. Spray Applied Solvent free
Polyurethane Waterproofing : The waterproofing basecoat shall be solvent free, fast setting,
seamless spray applied aliphatic 100% pure Polyurethane membrane installed over the roof on
primed substrate as per manufactues specification using only Pneumatic machine in aa fixed
ratio of 2 parts proportional, 1:0.7 by volume unless approved by Engineer. The 2 comp spray
applied Polyurthane membrane for base shall be of total avg DFT 200 microns, (excluding primer
and top coat), Poyurethane membrane shall poses following properties: Solid content- more
than 95% as per ASTM D2697, Density >1.0 gram/CM3 as per ASTM D1475, Adhesion Strength
min 3.0 N/MM2 as per ASTM D4541, Tensile Strength > 8mpa and < 12 mpa as per ASTM G14,
Elangation at break 300% to 450% as per ASTM D412, Puncture Resistance >250 N as per
ASTM E154, Crack Bridging - No crack till 5 mm as per ASTM C836, Shore Hardness A >65 as
per ASTM D2240, Taber abrasion resistance <70 mg ASTM D4060. WaterVapor Transmission
0.11 G/M2 per day as per ASTM E96, Root resistance - No penetration as per DIN 4062, Impact

Signature of Contractor Page 30 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

Strength >180 N/ MM2 as per ASTM G14. Laying protective screed of M20 grade 75 mm avg
thickness, sandwiching 24 guage wire mesh in concrete with slope 1:100 containing 12 mm,
admixed with waterproofing admixture confirming IS:2645, also it should be broom finish, well
compacted, curing for 7 days etc. complete. The screed shall be laid in panels with 10mm wide
construction joint and filling the panel joints with polysulphide sealant / PU Sealant. Also, the
joints of outlet pipes and concrete/masonry are to be sealed with PMC mortar. In case of PVC
pipes, the joints should be sealed with epoxy putty. Making of angle fillets all around the periphery
of the wall with polymer modified mortar using SBR polymer. Supplying & grouting the gaps
around the pipe / inserts with General Purpose Grout ( GP2), a non shrink cementitious
waterproof grout. The “drain pipes, etc is to be fitted securely in the same manner & the gaps
around it to be grouted with non shrink Grout. This shall conform the following standards: ASTM
C 109 - 1999 18, ASTM C 1107, Grade C complete as per instructiions. Providing 3 coats of 92%
solid content PU coating and 40-50 gms polyester fleece sandwiched between 1st and 2nd
coats completely up to the top edge of the pipe etc. complete as per manufacturer's instructions.
K) Providing and applying of swellable type water stop tape, 19mm x 25mm thick in linear meter
(expansive nature) for construction joints treatment of RCC structure such as raft slab, retaining
walls, water storage tank and at the junctions of raft slab with the retaining walls etc.. After
cleaning the surface, one coat of required primer for swellable water stop tape shall be applied
throughout the length of the joint @3.78 litre per 240 running meter. Over the primed surface
swellable type water stop tape shall be placed. The work shall be carried out all complete as
per specification and the direction of the engineer-in-charge. The product performance shall
carry guarantee for 10 years against any leakage.
L) Providing and laying water proofing treatment in sunken portion of WCs, bathroom etc., by
applying cement slurry mixed with water proofing cement compound consisting of applying : i)
First layer of slurry of cement @ 0.488 kg/sqm mixed with water proofing cement compound @
0.253 kg/ sqm. This layer will be allowed to air cure for 4 hours. ii) Second layer of slurry of
cement @ 0.242 kg/sqm mixed with water proofing cement compound @ 0.126 kg/sqm. This
layer will be allowed to air cure for 4 hours followed with water curing (The item includes
preparation of surface, treatment and sealing of all joints, corners, junctions of pipes and
masonry with polymer mixed slurry.)
M) Supplying and Stacking Filling sunken floor with over burnt jhama brick aggregate 120mm to
40mm including compacting of materials complete as specified and directed for all levels.
N) Providing and laying integral cement based water proofing treatment including prepatation of
surface as required for treatment of roofs, balconies, terraces etc, consisting of following
operations. (a) Applying and grouting a slurry coat of neat cement using 2.75 kg/sqm of cement
admixed with proprietary water - proofing compound cleaning the surface before treatment, (b)
Laying cement concrete using broken bricks / brick bats 25 mm to 100 mm size with 50 % of
cement mortar 1:5 (1 cement: 5 coarse sand ) admixed with proprietary water proofing
compound conforming to IS : 2645 over 20 mm thick layer of cement mortar of mix 1:5 (1
cement: 5 coarse sand ) admixed with proprietary water Proofing compound conforming to IS
2545 to reuired slope and treating similary the adjoining walls upto 300 mm height including
rounding of junctions, or walls ad slabs. (c) After two days of proper curing applying a secoung
coat of cement slurry admixed with proprietary water proofing compound conforming to IS :
2645. (d) Finishing the surface with 20 mm thick jointless cement mortar of mix 1:4 (1 cement:
4 coarse sand ) admixed with proprietary water proofing compound conforming to IS : 2645 and
finally finishing i 22.7.1 With average thickness of 120 mm and minimum thickness at khurras
point to be 65 .

1.44.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

Manufacturer’s qualification

A) Not less than five years’ experience in manufacturing of membrane roofing.

Signature of Contractor Page 31 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

I) Obtain primary materials from single manufacturer. Manufacturer’s name shall be

approved by Engineer- In- Charge.

II) Provide secondary materials as required by manufacturer of primary materials.

1.44.4 APPLICATORS QUALIFICATION

A) Approved by manufacturer prior to execution of this work order, with experience on at least
five projects.

B) Foreman of field crew: minimum five years’ experience with system of waterproofing being
installed.

1.44.5 CERTIFICATIONS

Manufacturer’s certifications on manufacturer’s letterhead:

I) Certify system design; penetration, transition, and perimeter details; and system.
II) Certify products proposed for use comply with standards.

III) Certify materials ordered and supplied are compatible with each other suited for local and
purpose intended and shipped in sufficient quantity to ensure proper timely installation.

IV) Certify materials have express warranty of merchantability and fitness for particular purposes
of this project.

V) Certify manufacturer has reviewed project and will issue warranty upon successful completion
of installation.

VI) Certify materials shipped to site meet membrane manufacturer’s published performance
standards and requirements of this specification.

VII) Membrane manufacturer’s approval of insulation type and method of installation.

VIII) Manufacturer’s approval of installer.

1.44.6 SUBMITTALS

[Link] PRODUCT DATA

Contractor to submit along with his proposal product data for material he proposes to use.
[Link] INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS.

A) Certifications specified in quality assurances

B) Manufacturer’s instructions

1.44.7 WATERPROOFING COMPOUNDS

Waterproofing compounds shall be cementious (cement based) non-shrinking, self-curing mixtures

with following qualities: -

Signature of Contractor Page 32 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

A) Free from sodium and chlorides

B) Free from material detrimental to concrete and reinforcement.

C) Able to create a membrane in one or multiple coats as per manufacturer’s instruction.

D) Membrane capable to prevent infiltration when applied to interior faces and ponded.

E) Permeability, shear bond strength, compressive strength, volume changes meets minimum
requirements of codes.

1.44.8 ACCESSORIES

All other accessories materials such as primers, bonding agents, polymers etc. Shall be as
recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.

1.44.9 GUARANTEE

GUARANTEE/TRANSFER OF GUARANTEE
For works like water-proofing, acid and alkali resisting materials, Pre or Post construction soil
treatment against termite or any other specialized works etc. the CONTRACTOR shall invariably
engage SUB-CONTRACTORS who are specialists in the field and firms of repute and such a SUB-
CONTRACTOR shall furnish guarantees for their workmanship to the OWNER, through the
CONTRACTOR.

Water proofing and anti-termite works shall be guaranteed for 10 years from date of virtual
completion.10% of the value of the work pertaining to water proofing and anti-termite treatment works
shall be retained as Security against water proofing /anti-termite works.

50% of retention money against water proofing/anti-termite treatment works shall be released to the
contractor on virtual completion of works on submission of equivalent amount of bank guarantee valid
up to 10 years from Virtual completion. Balance 50% of this retention money shall be released on
satisfactory completion of DLP (Defect Liability Period) subject to submission of bank guarantee for
the balance amount for balance period of 10 years from date of virtual completion.

1.44.10 MATERIALS

[Link] Cement

Cement shall be Ordinary Portland Cement conforming to IS and shall be of grade 43 or 53.

[Link] Sand
As per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips and relevant IS Codes.

[Link] WATER

As per CPWD Specifications with upto date correction slips and relevant IS Codes.

1.45 WATERPROOFING FOR WATER RETAINING STRUCTURES SUCH AS WATER TANKS/STP.

Signature of Contractor Page 33 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

Cleaning the internal surface areas thoroughly so that they are free of all contaminants like dirt and
laitance & to remove all the loose materials by various mechanical means. Removal of all surface
imperfections, protrusions, loose concrete & filling of cracks using SBR latex modified Mortar in the
ratio Cement: Sand (1:4) and 5% by weight of cement.
Providing & grouting at construction joints cementitious grout into each nozzles (1 mtr c/c) at regular
intervals as per the requirements.
Applying 3 coats of 2 components, prepacked, polymer modified cementitious coating@ 3kg/[Link]
all over the slab including the angular fillets and extendable over the vertical walls. Finally sprinkling
sand over the third coat for better adhesion with plaster. The interval between each coat of coating
application is 6-8 hrs.
Providing & laying a protection layer of 25 mm thick cement mortar admixed with integral
waterproofing compound.
Technical Features of acrylic cementitious coating-
Product Test Standard Results
Tensile Strength ASTM D 412 5 N/[Link]
Elongation at Break ASTM D 412 120 % minimum
Crack Bridging ASTM D 836 No cracking up to 2 mm
Adhesion Strength ASTM D 4541 0.8 N/[Link] minimum

Food grade epoxy coating for potable water tanks

Providing & applying two coats antibacterial antifungal food grade coating with an interval of 6 -8 hrs
between each coat over the cured plastered surface as per manufacturer’s instruction.
STP Tanks-Coal tar epoxy coating
Providing & laying Coal Tar Epoxy in two coats at a consumption of 3-4 [Link]/Kg complete as per
manufacturer's instruction
Method Statement
 Ensure a properly clean, sound & leveled substrate, as they should be free from oil, grease,
dust & debris. Ensure that the moisture content is less than 10%.
 Make surface smooth, even & free from local depressions with sand –cement mortar modified
with SBR latex and cure it for minimum 3 days.
 The slurry to be grouted is prepared as per the mixing instructions with non-shrink compound
for cementitious grout. Carry out injection grouting either by gravity or with grouting pump
using the mixed material. Allow it to cure for at least 24 hrs.
 Providing and laying gola of 75X75mm thickness all along the angular joints of wall and slab
with cement mortar of mix 1:3 admixed with waterproofing compound
 Clean the surface again thoroughly to make free from dirt, dust laitance etc. and saturate the
cleaned concrete surface with ample amount of water.
 Apply 1st coat of Acrylic coating on all the surfaces as per instructions & cure it for 6-8 Hrs.
 Apply the second coat of Acrylic cementitious coating over the properly cured first coat and
let the complete treatment air cure for 7 days and so on for the third coat.
 Provide a protection layer over the waterproofing treatment with a 25 mm sand cement plaster
admixed with integral waterproofing compound as per instructions & cure it for 7 days.
 Mix the components of food grade coating as per the instructions given & apply two coats on
all the plastered surfaces by brush with an interval of 6-8 hrs between each coats.

Signature of Contractor Page 34 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

1.46 CPWD specifications and guidelines to be followed for any item not mentioned in the given
document but specified in the drawings and schedules.

VOL. 5(b) TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

ARCHITECTURE & CIVIL FINISHING

Signature of Contractor Page 35 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

2.0 POLYMER MODIFIED COARSE PUTTY

2.0.1 GENERAL:

Polymer modified coarse putty is used as a finishing coat to cover the unevenness and pinholes
created by plastering or on concrete and to prepare the wall / surface for painting.

2.0.2 PREPARATION OF SURFACE:

The surface should be free from loose particle, grease or any other foreign particle. The surface shall
be scrubbed clean with wire brushes. The plastered surface/ RCC Surface shall be pock marked with
painted tool, at spacing of not more than 4 cm centers and depth of pocks to be approx. 3 mm deep.

2.0.3 APPLICATION:

The material will be mixed with water to a workable consistency. Putty shall be applied directly on the
wall plasters/RCC Surface in suitable sizes panels and finished to smooth surfaces by steel trowels.
The plaster shall be applied in such a manner that it fully fills the gaps the thickness over the plastered
surface is as specified in the description of the indicative item/drawing. The finished surfaces shall
be smooth and true to plane, slopes or curves as required.

2.1 PAINTING

2.1.1 Scope of work:

The work covered under these specifications consists of furnishing the various types of paints and
also the workmanship for these items, in strict compliance with the specifications.

2.1.2 Materials:

Paints, oils varnishes etc. of approved brand and manufacture shall be used. Ready mixed paints as
recovered from the manufacturer without any admixture shall be used. If for any reason, thinning is
necessary in case of ready mixed paint, the brand of thinner recommended by the manufacturer or
as instructed by the Engineer-In-Charge shall be used. Approved paints, oils or varnishes shall be
brought to the site of work by the contractor in their original containers in sealed condition.

The contractor shall associate the chemist of paint manufacturers before commencement of work,
during and after the completion of work who shall certify the suitability of the surface to receive
painting and the paint before use etc.

Signature of Contractor Page 36 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

2.1.3 Commencing Work:

[Link] Scaffolding:

Wherever scaffolding is necessary, it shall be erected on double supports ties together by horizontal
pieces, over which scaffolding planks shall be fixed. No bellies, bamboos or planks shall rest on or
touch the surface which is being painted. Were ladders are used; pieces of old gunny bags shall be
ties on their tops to avoid damage or scratches to walls.
For painting of the ceiling, proper stage scaffolding shall be erected.

2.1.4 Preparation of Surface:

The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned. All dirt, rust, scales, smoke and grease shall be thoroughly
removed before painting is started. Minor patches if any in plastered / form finished surfaces shall be
repaired and finished in line and level in C.M/ 1:1 and cracks and crevices shall be filled with approved
filler, to the full satisfaction of the Engineer- In - Charge. The prepared surface shall have received
the approval of the Engineer-In-Charge after inspection, before painting is commenced.

2.1.5 Application:

Before pouring into smaller containers for use, the paint shall be stirred thoroughly in its containers.
When applying also, the paint shall be continuously stirred in the smaller containers so that
consistency is kept uniform.

The external surfaces of the buildings under reference including the R.C.C. Jali, fins and the panels
above and the panels above and below the window etc. shall be finished with colours of approved
shade. The contractor will make suitable samples at site for approval before taking up the work in
hand and they will be allowed to proceed with the work only after getting approval for the same.

The painting shall be laid on evenly and smoothly by means of crossing and laying off, the later in the
direction of the grain in case of wood. The crossing and laying off consists of covering the area with
paint, brushing the surface hard for the first time and then brushing alternately in opposite directions
two or three time and then finally brushing lightly in direction at right angles to the same. In this
process, no brush marks shall be left after the laying off is finished. The full process of crossing and
laying will constitute one coat.

Where so stipulated, the painting shall be done with spraying. Spray machine used may be (a) a high
pressure or (b) a low pressure (large air gap), depending on the nature and location of work to be
carried out. Skilled and experienced workmen shall be employed for this class of work. Paints used
shall be brought to the requisite consistency by adding a suitable thinner. Spraying should be done
only when dry condition prevails.

Each coat shall be allowed to dry cut thoroughly and rubbed smooth before the next coat is applied.
This should be facilitated by thorough ventilation.

Each coat except the last coat shall be tightly rubbed down with sand paper or fine pumice stone and
cleaned of dust before the next coat is laid.

No left over paint shall be put back into the stock tins. When not in use, containers shall be kept
properly closed.

The final painted surface shall present a uniform appearance and no streaks, blisters, hair marks
from the brush or clogging of paint puddles in the corners of panels, angles of moldings etc. shall be
left on the work. In case of cement based paints / primers, the absorbent surfaces shall be evenly

Signature of Contractor Page 37 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

damped so as to give even suction. In any weather, freshly painted surfaces shall be kept damp for
at least two days.

In painting doors and windows, the putty around the glass panes must also be painted, but care must
be taken to see that no paint stains etc. are left on the glass. Tops of shutters and surfaces in similar
hidden locations shall not be left out while painting. Prospect covers of electrical switch boxes have
to be painted from inside by removing them. Care shall be taken while removing them in position after
painting with respective approved paints. In painting steel work, special care shall be taken while
painting over bolts, nuts, rivets, overlaps etc.

Any damage caused during painting work to the existing works / surfaces shall be made good by the
contractor.

Painting, except the priming coat, shall generally be taken in hand after all other builders work,
practically finished.

2.1.6 Precautions:

All furniture, lightings, fixture, sanitary, fittings, glazing, floors etc. shall be protected by covering and
stains, smears, splashing, if any shall be removed and any damage done shall be made good by the
contractor.

2.2 PAINTING, PRIMING COAT ON WOOD, IRON OR PLASTERED SURFACES

The primer for wood work, iron work or plastered surface shall be as specified in the description of
the Indicative item/specification/drawing.

Primer for wood work / Iron & Steel / Plastered / Aluminium surfaces shall be as specified below:-

[Link]. Surfaces Primer to be used

a) Wood work (hard and soft wood) conforming to IS 3536 – 1966
b) Resinous wood and ply wood Aluminium Primer
c) Iron & Steel, aluminium and galvanized Zinc chromate primer conforming
steel Work : to IS 104-1962
d) Plastered surfaces, cement brick work, Cement primer
Asbestos surfaces for oil bound

The primer shall be ready mixed primer of approved band and manufacture.

2.2.1 Preparation of Surface

[Link] Wood work:

The wood work to be painted shall be dry and free from moisture.

The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned. All unevenness shall be rubbed down smooth with sand
paper and shall be well dusted. Knots, if any, shall be covered with preparation of red lead made by
grinding red lead in water and mixing with strong glue sized and used hot. Appropriate filler material
with same shade as paint shall be used where so desired by the Engineer-In-Charge.

The surface treated for knotting shall be dry before painting is applied. After the priming coat is
applied, the holes and indentation on the surface shall be stopped with glaziers putty or wood putty
(for specifications for glaziers putty and wood putty – refer as mentioned herein before). Stopping

Signature of Contractor Page 38 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

shall not be done before the priming coat is applied as the wood will absorb the oil in the stopping
and the latter is therefore liable to crack.

[Link] Iron and Steel Work:

All rust and scales shall be removed by scrapping or by brushing with steel wire brushes. Hard skin
of oxide formed on the surface of wrought iron during rolling which becomes loose by rusting, shall
be removed.

All dust and dirt shall be thoroughly wiped away from the surface.

If the surface is wet, it shall be dried before priming coat is undertaken.

[Link] Plastered Surface:

The surface shall ordinarily not be painted until it has dried completely. Trial patches of primer shall
be laid at intervals and where drying is satisfactory, painting shall be taken in hand. Before primer is
applied, holes and undulations, shall be filled up with plaster of Paris / putty and rubbed smooth.

a) Application:

The primer shall be applied with brushes, worked well into the surface and spread even and smooth.
The painting shall be done by crossing and laying off as described herein before.

b) Other details:

The specifications for Painting (General) shall hold good so far it is applicable.

2.3 FRENCH SPIRIT POLISHING:

2.3.1 Polish:

Pure shellac varying from pale orange to lemon yellow colour, free from resin or dirt shall be dissolved
in methylated spirit at the rate of 140 gm. of shellac to 1 liter of spirit. Suitable pigment shall be added
to get the required shade.

2.3.2 Preparation of surface:

The surface shall be cleaned. All unevenness shall be rubbed down smooth with sand paper and well
dusted off. Knots if visible shall be covered with a preparation to red lead and glue size laid on while
hot. Holes and indentations on the surface shall be stopped with glaziers putty. The surface shall
then be given a coat of wood filler made by mixing whiting (ground chalk) in methylated spirit, the
surface shall again be rubbed down perfectly smooth with glass paper and wiped clean.

2.3.3 Application:

The number of coats of polish to be applied shall be as described in the Indicative

item/specification/drawing. A pad of wooden cloth covered by fine cloth shall be used to apply the
polish and shall be moistened with the polish and rubbed hard on the wood, in a series of overlapping
circles applying the mixture sparingly but uniformly over the entire area to give an even level surface.
A trace of linseed oil on the face of the pad facilitates this operation. The surface shall be allowed to

Signature of Contractor Page 39 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

dry and the remaining coats applied in the same way. To finish off, the pad shall be covered with a
fresh piece of clean fine cotton cloth, slightly damped with methylated spirit and rubbed lightly and
quickly with circular motions. The finished surface shall have a uniform texture and high gloss.
2.4 WHITE WASHING WITH LIME
2.4.1 Preparation of surface:
Before work which is to white washed, the surface shall be thoroughly brushed free from mortar
dropping and foreign matter.

2.4.2 Preparation of lime wash:

The wash shall be prepared from fresh lime stone white lime. The lime shall be thoroughly slaked on
the spot, mixed and stirred with sufficient water to make a thin cream. This shall be allowed to stand
for a period of 24 hours and then shall be screened through a clean coarse cloth. 40 gm. of gum
dissolved in hot water or Binder which shall be added to each 10 cubic decimeter of the cream. The
approximate quantity of water to be added in making the cream will be 5 liters of water to one kg. of
lime. Indigo (Robin Blue) up to 3 gm per kg of lime dissolved in water, shall then be added and wash
stirred well. Water shall then be added at the rate of about 5 liters per kg. of lime to produce a milky
solution. The lime shall be tested in a chemical laboratory and test certificate submitted, to conform
the quality of lime with regard to its physical and chemical properties.

2.4.3 Application of White washing:

The white wash shall be applied with brushes or by spray in the specified number of coats. The
operation for each coat in the case of brush application shall consist of a stroke of the brush given
from the top downwards, another from the bottom upwards over the first strike, and similarly one
stroke horizontally from the right and another from the left before it dries.

Each coat shall be allowed to dry before the next one is applied. No portion of the surface shall be
left out initially to be patched up later on.

The finished dry surface shall not show any sign of cracking and peeling nor shall it come off readily
on the hand when rubbed.

2.5 DISTEMPERING

2.5.1 Acrylic Distemper

As per (IS 428-1969) of approved brand and manufacture, colour and required shade shall be used.
The primer where used as on new work shall be cement primer or distemper primer as specified in
the Indicative item/specification/drawing. These shall be of the same manufacture as distemper. The
distemper shall be diluted with water or any other prescribed thinner in a manner recommended by
manufacture. Only quality of distemper required for days work shall be prepared.

2.5.2 Preparation of surfaces

The surface shall be prepared as described herein before for painting work in so far as it is applicable
and approved putty / filler shall be applied to the entire area to get uniform and smooth surface before
application of primer.

2.5.3 Application

Signature of Contractor Page 40 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

The cement primer or distemper primer shall be applied by brushing and not by spraying. Hurried
priming work shall be avoided, particularly on absorbent surfaces. The surfaces shall be finished as
uniformly as possible leaving no brush marks, priming coat shall be allowed to dry for at least 48
hours. Before applying distemper, the surface shall be lightly sand prepared to make it smooth for
receiving, the oil bound distemper, taking care not to rub out the priming coat. A time interval of at
least 24 hours shall be allowed between consecutive coats to permit the proper drying of the
preceding coat. Two or more coats of distemper as are found necessary shall be applied over the
priming coat to obtain an even shade.

All paints have to be low VOC paints and certificates of the same should be provided by the
contractor.

2.6 TEXTURE PAINT

(Work to be carried out as per Manufacturer Specification)
2.6.1 Material

The paint shall be (Quartz reinforced Textured acrylic paint/ premium acrylic smooth waterproof
exterior paint over texture finish) of approved brand and manufacture.
This paint shall be brought to the site of work by the contractor in its original containers in sealed
condition. The material shall be brought in at a time in adequate quantities to suffice for the whole
work or at least a fortnight’s work. The materials shall be kept in the joint custody of the contractor
and the Engineer-In-Charge. The empty containers shall not be removed from the site of work till the
relevant Indicative item/specification of work/drawing has been completed and permission obtained
from the Engineer-In-Charge.
2.6.2 Preparation of Surface
For new work, the surface shall be thoroughly cleaned off all mortar dropping, dirt dust, algae, fungus
or moth, grease and other foreign matter of brushing and washing, pitting in plaster shall make good,
surface imperfections such as cracks, holes etc. should be repaired using white cement. The
prepared surface shall have received the approval of the Engineer-In-Charge after inspection before
painting is commenced.
2.6.3 Application
Base coat of water proofing cement paint. All specifications in respect of base coat of water proofing
cement paint shall be as describe.
Before pouring into smaller containers for use, the paint shall be stirred thoroughly in its
container, when applying also the paint shall be continuously stirred in the smaller containers so that
its consistency is kept uniform. Dilution ratio of paint with potable water can be altered taking into
consideration the nature of surface climate and as per recommended dilution given by manufacturer.
In all cases, the manufacturer’s instructions & directions of the Engineer-In-Charge shall be followed
meticulously.
The lids of paint drums shall be kept tightly closed when not in use as by exposure to atmosphere
the paint may thicken and also be kept safe from dust. Paint shall be applied with a brush on the
cleaned and smooth surface. Horizontal strokes shall be given, First and vertical strokes shall be
applied immediately afterwards. This entire operation will constitute one coat. The surface shall be
finished as uniformly as possible leaving no brush marks. The specifications in respect of scaffolding
and protective measures shall be as described.
External Texture finish of approved makes as per approved design and pattern. Texture finish shall
be applied over the plastered surface with required thickness shall 2 to 2.5 mm thickness to form the

Signature of Contractor Page 41 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

necessary approved design by using trowel / putty blade and it should be allowed for drying minimum
12 hrs., before the application of top painting, 2 coats or more of external weather proof water based
emulsion shall be applied over this and a coat of primer may be applied based on the approved
texture pattern. Including surface preparation like through cleaning, pre wetting & removal of loose
mortars, etc.

2.7 EXPANSION JOINT

2.7.1 Materials

2.7.1 .1 Premoulded Joint Filler in Expansion Joint

It shall conform to IS 1838 (Pt. I). the thickness shall be 25 mm with tolerance 1.5 mm. and shall be
of the maximum available standard length not less than one lane width. The filler board shall be
positioned vertically with the prefabricated joint assemblies along the line of the joint within tolerance
of + 10 mm from the intended line of the joint. The depth of board shall be 25 mm less than thickness
of slab within a tolerance of ± 3mm so that the top of the board shall be below the surface or will not
impede the passage of the finishing straight edge or oscillating beam of the paving machine.

[Link] Sealing Compound

The joint sealing compound shall be fuel and heat resistant type complying to grade B of IS 1834. It
shall be capable of adhering to the concrete without cracking, spalling and disintegration.
[Link] Construction Procedure

Expansion joints shall be provided as shown in the drawing and as per directions of Engineer-In-
Charge. All joints shall be constructed true to line with their faces perpendicular to the surface. The
joint shall be 20 mm wide. The depth of the non-extruding filler pad shall be 25 mm less than the
depth of the concrete slab.

Before the provision of expansion joint, the face of the already laid concrete slab shall be painted with
primer at the rate of 2.6 liters per 10 square meters. The expansion pad shall be properly cut to shape
and shall then be placed in position abutting the painted face of the already laid concretes lab. The
adjacent slab shall then be concreted. The face of the pad against which the new concrete slab is to
be laid shall also be painted with primer before laying the concrete, while concreting a neat groove
of size 20 mm x 25 mm as per drawing shall be formed on top of the pad taking care that the edges
are absolutely straight and that the groove so made does not get filled with any material like concrete,
mortar and other rubbish. Before the curing process is started, the top of expansion joint shall be
filled with bitumen sand mixture in order to ensure that no foreign material used in curing enters into
the joint. This filling shall be removed before filling the joints with sealing compound.

The treatment of expansion joint system related with floor location as per drawings and direction of
Engineer-In-Charge. The joints system will be of extruded aluminum base members, self-aligning /
self-centering arrangement and support plates etc. as per ASTM B221-02. The system shall be such
that it provides floor to floor /floor to wall expansion control system for various vertical locations in
load application areas that accommodates multi directional seismic movement without stress to its
components. System shall consist of metal profiles with a universal aluminum base member designed
to accommodate various project conditions and finish floor treatments. The cover plate shall be
designed of width and thickness required to satisfy projects movement and loading requirements and
secured to base members by utilizing manufacturer’s pre-engineered self-centering arrangement that
freely rotates / moves in all directions. The Self - centering arrangement shall exhibit circular sphere
ends that lock and slide inside the corresponding aluminum extrusion cavity to allow freedom of

Signature of Contractor Page 42 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

movement and flexure in all directions including vertical displacement. Provision of Moisture Barrier
Membrane in the Joint System to have watertight joint is mandatory requirement all as per the
manufactures design and as approved by Engineer -in- Charge. (Material shall conform to ASTM
6063).

2.7.2 Floor / Roof Joint of 100 mm gap

[Link] Application Procedure

Provide continuous frame on each side of the joint, designed to support gasket and center plate
where required. After installing the frames at both sides, place the center plate in between the two
frames and finally flush the gasket on the top of the frames.

Fixing of the joint after proper assembly of the components should be through the proper stainless
steel counter skunked screws, which should be drilled to the base concrete slab beams with a
bonding agent.

Technical Data

Aluminum

• Extrusion – CS uses multiple alloys & tempers which are established to be the most appropriate
for the given use of individual parts. Will be one of the following: (6063-T5, T6, T52) (6061-T5, T6,
T51) (6105-T5, T6) (6005-T5) (6005A-T5, T61), ASTM B221

• Sheet – 6061-T6, 3003-H14, 5005-H34, ASTM B209

Turnbar • Extruded Aluminum Turn Bar

Standard Loading
• 500 lbs.

Signature of Contractor Page 43 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

2.8 STAINLESS STEEL KITCHEN SINK

Stainless steel kitchen sink shall be of sizes as specified and shall be conforming to IS 13983. The
kitchen sink shall be of one piece construction with or without rim but without overflow.

They shall be Stainless steel of best quality and shall be supported on necessary brackets. Each sink
shall be provided with waste coupling, waste pipe, wall flanges, connection pipe, angle valve, long
nose bibcock etc. including all the fixing materials.

Signature of Contractor Page 44 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

2.9 STAINLESS STEEL RAILINGS AND STAINLESS STEEL SHUTTER WITH STAINLESS STEEL
JALI FABRICATION

a) The scope of the work includes preparation of the shop drawings (based on the architectural
drawings), fabrication, supply, installation and protection of the stainless steel railing and Stainless
Steel shutter with stainless steel Jali till completion and handing over of the work.
b) The stainless steel work shall be got executed through specialized fabricator having experience of
similar works. The Contractor shall submit the credentials of the fabricator for the approval of the
Engineer-In-Charge.

c) The Contractor shall submit shop drawings, for approval of the Engineer-in- Charge, for fabricating
stainless steel railing and Stainless Steel shutter with stainless steel Jali with detailing of M.S. stiffener
frame work backing along with the fixing details of the M.S. frame work to the R.C.C columns or
frame. The details of the joints in the stainless steel work including location, etc. shall also be shown
in the shop drawings.

d) The Contractor shall procure and submit to the Engineer-In-Charge, samples of various materials for
the railing work and jali Shutter with its fixtures, for approval. After approval of samples, the Contractor
shall prepare a mock up for approval of Engineer-In-Charge. The material shall be procured and the
mass work taken up only after the approval of the mock up by the Engineer-In-Charge. The mock-up
shall be dismantled and removed by the contractor as per the directions of the Engineer-in-Charge.

e) The stainless steel shall be of grade 316 with brushed steel satin finish and procured from the
approved manufacturer. It shall be without any dents, waviness, scratches, stains etc.

f) The required joints in the S. S Work shall be provided as per the architectural drawings, shall be
welded in a workmanlike manner including grinding, polishing, buffing etc. all complete and
compacted. The temporary clamps provided and fixed to hold the stainless steel railing, in position
shall be removed after the concrete has set properly. The junction of the flooring and the cladding
shall be neatly filled with weather silicone sealant of approved colour and shade.

g) One test (three specimens) for each lot shall be conducted for the stainless steel pipe in the approved
laboratory. Therefore, the material shall preferably be procured in one lot from one manufacturer.

h) The finished surface shall be free of any defects like dents, waviness, scratches, stains etc. and shall
have uniform brushed steel satin finish.

Any defective work shall be rejected and redone by the Contractor. The finished surface shall
therefore be protected using protective tape which shall be removed at the time of completion of the
work. The surface shall then be suitably cleaned using nonabrasive approved cleaner for the material.

i) The item includes all inputs of labour, materials (including stainless steel pipes, welding, brazing,
concrete, protective film, weather silicone sealant etc. including providing and fixing M.S. frames), T
& P other incidental items, wastages etc. The items also included providing and fixing stainless steel
anchor fasteners for fixing railing.

j) The railing shall be fixed in position using stainless steel pipes, stainless steel posts of required
diameters and thickness as shown on drawing and polished to satin finish including cutting, welding,
grinding, bending to required profile and shape, hoisting, butting, polishing etc. The Jali shutter shall
be fixed in position using stainless steel rectangular pipes of required thickness and size and SS Jali
as shown in the drawing, including hinges, latching and locking arrangements, and polished to satin
finish including cutting, welding, grinding, bending to required profile and shape, hoisting, butting,
polishing etc.

Signature of Contractor Page 45 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

k) The item includes all inputs of labour, materials, T&P, other incidental items, wastage etc. The entire
work shall be carried out to the satisfaction of Engineer-In-Charge.

2.14 CEILING

2.14.1 (A) Boards

Multipurpose Cement Board: (High Pressure Steam cured). This shall be conforming to IS 14862
and of thickness specified in the Indicative item/specification/drawing.

2.14.1 (B) Frame

The specifications as described and shall apply except that the maximum spacing of the longitudinal
scantlings shall be 40 cm centres.
2.14.1 (C) Metallic False Ceiling

Metal Ceiling System of 600x600 mm module which includes providing and fixing 'C' wall angle of
size 20x30x20 mm made of 0.5 mm thick pre painted steel along the perimeter of the room with help
of nylon sleeves and wooden screws at 300 mm center to centre, suspending the main C carrier of
size 10x38x10 mm made of G.I steel 0.7 mm thick from the soffit with help of soffit cleat 37x27x25x1.6
mm, rawl plugs of size 38x12 mm and C carrier suspension clip and main carrier bracket at 1000 mm
c/c. Inverted triangle shaped Spring Tee having height of 24 mm and width of 34 mm made of Gl
steel 0.45 mm thick is then fixed to the main C carrier and in direction perpendicular to it at 600 mm
centers with help of suspension brackets. Wherever the main C carrier and spring T have to join, C
carrier and spring T connectors have to be used. All sections to be galvanized @ 120 gms/sqm (both
side inclusive), fixing with clip in tiles into spring T with GI Metal Ceiling Clip in plain Beveled edge
global white color tiles of size 600x600 and 0.5 mm thick with 25 mm height, made of G I sheet having
galvanizing of 100 gms/ sqm (both sides inclusive) and electro statically polyester powder coated of
thickness 60 microns (minimum), including factory painted after bending.

2.14.1 (D) Gypsum Suspended Ceilings

2.14.1 (E) Anti Microbial Bio Safe Calcium Silicate Tiles

Providing and fixing false ceiling at all heights with integral densified calcium silicate reinforced with
fibre and natural filler false ceiling tiles of Size 595x595mm of approved texture, design and patterns
as per CPWD Specifications 2019, to be laid in true horizontal level suspended on inter-locking metal
T-Grid of hot dipped galvanised iron section of 0.33mm thick (galvanized @ 120 grams per sqm
including both sides) comprising of main-T runners of size 24x38 mm of length 3000 mm, cross - T
of size 24x32 mm of length 1200 mm and secondary intermediate cross-T of size 24x32 mm of
length 600mm to form grid module of size 600 x 600 mm, suspended from ceiling using galvanised
mild steel items (galvanizing @ 80 grams per sqm) i.e. 12x50 mm long dash fasteners, 6 mm dia fully
threaded hanger rod upto 1000 mm length and L-shape level adjuster of size 76x25x25x1.6 mm fixed
with grid and Z cleat of size 25x37x25x1.6mm thick with precut hole on both 25mm flange to pierce
into 12x50mm or even bigger size dash fastener if require, fixed with Galvanised iron perimeter wall
angle of size 24x24x0.40 mm of length 3000 mm to be fixed on periphery wall / partition with the help
of plastic rawl plugs at 450 mm center to center and 40 mm long dry wall S.S screws. The work shall
be carried out as per specifications, drawing and as per directions of the Engineer-in-Charge.
With 15 mm thick tegular/butt edged without perforation plain/designer light weight calcium silicate
Anti-Microbial Bio-Safe coated false ceiling tiles Confirming to JIS- Z2801 and ASTM G-21

Signature of Contractor Page 46 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

[Link] Description
The extent of ceilings and suspension systems is indicated on drawings and in schedules with the
required corresponding suspension systems.

[Link] Submittals

Submit product specifications and installation instructions for ceiling materials required and for each
suspension system, including certified laboratory test reports and other data as required to show
compliance with these specifications. Include manufacturer’s recommendations for cleaning and
refinishing, including precautions against materials and methods which may be detrimental to finishes
and performances of the product.

[Link] Delivery, Storage and Handling

Deliver all ceiling materials to the job site in original, unopened packages, bearing manufacturer's
name and label identifying each type of met unit. Comply with the material manufacturer’s
recommendations for storage of units to be used in the work.

[Link] Materials

Gypsum Board: Provide gypsum board and frame of 50mm overall thickness and of dimensions
shown on drawings. Unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the
Engineer, the minimum thickness of the gypsum board shall not be less than 15mm.
Anti Microbial Bio Safe Calcium Silicate Tiles : With 15 mm tegular/butt edged without perforation
plain/designer light weight calcium silicate Anti-Microbial Bio-Safe coated false ceiling tiles of size
595x595 mm

[Link] Accessories

1. Moulding: Provide manufacturer standard moulding, unless otherwise shown on Drawings.

2. Access Panels: Where required, provide access panels of suitable size and construction for
inspection and maintenance purposes. Panels shall be of similar construction and finish as that of
the ceiling and shall be off manufacturer's standard product.

[Link] Execution

The Contractor shall examine the substrates and the condition under which the ceiling work shall be
performed, and correct any unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the ceiling work until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Engineer-in-Charge

[Link] Installation

a) Installation of suspended ceilings shall be in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and
approved ceiling drawings.

b) Ceiling suspension systems shall be installed true to line and level in compliance with approved shop
drawings. Suspension depth shall comply with the requirements shown, unless otherwise directed.
All anchors shall be in stainless steel (type 316). Hangers and supports shall be appropriate to the
suspension system and shall be spaced in accordance with approved shop drawings.

c) Install edge mouldings of type required at perimeter of ceiling area and at locations where necessary
to conceal edges of ceiling units. Miter corners accurately and connect securely.

Signature of Contractor Page 47 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

d) For electro-mechanical work, the Contractor shall comply with the applicable requirements as
specified.

2.14.3 METAL PERFORATED CEILING:

12.52.2 GI Metal Ceiling Lay in perforated Tegular edge global white color
tiles of size 595x595 mm and 0.5 mm thick with 8 mm drop; made of GI
sheet having galvanizing of 100 gms/sqm (both sides inclusive) and 20%
perforation area with 1.8 mm dia holes and having NRC (Noise Reduction
Coefficient ) of 0.5, electro statically polyester powder coated of thickness
60 microns (minimum), including factory painted after bending and
perforation, and backed with a black Glass fiber acoustical fleece.

2.14.4 600 X 600MM GI METAL BIOGUARD CLIP:

Providing & Fixing horizontal level suspended ceiling comprising of GI Bioguard Clip-in Plain Tile
600x600mm (Nominal Size) tiles of 120 gsm galvanized steel as per IS 277 (2003) suitable for
architectural finishes in 0.5mm thickness as per in IS:513 (1994) in Global white color with
concealed suspension system having a bevelled edge of 3x3mm and height of 33mm on one side
and 18mm on the other side. Tiles shall be flattened by precision leveller to minimize sag to less
than 1/400mm. The tiles shall have double round pip of ɸ 2mm and ɸ 6mm for secure engagement
and levelling respectively, along with swing down feature and special tabs to allow removal of tile
to enable plenum access. The coated surface of the tile shall exhibit anti-microbial properties
(eradication and inhibition of growth) and shall achieve up to 99.99% reduction in bacterial activity
as per ISO22196:2011. The tile shall be electrostatically polyester powder coated using RoHS
compliant powder having coating thickness ranging from 60-80 microns. The powder coating shall
pass Salt Spray Test for 750 Hours as per ASTM B117, QUV –A Test for 1000hours as per ASTM
G-154 – (Cycle – 1) and Humidity test for 1000hours as per DIN 50017. The powder coating shall
have an adhesion of GT0 as per EN ISO 2409. The shade variation across batches shall be delta
E<1 using Excite/BYK Gardner instrument and gloss level of 25±5% at 60˚ as per ASTM D523.
The tile shall have scratch, mar & abrasive resistance properties. The tile shall have a Light
Reflectance of ≥ 63% in accordance to ASTM 1477-98 and Fire Performance of class 0/1 as per
BS 476 Part 6 & 7 in module size of 600x600mm.
Properties of Tile Relevant Standards
Base Material 120 gsm galvanized steel IS 277 (2003) Galvanization
Panel Dimensions 600 x 600 mm (Nominal)
Panel Thickness 0.5 mm IS:513 (1994) thickness
Panel Finish Electrostatically polyester ASTM B117 (Salt Spray Test) /
powder coated using RoHS ASTM G-154 – (Cycle – 1) (QUV-A
compliant powder having Test) / DIN 50017 (Humidity Test)
coating thickness ranging EN ISO 2409 (Adhesion)
from 60-80 microns. Salt ASTM D523 (Gloss)
Spray Tested for 750 Hrs/
QUV –A Test for 1000hours/
Humidity test for 1000hours.

Signature of Contractor Page 48 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

Adhesion of GT0 as per EN

ISO 2409. The shade
variation within a
manufacturing batch shall
be delta E<1 using
Excite/BYK Gardner
instrument and gloss level
25±5% at 60˚.
Anti-microbial activity Eradication and growth ISO22196:2011
inhibition. Up to 99.99%
reduction in bacterial activity
Fire Properties Class 0/1 BS 476 Part 6 & 7
Light Reflectance 63% ASTM 1477-98
Dimensional tolerances ± 2 mm

SUSPENSION & INSTALLATION: Shall comprise of 3000mm long ‘C’ channels of 38H x 12W mm
and 1mm thick spaced at 1200mm centre to centre securely fixed to the structural soffit using
threaded rod (Approved make/Third Party Supply) connecting to C-channel hanger of
109x18.5x16.5mm at 1200mm C/C and anchor fastener (Approved make/Third Party Supply). The
last hanger at the end of each C-channel shall not be greater than 600mm from the adjacent wall.
Use a C-channel connector of 99.5x35x 9mm for splicing together two pieces of C-channels.
4000mm Clip-in bar of 16W x 40H mm and 0.6mm thick made of galvanized steel of 140gsm as
IS 277 (2003) and shall be spaced at 600mm centre to centre in a direction perpendicular to the C-
channels and secured at every intersection with C-channel using a Clip-in bar hanger of
54x18x20mm. Use Clip-in bar connecter to splice two pieces of Clip-in bar. Tiles shall be clipped in
between two Clip-in bars from below. Optionally - Security clip to be installed to ensure the panels
are positively engaged with Clip-in bar channel. Installation shall be carried out as per
Manufacturer recommended procedure.
Perimeter to be finished using wall angles of size 3000x19x32mm in white color secured to walls
using screws at 450mm centre to centre. Cut tiles to be secured to the wall angles using a spring
clamp.
The Tile & Grid system used together shall carry a 10 year warranty against manufacturing defect
and manufacturer shall provide a warranty certificate. The Tile & Grid shall have the manufacturers
name embossed/printed on it. The supply shall be backed by a Manufacturing Test Certificate.
Suspension System Details
Base Material Galvanized Steel
C-channel Dimensions 3000 x 38 x 12 mm and 1mm thickness,
C-channel Hanger Dimensions 109 x 18.5 x 16.5 mm
C-channel connector (Splicer) 99.5 x 35 x 9 mm
Dimensions
Clip-in bar Dimensions 4000 x 16 x 40 mm and 0.6 mm thickness, 140 gsm
galvanized as per IS 277 (2003)
Clip-in bar hanger 54 x 18 x 20 mm
Wall Angle Dimensions 3000 x 19 x 32 mm
Dimensional Tolerance (excl. ±1mm
thickness)
2.14.5 MINERAL FIBRE ACOUSTICAL SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEM:

Signature of Contractor Page 49 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

The tiles should have Humidity Resistance (RH) of 99%, NRC 0.7, Light Reflectance ≥85%,
Thermal Conductivity k = 0.045 - 0.048 W/mK, Colour White, Fire Performance BS 476 Class
0/Class 1 in module size of 600 x 600 x 19mm with Durabrite scrim on the face of the tile, suitable
for Green Building application, with Recycled content of 36%.
The tile shall be laid on Armstrong Suprafine 38 with 15 mm wide T - section flanges colour white
having rotary stitching on all T sections i.e. the Main Runner, 1200 mm & 600 mm Cross Tees with
a web height of 38mm and a load carrying capacity of 12.5 Kgs/M2 (as per standard installation
layout mentioned below) & pull out strength of minimum 100 Kgs.. The T Sections have a
Galvanizing of 90 grams per M2 and need to be installed with Suspension system of Armstrong or
similar make.

26.27 Providing and fixing mineral fibre false ceiling tiles at all eights of size
595X595mm of approved texture, design and pattern. The tiles should
have Humidity Resistance (RH) of 99%, Light Reflectance > 85%,
Thermal Conductivity k = 0.052 - 0.057 w/m K, Fire Performance as per
(BS 476 pt - 6 &7)in true horizontal level suspended on interlocking T-
Grid of hot dipped all round galvanized iron section of 0.33 mm thick
(galvanized @120 gsm) comprising of main T runners of 15x32 mm of
length 3000 mm, cross T of size 15x32mm of length 1200 mm and
secondary intermediate cross T of size 15x32 mm of length 600 mm to
form grid module of size 600x600 mm suspended from ceiling using
galvanized mild steel item (galvanised@80gsm) 50 mm long 8mm outer
diameter M-6 dash fasteners, 6 mm diameter fully threaded hanger rod
up to 1000 mm length and L-shape level adjuster of size 85x25x2 mm,
spaced at 1200 mm centre to centre along main ‘T’. The system should
rest on periphery walls /partitions with the help of GI perimeter wall
angle of size24x24X3000 mm made of 0.40 mm thick sheet, to be fixed
to the wall with help of plastic rawl plug at 450 mm centre to centre & 40
mm long dry wall S.S. screws. The exposed bottom portion of all T-
sections used in false ceiling support system shall be pre-painted with
polyester baked paint, for all heights. The work shall be carried out as
per specifications, drawings and as per directions of the engineer-
incharge.
26.27.1 With 16 mm thick beveled tegular mineral fibre false
ceiling tile (NRC 0.55 to 0.6
26.27.2 With 20 mm thick beveled tegular mineral fibre false
ceiling tile (NRC 0.7)
26.27.3 With 16 mm thick beveled tegular mineral fibre Antimicrobial false
ceiling tile confirming to ISO 5 (class
100 ) specifications

2.14.6 Vertical Linear Baffle Ceiling made out of Aluminium:

Armstrong or similar. Extrusion in Aluminium alloy grade 6063. The baffle blade shall be in size of
100x25x3600mm in powder coated to Woodgrain finish – Red Oak & Cherry. The baffle blade shall
be suspended using Slotted U-profile of 20 x 30mm at on-center spacing in multiples of 25mm. longer
lengths of Baffle to be connected by Baffle Joiner and the ends to be fixed with End caps.

Installation of U-Grid:

Signature of Contractor Page 50 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

The U profile to be suspended at every 1200mm on-centre using 6mm threaded rod from the
structural soffit using U-profile hanger. U-profile splice to be used to join more than one U profiles of
length 3.75M. 1st U-Grid Channel must be no more than 400mm from the perimeter.

Installation of Armstrong Baffles:

Locate the slot for Baffle Hangers in U Profile section at 1200mm centres. Hangers are inserted into
the slot, then rotated 90° and fixed into position by tightening the grub screw. Baffle to be lifted into
position and hangers engage over lip of U-Grid Channel. Each Hanger to be secured into position by
inserting the Locking Clip.

When doing continuous installation, Baffles blades are to be connected at ends with Baffle Joiner,
which are inserted into the top and bottom slots of the Baffle closed profile for alignment only. The
bottom Joiner to be located first and fastened on one side only. The top Joiner to be fitted then and
secured with grub screws on one side. Then the two Baffle sections shall be joined and the top Joiner
is screw fastened on the 2nd Baffle profile.

End Caps to be located by pushing the End Cap tongues into open Baffle slots.

2.14.7 Soundscapes
Providing and Fixing Armstrong or similar Acoustical clouds which are 30 mm thick, flat glass fibre
panels with Humidity Resistance RH 90% & Recycled Content of minimum 30%, come in various
shape options like Square / Convex / Concave / Circle / Hexagon / Trapezoid / Parallelogram (Left &
Right) / Rectangle (Small & Large) and in standard Traffic White color with LR 90% or in the color
specified by the Architect / Engineer in charge (Shell / Tangerine / Cranberry / Moss / Kiwi / Reef /
Lagoon).
The back of each panel to have embedded square frame bracket system of 610x610mm in which
provisions are already made for integration of installation system for suspension of individual or
grouped panels.
INSTALLATION: The panels to be suspended individually using the Armstrong Soundscapes Deck
hanging kit. Each kit to consist of gripper structure anchors with an outer diameter of 16mm and height
23mm, aircraft cables of 1.5mm dia 2.44 LM in length and bottom end cable adjusters of 8.9mm outer
diameter. Each panel to be suspended using the aircraft cables which are suspended from the soffit
using the gripper structure anchors and its other end passing through the bottom end cable adjuster
which are screwed in the 4 corners of the frame bracket adjusters.

2.14.8 Mineral Fibre Acoustical Suspended Ceiling System:

Providing & Fixing of Armstrong with Ultima Create Microlook 90 Edge Tiles With Armstrong
Superfine 15mm Exposed Grid.

The tiles should have Humidity Resistance (RH) of 99%, NRC 0.7, Light Reflectance ≥85%, Thermal
Conductivity k = 0.045 - 0.048 W/mK, Colour White, Fire Performance BS 476 Class 0/Class 1 in
module size of 600 x 600 x 19mm with Durabrite scrim on the face of the tile, suitable for Green
Building application, with Recycled content of 36%.

The tile shall be laid on Armstrong Suprafine 38 with 15 mm wide T - section flanges colour white
having rotary stitching on all T sections i.e. the Main Runner, 1200 mm & 600 mm Cross Tees with a
web height of 38mm and a load carrying capacity of 12.5 Kgs/M2 (as per standard installation layout
mentioned below) & pull out strength of minimum 100 Kgs.. The T Sections have a Galvanizing of 90
grams per M2 and need to be installed with Suspension system of Armstrong make.

2.14.9 OPTRA ML: Providing & Fixing of of Soft Fibre Acoustical Suspended Ceiling System with Optra
(Bevelled Tegular) Edge Tiles With of 15mm Exposed Grid.

Signature of Contractor Page 51 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

The tiles should have Humidity Resistance (RH) of 95%, NRC 0.9, Light Reflectance ≥85%, Colour White,
Fire Performance UK Class 0 / Class 1 (BS 476 pt - 6 &7) in module size of 600 x 600 x 15mm , suitable for
Green Building application, with Recycled content of 43% (GW)
The tile shall be laid on of Silhouette profile grid system with 15mm white flanges incorporating a 6mm central
reveal in white/black colour and with a web height of 38mm and a load carrying capacity of minimum 9.5
Kgs/M2 with a minimum pull out strength of 100 kgs. Silhouette, Main Runners & Cross Tees to have
metered ends & “birdsmouth” notches to provide metered cruciform junctions. The T Sections have a
Galvanizing of 90 grams per M2 and need to be installed with Suspension system of of make.

INSTALLATION: To comprise main runner spaced at 1200mm centres securely fixed to the structural soffit
using of suspension system (specifications below) at 1200mm maximum centre. The First/Last of
suspension system at the end of each main runner should not be greater than 450mm from the adjacent
wall.
Flush fitting 1200mm long cross tees to be interlocked between main runners at 300mm centre to form 1200
x 300 mm module. Cut cross tees longer than 600mm require independent support.
Perimeter trim to be of wall angles of size 3000x19x19mm, secured to walls at 450 mm maximum centres of
SUSPENSION SYSTEM - of make Anchor Fastener, Hanger Wire 2.5mm dia, Hook Clip with J Wire
assembly.

2.15 WALL PANELLING

2.15.1 ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELLING (Armstrong as specified below or similar):

Providing and fixing ‘Optra Acoustical Wall Panelling’ with square edges made of fibre glass
substrate 25mm thick and wrapped on the front side with an acoustically transparent and classified
for Fire reaction ASTM E-84 : Class A fabric with an option of colors – Husk JT-06, Copper JT-13,
Sangria JT-17, Sesame VL-27B, Coffee VL08N, Charcoal JT-14, Titanium JT-07, Flame JT-16,
Peanut JT-12, Shell VL-22 as per the choice of the Architect of size 600X600/600X1200/600X1800
mm providing a minimum sound absorption level of 0.85 NRC to be affixed to wall using Wall panel
impalers supplied by M/s Armstrong Industries India Pvt Ltd and construction adhesives as per the
instructions laid down by the manufacturer.
INSTALLATION: 3 or 4 or 5 nos. Armstrong wall panel Impalers of shall be fixed as per wato the
wall surface using self-tapping screws. Silica based construction adhesive to be dabbed on to the
projecting elements (spikes) of the impalers. Armstrong Optra wall panels shall be pierced through
the spikes of the impalers ensuring the line and level of the panels are maintained. Installation to
be carried out by Armstrong Trained Installation team & Installation should be carried out as per
Armstrong recommended procedure.

2.15.2 VINYL CLADDING:

Supply & fixing flexible Wallflex PVC sheet wall cladding in 1 mm thickness in the size of 1.5 mtr X
20 mtr with polyurethane surface treatment testing results if inhibits the growth of MRSA in the
wall with clean room certificatioin. Homogeneous vinyl wall covering (imported) with polyurethane
shield .Classification EN-685 for wall only. Good resistant to chemical & fire ,anti fungi & bacterial
growth, diamond 10 coating,class A in clean room test and available in various colour shade duly
installed on smooth wall with company recommended adhesive and seamless.

2.15.3 WALL PAPERS:

Signature of Contractor Page 52 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

Non-woven roll size: 53cm x 10 m

2.15.4 BAMBOOWOOD WALL CLADDING:

Providing & fixing in position, Phenol bonded Bamboowood wall cladding at all height with planks of
sizes 10mm thick, 1900mm length and 135mm wide in approved colour, texture and finish, having
Performance Appraisal Certificate (PAC) issued by Building Materials & Technology Promotion
Council (BMTPC) with necessary profiled edges fixed with BR nails to frame work made of second
class teak wood of size 50 x 50 mm in centre and ends of each tile. The bamboowood cladding shall
be laid over teak wood frame and hold in place by 50mm thick teak wood placed in centre of two
teak wood and backlayment and covered with 1.00mm thick expanded poly ethylene foam of density
25kg/cum in two layers first layer on wall surface before fixing wooden fframe and second layer on
frame under cladding. The Epitome Bamboowood planks shall have minimum density of 1000
Kg/cum & minimum Hardness 1000 Kgf. with Eco friendly UV coating, all complete as per direction
of Engineer in-charge and Incusive of GST.

2.15.5 WOODWORKS CHANNELED WALL PANEL (2400X192X15 ) (Armstrong as specified below or

similar):

Providing and Fixing Armstrong Channeled Woodworks perforated panels G-13 of width 192mm,
thickness of 15mm and length 2400 mm or as required by the Architect/ approving engineer, made
of a Moisture Resistant fibre board with minimum 595 Kg/M3 density substrate with a laminated
facing as per the approved shade & finish (Portland Maple, Sea Beach, Siam Wood, Mystique
Walnut, Interior White, Alumina Pearl) and a melamine balancing layer on the reverse side. The
boards shall have a special perforation pattern where the visible surface has a “Helmholtz” fluted
perforation of 3mm width and 13mm of visible panel each. The edges of the panels shall be “tongue-
and-grooved” to receive special clips for installation. The back of the perforated panel shall have
sound absorbing non-woven acoustical fleece having NRC of 0.60. The panels shall be mounted on
special aluminium splines (keel) using clips provided by Armstrong and approved by the Architect/
Engineer-in-Charge.

INSTALLATION:
Install wooden battens (provided by others) of section 50x50mm or as approved by the Architect on
the solid wall horizontally using screws and plugs at spacing of 600mm centre-to-centre. Screw the
aluminium extruded keel for channelled woodworks provided by Armstrong over the lowest and
second wooden batten at an on-centre distance of 600mm. Install the Skirting (provided by others)
of width 50mm or more as required by the Architect/ Engineer-in-Charge and insert the tongue end
of the panel in the skirting. Place the inside clip on the groove end of the panel along the Al keel and
then place the tongue end of the next panel. Continue installing rows of panels by inserting the
tongue into the groove of the earlier inserted panel and progressively installing inside clips into the
next keel till the actual height is achieved. Finish off the edges using wooden moulding of matching
colour (provided by others). Installation to be carried out by Armstrong Trained Installation team &
Installation should be carried out as per Armstrong recommended procedure.

Signature of Contractor Page 53 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

2.15.6 Soundproof Panelling: P/F of Sound proof Paneling made Farm work Floor section for top and
bottom and stud section for vertical section places 2' c/c and horizontally placing 2' c/c to form a
uniform 2'X2' grid. Each section in grid to be filled with glass wool 3" thick in 2'X2' packets form and
secured to frame using mesh cloth. Frame work to be covered with 12mm WP ply of approved make
and top face to be finished using veneer (4mm) of laminate 1mm as per Drawing & Design.

2.15.7 LAMINATE PANELING:

P/F of Lacquered glass paneling made using frame work of pinewood of section 2”x 2” grid form with
12mm ply fixed frame work free from any undulation. Top to be finished with 4 mm lacquered glasses
(duly pasted to 12 mm ply using clear silicon) of specified color, pattern and sizes as per drawing and
design.

2.15.8 VENEER PANELING:

P/F of wooden Sound proof paneling made using frame work of Gyproc make Standard floor / Stud
sections 2’ C/C fixed to walls using standard PVC sleeves / screw, to be covered with 12 MM ply ,
space between wall and ply to be filled with glass wool 3’th in fiber mesh. Facia to be covered with 1
mm laminate as per drawing and design. Rates to be inclusive of all material, labor, wastage hardware
T&P etc.

2.15.9 LACQUERED GLASS PANELING:

P/F of Lacquered glass paneling made using frame work of pinewood of section 2”x 2” grid form with
12mm ply fixed frame work free from any undulation. Top to be finished with 4 mm lacquered glasses
(duly pasted to 12 mm ply using clear silicon) of specified color, pattern and sizes as per drawing and
design.

2.15.10 NON WOVEN WALLPAPER FINISH:

Providing and fixing Wallpaper- Non woven wall paper (texture/ printed / satin /mural finish) with base
of thickness ranging from 0.5 GSM to 0.75 GSM, extra washable/ lessivable and dry strippableasas
per design, drawing and approved specification all complete, under the guidance of Engineer-in-
Charge.

2.15.11 5 MM THICK MIRROR WALL CLADDING WORK:

Supply, fabrication and installation / fixing of 5 mm thick ultra coated mirror cladding work are
AIS/MODI/ Saint gobain make along with 19 mm water proof ply of approved ISI mark internal mirror
cladding with V shape mirror polish including all necessary hardware and complete work. The fixing
should be done using 3 mm gap along with weather sealant etc. as per approved design and shop
drawings finalized by architect.

2.15.12 SLAT PANELING:

Providing and fixing Slat Panelling (3771 Light Teak 102) with either aluminium channels or plywood
as the base.
Fixing the Panel : Drill screws on the lower side of the 1st panel at intermediate distance, overlap the
upper side side of the 2nd panel on the 1st panel , again drill the screws on the lower side of the 2nd
panel to hide the screw and to get perfectly consistent paneling.

Signature of Contractor Page 54 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

2.16 MARBLE WORK

2.16.1 General

Marble shall be hard, sound, dense and homogeneous in texture with crystalline texture as far as
possible. It shall generally be uniform in colour and free from stains, cracks, decay and weathering.

2.16.2 Classification

The marble blocks, slabs and tiles shall be classified broadly in the following two categories:

[Link] White Marble

Raj Nagar (plain white) Marble:

It shall be plain white marble with coarse grains predominantly showing mica particles giving reflection
in light.

[Link] Coloured Marble

(i) Plain Black Marble

(ii) Black Zebra Marble
(iii) Green Marble
(iv) Grey Marble
(v) Brown Marble

Brown marble having teak wood shades available at Narnaul.

2.17 GRANITE

It shall be of any colour and size as directed by Engineer-In-Charge. Granite shall be plain machine
cut and mirror polished. It shall be smooth and of even surface without holes or pits.

2.17.1 Sizes and Tolerances

[Link] Sizes

The size of blocks, slabs and tiles shall be as mentioned in Table below.

TABLE

Sizes of Blocks, Slabs and Tiles

Length Width Thickness

1 Blocks 30 to 250 30 to 100 30 to 90
2 Slabs 70 to 250 30 to 100 2 to 15
3 Tiles 10 to 60 10 to 60 0.8 to 2.4

All dimensions are in centimeter.

[Link] Tolerance

Signature of Contractor Page 55 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

The following tolerances shall be allowed in the dimension of blocks, slabs and tiles:
Blocks
(a) Length + 2 per cent
(b) Width + 2 per cent
(c) Thickness + 2 per cent

Slabs
(a) Length + 2 per cent
(b) Width + 2 per cent
(c) Thickness + 3 per cent

Tiles
(a) Linear dimension + 3 per cent
(b) Thickness + 1 per cent

The sizes other than those mentioned above may be provided as directed by the Engineer-In-Charge.

[Link] Physical Properties

The physical properties of marble for blocks, slabs and tiles and method of tests are mentioned in
Table below.

TABLE
Physical Properties of Marble & Granite

Marble Granite
Characteristic Marble Method of Granite Method of
Requirements test as per Requirement test as per
(1) Moisture absorption - Max. 0.4% IS 1124 Max. 0.50% IS 1124
after 24 hrs by weight
immersion in
cold water
(2) Hardness Min. 3 Mhos scale
(3) Specific Gravity Min. 2.5 IS 1122 Min. 2.6 IS 1122

[Link] Approval of Sample

Before starting the work, the contractor shall get samples of marble approved by the Engineer-In-
Charge. Approved samples shall be kept in the custody of the Engineer-In-Charge and the marble
supplied and used on the work shall conform to samples with regard to soundness, colour, veining
and general texture.

[Link] Sampling

Signature of Contractor Page 56 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

In any consignment all the blocks/slabs/tiles of the same group, size and finish shall be grouped
together to constitute a lot. Sample shall be selected and tested separately for each lot for determining
its conformity or otherwise to the requirements of the specification. The number of blocks/slabs/tiles
to be selected for the samples shall depend upon the size of the lot and shall be in accordance with
the Table below.

TABLE
Sample Size and Criteria for Conformity

Number of Blocks Number of blocks Permissible Sub sample

slabs/Tiles in the lot slabs/ Tiles to be number of size in no.
selected in sample defectives
(1) (2) (3) (4)
Up to 25 3 0 2
26 to 100 5 0 2
101 to 200 8 0 3
201 to 500 13 0 4
501 to 1000 20 1 5

Note: The blocks/slabs/tiles in the sample shall be taken at random and in order to ensure to
randomness of selection, random tables may be used.

2.18 Marble Work - Table Rubbed and Polished (Plain Work)

Marble work in steps, jambs, columns and other plain work shall be as specified below:
Joints in staircase treads, kitchen platforms shall be permitted only at curvature or when width/length
is more than 0.6/2 mtrs respectively. Number of joints in each direction shall not be more than one
number for every 2 mtrs length beyond the initial 2.00 m length. Additional joints due to curvature or
for providing fixture shall be provided judiciously.

2.18.1 Dressing, Cutting and Rubbing

Every marble stone shall be gang saw/machine cut to the required size and shape, chisel dressed
machine finished on all beds and joints, so as to be free from any waviness and to give truly vertical,
horizontal, radial or circular joints as required. The exposed faces and sides of stones forming joints
up to 6mm. from the face shall be fine tooled machine cut such that a straight edge laid along the
face of the stone is in contact with every point on it. All window sills, tread of steps, counters vanities
moulding edges etc. shall be machine cut & polished to give high gloss mirror finish as per direction
of Engineer-in- Charge. These surfaces shall then be rubbed smooth. All visible angles and edges
shall be true, square and free from chipping. Beyond the depth of 6 mm from face, the joints shall be
dressed with a slight splay so that the thickness of joint increases, in an inverted V shape. The
surfaces of the stones coming in contact with backing need not be chisel dressed.

A sample of dressed and rubbed stone shall be prepared for approval and it shall be kept on worksite
after being approved by the Engineer-in Charge.
2.18.2 Mortar

The mortar used for jointing shall be as specified.

2.18.3 Laying

Signature of Contractor Page 57 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

All marble stones shall be wetted before placing in position. These shall then be floated on mortar
and bedded properly in position with wooden mallets without the use of chips or under pinning of any
sort.

The walls and pillars shall be carried up truly in plumb or battered as shown in the drawings. All
courses shall be laid truly horizontal and all vertical joints shall be truly vertical.

In case of work without backing of brick work or coursed rubble masonry, face stone shall be laid in
headers and stretchers alternatively unless otherwise directed. The headers shall be arranged to
come as nearly as possible in the middle of stretchers above and below. Stone shall be laid in regular
courses of not less than 15 cm in height and all courses shall be of the same height unless otherwise
specified. The matching of grains shall be carried out as directed by the Engineer-In-Charge.

2.18.4 Bond Stone

Bond or through stones running right through the thickness of walls, shall be provided in walls up to
60 cm thick and in case of wall above 60 cm thickness a set of two or more bond stones overlapping
each other by at least 15 cm shall be provided in a line from face to back.

At least one bond stone or a set of bond stones shall be provided for every 0.5 sqm of the wall surface.
All bond stones shall be marked suitably as directed by the Engineer-In-Charge.

2.18.5 Joints

The depth of joints 6 mm from the face shall be uniform and as fine as possible but shall be not more
than 1.5 mm thick on the exposed face. Beyond the depth of 6 mm from face, the thickness of joints
shall increase in an inverted V shape so as to give good mortar bond between two stones. The
inverted portion of the joints shall be filled with bedding mortar and the face 6 mm portion with pointing
mortar.

2.18.6 Curing

The work shall be kept constantly moist on all faces for a period of at least seven days.

2.18.7 Finishing
After the marble work is cured, it shall be rubbed with carborandum stone of different grades no. 60,
120 and 320 in succession or with electrical rubbing machines rubbed with carborandum items 0 to
6 nos. in succession, so as to give a plane true and highly smooth surface. It shall then be cleaned
with a solution of oxalic acid, washed and finished clean.

2.18.8 Protection
Green work shall be protected from rain by suitable coverings. The work shall also be suitably
protected from damage during construction.

2.18.9 Scaffolding

Double scaffolding having two sets of vertical supports shall be provided where necessary. The
supports shall be sound and strong, tied together by horizontal pieces over which the scaffolding
plank shall be fixed.

2.18.10 Tolerances

Signature of Contractor Page 58 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

As specified above.

2.22 KOTA STONE FLOORING

2.22.1 Kota Stone Slabs

The slabs shall be of selected quality, hard, sound, dense and homogeneous in texture free from
cracks, decay, weathering and flaws. They shall be hand or machine cut to the requisite thickness.
They shall be of the colour indicated in the drawings or as instructed by the Engineer-In-Charge.

The slabs shall have the top (exposed) face polished before being brought to site, unless otherwise
specified. The slabs shall conform to the size required. Before starting the work the contractor shall
get the samples of slabs approved by the Engineer-In-Charge.

2.22.2 Dressing

Every slab shall be cut to the required size and shape and fine chisel dressed on the sides to the full
depth so that a straight edge laid along the side of the stone shall be in full contact with it. The sides
(edges) shall be table rubbed with coarse sand or machine rubbed before paving. All angles and
edges of the slabs shall be true, square and free from chippings and the surface shall be true and
plane.

The thickness of the slab after it is dressed shall be 20, 25, 30 or 40 mm as specified in the description
of the Indicative item/specification/drawing. Tolerance of ±2 mm shall be allowed for the thickness. In
respect of length and breadth of slabs Tolerance of ± 5 mm for hand cut slabs and ± 2 mm for machine
cut slabs shall be allowed.

2.22.3 Preparation of Surface and Laying

The specification shall be as described, except that the edges of the slabs to be jointed shall be
buttered with grey cement, with admixture of pigment to match the shade of the slab. The thickness
of the joints should be as minimum as possible. In any location, it shall not exceed 1 mm.

2.22.4 Polishing and Finishing

The specifications shall be as described, except that (a) first polishing with coarse grade carborundum
stone shall not be done, (b) cement slurry with or without pigment shall not be applied on the surface
before polishing.

2.22.5 Kota Stone in Risers of Steps, Skirting and Dado

Kota Stone Slabs and Dressing shall be as specified, except that the thickness of the slabs shall be
25 mm or as specified in the description of the Indicative item/specification/drawing. The slabs may
be of uniform size if required.

Preparation of surface shall be as specified.

The laying shall be as specified, except that the joints of the slabs shall be set in grey cement mixed
with pigment to match the shade of the slabs.

Curing, Polishing and Finishing shall be as specified, except that first polishing with coarse grade
carborundum stone shall not be done.

2.22.6 Anti Skid Grooves for Staircase Treads and Ramps

Signature of Contractor Page 59 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

Tread: Provide 3 Nos. 5mmx5mm grooves with a gap of 25mm centre to centre at a distance of 50mm
from nosing of the tread.
Pedestrian Ramp: Provide 5mm x 5mm groove throughout the length of the pedestrian ramp with a
gap of 100mm centre to centre.

2.23 CEMENT CONCRETE FLOORING

2.23.1 Cement Concrete

Cement concrete of specified mix grade shall be used and it shall generally conform to the
specifications.

2.23.2 Base Concrete

Flooring shall be laid on base concrete where so provided. The base concrete shall be provided with
the slopes required for the flooring. Flooring in verandah, Courtyard, kitchens & baths shall have
slope ranging from 1 : 48 to 1 : 60 depending upon location and as decided by the Engineer-In-
Charge.

Floors in water closet portion shall have slope of 1:30 or as decided by the Engineer-In-Charge to
drain off washing water. Further, necessary drop in flooring in bath, WC, kitchen near floor traps
ranging from 6 mm to 10 mm will also be provided to avoid spread of water. Necessary margin to
accommodate this drop shall be made in base concrete. Plinth masonry off set shall be depressed
so as to allow the base concrete to rest on it.

The flooring shall be commenced preferably within 48 hours of the laying of base concrete. The
surface of the base shall be roughened with steel wire brushes without disturbing the concrete.

Immediately before laying the flooring, the base shall be wetted and a coat of cement slurry @ 2 kg
of cement spread over an area of one sqm so as to get a good bond between the base and concrete
floor.

If the cement concrete flooring is to be laid directly on the RCC slab, the top surface of RCC slab
shall be cleaned and the laitance shall be removed and a coat of cement slurry @ 2 kg of cement
spread over an area of one sqm so as to get a good bond between the base and concrete floor.

2.23.3 Thickness

The thickness of floor shall be as specified in the Indicative item/specification/drawing.

2.23.4 Laying

Panels: Flooring of specified thickness shall be laid in the pattern including the border as given in the
drawings or as directed by the Engineer-In-Charge. The border panels shall not exceed 450 mm in
width and the joints in the border shall be in line with panel joints. The panels shall be of uniform size
and no dimension of a panel shall exceed 2 m and the area of a panel shall not be more than 2 sqm.

The joints of borders at corners shall be mitred for provision of strips.

2.23.5 Laying of Flooring with Strips:

Normally cement concrete flooring shall be laid in one operation using glass/ aluminium/PVC/brass
strips/stainless steel strips or any other strips as required as per drawing or instructions of the
Engineer-In-Charge, at the junction of two panels. This method ensures uniformity in colour of all the

Signature of Contractor Page 60 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

panels and straightness at the junction of the panels. 4 mm thick glass strips or 2 mm PVC strips or
2 mm aluminium or brass strips shall be fixed with their tops at proper level, giving required slopes.
Use of glass and metallic strips shall be avoided in areas exposed to sun.
2.23.6 Concreting:

Cement concrete shall be placed in the panels and be levelled with the help of straight edge and
trowel and beaten with thapy or mason’s trowel. The blows shall be fairly heavy in the beginning but
as consolidation takes place, light rapid strokes shall be given. Beating shall cease as soon as the
surface is found covered with a thin layer of cream of mortar. The evenness of the surface shall be
tested with straight edge. Surface of flooring be true to required slopes. While laying concrete, care
shall be taken to see that the strips are not damaged/disturbed by the labourers. The tops of strips
shall be visible clearly after finishing with cement slurry.

2.23.7 Laying of Flooring without Strips:

The laying of cement concrete flooring in alternate panels may be allowed by the Engineer-In-Charge
in case strips are not to be provided.

2.23.8 Shuttering:

The panels shall be bounded by angle iron or flats. The angle iron/flat shall have the same depth as
the concrete flooring. These shall be fixed in position, with their top at proper level giving required
slopes. The surface of the angle iron or flats, to come in contact with concrete shall be smeared with
soap solution or non-sticking oil (Form oil or raw linseed oil) before concreting. The flooring shall butt
against the unplastered masonry wall.
2.23.9 Concreting:

The concreting shall be done in the manner as described below.

The angle iron/ flats used for shuttering, shall be removed on the next day of the laying of cement
concrete. The ends thus exposed shall be repaired, if damaged with cement mortar 1: 2 (1 cement:
2 coarse sand) and allowed to set for minimum period of 24 hours. The alternate panels shall then
be cleaned of dust, mortar, droppings etc. and concrete laid. While laying concrete, care shall be
taken to see that the edges of the previously laid panels are not damaged and fresh mortar is not
splashed over them. The joints between the panels should come out as fine straight lines.

2.23.10 Finishing

The finishing of the surface shall follow immediately after the cessation of beating. The surface shall
be left for some time, till moisture disappears from it or surplus water can be mopped up. Use of dry
cement or cement and sand mixture stiffening the concrete to absorb excessive moisture shall not
be permitted. Excessive trowelling shall be avoided.

Fresh cement shall be mixed with water to form a thick slurry and spread @ 2 kg of cement over an
area of one sqm of flooring while the flooring concrete is still green. The cement slurry shall then be
properly processed and finished smooth.

The edges of sunk floors shall be finished and rounded with cement mortar 1:2 (1 cement: 2 coarse
sand) and finished with a floating coat of neat cement.
The junctions of floor with wall plaster, dado or skirting shall be rounded off where so specified.

The men engaged on finishing operations shall be provided with raised wooden platform to sit on so
as to prevent damage to new work.

Signature of Contractor Page 61 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

2.23.11 Curing

The curing shall be done for a minimum period of ten days. Curing shall not be commenced until the
top layer has hardened. Covering with empty gunnies bag shall be avoided as the colour of the
flooring is likely to be bleached due to the remnants of cement dust from the bags.

2.23.12 Precautions

Flooring in lavatories and bath room shall be laid only after fixing of water closet and squatting pans
and floor traps. Traps shall be plugged while laying the floors and opened after the floors are cured
and cleaned. Any damage done to W.C.’s squatting pans and floor traps during the execution of work
shall be made good.

During cold weather, concreting shall not be done when the temperature falls below 4°C. The
concrete placed shall be protected against frost by suitable covering. Concrete damaged by frost
shall be removed and work redone. During hot weather, precautions shall be taken to see that the
temperature of wet concrete does not exceed 38° C. No concreting shall be laid within half an hour
of the closing time of the day, unless permitted by the Engineer-In-Charge. To facilitate rounding of
junction of skirting, dado and floor, the skirting/dado shall be laid along with the border or adjacent
panels of floor.

2.24 CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT IN COURTYARD, RAMP AND TERRACE ETC.

Specifications described shall hold good as far as applicable except that:

(i) The panels shall be of uniform size and no dimension of a panel shall exceed 1.25 m and the area of
panel should not exceed 1.25 sqm for the thickness of panel’s upto 50 mm.

(ii) Concreting shall be done in alternate panels only and no glass/asbestos strips shall be provided.

2.24.1 Finishing

The finishing of the surface shall follow immediately after the cessation of beating. The surface shall
be left for some-time, till moisture disappears from it or surplus water can be mopped up.

Use of dry cement or cement and sand mix on the surface to stiffen the concrete or to absorb
excessive moisture shall not be permitted. Excessive trowelling shall be avoided. When the surface
becomes fairly stiff, it shall be finished rough with wooden floats or where so specified chequered
uniformly by pressing a piece of expanded metal of approved size.

2.25 TILE FLOORING

2.25.1 Ceramic Tile Flooring

[Link] Ceramic Tiles

The tiles shall be of approved make and shall generally conform to IS 15622. They shall be flat, and
true to shape and free from blisters crazing, chips, welts, crawling or other imperfections detracting
from their appearance. The tiles shall be tested as per IS 13630. Classification and Characteristics
of ceramic tiles shall be as per IS 13712.

The tiles shall be square or rectangular of nominal size. Table 1, 3, 5, and 7 of IS 15622 give the
modular preferred sizes and table 2, 4, 6 and 8 give the most common non modular sizes. Thickness
shall be specified by the manufacturer. It includes the profiles on the visible face and on the rear side.

Signature of Contractor Page 62 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

Manufacturer/supplier and party shall choose the work size of tiles in order to allow a nominal joint
width up to 2mm for unrectified floor tiles and up to 1mm for rectified floor tiles. The joint in case of
spacer lug tile shall be as per spacer. The tiles shall conform to table10 of IS 15622 with water
absorption 3 to 6% (Group BII).

The top surface of the tiles shall be glazed. Glaze shall be either glossy or matt as specified. The
underside of the tiles shall not have glaze on more than 5% of the area in order that the tile may
adhere properly to the base. The edges of the tiles shall be preferably free from glaze. However, any
glaze if unavoidable, shall be permissible on only up to 50 per cent of the surface area of the edges.

[Link] Coloured Tiles

Only the glaze shall be coloured as specified. The sizes and specifications shall be the same as for
the white glazed tiles.

[Link] Decorative Tiles

The type and size of the decorative tiles shall be as follows:

(i) Decorated white back ground tiles

The size of these tiles shall be as per IS 15622.

(ii) Decorated and having coloured back-ground

The sizes of the tiles shall be as per IS 15622.

[Link] Preparation of Surface and Laying

Base concrete or the RCC slab on which the tiles are to be laid shall be cleaned, wetted and mopped.
The bedding for the tile shall be with cement mortar 1:4 (1 cement: 4 coarse sand) or as specified.
The average thickness of the bedding shall be 20 mm or as specified while the thickness under any
portion of the tiles shall not be less than 10 mm.

Mortar shall be spread, tamped and corrected to proper levels and allowed to harden sufficiently to
offer a fairly rigid cushion for the tiles to be set and to enable the mason to place wooden plank across
and squat on it.

Over this mortar bedding neat grey cement slurry of honey like consistency shall be spread at the
rate of 3.3 kg of cement per square meter over an area up to one square meter. Tiles shall be soaked
in water washed clean and shall be fixed in this grout one after another, each tile gently being tapped
with a wooden mallet till it is properly bedded and in level with the adjoining tiles. The joints shall be
kept as thin as possible and in straight lines or to suit the required pattern.

The surface of the flooring during laying shall be frequently checked with a straight edge about 2 m
long, so as to obtain a true surface with the required slope. In bath, toilet W.C. kitchen and
balcony/verandah flooring, suitable tile drop or as shown in drawing will be given in addition to
required slope to avoid spread of water. Further tile drop will also be provided near floor trap.

Signature of Contractor Page 63 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

Where full size tiles cannot be fixed these shall be cut (sawn) to the required size, and their edge
rubbed smooth to ensure straight and true joints. Tiles which are fixed in the floor adjoining the wall
shall enter not less than 10 mm under the plaster, skirting or dado.

After tiles have been laid surplus cement slurry shall be cleaned off.

[Link] Pointing and Finishing

The joints shall be cleaned off the grey cement slurry with wire/coir brush or trowel to a depth of 2
mm to 3 mm and all dust and loose mortar removed. Joints shall then be flush pointed with white
cement added with pigment if required to match the colour of tiles. Where spacer lug tiles are
provided, the half the depth of joint shall be filled with polysulphide or as specified on top with under
filling with cement grout without the lugs remaining exposed. The floor shall then be kept wet for 7
days. After curing, the surface shall be washed and finished clean. The finished floor shall not sound
hollow when tapped with a wooden mallet.

2.25.2 Vitrified Tile Flooring

[Link] Vitrified Tiles

The tiles shall be of approved make and shall generally conform to IS 15622. They shall be flat, and
true to shape and free from blisters crazing, chips, welts, crawling or other imperfections detracting
from their appearance. The tiles shall be tested as per IS 13630. Classification and Characteristics
of Vitrified tiles shall be as per IS 13712.

The tiles shall be square or rectangular of nominal size. Table 12 of IS 15622 give the modular
preferred sizes (Tiles with water absorption E ≤ 0.08 per cent Group B1a) and the joint thickness in
flooring shall not be more than 1mm Thickness shall be specified by the manufacturer. It includes the
profiles on the visible face and on the rear side.

Manufacturer/supplier and party shall choose the work size of tiles in order to allow a nominal joint
width shall not be more than 1mm for rectified floor tiles. Table 12 of IS 15622 give the modular
preferred sizes (Tiles with water absorption E ≤ 0.08 per cent Group B1a) and the joint thickness in
flooring shall not be more than 1mm.

The top surface of the tiles shall be glazed. Glaze shall be either glossy or matt as specified. The
underside of the tiles shall not have glaze on more than 5% of the area in order that the tile may
adhere properly to the base. The edges of the tiles shall be preferably free from glaze. However, any
glaze if unavoidable, shall be permissible on only up to 50 per cent of the surface area of the edges.

[Link] Coloured Tiles

Only the glaze shall be coloured as specified. The sizes and specifications shall be the same as for
the white glazed tiles.

[Link] Decorative Tiles

The type and size of the decorative tiles shall be as follows:

(i) Decorated white back ground tiles

The size of these tiles shall be as per IS 15622.

(ii) Decorated and having coloured back-ground

Signature of Contractor Page 64 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

The sizes of the tiles shall be as per IS 15622.

[Link] Preparation of Surface and Laying

Base concrete or the RCC slab on which the tiles are to be laid shall be cleaned, wetted and mopped.
The bedding for the tile shall be with cement mortar 1:4 (1 cement: 4 coarse sand) or as specified.
The average thickness of the bedding shall be 20 mm or as specified while the thickness under any
portion of the tiles shall not be less than 10 mm. Mortar shall be spread, tamped and corrected to
proper levels and allowed to harden sufficiently to offer a fairly rigid cushion for the tiles to be set and
to enable the mason to place wooden plank across and squat on it.

Over this mortar bedding neat grey cement slurry of honey like consistency shall be spread at the
rate of 3.3 kg of cement per square meter over an area up to one square meter. Tiles shall be soaked
in water washed clean and shall be fixed in this grout one after another, each tile gently being tapped
with a wooden mallet till it is properly bedded and in level with the adjoining tiles. The joints shall be
kept as thin as possible and in straight lines or to suit the required pattern.

The surface of the flooring during laying shall be frequently checked with a straight edge about 2 m
long, so as to obtain a true surface with the required slope. In bath, toilet W.C. kitchen and
balcony/verandah flooring, suitable tile drop or as shown in drawing will be given in addition to
required slope to avoid spread of water. Further tile drop will also be provided near floor trap.

Where full size tiles cannot be fixed these shall be cut (sawn) to the required size, and their edge
rubbed smooth to ensure straight and true joints. Tiles which are fixed in the floor adjoining the wall
shall enter not less than 10 mm under the plaster, skirting or dado.
After tiles have been laid surplus cement slurry shall be cleaned off.

[Link] Pointing and Finishing

The joints shall be cleaned off the grey cement slurry with wire/coir brush or trowel to a depth of 2
mm to 3 mm and all dust and loose mortar removed. Joints shall then be flush pointed with white
cement added with pigment if required to match the colour of tiles. Where spacer lug tiles are
provided, the half the depth of joint shall be filled with polysulphide or as specified on top with under
filling with cement grout without the lugs remaining exposed. The floor shall then be kept wet for 7
days. After curing, the surface shall be washed and finished clean. The finished floor shall not sound
hollow when tapped with a wooden mallet.

2.26 FIXING OF TILE FLOORING WITH CEMENT BASED HIGH POLYMER MODIFIED QUICK SET
ADHESIVE (WATER BASED)

When tile flooring is to be laid over the existing flooring without dismantling old flooring it can be laid
with adhesive. The old flooring shall be thoroughly cleaned and checked for undulations, if any shall
be rectified with cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement: 3 coarse sand). Old cement concrete surface shall be
hacked and cleaned off to have proper bond with the old surface.

High polymer modified quick set tile adhesive (conforming to IS 15477) shall be thoroughly mixed
with water and a paste of zero slump shall be prepared so that it can be used within 1.5 to 2 hours. It
shall be spread over an area not more than one sqm at one time. Average thickness of adhesive shall
be 3 mm. The adhesive so spread shall be combed using suitable trowel. Tiles shall be pressed firmly
in to the position with slight twisting action checking it simultaneously to ensure good contact gently
being tapped with wooden mallet till it is properly backed with adjoining tiles. The tiles shall be fixed
within 20 minutes of application of adhesive. The surplus adhesive from the joints, surface of the tiles
shall be immediately cleaned.

Signature of Contractor Page 65 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

The surface of the flooring shall be frequently checked during laying with straight edge of above 2m
long so as to attain a true surface with required slope.

Where spacer lugs tiles are provided these shall be filled with grout with lugs remaining exposed.

Where full size tile cannot be fixed these shall be cut (sawn) to the required size and edges rubbed
smooth to ensure straight and true joints. Tiles which are fixed in floor adjoining to wall shall enter not
less than 10 mm under plaster, skirting or dado.

2.27 CERAMIC TILES IN SKIRTING AND DADO

The tiles shall be of approved make and shall generally conform to IS 15622. The tiles shall be
pressed ceramic covered by a glaze thoroughly matured and fitted to the body. The tiles shall be
sound, true to shape, flat and free from flaws and other manufacturing defects affecting their utility.

The top surface of the tiles shall be glazed. The underside of the tiles shall not have glaze on more
than 5% of the area in order that the tile may adhere properly to the base. The edges of the tiles shall
be free from glaze, however, any glaze if unavoidable shall be permissible on only up to 50 per cent
of the surface area of edges.

The glaze shall be free from welts, chips, craze, specks, crawling or other imperfections detracting
from the appearance when viewed from a distance of one meter. The glaze shall be either glossy or
matt as specified. The glaze shall be white in colour except in the case of coloured tiles when colours
shall be specified by the Engineer-In-Charge. There may be more than one colour on a tile.

2.27.1 Dimensions and Tolerances

Glazed pressed ceramic tiles shall be made square or rectangular in sizes Table 1, 3, 5 & 7 of IS
15622 give the modular sizes and table 2, 4, 6 & 8 of IS 15622 gives the sizes of non-modular tiles.
The tiles shall conform to IS 15622 for dimensional tolerance, physical and chemical properties.

Half tiles for use as full tiles shall have dimensions which shall be such as to make the half tiles when
jointed together (with 1 mm joint) match with dimensions of full tiles. Tiles may be manufactured in
sizes other than those specified above.

The thickness of the tiles shall be 5 mm or 6 mm or as specified.

The dimensions of fittings associated with the glazed tiles namely cover base, round edge tile, angles
corner cups, ridge and legs, cornices and capping beads shall be of the shape and dimensions as
required and the thickness of fittings shall be the same as the thickness of tiles given above.

2.27.2 Preparation of Surfaces

The joints shall be raked out to a depth of at least 15 mm in masonry walls.

In case of concrete walls, the surface shall be hacked and roughened with wire brushes. The surface
shall be cleaned thoroughly, washed with water and kept wet before skirting is commenced.

2.27.3 Laying

12 mm thick plaster of cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement: 3 coarse sand) mix of as specified shall be
applied and allowed to harden. The plaster shall be roughened with wire brushes or by scratching
diagonal at closed intervals.

Signature of Contractor Page 66 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

The tiles should be soaked in water, washed clean, and a coat of cement slurry applied liberally at
the back of tiles and set in the bedding mortar. The tiles shall be tamped and corrected to proper
plane and lines. The tiles shall be set in the required pattern and jointed. The joints shall be as fine
as possible. Top of skirting or dado shall be truly horizontal and joints truly vertical except where
otherwise indicated. Odd size/cut size of tile shall be adjusted at bottom to take care of slope of the
flooring.

Skirting and dado shall rest on the top of the flooring. Where full size tiles cannot be fixed these shall
be cut (sawn) to the required size and their edges rubbed smooth. Skirting /dado shall not project
from the finished “surface of wall” by more than the tile thickness, undulations if any shall be adjusted
in wall.

2.27.4 Curing and Finishing

The joints shall be cleaned off the grey cement grout with wire/coir brush or trowel to a depth of 2 mm
to 3 mm and all dust and loose mortar removed. Joints shall then be flush pointed with white cement
added with pigments if required to match the colour of tiles. The work shall then be kept wet for 7
days.

After curing, the surface shall be washed and finished clean. The finished work shall not sound hollow
when tapped with a wooden mallet.

2.28 DOOR FRAMES

2.28.1 Pressed Steel Door Frames (Fig. 1)

[Link] Materials

Steel door frames shall be manufactured from commercial mild steel sheet of specified thickness,
conforming to IS 2062 and 4351.

Steel door frames with or without fan light shall be made in the profiles indicated in Fig. 1 which may
be manufactured to suit doors of either type opening inwards or outwards as directed by the Engineer-
in-Charge.

[Link] Construction

Each door frame shall consist of hinge jamb, lock jamb, head and if required angle threshold (see
Fig. 1). These shall be welded or rigidly fixed together by mechanical means. Where no angle
threshold is required, temporary base tie shall be screwed to the feet of frames in order to form a rigid
unit. Where so specified base ties shall be of pressed mild steel 1.25 mm thick adjustable to suit floor
thickness of 35 or 40 mm and removable , or alternatively, threshold of mild steel angle of section 50
x 25 mm, minimum shall be provided for external doors frames.

[Link] Fabrication

The pressed steel door frames shall be got fabricated in an approved workshop as approved by the
Engineer-In-Charge.

[Link] Fixing Lugs (Fig. 1):

There shall be three adjustable lugs with split end tail to each jamb without fan light, and four for jamb
with fan light.

The head of the fixing lug shall be of one of the following lengths:

Signature of Contractor Page 67 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

(a) 98 mm long for use with profile A

(b) 120 mm long for use with profile B
(c) 160 mm long for use with profile C

The head shall be made from flat steel strip 25 mm wide and not less than 1.60 mm thick. The tail of
the lugs shall be 200mm long and shall be made of steel strip not less than 40 mm wide and not less
than 1 mm thick.

[Link] Hinges (Fig. 1):

100 mm mild steel butt hinges shall be used. For door frames 80 cm wide and under, three hinges
shall be rigidly fixed to one jamb and for door frames above 80 cm wide, four hinges shall rigidly fixed
to one jamb, if it is single shutter, where the height of door shutter exceeds 2.15 metres, one additional
hinge shall be provided for every 0.5 m or part thereof the additional height.

In all cases the hinges shall be so fixed that the distance from the inside of the head rebate to the top
of the upper hinge is 20 cm and the distance from the bottom of the door frame to the bottom of the
bottom hinge is also kept about 200 mm. The middle hinges shall be at equal distances from lower
and upper hinges. Hinges shall be made of steel 2.5 mm thick with zinc coated removable pin of 6
mm diameter. The space between the two leaves of the hinge when closed shall be 3 mm and the
leaf that is not welded to the frame shall have four counter sunk holes to take No. 10 cross recessed
head wood screws.

[Link] Mortar Guards :

Mortar guards of thickness of main frame sheet shall be provided in accordance to provisions of IS
4351 and as instructed by Engineer-In-Charge shall be provided. These shall be welded to the frame
at the head of the frame for double shutter doors to make provision for bolts. These shall also be
provided to the frame behind the hinges, mortice locks and latches, slots, aldrop and sliding /tower
bolts.

[Link] Lock – Strike Plate :

There shall be an adjustable lock- strike plate of steel complete with mortar guard to make provision
for locks or latches complying with the relevant Indian Standards (IS 4351) Lock-strike plates shall
be of galvanized mild steel and fixed at 95 cm from the head of the frame.

[Link] Shock Absorbers :

For side hung door there shall not be less than three buffers or rubber or other suitable material
inserted in holes in the rebate, one shall be located at the centre of the lock jamb and the other two
shall be at 30 cm. from top and bottom of the frame. For double leaf shutter door, two buffers shall
be provided.

[Link] Finishing

The surface of door frame shall be thoroughly cleaned, free of rust, mill-scale dirt oil etc. either by
mechanical means, for example sand or shot blasting or by chemical means such as picking. After
pretreatment of the surface one coat of approved primer i.e. red oxide zinc chrome primer conforming
to IS 2074. Two coats of paints as directed by the Engineer-In-Charge shall be applied to the exposed
surface.

[Link] Fixing

Signature of Contractor Page 68 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

Frames shall be fixed up right in plumb and plane. To avoid sag or bow in width during fixing or during
construction phase, temporary struts across the width preventing sides bulging inwards may be
provided. Wall shall be built solid on each side and grouted at each course to ensure solid contact
with frame leaving no voids behind the frame.

Three lugs shall be provided on each jamb with spacing not more than 75 cm. The temporary struts
should not be removed till the masonry behind the frame is set. In case screwed base tie is provided,
this should be left in position till the flooring is laid when it can be removed.

After pretreatment of the surface, one coat of steel primer and two coats, of paint, as directed by
Engineer-In-Charge shall be applied to the exposed surface.

Signature of Contractor Page 69 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

2.30 DOOR SHUTTERS

Signature of Contractor Page 70 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

Finished dimensions and tolerances of components of door shutters has been given in Table-1 below.

TABLE-1
Dimensions and Tolerances of Components of Door Shutters

Sl. Description Width mm Thickness mm

No. DOOR SHUTTERS
(a) Vertical Stile, top and freeze rail 100 ± 3 35 ± 1 or 40 ± 1
(b) Lock rail 50 ± 3 35 ± 1 or 40 ± 1
(c) Bottom rail 200 ± 3 35 ± 1 or 40 ± 1
(d) Muntin 100 ± 3 35 ± 1 or 40 ± 1
(e) Glazing bar 40 ± 3 35 ± 1 or 40 ± 1

2.30.1 Size and Types : Size and types of the timber panels and glazed shutters shall generally conform to
modular sizes specified in Table-2 below.

TABLE-2
Dimension of Door Shutters

Sl. Designation of Doors Width mm Height mm

No.
(i) 8DS 20 700 1905 (1945 )
(ii) 8DS 21 700 2005 (2045)
(iii) 9DS 20 800 1905 (1945)
(iv) 9DS 21 800 2005 (2045)
(v) 10 DS 20 900 1905 (1945)
(vi) 10 DS 21 900 2005 (2045)
(vii) 12 DT 20 11001) 1905 (1945)
(viii) 12 DT 21 11001) 2005 (2045)

Notes :-

(1) The designation refers to modular sizes of door openings. First number stands for width and
the last for height in modules (M = 100 mm). Alphabet D refers to doors, ‘S’ to single and ‘T’
to double leaf shutter.
(2) Standard sizes of door frames are covered in IS 4021 and IS 4351.
(3) The standard widths and heights for panel doors are arrived at as shown in Fig. 6 of IS 1003
(Pt. 1).
In case the modular height is taken from the finished floor level, the height of the door shall be the
one given in bracket. In the case of double leave shutters, the rebate in the shutter shall be as given
in 6.15 of IS 1003 (Pt. 1).

2.30.2 Panelling

The panel inserts shall be either framed into the grooves or housed in the rebate of stiles and rails.
Timber, plywood, and particle board panels as given under sub head and shall be fixed only with
grooves. The depth of the groove shall be 12 mm and its width shall accommodate the panel inserts
such that the faces are closely fitted to the sides of the groove. Panel inserts shall be framed into the
grooves of stiles and rails to the full depth of the groove leaving space of 1.5 mm. Width and depth
of the rebate shall be equal to half the thickness of stiles and rails. Glass panels, asbestos panels

Signature of Contractor Page 71 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

wire gauze panels and panel inserts of cupboard shutters shall be housed in the rebates of stiles and
rails.

2.30.3 Timber Panels:

Timber panels shall be preferably made of timber of large width; the minimum width and thickness of
the panel shall be 100 mm, and 15 mm respectively. When made from more than one piece, the
pieces shall be jointed with a continuous tongued and grooved joint glued together and reinforced
with headless nails at regular intervals not exceeding 100 mm. Depth and thickness of such joint shall
be equal to one-third of thickness of panel. The panels shall be designed such that no single panel
exceeds 0.5 square metre in area. The grains of timber panels shall run along the longer dimensions
of the panels. All panels shall be of the same species of timber unless otherwise specified.

2.30.4 Plywood Panels:

Plywood boards used for panelling of shutters shall be BWP type or grade as specified. Each panels
shall be a single piece of thickness, 9 mm for two or more panel construction and 12 mm thickness
for single panel construction unless otherwise specified.

2.30.5 Veneered Particle Board Panels:

Veneered Particle board used for panelling of shutters shall be Exterior Grade bonded with BWP type
synthetic resin adhesive as specified. Each panel shall be a single piece of thickness 12 mm unless
otherwise specified.

2.30.6 Fiber Board Panels:

Fiber board used for panelling of shutters shall be Exterior Grade bonded with BWP type synthetic
resin adhesive, each fiber board panel shall be a single piece unless otherwise specified.

2.30.7 Wire Gauze Panels:

Wire Gauze used for panelling of shutters shall be woven with 0.63 mm dia galvanized mild steel wire
to form average aperture size of 1.40 mm as specified. Wire gauze shall be securely housed into the
rebates of stiles and rails by giving right angles bend turned back and fixed by means of suitable
staples at intervals of 75 mm and over this wooden beading shall be fixed. The space between the
rebate and the beading shall be fixed with putty to give a neat finish. Each wire gauze panel shall be
a single piece, and the panels shall be so designed that no single panels exceeds 0.5 sqm in area.
However, care shall be taken to prevent sagging of wire gauge, of panel by providing and fixing 20 x
20 mm square or equivalent beading to the external face to the required patterns as decided by the
Engineer-In-Charge.

2.30.8 Glass Panels:

Glass panelling (Glazing) shall be done as specified. Glazing in the shutters of doors, windows and
ventilators of bath, WC and Lavatories shall be provided with frosted glass the weight of which shall
be not less than 10 kg/sqm. Frosted glass panes shall be fixed with frosted face on the inside. Glass
panels shall be fixed by providing a thin layer of putty conforming to IS 419 applied between glass
pane and all along the length of the rebate and also between glass panes and wooden beading.

Putty can be prepared by mixing one part of white lead with three parts of finely powdered chalk and
then adding boiled linseed oil to the mixture to form a stiff paste and adding varnish to the paste at
the rate of 1 liter of varnish to 18 kg of paste. Fixing of glass panes without beading shall not be

Signature of Contractor Page 72 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

permitted. Glazing shall be done after the shutters have been primed and prepared for painting, so
that wood may not draw oil out of putty.

2.30.9 Finish

Panels of shutters shall be flat and well sanded to a smooth and level surface.

2.30.10 Beading

Beadings in panelled shutter shall be provided where specified in architectural drawings or directed
by the Engineer-In-Charge. Each length of beading shall be single piece. Joints at the corners shall
be mitered and exposed edges shall be rounded. Beading shall be fixed with headless nails at 75
mm intervals. For external shutters, the beading shall be fixed on the outside face.

2.30.11 Machine/Factory made Shutters

Machine made shutters, where specified, shall be procured from an approved factory. For machine
made shutters, operations like sawing, planning, making tongue and tenons, cutting grooves,
mortises and rebates, drilling holes and pressing of joints shall be done by suitable machines.
Machines made shutters shall be brought to the site fully assembled but without any priming coat.
Panel inserts of sheet glass and wire gauze may, however, be fixed at site.

2.30.12 Fixing of Shutters

For side hung shutters of height up to 1.2 m, each leaf shall be hung on two hinges at quarter points
and for shutter of height more than 1.2 m, each leaf shall be hung on three hinges one at the center
and the other two at 200 mm from the top and bottom of the shutters. Top hung and bottom hung
shutters shall be hung on two hinges fixed at quarter points of top rail or bottom rail. Centre hung
shutter shall be suspended on a suitable pivot in the center of the frame. Size and type of hinges and
pivots shall be as specified. Flap of hinges shall be neatly counter sunk into the recesses cut to the
exact dimensions of flap. Screws for fixing the hinges shall be screwed in with screw driver and not
hammered in. Unless otherwise specified, shutters of height more than 1.2 mm shall be hung on butt
hinges of size 100 mm and for all other shutters of lesser height butt hinges of size 75 mm shall be
used. For shutter of more than 40 mm thickness butt hinges of size 125 × 90 × 4 mm shall be used.
Continuous (piano) hinges shall be used for fixing cup-board shutters where specified.

2.30.13 Fittings

Fittings shall be provided as per schedule of fittings decided by Engineer-In-Charge. The fittings shall
confirm to specifications.

2.30.14 Wooden Cleats and Blocks

Wooden cleats and blocks shall be fixed to doors and windows as directed by Engineer-In-Charge,
as per size and shape approved by him.

2.31 FLUSH DOOR SHUTTERS

Flush door shutters shall have a solid core and may be of the decorative or non-decorative (Paintable
type as per IS 2202 (Part I). Nominal thickness of shutters may be 25, 30 or 35 mm. Thickness and
type of shutters shall be as specified.

Signature of Contractor Page 73 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

Width and height of the shutters shall be as shown in the drawings or as indicated by the Engineer-
In-Charge. All four edges of the shutters shall be square. The shutter shall be free from twist or warp
in its plane. The moisture content in timbers used in the manufacture of flush door shutters shall be
not more than 12 per cent when tested according to IS 1708.

2.31.1 Core

The core of the flush door shutters shall be a block board having wooden strips held in a frame
constructed of stiles and rails. Each stile and rail shall be a single piece without any joint. The width
of the stiles and rails including lipping, where provided shall not be less than 45 mm and not more
than 75 mm. The width of each wooden strip shall not exceed 30 mm. Stiles, rails and wooden strips
forming the core of a shutter shall be of equal and uniform thickness. Wooden strips shall be parallel
to the stiles.

End joints of the pieces of wooden strips of small lengths shall be staggered. In a shutter, stiles and
rails shall be of one species of timber. Wooden strips shall also be of one species only but it may or
may not be of the same species as that of the stiles and rails. Any species of timber may be used for
core of flush door. However, any non-coniferous (Hard wood) timber shall be used for stiles, rails and
lipping.

2.31.2 Face Panel

The face panel shall be formed by gluing, by the hot-press process on both faces of the core, either
plywood or cross-bands and face veneers. The thickness of the cross bands as such or in the plywood
shall be between 1.0 mm and 3.0 mm. The thickness of the face veneers as such or in the plywood
shall be between 0.5 mm and 1.5 mm for commercial veneers and between 0.4 mm and 1.0 mm for
decorative veneers, provided that the combined thickness of both is not less than 2.2 mm. The
direction of the veneers adjacent to the core shall be at right angles to the direction of the wooden
strips. Finished faces shall be sanded to smooth even texture. Commercial face veneers shall
conform to marine grade plywood and decorative face veneers shall conform to type I decorative
plywood in IS 1328.

2.31.3 Lipping

Lipping, where specified, shall be provided internally on all edges of the shutters. Lipping shall be
done with battens of first class hardwood or as specified of depth not less than 25 mm. For double
leaved shutters, depth of the lipping at meeting of stiles shall be not less than 35 mm. Joints shall not
be permitted in the lipping.

2.31.4 Rebating

In the case of double leaves shutters the meeting of stiles shall be rebated by 8 mm to 10 mm. The
rebating shall be either splayed or square type as shown in drawing where lipping is provided. The
depth of lipping at the meeting of stiles shall not be less than 30 mm.

2.31.5 Opening for Glazing

When required by the purchaser opening for glazing shall be provided and unless otherwise specified
the opening for glazing shall be 250 mm in height and 150 mm or 200 mm in width unless directed
otherwise. The bottom of the opening shall be at a height of 1.4 m from the bottom of the shutter.
Opening for glazing shall be lipped internally with wooden batten of width not less than 25 mm.

Signature of Contractor Page 74 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

Opening for glazing shall be provided where specified or shown in the drawing.

2.31.6 Venetian Opening

Where specified the height of the Venetian opening shall be 350 mm from the bottom of the shutter.
The width of the opening shall be as directed but shall provide for a clear space of 75 mm between
the edge of the door and venetian opening but in no case the opening shall extend beyond the stiles
of the shutter. The top edge of the opening shall be lipped internally with wooden battens of width not
less than 25 mm. Venetian opening shall be provided where specified or shown in the drawing.

2.31.7 Tolerance
Tolerance on width and height shall be + 3 mm and tolerance on nominal thickness shall be ± 1.2
mm. The thickness of the door shutter shall be uniform throughout with a permissible variation of not
more than 0.8 mm when measured at any two points.

2.31.8 Adhesive
Adhesive used for bonding various components of flush door shutters namely, core, core frame,
lipping, cross-bands, face veneers, plywood etc. and for bonding plywood shall conform to BWP type,
phenol formaldehyde synthetic resin adhesive conforming to IS 848.

2.31.9 Tests
Samples of flush door shutters shall be subjected to the following tests:
(a) End Immersion Test
(b) Knife Test
(c) Glue Adhesion Test

One end of each sample shutter shall be tested for End Immersion Test. Two specimens of 150 x
150 mm size shall be cut from the two corners at the other end of each sample shutter for carrying
out Glue Adhesion Test. Knife Test shall be done on the remaining portion of each sample shutter.

2.31.10 Sample Size

Shutters of decorative and non-decorative type from each manufacturer, irrespective of their
thickness, shall be grouped separately and each group shall constitute a lot. The number of shutters
(sample size) to be selected at random from each lot for testing shall be as specified in below Table.
If the total number of shutters of each type in a work (and not the lot) is less than twenty five, testing
may be done at the discretion of the
shutter provided the sample does not fail in any of the test specified.

For knife test, glue adhesive test, slamming test, the end immersion test, the number of shutters shall
be as per col. 4 of below Table.

TABLE
Sample Size and Criteria for Conformity

Lot Size Sample Size Permissible no. of Sub. Sample

defective size
[1] [2] [3] [4]
Upto 26 to 50 8 0 1
51 – 100 13 1 2

Signature of Contractor Page 75 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

101 – 150 20 1 2
151 – 300 32 1 3
301 – 500 50 2 4
501 and above 80 2 5

2.31.11 Criteria for Conformity

All the sample shutters when tested shall satisfy the requirements of the tests laid down as specified.
The lot shall be declared as conforming to the requirements when numbers of defective sample does
not exceed the permissible number given in col. 3 of table above. If the number of sample shutters
found unsatisfactory for a test IS one, twice the number of samples initially tested shall be selected
and tested for the test. All sample shutters so tested shall satisfy the requirement of the test. If the
number of samples found unsatisfactory for a test is two or more, the entire lot shall be considered
unsatisfactory.

2.31.12 Fixing

This shall be as per CPWD Specifications.

2.31.13 Shelves

Shelves and vertical partitions of cupboards shall be of timber planks fiber board, particle board, block
board or veneered particle board as specified. Thickness and type of planks or boards shall be as
specified. Each shelf shall be a single piece and vertical partitions between two consecutive shelves
shall be without any joint. Exposed edges of boards having particle board core shall be sealed with 3
mm thick single piece teak wood strips of width equal to the thickness of board with headless pins.
The arrangement of shelves and vertical partitions shall be as per drawings or as directed by the
Engineer-in- Charge.

2.31.14 Fixing

Planks for shelves shall be planned on all faces and edges. In case of boards they shall be sawn to
the required size truly straight and square. Timber battens 25 x 40 mm unless otherwise specified
shall be planed smooth and fixed inside the cupboard with wooden plugs and screws. Shelves shall
be fixed to the battens and vertical portions shall be held in position by fixing them to the battens and
shelves using screws. Teakwood strips for edge sealing of the boards shall be planed smooth and
fixed with headless nails. Tolerance in width shall be ± 1.5 mm and in thickness 1 mm.

2.31.15 Hold Fasts

These shall be made from mild steel flat 40 × 5 mm size conforming to IS 7196 without any burns or
dents. 5 cm length of M.S. flat at one end shall be bent at right angle and one hole 11 mm dia shall
be made in it for fixing to wooden frame with 10 mm dia nut bolt. The bolt head shall be sunk into the
wooden frame, 10 mm deep and plugged with wooden plug. At the other end 10 cm length of the hold
fast flat shall be forked and bent of length as specified at right angle in opposite direction and
embedded in cement concrete block of size 30 x 10 x 15 cm of mix [Link] (1 cement : 3 coarse sand
: 6 graded stone aggregate, 20 mm nominal size) or as specified.

2.31.16 Fittings

Fitting shall be of mild steel brass, aluminium or as specified. Some mild steel fittings may have
components of cast iron. These shall be well made, reasonably smooth, and free from sharp edges
and corners, flaws and other defects. Screw holes shall be counter sunk to suit the head of specified
wood screws. These shall be of the following types according to the material used.

Signature of Contractor Page 76 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

(a) Mild Steel Fittings: These shall be bright finish black stone enameled or copper oxidized
(black finish), nickel chromium plated or as specified.

(b) Brass Fittings: These shall be finished bright satin finish or nickel chromium plated or copper
oxidized or as specified.

(c) Aluminium Fittings: These shall be anodized to natural matt finish or dyed anodic coating
not less than grade AC 10 of IS 1868.

(d) Stainless Steel Fittings: These shall be of SS grade 316.

The fittings generally used for different type of doors and windows are indicative and shall be
used as specified. The fittings to be actually provided in a particular work shall, however, be
decided by the Engineer-In-Charge.

Screws used for fittings shall be of the same metal, and finish as the fittings. However,
chromium plated brass screws or stainless steel screws shall be used for fixing aluminium
fittings.

Fittings shall be fixed in proper position as shown in the drawings or as directed by the
Engineer-In-Charge. These shall be truly vertical or horizontal as the case may be. Screws
shall be driven home with screw driver and not hammered in. Recesses shall be cut to the
exact size and depth for the counter sunking of hinges.

[Link] Butt Hinges

These shall be of the following types according to the material used.

(a) Mild steel butt hinges (Medium).

(b) Cast brass butt hinges light/ordinary or heavy.
(c) Extruded aluminium alloy butt hinges.
(d) Stainless steel Grade 316

[Link] Mild Steel (Medium): These shall be medium type manufactured from M.S. sheet.
These shall be well made and shall be free from flaws and defects of all kinds. All hinges shall be cut
clean and square and all sharp edges and corners shall be removed. These shall generally conform
to IS 1341.

[Link] Hinge Pin: Hinge pin shall be made of mild steel wire. It shall fit inside the knuckles firmly and
riveted head shall be well formed so as not to allow any play or shake, and shall allow easy movement
of the hinge, but shall not cause looseness.

[Link] Knuckles: The number of knuckles in the hinges of different sizes shall be as per IS 1341. The
size of knuckles shall be straight and at right angle to the flap. The movement of the hinges shall be
free and easy and working shall not have any play or shake.

[Link] Screw Holes: The screw holes shall be clean and counter sunk. These shall be suitable for counter
sunk head wood screws and of the specified size for different types, and sizes of hinges. The size of
the holes shall be such that when it is counter sunk it shall be able to accommodate the full depth of
counter sunk head of the wood screws. The nos. of screw holes shall as specified in IS 1341.

[Link] Sampling and Criteria for Conformity: The number of butt hinges to be selected from a lot shall
be depend on size of lot and shall be in accordance with Table below. Butt hinges for testing shall be

Signature of Contractor Page 77 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

selected at random from at least 10 per cent of the randomly selected packages subjected to
minimum of three equal number of hinges being selected from each package. All butt hinges selected
shall be checked for dimensions and tolerance requirements. Defects in manufacture and finish shall
also be checked and lot shall be considered conforming to the requirement of this specification, if the
number of defective hinges among those tested does not exceed the corresponding number given in
Table.

TABLE
Scale of Sampling and Criteria for Conformity

Sample Size Permissible No. of

Sl. No. Lot size
Defective hinges
1. Upto 150 5 0 5 0

2. 151 to 300 20 1 20 1
3. 301 to 500 32 2 32 2

4. 501 to 1000 50 3 50 3
5. 1001 and above 80 5 80 5

[Link] Cast Brass: These shall be light/ordinary or heavy as specified. These shall be well made and
shall be free from flaws and defects of all kinds. These shall be finished bright or chromium plated or
oxidized or as specified. These shall generally conform to IS 205.

[Link] Hinge Pin: Hinge pin shall be made of brass or of stainless steel. The hinge pins shall be firmly
riveted and shall be properly finished. The movement of the hinge pin shall be free, easy and square
and shall not have any play or shake.

[Link] Knuckles: The number of knuckles in each hinge shall not be less than five. The number of
knuckles in case of sizes less than 40 mm shall be three. The sides of the knuckles shall be straight
and at right angle to the flap. The movement of the hinge pin shall be free and easy and working shall
not have any play or shake.

[Link] Screw Holes: The screw holes shall be clean and counter sunk and of the specified size for
different types and size of hinges. The size of the holes shall be such that when it is counter sunk it
shall be able to accommodate the full depth of counter sunk head of wood screw specified.

[Link] Extruded Aluminium Alloy: These shall be manufactured from extruded sections. These shall
be well made and free from flaws and defects of all kinds. These shall generally conform to IS 205.

[Link] Hinge Pin: Hinge pin shall be made of mild steel (galvanized or aluminium alloy). The aluminium
alloy hinge pin shall be anodized. The hinge pin shall be finally riveted and shall be properly finished.
The movement of hinges shall be free easy and square and shall not have any play or shake.

[Link] Knuckles: Number of knuckles in each hinge pin shall not be less than 5. The number of knuckles
in case of sizes less than 40 mm be straight and at right angle to the flap. The movement of the hinge
pin shall be free and easy and working shall not have any play or shake.

[Link] Screw Holes: The screw holes shall be suitable for counter sunk head wood screws, and of
specified sizes for different type of hinges. The size of the holes shall be such that when it is counter
sunk it shall be able to accommodate the full depth of counter sunk head of wood screw specified.

Signature of Contractor Page 78 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

[Link] Sampling and Criteria for Conformity: The number of butt hinges to be selected from a lot shall
depend on the size of lot and shall be in accordance with below Table. Butt hinges for testing shall
be taken at random from at least 10 per cent of the package subject to a minimum of three, equal
number of hinges being selected from each package. All butt hinges selected from the lot shall be
checked for dimensional and tolerance requirements. Defects in manufacture and finish shall also be
checked. A lot shall be considered conforming to the requirements of this specification if the number
of defective hinges among those tested does not exceed the corresponding number given in Table.

TABLE
Scale of Sampling and Criteria for Conformity
Sl. No. Lot size Sample Permissible No. of
size defective hinges
1 Upto 200 15 0
2 201 to 300 20 1
3 301 to 500 30 2
4 501 to 800 40 2
5 801 and above 55 3

Note: Any hinge which fails to satisfy the requirements of any one or more of the characteristics shall
be considered as defective hinge.

[Link] Parliament Hinges

These shall be of SS/ mild steel cast brass or as specified, and shall generally conform to IS 362.
The size of parliament hinges shall be taken as the width between open flanges. Mild steel parliament
hinges shall be copper oxidized (thick finish) or as specified. The brass parliament hinges shall be
finished bright, chromium plated or oxidized or as specified.

The hinge pin shall be made of mild steel in the case of brass hinges. The hinge pin shall be mild
steel (galvanized) in the case of aluminium alloy hinges. The hinge pin shall be firmly riveted and
shall be properly finished. The movement of the hinges shall be free, easy and square, and shall not
have any play or shake. All screw holes shall be clean and counter sunk to suit the counter sunk head
of wood screws specified.

[Link] Sampling Criteria for and Conformity: The number of parliament hinges to be selected from a
lot shall depend on the size of lot and shall be in accordance with Table below. Parliament hinges for
testing shall be taken at random. All hinges selected from the lot shall be checked for dimensional
and tolerance requirements. Defects in manufacture and finish shall also be checked. A lot shall be
considered conforming to the requirements of this specification if the number of defective hinges
among those tested does not exceed the corresponding number given in Table below.

TABLE

Lot Size Sample Size Permissible No. of

Defective hinges
Upto 150 13 0
151 to 300 20 1
301 to 500 32 2
501 to 1000 50 3
1001 and above 80 5

Note: Any hinge which fails to satisfy the requirements of any one or more of the characteristics shall
be considered as defective hinge.

Signature of Contractor Page 79 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

[Link] Spring Hinges (Single or double acting)

These shall be single acting when the shutter is to open on one side only or double acting when the
shutter opens on both sides. These shall be made of SS/ M.S. , brass or as specified, and shall
generally conform to IS 453.

Hinges shall work smoothly and shall hold the door shutter truly vertical in closed position. Each
double-acting spring hinge shall withstand the following tests which shall be carried out after fixing it
to a swing door in the normal manner.

(a) When the door is pushed through 90° and released 2000 times on each side in quick
succession the hinge shall show no sign of damage or any appreciable deterioration of the
components during or on completion of the test.

(b) The door shall require a force of 2.0 ± 0.5 kg for 100 mm hinges and 3.0 ± 0.5 kg for 125 mm
and 150 mm hinges at a distance of 45 cm from the hinge pin to move the door through 90º.

The size of spring hinge shall be taken as the length of the plate.

[Link] Mild Steel : The cylindrical casing shall be made either from M.S. sheet of 1.60 mm thickness,
lap jointed and brazed, welded and riveted, or from solid drawn tube of thickness not less than 1.60
mm; or from mild sheet of 1.60 mm thickness pressed to from the two casing and the distance piece.
It shall be stove enameled black or copper oxidized or as specified.

[Link] Cast Brass: The cylindrical casing shall be made either from brass sheet of 1.60 mm thickness,
lap jointed and brazed, or from solid drawn brass tube of not less than 1.60 mm thickness. It shall be
satin, bright nickel plated or copper oxidized or as specified.

[Link].1 Sampling: The number of spring hinges shall be selected from the lot and this number shall
depend on the size of the lot and shall be in accordance with Table below.

TABLE

Lot size Sample Permissible No. of

size defective spring hinges
Upto 100 13 0
101 to 300 20 1
301 to 500 32 2
501 to 1000 50 3
1001 and above 80 5

[Link] Rising Hinges

These shall be made of brass, finished bright or chromium plated or oxidized or as specified. Its
shape and pattern shall be approved by the Engineer-In-Charge. The size of the rising hinge shall be
taken as the length of its plate.

[Link] Continuous Piano Hinges

Signature of Contractor Page 80 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

These shall be made from Stainless steel / mild steel or aluminium alloy sheet, these shall generally
conform to IS 3818. All screw holes shall be clean and counter sunk. Piano hinges shall be fixed in
the entire length of the cupboard shutters. Its size will be the width of the two flaps when open.

[Link] M.S. Piano Hinges

These shall be made from 1 mm or 0.80 mm thick M.S. sheets and shall be protected with anti-
corrosive treatment, such as bright polished, chromium plated or oxidized finish.

Hinge pin shall be of galvanized mild steel. It shall fit in the knuckle firmly so as not to allow any play
or shake and shall allow easy movement of hinge, but shall not cause looseness.

The sides of the knuckles shall be straight and at right angles to the flap. The movement of the hinge
shall be free and easy and working shall not have any play and shake.

[Link] Aluminium Piano Hinges: These shall be made of aluminium alloy sheet and shall be anodized
or as specified. The anodic coating shall not be less than the grade AC 15 of IS 1868.

Hinge pin shall be made of aluminium alloy with anodic coating not less than the grade of AC-15 of
IS 1868. The hinge pin shall fit in the knuckle firmly so as not to allow any play or shake and shall
allow easy movement of hinge but shall not cause looseness.
The sides of the knuckles shall be straight and at right angles to the flap. The movement of the hinge
shall be free and easy, and working shall not have any play and shake.

[Link].1 Sampling and Criteria for Conformity: It shall be same as specified in CPWD
Specifications.

[Link] Tee Hinges

These shall be made from M.S. sheets and shall be either bright finished or stove enameled black or
as specified. These shall generally conform to IS 206 (Tee hinges shall be well made, free from burrs,
flaws, and defects of any kind. The movement shall be square, and the working shall be free and
easy without any play or shake. The hole for the hinge shall be central to the bore and shall be square.

The hinge pin shall be firm and riveted over, so that the heads are well formed. All screw holes shall
be clear and counter sunk and shall be suitable for the counter sunk head of wood screws.

[Link].1 Sampling and Criteria for Conformity: It shall be same as specified in clause

[Link] Sliding Door Bolts (Aldrops).

These shall be of SS / mild steel, cast brass, aluminium or as specified, and shall be capable of
smooth sliding action.

[Link] M.S. Sliding Door Bolts: These shall be made of M.S. sheets and M.S. rods and shall generally
conform to IS 281. M.S. sliding door bolts shall be copper oxidized (black finish) or as specified.

[Link] Cast Brass Sliding Door Bolts: These shall be made from rolled brass and shall generally
conform to IS 2681. The hasp shall be of cast brass and secured to the bolt. Alternatively, the hasp
and the bolt may be cast in one piece. The fixing and staple bolts shall be cast with 6 mm studs. Bolts
shall be finished to shape and have threaded ends and provided with robs washers and nuts of square
or hexagon type. All components shall be finished smooth and polished before assembly.

Signature of Contractor Page 81 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

Cast brass sliding bolts shall be finished bright or chromium plated or oxidized or as specified.

[Link] Aluminium Sliding Door Bolts: These shall be made of aluminium alloy and shall generally
conform to IS 2681. Aluminium sliding door bolts shall be anodized. All screw holes shall be counter
sunk to suit the counter sunk head of screws of specified sizes. All edges and corners shall be finished
smooth. In case of single leaf door, when iron socket plate or a brass or aluminium fixing bolts (or
sliding door bolt) cannot be fixed, hole of suitable size shall be drilled in the door frame and an iron
or brass plate cut to shape shall be fixed at the face of the hole. The leading dimensions of the sliding
door bolts are illustrated.

[Link] Sampling and Criteria for Conformity: The number of sliding door bolt to be selected from a
lot shall depend on the size of lot and shall be in accordance with Table given below. For testing shall
be taken at random from at least 10 percent of the package subject to a minimum of three, equal
number of door bolts being selected from each package. All door bolts selected from the lot shall be
checked for dimensional and tolerance requirements. Defects in manufacture and finish shall also be
checked. A lot shall be considered conforming to the requirement of this specification if the number
of defects sliding door bolts among those tested does not exceed the corresponding number given in
Table below.
TABLE

Lot. size Sample Size Permissible speed

Decorative sliding door bolts
Upto 150 5 0
151 to 300 20 1
301 to 500 32 2
501 to 1000 50 3
1001 and above 81 5

[Link] Tower Bolts

These shall generally conform to IS 204 (Part. I) & IS 204 (Part. II). Tower bolts shall be well made
and shall be free from defects. The bolts shall be finished to the correct shape and shall have a
smooth action. All tower bolts made with sheet of 1.2 mm thickness and above shall have counter
sunk screw holes to suit counter sunk head of wood screws. All sharp edges and corners shall be
removed and finished smooth.

The height of knob of tower bolt when the door, window etc. is in closed position from the floor level
shall be not more than 1.9 meter.

Tower bolts shall be of the following types :-

(a) Aluminium barrel tower bolts with barrel and bolt of extruded sections of aluminium alloy. The
knob shall be properly screwed to the bolt and riveted at the back.

(b) Brass tower bolts with cast brass barrel and rolled or cast brass bolt.
Or
Brass tower bolts with barrel of extruded sections of brass and rolled or drawn brass bolt.

The knobs of brass tower bolts shall be cast and the bolt fixed with knob, steel spring and ball
shall be provided between the bolt and the barrel.

(c) Mild steel barrel tower bolts with mild steel barrel and mild steel bolt.
or
Mild steel tower bolts with mild steel barrel and cast iron bolts.

Signature of Contractor Page 82 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

(d) Stainless steel barrel tower bolts with mild SS barrel and SS steel bolt.
or
Stainless steel tower bolts with SS barrel and SS bolts of specified grades.

The plates and straps after assembly shall be firmly riveted or spot welded. The rivet head
shall be properly formed and the rivet back shall be flush with the plate. These shall be made
in one piece.
Unless otherwise specified bolt shall have finish as given below :-

(a) Mild steel tower bolts (Types 1 and 2) Bolts bright finished or plated as specified and barrel
and socket stove enameled black.

(b) Brass tower bolts (type 3 to 5) Bolt and barrel polished or plated as specified.

(c) Aluminium alloy tower bolts (type 6) Bolt and barrel anodized.

The anodic film may be either transparent or dyed as specified. The quality of anodized finish
shall not be less than grade AC-10 of IS 1868.

Sampling and Criteria for Conformity: It shall be same as specified.

[Link] M.S. Locking Bolt with Holes for Pad Locks

This shall conform to IS 7534.

This shall be of mild steel polished bright or copper oxidized batch electro galvanized or stove
enameled. In case of stove enameled locking bolts, the bolt may be finished bright.

[Link] Pull Bolt Locks

These shall be of M.S. cast brass or aluminium as specified. M.S. pull bolt locks shall be copper
oxidized (black finish) or as specified.

Brass pull bolt locks shall be finished bright, chromium plated or oxidized as specified.
Aluminium pull bolt locks shall be anodized and the anodic coating shall not be less than grade. A.C.
10 of IS 1868. The bolt shall be 10 mm in diameter and the fixing plate 3 mm thick. The stop block
shall be screwed to the fixing plate by a small ball and spring over which the bolt shall slide.

The fixing plate shall have four holes for fixing it to the door leaf, two of which shall be square to
receive 6 mm dia. bolts with round heads, the remaining two shall receive machine screwed with lock
nuts. The receiving plate shall be of the same width and thickness as the fixing plate and shall have
3 counter sunk holes.

Where the bolt slides into wooden members, like the chowkhat, which have a rebate, the receiving
plate shall also be correspondingly shaped so as to fit into the rebate. The screws and bolts shall
have the same finish as the main bolt. The leading dimensions of pull bolt locks are given in the
drawing. The denominating size of the pull bolt locks shall be length of the fixing plate between guides
plus the thickness of the guides.

[Link] Door Latch

Signature of Contractor Page 83 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

This shall be of mild steel, cast brass, or as specified and shall be capable of smooth sliding action.
In case, of mild steel latch, it shall be copper oxidized (black finish) or as specified and in case of
brass, it shall be finished bright, chromium plated or oxidized or as specified. The size of door latch
shall be taken as the length of the latch.

[Link] Indicating Bolt (Vacant/Engaged)

These shall be of SS, cast brass finished bright chromium plated, or oxidized or as specified. The
shape and pattern shall be approved by the Engineer-In-Charge.

[Link] Mortice Lock and Latch

This should generally conform to IS 2209.

The size of the mortice lock shall be denoted by the length of the body towards the face and it shall
be 65 mm, 75 mm and 100 mm as specified. The measured length shall not vary more than 3 mm
from the length specified.

[Link] Non-interchangeable Keys: Testing of non-interchangeable keys shall be as per IS 2209.

The clear depth of the body shall not be more than 15 mm. The fore end shall be firmly fitted to the
body suitably by counter sunk head screw. The latch bolt shall be of specified material and of section
not less than 12 x 16 mm for all sizes of locks. If made of two piece construction both parts shall be
riveted. Ordinary lever mechanism with not less than two levers shall be provided. False levers shall
not be used. Lever shall be fitted with one spring of phosphor bronze or steel wire and shall withstand
the tests as provided in IS 2209.

Locking bolts, spring and strike plate shall conform to IS 2209.

[Link] Handles: These shall conform to IS 4992.

[Link] Keys: Each lock shall be provided with two keys.

Sampling, Criteria for Conformity: It shall be the same as specified.

Tests: The finally assembled locks shall be tested as prescribed.

[Link] Mortice Latch (with Locking Bolt)

These are generally used in doors of bath rooms, WC’s and private rooms.

Mortice latch shall, in respect of shape, design and mechanism of the latch and its components parts,
generally conform to IS 5930. The material used for the different component parts of the latch shall
comply with Tables 1 and 2 of IS 5930, unless otherwise specified.

The size of the latch shall be denoted by the length of the body towards the face and shall be 65 mm,
75 mm or 100 mm as specified. The depth of the body shall not be more than 15 mm.

The latch shall be of size 10 × 18 mm of shape as shown in Fig. 1 of IS 5930. The locking bolt shall
be of section not less than 8 x 25 mm for all size of locks. The mechanism of the latch bolt, its spring,
striking plate etc. shall be as described in IS 5930. The handles provided shall conform to IS 4992.

[Link] Mortice Lock and Latch (Rebated)

Signature of Contractor Page 84 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

These are slightly different from mortice lock described in [Link] and are designed for use in
double leaved doors. These should generally conform to IS 6607.

[Link] Handles, Keys, Sampling, Criteria for Conformity and Test: These shall be same as specified.

[Link] Mortice Night Latch

This is a mortice lock having a single spring bolt withdrawn from the outside by using the key and
from inside by turning the knob and with an arrangement whereby the lock can be prevented from
being opened by its key from outside while the night latch is used from inside the room.

This should generally conform to IS 3847.

It shall be cast or sheet brass, cast or sheet aluminium alloy or Mild steel as specified and of best
quality of approved make. These shall be bright finished or copper oxidized (black) finish as specified.
Nominal size of the latch shall be denoted by the length of the face over the body in millimeters.
These shall have not less than two levers. False (Dummy) levers shall not be allowed.

Keys: Each latch shall be provided with two keys which should work smoothly and without any
appreciable friction in the lock.

[Link] Cupboard or Wardrobe Lock

This should generally conform to IS 729. The size of the cupboard lock shall be 40, 50, 65 & 75 mm.
This shall be made of cast brass and shall be of the best make of approved quality. These shall be
finished bright or chromium plated or oxidized or as specified. The size of the lock shall be denoted
by the length of the face across the body in mm.
These locks shall be fitted with four, five or six levers as specified. False (dummy) levers shall not be
used.

[Link] Kicking Plates

This shall be of brass (finished bright or chromium plated or oxidized) bronze, stainless steel,
aluminium or as specified. Aluminium kicking plates shall be anodized and the anodic coating shall
not be less than grade AC-10 of IS 1868. It shall be made from a plate of minimum thickness 3.0 mm
& 1.5 mm in case of stainless steel. Shape of the plate shall be as specified. This shall have beveled
or straight edges and shall be fixed by means of counter sunk or rounded screws of the same material
and finish as that of the plate. The shape and pattern shall be according to the drawings and as
approved by the Engineer-In-Charge.

Signature of Contractor Page 85 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

[Link] Door Handles (Doors and Windows)

These should generally conform to IS 208. The door handles shall be well made and free from
defects. These shall be finished correct to shape and dimensions. All edges and corners shall be
removed and finished smooth so as to facilitate easy handling. Cast handle shall be free from casting
defects. Where the grip portion of the handle is joined with the base piece by mechanical means, the
arrangement shall be such that the assembled handle shall have adequate strength comparable to
that of integrally cast type handles.

Door handles shall be of the following types according to the material used:

(a) Cast or Sheet Aluminium Alloy Handles: These shall be of aluminium of specified size, and
of shape and pattern as approved by the Engineer-In-Charge. The size of the handle shall be
determined by the inside grip of the handle. Door handles shall be of 100 mm size and window
handles of 75 mm size unless, otherwise specified. These shall be fixed with 25 mm long
wood screws of designation No. 6. Aluminium handles, shall be anodized and the anodic
coating shall not be less than grade AC 15 – IS 1868 as specified. The finish can be bright
natural, matt or satin or dyed as specified.

(b) Cast Brass Handles: These shall be of cast brass of specified size and of the shape and
pattern as approved by the Engineer-In-Charge. The size of the handle shall be determined
by the inside grip of the handle. Door handles shall be of 100 mm size and window handles
of 75 mm size, unless otherwise specified. These shall be fixed with 25 mm long wood screws
of designation No 6. Brass handles shall be finished bright satin or nickel chromium plated or
copper oxidized or as specified.

(c) Mild Steel Handles: These shall be of mild steel sheet, pressed into oval section. The size
of the handles will be determined by the inside grip of the handle. Door handles shall be 10
mm size and window handles of 75 mm size unless otherwise specified. These shall be fixed
with 25 mm long wood screws of designation No. 6., Iron handles shall be copper oxidized
(black finish) or stove enameled black or as specified.

Sampling and Criteria for Conformity: The number of handles to be selected from a lot shall
depend on the size of lot and shall be in accordance with below Table. Handles for testing shall be
selected at random for at least 10 percent of packages. Subject to a minimum 3, equal number of
door handles being selected from each such package. All door handles shall be checked for
dimensional requirement and finish. Any door handle which fails to satisfy the requirement of
dimensions or finish or both shall be considered as defective.

A lot shall be considered as conforming to requirement of this specification, if the number of defective
handles among those tested does not exceed the corresponding number of defectives is greater than
or equal to rejection number given in column 4 of Table below, the lot shall be deemed as not meeting
the requirements of this specification.

TABLE
Scale of Sampling and Criteria for Conformity

Signature of Contractor Page 86 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

Lot size Sample size Acceptance no. Rejection no.

[1] [2] [3] [4]
Upto 50 8 0 1
51 to 90 13 1 2
91 to 150 20 1 2
151 to 280 32 2 3
281 to 500 50 3 4
501 to 1200 80 5 6
1201 and above 125 7 8

[Link] Floor Door Stopper

The floor door stopper shall conform to IS 1823. This shall be made of cast brass of overall size as
specified and shall have rubber cushion. The shape and pattern of stopper shall be approved by the
Engineer-In-Charge. It shall be of brass finished bright, chromium plated or oxidized or as specified.

The size of floor stopper shall be determined by the length of its plate. It shall be well made and shall
have four counter sunk holes for fixing the door stoppers to the floor by means of wood screws. The
body for housing of the door stopper shall be cast in one piece and it shall be fixed to the cover plate
by means of brass or mild steel screws and cover plate shall be of casting or of sheet metal. The
spring shall be fixed firmly to the pin. Tongue which would be pressed while closing or opening of the
door shall be connected to the lower part by means of copper pin. On the extreme end a rubber piece
shall be attached to absorb shock. All parts of the door stopper shall be of good workmanship and
finish, burrs and sharp edges removed. It shall be free from surface and casting defects. Aluminium
stopper shall be anodized and anodic film shall not be less than grade AC-10 of IS 1868.

Sampling and Criteria for Conformity: The number of floor door stoppers to be selected from each
lot shall depend on the size of the lot and shall be in accordance with col. 1 and 2 of Table below.

These stoppers shall be selected at random from at least 10 percent of the randomly selected
packages subject to a maximum of three equal number of stoppers being selected from each such
package.

All the floor stoppers selected shall be checked for dimensional requirement, material, manufacture
and finish. Any of door stopper which fails to satisfy any one or more of these requirement shall be
considered as defective door stopper.

A lot shall be considered as conforming to the requirements of this specifications if the number of
defective floor door stoppers among these tested does not exceed the corresponding number given
in col. 3 of Table-A below. Otherwise it shall be considered as not conformity to the requirements of
this specification.

TABLE-A
Scale of Sampling and Criteria for Conformity

Signature of Contractor Page 87 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

Lot Size Sample Size Permissible number of

defective floor Door stoppers
[1] [2] [3]
Upto 100 5 0
101 to 300 0 1
301 to 500 32 2
501 to 1000 50 3
1001 and above 80 5

TABLE-B
Requirements for Rubber for Use in Floor Door Stoppers

Particulars Requirements Testing Procedure

Relative density Max. 1.3 IS 3400 (Part IX)
Hardness 60 + 5 IS 3400 (Part 2)
Ageing for 24 hours (a) Change in initial hardness IS 3400 (Part II)
at 100°C ± (b) Shall not develop brittleness -do-
+ 5, – 0

[Link] Hanging Rubber Door Stopper

These shall be of cast brass, finished bright, chromium plated or as specified. Aluminium stopper
shall be anodized and the anodic coating shall not be less than grade AC-10 of IS 1868. The size
and pattern of the door stopper shall be approved by the Engineer-In-Charge. The size shall be
determined by its length.
[Link] Universal Hydraulic Door Closer (Exposed Type)
These shall be made of cast iron/aluminium alloy/zinc alloy and of shape and pattern as approved by
the Engineer-In-Charge. These shall generally conform to IS Specifications for door closers
(Hydraulically regulated) IS 3564. The door closers may be polished or painted and finished with
lacquer to desired colour. Aluminium alloy door closer shall be anodized and the anodic coating shall
not be less than grade AC 15 of IS 1868. All dents, burrs and sharp edges shall be removed from
various components and they shall be pickled, scrubbed and rinsed to remove grease, rust, scale or
any other foreign elements. After pickling, all the M.S. parts shall be given phosphating treatment in
accordance with IS 3618. The nominal size of door closers in relation to the weight and the width of
the door size to which it is intended to be fitted shall be given in Table-C below.
TABLE-C
Type and Designation of Door Closers
Designation Mass of Width of the Remarks
of closers the door (kg) door(mm)
1. Upto 35 Upto 700 For light doors such as double
leaved and toilet doors.
2. 36 to 60 701 to 850 Interior doors, such as of bed
rooms, kitchen and store
3. 61 to 80 851 to 1000 Main doors in a building, such as
entrance doors
Sampling and Criteria for Conformity: All the door closer of the same nominal size and shape and
from the same batch of manufacture, in one consignment shall constitute a lot. The number of door
closers to be taken at random from a lot shall depend upon the size of the lot. The sample shall be
tested for construction, finish, dimensions, interchangeability of parts and performance in accordance
of Table below. Any door closer failing in any one or more of these characteristics shall be considered
as defective. If in the first sample, the number of defective door closer is less than or equal to

Signature of Contractor Page 88 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

corresponding acceptance number, the lot shall be declared as conforming to the requirement of
these characteristics. If the number of defective door closer is greater than or equal to the rejection
number, the acceptance number but less than the rejection number, lot shall be deemed as not
meeting with requirements of these characteristics. If the number of defectives is greater than the
acceptance number, but less than the rejection number, a second sample of the size equivalent to
that of the first shall be taken to determine the conformity or otherwise of the lot. The number of
defective door closers found in the first and the second sample shall be combined and if the combined
number of defective thus obtained is less than or equal to the corresponding acceptance number, the
lot shall be declared as conforming to the requirements of these characteristics.

2.31.17 Endurance Test- Two door closer in case of lot size 280 or less and five door closers in case of lot
size more than 280 shall be selected from those already found satisfactory. These door closers shall
be tested for the endurance test. If all the door closers tested for endurance test satisfy the
requirement of this standard, the lot shall be deemed as having satisfied the requirements of
endurance test, otherwise not.
TABLE

No. of door Sample Sample Cumulative Acceptance Rejection

closers in the size sample size Number Number
lot
Upto 50 First 8 8 0 2
Second 8 16 1 2
51 to 90 First 13 13 0 2
Second 13 26 1 2
91 to 150 First 20 20 0 3
Second 20 40 3 4
151 to 280 First 32 32 1 4
Second 32 64 4 5
281 to 500 First 50 50 2 5
Second 50 100 6 7
501 to 1200 First 80 80 3 7
Second 80 160 8 9
1201 to 3200 First 125 125 5 9
Second 125 250 12 13
3201 and First 200 200 7 11
above Second 200 400 18 19

2.31.18 Performance Requirements : After being fitted in its position when the door is opened through 90°,
the same should swing back to angle of 20° ± 5° with nominal speed but thereafter, the speed should
get automatically retarded and in case of doors with latches, it should be so regulated that in its final
position the door smoothly negotiates with the latch.

2.32 LAMINATED VENEER LUMBER (LVL)

Laminated Veneer Lumber door frames and shutters shall conform to IS 14616.

2.32.1 Material

[Link] Laminated Veneer Lumber (LVL)

(a) Laminated Veneer Lumber is made of rubber wood silver oak, eucalyptus, Poplars, acacias
etc. veneers glued together having grains of all the veneers in one direction under high

Signature of Contractor Page 89 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

temperature and pressure to develop high Modulus of Rapture & Modulus of elasticity.
Veneers for LVL shall be of thickness between 1.5 to 2.5 mm.
(b) Veneers shall be free from knot holes, decayed knots except pin knots, unfilled splits wider
than 3 mm, concentrated borer holes, shakes, objectionable decay or termite attack, except
that for the face veneers none of these defects nor cross grain exceeding 1 in 10 shall be
permitted. The nominal thickness of all the veneers used shall be identical and uniform within
a tolerance of + 5 percent.

(c) Adhesives: Only BWP grade adhesive conforming to IS 848 shall be used for making LVL.

(d) Preservatives: Veneers used for LVL shall be given suitable preservative treatment before
lamination, with a preservative that is compatible with the adhesive to be used. Only fixed
type of water soluble preservatives, CCA or CCB, or non-leachable, solvent soluble
preservatives as per IS 401 shall be used for treating the veneers. Retentions of preservatives
shall be as per IS 401 depending upon the proposed end use.

All the Veneers shall be given preservative treatment by one of the water soluble fixed type
treatment, Copper Chrome-Boron Composition. (CCB) as per IS 401. The treated Veneers
shall then be dried having moisture content less than 6%. The Veneers shall be glued
together, by keeping all the grains in one direction, with BWP grade synthetic resin adhesive
conforming to IS 848. The Veneers having moisture content less than 6% so glued, shall be
pressed in hot press at high temperature of 140 degree C to 180 degree C. and pressure 1.4
to 1.8 MPa. The net absorption of preservative in LVL when tested as per IS 2753 shall not
be less than 8.0 kg/m3 Veneers shall be scarf jointed only length wise and not in the direction
of width with EWP type synthetic resin adhesive. However, the length of individual Veneer
shall not be less than 600 mm.

2.32.2 Moisture Content

The average moisture content of three test specimens, when determined in accordance with IS 1734
(Part 1) shall be between 5 to 15%.

2.32.3 Tests

The tests as per Table-1 of IS 14616 shall be carried out by the manufacturer on the LVL (Laminated
Veneer Lumber) sections on each batch.

The manufacturer shall get the tests done on at least three samples of each batch by the standard
method of test to ensure quality and performance of the material as per para 8.2 of IS 14616.

The manufacturer shall provide a certificate with the delivery challan indicating that the material
conforms to IS 14616 along with the copy of the test report of the relevant batch.

2.33 ALUMINIUM

2.33.1 Aluminium Sections

Aluminium sections used for fixed/openable windows, ventilators, partitions, frame work &
doors etc. shall be suitable for use to meet architectural designs to relevant works and shall
be subject to approval of the Engineer-In-Charge for technical, structural, functional and visual
considerations. The aluminium extruded sections shall conform to IS 733 and IS 1285 for

Signature of Contractor Page 90 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

chemical composition and mechanical properties. The stainless steel screws shall be of grade
AISI 304.

The permissible dimensional tolerances of the extruded sections shall be as per IS 6477 and
shall be such as not to impair the proper and smooth functioning/ operation and appearance
of door and windows.

Aluminium glazed doors, windows etc. shall be of sizes, sections and details as shown in the
drawings. The details shown in the drawings may be varied slightly to suit the standards
adopted by the manufacturers of the aluminium work, with the approval of Engineer-In-
Charge. Before proceeding with any fabrication work, the contractor shall prepare and submit,
complete fabrication and installation drawings for each type of glazing doors, windows,
ventilators and partition etc. for the approval of the Engineer-In-Charge. If the sections are
varied, the contractor shall obtain prior approval of Engineer-in- Charge.

2.33.2 Powder Coating

[Link] Material: The powder used for powder coating shall be Epoxy/polyester powder of make
approved by the Engineer-In-Charge. The contractor shall give detailed programme for
powder coating in advance, to facilitate the inspection by Engineer-In-Charge or his
authorized representative.

[Link] Pre-treatment: Each aluminium alloy extrusion or performed section shall be thoroughly
cleaned by alkaline or acidic solutions under the conditions specified by chemical conversion
coating supplier and then rinsed. A chemical conversion coating shall be applied by treatment
with a solution containing essentially chromate ions or chromate and phosphate ions as the
active components as applicable. The amount of the conversion coating deposited depends
on the type used by the conversion coating chemical supplier. The conversion coating shall
be thoroughly rinsed either with the solution specified by the conversion coating chemical
supplier or with de-mineralized water and then dried at the temperature for the time specified
by the conversion coating chemical supplier. The contractor shall submit the detail
specifications and application procedure for application of conversion coating for approval of
Engineer-In-Charge. The metal surface after the conversion coating pretreatment and prior to
the application of the coating shall be free from dust or powdery deposits.

[Link] Process: The polyester powder shall be applied by electrostatic powder spray method. Before
start of powder coating the contractor shall submit detail specification for application of
polyester powder from manufacturer of the polyester powder for approval of Engineer-In-
Charge. The powder coating shall be applied as per the specification approved by Engineer-
In-Charge.

[Link] Thickness: The thickness of the finished polyester powder coating measured by micron
meter shall not be less than 50 micron nor more than 120 micron at any point.

[Link] Performance Requirements for the Finish

(i) Surface appearance: The finish on significant surfaces shall show no scratches when
illuminated and is examined at an oblique angle, no blisters, craters; pinholes or scratches
shall be visible from a distance of about 1 m. There shall not be any visible variation in the
colour of finished surfaces of different sections and between the colours of different surfaces
of same section.

(ii) Adhesion: When a coated test piece is tested using a spacing of 2 mm between each of the
six parallel cuts (the cut is made through the full depth of powder coating so that metal surface

Signature of Contractor Page 91 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

is visible) and a piece of adhesive tape, approximately 25 mm x 150 mm approved by the

Engineer-In-Charge is applied firmly to the cut area and then removed rapidly by pulling at
right angles to the test area, no pieces of the finish other than debris from the cutting operation
shall be removed from the surface of the finish.

Protection of Powder Coated / Anodizing Finish: It is mandatory that all aluminium

members shall be wrapped with self-adhesive non-staining PVC tape, approved by Engineer-
In-Charge.

2.34 EPDM- GASKETS

The EPDM Gaskets shall be of size and profile as shown in drawings and as called for, to render the
glazing, doors, windows, ventilators etc. air and water tight. Samples of gaskets shall be submitted
for approval and the EPDM gasket approved by Engineer-In-Charge shall only be used. The
contractor shall submit documentary proof of using the above material in the work to the entire
satisfaction of Engineer-In-Charge.

The EPDM gasket shall meet the requirements as given in Table below:

TABLE

Sl. No. Description Standard Follow Specification

1 Tensile strength Kg.f/cm2 ASTM-D 412 70 Min.
2 Elongation at break % ASTM-D 412 250 Min.
3 Modulus 100% Kgf/cm2 ASTM-D 412 22 Min.
4 Compression set % at 0o CC 22 Hrs. ASTM-D 395 50 Max.
5 Ozone resistance ASTM-D 1149 No visible
cracks

2.34.1 SEALANT

The sealants of approved grade and colour shall only be used. The silicone for perimeter joints
(between Aluminium section and RCC/Stone masonry) shall be of approved make.

2.34.2 METHOD OF APPLICATION

Surface Preparation: The cleaning of all joints and glazing pockets by removing all foreign matter
and contaminants such as grease, oil, dust, water, frost, surface dirt, old sealants or glazing
compounds and protective coatings.

2.34.3 MASKING

Areas adjacent to joints shall be masked to ensure neat sealant lines. Masking tape shall not be
allowed to touch clean surfaces to which the silicone sealant is to adhere. Tooling shall be completed
in one continuous stroke immediately after sealant application and before a skin forms and masking
shall be removed immediately after tooling.

2.34.4 APPLICATION

Install backer rod of appropriate size and apply silicone sealant in a continuous operation using a
positive pressure adequate to properly fill and seal the joint. The silicone sealant shall be tooled with

Signature of Contractor Page 92 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

light pressure to spread the sealant against backing material and the joint surfaces before a skin
forms.

A tool with convex profile shall be used to keep the sealant within the joint. Soap or water shall not
be used as a tooling aid. Remove masking tape as soon as silicone joint is tooled.

Tolerance: A tolerance of + 3 mm shall be allowed in the width of silicone joints. The depth of the
joints at throat shall not be less than 6 mm.

2.35 M.S. WORK

2.35.1 M.S. RAILING:

Steel work welded in built up sections/framed worK including cutting hoisting, rixing in position and
applying a priming coat of approved steel primer using structural steel, etc. as required:
In stringers, treads, landings etc. of stair cases, including use of chequered plate wherever required,
all complete AND In gratings, frames, guard bar, ladders, railings, brackts. gates & similar works.

2.35.2 M.S. ANGLE FRAME:

Providing and fixing angle iron frames for doors, windows and ventilators of mild steel Angle sections
of size 35x35x5 mm, joints mitred and welded by angle iron 35x35x5 mm or 35x 5 mm flat pieces to
the existingT-iron frame or to the wall with dash fastener, including fixing of necessary butt hinges
and screws and applying a priming coat of approved steel primer, all complete as per the direction of
Engineer-In-charge.
Providing M.S. foot rests including fixing in manholes with 20x20x10 cm cement concrete blocks [Link]
(1 cement : 3 coarse sand : 6 graded stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size) as per standard design
: With 20x20 mm square bar.

2.35.3 M.S. TUBULAR FRAME:

Providing and fixing M.S. Tubular frames for doors, windows, ventilators and cupboard with
rectangular/ L-Type sections, made of 1.60 mm thick M.S. Sheet, joints mitred, welded and grinded
finish, with profiles of required size, including fixing of necessary butt hinges and screws and applying
a priming coat of approved steel primer.
Fixing with 15x3 mm lugs 10 cm long embedded in cement concrete block 15x10x10 cm of C.C.
[Link](1 Cement : 3 coarses and : 6 graded stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size).

2.35.4 FIXING:

Providing and fixing carbon steel galvanised ( minimum coating 5 micron) dash fastener of 10 mm
dia double threaded 6.8 grade (yield strength 480 N/mm2), counter sunk head, comprising of 10 m
dia polyamide PA 6 grade sleeve, including drilling of hole in frame , concrete/ masonry, etc. as per
direction of Engineer-in-charge: 10 x 60 mm EACH.

2.35.5 M.S. FOOTREST:

Providing M.S. foot rests including fixing in manholes with 20x20x10 cm cement concrete blocks [Link]
(1 cement : 3 coarse sand : 6 graded stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size) as per standard design
: With 20x20 mm square bar.

Signature of Contractor Page 93 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

2.35.6 PRECAST RCC COVER:

Providing and fixing in position pre-cast R.C.C. manhole cover and frame of required shape and
approved quality- H D – 20, Circular shape 560 mm internal diameter.

2.36 FLAG MAST

2.36.1 SCOPE:

The scope of this specification covers the manufacture, transport, installation, testing and
commissioning of the complete Flag system, using Raising and Lowering type of Flag mast Towers,
including the Civil Foundation Works.

2.36.2 STRUCTURE:

The Flag mast shall be of continuously tapered, polygonal cross section, 20 sided, presenting a good
and pleasing appearance and shall be based on proven In-Tension design conforming to the
standards referred to above to give an assured performance and reliable service.

2.36.3 CONSTRUCTION

The mast shaft shall be manufactured from high tensile steel plates confirming to BS EN 10025 having
minimum yield strength of 355N/Sq. mm. Each mast shaft section shall have only one longitudinal
weld and without any circumferential weld joint. Sections with more than one longitudinal weld shall
not be accepted. The mast base flange shall be free from any lamination or incursion and provided
with supplementary gussets between the bolt-holes to ensure elimination of helical stress
concentration
.
The minimum A/F dimension of top shall be 150 mm and bottom as per the design and safe structure
calculation. Design certificates and warranty should be provided for minimum 25 years. The minimum
section length and top shall depend on the length required to make the specified height. The masts
sections shall be joined at site by slip-stress-fit method and minimum overlap distance shall be 1.5
times the diameter at penetration. A door reinforced with welded steel section, vandal resistant,
weather proof with Allen bolts and pad locking facility of minimum dimension 1250 mm x 250 mm
shall be provided at a height 2 times the width of door from the base of mast to provide clear access
to base compartment equipment’s winch, motor, cable, connector etc.

For the environmental protection of the mast, the entire fabricated mast shall be hot dip galvanized
internally and externally in single dip having a uniform average thickness of 85 microns for plates
more than 5 mm and 70 microns for 5 mm or less thickness. Manufacturer of Flag mast, Octagonal
poles and Luminaires should preferably be same for easy maintenance

2.36.4 DYNAMIC LOADING FOR THE MAST:

The mast structure shall be suitable to sustain an assumed maximum reaction arising from a wind
speed as per IS 875 (three second gust), and shall be measured at a height of 10 meters above
ground level. The design life of the mast shall be 25 years. The force co-efficient taken for design of
the polygonal structure is to be established from the wind tunnel test data.

2.36.5 OCTAGONAL POLES

High hot dip galvanized octagonal poles for installing the flood light to illuminate the flag in dark.

Signature of Contractor Page 94 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

2.36.6 PU PAINTING

Flag mast shall be finished with Polyurethane (PU) paint over the galvanized surface after application
of Etch Primer coat. PU Paint should be done at manufacturer’s works, and certificate from
manufacturer for same should be enclosed.

2.36.7 FLAG
Supply of national flag of size 20' x 30' in 100% Knitted Polyester (140 / 160 gsm), with reinforced
super-strong nylon webbing on all 3 sides & rope/toggle sleeve and as per Government of India
guidelines.

2.37 CUPBOARDS AND WARDROBES

Built in cupboard 650 mm wide upto ceiling height with 18 mm thk pre-laminated non decorative
particle board as shelves and 18 mm thk pre laminated decorative particle board as shutters/steel
almirahas with auto soft closing hinges with SS 304 finish bar handle of 160cd.
Factory made wardrobe carcass, shelves, drawers etc. All ends should have edge banding tape of
M/s Rehau / Dolkin 0.8mm thickness for cabinet. Back Panel pre laminated 5mm thk. pre-laminated
non decorative particle board. Carcass to be supplied in knock down condition with pre factory drill
for mini fix, dowels, Shelf with shelf supports.

2.38 KITCHEN CABINETS

2.38.1 Stainless steel AISI 304(18/) Kitchen sink as per IS 13983 with drain board
2.38.2 Providing and fixing of Built in cupboard with out any shelves with 18mm HMR MDF E1
Grade PVC Membrane finish shutter below cooking platform as per architectural design and
specifications. All ends should have edge banding tape of M/s Rehau / Dolkin 0.8mm thickness
for cabinet. Back Panel pre laminated 5mm HMR MDF.
2.38.3 25mm thick and more than 400mm wide pre laminated HMR MDF shelves in tires upto 2.10
meter height covered with HMR MDF E1 Grade PVC Membrane finish shutter along on wall
as per architectural design andv specification.
2.38.4 Factory made modular kitchen having Providing and fixing both sides of laminate finish base
cabinet with shelves and drawers in 18mm HMR HDF E1 Grade pre laminate with 22mm HMR
MDF E1 Grade PVC Membrane finish shutter with inbuilt handle. All ends should have edge
banding tape of M/s Rehau / Dolkin 0.8mm thickness for cabinet. Back Panel pre laminated
5mm HMR MDF. Carcass to be supplied in knock down condition with pre factory drill for mini
fix, dowels, Shelf with shelf supports and 100mm PVC adjustable legs with PVC Sliver
Aluminum finish skirting.

2.39 EXPANSION JOINT COVERS

2.39.1 Expansion joint Cover (Floor to Floor):
Supply & apply of Floor to floor expansion joint cover as a one-piece, extruded EPDM elastomeric
seal with integral nosings. The system must be sealed on each side with sealant, resulting in an
extremely durable and watertight joint system.

Signature of Contractor Page 95 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

Seal Properties:
• Material - EPDM
• Color – Black
• Durometer – 75 Shore A, ASTM D2240

Epoxy Properties:
• 2 part
• Gel Time – 35 minutes, ASTM C881
• Bond Strength (7 day cure) – > 4 N/mm2 ,(EN ISO 4624, EN 1542 and EN 12188)
• Elongation at Break 0.6 ± 0.1% (7 days at +35°C) (ISO 527)
• E-Modulus (14 days at +35°C) Tensile: ~ 3’000 N/mm2 (ISO 527) Compressive: ~ 2’600 N/mm2
(ASTM D695)

Edge Sealant Properties:

• Tack free time – 35 minutes, ASTM C679
• Hardness – 30 shore A, ASTM C661

2.39.2 Expansion joint Cover (Floor to Wall):

Supply & apply Floor to floor expansion joint cover as a one-piece, extruded EPDM elastomeric
seal with integral nosings. The system is sealed on each side with sealant, resulting in an extremely
durable and watertight joint system.

Seal Properties:
• Material - EPDM
• Color – Black
• Durometer – 75 Shore A, ASTM D2240

Epoxy Properties:
• Gel Time – 35 minutes, ASTM C881
• Bond Strength (7 day cure) – > 4 N/mm2 ,(EN ISO 4624, EN 1542 and EN 12188)
• Elongation at Break 0.6 ± 0.1% (7 days at +35°C) (ISO 527)
• E-Modulus (14 days at +35°C)
Tensile: ~ 3’000 N/mm2 (ISO 527)
Compressive: ~ 2’600 N/mm2 (ASTM D695)

Edge Sealant Properties:

• Tack free time – 35 minutes, ASTM C679
• Hardness – 30 shore A, ASTM C661

2.39.3 Roof Expansion joint cover. (Floor to Floor):

Supply & Apply of expansion joint cover for Roof to roof application for 100 mm expansion joint gap
with utilize malleable membrane applied to support foam, and secured with a factory-attached
Aluminum* - 0.032”. The material must expand and contract for multi-directional movement. The
roof cover system must be capable of four-way movement.

Technical Data:
Flanges (*=Optional flanges – Galvanized is standard)
• Aluminum* - 0.032”
• Copper* - 16 Oz..
• Welded PVC* (Available with PVC membrane only)
Membrane (*=Optional material – EPDM is standard)

Signature of Contractor Page 96 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

• EPDM – 60 Mil, Black

• Neoprene* – 60 Mil, Black
• PVC* – 60 Mil or 80 Mil reinforced, White
Support Foam
• K Factor – 0.25 @ Ambient
• Thickness – Varies per Joint Size

2.39.4 Roof Expansion joint cover. (Floor to Wall):

Supply & Apply of expansion joint cover for Roof to roof application for 100 mm expansion joint gap
with utilize malleable membrane applied to support foam, and secured with a factory-attached
Aluminum* - 0.032”. The material must expand and contract for multi-directional movement. The
roof cover system must be capable of four-way movement.

Technical Data:
Flanges (*=Optional flanges – Galvanized is standard)
• Aluminum* - 0.032”
• Copper* - 16 Oz.
• Welded PVC* (Available with PVC membrane only)
Membrane (*=Optional material – EPDM is standard)
• EPDM – 60 Mil, Black
• Neoprene* – 60 Mil, Black
• PVC* – 60 Mil or 80 Mil reinforced, White
Support Foam
• K Factor – 0.25 @ Ambient
• Thickness – Varies per Joint Size

2.39.5 Internal Expansion joint cover Floor to Floor:

Supply & Apply of surface-mounted metal floor cover requiring movements up to 100%. The self-
centering aluminum cover plate must allow for thermal movement and seismic movement with
EPDM moisture barrier.

• Extrusion: extruded with 6063-T5, ASTM B221

• Sheet – 6061-T6, 3003-H14, 5005-H34, ASTM B209
•3.175mm thick Aluminum Center Plate
• Protective coating ( ZiO/ZnCrO4) on aluminum surfaces to be placed in contact with Floor to-Floor
Joint Systems.
• Cover Plate Design: Plain
•. Attachment Method: Mechanical anchors.
• Load Capacity: Standard Duty (500lbs), Tested.
• Moisture Barrier: EPDM Sheet.

Movement:
Nominal Joint Width: 4.00" (102mm)
Minimum Joint Width: 1.25" (32mm)
Maximum Joint Width: 5.75" (146mm)

2.39.6 Internal Expansion joint cover Floor to Wall Corner:

Supply & Apply of surface-mounted metal floor cover requiring movements up to 100%.

• Extrusion: extruded with 6063-T5, ASTM B221

• Sheet – 6061-T6, 3003-H14, 5005-H34, ASTM B209
•3.175mm thick Aluminum Center Plate
• Protective coating ( ZiO/ZnCrO4) on aluminum surfaces to be placed in contact with Floor to-Wall
Joint Systems.

Signature of Contractor Page 97 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

• Type: Cover plate.

• Cover Plate Design: Plain
• Attachment Method: Mechanical anchors.
• Load Capacity: Standard Duty (500lbs), Tested.
• Moisture Barrier: EPDM Sheet.

Movement:
Nominal Joint Width: 4.00" (102mm)
Minimum Joint Width: 0.38" (10mm)
Maximum Joint Width: 5.44" (138mm)

2.39.7 Internal Expansion joint cover Wall to Wall:

Supply & Apply of surface-mounted metal wall /ceiling cover designed for interior applications where
low maintenance or tamper-resistant applications are desired. The aluminum center plate must span
the joint and slide over the surface of the wall or ceiling to allow movement when required. The cover
plate must engage a “J-Hook” and locking channel for attachment.

• Extrusion: extruded with 6063-T5, ASTM B221

• Type: Snap-on cover.
• Attachment Method: Mechanical anchors.
• Movement Test: Tested as per ASTM E 1399-97, Report No: 84284.01-106-31

Movement:
Nominal Joint Width: 4.00" (102mm)
Minimum Joint Width: 0.38" (10mm)
Maximum Joint Width: 5.44" (138mm)

2.39.8 Internal Expansion joint cover Wall to Wall corner:

Supply & Apply of surface-mounted metal wall /ceiling cover designed for interior applications where
low maintenance or tamper-resistant applications are desired. The aluminum center plate must span
the joint and slide over the surface of the wall or ceiling to allow movement when required. The cover
plate must engage a “J-Hook” and locking channel for attachment.

• Extrusion: extruded with 6063-T5, ASTM B221

• Type: Snap-on cover.
• Attachment Method: Mechanical anchors.
• Movement Test: Tested ss per ASTM E 1399-97, Report No: 84284.01-106-31

Movement:
Nominal Joint Width: 4.00" (102mm)
Minimum Joint Width: 0.38" (10mm)
Maximum Joint Width: 5.44" (138mm)

2.39.9 External Expansion Joint Cover Wall to Wall:

Supply & Apply of surface-mounted metal wall /ceiling cover designed for exterior applications where
low maintenance or tamper-resistant applications are desired. The aluminum center plate must span
the joint and slide over the surface of the wall or ceiling to allow movement when required. The cover
plate must engage a “J-Hook” and locking channel for attachment.

• Extrusion: extruded with 6063-T5, ASTM B221

• Type: Snap-on cover.
• Attachment Method: Mechanical anchors.
• Movement Test : Tested as per ASTM E 1399-97, Report No: 84284.01-106-316.
• Moisture Barrier: EPDM Sheet.

Signature of Contractor Page 98 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

Movement:
Nominal Joint Width: 4.00" (102mm)
Minimum Joint Width: 0.38" (10mm)
Maximum Joint Width: 5.44" (138mm)

2.39.10 External Expansion Joint Cover Wall to Wall corner:

Supply & Apply of surface-mounted metal wall /ceiling cover designed for exterior applications where
low maintenance or tamper-resistant applications are desired. The aluminum center plate must span
the joint and slide over the surface of the wall or ceiling to allow movement when required. The cover
plate must engage a “J-Hook” and locking channel for attachment.

• Extrusion: extruded with 6063-T5, ASTM B221

• Type: Snap-on cover.
• Attachment Method: Mechanical anchors.
• Moisture Barrier: Epdm Sheet.
• Movement Test : Tested as per ASTM E 1399-97, Report No: 84284.01-106-31

Movement:
Nominal Joint Width: 4.00" (102mm)
Minimum Joint Width: 0.38" (10mm)
Maximum Joint Width: 5.44" (138mm)

2.40 SPC Flooring (Area usage office, Room , corridor, Stage or any other as specified in finishing schedule/
as per approval by the Architect/ Engineer- incharge ):

Supply and fixing of 6.5 mm thick ( 5 mm hard bottom + 1.5 mm sound absorbing pad ) with wear
layer thickness of 0.5 mm SPC flooring with plank size of 305 X 610 mm ( Non-wood grain);228 X
1220 mm (wood grain) valinge 2G or 5Gi locking system Classification of Use Group- T (Heavy
Domestic/General Commercial) slip resistance ,water proof, moisture proof ,Low TVOC ,recyclable
,fire retardance-Bf1-s1 sound absorption -> 18db, with accessories like End profile, Transition
profile, reducer, etc. complete. Duly installed on hard and smooth surface. (The Shade, pattern
etc., to be approved by Engineer in charge)

2.41 Antistatic Vinyl Flooring (for hospital icu,xray room, ward or any other as specified in finishing
schedule/ as per approval by the Architect/ Engineer- incharge )

Supply & fixing of flexible Medintech plus /simpurity range pvc sheet flooring in 2 mm thickness in
the size of 2 mtr X 20 mtr use area classification 23/34/43 results from independent testing
demonstrate that product inherently inhibits the growth of microbial strain MRSA. It shall be
homogeneous in construction. The flooring shall incorporated a specially (PUR) to give polish free
maintenance imported pvc vinyl flooring with total weight 28oo g/m2, dimensional stability EN-434,
static electrical charge <2kv, impact sound reduction approx ISO 717-2, good resistant to scratch,
slip, fire, chemical & does not favor in growth fungi & bacteria, diamond 10 coating for more
durabality, duly installed on smooth and hard surface of self levelling compound with company
recommended adhesive and seamless joint.

2.42 Vinyl Conductive Flooring for OT. :

Signature of Contractor Page 99 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

Supply & fixing of flexible pastel conductive Esd range PVC sheet flooring in 2 mm thickness in the
size of 2 X 20 mtr homogeneous with conductive backing polyvinylchloride marbled,impact sound
reduction ISO-140-8,total weight 3200 g/m2,static electrical charge<2kv,electrical insulation to
ground>50,good resistant to scratch,slip,fire ,chemical & does not favor in growth fungi &
bacteria,diamond 10 coating for more durabality ,duly installed on smooth surface of self levelling
compound with hot welding to make seamless & company recommended adhesive.

2.43ENGINEER WOOD FLOORING (Area as specified in finishing schedule/ as per approval by the
Architect/ Engineer- incharge)

Providing & fixing 10.5 mm thick engineerwood flooring american exotic bruce 7 layer
construction,top layer of wood veener 2mm ,plank size width 120 mm ,length 400-1200 mm,Lock &
fold locking ,premium finish,micro bevel edges/ends with an underlayment made of natural colour
foam,with accessories like end profile,transition profile,reducer ,[Link] profiles are 100%
matching Profile at door openings.

2.44FLOTEX FLOORING (Area as specified in finishing schedule/ as per approval by the Architect/
Engineer- incharge)

Providing & Fixing of Flotex color/linear series flocked floor covering rolls having a density of 70
million fibres of nylon 6.6 per Sqm , Fire Test EN-13501, Appearence Retention Hexapod ISO 140-
8, Friction Slip Resistance Test EN 14041 Class DS, sanitized anti-microbial treatment with resilient
waterproof backing ,anti allergic cetrtified by British allergy foundation, anti static, stain resistant,
thickness 4.3 mm and approximate weight of 4.5 k.g./sqm of roll form with acoustic sound impact
17dB. Flotex to be installed over cement based smooth level hard flooring. The carpet should be
laid complete including SS edge profile at door.

2.45 CARPET ROLL FOR CONFRENCE ROOMS:

Providing and laying of printed saxony carpet of having 100% Type 6' Nylon/Polyamide Crealon or
equivalent and 1/10 gauge, . The carpet should have a primary backing of woven pp and secondary
backing of weaveback to ensure high performance and comfort. The carpet should be of 4M width
to ensure lesser joints and minimum wastage. It should have a minimum total weight of 1650 gsm
and minimum pile weight 800 gsm , minimum number of tufts to be 185040 or more The carpet
should also qualify to the following minimum European standards performance specifications - (a)
Fastness to rubbing, dry (ISO 105 X-12), minimum rating should be 4-5; (b) Fatness to rubbing,
wet (ISO 105 X-12), minimum rating should be 5; (c) Water fastness, (ISO 105 E-01), minimum
rating should be 4-5; (d) Fastness to light (ISO 105 B-2), minimum rating should be 5; (e) Thermal
Resistance (ISO 8302), minimum rating should be 0,072 m² K/ W; (f) Impact sound insulation (ISO
140 - 8), minimum rating should be 25dB. The carpet should be Scotchguard ready for better stain
resistance, and should have an approved fire rating of Class 1 under Bf1S1 and should be
recommended for commercial usage under Class 23/32 classification." duly installed on smooth
hard floor with support of 10 mm epe sheet & company recommended adhesive with metal edge
profile.

2.46CARPET TILE (Area as specified in finishing schedule/ as per approval by the Architect/ Engineer-
incharge)

Signature of Contractor Page 100 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

Supply & fixing of first radiant/first line tufted 1/10” loop carpet tile100% PA6 solution dyed aquation
backing back to back modified bitumen, 10% recycled content included, fire resistant EN-1350-
1B,,S1,pile height Ca2.9 mm, total weight ca 4300 gm/m2,pile density ca 0.114gm/cm3,thermal
resistant ISO8302.0.047m2 K/W, impact noise rating ISO10140(1000Hz) tile size should be (500
cm X 500 cm) duly installed on smooth and hard surface with company recommended adhesive.

2.47SPORTS FLOORING (Area as specified in finishing schedule/ as per approval by the Architect/
Engineer- incharge)

Supply of sports flooring in 6.5 mm thickness with wear layer thick 0.80 mm in the size of 1.8 mtr
X 15 mtr use area classification multiple indoor stadium weight 4.895 kg/m2 construction in multiple
layer. It shall be ball bounce >97%, vertical deformation 2.8 mm ,shock absobation > 37%,sound
insulation 23-25 db, pur coating with UV treatment . The flooring shall incorporated a specially
(PUR) sports flooring , good resistant to scratch, slip ,fire ,chemical & does not favor in growth
fungi & bacteria duly installed on smooth and hard surface on self levelling compound with
company recommended adhesive & seamless protection.

2.48 NATURAL HARDWOOD FLOORING WITH PLANK THICKNESS NOT LESS THAN 15MM
(Area as specified in finishing schedule/ as per approval by the Architect/ Engineer- incharge)

Providing and fixing in position solid hard wood flooring with plank thickness of not less than 15
mm ,width not less than 120 mm and length not less than 1830 mm((except at wall end) from
reputed manufacturer .The flooring shall be fixed with tongue & groove interlocking system with clip
method /(synthetic adhesive).Two planks are jointed with help of stainless steel clip /(synthetic
adhesive ) to ensure control of expansion during climatic changes. Installation is done over 4 mm
thick expanded polythene foamsheets to give cushioning effect ,over prepared suface with
necessary skirting of same material as of flooring. The aluminium anodized matching matching
color transition profiles and nosing to be fixed where ever required . The flooring should have
environmental friendly certification of forest steward council (FSC). The moisture content shall be
not exceeding B0.6 and fire classification shall be cf1-s1 category (DIN EN 13501-1) ,all complete
as per direction of the engineer in charge.

2.49GLASS FIBRE REINFORCED JAALI WORK (Area as specified in finishing schedule/ as

per approval by the Architect/ Engineer- incharge)

Providing & fixing of GFRC Jali (Glass fiber Reinforced Jali) Elements in approved size, pattern,
design, thickness (25-30 mm External) and color. The GFRC element should be made from '53
grade' white Portland cement, quartz, fine silica sand, alkali resistant glass fiber manufactured by '
saint gobin OCV, neg japan or equivalent, super plasticizers manufactured by 'BASF', nerolac
perma or equivalent, polymers manufactured by 'BASF', nerolace perma or equivalent and U.V
resistant synthetic inorganic pigments should be manufactured by 'BAYFERROX (Germany)' or
equivalent. The material casting should take place in FRP mould manufactured by 'Reckli' or
equivalent. The fixing of GFRC element work with dry fixing method using fasteners, and necessary
hardware etc in Building Facade complete as per directed by Engineer-in-charge.

2.50Epoxy flooring (for OT/ICU/ labs or any other as specified in finishing schedule/ as per approval bythe
Architect/ Engineer- incharge )
3mm Epoxy flooring (2+1 system) : Repair of pot holes, cracks of floor, by using epoxy putty,
silica sand and resin +hardner, using diamond grinding with 5HP diamond grinder machine, with 7

Signature of Contractor Page 101 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

diamond disks for griding in single plated base, min dia 380mm, machine to be operated by trained
applicator to make the floor level where grinding should be upto 8-10mm in some areas to be done
as per satisfaction and direction of E.I.C. P& L Epoxy primer 2 comp epoxy primer, as per
manufacturer’s specification. Laying 2 mm thick epoxy underlay: Providing and laying the high
strength self- smoothing underlay, having the compressive strength 70N/mm2 at 7 days, BS6319
part 2, 1983, tensile strength BS 6319 part 3, 1983 13N/mm2 at 7 days, Flexural strength as per BS
6319 part 3 19 N/mm2 at 7 days. Application as per manufactures specification for laying in 2 mm
thickness. The system should have the adhesion to concrete greater than strength of concrete.
Application by approved vendor of manufacturer. 1 mm thick epoxy topping: Providing and laying
the1 mm thick topping over the above underlay of 2 mm system, as per required color shade, the
material should have the following properties: specific gravity: 1.5-1.6, Compressive strength as per
BS 6319 pt2 : 50 N/mm2, Flexural strength as per BS 6319 pt 3: 33 N/mm2, . Also having the
abrasion strength as per ASTM D412 1.5 17 N/mm2 and shore hardness >[Link] should be
resistance to chemicals. All application should be done as per manufactures specification for 2 mm
thickness and by Authorized Applicator of manufacturer. All works shall be completed as per
manufacturer’s specification and instructions of Engineer-in-charge. Providing and making the
75mm epoxy coving at all the corner junctions of wall and floor by using epoxy bonding agent 2
comp epoxy primer, and applying the Epoxy screed (3 comp) and finally coated in 2 coated with
epoxy floor coating in required matching color shade of floor, as per manufacturer’s specifications
and Engineer-in-charge complete in all respects.
2 mm self levelling Epoxy floor, over VDF / pre levelled surface: Providing & applying a 4
component, High Performance, Odourless Self-smoothing flooring system based on XolutecTM
technology consisting of Scratch coat Primer and Body coat of minimum 2mm thickness to have a
smooth & even matt finish meeting or exceeding below mentioned performance properties:
1. Impact Resistance of 30 Joules as per ISO 7765
2. Flexural strength of 15 N/mm2 at 7 Days
3. Tensile strength of 12 N/mm2 at 7 Days
4. Compressive Strength of 45 N/mm2 at 7 Days
5. Shore D hardness of 70 at 1 Day
6. Abrasion resistance of < 65 Mg (loss in mass) as per ISO 7784
7. Adhesion to concrete of more than 1.5 N/mm2 or until concrete fails
8. Hardness of 4H as per ISO 15184
9. Mixed density more than 1500kg/m3
10. Capable of withstanding foot traffic in 12 hours and vehicular traffic in 24 hours at 30OC
Applied at a thickness of 2mm over a scratch coat primer of the same material by an authorised
applicator of the manufacturer in accordance to the application guidelines provided by the
manufacturer.
the product also requried to confirm: Compressive Strength as per EN ISO 604 @ 1Day- 30
N/mm2, Tensile strength-ISO 527=12 N/mm2, Flexural strength as per ISO 178= 15 N/mm2,
Adhesion to concrete @ 7 Day
(Pull Off Bond Strength as per ASTM D 4541= >1.5 N/mm2 (Concrete failure), Abrasion Resistance
(1Kg / 1000 Rev./ CS17) as per EN ISO 7784= 65 mg (Loss in Mass), Impact Resistance as per EN
ISO 7765= 30 Joules
Anti- bacterial Polyurethane coating for ICU/OT's,BURN ICU's walls /vertical surfaces:
Providing and applying Two coats of PU (Polyurethane) wall coating of approved make and brand
over one coat of recommended 2 comp epoxy primer on wall or any other surface over 2 coats of
approved quality polymer putty to fill up pinholes and smoothen the surface , including preparing
the surface using sand paper, cleaning etc.,complete all as per manufacture's specifications and
work shall be carried out by authorized applicator of manufacturer, all complete including cost of all
materials, labours, wastages, T&P etc. complete at all height as per specification, drawing and as
directed by Engineer in charge.

2.51 Pavement Tiles:

Signature of Contractor Page 102 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

Providing and laying matt finished pavement tile of size 400x400x9.8mm having with water absorption
less than 0.5% and conforming to IS: 15622 of approved make in all colours and shades in for outdoor
floors such as footpath, court yard, multi modals location etc., laid on 20mm thick base of cement
mortar 1:4 (1 cement : 4 coarse sand) in all shapes & patterns including grouting the joints with white
cement mixed with matching pigments etc. complete as per direction of Engineer-in-Charge.

2.52 Crash Rail:

Supply & apply Crash rail with 203 mm face dimension, Product to be supplied in 3000 mm
Lengths with standard end Cap.
A. Engineered PVC Crash Rails to be Acrovyn: Surface mounted assembly consisting of standard
aluminum clips with snap-on Acrovyn 2000 cover and integral shock absorbing cushions. End caps
shall be mechanically fastened with concealed fasteners. Color matched end caps and corners shall
be removable for ease of replacement,: Extruded material should be high-impact Acrovyn 2000 with
Shadowgrain texture, nominal .1.98mm thickness. Colors to be indicated in the finish schedule from
one of manufacturer’s available colors and patterns.
B. Regrind PVC: PVC-PVC regrind absorption cushion.
C. Aluminum: Extruded aluminum should be 6063-T6 alloy.

2.53 Crash Guard:

Supply & apply of SCR 50 Surface mounted crashrail, 127 mm deep. Product to be supplied in 3000
mm [Link] Standard End Cap Regrind PVC: PVC-PVC regrind absorption cushion. Aluminum:
Extruded aluminum should be 6063-T6 alloy, nominal thickness. Minimum strength and durability
properties as specified in ASTM B221

2.54 Corner Guard:

Supply & apply of SM20 90 degree, surface mounted corner guard, 76 mm legs, aluminum retainer,
caps included. Cut sizes and quantities to be listed below. SM20N Cut no.1: Quantity: 450 pcs. @
Length: 1050 mm. PVC regrind absorption cushion. Aluminum: Extruded aluminum should be 6063-T6
alloy, nominal thickness. Minimum strength and
durability properties as specified in ASTM B221

2.55 PREPAINTED STEEL WINDOWS AND DOOR FRAMES

1. 2000 SERIES DOUBLE REBATE WINDOWS:

Providing & fixing of windows made of pre-painted steel (Base steel as per IS 513 of 0.58mm
thick “D” Quality galvanized as per IS 277 with zinc of 120 GSM). Primer coated with epoxy primer
of 5-7 microns thick, finish painted with a polyester paint of 12-16 microns thick and back coated
with 5-7 microns thick alkyd backer. Section for outer frame should be of 72x55mm, centre mullion
should be of 72x50mm, section for fixed glass beading should be of 12x12mm and section for
shutter should be of 47 x 20mm . Outer frame & mullion sections to have rebate for glazed
shutters, fly mesh and 20 mm provision for guard bars/ grills fly mesh shutter section should be
of 20x40mm. The sections are to be cut to length mitre joined with corner bracket. Centre mullions
to be fixed with mullion cap. Elixir or equivalent stay, handles 2nos of heavy duty stain less steel
pivot hinges shall be provided per shutter. The windows should be paneled with 4 mm thick plain
float glass and S.S. Mesh for fly mesh shutter (304 grade). Rubber Gaskets are provided all
around the glass. The above frames should be fixed to the concrete/masonry wall by means of
self expanding screws. Including 10mm square guard bars with 6” (152.4mm) pitch, complete for
finished item of work.

Signature of Contractor Page 103 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

2. 105x60mm Single Rebate Door Frame:

Providing and Fixing door frame fabricated from sections roll formed out of 1.2mm thick
galvanized steel (Base steel as per IS 513) with zinc of 120 gms/[Link].
The overall size of the section should be 105x60mm with rebate of 37mm for shutter.
The frame section should be cut to length and metre joined with corner brackets made of CRCA
electroplated. The frame should be provided with
(a) 3 Nos. of M.S. powder coated 4” Butt hinges of 2mm thickness welded to the frame.
(b) 6 Nos. of 1.2mm thick CRCA electroplated stiffeners should be welded to frame.
(c) 6 Nos. of 8” M.S. hold fasts with split end tail welded to stiffener plates.
(d) One no. aldrop receiver.
(e) Each frame should be provided with 25x50mm tie rod at bottom.

3. 125X60MM (DOUBLE REBATE) DOOR FRAMES:

Providing and Fixing double rebate door frame fabricated from sections roll formed out of
1.2mm thick galvanized steel (Base steel as per IS 513) with zinc of 120 gms/[Link].
The overall size of the section should be 125x60mm.
The frame section should be cut to length and meter joined with corner brackets made of CRCA
electroplated.
The frame should be provided with .
(a) 3 Nos. of M.S. powder coated 4” Butt hinges of 2mm thickness welded to the main frame.
(b) 6 Nos. of 1.2mm thick CRCA electroplated stiffeners should be welded to frame.
(c) 6 Nos. of 8” M.S. hold fasts with split end tail welded to stiffener plates
(d) One no. aldrop receiver.
(e) Each frame should be provided with 25x50mm tie rod at bottom.
All welded places should be treated with protective coat of zinc rich primer.
The entire frame should be provided with a coat of etch primer.

4. 1000 Series Single Rebate Windows:

Providing and Fixing of windows made of pre-painted steel (Base steel as per IS 513 of 0.58 mm
thick “D” Quality galvanized as per IS 277 with Zinc of 120 GSM). Primer coated with epoxy primer
of 5-7 microns thick, finish painted with a polyester paint of 12-16 microns thick and back coated
with 5-7 microns thick alkyd backer. Section for outer frame should be of 48x50mm, centre mullion
should be of 48x50mm, section for shutter should be of 47x 20mm and rebate for Glazed shutter
with a 20mm provision for Guard bars/Grills. The sections are to be cut to length metre joined
with corner bracket. Centre mullion is to be fixed with mullion cap. Handle, stay, 2 nos. of
Stainless Steel heavy duty Pivot hinges shall be provided per shutter the windows fitted with 4mm
thick plain float glass with rubber gaskets including fixing the frames in concrete/masonry wall by
means of self expanding screws, Including fixed panel beading section should be of 12x12mm.
Outer frame and mullions to have 10mm Square guard bars with 6” (152.4mm) pitch etc.,
complete for finished item of work.

2.56 UPVC WINDOWS, VENTILATORS, LOUVERS & DOORS SPECIFICATIONS:

Signature of Contractor Page 104 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

Providing and fixing uPVC windows & doors of make AIS or equivalent as per design as approved by
Engineer in charge. Profile needs to be supplied from approved profile extruder like Encraft/
equivalent. The profile manufacturer should be able to demonstrate complete compliance to criteria
listed in EN12608 standards.

The window manufacturer should be able to control the entire value chain from design to
manufacturing of windows to Installation to after Sales Service with evidence of proven infrastructure to
meet after sales requirement and should be able to show evidence of robust & dependable processes
by exhibiting valid ISO 9001 certification for last 5 continuous years in the same trade which includes
manufacturing and installation of windows.

The window manufacturer should have backward integration to control the quality of glass, the glass
should be manufactured and processed by single company and preferably window manufacturer. By
controlling the quality during the float glass manufacturing process the manufacturer should be able to
provide 12 months warranty on the glass against spontaneous breakage of glass. Approved glass
manufacturer and processor are AIS or equivalent.

Doors and windows should be as per following dimensions

Sl. N. DESCRIPTION OF ITEMS SIZES IN DIMENSIONS (MM)

Construction
A Casement window/Ventilator Wall thickness (+/- 0.2) Sight line
Depth

1 Casement Door frame 2.20 64 62

2 Casement Window frame 2.00 64 50

3 Casement window sash 2.20 64 80

3 Casement sash 2.20 64 110

B Sliding Window / Door

1 Frame 3 Track 2.20 112 52

2 Frame 2 Track 2.20 64 52

3 Window Sash 2.20 44 68

4 Door Sash 2.20 44 84

Profile must be colorfast and conform to standard EN12608. The profile sections should have multi
hollow (min 2 to 3 chambers) chamber to include GI/ Steel reinforcement with 120 GSM zinc coated,
fitted in continuous length, in closed chamber. There should be an unconditional warranty of minimum
10 years on Profile & minimum one year on hardware from the date of installation. The profiles used
must show evidence of performance in tropical climate by providing successful test report of 12000
hours (24 GJ / m2) of artificial weathering test as per EN12608 by reputed international certification
body like SKZ/IFT or equivalent.

Signature of Contractor Page 105 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

The thickness of GI should be selected to meet the wind load requirement as per IS 875 Part- III on sash/
mullion. Supplier should submit wind load calculation & validation complying with IS 875 Part – III before
material supply. Minimum GI/ steel reinforcement thickness should be 1.5mm (+/- 0.1 mm), higher
thickness may have to be chosen to meet the wind load requirement.

UPVC Windows and Doors must be fabricated with fusion welded corners & must meet the strength
requirements as per EN12608. All hardware and accessories fitted must have corrosion protection to
meet requirement of minimum 480 hours of salt spray test as per ASTMB117.

After fixing the outer frame, the gap between frame and adjacent finish walls shall be filled with weather
proof neutral cure silicon sealant on outside as well as inside with backer rod to provide the essential
control of sealant depth and two sided adhesion of sealant.

2.57 Frameless Single Leaf Glass Door Hardware fittings:

a) With patch fittings:
To provide and fix single leaf frameless doors with patch fitting consisting of 10 / 12 mm thick
clear toughened glass with dormakaba or similar (PT standard). Patch fittings such as PT 24 top
pivot, PT-20-top patch, PT-10-bottom patch, US 10 corner lock withEPC, lock keeper plate and
floor spring dormakaba or similar BTS75V conforming to DIN EN1154 with adjustable spring
strength EN (1-4), Floor Spring tested for durability of 500,000 cycles. Leaf weight upto 80 kg.
b) To provide and fix dormakaba or similar Universal corner lock with LKP and EPC, US 10 Std.
c) To provide and fix dormakaba or similar floor spring BTS 75V EN 1-4 with std. spindle and
cover plate. The floor spring with backcheck and adjustable closing speed from 175°. With 90°
hold open. As per EN 1154. (Not suitable for fire doors) Finish: Satin stainless steel.
d) To provide and fix dormakaba or similar 3108 floor stop half dome with 45mm dia with fixing
accessories, in satin Chrome

2.58 Frameless Double Leaf Glass Door Hardware fittings:

a) With patch fittings:
To provide and fix 106eveli leaf frameless doors with patch fitting consisting of 10 / 12 mm thick
clear toughened glass with dormakaba or similar (PT standard). Patch fittings such as PT 24 top
pivot, PT-20-top patch, PT-10-bottom patch, US 10 corner lock withEPC, lock keeper plate and
floor spring dormakaba or similar BTS75V conforming to DIN EN1154 with adjustable spring
strength EN (1-4), Floor Spring tested for durability of 500,000 cycles. Leaf weight upto 80 kg.
b) To provide and fix dormakaba or similar Pivot PT 24 with fixing plate, material thickness 3
mm,to let into the ceiling.
c) To provide and fix dormakaba or similar Universal corner lock with LKP and EPC, US 10 STD
d) To provide and fix dormakaba or similar floor spring BTS 75V EN 1-4 with std. spindle and
cover plate. The floor spring with backcheck and adjustable closing speed from 175°. With 90°
hold open. As per EN 1154. (Not suitable for fire doors) Finish: Satin stainless steel.
e) To provide and fix dormakaba or similar pull Handle TGDI-H 450 back to back with 350mm
CTC, adjustable fixing for glass, wood and metal doors in satin stainless steel. The pull handles
should have supporting washer with raised 106eveling on the outer surface. Length =450mm,
25mm dia, -SS304
f) To provide and fix dormakaba or similar 3108 floor stop half dome with 45mm dia with fixing
accessories, in satin Chrome

2.59 Single Leaf Flush Door Hardware fittings:

a) To provide and fix dormakaba or similar BB 4330, 5 Knuckle, 2 Ball bearing butt hinges size 4”
x 3” x 3mm, in SS 304 and in SSS finish. Suitable for door weights upto 120kgs. Template Drilled
b) To provide and fix dormakaba or similar pull Handle TGDI-D 300 back to back with adjustable
fixing for glass, wood and metal doors in satin stainless steel. The pull handles should have
supporting washer with raised 106eveling on the outer surface. Length =300mm, 22mm dia, -
SS304

Signature of Contractor Page 106 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

c) To provide and fix dormakaba or similar 278a with 55mm backset, 20mm square forend
prepared for euro profile cylinder including strike plate. And EPC 60mm Length both side key
operation & Escutcheons in SSS Finish
d) To provide and fix dormakaba or similar rack and pinion door closer TS 71 EN size ¾, with std.
arm and with two independent closing valves and latching speed adjustable by arm. Full plastic
cover. Silver finish. As per EN 1154.
e) To provide and fix dormakaba or similar 3108 floor stop half dome with 45mm dia with fixing
accessories, in satin Chrome

2.60 Double Leaf Flush Door Hardware fittings:

a) To provide and fix dormakaba or similar BB 4330, 5 Knuckle, 2 Ball bearing butt hinges size 4”
x 3” x 3mm, in SS 304 and in SSS finish. Suitable for door weights upto 120kgs. Template Drilled
b) To provide and fix dormakaba or similar pull Handle TGDI-D 300 back to back with adjustable
fixing for glass, wood and metal doors in satin stainless steel. The pull handles should have
supporting washer with raised 107eveling on the outer surface. Length =300mm, 22mm dia, -
SS304
c) To provide and fix dormakaba or similar 278a with 55mm backset, 20mm square forend
prepared for euro profile cylinder including strike plate. And EPC 60mm Length both side key
operation & Escutcheons in SSS Finish
d) To provide and fix dormakaba or similar rack and pinion door closer TS 71 EN size ¾, with std.
arm and with two independent closing valves and latching speed adjustable by arm. Full plastic
cover. Silver finish. As per EN 1154
e) To provide and fix dormakaba or similar lever action flush bolt with 19mm projecting bolt
L=300mm for Metal door in satin chrome
f) To provide and fix dormakaba or similar lever action flush bolt with 19mm projecting bolt
L=600mm for Metal door in satin chrome
g) To provide and fix dormakaba or similar dust excluding socket 3124 with 16mm dia whole, fully
morticed on the floor. Satin chrome
h) To provide and fix dormakaba or similar 3108 floor stop half dome with 45mm dia with fixing
accessories, in satin Chrome

2.61 Single Leaf Fire Door Hardware Fittings:

a) To provide and fix dormakaba or similar 3090F, 5 Knuckle, 2 bearing butt hinges size 4" x 3" x
3mm, in SS 304 and in satin stainless steel. As per EN 1935, CE Marked. Suitable for door
weights upto 120kgs.
b) To provide and fix dormakaba or similar pull Handle TGDI-D 300 back to back with adjustable
fixing for glass, wood and metal doors in satin stainless steel. The pull handles should have
supporting washer with raised bevelling on the outer surface. Length =300mm, 22mm dia, -SS304
c) To provide and fix dormakaba or similar 288a with 55mm backset, 20mm square forend
prepared for euro profile cylinder including strike plate. And EPC 60mm Length both side key
operation & Escutcheons in SSS Finish.
d) To provide and fix dormakaba or similar rack and pinion door closer TS 71 EN size 3/4, with
std. arm and with two independent closing valves and latching speed adjustable by arm. Full
plastic cover. Silver finish. As per EN 1154.
e) To provide and fix Delta Seal for acoustic, fire and smoke protection, suitable for wooden and
steel frames, self adhesive, Finish = Black, Length = 1 x 1000mm, Height- 2 x 2750mm
f) To provide and fix dormakaba or similar 3108 floor stop half dome with 45mm dia with fixing
accessories, in satin Chrome.

Signature of Contractor Page 107 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

2.62 Double Leaf Fire Door Hardware Fittings:

a) To provide and fix dormakaba or similar 3090F, 5 Knuckle, 2 bearing butt hinges size 4" x 3"
x 3mm, in SS 304 and in satin stainless steel. As per EN 1935, CE Marked. Suitable for door
weights upto 120kgs.
b) To provide and fix dormakaba or similar pull Handle TGDI-D 300 back to back with adjustable
fixing for glass, wood and metal doors in satin stainless steel. The pull handles should have
supporting washer with raised bevelling on the outer surface. Length =300mm, 22mm dia, -
SS304
c) To provide and fix dormakaba or similar 288a with 55mm backset, 20mm square forend
prepared for euro profile cylinder including strike plate. And EPC 60mm Length both side key
operation & Escutcheons in SSS Finish.
d) To provide and fix dormakaba or similar rack and pinion door closer TS 71 EN size 3/4, with
std. arm and with two independent closing valves and latching speed adjustable by arm. Full
plastic cover. Silver finish. As per EN 1154.
e) To provide and fix dormakaba or similar lever action flush bolt with 19mm projecting bolt
L=300mm for Metal door in satin chrome
f) To provide and fix dormakaba or similar lever action flush bolt with 19mm projecting bolt
L=600mm for Metal door in satin chrome
g) To provide and fix dormakaba or similar dust excluding socket 3124 with 16mm dia whole,
fully morticed on the floor. satin chrome
h) To provide and fix Delta Seal for acoustic, fire and smoke protection, suitable for wooden and
steel frames, self adhesive, Finish = Black, Length = 1 x 2000mm, Height- 2 x 2750mm
i) To provide and fix dormakaba or similar 3108 floor stop half dome with 45mm dia with fixing
accessories, in satin Chrome

2.63 Single Leaf Emergency Escape Door Hardware Fittings:

a) To provide and fix dormakaba or similar 3090F, 5 Knuckle, 2 bearing butt hinges size 4" x
3" x 3mm, in SS 304 and in satin stainless steel. As per EN 1935, CE Marked. Suitable for
door weights upto 120kgs.
b) To provide and fix dormakaba or similar 1 point panic device in Contur design, push bar for
single door for fire and smoke check doors, with steel latch, security anti thrust latch for door
widths upto 1300mm, consisting of 2102F, 2105 in silver finish. As per EN 1125, CE marked
c) To provide and fix External trim for PHA, PHB Panic Hardware for fire and smoke check
doors. For max. 60mm thick door prepared for euro profile cylinder. Silver finish.
d) To provide and fix dormakaba or similar 3005, 5 pin Euro profile half cylinder with one side
key operation standard length 42mm in satin nickel plated finish with 3 keys. Optional master
keying and grand master keying can be done on request. –NMK
e) To provide and fix dormakaba or similar rack and pinion door closer TS 71 EN size 3/4, with
std. arm and with two independent closing valves and latching speed adjustable by arm. Full
plastic cover. Silver finish. As per EN 1154.
f) To provide and fix Delta Seal for acoustic, fire and smoke protection, suitable for wooden
and steel frames, self adhesive, Finish = Black, Length = 1 x 1000mm, Height- 2 x 2750mm
g) To provide and fix dormakaba or similar 3108 floor stop half dome with 45mm dia with fixing
accessories, in satin Chrome

2.64 Double Leaf Emergency Escape Door Hardware Fittings:

a) To provide and fix dormakaba or similar 3090F, 5 Knuckle, 2 bearing butt hinges size 4" x
3" x 3mm, in SS 304 and in satin stainless steel. As per EN 1935, CE Marked. Suitable for
door weights upto 120kgs.
b) To provide and fix dormakaba or similar 1 point panic device in Contur design on active leaf and 2
point modular on inactive leaf, push bar for rebated double door. For fire and smoke check doors,

Signature of Contractor Page 108 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

with steel latch, security anti thrust latch for door widths upto 1300mm, height upto 2270mm
consisting of 2 x 2102F, 2 x 2105, PHX 04 and PHX 03 in silver finish. As per EN 1125, CE marked
c) To provide and fix dormakaba or similar 3005, 5 pin Euro profile half cylinder with one side key
operation standard length 42mm in satin nickel plated finish with 3 keys. Optional master keying and
grand master keying can be done on request. –NMK
d) To provide and fix dormakaba or similar rack and pinion door closer TS 71 EN size 3/4, with std. arm
and with two independent closing valves and latching speed adjustable by arm. Full plastic cover.
Silver finish. As per EN 1154
e) To provide and fix Surface mounted door coordinator for double doors SR 390, zinc plated for steel
doors, non-Handed as per EN 1158 and CE marked
f) To provide and fix Delta Seal for acoustic, fire and smoke protection, suitable for wooden and steel
frames, self adhesive, Finish = Black, Length = 1 x 2000mm, Height- 2 x 2750mm.
g) To provide and fix dormakaba or similar 3108 floor stop half dome with 45mm dia with fixing
accessories, in satin Chrome.

2.66 VINEERS:

a) Natural Veneers : Must be 4 mm thick single side decorative natural veneer produced in conformation
to IS 848: 2006 and IS 1328:1996 with a BWR grade Gurjan base along with FSC and IGBC
certification. It must be with Virokill which kills more than 99% of Viruses. Must also be powered with
a technology which makes it Anti-Fungal and Anti-Bacterial. Must comply to the highest quality
standards as specified in ISO 9001-2008 and ISO 14001- 2004 guidelines.

b) Must be 3.5 mm thick single side decorative reconstituted veneer produced in conformation to IS 848:
2006 and IS 1328:1996 with a MR grade hardwood (conforms to IS 303: 1989) base along with FSC
and IGBC certification. Must also come with technology that kills more than 99% of Viruses and
powered with a technology which makes it Anti-Fungal. It must comply to the highest quality
standards as specified in ISO 9001-2008 and ISO 14001- 2004 guidelines.

2.67 HIGH PRESSURE LAMINATES:

Must be 06 mm thick, single/both side decorative, EN 438- Part 6 complying, high pressure laminate
panels, which are manufactured by high pressure and temperature in a hot press. The core of the panel
consist of desired numbers of imported, long fibre virgin kraft papers, impregnated with specially
formulated double hardened Phenolic resin and another top layer of imported virgin Blue wool scale
passed, decorative paper layer impregnated with Melamine resin. The panels must be flame retardant
type class 1 as per BS: 476 Part 7, ASTM E84 and EN 438- Part 6. Poly-methyl methacrylate UV
protecting films must be provided at the top of the Deco layer for optimum UV protection (passes 1500
hours). Panels have a tested Flexural Modulus of ≥11,000 MPa and Flexural strength of ≥100 MPa which
makes the product enormously sturdy from inside. This product must shows no distortion in extreme
climatic changes such as from -20° C to +80 ° C or from dry climate to a relative humidity in excess of
85% – 90%. Panels must be equipped with a maximum possible weather resistance at extreme oceanic
climates as it has duly passed the salt spray test conducted for 500 hours and pass a 3000 hours artificial
weathering and are rated with a 5 for Gray scale rating:

1. 1200X2400 DECORATIVE ANTI VIRAL/ ANTI BACTERIAL /LAMINATE FOR VERTICAL AND
HORIZONTAL SURFACE USES (SUEDE FINISH):

Signature of Contractor Page 109 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

1.0mm ( 1mm +) thick Greenlam or equivalent High Pressure Decorative Laminates (conforming to
latest and applicable IS:2046-1995, EN 438:2016 and NEMA LD3-2005 quality standards), made out
of, urea free, thermosetting phenolic resins treated Kraft papers as core material and Amino plastic
resin treated decor papers on the finish [Link] properties of laminates to meet
classification HGS for Resistance to surface wear (350 revolutions), Resistance to staining
(Rating/Index 5), Resistance to dry heat (180°C-Rating/Index 4), Resistance to cracking (
Rating/Index 4) & Resistance to scratching (Rating/Index 3), Resistance to Color Change-Xenon
Arch Lamp (Rating 5/Index 6). Colour/Décor, size, thickness and finish of laminates should be
finalized according to the specifier’s choice and as agreed for supply.
Laminates must have Antibacterial and Antifungal properties (conforming to JIS Z2801:2010 and
ASTM G21-2015 standards respectively) and fulfil the applicable indoor air quality certifications,
Formaldehyde emission of 0.0073 PPM and Total VOC emmision of less than 0.22 milligram per
cubic mtr with Greenguard-Gold Certication. Laminate should also have the necesary FSC
certification for obtaing LEED points.
Texture, Finish, Design and Shades are as per the choice of Architect and Engineer-in-chief.

2. 1200X2400 GREENLAM CUSTOM DESIGN DIGITAL PRINT HIGH DEFINATION LAMINATE:

1.0mm (1mm +) thick Greenlam Digital High Pressure Decorative Laminates or equivalent
(conforming to latest and applicable IS:2046-1995, EN 438:2016 quality standards), made out of,
urea free, thermosetting phenolic resins treated Kraft papers as core material and Amino plastic resin
treated decor papers on the finish surface.

Performance properties of laminates to meet classification VGS for Resistance to surface wear,
Resistance to staining, Resistance to dry heat, Resistance to cracking, & Resistance to scratching.
The Décor surface should have Sharp and High Definition Digital print or customized print with
superior quality and optimal color intensity. There must not be any smudging of ink, picture or print
blur.
Laminates must have Antibacterial and Antifungal properties (conforming to JIS Z2801:2010 and
ASTM G21-2015 standards respectively) and fulfil the applicable indoor air quality certifications,
Formaldehyde emission of 0.0073 PPM and Total VOC emmision of less than 0.22 milligram per
cubic mtr with Greenguard-Gold Certication.
Design and shades are as per the choice of Architect and Engineer-in-chief.

3. 1200X2400 GREENLAM FIRE RETARDANT LAMINATE:

1.0mm (+/-0.1mm) thick Greenlam or equivalent High Pressure Decorative Laminates with defined
Fire Rating (conforming to latest and applicable IS:2046-1995, EN 438:2016 and NEMA LD3-2005
quality standards), made out of, urea free, fire retardant thermosetting phenolic resins treated Kraft
papers as core material and Amino plastic resin treated decor papers on the finish surface. The
product must also conform to either or all of Fire Rating norms of CS1D0 when classified in
accordance with EN 13501-1: 2007. BS 476-Part 6:1989+A1:2009 and BS 476-Part 7:1997 UL723 -
Standard for Surface Burning Characteristics for Building Materials The Fire Retardant Additive must
be Halogen free in order to protect environment. Performance properties of laminates to meet
classification HGS for Resistance to surface wear (350 revolutions), Resistance to staining
(Rating/Index 5), Resistance to dry heat (180°C-Rating/Index 4), Resistance to cracking (
Rating/Index 4) & Resistance to scratching (Rating/Index 3), Resistance to Color Change-Xenon

Signature of Contractor Page 110 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

Arch Lamp (Rating 5/Index 6). Colour/Décor, size, thickness and finish of laminates should be
finalized according to the specifier’s choice and as agreed for supply. Laminates must have
Antibacterial and Antifungal properties (conforming to JIS Z2801:2010 and ASTM G21-2015
standards respectively) and fulfil the applicable indoor air quality certifications, Formaldehyde
emission of 0.0073 PPM and Total VOC emmision of less than 0.22 milligram per cubic mtr with
Greenguard-Gold Certication.
Design and shades are as per the choice of Architect and Engineer-in-chief.

4. 1300 X 3050 GREENLAM AFX BRAND LAMINATE :

1.0mm (+/-0.1mm) thick Greenlam or equivalent High Pressure Decorative Laminates (conforming
to latest and applicable IS:2046-1995, EN 438:2016 and NEMA LD3-2005 quality standards), made
out of, urea free, thermosetting phenolic resins treated Kraft papers as core material and Electron
beam cured transparent resin treated decor papers on the finish surface. Performance properties of
laminates to meet classification HGS for Resistance to surface wear (600 revolutions minimum), ANTI
FINGERPRINT PROPERTIES, SELF HEALING ON SCRATCHES, Close to zero reflection GU of 3
± 1 when measured at an angle of 60 determined according to EN 13722, Resistance to staining
(Rating/Index 5), Chemical Resistant as per SEFA Chemical Spot Test (except concentrated
sulphuric acid and aqua regia) Resistance to dry heat (180°C-Rating/Index 4), Resistance to cracking
( Rating/Index 4) & Resistance to scratching (Rating/Index 4), Resistance to Color Change-Xenon
Arch Lamp (Rating 5/Index 6).

Laminates must have Antibacterial and Antifungal properties (conforming to JIS Z2801:2010 and
ASTM G21-2015 standards respectively) and fulfil the applicable indoor air quality certifications and
VOC emmision norms of less than 0.22 PPM with Greenguard-Gold Certication. Laminate should
also have the necesary FSC certification for obtaing LEED points.
Design and shades are as per the choice of Architect and Engineer-in-chief

5. 1200X2400 GREENLAM ESD LAMINATES:

1.0mm (1mm +) thick Greenlam ESD Grade or equivalent High Pressure Decorative Laminates
(conforming to latest and applicable IS:2046-1995, EN 438:2016 quality standards and possessing
performance properties of Electro Static Dissipation), made out of, urea free, thermosetting phenolic
resins treated Kraft papers as core material and Amino plastic resin treated decor papers on the
finish surface. Resins are modified to impart ESD properties in the final product.
Performance properties of laminates to meet classification HGS for Resistance to surface wear (350
revolutions), Resistance to staining (Rating/Index 5), Resistance to dry heat (180°C-Rating/Index
4), Resistance to cracking ( Rating/Index 4) & Resistance to scratching (Rating/Index 3), Resistance
to Color Change-Xenon Arch Lamp (Rating 5/Index 6). The value of Surface resistance of the product
to have a controlled values of 109 or 1010 Ω when tested as per IEC 61340& ESD S-4.1, S-20.20.
Colour/Décor, size, thickness and finish of laminates should be finalized according to the specifier’s
choice and as agreed for supply.
Laminates must have Antibacterial and Antifungal properties (conforming to JIS Z2801:2010 and
ASTM G21-2015 standards respectively) and fulfil the applicable indoor air quality certifications,
Formaldehyde emission of 0.0073 PPM and Total VOC emmision of less than 0.22 milligram per
cubic mtr with Greenguard-Gold Certication.

Signature of Contractor Page 111 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

2.68 LAMINATES:

1.00/0.8 mm thick, single side decorative, specified as per IS 2046-1995 certification with Low emitting
material with Greenguard Gold certification and Virokill (Kills 99.99% Viruses) technology which makes
Laminates Anti-Viral, Anti-Fungal, Anti-Bacterial and Anti-Microbial and complying to highest quality
standards as specified in ISO 9001-2015 and ISO 14001- 2015 guidelines.

2.69 PLYWOOD:

4mm to 19 mm thick ply, specified in accordance to IS710 & BWP product with low emission norms
and certified Virokill (Kills 99.99% Viruses) technology product which must make it Anti-Viral, Anti-
Fungal and Anti-Bacterial along with 25 years warranty*. 100% hard wood with Gurjan face and IGBC
certified product.

2.70 BLOCK BOARD:

19 mm & 25mm thick ply Block Board, specified as IS1659 & BWP product with low emission norms
and certified Virokill (Kills 99.99% Viruses) technology product must make it Anti-Viral, Anti-Fungal
and Anti-Bacterial along with 25 years warranty*. With Gurjan face and IGBC certified product.

CPWD specifications and guidelines to be followed for any item not mentioned in the given
document but specified in the drawings and schedules.

2.71 ALUMINIUM FIXED WINDOWS:

Design, Fabricate, deliver (to job site) and fixing Casement systems Aluminum works for Fix
window. The extruded aluminum sections should be made from Grade 6063-T6 & Anodized (15-20
micron)/Powder Coated (60-80 Micron) As approvedby Engineer in Charge. All profiles should be Non
Thermal Break with Profiles Corner connection will be with Cleat & silicon. All other major Accessories
should be manufactured by the System supplier only.

The system should allow the application of glazing or panels with thickness upto 26mm . The mullion
should not deflect more than L/175 or 19mm (L/240 + 6.35mm: To be used if mullion span is larger
than 4.11m) whichever is the least for a wind load of 1.8 KPa. The transom should not deflect more
than 3mm due to dead load and 15mm due to wind load of 1.82 kPa. The transom should overlap the
mullion with an EPDM separator. The screws for transom should not affect the transom gaskets. The
system should able to accommodate SGU / IGU in vision areas (refer glazing specification mentioned
as a separate BOQ item). All gaskets to be EPDM. The system should have already been
tested/accredited by an international independent testing laboratory. The system should comply with
an Air infiltration requirement of ±600 Pa when tested in accordance with ASTM E283, Static and
Dynamic water penetration of 300 Pa in accordance with ASTM E331. The system should be capable
of passing a repeat air infiltration of ±300 Pa, . The system should also comply with a proof load of 1.5
times of design wind load and Seismic load of ±28.5mm. All anchor fasteners to be made of SS 304
grade. All shims to be capable of transferring the load evenly and made of a suitable material (GI,
Teflon etc) capable of lasting the life span of the system. All miscellaneous items such as peripheral
sealants, backer rods, flashing, fasteners, brackets etc to be included in the rate. Glass to be paid
extra

2.72 ALUMINIUM CASEMENT DOOR/ WINDOW:

Design, Fabricate, deliver (to job site) and and fixing Casement systems Aluminum works for door
and Casement openable windows. The extruded aluminum sections should be made from Grade

Signature of Contractor Page 112 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

6063-T6 & Anodized (15-20 micron)/Powder Coated (60-80 Micron) As approvedby Engineer in
Charge. All profiles should be Non Thermal Break with Profiles Corner connection will be with Cleat &
silicon. All other major Accessories should be manufactured by the System supplier only. All Slider
doors & windows will have locking at Jamb condition.

The system should allow the application of glazing with thickness upto 22mm . System should have
10 year warranty on properties, functionality and design, within restrictions defined by technical
specifications,
The construction is flush-fitted on the inside & outside. the door is closed / fully rebated sill detail shall
be provided / Threshold with continuous gasket seal on shutter / Rising threshold. Single point or multi-
point locking mechanism to suit size of door and windload based upon system supplier data. Hinge
to be 3 part barrel hinge. Number of hinges based on system supplier recommendations. Lever handle
to be provided both inside and outside. Handles to be fitted with return spring which retains horizontal
position fixed no visible fixing screws. Euro grove cylinder operable from both inside and outside to be
provided (Alternative: Thumb turn cylinder inside and key operated from outside). Rosette to be
provided both inside and outside. Surface mounted door closer to be provided (Alternative: Concealed
door closer to be provided). The system should accommodate 24mm DGU (6mm Toughened glass +
10mm Air Space + 6mm Heat strengthened glass). All gaskets to be EPDM. The system should have
already been tested/accredited by an international independent testing laboratory. The system should
also comply with a proof load of ±1.8kPa (1.5 times design wind load). Glazing to be done from inside
using removable square glazing beads. All reinforcements if any should be concealed. All anchor
fasteners to be made of SS 304 grade. All shims to be capable of transferring the load evenly and
made of a suitable material (GI, Teflon etc) capable of lasting the life span of the system. All
miscellaneous items such as peripheral sealants, backer rods, flashing, fasteners, brackets etc to be
included in the rate.

2.73 ALUMINIUM SLIDING DOOR/ WINDOW:

Design, Fabricate, deliver (to job site) and fixing of, 2 Track 2 Slider Slider system with 15-30mm
visible aluminum section width in the center mullion the extruded aluminum sections should be made
from Grade 6063-T6 , & Anodized (15-20 micron)/Powder Coated (60-80 Micron) As approvedby
Engineer in Charge. All profiles should be Non Thermal Break with Profiles Corner connection will be
with Cleat & silicon. All other major Accessories should be manufactured by the System supplier only.
All Slider doors & windows will have locking at Jamb condition.

The vertical member should not deflect more than L/175 or 19mm for SGU and L/175 or 15mm for
DGU, whichever is the least for a wind load of 1.60 KPa. Deflection calculation should be based upon
moment distribution. The system should accommodate 22mm DGU (6mm Toughened glass + 12mm
Air Space + 6mm Toughened glass). All gaskets to be EPDM. The system should have already been
tested/accredited by an independent testing laboratory. The system should comply with an Air
`infiltration requirement of ±300 Pa when tested in accordance with EN 1026, Static water penetration
of 300 Pa in accordance with EN 1027 and ±1.1kPa of Dynamic wind load for 50 cycles. The rollers
must be tested for durability –minimum of 20,000 cycles. The track must be removable. Provision for
retro-fitting of flyscreen without any additional mechanically fixed track should be provided. All
reinforcements if any should be concealed and on the outside. All anchor fasteners to be made of SS
304 grade. All shims to be capable of transferring the load evenly and made of a suitable material (GI,
Teflon etc) capable of lasting the life span of the system. All miscellaneous items such as peripheral
sealants, backer rods, flashing, fasteners, brackets etc to be included in the rate.

2.74 STRUCTURE GLAZE SERIES WITH DOOR AND WINDOW:

Design, Fabricate, deliver (to job site) and and fixing Casement systems Aluminum works for door
and Casement openable windows. The extruded aluminum sections should be made from Grade
6063-T6 & Anodized (15-20 micron)/Powder Coated (60-80 Micron) As approvedby Engineer in

Signature of Contractor Page 113 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

Charge. All profiles should be Non Thermal Break with Profiles Corner connection will be with Cleat &
silicon. All other major Accessories should be manufactured by the System supplier only. All Slider
doors & windows will have locking at Jamb condition.

The system should allow the application of glazing with thickness upto 22mm . System should have
10 year warranty on properties, functionality and design, within restrictions defined by technical
specifications,
The construction is flush-fitted on the inside & outside. the door is closed / fully rebated sill detail shall
be provided / Threshold with continuous gasket seal on shutter / Rising threshold. Single point or multi-
point locking mechanism to suit size of door and windload based upon system supplier data. Hinge
to be 3 part barrel hinge. Number of hinges based on system supplier recommendations. Lever handle
to be provided both inside and outside. Handles to be fitted with return spring which retains horizontal
position fixed no visible fixing screws. Euro grove cylinder operable from both inside and outside to be
provided (Alternative: Thumb turn cylinder inside and key operated from outside). Rosette to be
provided both inside and outside. Surface mounted door closer to be provided (Alternative: Concealed
door closer to be provided). The system should accommodate 24mm DGU (6mm Toughened glass +
10mm Air Space + 6mm Heat strengthened glass). All gaskets to be EPDM. The system should have
already been tested/accredited by an international independent testing laboratory. The system should
also comply with a proof load of ±1.8kPa (1.5 times design wind load). Glazing to be done from inside
using removable square glazing beads. All reinforcements if any should be concealed. All anchor
fasteners to be made of SS 304 grade. All shims to be capable of transferring the load evenly and
made of a suitable material (GI, Teflon etc) capable of lasting the life span of the system. All
miscellaneous items such as peripheral sealants, backer rods, flashing, fasteners, brackets etc to be
included in the rate.

2.75 30 MM THICK DHAULPUR STONE FACADE CLADDING SYSTEM:

1.0 UNDERCUT SYSTEM

Providing and fixing dry stone cladding (ventilated facade) at all levels with 30 mm thick sand stone
Red / Beige color (machine cut edges) cut to size of uniform colour and module size upto 10 Sft say
1200mm x 1200 mm, Ideal size fixed to brick/RCC/AAC block walls with Aluminium Blick's Kerf,
Anchors and Aluminium 6061-T6 frame system. The kerf has to be done in sandstone using saw. The
frame work to install the sandstone should be able to accomodate the overhang as per requirement of
consultants norms so that the dry stone cladding meets the requirements of a proper ventialated
facade. The system should be capable to accomodate overhang between the RCC/AAC and the
sandstone. The system proposed for approval should be able to take care of adjustments in X, Y, Z
axis so that the facade plumb/line level is properly maintained and is easy to install. The frame work (T
profile 60x100x2.2) connected to the RCC slab to Slab using brackets should be installed with anchor
fasteners of A4 316 ETA approved. The contracts scope shall be including cutting, making recesses
in stone slab, drilling holes, rubbing, polishing, curing, water based transparent coating to be
completed in the required pattern as per drawing and as directed by engineer in charge. The
installation, Testing and the setting instructions should be strictly followed. All structural calculations &
reports regarding substructure to be furnished by contractor with shop drawings, which has to be
considered as a package inclusive of Design , Engineer , furnish deliver, complete to with stand wind
pressure as per IS 875 ( part - 3 Code ) and as per seismic zone 3.

Signature of Contractor Page 114 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

01

DT-A1

AS50 TYPICAL DETAIL

SCALE 1:2

Signature of Contractor Page 115 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

03
DT-A1

AS50 TYPICAL DETAIL

SCALE 1:2

02
DT-A1

AS50 TYPICAL DETAIL

SCALE 1:2

04
DT-A1

AS50 TYPICAL DETAIL

Signature of Contractor Page 116 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

2.0 KERF SYSTEM

Providing and fixing dry stone cladding (ventilated facade) at all levels with 30 mm thick
sand stone Red / Beige color (machine cut edges) cut to size of uniform colour and module
size upto 10 Sft say 1200mm x 1200 mm, Ideal size fixed to brick/RCC/AAC block walls with
Aluminium Blick's Kerf, Anchors and Aluminium 6061-T6 frame system. The kerf has to be
done in sandstone using saw. The frame work to install the sandstone should be able to
accomodate the overhang as per requirement of consultants norms so that the dry stone
cladding meets the requirements of a proper ventialated facade. The system should be
capable to accomodate overhang between the RCC/AAC and the sandstone. The system
proposed for approval should be able to take care of adjustments in X, Y, Z axis so that the
facade plumb/line level is properly maintained and is easy to install. The frame work (T
profile 60x100x2.2) connected to the RCC slab to Slab using brackets should be installed
with anchor fasteners of A4 316 ETA approved. The contracts scope shall be including
cutting, making recesses in stone slab, drilling holes, rubbing, polishing, curing, water based
transparent coating to be completed in the required pattern as per drawing and as directed
by engineer in charge. The installation, Testing and the setting instructions should be strictly
followed. All structural calculations & reports regarding substructure to be furnished by
contractor with shop drawings, which has to be considered as a package inclusive of Design
, Engineer , furnish deliver, complete to with stand wind pressure as per IS 875 ( part - 3
Code ) and as per seismic zone 3.

Signature of Contractor Page 117 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

01

Signature of Contractor Page 118 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

DT-K1

TYPICAL KERF DETAIL

SCALE 1:2

03

DT-K1

TYPICAL KERF DETAIL

SCALE 1:2

02
DT-K1

TYPICAL KERF DETAIL

SCALE 1:2

04
DT-K1

Signature of Contractor Page 119 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

TYPICAL KERF DETAIL

SCALE 1:2

Signature of Contractor Page 120 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

2.76 MULTI LAYERED POLYCARBONATE STANDING SEAM SYSTEM:

Supply and Installation of multicell, multi-layered polycarbonate standing seam system, a complete
assembly of co extruded UV protected polycarbonate panels incorporated along with all fixing
accessories into a complete system. Co-extruded UV protected polycarbonate panel system of min
22mm thick of 600-1200mm (min.) width with angular daylighting concept. Panels shall have minimum
six layers with truss bridge design or commonly called as X structure for higher flexibility & strength.
Panels with opaque and translucent clear combination as per required lux level and design
requirements with all fixing accessories to ensure best performance for wind uplift, vibration, oil
canning and visual appearance. Panels shall be manufactured with vertical standing seam at both
sides of the panel. Panels shall be fixed on Purlin with snap on connectors with double tooth grip lock
locking mechanism and will be secured on MS structure (will be paid Separately) with 3 numbers self-
drilling screws & trapezoid SS fasteners holding the base of the standing seam offering best stability
having a pull-out load of min. 7000N (7KN) tested as per ISO 6892:1998 and IS 1608: 2005, as per
design requirement. Panels must satisfy Dart drop impact test as per IS 14443-97 shall show no sign
of breakage on Polycarbonate sheets which have been exposed to UV for a min. of 500 Hours as per
ASTM G 155. Panels shall not have Yellowness Index as per ASTM D 1925 of 15 units when tested
on a sample exposed to UV for 500 Hours as per ASTM G 155. U value shall not be more than 1.7
W/m2K as per EN ISO 10077-2:2018. Panel shall be with additional End cap/Aluminium U/F profile/
Glazing Bar for ends as required. Panel shall be fixed over MS structural steel/MS purlin (paid
separately) conforming to the detail technical specifications as per approved architectural drawings.
Trained and factory authorized labour with supervision to complete the entire panel installation as per
drawing & direction of the engineer in charge.

2.76 : FURNITURE AND FURNISHING WORK:

2.76.1 MOVABLE FURNITURES:

Sr. Suggested Price Range
Description
Ground Floor
A Entrance Lobby / Waiting Area :
1 Three Seater Sofa : Three Seater Sofa having frame work of hand wood, with spiring,
125mm seat cushion and total 80mm back cushion, covered with Upholstry of Good
75500-85000
Quality. The exposed timber to be Teak Wood with polish and polyutherane finish. (1.80 x
.80)
2 Centre Table : Centre Table made of teak wood & boiling water proof board, veneer &
Glass. The wood work & the veneer to be polished & polyutherane finish. (1.22 x .60).
28000-35500
3 Side Table : Side Table made of teak wood & boiling water proof board, veneer & Glass.
The wood work & the veneer to be polished & polyutherane finish. (.60 x .45)
20000-28200
4 Reception Table : Reception Table made of boiling water proof Board, having lamination
on the writing top, with stone on customer top & front, in the slanting angle. The
Reception Table to have drawers unit, with drawer on the sliding Mechanism. The drawer 70000-80000
to have handle and top drawer to have back. ( 2.44 x 1.10)
5 Reception Chair : Reception Chair with mid back, having cushion in seat & back, with
Upholistry. The base to be revolving & tilting with wheels.
4000-9000

Signature of Contractor Page 121 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

6 Reception back storage : Reception Back Storage made of 19mm B.W.P. ply with post
laminate on both sides.. The storage unit shall consist of drawers. Drawers shall consist of
12mm thick board for sides and back 19mm thick board. Drawers shall slide on lay-on
system (sliding mechanism). All exposed edges of ply / board shall be finished with 6mm
60000-70500
thick teak wood lipping . All the units shall be provided with all the necessary hardware
such as handles knobs , sliding mechanism . All exposed wooden surface to be finished in
poly utherane polish in desired colour, shade to be approved. All unexposed surface to
have Laminate with edges having wax polish.
B Atrium Waiting Area:
1 Three Seater Sofa : Three Seater Sofa having frame work of hand wood, with spiring,
125mm seat cushion and total 80mm back cushion, covered with Upholstry of Good
75500-85000
Quality. The exposed timber to be Teak Wood with polish and polyutherane finish. (1.80 x
.80)
2 Centre Table : Centre Table made of teak wood & boiling water proof board, veneer &
Glass. The wood work & the veneer to be polished & polyutherane finish. (1.22 x .60).
28000-38000
3 Side Table : Side Table made of teak wood & boiling water proof board, veneer & Glass.
The wood work & the veneer to be polished & polyutherane finish. (.60 x .45)
20000-28200
4 Single Sofa : Single sitter Sofa having frame work of hand wood, with spiring, 125mm seat
cushion and total 80mm back cushion, covered with Upholstry of Good Quality. The 26500-34800
exposed timber to be Teak Wood with polish and polyutherane finish.
C CM's Entry:
1 Reception Table with Back Storage : Reception Table with Back Storage made of 19mm
B.W.P. ply with post laminate on both sides.. The storage unit shall consist of drawers.
Drawers shall consist of 12mm thick board for sides and back 19mm thick board. Drawers
shall slide on lay-on system (sliding mechanism). All exposed edges of ply / board shall be
finished with 6mm thick teak wood lipping . All the units shall be provided with all the 130000-150000
necessary hardware such as handles knobs , sliding mechanism . All exposed wooden
surface to be finished in poly utherane polish in desired colour, shade to be approved. All
unexposed surface to have Laminate with edges having wax polish.
2 Reception Chair : Reception Chair with mid back, having cushion in seat & back, with
Upholistry. The base to be revolving & tilting with wheels.
4000-9000
D Security Check:
1 Office Chair : Office Chair with mid back, having cushion in seat & back, with Upholistry.
The base to be revolving & tilting with wheels.
7500-12500
2 Office Table : Office Table made of 19mm B.W.P. ply with post laminate on both sides..
The storage unit shall consist of drawers. Drawers shall consist of 12mm thick board for
sides and back 19mm thick board. Drawers shall slide on lay-on system (sliding
mechanism). All exposed edges of ply / board shall be finished with 6mm thick teak wood
35000-44500
lipping . All the units shall be provided with all the necessary hardware such as handles
knobs , sliding mechanism . All exposed wooden surface to be finished in poly utherane
polish in desired colour, shade to be approved. All unexposed surface to have Laminate
with edges having wax polish.
E Security Officer:
1 Office Table : Office Table made of 19mm B.W.P. ply with post laminate on both sides..
The storage unit shall consist of drawers. Drawers shall consist of 12mm thick board for
sides and back 19mm thick board. Drawers shall slide on lay-on system (sliding
mechanism). All exposed edges of ply / board shall be finished with 6mm thick teak wood
35000-44500
lipping . All the units shall be provided with all the necessary hardware such as handles
knobs , sliding mechanism . All exposed wooden surface to be finished in poly utherane
polish in desired colour, shade to be approved. All unexposed surface to have Laminate
with edges having wax polish.
2 Main Chair : Main Chair with high back, having cushion in seat & back, with Upholistry. The
base to be revolving & tilting with wheels.
12500-20000

Signature of Contractor Page 122 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

3 Visitor Chair : Visitor Chair with mid back, having cushion in seat & back, with Upholistry.
The base to be revolving & tilting with wheels.
5500-12300
F Business Centre:
1 Office Table : Office Table made of 19mm B.W.P. ply with post laminate on both sides..
The storage unit shall consist of drawers. Drawers shall consist of 12mm thick board for
sides and back 19mm thick board. Drawers shall slide on lay-on system (sliding
mechanism). All exposed edges of ply / board shall be finished with 6mm thick teak wood
35000-44500
lipping . All the units shall be provided with all the necessary hardware such as handles
knobs , sliding mechanism . All exposed wooden surface to be finished in poly utherane
polish in desired colour, shade to be approved. All unexposed surface to have Laminate
with edges having wax polish.
2 Main Chair : Main Chair with high back, having cushion in seat & back, with Upholistry. The
base to be revolving & tilting with wheels.
12500-20000
3 Visitor Chair : Visitor Chair with mid back, having cushion in seat & back, with Upholistry.
5500-12300
The base to be revolving & tilting with wheels.
4 Office Working Desk : Office Working Desk made of 19mm B.W.P. ply with post laminate
on both sides.. The storage unit shall consist of drawers. Drawers shall consist of 12mm
thick board for sides and back 19mm thick board. Drawers shall slide on lay-on system
(sliding mechanism). All exposed edges of ply / board shall be finished with 6mm thick
31500-40000
teak wood lipping . All the units shall be provided with all the necessary hardware such as
handles knobs , sliding mechanism . All exposed wooden surface to be finished in poly
utherane polish in desired colour, shade to be approved. All unexposed surface to have
Laminate with edges having wax polish.
5 Office Chair : Office Chair with mid back, having cushion in seat & back, with Upholistry.
The base to be revolving & tilting with wheels.
7500-12500
G Administration:
1 Office Table : Office Table made of 19mm B.W.P. ply with post laminate on both sides..
The storage unit shall consist of drawers. Drawers shall consist of 12mm thick board for
sides and back 19mm thick board. Drawers shall slide on lay-on system (sliding
mechanism). All exposed edges of ply / board shall be finished with 6mm thick teak wood
35000-44500
lipping . All the units shall be provided with all the necessary hardware such as handles
knobs , sliding mechanism . All exposed wooden surface to be finished in poly utherane
polish in desired colour, shade to be approved. All unexposed surface to have Laminate
with edges having wax polish.
2 Main Chair : Main Chair with high back, having cushion in seat & back, with Upholistry. The
base to be revolving & tilting with wheels.
12500-20000
3 Visitor Chair : Visitor Chair with mid back, having cushion in seat & back, with Upholistry.
The base to be revolving & tilting with wheels.
5500-12300
4 Office Working Desk : Office Working Desk made of 19mm B.W.P. ply with post laminate
on both sides.. The storage unit shall consist of drawers. Drawers shall consist of 12mm
thick board for sides and back 19mm thick board. Drawers shall slide on lay-on system
(sliding mechanism). All exposed edges of ply / board shall be finished with 6mm thick
31500-40000
teak wood lipping . All the units shall be provided with all the necessary hardware such as
handles knobs , sliding mechanism . All exposed wooden surface to be finished in poly
utherane polish in desired colour, shade to be approved. All unexposed surface to have
Laminate with edges having wax polish.
5 Office Chair : Office Chair with mid back, having cushion in seat & back, with Upholistry.
The base to be revolving & tilting with wheels.
7500-12500
H Cloak Room:

Signature of Contractor Page 123 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

1 Counter : Counter made of 19mm B.W.P. ply with post laminate on both sides.. The
storage unit shall consist of drawers. Drawers shall consist of 12mm thick board for sides
and back 19mm thick board. Drawers shall slide on lay-on system (sliding mechanism). All
exposed edges of ply / board shall be finished with 6mm thick teak wood lipping . All the
70000-80000
units shall be provided with all the necessary hardware such as handles knobs , sliding
mechanism . All exposed wooden surface to be finished in poly utherane polish in desired
colour, shade to be approved. All unexposed surface to have Laminate with edges having
wax polish.
2 Chair : Chair with mid back, having cushion in seat & back, with Upholistry. The base to be
revolving & tilting with wheels.
11500-19500
3 Back Storage : Back Storage made of 19mm B.W.P. ply with post laminate on both sides..
The storage unit shall consist of drawers. Drawers shall consist of 12mm thick board for
sides and back 19mm thick board. Drawers shall slide on lay-on system (sliding
mechanism). All exposed edges of ply / board shall be finished with 6mm thick teak wood
60000-70000
lipping . All the units shall be provided with all the necessary hardware such as handles
knobs , sliding mechanism . All exposed wooden surface to be finished in poly utherane
polish in desired colour, shade to be approved. All unexposed surface to have Laminate
with edges having wax polish.
I Security Room:
1 Counter : Counter made of 19mm B.W.P. ply with post laminate on both sides.. The
storage unit shall consist of drawers. Drawers shall consist of 12mm thick board for sides
and back 19mm thick board. Drawers shall slide on lay-on system (sliding mechanism). All
exposed edges of ply / board shall be finished with 6mm thick teak wood lipping . All the
70000-80000
units shall be provided with all the necessary hardware such as handles knobs , sliding
mechanism . All exposed wooden surface to be finished in poly utherane polish in desired
colour, shade to be approved. All unexposed surface to have Laminate with edges having
wax polish.
2 Chair : Chair with mid back, having cushion in seat & back, with Upholistry. The base to be
revolving & tilting with wheels.
11500-19500
J Rajasthan Cafeteria:
1 Security Table : Security Table made of 19mm B.W.P. ply with post laminate on both
sides.. The storage unit shall consist of drawers. Drawers shall consist of 12mm thick board
for sides and back 19mm thick board. Drawers shall slide on lay-on system (sliding
mechanism). All exposed edges of ply / board shall be finished with 6mm thick teak wood
26500-34500
lipping . All the units shall be provided with all the necessary hardware such as handles
knobs , sliding mechanism . All exposed wooden surface to be finished in poly utherane
polish in desired colour, shade to be approved. All unexposed surface to have Laminate
with edges having wax polish.
2 Security Chair : Security Chair with mid back, having cushion in seat & back, with
Upholistry. The base to be revolving & tilting with wheels.
5500-12300
3 4 Seater Cafetaria Table : Cafeteria Table made of Teak Wood frame with laminated top
on Boiling Water Proof Board. All exposed timber to be Polish & Polyutherane finish.
21000-31000
4 Cafeteria Chair : Cafeteria Chair with mid back, having cushion in seat & back, with
Upholistry. The base to be revolving & tilting with wheels.
5500-12300
K Dining:
1 4 Seater Dining Table : Dining Table made of Teak Wood frame with laminated top on
Boiling Water Proof Board. All exposed timber to be Polish & Polyutherane finish.
25300-35300
2 Dining Chair : Dining Chair with mid back, having cushion in seat & back, with Upholistry.
The base to be revolving & tilting with wheels.
13700-21700
L Private Dinning:
1 Three Seater Sofa : Three Seater Sofa having frame work of hand wood, with spiring,
125mm seat cushion and total 80mm back cushion, covered with Upholstry of Good
75500-85000
Quality. The exposed timber to be Teak Wood with polish and polyutherane finish. (1.80 x
.80)

Signature of Contractor Page 124 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

2 Single Sofa : Single sitter Sofa having frame work of hand wood, with spiring, 125mm seat
cushion and total 80mm back cushion, covered with Upholstry of Good Quality. The 26500-34800
exposed timber to be Teak Wood with polish and polyutherane finish.
3 Centre Table : Centre Table made of teak wood & boiling water proof board, veneer &
Glass. The wood work & the veneer to be polished & polyutherane finish. (1.22 x .60).
28000-35500
4 Side Table : Side Table made of teak wood & boiling water proof board, veneer & Glass.
The wood work & the veneer to be polished & polyutherane finish. (.60 x .45)
20000-28200
5 TV console : TV Console made of 19mm Boiling Water Proof Board having drawers with
veneer on the exposed portion, having laminate on the inside portion. The exposed veneer 32500-41800
& timber to be polish & Polyutherane finish.
M Staff Dinning:
1 4 Seater Dining Table : Dining Table made of Teak Wood frame with laminated top on
Boiling Water Proof Board. All exposed timber to be Polish & Polyutherane finish.
25300-35300
N Dormitory ( M & F ):
1 Bed : Bed made of 19mm Boiling Water Proof Board with Teak Wood frame on outer side,
having platform for the Mattress (1950 x 900). The exposed head & foot boards to have 35200-42800
laminate.
2 Bed Side Table : Bed Side Table made of 19mm Boiling Water Proof Board with Veneer,
having Teak Wood frame on outer side. The side table to have drawers moving on the 7800-15600
slider. The outer surface to be polish & Polyutherane finish.

First Floor
A VVIP Suites (6 Nos.) Type-A:
(i) Office :
1 Office Table : Office Table made of 19mm B.W.P. ply with post laminate on both sides..
The storage unit shall consist of drawers. Drawers shall consist of 12mm thick board for
sides and back 19mm thick board. Drawers shall slide on lay-on system (sliding
mechanism). All exposed edges of ply / board shall be finished with 6mm thick teak wood
35000-44500
lipping . All the units shall be provided with all the necessary hardware such as handles
knobs , sliding mechanism . All exposed wooden surface to be finished in poly utherane
polish in desired colour, shade to be approved. All unexposed surface to have Laminate
with edges having wax polish.
2 Main Chair : Main Chair with high back, having cushion in seat & back, with Upholistry. The
base to be revolving & tilting with wheels.
12500-20000
3 Visitor Chair : Visitor Chair with mid back, having cushion in seat & back, with Upholistry.
The base to be revolving & tilting with wheels.
5500-12300
4 Double Sofa : Double sitter Sofa having from work of hand wood, with spiring, 125mm
seat cushion and total 80mm back cushion, covered with Upholstry of Good Quality. The 58500-67500
exposed timber to be Teak Wood with polish and polyutherane finish.
(ii) Living & Dining Room :
1 Three Seater Sofa : Three Seater Sofa having frame work of hand wood, with spiring,
125mm seat cushion and total 80mm back cushion, covered with Upholstry of Good
75500-85000
Quality. The exposed timber to be Teak Wood with polish and polyutherane finish. (1.80 x
.80)
2 Single Sofa : Single sitter Sofa having frame work of hand wood, with spiring, 125mm seat
cushion and total 80mm back cushion, covered with Upholstry of Good Quality. The 26500-34800
exposed timber to be Teak Wood with polish and polyutherane finish.
3 Centre Table : Centre Table made of teak wood & boiling water proof board, veneer &
Glass. The wood work & the veneer to be polished & polyutherane finish. (1.22 x .60).
28000-35500
4 Side Table : Side Table made of teak wood & boiling water proof board, veneer & Glass.
The wood work & the veneer to be polished & polyutherane finish. (.60 x .45)
20000-28200

Signature of Contractor Page 125 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

5 TV Unit : TV Unit made of 19mm Boiling Water Proof Board having drawers with veneer on
the exposed portion, having laminate on the inside portion. The exposed veneer & timber 32500-41800
to be polish & Polyutherane finish.
6 4 Seater Dining Table : Dining Table made of Teak Wood frame with laminated top on
Boiling Water Proof Board. All exposed timber to be Polish & Polyutherane finish.
25300-35300
7 Dining Chair : Dining Chair with mid back, having cushion in seat & back, with Upholistry.
The base to be revolving & tilting with wheels.
13700-21700
(iii) Bedroom:
1 Double Bed : Double Bed made of 19mm Boiling Water Proof Board with Teak Wood
frame on outer side, having platform for the Mattress (1950 x 900). The exposed head & 82500-92000
foot boards to have laminate.
2 Bed Side Table : Bed Side Table made of 19mm Boiling Water Proof Board with Veneer,
having Teak Wood frame on outer side. The side table to have drawers moving on the 11500-21000
slider. The outer surface to be polish & Polyutherane finish.
3 Single Sofa : Single sitter Sofa having frame work of hand wood, with spiring, 125mm seat
cushion and total 80mm back cushion, covered with Upholstry of Good Quality. The 26500-34800
exposed timber to be Teak Wood with polish and polyutherane finish.
4 Coffee Table : Coffee Table made of teak wood & boiling water proof board, veneer &
Glass. The wood work & the veneer to be polished & polyutherane finish. (1.22 x .60).
19100-30500
5 TV Unit cum Study Table : TV Unit cum Study Table made of 19mm Boiling Water Proof
Board having drawers with veneer on the exposed portion, having laminate on the inside 47500-54800
portion. The exposed veneer & timber to be polish & Polyutherane finish.
6 Study Chair : Study Chair with mid back, having cushion in seat & back, with Upholistry.
The base to be revolving & tilting with wheels.
12500-20000
B VIP Suites ( 2 No.s ):
(i) Living & Dining Room :
1 Three Seater Sofa : Three Seater Sofa having frame work of hand wood, with spiring,
125mm seat cushion and total 80mm back cushion, covered with Upholstry of Good
75500-85000
Quality. The exposed timber to be Teak Wood with polish and polyutherane finish. (1.80 x
.80)
2 Single Sofa : Single sitter Sofa having frame work of hand wood, with spiring, 125mm seat
cushion and total 80mm back cushion, covered with Upholstry of Good Quality. The 26500-34800
exposed timber to be Teak Wood with polish and polyutherane finish.
3 Centre Table : Centre Table made of teak wood & boiling water proof board, veneer &
Glass. The wood work & the veneer to be polished & polyutherane finish. (1.22 x .60).
28000-35500
4 Side Table : Side Table made of teak wood & boiling water proof board, veneer & Glass.
The wood work & the veneer to be polished & polyutherane finish. (.60 x .45)
20000-28200
5 TV Unit : TV Unit made of 19mm Boiling Water Proof Board having drawers with veneer on
the exposed portion, having laminate on the inside portion. The exposed veneer & timber 32500-41800
to be polish & Polyutherane finish.
6 4 Seater Dining Table : Dining Table made of Teak Wood frame with laminated top on
Boiling Water Proof Board. All exposed timber to be Polish & Polyutherane finish.
25300-35300
7 Dining Chair : Dining Chair with mid back, having cushion in seat & back, with Upholistry.
The base to be revolving & tilting with wheels.
13700-21700
(ii) Bedroom:
1 Double Bed : Double Bed made of 19mm Boiling Water Proof Board with Teak Wood
frame on outer side, having platform for the Mattress (1950 x 900). The exposed head & 82500-92000
foot boards to have laminate.
2 Bed Side Table : Bed Side Table made of 19mm Boiling Water Proof Board with Veneer,
having Teak Wood frame on outer side. The side table to have drawers moving on the 11500-21000
slider. The outer surface to be polish & Polyutherane finish.

Signature of Contractor Page 126 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

3 Single Sofa : Single sitter Sofa having from work of hand wood, with spiring, 125mm seat
cushion and total 80mm back cushion, covered with Upholstry of Good Quality. The 26500-34800
exposed timber to be Teak Wood with polish and polyutherane finish.
4 Coffee Table : Coffee Table made of teak wood & boiling water proof board, veneer &
Glass. The wood work & the veneer to be polished & polyutherane finish. (1.22 x .60).
19100-30500
5 TV Unit cum Study Table : TV Unit cum Study Table made of 19mm Boiling Water Proof
Board having drawers with veneer on the exposed portion, having laminate on the inside 47500-54800
portion. The exposed veneer & timber to be polish & Polyutherane finish.
6 Study Chair : Study Chair with mid back, having cushion in seat & back, with Upholistry.
The base to be revolving & tilting with wheels.
12500-20000
C Standard Suite ( All floors):
(i) Room:
1 Double Bed : Double Bed made of 19mm Boiling Water Proof Board with Teak Wood
frame on outer side, having platform for the Mattress (1950 x 900). The exposed head & 82500-92000
foot boards to have laminate.
2 Bed Side Table : Bed Side Table made of 19mm Boiling Water Proof Board with Veneer,
having Teak Wood frame on outer side. The side table to have drawers moving on the 11500-21000
slider. The outer surface to be polish & Polyutherane finish.
3 Single Sofa : Single sitter Sofa having frame work of hand wood, with spiring, 125mm seat
cushion and total 80mm back cushion, covered with Upholstry of Good Quality. The 26500-34800
exposed timber to be Teak Wood with polish and polyutherane finish.
4 Coffee Table : Coffee Table made of teak wood & boiling water proof board, veneer &
19100-30500
Glass. The wood work & the veneer to be polished & polyutherane finish. (1.22 x .60).
5 TV Unit cum Study Table : TV Unit cum Study Table made of 19mm Boiling Water Proof
Board having drawers with veneer on the exposed portion, having laminate on the inside 47500-54800
portion. The exposed veneer & timber to be polish & Polyutherane finish.
6 Study Chair : Study Chair with mid back, having cushion in seat & back, with Upholistry.
The base to be revolving & tilting with wheels.
12500-20000
7 2 Seater sofa with Table : Two sitter Sofa having frame work of hand wood, with spiring,
125mm seat cushion and total 80mm back cushion, covered with Upholstry of Good
Quality. The exposed timber to be Teak Wood with polish and polyutherane finish. & Table 91500-99500
made of teak wood & boiling water proof board, veneer & Glass. The wood work & the
veneer to be polished & polyutherane finish.
D Staff Residence ( 1 BHK ) ( All floors ):
(i) Living & Dining Room :
1 Three Seater Sofa : Three Seater Sofa having frame work of hand wood, with spiring,
125mm seat cushion and total 80mm back cushion, covered with Upholstry of Good
75500-85000
Quality. The exposed timber to be Teak Wood with polish and polyutherane finish. (1.80 x
.80)
2 Two Seater Sofa : Two Seater Sofa having frame work of hand wood, with spiring, 125mm
seat cushion and total 80mm back cushion, covered with Upholstry of Good Quality. The 58700-68500
exposed timber to be Teak Wood with polish and polyutherane finish.
3 Centre Table : Centre Table made of teak wood & boiling water proof board, veneer &
Glass. The wood work & the veneer to be polished & polyutherane finish. (1.22 x .60).
28000-35500
4 Side Table : Side Table made of teak wood & boiling water proof board, veneer & Glass.
The wood work & the veneer to be polished & polyutherane finish. (.60 x .45)
20000-28200
5 6 Seater Dining Table : Dining Table made of Teak Wood frame with laminated top on
Boiling Water Proof Board. All exposed timber to be Polish & Polyutherane finish.
35600-45800
6 Dining Chair : Dining Chair with mid back, having cushion in seat & back, with Upholistry.
The base to be revolving & tilting with wheels.
13700-21700
(ii) Bedroom:

Signature of Contractor Page 127 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

1 Bed : Bed made of 19mm Boiling Water Proof Board with Teak Wood frame on outer side,
having platform for the Mattress (1950 x 900). The exposed head & foot boards to have 35200-42800
laminate.
2 Bed Side Table : Bed Side Table made of 19mm Boiling Water Proof Board with Veneer,
having Teak Wood frame on outer side. The side table to have drawers moving on the 7800-15600
slider. The outer surface to be polish & Polyutherane finish.
E Staff Residence ( 2 BHK ) ( All floors ):
(i) Living & Dining Room :
1 Three Seater Sofa : Three Seater Sofa having frame work of hand wood, with spiring,
125mm seat cushion and total 80mm back cushion, covered with Upholstry of Good
75500-85000
Quality. The exposed timber to be Teak Wood with polish and polyutherane finish. (1.80 x
.80)
2 Centre Table : Centre Table made of teak wood & boiling water proof board, veneer &
28000-35500
Glass. The wood work & the veneer to be polished & polyutherane finish. (1.22 x .60).
3 Side Table : Side Table made of teak wood & boiling water proof board, veneer & Glass.
The wood work & the veneer to be polished & polyutherane finish. (.60 x .45)
20000-28200
4 6 Seater Dining Table : Dining Table made of Teak Wood frame with laminated top on
Boiling Water Proof Board. All exposed timber to be Polish & Polyutherane finish.
35600-45800
5 Dining Chair : Dining Chair with mid back, having cushion in seat & back, with Upholistry.
The base to be revolving & tilting with wheels.
13700-21700
(ii) Bedroom:
1 Bed : Bed made of 19mm Boiling Water Proof Board with Teak Wood frame on outer side,
having platform for the Mattress (1950 x 900). The exposed head & foot boards to have 35200-42800
laminate.
2 Bed Side Table : Bed Side Table made of 19mm Boiling Water Proof Board with Veneer,
having Teak Wood frame on outer side. The side table to have drawers moving on the 7800-15600
slider. The outer surface to be polish & Polyutherane finish.
F CM'S Core:
(i) Room:
1 Reception Table : Reception Table made of boiling water proof Board, having lamination
on the writing top, with stone on customer top & front, in the slanting angle. The
Reception Table to have drawers unit, with drawer on the sliding Mechanism. The drawer 70000-80000
to have handle and top drawer to have back. ( 2.44 x 1.10)
2 Chair : Chair with mid back, having cushion in seat & back, with Upholistry. The base to be
revolving & tilting with wheels.
5500-12300
G Dinning Area:
1 4 Seater Dining Table : Dining Table made of Teak Wood frame with laminated top on
Boiling Water Proof Board. All exposed timber to be Polish & Polyutherane finish.
26500-34800
2 Dining Chair : Dining Chair with mid back, having cushion in seat & back, with Upholistry.
The base to be revolving & tilting with wheels.
13700-21700
H Conference Hall:
1 Conference Table : Conference Table made of 19mm BWP Ply with veneer on both sides.
All exposed edges of ply / board shall be finished with designer thick teak wood lipping. All
430000-440800
exposed wooden surface to be finished in polyutherane polish in desired colour, shade to
be approved.
2 Main Chair : Main Chair with high back, having cushion in seat & back, with Upholistry. The
base to be revolving & tilting with wheels.
13700-22800
3 Chair : Chair with mid back, having cushion in seat & back, with Upholistry. The base to be
revolving & tilting with wheels.
11200-20500

Second Floor
A CM Suite:

Signature of Contractor Page 128 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

(i) Living Room:

1 Three Seater Sofa : Three Seater Sofa having frame work of hand wood, with spiring,
125mm seat cushion and total 80mm back cushion, covered with Upholstry of Good
75500-85000
Quality. The exposed timber to be Teak Wood with polish and polyutherane finish. (1.80 x
.80)
2 Single Sofa : Single sitter Sofa having frame work of hand wood, with spiring, 125mm seat
cushion and total 80mm back cushion, covered with Upholstry of Good Quality. The 26500-34800
exposed timber to be Teak Wood with polish and polyutherane finish.
3 Centre Table : Centre Table made of teak wood & boiling water proof board, veneer &
Glass. The wood work & the veneer to be polished & polyutherane finish. (1.22 x .60).
28000-35500
4 Side Table : Side Table made of teak wood & boiling water proof board, veneer & Glass.
The wood work & the veneer to be polished & polyutherane finish. (.60 x .45)
20000-28200
5 TV Unit : TV Unit made of 19mm Boiling Water Proof Board having drawers with veneer on
the exposed portion, having laminate on the inside portion. The exposed veneer & timber 32500-41800
to be polish & Polyutherane finish.
(ii) Dinning Room:
1 8 Seater Dining Table : Dining Table made of Teak Wood frame with laminated top on
Boiling Water Proof Board. All exposed timber to be Polish & Polyutherane finish.
48500-58200
2 Dining Chair : Dining Chair with mid back, having cushion in seat & back, with Upholistry.
The base to be revolving & tilting with wheels.
13700-21700
3 Bar Chair : Bar Chair with mid back, having cushion in seat & back, with Upholistry. The
base to be revolving & tilting with wheels.
20000-30000
(iii) Bedroom:
1 Double Bed : Double Bed made of 19mm Boiling Water Proof Board with Teak Wood
frame on outer side, having platform for the Mattress (1950 x 900). The exposed head & 82500-92000
foot boards to have laminate.
2 Bed Side Table : Bed Side Table made of 19mm Boiling Water Proof Board with Veneer,
having Teak Wood frame on outer side. The side table to have drawers moving on the 11500-21000
slider. The outer surface to be polish & Polyutherane finish.
3 Single Sofa : Single sitter Sofa having frame work of hand wood, with spiring, 125mm seat
cushion and total 80mm back cushion, covered with Upholstry of Good Quality. The 26500-34800
exposed timber to be Teak Wood with polish and polyutherane finish.
4 Coffee Table : Coffee Table made of teak wood & boiling water proof board, veneer &
Glass. The wood work & the veneer to be polished & polyutherane finish. (1.22 x .60).
19100-30500
5 TV Unit : TV Unit made of 19mm Boiling Water Proof Board having drawers with veneer on
the exposed portion, having laminate on the inside portion. The exposed veneer & timber 32500-41800
to be polish & Polyutherane finish.
6 Study Table : Study Table made of 19mm Boiling Water Proof Board having drawers with
veneer on the exposed portion, having laminate on the inside portion. The exposed veneer 17200-27450
& timber to be polish & Polyutherane finish.
7 Study Chair : Study Chair with mid back, having cushion in seat & back, with Upholistry.
The base to be revolving & tilting with wheels.
12500-20000
(iv) Office:
1 Office Table : Office Table made of 19mm B.W.P. ply with post laminate on both sides..
The storage unit shall consist of drawers. Drawers shall consist of 12mm thick board for
sides and back 19mm thick board. Drawers shall slide on lay-on system (sliding
mechanism). All exposed edges of ply / board shall be finished with 6mm thick teak wood
35000-44500
lipping . All the units shall be provided with all the necessary hardware such as handles
knobs , sliding mechanism . All exposed wooden surface to be finished in poly utherane
polish in desired colour, shade to be approved. All unexposed surface to have Laminate
with edges having wax polish.
2 Main Chair : Main Chair with high back, having cushion in seat & back, with Upholistry. The
base to be revolving & tilting with wheels.
12500-20000

Signature of Contractor Page 129 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

3 Visitor Chair : Visitor Chair with mid back, having cushion in seat & back, with Upholistry.
The base to be revolving & tilting with wheels.
5500-12300
4 Three Seater Sofa : Three Seater Sofa having frame work of hand wood, with spiring,
125mm seat cushion and total 80mm back cushion, covered with Upholstry of Good
75500-85000
Quality. The exposed timber to be Teak Wood with polish and polyutherane finish. (1.80 x
.80)
5 Single Sofa : Single sitter Sofa having frame work of hand wood, with spiring, 125mm seat
cushion and total 80mm back cushion, covered with Upholstry of Good Quality. The 26500-34800
exposed timber to be Teak Wood with polish and polyutherane finish.
6 Centre Table : Centre Table made of teak wood & boiling water proof board, veneer &
Glass. The wood work & the veneer to be polished & polyutherane finish. (1.22 x .60).
28000-35500
7 Side Table : Side Table made of teak wood & boiling water proof board, veneer & Glass.
The wood work & the veneer to be polished & polyutherane finish. (.60 x .45)
20000-28200
(v) Conference Room:
1 Conference Table : Conference Table made of 19mm BWP Ply with veneer on both sides.
All exposed edges of ply / board shall be finished with designer thick teak wood lipping. All
430000-440800
exposed wooden surface to be finished in polyutherane polish in desired colour, shade to
be approved.
2 Main Chair : Main Chair with high back, having cushion in seat & back, with Upholistry. The
base to be revolving & tilting with wheels.
13700-22800
3 Chair : Chair with mid back, having cushion in seat & back, with Upholistry. The base to be
revolving & tilting with wheels.
11200-20500
(vi) Waiting Lounge:
1 Three Seater Sofa : Three Seater Sofa having frame work of hand wood, with spiring,
125mm seat cushion and total 80mm back cushion, covered with Upholstry of Good
75500-85000
Quality. The exposed timber to be Teak Wood with polish and polyutherane finish. (1.80 x
.80)
2 Centre Table : Centre Table made of teak wood & boiling water proof board, veneer &
Glass. The wood work & the veneer to be polished & polyutherane finish. (1.22 x .60).
28000-35500
3 Side Table : Side Table made of teak wood & boiling water proof board, veneer & Glass.
The wood work & the veneer to be polished & polyutherane finish. (.60 x .45)
20000-28200
B VVIP Suites Type-A / CS SUITE:
(i) Office:
1 Office Table : Office Table made of 19mm B.W.P. ply with post laminate on both sides..
The storage unit shall consist of drawers. Drawers shall consist of 12mm thick board for
sides and back 19mm thick board. Drawers shall slide on lay-on system (sliding
mechanism). All exposed edges of ply / board shall be finished with 6mm thick teak wood
35000-44500
lipping . All the units shall be provided with all the necessary hardware such as handles
knobs , sliding mechanism . All exposed wooden surface to be finished in poly utherane
polish in desired colour, shade to be approved. All unexposed surface to have Laminate
with edges having wax polish.
2 Main Chair : Main Chair with high back, having cushion in seat & back, with Upholistry. The
base to be revolving & tilting with wheels.
12500-20000
3 Visitor Chair : Visitor Chair with mid back, having cushion in seat & back, with Upholistry.
The base to be revolving & tilting with wheels.
5500-12300
4 Three Seater Sofa : Three Seater Sofa having frame work of hand wood, with spiring,
125mm seat cushion and total 80mm back cushion, covered with Upholstry of Good
75500-85000
Quality. The exposed timber to be Teak Wood with polish and polyutherane finish. (1.80 x
.80)
5 Single Sofa : Single sitter Sofa having frame work of hand wood, with spiring, 125mm seat
cushion and total 80mm back cushion, covered with Upholstry of Good Quality. The 26500-34800
exposed timber to be Teak Wood with polish and polyutherane finish.

Signature of Contractor Page 130 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

6 Centre Table : Centre Table made of teak wood & boiling water proof board, veneer &
Glass. The wood work & the veneer to be polished & polyutherane finish. (1.22 x .60).
28000-35500
7 Side Table : Side Table made of teak wood & boiling water proof board, veneer & Glass.
The wood work & the veneer to be polished & polyutherane finish. (.60 x .45)
20000-28200
(ii) Living & Dinning Room:
1 Three Seater Sofa : Three Seater Sofa having frame work of hand wood, with spiring,
125mm seat cushion and total 80mm back cushion, covered with Upholstry of Good
75500-85000
Quality. The exposed timber to be Teak Wood with polish and polyutherane finish. (1.80 x
.80)
2 Single Sofa : Single sitter Sofa having frame work of hand wood, with spiring, 125mm seat
cushion and total 80mm back cushion, covered with Upholstry of Good Quality. The 26500-34800
exposed timber to be Teak Wood with polish and polyutherane finish.
3 Centre Table : Centre Table made of teak wood & boiling water proof board, veneer &
Glass. The wood work & the veneer to be polished & polyutherane finish. (1.22 x .60).
28000-35500
4 Side Table : Side Table made of teak wood & boiling water proof board, veneer & Glass.
The wood work & the veneer to be polished & polyutherane finish. (.60 x .45)
20000-28200
5 TV Unit : TV Unit made of 19mm Boiling Water Proof Board having drawers with veneer on
the exposed portion, having laminate on the inside portion. The exposed veneer & timber 32500-41800
to be polish & Polyutherane finish.
6 4 Seater Dining Table : Dining Table made of Teak Wood frame with laminated top on
Boiling Water Proof Board. All exposed timber to be Polish & Polyutherane finish.
25300-35300
7 Dining Chair : Dining Chair with mid back, having cushion in seat & back, with Upholistry.
The base to be revolving & tilting with wheels.
13700-21700
(iii) Bedroom:
1 Double Bed : Double Bed made of 19mm Boiling Water Proof Board with Teak Wood
frame on outer side, having platform for the Mattress (1950 x 900). The exposed head & 82500-92000
foot boards to have laminate.
2 Bed Side Table : Bed Side Table made of 19mm Boiling Water Proof Board with Veneer,
having Teak Wood frame on outer side. The side table to have drawers moving on the 11500-21000
slider. The outer surface to be polish & Polyutherane finish.
3 Single Sofa : Single sitter Sofa having frame work of hand wood, with spiring, 125mm seat
cushion and total 80mm back cushion, covered with Upholstry of Good Quality. The 26500-34800
exposed timber to be Teak Wood with polish and polyutherane finish.
4 Coffee Table : Coffee Table made of teak wood & boiling water proof board, veneer &
Glass. The wood work & the veneer to be polished & polyutherane finish. (1.22 x .60).
19100-30500
5 TV Unit cum Study Table : TV Unit cum Study Table made of 19mm Boiling Water Proof
Board having drawers with veneer on the exposed portion, having laminate on the inside 47500-54800
portion. The exposed veneer & timber to be polish & Polyutherane finish.
6 Two Seater Sofa with Table : Two Seater Sofa having frame work of hand wood, with
spiring, 125mm seat cushion and total 80mm back cushion, covered with Upholstry of
Good Quality. The exposed timber to be Teak Wood with polish and polyutherane finish. & 91500-99500
Table made of teak wood & boiling water proof board, veneer & Glass. The wood work &
the veneer to be polished & polyutherane finish.
7 Study Chair : Study Chair with mid back, having cushion in seat & back, with Upholistry.
The base to be revolving & tilting with wheels.
12500-20000
C VVIP Suites Type-B:
(i) Office

Signature of Contractor Page 131 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

1 Office Table : Office Table made of 19mm B.W.P. ply with post laminate on both sides..
The storage unit shall consist of drawers. Drawers shall consist of 12mm thick board for
sides and back 19mm thick board. Drawers shall slide on lay-on system (sliding
mechanism). All exposed edges of ply / board shall be finished with 6mm thick teak wood
35000-44500
lipping . All the units shall be provided with all the necessary hardware such as handles
knobs , sliding mechanism . All exposed wooden surface to be finished in poly utherane
polish in desired colour, shade to be approved. All unexposed surface to have Laminate
with edges having wax polish.
2 Main Chair : Main Chair with high back, having cushion in seat & back, with Upholistry. The
base to be revolving & tilting with wheels.
12500-20000
3 Visitor Chair : Visitor Chair with mid back, having cushion in seat & back, with Upholistry.
The base to be revolving & tilting with wheels.
5500-12300
4 Three Seater Sofa : Three Seater Sofa having frame work of hand wood, with spiring,
125mm seat cushion and total 80mm back cushion, covered with Upholstry of Good
75500-85000
Quality. The exposed timber to be Teak Wood with polish and polyutherane finish. (1.80 x
.80)
5 Single Sofa : Single sitter Sofa having frame work of hand wood, with spiring, 125mm seat
cushion and total 80mm back cushion, covered with Upholstry of Good Quality. The 26500-34800
exposed timber to be Teak Wood with polish and polyutherane finish.
6 Centre Table : Centre Table made of teak wood & boiling water proof board, veneer &
Glass. The wood work & the veneer to be polished & polyutherane finish. (1.22 x .60).
28000-35500
7 Side Table : Side Table made of teak wood & boiling water proof board, veneer & Glass.
The wood work & the veneer to be polished & polyutherane finish. (.60 x .45)
20000-28200
(ii) Living & Dinning Room:
1 Three Seater Sofa : Three Seater Sofa having frame work of hand wood, with spiring,
125mm seat cushion and total 80mm back cushion, covered with Upholstry of Good
75500-85000
Quality. The exposed timber to be Teak Wood with polish and polyutherane finish. (1.80 x
.80)
2 Single Sofa : Single sitter Sofa having frame work of hand wood, with spiring, 125mm seat
cushion and total 80mm back cushion, covered with Upholstry of Good Quality. The 26500-34800
exposed timber to be Teak Wood with polish and polyutherane finish.
3 Centre Table : Centre Table made of teak wood & boiling water proof board, veneer &
Glass. The wood work & the veneer to be polished & polyutherane finish. (1.22 x .60).
28000-35500
4 Side Table : Side Table made of teak wood & boiling water proof board, veneer & Glass.
The wood work & the veneer to be polished & polyutherane finish. (.60 x .45)
20000-28200
5 TV Unit : TV Unit made of 19mm Boiling Water Proof Board having drawers with veneer on
the exposed portion, having laminate on the inside portion. The exposed veneer & timber 32500-41800
to be polish & Polyutherane finish.
6 4 Seater Dining Table : Dining Table made of Teak Wood frame with laminated top on
Boiling Water Proof Board. All exposed timber to be Polish & Polyutherane finish.
25300-35300
7 Dining Chair : Dining Chair with mid back, having cushion in seat & back, with Upholistry.
The base to be revolving & tilting with wheels.
13700-21700
(iii) Bedroom:
1 Double Bed : Double Bed made of 19mm Boiling Water Proof Board with Teak Wood
frame on outer side, having platform for the Mattress (1950 x 900). The exposed head & 82500-92000
foot boards to have laminate.
2 Bed Side Table : Bed Side Table made of 19mm Boiling Water Proof Board with Veneer,
having Teak Wood frame on outer side. The side table to have drawers moving on the 11500-21000
slider. The outer surface to be polish & Polyutherane finish.
3 Single Sofa : Single sitter Sofa having frame work of hand wood, with spiring, 125mm seat
cushion and total 80mm back cushion, covered with Upholstry of Good Quality. The 26500-34800
exposed timber to be Teak Wood with polish and polyutherane finish.

Signature of Contractor Page 132 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

4 Coffee Table : Coffee Table made of teak wood & boiling water proof board, veneer &
Glass. The wood work & the veneer to be polished & polyutherane finish. (1.22 x .60).
19100-30500
5 TV Unit : TV Unit made of 19mm Boiling Water Proof Board having drawers with veneer on
the exposed portion, having laminate on the inside portion. The exposed veneer & timber 32500-41800
to be polish & Polyutherane finish.
6 Two Seater Sofa with Table : Two Seater Sofa having frame work of hand wood, with
spiring, 125mm seat cushion and total 80mm back cushion, covered with Upholstry of
Good Quality. The exposed timber to be Teak Wood with polish and polyutherane finish. & 91500-99500
Table made of teak wood & boiling water proof board, veneer & Glass. The wood work &
the veneer to be polished & polyutherane finish.
7 Study Chair : Study Chair with mid back, having cushion in seat & back, with Upholistry.
The base to be revolving & tilting with wheels.
12500-20000
D VVIP Suites Type-C:
(i) Office:
1 Office Table : Office Table made of 19mm B.W.P. ply with post laminate on both sides..
The storage unit shall consist of drawers. Drawers shall consist of 12mm thick board for
sides and back 19mm thick board. Drawers shall slide on lay-on system (sliding
mechanism). All exposed edges of ply / board shall be finished with 6mm thick teak wood
35000-44500
lipping . All the units shall be provided with all the necessary hardware such as handles
knobs , sliding mechanism . All exposed wooden surface to be finished in poly utherane
polish in desired colour, shade to be approved. All unexposed surface to have Laminate
with edges having wax polish.
2 Main Chair : Main Chair with high back, having cushion in seat & back, with Upholistry. The
base to be revolving & tilting with wheels.
12500-20000
3 Visitor Chair : Visitor Chair with mid back, having cushion in seat & back, with Upholistry.
The base to be revolving & tilting with wheels.
5500-12300
4 Single Sofa : Single sitter Sofa having frame work of hand wood, with spiring, 125mm seat
cushion and total 80mm back cushion, covered with Upholstry of Good Quality. The 26500-34800
exposed timber to be Teak Wood with polish and polyutherane finish.
5 Centre Table : Centre Table made of teak wood & boiling water proof board, veneer &
Glass. The wood work & the veneer to be polished & polyutherane finish. (1.22 x .60).
28000-35500
6 Side Table : Side Table made of teak wood & boiling water proof board, veneer & Glass.
The wood work & the veneer to be polished & polyutherane finish. (.60 x .45)
20000-28200
(i) Living & Dinning Room:
1 Three Seater Sofa : Three Seater Sofa having frame work of hand wood, with spiring,
125mm seat cushion and total 80mm back cushion, covered with Upholstry of Good
75500-85000
Quality. The exposed timber to be Teak Wood with polish and polyutherane finish. (1.80 x
.80)
2 Single Sofa : Single sitter Sofa having frame work of hand wood, with spiring, 125mm seat
cushion and total 80mm back cushion, covered with Upholstry of Good Quality. The 26500-34800
exposed timber to be Teak Wood with polish and polyutherane finish.
3 Centre Table : Centre Table made of teak wood & boiling water proof board, veneer &
Glass. The wood work & the veneer to be polished & polyutherane finish. (1.22 x .60).
28000-35500
4 Side Table : Side Table made of teak wood & boiling water proof board, veneer & Glass.
The wood work & the veneer to be polished & polyutherane finish. (.60 x .45)
20000-28200
5 TV Unit : TV Unit made of 19mm Boiling Water Proof Board having drawers with veneer on
the exposed portion, having laminate on the inside portion. The exposed veneer & timber 32500-41800
to be polish & Polyutherane finish.
6 4 Seater Dining Table : Dining Table made of Teak Wood frame with laminated top on
Boiling Water Proof Board. All exposed timber to be Polish & Polyutherane finish.
25300-35300
7 Dining Chair : Dining Chair with mid back, having cushion in seat & back, with Upholistry.
The base to be revolving & tilting with wheels.
13700-21700
(ii) Bedroom:

Signature of Contractor Page 133 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

1 Double Bed : Double Bed made of 19mm Boiling Water Proof Board with Teak Wood
frame on outer side, having platform for the Mattress (1950 x 900). The exposed head & 82500-92000
foot boards to have laminate.
2 Bed Side Table : Bed Side Table made of 19mm Boiling Water Proof Board with Veneer,
having Teak Wood frame on outer side. The side table to have drawers moving on the 11500-21000
slider. The outer surface to be polish & Polyutherane finish.
3 Single Sofa : Single sitter Sofa having frame work of hand wood, with spiring, 125mm seat
cushion and total 80mm back cushion, covered with Upholstry of Good Quality. The 26500-34800
exposed timber to be Teak Wood with polish and polyutherane finish.
4 Coffee Table : Coffee Table made of teak wood & boiling water proof board, veneer &
Glass. The wood work & the veneer to be polished & polyutherane finish. (1.22 x .60).
19100-30500
5 TV Unit : TV Unit made of 19mm Boiling Water Proof Board having drawers with veneer on
the exposed portion, having laminate on the inside portion. The exposed veneer & timber 32500-41800
to be polish & Polyutherane finish.
6 2 Seater sofa with Table : Two sitter Sofa having frame work of hand wood, with spiring,
125mm seat cushion and total 80mm back cushion, covered with Upholstry of Good
Quality. The exposed timber to be Teak Wood with polish and polyutherane finish. & Table 91500-99500
made of teak wood & boiling water proof board, veneer & Glass. The wood work & the
veneer to be polished & polyutherane finish.
7 Study Chair : Study Chair with mid back, having cushion in seat & back, with Upholistry.
12500-20000
The base to be revolving & tilting with wheels.
E Lounge ( All floors):
1 Two Sitter Sofa : Two sitter Sofa having frame work of hand wood, with spiring, 125mm
seat cushion and total 80mm back cushion, covered with Upholstry of Good Quality. The 58700-68500
exposed timber to be Teak Wood with polish and polyutherane finish.
2 Centre Table : Centre Table made of teak wood & boiling water proof board, veneer &
Glass. The wood work & the veneer to be polished & polyutherane finish. (1.22 x .60).
28000-35500
3 Planter box 6800-15200
Sixth Floor
A INDOOR GAMES:
1 Chair : Chair with mid back, having cushion in seat & back, with Upholistry. The base to be
revolving & tilting with wheels.
10200-19700
2 Two Sitter Sofa : Two sitter Sofa having frame work of hand wood, with spiring, 125mm
seat cushion and total 80mm back cushion, covered with Upholstry of Good Quality. The 58700-68500
exposed timber to be Teak Wood with polish and polyutherane finish.
3 Storage : Storage made of 19mm B.W.P. ply with post laminate on both sides.. The storage
unit shall consist of drawers. Drawers shall consist of 12mm thick board for sides and back
19mm thick board. Drawers shall slide on lay-on system (sliding mechanism). All exposed
edges of ply / board shall be finished with 6mm thick teak wood lipping . All the units shall 30500-39500
be provided with all the necessary hardware such as handles knobs , sliding mechanism .
All exposed wooden surface to be finished in poly utherane polish in desired colour, shade
to be approved. All unexposed surface to have Laminate with edges having wax polish.

2.76.1 FIXED FURNITURES:

A. CM SUITE AREA:

1. WARDROBE WITH 1 INNER DRAWER & 3 WOODEN SHELF & 1 HANGING ROD & LOCKER
( 1200 W X 585 D X 2400 H )

Signature of Contractor Page 134 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

LUGGAGE SPACE & 1 HANGING BRACKET ( 1950 W X 585 D X 2400 H )

DRESSER UNIT W/O MIRROR ( 1097 W X 585 D X 2400 H )

Providing and fixing both sides of laminate ( WHITE ) finish wardrobe cabinet with shelf in 18mm HMR
MDF E1 Grade pre laminate with 18mm HMR MDF E1 Grade PVC Membrane classic profile shutter
with ceremic handles. All ends should have edge banding tape of M/s Rehau / Dolkin 0.8mm thickness
for cabinet. Back Panel pre laminated ( WHITE ) 5mm HMR MDF. Carcass to be supplied in knock
down condition with pre factory drill for mini fix, dowels, Shelf with shelf supports and 10mm adjustable
legs & europen sliding fitting with ceremic handles. Luggage rod will be SS 304 grade with 10 mm
thckness. ( Price Range 4.9 Lacs to 5.6 Lacs ).

2. BAR UNIT WITH STORAGE & BOTTEL HOLDER & REFRIGRATOR PLACE
1500 W X 2000 H X 560 D

Providing and fixing both sides of laminate ( Crosscut oak ) finish bar cabinet with shelf in 18mm HMR
MDF E1 Grade pre laminate with 18mm HMR MDF E1 Grade PVC Membrane finish shutter .All ends
should have edge banding tape of M/s Rehau / Dolkin 0.8mm thickness for cabinet. Back Panel pre
laminated ( Crosscut oak) 5mm HMR MDF. Carcass to be supplied in knock down condition with pre
factory drill for mini fix, dowels, Shelf with shelf supports and 10mm adjustable legs &
Hettich/Spacewood make auto soft closing hinges with bronze finish handles. ( Price Range 2.7 Lacs
to 3.5 Lacs ).

B. VIP SUITE (I, II, III, IV, V, VI FLOOR):

1. WARDROBE WITH 1 INNER DRAWER & 3 WOODEN SHELF & 1 HANGING ROD & LOCKER
( 800 W X 585 D X 2400 H )

DRESSER UNIT W/O MIRROR ( 850 W X 585 D X 2400 H )

Providing and fixing both sides of laminate ( Crosscut oak ) finish wardrobe cabinet with shelf in 18mm
HMR MDF E1 Grade pre laminate with 18mm HMR MDF E1 Grade PVC Membrane finish shutter with
profile handles. All ends should have edge banding tape of M/s Rehau / Dolkin 0.8mm thickness for
cabinet. Back Panel pre laminated ( Crosscut oak ) 5mm HMR MDF. Carcass to be supplied in knock
down condition with pre factory drill for mini fix, dowels, Shelf with shelf supports and 10mm adjustable
legs & europen sliding fitting with profile handles. ( Price Range 1.4 Lacs to 1.8 Lacs ).

2. WARDROBE WITH 1 INNER DRAWER & 3 WOODEN SHELF & 1 HANGING ROD & LOCKER
( 1000 W X 585 D X 2400 H )

LUGGAGE SPACE & 1 HANGING BRACKET ( 950 W X 585 D X 2400 H )

Providing and fixing both sides of laminate ( walnut bronze ) finish tall cabinet with shelf in 18mm HMR
MDF E1 Grade pre laminate with 22mm HMR MDF E1 Grade PVC Membrane finish fluted shutter.
All ends should have edge banding tape of M/s Rehau / Dolkin 0.8mm thickness for cabinet. Back
Panel pre laminated (walnut bronze) 5mm HMR MDF. Carcass to be supplied in knock down condition
with pre factory drill for mini fix, dowels, Shelf with shelf supports and10mm adjustable legs &
Hettich/Spacewood make auto soft closing hinges with aluminium finish knob. ( Price Range 1.4 Lac
to 1.9 Lacs ).

Signature of Contractor Page 135 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

C. VVIP SUITE (I, II FLOOR):

1. SLIDING WARDROBE WITH 1 INNER DRAWER,2 WOODEN SHELF, 1 LOCKER, 1 HANGING

ROAD, SPACE OF SMALL PUFFY 1650 W X 585 D X 2400 H

Providing and fixing both sides of laminate ( walnut bronze ) finish tall cabinet with shelf in 18mm HMR
MDF E1 Grade pre laminate with 22mm HMR MDF E1 Grade PVC Membrane finish fluted shutter.
All ends should have edge banding tape of M/s Rehau / Dolkin 0.8mm thickness for cabinet. Back
Panel pre laminated (walnut bronze) 5mm HMR MDF. Carcass to be supplied in knock down condition
with pre factory drill for mini fix, dowels, Shelf with shelf supports and10mm adjustable legs &
Hettich/Spacewood make auto soft closing hinges with aluminium finish knob. ( Price Range 1.4 Lac
to 2 Lac )

2. WARDROBE WITH 1 INNER DRAWER & 3 WOODEN SHELF & 1 HANGING ROD & LOCKER
( 800 W X 585 D X 2400 H )

WARDROBE WITH 1 INNER DRAWER & 3 WOODEN SHELF & 1 HANGING ROD ( 800 W X 585
D X 2400 H )

DRESSER UNIT W/O MIRROR ( 800 W X 585 D X 2400 H )

Providing and fixing both sides of laminate ( Crosscut oak ) finish wardrobe cabinet with shelf in 18mm
HMR MDF E1 Grade pre laminate with 22mm HMR MDF E1 Grade PVC Membrane finish shutter with
inbuilt ( Tony ) handles. All ends should have edge banding tape of M/s Rehau / Dolkin 0.8mm
thickness for cabinet. Back Panel pre laminated ( Crosscut oak ) 5mm HMR MDF. Carcass to be
supplied in knock down condition with pre factory drill for mini fix, dowels, Shelf with shelf supports
and 10mm adjustable legs & Hettich/Spacewood make auto soft closing hinges with laminated tony
handles. Mirror will be of sant govind. ( 1.8 Lac to 2.5 Lac ).

3. SLIDING WARDROBE WITH 1 INNER DRAWER,2 WOODEN SHELF, 1 LOCKER, 1 HANGING

ROAD, SPACE OF SMALL PUFFY 1500 W X 585 D X 2400 H

LUGGAGE SPACE & 3 HANGING BRACKET 1125 W X 585 D X 2400 H

Providing and fixing both sides of laminate ( Crosscut oak ) finish wardrobe cabinet with shelf in 18mm
HMR MDF E1 Grade pre laminate with 18mm HMR MDF E1 Grade PVC Membrane finish shutter with
profile handles. All ends should have edge banding tape of M/s Rehau / Dolkin 0.8mm thickness for
cabinet. Back Panel pre laminated ( Crosscut oak ) 5mm HMR MDF. Carcass to be supplied in knock
down condition with pre factory drill for mini fix, dowels, Shelf with shelf supports and 10mm adjustable
legs & europen sliding fitting with profile handles. Luggage rod will be SS 304 grade with 10 mm
thickness. ( 2.06 Lac to 2.7 Lac )

4. SLIDING WARDROBE WITH 1 INNER DRAWER,2 WOODEN SHELF, 1 LOCKER, 1 HANGING

ROAD, SPACE OF SMALL PUFFY 1500 W X 585 D X 2400 H

LUGGAGE SPACE & 3 HANGING BRACKET 900 W X 585 D X 2400 H

Providing and fixing both sides of laminate ( Crosscut oak ) finish wardrobe cabinet with shelf in 18mm
HMR MDF E1 Grade pre laminate with 18mm HMR MDF E1 Grade PVC Membrane finish shutter with
profile handles. All ends should have edge banding tape of M/s Rehau / Dolkin 0.8mm thickness for
cabinet. Back Panel pre laminated ( Crosscut oak ) 5mm HMR MDF. Carcass to be supplied in knock

Signature of Contractor Page 136 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

down condition with pre factory drill for mini fix, dowels, Shelf with shelf supports and 10mm adjustable
legs & europen sliding fitting with profile handles. Luggage rod will be SS 304 grade with 10 mm
thickness. ( 1.9 Lac to 2.6 Lac )

5. TALL CABINET WITH 1 DRAWER & 2 SHUTTER & MINI FRIDGE PROVISION ( 900 W X 585 D
X 2400 H )

LUGGAGE RACK ( 900 W X 585 D X 2400 H )

Providing and fixing both sides of laminate ( walnut bronze ) finish tall cabinet with shelf in 18mm HMR
MDF E1 Grade pre laminate with 22mm HMR MDF E1 Grade PVC Membrane finish fluted shutter.
All ends should have edge banding tape of M/s Rehau / Dolkin 0.8mm thickness for cabinet. Back
Panel pre laminated (walnut bronze) 5mm HMR MDF. Carcass to be supplied in knock down condition
with pre factory drill for mini fix, dowels, Shelf with shelf supports and10mm adjustable legs &
Hettich/Spacewood make auto soft closing hinges with aluminium finish knob. ( 1.4 Lac to 1.7 Lac )

6. BAR UNIT WITH STORAGE & BOTTEL HOLDER & REFRIGRATOR PLACE 1500 W X 2100 H X
560 D

Providing and fixing both sides of laminate ( walnut bronze ) finish base & wall cabinet with shelf in
18mm HMR MDF E1 Grade pre laminate with 18mm HMR MDF E1 Grade PVC Membrane finish
fluted shutter. All ends should have edge banding tape of M/s Rehau / Dolkin 0.8mm thickness for
cabinet. Back Panel pre laminated ( walnut bronze ) 5mm HMR MDF. Carcass to be supplied in knock
down condition with pre factory drill for mini fix, dowels, Shelf with shelf supports and10mm adjustable
legs & Hettich/Spacewood make auto soft closing hinges with edge profile handles. ( 1.2 Lac to 1.6
Lac )

7. BAR UNIT WITH STORAGE & BOTTEL HOLDER & REFRIGRATOR PLACE 2400 W X 2100 H X
560 D

Providing and fixing both sides of laminate ( walnut bronze ) finish base & wall cabinet with shelf in
18mm HMR MDF E1 Grade pre laminate with 18mm HMR MDF E1 Grade PVC Membrane finish
fluted shutter & elan glass shutter . All ends should have edge banding tape of M/s Rehau / Dolkin
0.8mm thickness for cabinet. Back Panel pre laminated ( walnut bronze ) 5mm HMR MDF. Carcass
to be supplied in knock down condition with pre factory drill for mini fix, dowels, Shelf with shelf
supports and10mm adjustable legs & Hettich/Spacewood make auto soft closing hinges with edge
profile handles. ( 1.9 Lac to 2.7 Lac )

8. BAR UNIT WITH STORAGE & BOTTEL HOLDER & REFRIGRATOR PLACE 1800 W X 2100 H X
560 D

Providing and fixing both sides of laminate ( walnut bronze ) finish base & wall cabinet with shelf in
18mm HMR MDF E1 Grade pre laminate with 18mm HMR MDF E1 Grade PVC Membrane finish
shutter. All ends should have edge banding tape of M/s Rehau / Dolkin 0.8mm thickness for cabinet.
Back Panel pre laminated ( walnut bronze ) 5mm HMR MDF. Carcass to be supplied in knock down
condition with pre factory drill for mini fix, dowels, Shelf with shelf supports and10mm adjustable legs
& Hettich/Spacewood make auto soft closing hinges with edge profile handles. ( 1.4 Lac to 2 Lac )

9. BAR UNIT WITH STORAGE & BOTTEL HOLDER & REFRIGRATOR PLACE 2500 W X 2100 H X
560 D

Signature of Contractor Page 137 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

Providing and fixing both sides of laminate ( walnut bronze ) finish base & wall cabinet with shelf in
18mm HMR MDF E1 Grade pre laminate with 18mm HMR MDF E1 Grade PVC Membrane finish
fluted shutter & elan glass shutter . All ends should have edge banding tape of M/s Rehau / Dolkin
0.8mm thickness for cabinet. Back Panel pre laminated ( walnut bronze ) 5mm HMR MDF. Carcass
to be supplied in knock down condition with pre factory drill for mini fix, dowels, Shelf with shelf
supports and10mm adjustable legs & Hettich/Spacewood make auto soft closing hinges with edge
profile handles. ( 2.04 Lac to 2.7 Lac )

D. STANDARD SUITE:

1. SLIDING WARDROBE WITH 1 INNER DRAWER,2 WOODEN SHELF, 1 LOCKER, 1 HANGING

ROAD, SPACE OF SMALL PUFFY 1500 W X 585 D X 2400 H

LUGGAGE SPACE & 3 HANGING BRACKET 1125 W X 585 D X 2400 H

Providing and fixing both sides of laminate ( Crosscut oak ) finish wardrobe cabinet with shelf in 18mm
HMR MDF E1 Grade pre laminate with 18mm HMR MDF E1 Grade PVC Membrane finish shutter with
profile handles. All ends should have edge banding tape of M/s Rehau / Dolkin 0.8mm thickness for
cabinet. Back Panel pre laminated ( Crosscut oak ) 5mm HMR MDF. Carcass to be supplied in knock
down condition with pre factory drill for mini fix, dowels, Shelf with shelf supports and 10mm adjustable
legs & europen sliding fitting with profile handles. Luggage rod will be SS 304 grade with 10 mm
thckness. ( 2.06 Lac to 2.6 Lac )

E. STAFF RESIDENCE (I, II, III, IV, V, VI FLOOR):

1. WARDROBE WITH 1 INNER DRAWER & 3 WOODEN SHELF & 1 HANGING ROD ( 1300 W X
585 D X 2400 H )

Providing and fixing both sides of laminate ( Crosscut oak ) finish wardrobe cabinet with shelf in 18mm
HMR MDF E1 Grade pre laminate with 18mm HMR MDF E1 Grade PVC Membrane finish shutter .All
ends should have edge banding tape of M/s Rehau / Dolkin 0.8mm thickness for cabinet. Back Panel
pre laminated ( Crosscut oak) 5mm HMR MDF. Carcass to be supplied in knock down condition with
pre factory drill for mini fix, dowels, Shelf with shelf supports and 10mm adjustable legs &
Hettich/Spacewood make auto soft closing hinges with aluminum finish handle of 1149cd. ( 0.87 to
1.2 Lac )

2. WARDROBE WITH 1 INNER DRAWER & 3 WOODEN SHELF & 1 HANGING ROD ( 1200 W X
585 D X 2400 H )

Providing and fixing both sides of laminate ( Crosscut oak ) finish wardrobe cabinet with shelf in 18mm
HMR MDF E1 Grade pre laminate with 18mm HMR MDF E1 Grade PVC Membrane finish shutter .All
ends should have edge banding tape of M/s Rehau / Dolkin 0.8mm thickness for cabinet. Back Panel
pre laminated ( Crosscut oak) 5mm HMR MDF. Carcass to be supplied in knock down condition with
pre factory drill for mini fix, dowels, Shelf with shelf supports and 10mm adjustable legs &
Hettich/Spacewood make auto soft closing hinges with aluminum finish handle of 1149cd. ( 0.86 Lac
to 1.1 Lac )

3. WARDROBE WITH 1 INNER DRAWER & 3 WOODEN SHELF & 1 HANGING ROD ( 1000 W X
585 D X 2400 H )

Providing and fixing both sides of laminate ( Crosscut oak ) finish wardrobe cabinet with shelf in 18mm
HMR MDF E1 Grade pre laminate with 18mm HMR MDF E1 Grade PVC Membrane finish shutter .All

Signature of Contractor Page 138 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

ends should have edge banding tape of M/s Rehau / Dolkin 0.8mm thickness for cabinet. Back Panel
pre laminated ( Crosscut oak) 5mm HMR MDF. Carcass to be supplied in knock down condition with
pre factory drill for mini fix, dowels, Shelf with shelf supports and 10mm adjustable legs &
Hettich/Spacewood make auto soft closing hinges with aluminum finish handle of 1149cd. ( 0.67 Lac
to 1 Lac )

4. WARDROBE WITH 1 INNER DRAWER & 3 WOODEN SHELF & 1 HANGING ROD ( 950 W X 585
D X 2400 H )

Providing and fixing both sides of laminate ( Crosscut oak ) finish wardrobe cabinet with shelf in 18mm
HMR MDF E1 Grade pre laminate with 18mm HMR MDF E1 Grade PVC Membrane finish shutter .All
ends should have edge banding tape of M/s Rehau / Dolkin 0.8mm thickness for cabinet. Back Panel
pre laminated ( Crosscut oak) 5mm HMR MDF. Carcass to be supplied in knock down condition with
pre factory drill for mini fix, dowels, Shelf with shelf supports and 10mm adjustable legs &
Hettich/Spacewood make auto soft closing hinges with aluminum finish handle of 1149cd. ( 0.63 Lac
to 1.2 Lac )

5. WARDROBE WITH 1 INNER DRAWER & 3 WOODEN SHELF & 1 HANGING ROD ( 900 W X 585
D X 2400 H )
WARDROBE WITH 5 SHELF ( 450 W X 585 D X 2400 H )

Providing and fixing both sides of laminate ( Crosscut oak ) finish wardrobe cabinet with shelf in 18mm
HMR MDF E1 Grade pre laminate with 18mm HMR MDF E1 Grade PVC Membrane finish shutter .All
ends should have edge banding tape of M/s Rehau / Dolkin 0.8mm thickness for cabinet. Back Panel
pre laminated ( Crosscut oak) 5mm HMR MDF. Carcass to be supplied in knock down condition with
pre factory drill for mini fix, dowels, Shelf with shelf supports and 10mm adjustable legs &
Hettich/Spacewood make auto soft closing hinges with aluminum finish handle of 1149cd. ( 0.9 Lac to
1.2 Lac )

6. WARDROBE WITH 1 INNER DRAWER & 3 WOODEN SHELF & 1 HANGING ROD ( 900 W X 585
D X 2400 H ) COMPLETE WITH 4 SETS OF EACH

Providing and fixing both sides of laminate ( Crosscut oak ) finish wardrobe cabinet with shelf in 18mm
HMR MDF E1 Grade pre laminate with 18mm HMR MDF E1 Grade PVC Membrane finish shutter .All
ends should have edge banding tape of M/s Rehau / Dolkin 0.8mm thickness for cabinet. Back Panel
pre laminated ( Crosscut oak) 5mm HMR MDF. Carcass to be supplied in knock down condition with
pre factory drill for mini fix, dowels, Shelf with shelf supports and 10mm adjustable legs &
Hettich/Spacewood make auto soft closing hinges with aluminum finish handle of 1149cd. ( 2.5 Lac to
2.8 Lac )

********

Signature of Contractor Page 139 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

VOL. 5(c) TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

PLUMBING AND SANITARY WORKS

Signature of Contractor Page 140 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

1. SCOPE OF WORK

Work under this section shall consist of furnishing all labor as necessary and required to completely
install all Sanitary Fixtures, Brass and Chromium plated fittings and accessories as required by the
drawings and specified hereinafter.
Without restricting to the generally of the foregoing the Sanitary Fixtures shall include all Sanitary
Fixtures, C.P. fittings and Accessories etc. necessary and required for the Building.
Whether specifically mentioned or not all Fixtures and appliances shall be provided with all fixing
devices, nuts, bolts, screws, hangers as required
Testing of all fixture and fittings.
SECTION – I: SANITARY FIXTURES & FITTINGS

1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

All Fixtures and fittings shall be provided with all such accessories as are required to complete the
item in working condition whether specifically mentioned or not in the Drawing, Specifications and
Drawings.
All Fixtures and accessories shall be fixed in accordance with a set pattern matching the tiles or
interior finish as per Architectural/Interior designer’s requirements. Wherever necessary the fittings
shall be centered to dimensions and pattern desired.
Fixing screws shall be half round head Chromium Plated brass with C.P. washers wherever
required as per directions of Engineer-in-Charge.
All Fittings and Fixtures shall be fixed in a neat workmanlike manner true to Levels and Heights
shows on the drawings and in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Care shall be
taken to fix all Inlet and Outlet Pipes at correct positions. Faulty locations shall be made good and
any damage to the finished floor, tiling or terrace shall be made good at Contractors cost.
When directed, Contractor shall install Fixtures and accessories in a mock-up room for the approval
of the Engineer-in-Charge Sample room Fixtures may be reused on the works if undamaged, but no
additional payment for fixing or dismantling shall be admissible.

a. Supporting and Fixing Devices

The contractor shall provide all supporting and fixing devices necessary to install the sanitary
fixtures and fittings securely in position. The fixing devices shall be rigidly anchored into the building
structure. The devices shall be rust resistant and shall be so fixed that they do not present an
unsightly look in the final assembly. Where the location demands, the Architects may instruct the
contractor to provide chromium plated or other similarly finished fixing devices. In such
circumstances the contractor shall arrange to supply fixing devices and install them complete with
appropriate vibration isolating pads, washers and gaskets.
b. Final Installation
The contractor shall install all sanitary fixtures and fittings in their final position in accordance with
approved trial assemblies and as shown on drawings. The installation shall be complete with all
supply and waste connections. The connection between building piping system and the sanitary
fixtures shall be through proper unions and flanged to facilitate removal/replacement of sanitary
fixtures without disturbing the built in piping system. All unions and flanges shall match in
appearance with other exposed fittings.
Fixtures shall be mounted rigid, plumb and true to alignment. The outlets of water closet pans and
similar appliances shall be examined to ensure that outlet ends are butting on the receiving pipes
before making the joints. It shall be ensured that the receiving pipes are clear of obstruction. When

Signature of Contractor Page 141 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

fixtures are being mounted, attention shall be paid to the possibility of movement and settlement by
other causes. Overflows shall be arranged as to give visible warning and discharge. A check shall
be made to ensure that necessary anchoring devices have been provided for supporting water
closets, wash basins, sinks and other appliances.
Joints/gaps between all sanitary appliances/fixtures and the floor/walls shall be caulked with an
approved mildew resistant sealant, having antifungal properties, of color and shade to match that of
the appliances/fixture and the floor/wall to the extent possible.

c. Protection against Damage

The contractor shall take every precaution to protect all sanitary fixtures against damage, misuse,
crazing, staining breakage and pilferage by providing proper wrapping and locking arrangement till
the completion of the installation. At the time of handing over, the contractor shall clean, disinfect
and polish all fixtures and fittings. Any fixtures and fittings found damaged, cracked chipped,
stained or scratched shall be removed and new fixtures and fittings free from defects shall be
installed at his own cost to complete the work.

2. EUROPEAN W.C.

European W.C. shall be wash down, single or double siphonic type, wall mounted set, flushed by
means of exposed cistern, as specified in Drawing. Flush pipe/bend shall be connected to the W.C.
by means of suitable rubber adapter. Wall hung W.C. shall be supported by C.I. floor mounted
chair.
Each W.C. seat shall be so fixed that it remains absolutely stationary in vertical position without
falling down on the W.C Each W.C. shall be provided with 110mm dia (OD) PVC connector
connecting the ceramic outlet of W.C.

3. INDIAN W.C.

Indian W.C. pan shall be Orissa pattern of size as specified in the Drawing. Each W.C. shall be
provided with a 100 mm dia cast iron or porcelain P or S trap with or without vent horn. W.C. shall
be flushed by means of an exposed or concealed type flush valve or as specified in [Link]
W.C. shall be fixed in level in a neat workmanlike manner. The W.C. and trap shall be set in cement
concrete [Link] mix (1 cement: 2 coarse sand: 4 stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size) joints
between W.C. and flush pipe shall be made with a putty or white lead and linseed oil and caulked
well or with an approved rubber joint.

4. URINALS

Urinals shall be flat back large white glazed Vitreous China of approx. size [Link]
back Urinals shall be provided with 15 mm dia C.P. spreader, 32 mm dia C.P. domical waste and
C.P. cast brass bottle trap with pipe and wall flange, and shall be fixed to wall by one C.I. bracket
and two C.I. wall clips as recommended by manufacturers complete and as directed by Engineer-in-
Charge.
Flat back urinals shall be fixed with C.P. Brass screws and shall be provided with 32 mm dia
Domical Waste leading to Urinal [Link] shall be flushed by means of sensor operated flush
system. Waste pipes for urinals shall be of the following:
a. G.I. Pipes

Waste pipes may be exposed on wall or concealed in chase as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
Specifications for waste pipes shall be same as given in Sub Section.

Signature of Contractor Page 142 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

5. FLUSHING CISTERN

Flushing cistern shall be concealed or Exposed type design for low volume dual flushes 3 Ltrs & 6
Ltrs as directed by Engineer-in-Charge or mentioned in the drawing.

6. Wash BASIN

Wash Basins shall be white glazed vitreous china of size, shape and type as indicated in
architectural [Link] Basin shall be provided with MS. or C.I. brackets and clips and the
basin securely fixed to wall. Placing of Basins over the brackets without proper securing and fixing
shall not be [Link] Basin shall be provided with 32mm dia C.P. waste with overflow, pop-
up waste or rubber plug and chain, 32mm dia C.P. Brass Bottle Trap with C.P. pipe to wall and
flange. Each basin shall be provided with CP brass push type self closing pillar tap or Single hole
Mixing Fitting as mentioned in the drawing. Basins shall be fixed at proper heights as shown on
architecture drawings. If height is not specified, the rim level shall be 79 cms above the floor or as
directed by Engineer-in-Charge.

7. SINKS

Sinks shall be of precast Terrazzo marble or White Glazed fire clay or vitreous china or stainless
steel or any other material as specified in the architectural [Link] Wash Sinks and Process
Sinks shall be of stainless [Link] sink shall be provided with M.S. or C.I. brackets and clips and
securely fixed. Counter top sinks shall be fixed with suitable angle iron clips or brackets as
recommended by the manufacturer. Each sink shall be provided with 40 mm dia C.P. waste with
chain and plug or P.V.C. waste. Fixing shall be done as directed by Engineer-in-Charge. Fittings for
sinks shall be mixing fittings or as specified in the architectural drawing.

8. SHOWER SET

Shower set shall comprise of single lever mixer adjustable hand shower. Each shower set shall also
be provided with Overhead C.P. shower with 100mm long arm with flange of approved
[Link] stop cocks wherever required shall be so fixed as to keep the wall flange clear off
the finished wall. Wall flanges embedded in the finishing shall not be accepted.

9. ACCESSORIES

Accessories shall be of any of the following types:

 Towel rail
Towel rail shall be C.P brass of size 610mm long and 20mm dia, and fixing with C.P brass
brackets fixed to wooden cleats with C.P. brass screws.
 Towel rings
Towel rail shall be C.P brass of size 150mm dia, and fixing with C.P brass brackets fixed to
wooden cleats with C.P. brass screws.
 Toilet paper holder
Toilet paper holder shall be of Satin finish stainless steel AISI 316 grade wall mounted type
fixed to wooden cleats with C.P. brass screws
Soap dispensers shall be of satin finish stainless steel AISI 316 grade wall mounted liquid soap
dispenser with indicator having bottom trough of soap fixed to wooden cleats with C.P. brass
screws or as directed by [Link] shall be fixed with stainless steel half
round head screws and cup washers in wall with rawl plugs or nylon sleeves and shall include
cutting and making good.

Signature of Contractor Page 143 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

Porcelain accessories shall be fixed in walls and set in cement mortar 1:2 (1 cement : 2 coarse
sand) and fixed in relation to the tiling work. The flange of the recessed fixture shall cover the
recess in the wall fully.

Contractor shall install all Chromium Plated and porcelain accessories as shown on the drawings or
directed by Engineer-in-Charge. All C.P. Accessories shall be fixed with C.P. brass half round head
screws and cup washers in wall with rawl plugs or nylon sleeves and shall include cutting and
making good as required or directed by Engineer-in-Charge. Porcelain accessories shall be fixed in
walls and set in cement mortar 1:2 (1 cement: 2 coarse sand) and fixed in relation to the tiling work.

10. TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE

Sanitary fixture & fittings shall be testing is done as per BS-5572

SECTION – II INTERNAL DRAINAGE SOIL, WASTE & VENT PIPES

11. SCOPE OF WORK

Work under this section shall consist of furnishing all labor, materials, equipments and appliances
necessary and required to completely install all soil, waste, vent and rainwater pipes as required by
the drawings, specified hereinafter and as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
Without restricting to the generally of the foregoing, the soil, waste, vent and rainwater pipes system
shall include the followings:-
 Vertical and horizontal Soil, Waste and Vent Pipes, Rainwater Pipes and Fittings, Joints Clamps
and connections to Fixtures.
 Connection of pipes to Gully Traps & Manholes etc.
 Floor and urinal traps, cleanout plugs, inlet fittings and rainwater heads as specified.
 Waste pipes connections from all Fixtures e.g. wash basins, sinks, urinals and kitchen
equipments.
 Testing of all pipes.

12. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

All materials shall be new of the best quality conforming to specifications and subject to the
approval of Engineer-in-Charge.
Soil, waste and vent pipes in shafts, ducts and in concealed areas i.e. (false ceiling) shall consist of
UPVC, SWR Pipe. Pipes and fittings shall be fixed truly vertical, horizontal or in slopes as required
in a neat workmanlike [Link] shall be fixed in a manner as to provide easy accessibility for
repair and maintenance and shall not cause obstruction in shafts, passages [Link] shall be
securely fixed to walls and ceilings by suitable clamps at intervals specified. Pipes shall as far as
possible be kept 50mm clear of wall.
Access doors for fittings and cleanouts shall be so located that they are easily accessible for repair
and maintenance.

Every waste pipes shall discharge above the grating of properly trapped gully. Contractor will
ensure that this requirement is adequately met with. Wherever floor traps are provided it shall be
ensured that at-least one washbasin/washing trough is connected to such floor traps to avoid drying
of water seal in the trap.
All traps on branch soil and waste pipes shall also be ventilated at a point not less than 75mm or
more than 300mm from their highest part and on the side nearest to the soil pipe or waste pipe.
All works shall be executed as directed by Engineer-in-Charge.

13.1 Soil, Waste & Vent Pipes

Signature of Contractor Page 144 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

a) The Soil & Waste pipe system above ground has been planned as a “two pipe system" as
defined in IS: 5329, having separate pipes for waste from kitchen sinks, showers, washbasins,
AHU's condensate drains and floor drains . Waste stacks have been provided with a “P” trap
at basement ceiling.
b) All waste water from AHU's, A.C. plant and pump rooms, floor channels in basements will be
provided with a deep seal trap before connecting to the main drain or vertical stack.
c) Vertical soil & waste stacks shall be connected to a common horizontal drain pipe at basement
ceiling or to an external manhole directly wherever feasible as shown on the drawings.
d) All soil and waste from areas below general ground level (Basements) will be collected in
sumps and pumped into sewer lines.
e) Anti-siphonage pipe (ASP) shall be provided for soil fittings on vertical stacks. It may also be
provided for waste lines where shown on the drawings.
f) Vent pipes shall be provided at all sewer lines at the starting manholes.
g) Waste pipe used in kitchen area shall be For SWR pipes conforming to IS 13592 All pipes
shall be straight and smooth and inside free from irregular bore, blowholes, cracks and other
manufacturing defects. Pipes shall be centrifugally cast (spun) iron pipes conforming to
I.S:3989.
h) Jointing of pipe: All Upvc Pipe shall be joint with solvent
i) Diametre of Pipe (mm) Consumption per joint (grams)
50 130 to 150
80 150 to 170
100 200 to 250
150 250 to 300
151
13.2 Rainwater Pipes

a) All terraces shall be drained by providing down-takes rainwater pipes.

b) A separate piped drainage system for slopping roof with leaders shall be provided.

c) Rainwater pipes are separate and independent connected to the external storm water
drainage system as shown on the drawings.

d) Rainwater in enclosed courtyards shall be collected in catch-basins and connected to storm

water drains.

e) Any dry weather flow from waste appliances, AHU's pump rooms, shall be connected to the
sewerage system only.

13.3 Terrace drainage

Open balconies, terraces, planters and formal landscape areas will be drained by a separate pipe
connected to external storm water drainage system.

 Horizontal pipes running along ceiling shall be fixed on galvanized structural adjustable clamps
(Clevis clamps) of special design shown on the drawings or as directed. Horizontal pipes shall be
laid to uniform slope and the clamps adjusted to the proper levels so that the pipes fully rest on
them.
 Contractor shall provide all sleeves, openings, hangers, inserts during the construction. He shall
provide all necessary information to the Engineer-in-charge for making such provisions in the
structure as necessary. All damages shall be made good to restore the surfaces at no extra
cost.

Clamps

Signature of Contractor Page 145 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

 Holder bat clamps shall be of standard design and fabricated from galvanized M.S. standard
flats 40x3 mm thick and 12 mm dia M.S. Rod and 6 mm nuts and bolts. Holder bat clamps shall
be fixed in cement concrete [Link] mix blocks 10x10x10 cms deep.
 Where holder bat clamps are to be fixed in RCC column or slotted angles, walls or beam they shall
be fixed with galvanized 40x3 mm flat iron "U" type clamps with anchor fasteners of approved
design or 6 mm nuts and bolts.
 For SWR pipes conforming to IS 13592 shall be clamped to wall with approved type of UPVC
saddle clamp/ U-clamp or as given in the Bill of quantities.
 Structural clamps shall be fabricated by electro-welding from M.S. structural members e.g. rods,
angles, channels flats as per detailed drawing. Contractor shall provide all nuts & bolts, welding
material. All fabricated clamps, nuts, bolts and washers shall be not dipped galvanized.
 Galvanized slotted angle/channel supports on walls shall be provided wherever shown on
drawings. Angles/channels shall be of sizes shown on drawings or specified in schedule of
quantities. Angles/channels shall be fixed to brick walls with bolts embedded in cement concrete
blocks and to RCC walls with suitable anchor fasteners. The spacing of support bolts horizontally
shall not exceed 1 m.
 Wherever M.S. clamps are required to be anchored directly to brick walls, concrete slabs, beams
or columns, nothing extra shall be payable for clamping arrangement and making good with
cement concrete [Link] mix (1 cement :2 coarse sand :4 mm stone aggregate 20 mm nominal
size) as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
 For sleeves, anchor fasteners and clamp spacing chart shall be as follows:

CLAMP AND PIPE SUPPORT SPACING

< -------- Commercia l Pipe Dia.( Spacing in m ) ------------- >
[Link]. Type of Pipes & Position 15/20 20/25 32/40 50 75/80 100/110 150/160
1 Vertical Pipes
1.1 GI /MS Pipes 2.4 2.4 3 3.6 4.5 5.4
1.2 uPVC Pipes
SWR Pipes x x <----------- 1 m ------------------------ >
IS 13592
1.3 uPVC /cPVC Pipes
IS 4985 for Water Supply x x x <----------1 m------------- >

IS 13585 for SWR x x 0.5 0.7 0.9 0.9

2 Horizontal Pipes
2.1 GI /MS Pipes <------2.0 m ------ > 2.4 m 3 3.6 4 4.5
2.2 uPVC pipes
SWR Pipes <------------------- 1.0 m ---------------- >
IS
Water Supply Pipes uPVC <----------1 m ----------- >
IS 4985
2.3 Fittings All traps and tees and fittings runing below ceiling shall be
supported on both sides
13.4 Traps

13.4.1 Floor traps

Floor traps shall be siphon type full bore P or S type having a minimum 50 mm deep seal. The trap
and main waste pipes in toilets having 150 mm sinking shall run below slab and shall be supported
from the ceiling below. The trap and waste pipes in sunken area (where required) shall be set in
cement concrete blocks firmly supported on the structural floor. The blocks shall be in 1 : 2 : 4 mix
(1 cement :2 coarse sand :4 stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size) and extended to 40 mm below
finished floor level. Contractor shall provide all necessary shuttering and centering for the blocks.
Size of the block shall be 30x30 cms of the required depth.

Signature of Contractor Page 146 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

13.4.2 Floor trap inlet

Bath room traps and connections shall ensure free and silent flow of discharging water. Where
specified, Contractor shall provide a special type inlet fitting fabricated from uPVC pipe without, with
one, two or three inlet sockets fixed on side to connect the waste pipe. Joint between waste and
hopper inlet socket of the trap shall be joined with solvent cement recommended by the
manufacturer. Inlet shall be connected to a uPVC. P or S trap. Floor trap inlet hoppers and the traps
if set in cement concrete blocks as specified in para above without extra charge. uPVC multi-inlet
trap can be used where ever possible to be decided by the Engineer-in-Charge
Trap & Seals
All traps shall be self cleaning design and the seal depth shall be as specified below wherever the
traps are not integral with the appliances:

Appliance or ware Material Trap Type Seal

depth(mm)
Lavatory /wash C.P. cast 32 mm dia Bottle 75 mm
basin brass
Sink C.P. cast 40 mm dia Bottle 75 mm
brass
Kitchen floor drain of uPVC/C.I. 75/100 mm dia ‘P’ 50 mm
fabricated drain or ‘S’
boxes
Urinals uPVC/C.I. 100 mm dia ‘P’ or ‘S’ 50 mm
AHU’s uPVC/C.I. 75 mm dia ‘P’ or ‘S’ 50 mm

13.4.3 Floor Gratings

Floor and urinal traps shall be provided with 100-150mm square or round C.P./ Stainless steel
grating, with rim of approved design and shape. Minimum thickness shall be 4 mm.

13.4.4 Jointing

Pipe to pipe and pipe to fitting (SWR) joint shall be with ‘O’ rubber ring as recommended by the
manufacturer. Jointing with solvent cement shall be applied to uPVC waste pipes (confirming to I.S.
4985) and fittings or as recommended by the manufacturer’s.

13.5 Cleanout Plugs (on soil pipes)

uPVC Clean out pipe for Soil, Waste or Rainwater pipes laid under floors shall be provided near
pipe junctions bends, tees, “Ys” and on straight runs at such intervals as required as per site
conditions. Cleanout pipe shall terminate flush with the floor levels. Cleanout on Drainage
PipesCleanout pipe shall be provided on starting point of each drain and in between at locations
indicated on plans or directed by the Engineer-in-Charge Cleanout pipe shall be of size matching
the full bore of the pipe but not exceeding 160 mm OD. Cleanouts at ceiling level pipe shall be
provided with a bend terminating at floor level above. The cap of the cleanout pipe shall have a cap
flush with floor.
13.6 Waste pipe from appliances

13.6.1 General

a) Waste pipe from appliances e.g. wash basins, sinks and urinals shall be of uPVC pipes 40,
50 or 63 mm OD conforming to IS:4985 class II (6 kg/cm2 )shown on the drawings.
b) All pipes shall be fixed in gradient towards the outfalls of drains. Pipes inside a toilet room
shall be in chase unless otherwise shown on drawings. Where required pipes may be run at

Signature of Contractor Page 147 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

ceiling level in suitable gradient and supported on galvanized structural clamps. Spacing for
clamps for such pipes shall be as per the pipe spacing chart given in section 1.
13.7 Encasing Pipe in Cement Concrete

uPVC soil and waste pipes and drainage under floor in sunken slabs and in wall chases (when
cut specially for the pipe) shall be encased in cement concrete [Link] mix (1 cement :2 coarse
sand : 4 stone aggregate 12 mm size) 75 mm in bed and all-round. When pipes are running well
above the structural slab, the encased pipes shall be supported with suitable cement concrete
pillars of required height at intervals of one meter.
13.8 Testing

Testing procedure specified below apply to all soil, waste and vent pipes above ground including
pipes laid along basement ceiling.
Entire drainage system shall be tested for water tightness during and after completion of the
installation. No portion of the system shall remain untested. Contractor must have adequate
number of expandable rubber/bellow plugs, manometers, smoke testing machines, pipe and fitting
work test benches and any other equipment necessary and required to conduct the tests. All testing
equipment/motors etc. shall be certified for its calibration by an approved laboratory.

All materials obtained and used on site must have manufacturer's Hydraulic Test Certificate for
each batch of materials used on the site.

13.9 Testing Soil, Waste and Rainwater Pipes

Apart from factory test all pipes and fittings shall be hydraulically tested for a head of 3 m preferably
on a specially set up work bench. After applying pressure, strike the pipe with a wooden pallet and
inspect for blow holes and cracks. Pressure may be applied for about 2 minutes. Reject and
remove all defective [Link] installation all connections from fixtures, vertical stacks and
horizontal drains including pipes along ceiling shall be tested to a hydraulic pressure not exceeding
3 m. Such tests shall be conducted for each floor separately by suitable [Link] the installation
is fully complete, it should be tested by flushing the toilets, running at least 20% of all taps
simultaneously and ensuring that the entire system is self draining, has no leakages, blockages etc.
Rectify and replace where [Link] shall maintain a test register identifying date and
time of each area. All tests shall be conducted in presence of Engineer-in-Charge and signed by
both.
Domestic water supply.
Treated water Supply.
Sewage and Drain System.
Sewage Treatment Plant.
Storm runoff Drainage System.
Rain water harvesting system recharging underground water

Water demand Projection based on NBC 2016 Table-1 Part-9 Plumbing Services.

Description Domestic Flushing

Residene 90 Ltr. 45 Ltr

VIP/VVIP/SUIT 120 Ltr. 60 Ltr.
S
VISITOR 5 Ltr. 10 Ltr

Signature of Contractor Page 148 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

FLOATING 5 Ltr. 10 Ltr.

Population

D.1.1 CODES & STANDARDS

 B.I.S (BUREU OF INDIAN STANDARDS)

 National Building Code (2016) - Part IX
 IS Codes and Plumbing Standards
 Plumbing Handbook, SP-35-1987
 CPHEEO Manual ( Govt. of India) - 1999
 Uniform Plumbing Code- 200

Water demand Projection based on NBC 2016 Table-1 Part-9 Plumbing Services.

D.1.2 CODES & STANDARDS

 B.I.S (BUREU OF INDIAN STANDARDS)

 National Building Code (2016) - Part IX
 IS Codes and Plumbing Standards
 Plumbing Handbook, SP-35-1987
 CPHEEO Manual ( Govt. of India) - 1999
 Uniform Plumbing Code- 200

RAIN WATER DISPOSAL

In general the rain water from terraces, balconies and other open areas shall be collected through
rain water down take pipes which shall be discharged in the catch basins at ground level. Number of
rain water stacks to be provided in the building shall be taken as per NBC. Rain water in the hard
courts and open area shall be collected through catch basins and drain channels which shall be
connected to storm water manhole, the rain water disposal shall be by gravity through a network of
sloping pipes and manholes. It shall be finally connected to the rain water harvesting pits. Soak pits
at suitable locations and over flow from rain water harvesting tank shall be connected to external
municipal storm water drainage network.
Sumps with two sump pumps shall be provided for the drainage of pump rooms and basement at
various locations. The sump discharge shall be connected to the local storm water manhole.
Pipes used for rain water inside the building shall be uPVC 6kg/cm2 pipes with Solvent joints.
Pipes used for storm water drainage shall be RCC.

RAIN WATER HARVESTING

i. One hour intensity of rainfall 90 mm / hr

Signature of Contractor Page 149 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

ii. Average runoff co-efficient for terraces and 0.8

other built up areas

iii. Average runoff co-efficient for landscape areas 0.2

iv. Volume of each harvesting pit required 34.3 cum
assuming 20 Nos. pits.
v. Volume of each harvesting tank provided 35 cum
vi. Size of harvesting pit 2.5m x 3.5m x 4m water depth

SEWAGE TREATMENT PLANT

It is proposed to install a common sewage treatment plant of capacity60 cum per, to recover the
recycled water of quality suitable for use as flushing, irrigation, basement and car washing. The
process proposed to be adopted is high efficiency MBR plant. It occupies less space and is an efficient
process.
The following parameters shall be adopted for the design of Sewage Treatment Plant.

Parameter Value
Before Treatment After Treatment
Ph 7 – 8.5 6.0 – 8.5
BOD 250 – 400 Mg / L Less than 5 Mg / L
Suspended 200 – 450 Mg / L Less than 5 Mg / L
Solids
COD 600 – 800 Mg / L Less than 30 Mg / L
Oil & Grease 50 Mg / L Less than 5 Mg / L
Detergents 50 – 100 Mg / L Less than 5 Mg / L


All sanitary wares shall be white vitreous china. Water closets (European pattern) shall be wall hung
white vitreous china, having "P" traps, "S" trap pans may be provided where back shaft is not available Water
closets shall have low level dual flushing cistern to ensure minimum noise transmission and saving of water.
All wash basins shall be of vitreous china, below-counter, oval wash basins with cold spout coming through
the marble counter and waste coupling with CP bottle trap fixed to the outlet. shall be large magnum flat back
vitreous china, with full height vitreous partition, mounted on the wall, auto-flushing system, CP spreader and
waste coupling with CP bottle trap connected to deep seal floor trap
System Requirements

Water supplied by the Delhi Jal board is potable and hence water treatment required after getting
water test report. Source Supply line after entering the fire water tanks will overflow to the domestic
water tanks. A set of Fixed Speed Hydro pneumatic pumps for every zone (Zone Description
mention below table in pumps Sizing) to transfer the water overhead tanks for Domestic and
flushing thereby to the fixtures via gravity feed supply.
 Supplied water through a hydro-pneumatic system from Basement to All Building.
 A normally closed bypass valve will be provided which when opened to allow the water
supply from the roof water tank to bypass the hydro pneumatic pumps if the hydro
pneumatic fail to operate.

Signature of Contractor Page 150 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

 Pressure reducing valves will be used on the distribution lines at each floor to
maintain a minimum operating pressure of 1.5-2.0 bars till Terrace Tank.
 Water Supply meter install at every outlet as per GRIHA requirement.
 Dual piping system.

 The Tank Details & capacity given in the above are minimum. During detailed
designing, if required and found necessary, the capacity / rating of the equipment may
be upgraded subject to concurrence of Engineer-In-Charge.

 The Flow Rate of Pumps specified is minimum, Pipe Friction losses, Bends etc. and
other relevant Site Conditions.
 One Standby Pump to be provided in each & every set of working pumps. The Pumps
shall be sized so as to ensure approximate 2 hours of operation time to fill the
overhead tanks.
 Above Capacity of the pumps and water tank specified are minimum.

Water supply design criteria

Water supply system shall be designed as per guidelines stipulated by BIS , CPHEEO, NBC and
relevant Indian standards. A summary of brief design parameters to be adopted for design water
supply system is given below:

Different Uses Norms

Minimum velocity of flow in pipe 1.5m /sec

Maximum velocity of flow in rising 2.5m /sec
main
Pipe size Based on flow as per fixture units
Formula for design distribution Hazen-Williams formula
V=4.567 x10-3 x C x D0.63 x S0.54
D= Internal diameter of pipe in mm
V= Velocity in mps
R= Hydraulic radius in M
S= Slope of hydraulic gradient and
C= Hazen- Williams Co-efficient
Hazen- Williams Co-efficient C 100 for CI pipe/ 110 FOR UPVC

Sewerage System

The Sewage System are Designed based on the Following Codes and Standards.

i. B.I.S
ii. CPHEEO Manual for Sewage and Sewage Treatment
iii. NBC-2016

The sewer network for Ground LEVEL.

The following parameters/ site conditions shall be kept in mind when designing the sewage,

Signature of Contractor Page 151 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

Sludge and storm water drainage system.

 Natural slope of the area;

 Layout of different facility in the Building
 Sub-soil water table;
 Provision of venting arrangement for manholes;
 Construction of manholes & laying of pipes considering ground condition;
 Termination of vent cowl at terrace level;



Sewage Sumps

2 no sumps with pumps (1W +1S) provided to transfer soil and waste to Basement To Ground
Floor

 The Sewage Treatment Plant capacity given in the above are minimum.
 In the STP to provide the mandatory equipment to be install and treated water output
parameter as per CPCB norms.

 Waste pipes shall terminate in Gully Trap and to be discharge to manholes. Soil pipes
will discharge to manholes.

 Proposed pipe material

Description Material
Under Ground Water Mains/in
basement ceiling Ductile Iron Pipes K-9 ( above 100mm)
Pump House Heavy Duty G.I
Distribution rising mains Heavy Duty G.I – IS 1239
Internal distribution pipes concealed
within toilets, kitchen etc. CPVC/G.I
Irrigation HDPE PE 80, PN 10

Signature of Contractor Page 152 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

1. Water Supply System

Two pumps set (1W+1S) Domestic Transfer system with VFDs shall be provided in the pump room to fill
the over head tank. This system shall give a minimum and this will supply water to the toilet, kitchen &
other‟s area for domestic purposes by gravity. Since the recycled water from STP is to be used for flushing,
an independent system of two pumps set (1W+1S) Flushing Transfer system with VFDs shall beprovided
in the pump room to fill the over head tank. This system shall give a minimum and this will supplywater to
the toilet for flushing purposes by gravity.

Water supply system will be completely automatic through level controller.

Capacity of Domestic & Flushing water overhead tank shall be as per above water demand sheet.
The soft water tank, approx. capacity of soft water of zero commercial hardness of 10 to 20 ppm,
exclusively for near STP. The water shall be lifted from this tank into an O.H
The STP Treated water will be used for horticulture purpose.
A ring shall be provided to run at ground level along the building periphery/boundary of site and a riser
shall be taken to the upper floors to supply the raw water to the lawns/ garden areas.

2. Location & Area requirements for Plant Room & Storages

The U.G. water tanks shall be located separately as marked in the drawing by the Architect and the
Plumbing plant room shall be adjacent to underground tank. The plant room has fire pumps, water supply
pumps, water treatment plant and all other related equipment located there. These services shall act as a
centralized system for [Link] capacity of all Underground & Overhead Storages shall be as per
above water demand sheet.

3. Materials for Water Supply

All external pipe in trench & in shaft / terrace level shall be GI heavy duty conforming to IS
4985 – 2000 using solvent cement joints. For internal works, the pipes running at the ceiling level and then
dropping down in chases to the various fixtures will be (chlorinated poly vinyl chloride) CPVC pipe
conforming to IS 15778 CTS SDR-11 using solvent weld CPVC fittings. Fittings shall be malleable iron
fittings/CPVC fittings SDR 20 Valves on branches, main line and pumps shall have ball
valve/gate valve/butterfly valve of good approved quality, as per requirement

4. Sewerage System WITH CP CPCB NORMS

MOEF Requirement
As per MOEF requirement it is mandatory to provide STP now a day and same shall be done for
this project. It is proposed that the sewage generated from the shall be treated in a sewage treatment
plant, so that the treated effluent can be recycled for horticulture, flushing & soft water requirements
of the. So that site will be ZERO discharge site.
5 System Designed
The sewerage system will be based on conventional water carriage system, in which soil and domestic
waste generated by the will be collected through soil and waste piping system .It is recommended that the
domestic sewage shall finally be carried due to gravity to one disposal point for further treatment in the
Sewage Treatment Plant As per calculation total water consumption, is about 40 m3/day. For designing
the STP it is considered that 90 % of water consumed gets converted in to sewage. Based on this
fundamental the capacity of STP shall be 35 m3/day.
Treated effluent shall be filtered through “Dual Media Filter (DMF)” & Activated
Carbon filter (ACF) and stored in an UG tank for use in flushing and Horticulture.
Excess effluent, shall be treated through Softener and stored in UG tank for use of
At times there will be zero discharge to city sewer however at times when consumption of treated
effluent is less than the above projected figures excess effluent shall have to be discharged into the
city sewer. This will be done by pumping. Disposal by gravity is not possible due to very low level of STP.
3.4 Shop Drawings
The contractor shall submit shop drawings as follows:

Signature of Contractor Page 153 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

On award of the work, he shall submit GA drawing, , flow diagram with levels of elements.
Fabrication and equipment layout piping, valves and all other information required for installation.
Piping layout with pipe dia. slopes, fixing arrangements.
Three copies of the shop drawings shall be submitted for initial scrutiny. On approval of the same
contractor shall submit six copies of the same incorporating corrections etc. Two sets will be stamped
“GOOD FOR CONSTRUCTION" by the Consultant and returned to the contractor.
3.5 Other Submittals
Contractor shall furnish four sets of folders giving:
Catalogues and technical information sheets of equipment to be installed.
Performance curves, foundation details and fixing arrangements.
Contractors proposal for testing procedures for individual equipment and for overall testing of the plant.
Submittals shall be separate for:
Mechanical and Piping works
All shop drawings and submittals mentioned above shall be approved by Architect and two sets duly
stamped shall be returned to the contractor for execution of the works.
3.6 Execution of Work
All work shall be executed only in accordance with the approved shop drawings and other submittals.
Contractor shall ensure that all inserts, support plates, puddle flanges and other items required to be
incorporated during execution shall be placed in position as per his own requirements during execution of
the works.
All special tools and tackle required for erection and assembly of the equipment covered by the contract
shall be obtained by the contractor himself. All other materials such as foundation bolt nuts, etc.
required for the installation of the plant and equipment shall be supplied by the contractor and are part of
the contract.
3.7 Testing & Handing Over
The contractor shall carryout tests on different equipment as required in the presence of the Consultant or
his representative in order to enable him to determine whether the plant, equipment and installation comply
with the specifications, local codes and in accordance with the letter and intents of the specifications.
The installation shall be handed over to the Engineer-in-Charge only on successful completion, operational
tests and acceptance of the effluent quality by the municipal / pollution control and statutory authorities.
3.8 Statutory Permissions
Contractor shall submit a write-up of process of the plant, drawings, design parameters flow and PIB
diagrams as necessary and required for submission to the State pollution control authority. Contractor shall
furnish at his own cost, analysis of influent at source (for evaluation) as well as that of influent at the
holding tank of the STP and the effluents from the STP for submitting to State Pollution Control Board and
any other statutory authority whose approval is required .Contractor shall perform all testing and operation
of the plant in presence of the Pollution Control Board if so stipulated by them.

Signature of Contractor Page 154 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

SUMP PUMPS
7.4.1 Pumps shall be submersible type as indicated in data sheet.
7.4.2 Pump shall be integral with submersible motor on a common shaft. The pumps shall have 2900
rpm
Synchronous speed unless stated otherwise in the data sheets.
7.4.3 The pump set shall be installed in vertical position in sumps with level controller cum operated
float switches.
7.4.4 Pump casings shall be aluminum and impellers of SS. All pumps shall have combination ball and
roller bearings and shaft seals should be mechanical. Motor shall be submersible and shall be
rated for minimum hp specified or the BHP absorbed in the operating range of the pump.
7.6 LEVEL CONTROLLER Contractor shall provide and install low voltage transistor rised level
controllers as specified in Schedule of Quantities. Each level controller shall be provided with
required number of PVC sheathed stainless steel probes with necessary wiring and conducting.
7.6.1 FOR FILTER FEED PUMPS
To cut off water treatment plant feed pumps on low water level in raw water tanks and high water
level in ground floor treated water tank. To start pumps on low water level in treated water tanks.
7.6.2 FOR SOFTENER FEED PUMPS
To cut off water treatment plant feed pumps on low water level in Treated water tanks and high
water level in ground floor Soft water tank. To start pumps on low water level in soft water tanks.
7.6.3 TREATED WATER TRANSFER PUMPS
To cut off treated water transfer pumps on low water level in treated water tank and high water
level in overhead treated water tank and start sump on low water level in overhead treated water
tan
7.6.4 IRRIGATION WATER TRANSFER PUMPS
To cut off soft water transfer pumps on low water level in soft water tank and high water level in
overhead soft water tank and start sump on low water level in overhead soft water tank.
7.6.5 FOR HYDROPNEUMATIC SYSTEM
To cut off hydro-pneumatic system pumps on low water level in ground level treated water tanks.
To start pumps on opening of any taps.
Water filters shall be sand / gravel pressure filters downward or upward flow type suitable for a
rate of filtration given in schedule of quantities.
Filter shall be vertical type of required diameter. The shell shall be fabricated from M.S. plate
suitable to withstand a working pressure given in schedule of quantities. The minimum thickness
of shall will be 8 mm and dished ends shall be 10 mm. The filter shall have at least one pressure
tight manhole cover. Each filter shall be provide with screwed or flanged connections for inlet,
outlet individual drain connections and all other connections necessary and required. Filter shall
be painted inside with two or more coats of non- toxic corrosion resistant paint and one coat of
red oxide primer outside. UNDER DRAIN SYSTEM: Each filter shall be provides with an efficient
under drain system comprising of collecting pipes, gunmetal / poly propylene nozzles of
manufacturer’s design. The entire under drain system shall be provides on M.S. plate cement
concrete supports

The above filter media arrangement may be altered to suit contractor’s own design for the most efficient
performance.
7.7.1 CHEMICAL DOSER ( Alum Doser, chlorinator )

Chemical doser shall be displacement type complete with rubber bag in vessel duly painted of
50 liters capacity or as mentioned in the schedule of quantities Doser shall be suitable for working
pressure mentioned in the schedule quantities. Each doser shall be provided with orifice plate
assembly injection and corrosion proof piping. Piping from the main water supply line to the doser
shall be G. I. pipes to IS : 1239 (heavy class)
7.7.3 WATER SOFTNER

Signature of Contractor Page 155 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

Softener vessel shall be designed in accordance with the code of unfired pressure vessel
conforming to BIS Softeners shall be designed to give ‘Soft Water’ of quality of Commercial Zero
i.e. hardness less than 5 ppm for soft water tanks and less than 150 ppm for treated water tank.
Softener shall provide with suitable grade of CATION exchange resin in quantity to be considered
by the Contractor at the time of quoting.
Softener shall be fabricated out of mild steel and suitable for self-supporting arrangement.
Softener shall have a set of face piping for inlet, outlet brine injection with all valves. Suitable
drain shall be provided (with multiport valve preferably).
One set of hydraulic injector with control valve and brine delivery pipes.
One cylindrical PVC/HDPE brine saturator and mixing tank, provided with brine delivery piping
with adjustable level indicating clamp and control valves complete. The tank shall be of capacity
as given in the schedule of
quantities.
The first charge of resin, chemicals, media & consumables shall be included in the cost of water
softening plant.
7.8 INSTALLATION AND TESTING
All pumps, water treatment equipment’s, R.O. shall be laid out generally in accordance with the
shop drawings (submitted by contractor and approved by engineer-in-charge / consultant /
architect) achieving economy of space and piping.
All pumps, water treatment equipments, R.O. plants and solar heater shall be tested for the rated
performance in the presence of the employer's representative and got approved.
7.9 Mode of measurement
Pumps for water supply with valves on suction & delivery side, non-return valve on delivery, pressure
gauge on delivery, set of high/low control including wiring, foundation bolts, nuts etc. shall be
measured as one unit and paid.
Sump pumps with motor, water proof cable, gun metal valve, and non return valve in delivery all
installed in position will be measured as one unit and paid.
Level controllers shall be measured by numbers.
Water filter, Softener, Chemical dosers shall be measured by number and shall include all items
given in schedule of quantities.

GENERAL REQUIREMENT

7.1.1 All materials shall be new as per approved makes complying with the appropriate Indian
Standards.
7.1.2 All equipment other than specified in approved makes shall be of the best available make
manufactured by reputed firms to the entire satisfaction of Resident Engineer.
7.1.3 The sample of the items shall be provided on the request of engineer-in-charge.
7.1.4 All equipment shall be so installed on suitable existing foundations, true to level and in a neat
work- man like manner.
7.1.5 Equipment shall be installed so as to provide sufficient clearance between the end walls &
between equipment to equipment.

7.1.6 Shop drawings for equipment layout with associated piping, control panels and wiring of
equipment showing the route of conduit / cable from equipment to control panel shall be submitted
by the Contractor for approval to engineer-in-charge before starting the fabrication of panel and
starting the work. On completion of the works, four sets of "As-installed" drawings incorporating
all details like equipment layout, piping routes, location of panels etc. shall be furnished by the
contractor.

WATER SUPPLY PUMPS

[Link] appropriate vibration eliminating pads shall be provides with each pump.

Signature of Contractor Page 156 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

[Link] The pump set shall be provided with gun metal gate valve of appropriate sizes on delivery. a non-
return valve of appropriate size and a pressure gauge with cock shall be provided on the delivery
line.
Completion Documents
On successful completion of the entire work, the contractor shall submit 4 sets of following documents
to Architect.
A brief write-up of process, day to day operating and maintenance instructions. List of approved
chemicals and procedure for storage and safety norms.
Completion drawing and data, catalogues, performance charts, technical data sheets and equipment’s
installed.
Manufacturer maintenance and operating instructions for mechanical and electrical
equipment. Laminated and framed “As Built” drawings with plans, section, process flow diagrams, pipe
runs, levels and final disposal point schedule of equipment installed with all their model Nos. plate data
and date of installation. Test readings of Influent & Effluent parameters taken at final handing over time
NOC (No Objection Certificate) from State Pollution Control Board and any other statutory authority
whose approval is required Performance supplied and installed shall be guaranteed to yield the specified
effluent standards which must meet and accepted with the requirements of Pollution Control Board .The
guarantee implicitly includes replacement of the entire plant on failure to meet desired effluent
parameters, replacement of individual equipment or repairs as warranted. Decision on each and every
aspect
Sewage Pumps
Working and standby sewage pumps shall be provided.
Each shall be of submersible type c/w guide base to facilitate case of removal, lift chain and automatic
discharge connection.
Settling Tanks
Settling tanks shall include baffles to prevent short circuiting.
Ultra Violet (UV) System
UV system shall be furnished as a complete package assembly for installation in the plant room.
Assembly shall include UV Lamps suitable no. UV dosing system shall perform to achieve a residue
not more than 1 mg/l in the treated effluent. feed pump shall have a maximum capacity of 1 l/hr will
operate on 50 Hz supply.
Tertiary Treatment
This tertiary treatment shall be provided for the effluent used for irrigation and cooling tower make-up
water tank/flushing system. The tertiary treatment plant shall comprise of the pressure sand filters and
activated carbon filters. This shall be sized to accommodate 100% of the effluent discharge flow rate
and shall achieve the performance The operation of the treatment process shall be fully automatic.
A completely assembled and pre-wired control panel consisting of weatherproof cabinet shall be
furnished. The control panel shall contain all metering and statusI ndicators, motor starters, program
timers, on-off-auto change-over switches and duty selectors for equipment.
Other Equipment
Any other necessary accessories, such as buffer, riser, scrum removal devices, partition, control panel,
collection devices, etc. for all the tanks and pumps (where necessary) shall be provided in order to
provide a fully working systems.
Piping Materialso SS304 : Submerged air piping
o MS epoxy : Air piping and pumped effluent riser (Non submerged)
o PVC piping : Pumped effluent (submerged) & tank overflow pipe line.
3.17.6 Valves
The Contractor shall supply and install all isolating valves and control valves as indicated on the
drawings and as required for the proper and efficient operation and maintenance of the entire systems.
All valves supplied shall be suitable for the working pressure and test pressure of the system as
specifiedelsewhere in this specification.
All valves shall be full line size.
Furnish all valves and accessory materials necessary in the piping whether or not shown on drawings
as flows.

Signature of Contractor Page 157 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

Plastic or metal plates (rustles) shall be provided to indicate the open / close status as well as the use
of each valve in the pump and tank rooms.

4 PIPE SUPPORTS
4.1 General Support
Tender drawings indicate schematically the size and location of pipes. The Contractor, on the
award of the work, shall prepare detailed working drawings, showing the cross-sections, longitudinal
sections, details of fittings, locations of isolating and control valves, drain and air valves, and all pipe
supports. He must keep in view the specific openings in buildings and other structure through which
pipes are designed to pass.
Piping shall be properly supported on, or suspended from, on stands, clamps, hangers as
specified and as required. The Contractor shall adequately design all the brackets, saddles, anchor,
clamps and hangers, and be responsible for their structural stability
Pressure gauges shall be provided as shown on the approved drawings. Care shall be taken to protect
pressure gauges during pressure testing

5. INSTALLATION

The Contractor shall check the associated civil work prior to the installation of any item of machinery
and advise the Consultant, in writing, of any deviation of such work from the specified details.
The machinery shall be accurately installed to correct dimensions, alignments, levels, etc., all as
indicated on the final drawings. The machinery shall be mounted on flat steel packing pieces of
thickness suitable to take up variations in level of the concrete foundations. Suitable packing pieces
shall be located adjacent to each holding down bolt and shall be properly bedded by grinding the
concrete surface to a smooth, level finish. The machinery shall be aligned and leveled and the nuts of
the holding down bolts tightened with
a spanner of normal length. The base plates shall be packed with grout after the machinery has been
run and checked by the Consultant for stability and vibration.
Installation shall include the provision and fixing of all necessary holding down bolts, washers, nuts etc
6. TESTING
The performance of the system shall be demonstrated by taking hourly samples of the raw sewage and
final effluent over a twelve hour period. The sample shall be taken at periods approximately the flow
rates specified by the plant. The sample shall be combined and a 5-day BOD shall be run, the results
of which must verify the capacity of the treatment plant prior to acceptance.
7. MOTOR CONTROL CENTRES
Switchboard cubicles of approval type shall be fabricated from 2mm thick CRC sheet with dust and
vermin proof construction. It shall be painted with powder coating of approved make and shade. It shall
be fitted with suitable etched plastic identification plates for each motor. The cubicle shall compromise
of the following (Switchgear as given in the schedule of quantities):
Incoming MCCB of required capacity.
MCCB / MPCB – one for each motor.
Fully automatic DOL/Star Delta starters suitable for motor DOL upto 7.5 H.P.; Star
/ Delta for 10 H.P. and above H.P. with push buttons one for each motor and On / Off indicating neon
lamps.
Single phasing preventer of appropriate rating for each motor.
Space for liquid level controllers and other equipment specified separately in the contract /
given in the schedule of quantities
The panel shall be pre-wired with color-coded wiring. All interconnecting wiring from incoming
main to switchgear, meters and accessories within the switchboard
panel. Wiring shall have suitable copper or aluminum ferrules.
6. TESTING
The performance of the system shall be demonstrated by taking hourly samples of the raw sewage and
final effluent over a twelve hour period. The sample shall be taken at periods approximately the flow

Signature of Contractor Page 158 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

rates specified by the plant. The sample shall be combined and a 5-day BOD shall be run, the results
of which must verify the capacity of the treatment plant prior to acceptance.
7. MOTOR CONTROL CENTRES
Switchboard cubicles of approval type shall be fabricated from 2mm thick CRC sheet with dust and
vermin proof construction. It shall be painted with powder coating of approved make and shade. It shall
be fitted with suitable etched plastic identification plates for each motor. The cubicle shall compromise
of the following (Switchgear as given in the schedule of quantities):
Incoming MCCB of required capacity.
MCCB / MPCB – one for each motor.
Fully automatic DOL/Star Delta starters suitable for motor DOL upto 7.5 H.P.; Star
/ Delta for 10 H.P. and above H.P. with push buttons one for each motor and On / Off indicating neon
lamps.
Single phasing preventer of appropriate rating for each motor.
Space for liquid level controllers and other equipment specified separately in the contract /
given in the schedule of quantities
The panel shall be pre-wired with color-coded wiring. All interconnecting wiring from incoming
main to switchgear, meters and accessories within the switchboard
panel. Wiring shall have suitable copper or aluminum ferrules.
Switchboard cubicle shall be floor or wall mounted type as directed by the Engineer- in-Charge.

8.1 Drainage & Rain Water Harvesting System

8.1.1 Introduction
Due to urbanization of the land and sharp growth in population and thus increase in water
demand for various uses, the fresh water is becoming scarce in most regions of the area. In certain
areas due to almost total dependency on the underground water, the wells and bore wells are getting
deeper and deeper. Also due to increase in paved surface/roof areas, the amount of
natural/percolation of rainfall is reducing very drastically.
Therefore, it has become very necessary to harvest the rain water as maximum as possible.
The drainage system needs to be planned with a view to incorporate rainwater harvesting
principles.
8.1.2 Systems of Rainwater Harvesting
Out of the various techniques adopted in India, and approved of by the Central Ground Water
Authority, the following are the three main classes of rainwater harvesting systems:
System that collect direct roof runoff for storage and then reusing for various purposes.
Systems that use in-field or adjoining surface catchments to collect run-off and then impounded
for irrigation, horticultural, recreational & domestic purposes, after treatment.
Systems that utilize the rainwater run-off from various surfaces including Terrace and Roads
and green areas etc. for re-charging of the underground aquifer, through various measures.
In this system, the catchments from roof/terrace areas are further segregated for direct
recharging of aquifer through filter media.
The catchment from surfaces of road/paved/park/lawns etc. is segregated and then taken to
underground, through desilting chamber/oil and grease separator etc.
Therefore as per prevailing practice and from a practical point of view in North India, it is more
feasible and recommended to use rainwater to recharge groundwater aquifers than for direct
storage.
implement the system as explained in Point-„C‟ above, so as to maximize the rain
water utilization efficiency for recharging the underground aquifer.
The entire rainfall is received over a period of 27 days, 80% of which falls in the period between
July to September. The rainwater therefore has to be harvested during this short period.
8.1.3 References
Manual on “Rain Water Harvesting & Conservation” by Govt. of India, Central

Signature of Contractor Page 159 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

Public Works Department (CPWD), New Delhi, June 2002.

Guidelines from Central Water Board - Ministry of Water Resources, Govt. of
India.
Part “a” National Building Code of India” 2016
8.1.4 Proposed Storm Water Drainage System
In general the rain water from terraces and other open areas shall be collected through Rain
water down take pipes and connected to catch basins. The Rain water from hard courts and
landscaped area shall be collected by catch basins through a RCC pipe network / or open drains with
gratings and connected to the rain water harvesting pits in the hotel complex and finally over flow from
rain water harvesting will be led out to main

8.2.1 Details of System

5. Clean out Plugs Where two or three fixtures are connected

to a single horizontal pipe leading to a vertical
stack (in toilets), provided at starting point. The
cleanout plugs shall have access from the ceiling
or shall be flush with the finished floor level.

6. Water seal for all Minimum 50mm

traps
7. Methodology of At ceiling level below, by hanging the pipes
conveying horizontal soil & with M.S structural supports/dash fasteners and
waste pipes / sinking of proper clamping etc. with proper slope (1:60). All
slab (Option structural Beams at ceiling level should be
– I) inverted.
App. 100mm sunken area required for
connection of Wash Basin & Floor Drain etc.

Option - II At floor level below, by laying the pipes on floor

with proper slope (1:60). All structural
Beams at floor level should be downwards
preferably.
App. 350 mm sunken area required for connection
of W.C., Wash Basin & Floor Drain, traps etc.
However incase of Indian W.C. the sunken area
required is 450 mm.

8. Material
(a) All soil, waste and vent Cast Iron piping system
pipes and fittings.
(b) Waste pipe from sinks, G.I. piping system
wash basins and urinals etc

(c) Rain water pipe UPVC pipe conforming to IS : 13592

Type A

Signature of Contractor Page 160 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

8.2.2 Fixtures and Fittings

Sanitary fixtures shall be off-white vitreous china and of standard quality and make, as per
requirement.
C.P. fittings shall be as per requirement and of good quality (medium range).
Generally Following Type of Fixtures/Accessories shall be provided:
Water Closet
Wall hung EWC with dual flush system
Ablution tap for I.W.C. & Health faucet for EWC
Wash Basin
Flat back / Oval wash basins with mirror, with provision of cold water push type tap as per
requirement, liquid soap dispenser and towel rings are also proposed.
Sinks
Stainless steel sinks without drain board with the provision of mixtures in kitchen/utility areas, as per
requirements.
Urinal
Flat back semi-stall urinal of size 610x400x380mm with automatic electrical sensor operated flush
system shall be provided as per requirements.

IS 2065-1963 Code of practice for water supply to buildings. IS 3114-1965

Code of practice for laying of C.I. Pipes.
IS 3589-1981 Specification for electrically welded steel pipes for water, gas and
sewage.
IS 3989-1970 Centrifugally cast spun iron and socket soil and ventilating pipe, fittings
and accessories.
IS 4111-1967 Code of practice for Ancillary structure in sewerage system.
IS 4127-1967 Code of Practice for laying glazed stone ware pipe. IS 4515
Specification for unplasticized PVC pipe fittings.
IS 4985-1981 Specification for unplasticized PVC pipes for portable water
supplies.
IS 1703-1984 Ball Valves
IS 2548-1970 Toilet Seat Cover
IS 4736-1986 Galvanizing G.I. Pipes IS 780-1984 Cast iron sluice valves
IS 778-1984 Full way valves
IS 2692-1978 Brass ferrule
IS 458-1971 R.C.C. pipes
National building code for water supply, drainage and sanitation Part IX Plumbing services
section 1 & 2.
The installation shall also be in conformity with the bye-laws and a requirement of the local
authority is so far as these become applicable to the installation. Where ever this specification
calls for a higher standard of materials and/or workmanship then those required by any of the
above regulations and standards, hen this specification shall take precedence over the said
regulations and standards. Wherever drawings and specifications require something that may
violate the regulations, the regulation shall

SECTION – IV WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM (COLD)

14 SCOPE OF WORK

Work under this section consists of furnishing all labor, materials equipment and appliances
necessary and required to completely install the water supply system as required by the drawings &
specified hereinafter.

Signature of Contractor Page 161 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

Without restricting to the generality of the foregoing, the water supply system shall include the
following:-
a) Municipal water connection including water meter up to U.G. water tanks.
b) Piping from tube well to raw water tank
c) O.H Tanks filling from fixed speed hydro pneumatic system.
d) Distribution system from domestic overhead tank to all toilet after three floors in the building.
e) Distribution mains from hydro pneumatic system to all upper floors fixtures and appliances for
domestic water to buildings.
f) Distribution system from flushing overhead tank to all toilet all floors in the building
g) Excavation and refilling of pipes trenches.
h) Control valves, masonry chambers and other appurtenances.

 All water lines to different parts of building and making connection from source etc.
 Pipe protection and painting.
 Control valves, masonry chambers and other appurtenances.
 Connections to all toilets kitchen equipments, tanks and appliances.
 Excavation and refilling of pipe trenches, wherever necessary.
 Trenches for taking pipe lines for these services if required.

15 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

All materials shall be new of the best quality conforming to specifications. All works executed shall
be to the satisfaction of the [Link] and Fittings shall be fixed truly vertical,
horizontal or in slopes as required in a neat workmanlike [Link] or Long bends shall be
used on all main pipe lines as far as possible. Use of Elbows shall be restricted for short
[Link] far as possible all Bends shall be formed by means of a hydraulic pipe bending
machine for pipes up to 65mm [Link] shall be fixed in a manner so as to provide easy
accessibility for repair and maintenance and shall not cause obstruction in shafts, passages
[Link] shall be securely fixed to walls and ceilings by suitable clamps at intervals specified.
As far as possible, all piping inside the buildings shall run either concealed or embedded. Outside
the buildings the piping shall be installed at-least 60cms below finished grade. All galvanized steel
piping embedded either in trenches or in concrete and masonry work shall be tightly wrapped 1mm
thick fiberglass tissue laid in [Link] and other appurtenances shall be so located as to
provide easy accessibility for operations, maintenance and repairs.
Water Supply System

Contractor should study the site plan and water supply system diagram for an overview of the
system.
Source
a) Water supply will be acquired from Municipal water mains through a service connection
b) Additional water supply will be obtained from captive tube-wells within the site. The rising
mains will be connected to the main fire static tank and then overflow into the main domestic
water tank. Water supply piping for garden hydrant and sprinkler and irrigation system will
be separate and independently connected to a different pumping system.

16 G.I. PIPES & FITTINGS

All pipes outside the building and pipes running at basement ceiling level shall be galvanized steel
tubes conforming to IS: 1239-1979 of class specified. When class is not specified they shall be
medium [Link] shall be malleable iron galvanized fittings, of approved make. All fittings shall
have manufacturer’s trade mark stamped on it. Fittings for G.I. pipes shall include Couplings,
Bends, Tees, Reducers, Nipples, Unions and Bushes. Fittings shall be of IS:1879 - (part I to X)
[Link] and fittings shall be jointed with threaded fittings. Care shall be taken to remove burr
from the end of the pipe after cutting by a round file. All pipes shall be fixed in accordance with

Signature of Contractor Page 162 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

layout and alignment shown on the drawings. Care shall be taken to avoid air pockets. G.I. pipes
inside toilets shall be fixed in wall chases well above the floor. No pipes shall be run inside a
sunken floor as far as possible. Pipes may be run under the ceiling or floors and other as shown on
drawings.

17 CLAMPS

G.I. pipes in shafts and other locations shall be supported by galvanized clamps of design approved
by Engineer-in-Charge Pipe in wall chases shall be anchored by iron hooks. Pipes at ceiling level
shall be supported on structural clamps fabricated from galvanized structural as described in the
sub section. Pipes in typical shafts shall be supported on Slotted Angles/Channels as specified
elsewhere.

Pipe hangers shall be provided at the following maximum spacing:

S. No. Pipe Hanger Rod Spacing between

Dia (mm) Dia (mm) Supports (Mtr)
1 Upto 25 6 2
2 32 to 50 10 2
3 65 to 100 12 2.4
4 125 to 150 16 3.6
5 200 to 300 19 5.3

18 UNIONS

Contractor shall provide adequate number of unions on all pipes to enable dismantling later. Unions
shall be provided near each Gunmetal Valve, Stop Cocks, or Check Valves and on straight runs as
necessary at appropriate locations as required and/or directed by Engineer-in-Charge.

19 FLANGES

Flanged connections shall be provided on pipes where shown on the drawings, all equipment
connections as necessary and required or as directed by Engineer-in-Charge Connections shall be
made by the correct number and size of the bolts and made with 3 mm thick insertion rubber
washer. Where hot water or steam connections are made insertion gasket shall be of suitable high
temperature grade and quality approved by Engineer-in-Charge Bolt hole dia for flanges shall
conform to match the specification for C.I. Sluice Valve to I.S. 780.
20 PAINTING

All pipes above ground shall be painted with one coat of Red Lead and two coats of Synthetic
Enamel paint of approved shade and quality. Pipes shall be painted to standard color code
specified by [Link] pipes in chases and below floor shall be provided with Anti-
corrosive treatment.

21 PIPE PROTECTION

Where specified in the Drawing all pipes below ground shall be protected against corrosion by
wrapping 100mm wide and 4mm thick layer of PYPKOTE/MAKPOLYKOTE over the pipe.

21.1 Sand Filling

All G. I. pipes in trenches shall be protected with fine sand 150 mm all around before filling in the
trenches.

Signature of Contractor Page 163 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

22 GUNMETAL VALVES

Valves 65mm dia and below shall be heavy Gunmetal Full way Valves or Globe Valves or Ball
valves conforming to IS: 778-1971 of 20 Kg/cm2 class. Valves shall be tested at manufacturer’s
works and the same stamped on [Link] Valves shall be approved by the Engineer-in-Charge before
they are allowed to be used on work.

23 SLUICE VALVES

All valves 80mm dia and above shall be C.I. Double Flanged Sluice Valves. Sluice valves shall be
Cast Iron double flanged, with rising spindle. Each sluice valve shall be provided with wheel for
valves in exposed positions and Cap Top for underground valves. Contractor shall provide suitable
operating keys for Sluice Valves with Cap Tops.
Sluice valves shall be of best quality conforming to IS: 780-1969 of class specified.
 Joints for double flanged sluice valves shall be made with suitable
Tail/socket pieces on the pipeline and flanges joints made with 3 mm thick insertion rubber
gasket with appropriate number of bolts, nuts and washers.
 Sluice valves shall be installed at all branches and as shown on the drawings.

23.1 Scour Valves:

Scour valves shall be C.I. sluice valves as specified above. They shall be installed at the lowest
level or tail end of the system as shown on drawings and directed by Engineer-in-Charge.

23.2 Air Release Valves

 Air release valves shall be single acting type air valves with Gunmetal body and bronze/gunmetal
internal parts and plastic float.
 Each air release valve shall be provided with a cast iron isolating sluice valve of specification
given above.

24 CPVC PIPES

All pipes inside the buildings and where specified, outside the building shall be CPVC pipes tubes
conforming to IS 15778:1996 .Specific Gravity ASTM D 792 at 230C should be 1.55 as specified.
With Tensile Strength as per ASTM D 638 at 230C should be 55N/mm2.

24.1 Joining Pipe & Fittings

24.1.1 Cutting

Pipes shall be cut either with a wheel type plastic pipe cutting or hacksaw blade and care shall be
taken to make a square cut which provides optimal bonding area within a joint.

be evident around the joint and if this bead is not continuous, remake the joint to avoid potential
leaks.

24.1.2 Transition of CPVC to Metals

Signature of Contractor Page 164 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

When making a transition connection to metal threads, special brass/plastic transition fitting (Male &
Female adopters) should be used. Plastic threaded connection should not be over torque hard tight
plugs one half turn should be adequate.

24.1.3 Threaded Sealants

Teflon tapes shall be used to make threaded connection leak proof.

24.1.4 Hangers & Supports

For horizontal runs, support should be given at 3 ft (90 cms) intervals for diameter of 1” and below
and at 4 ft (1.20 mtr) intervals for larger [Link] should not have throw or sharp edges which
come in contact with the tubing and shall be of [Link] should be as per the below mentioned
table:

S. No Size of Pipe 210C Ft 490C Ft 710C Ft 820 C Ft

Inch
1 ½” 5.5 4.5 3.0 2.5
2 ¾” 5.5 5.0 3.0 2.5
3 1” 6.0 5.5 3.5 3.0
4 11/4” 6.5 6.0 3.5 3.5
5 11/2” 7.0 6.0 3.5 3.5
6 2” 7.0 6.5 4.0 3.5

All special fittings and accessories like internally or externally threaded brass adaptors, ball valves,
globe valves, unions, diaphragm valves, butterfly valves, etc shall be made of CPVC by licensee.

The CPVC solvent cement used for installing CPVC piping systems shall conform to ASTM F493.
Pipes from ½” up to 2” pipes and fittings, single step medium bodied CPVC solvent cement should
be used. For CPVC pipes and fittings upwards of 2”, a primer shall be used followed by heavy
bodied solvent cement conforming to ASTM F493. PVC solvent cement should not be used.

24.2 Concealed Plumbing

All internal concealed plumbing for water supply shall be done with CPVC pipes. The pipes &
fittings shall conform to CTS (Copper Tube Size) SDR-11 as per ASTM D2846. All pipes and fittings
from ½” up to 2” shall come under this category. Medium body CPVC solvent cement conforming to
ASTM F493 should be used for joining pipes to fittings.
24.3 Installation procedure

All parameters pertaining to the installation of CPVC plumbing system such as cutting, joining,
support spacing, expansion loops, insulation, type of support, special connections, etc. shall be as
per the manufacturer’s specifications.

25 VALVE CHAMBERS
Contractor shall provide suitable brick masonry chambers in cement mortar 1:5 (1 cement: 5 coarse sand)
on cement concrete foundations 150 mm thick [Link] mix (1 cement: 5 fine sand: 10 graded stone
aggregate 40 mm nominal size) 12 mm thick cement plaster inside and outside finished with a floating coat
of neat cement inside with cast iron surface box as approved or as specified in Drawing and in drawings
including excavation, back filling complete.

26 WATER METERS

Signature of Contractor Page 165 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

Water meters of approved make and design shall be supplied for installation at locations as shown
in drawing The water meters shall meet with the approval of the local municipal authorities. Suitable
valves and chambers to house the meters shall also be provided along-with the [Link] meters
shall conform to Indian Standard IS: 779-1978 (Water meters-domestic type) and IS: 2373-1981
(water meters-bulk type). Where called for water meters shall be located in masonry chambers of
appropriated size.

27 PIPE HANGERS BRACKETS ETC.

Sturdy hangers, brackets and saddles of approved design shall be installed to support all pipe
lengths which are not embedded over their entire run. The hangers and brackets shall be of
adjustable heights and primer coated with red-oxide primer clamps. Collars and saddles to hold
pipes shall be provided with suitable gaskets. The brackets and hangers shall be of Mild Steel
designed to carry the weight of pipes safely and without excessive [Link] pipes and fittings
shall be supported near every joint and half-way through every pipe length unless otherwise
specified. Where called for, pipe hangers shall also be supplied with proper sound and vibration
dampening devices to minimize noise and vibration transmission.

28 TESTING

All pipes, fittings and valves shall be tested by hydrostatic pressure of min. 1.5 times, the working
pressure and subject to minimum of 7 kg/cm2 in any case and with the consent of Engineer-in-
[Link] shall be maintained for a period of at least TWELVE hours without appreciable
drop in the pressure after fixing at site. (+10 %). A test register shall be maintained and all entries
shall be signed and dated by Contractor(s) and [Link] addition to the sectional testing carried
out during the construction, Contractor shall test the entire installation after connections to the
overhead tanks or pumping system or mains. He shall rectify all leakages, and shall replace all
defective materials in the system. Any damage done due to carelessness, open or burst pipes or
failure of fittings, to the building, furniture and Fixtures shall be made good during the defects
liability period without any extra [Link] completion of the water supply system, Plumbing
Contractor shall test each valve by closing and opening it a number of times to observe if it is
working efficiently. Valves which do not effectively operate shall be replaced by new ones at no
extra cost and the same shall be tested as above.

29 CONNECTIONS TO WATER TANKS

The contractor shall provide all inlets, outlets, washouts, vents, ball cocks, overflow, control valves
and all such other piping connections including level indicator to water storage tanks as called for.

Suitable float controls of an approved make, securely fixed to the tank independent of the inlet pipe
and set in a position so that water inlet into the tank is cut off when filled up to the water line. The
water level in the tanks shall be adjusted to 25mm below the lip of the overflow pipe. Full way
gate/ball valves of approved make shall be provided as near the tank as practicable on every outlet
pipe from the storage tank except the overflow [Link] overflow pipe shall be so placed as to allow
the discharge of water being readily seen. The overflow pipe shall be of size indicated. A stop valve
shall also be provided on the inlet water connection to the tank. The outlet pipes shall be fixed
approximately 75mm above the bottom of the tank towards which the floor of the tank is sloping to
enable the tank to be emptied for cleaning. The ball valves shall conform to Indian Standard
IS:1703-1968

30 CONNECTIONS TO MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT SUPPLIED BY OTHER AGENCIES

Signature of Contractor Page 166 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

All inlets, outlets, valves, piping and other incidental work connected with installation of all
mechanical equipment supplied by other agencies shall be carried out by the Plumbing contractor
in accordance with the drawings, requirements for proper performance of equipment,
manufacturer’s instructions and the directions of the Engineer-in-Charge The equipment to be
supplied by other agencies consists mainly of Water Treatment and other similar equipment. The
connections to the various equipment shall be effected through proper unions and isolating valves.
The work of effecting connections shall be executed in consultation with and according to the
requirements of equipment suppliers, under the directions of the Engineer-in-Charge. The various
aspects of connection work shall be executed in a manner similar to the work of respective trades
mentioned elsewhere in these specifications.

31 DISINFECTION

After completion of the work Contractor shall flush clean the entire system with the city’s filtered
water after connection has been [Link] the first flushing, commercial bleaching powder is to be
added to achieve a dosage of 2 to 3 mg/l of water in the system added and flushed. This operation
should be performed twice to ensure that the system is fully disinfected and usable. The
Commissioning would not be considered complete without performing the Disinfection.

PRE COMMISSIONING:

Ensure that all pipes are free from debris and [Link] all valves and fire hydrant for
effective opening and closing action. Defects should be rectified or valves replaced.

Ensure that all Connections to Branches have been made.

Ensure that mains have been connected to the respective pumps, underground and overhead
[Link] supply should be available at main Underground [Link] main line Valves should be
closed.

32 COMMISSIONING

Fill Underground tank with water. Add 1kg fresh bleaching powder after making a solution to be
added near [Link] Water Supply Pump and allow water to fill main Underground tank. Water will
first fill the fire tank and then overflow to the Raw Water [Link] filling Overhead Reservoir drain
the same to its one forth capacity through tank scour valve. (This is to ensure removal of all mud,
debris etc. from the tank).Fill Overhead tank to [Link] water in the main lines by opening
Valves in each circuit. Drain out water in the system through scour valves or fire hydrant in lower
regions. Ensure clean water is now coming out of the [Link] valves for individual clusters.
Observe for leakages or malfunctions, check pressure & flow at end of line by opening Hydrants
etc. Remove and rectify defects [Link] all outlet points for proper operation by opening
each valve and allowing water to flow for a few minutes. Also check for effective closure of
[Link] entire water supply system should be disinfected with bleaching powder and system flush
[Link] four samples of water drawn from four extreme locations for testing for bacteriological
test in sterilized bottles obtained from the concerned laboratory. (Laboratory personal may collect
the samples themselves).

33 RESPONSIBILITY

Responsibility for various activities in pre-commissioning and commissioning procedures will rest
with the Contractor.

SECTION – IX: WATER SUPPLY/ WATER TREATMENT UNITS ETC.

Signature of Contractor Page 167 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

34 PUMPS AND WATER TREATMENT EQUIPMENT

Work under this sub-head consists of furnishing all labor, materials, equipment and accessories
necessary and required to completely install pumping system for various water supply services and
water treatment as per drawings, specified [Link] restricting to the generality of the
foregoing, the work of pumps and water treatment equipment shall include the followings:
 Raw water pumps.
 Hydro pumps for Domestic & Flushing water.

 Sump pumps for disposal of sewage and drainage.
 Water treatment unit consisting of filter, softener and chlorination etc.
 Fire pumps.
 Motor control panels, power and control cabling and allied electrical works.
 Pipes, valves, accessories, hangers, supports, delivery and suction feeders and connection to
proposed pipe work.

35 PUMP SET

35.1 Filter feed Pumps (Raw Water pump)

Water supply pumps shall be suitable for clean water. Pumps shall be multistage, monoblock
vertical centrifugal pumps with Cast Iron body and Cast Iron impeller, stainless steel shaft and
coupled to a TEFC electric motor by means of a flexible coupling. Each pump should operate a
curve 10m below specified [Link] and motor shall be mounted on a common M.S. structural
base plate or as required as per site [Link] pump shall be provided with a totally enclosed
fan cooled induction [Link] pumping set shall be provided with a 150mm dia or of suitable size
gunmetal “Burden” type pressure gauge with gunmetal isolation cock and connecting [Link]
vibration-eliminating pads appropriate for each pump. Provide rate of flow measuring meter with
bypass arrangement with every set of pumpsAll water supply pumps shall be provided with
mechanical seals.
Accepted in the contract. The replacement equipment shall be approved by the Engineer

Signature of Contractor Page 168 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

VOL. 5(d) TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

FIRE FIGHTING WORKS

FIRE PROTECTION

Signature of Contractor Page 169 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

REFERENCE STANDARDS

The design and planning of Fire Protection System shall be done keeping in view the following
criteria:
National Building Code Sept 2016: Part IV for Fire Protection. NFPA -13,NFPA-14

BASIS/ CONCEPT OF DESIGN

The firefighting arrangement shall be designed as per the requirement of local guidelines and
engineering design standard.

The entire fire safety installation shall be compliant with the most stringent codes/ standard for the
entire Complex to ensure the highest safety standard and uniformity of system. Further, before
property is opened to public, the fire protection shall be fully operated and tested under simulated
conditions to demonstrate compliance with the most stringent standards, codes and guidelines.

Following functional system shall be provided; strictly in compliance with the listed reference
standards:

Piping System Piping system confirming to IS:1239–MS

Heavy Class as per hydraulic calculations

Fire water static 2 x 125KL =250000

Storage
Hand held fire Strategically placed at designated areas.
extinguishers ABC 6
kg and CO2 4.5 kg

Signature of Contractor Page 170 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

Codes and Regulations

The fire protection services installation will be designed to comply National Building code - 2016.

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

Fire extinguishers will be provided at strategic locations and in MEP plant rooms as required by
the authority and in compliance with IS 2190:1992.

AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM - QUARTZ BULB, 680C

System Description Automatic Sprinkler. Sprinklers to be installed above false ceiling in case the
clearance between ceiling and false ceiling exceed 800mm
The following areas will be protected by the automatic sprinkler system: Basements
Piping sizes as per IS

Flow switches to be installed at all floor levels to be connected to fire alarm panels through modem

WET RISER SYSTEM System Description

Internal and external fire hydrant system shall be provided with landing valves, first aid kits, 63
mm x 2 nos, 15 m hose complete with instantaneous pattern short branch pipe in the complex.

All fixtures stainless steel SS-304.

Landing valves 63mm

Hose reels 20mm dia 30m

Breeching inlets at the ground level will be provided for hydrant system also.

Provide Pumping system as per NBC 2016 and as approved by Delhi Fire Service.(Capacities
are indicative)

FIRE PUMPS

Sprinkler pump - 22800 LPM, 70 head - ` 1nos

Sprinkler Jockey pump - 180 LPM, 70 head - 1 nos

Hydrant pump - 2280 LPM,70 m head - 1 nos

Hydrant Jockey pump - 180 LPM, 70 m head - 1 nos

Diesel driven standby pump - 2280 LPM, 70 m head- 1nos

Water cuttle nozzle - 2280 LPM, 70 m head - 1nos

Signature of Contractor Page 171 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

Hose Cabinet- CRCA sheets 14 gauge, stove enamelled single / double leaf with break
glass, signage on glass: break glass in case of fire and cabinet no.

HYDRANT SYSTEM Internal Hydrant

Each fire hose cabinets will be complete with fire fighting accessories:

Single headed landing valves with 63 mm diameter instantaneous type female Outlet

Two 15m long, 63mm diameter rubberized fabric lined hose pipe as per IS 636. Type
2 with SS male and female instantaneous type coupling as per IS: 903.

One SS branch pipe with nozzle as per IS: 903

First aid fire hose reels with 20mm diameter 36.5m long hose with 5mm bore SS nozzle
as per IS:884-1969

One 25mm diameter SS ball valve

Fireman’s axe

Isolation valves 80 mm dia butterfly valve.

Orifice plate 6mm thickness install as per IS 15105 to maintain the pressure 35 meter
at each floor.

Yard Hydrant

Yard Hydrant will be housed in CRCA Cabinet and provided as per relevant codes and
regulations. The water supply will be from the main delivery header of the
hydrant/standpipe pump.

The fire hydrants will be positioned 45m apart to the next hydrant.

All pillar hydrants will be located near the fire engine access/hard-standing.

Signature of Contractor Page 172 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL:

The work shall conform to high standard of design and workmanship, shall be
structurally sound and aesthetically pleasing. Quality standards prescribed shall form
the backbone for the quality assurance and quality control system.

At the site, the Contractor shall arrange the materials and their stacking/ storage in
appropriate manner to ensure the quality. Contractor shall provide equipment and
manpower to test continuously the quality of material, assemblies etc. as directed by
the Project Manager’s Representative. The test shall be conducted continuously and
the result of tests maintained. In addition the Contractor shall keep appropriate tools
and equipment for checking alignments, levels, slopes and evenness of surface.

The Project Manager’s Representative shall be free to carry out such tests as may be
decided by him at this sole direction, from time to time, in addition to those specified in
this Document. The Contractor shall provide the samples and labor for collecting the
samples. Nothing extra shall be payable to the Contractor for samples or for the
collection of the samples.

The test shall be conducted at the site laboratory that may be established by Project
Manager’s Representative or at any other Standard Laboratory selected by Project
Manager’s Representative. Contractor shall keep the necessary testing equipment
such as hydraulic testing machine, smoke testing machine, gauges and other
necessary equipment required.

The Project Manager’s Representative shall transport the samples to the laboratory.

Testing may be witnessed by the Contractor or his Authorized Representative. Whether

witnessed by the Contractor or not, the test results shall be binding on the Contractor.

Prior to shipment, complete unit shall be tested under actual load conditions for
performance and proper functioning of component parts.

EXCLUSIONS:

Civil Works for Water Tank.

Signature of Contractor Page 173 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

General Requirements

All materials shall be of the best quality conforming to the specifications and subject to
the approval of the Consultants.

Pipes shall be fixed in a manner as to provide easy accessibility for repair and
maintenance and shall not cause obstruction in shafts, passages etc.
Pipes shall be securely fixed to walls and ceilings by suitable clamps and supports
(galvanised after fabrication ) at intervals specified. Only approved type of anchor
fasteners shall be used for RCC slabs and walls / floors etc.

Valves and other appurtenances shall be so located that they are easily accessible for
operations, repairs and maintenance.

Pipes and fittings shall be fixed truly vertical, horizontal or in slopes as required in a
neat workman like manner.

Pipe accessories such as gauges, meters, control devices, etc. shall have the same
working pressure rating as the associated pipe work. All pipe work shall be free from
burrs, rust and scale and shall be cleaned before installation. All personnel engaged
on welding operations must possess a certificate of competence issued by an
acceptable / recognized authority.

Piping
Pipes of following types are to be used:

Mild steel black pipes as per IS:1239 heavy grade(for pipes of sizes 150 mm N.B. and
below) suitably lagged on the outside to prevent soil corrosion. M.S. pipes buried below
ground shall also be suitably be lagged with 2 layers of PYPKOTE/COTAK polythene
sheet over 2 coats of bitumen.
Steel pipelines upto 150 mm dia shall be as per IS: 1239, Part-II (heavy grade) while
pipelines above 150 mm dia shall be as per I.S.:3589.
All pipe clamps and supports shall be fabricated from MS steel sections and shall be
factory galvanized before use at site. Welding of galvanized clamps and supports shall
not be permitted .Pipes shall be hung by means of expandable anchor fastener of
approved make and design. The hangers and clamps shall be fastened by means of
galvanized nuts and bolts. The size/diameter of the anchor fastener and the clamps
shall be suitable to carry the weight of water filled pipe and dead load normally
encountered.

Signature of Contractor Page 174 PWD-GOR

 Hangers and supports shall be thoroughly galvanised after fabricatioVnol.umTeh5 eTecshenilcealcStpieocn
ifications

and design of the hanger & support shall be capable of carrying the sum of all
concurrently acting loads. They shall be designed to provide the required supporting
effects and allow pipeline movements as necessary. All guides, anchor braces,
dampener, expansion joint and structural steel to be attached to the building/structure
trenches etc. shall be provided. Hangers and components for all piping shall be
approved by the Consultants.

The piping system shall be tested for leakages at 2 times the operating pressure or 1.5
time shut-off pressure, which ever is highest including testing for water hammer effects.

Flanged joints shall be used for connections for vessels, equipment, flanged valves
and also on two straight lengths of pipelines of strategic points to facilitate erection and
subsequent maintenance work.
For pipes underground installation the pipes shall be buried at least one meter below
ground level and shall have 230 mm x 230 mm masonry or concrete supports at least
300 mm high at 3m intervals. Masonry work to have plain cement concrete foundation
(1 cement: 4 coarse sand : 8 stone aggregate) of size 380x380x75 thick resting on firm
soil.
Mains below ground level shall be supported at regular intervals not exceeding 3.0
metres and shall be laid at least 2.0 metre away from the building.

Piping Installation & Support

Tender drawings indicate schematically the size and location of pipes. The Contractor,
on the award of the work, shall prepare detailed working drawings, showing the cross-
sections, longitudinal sections, details of fittings, locations of isolating and control
valves, drain and air valves, and all pipe supports.

He must keep in view the specific openings in buildings and other structure through
which pipes are designed to pass.

Piping shall be properly supported on , or suspended from , on stands, clamps, hangers

as specified and as required. The Contractor shall adequately design all the brackets,
saddles, anchor, clamps and hangers, and be responsible for their structural stability.

Pipe work and fittings shall be supported by hangers or brackets so as to permit free
expansion and contraction. Risers shall be supported at each floor with Galvanised
steel clamps. To permit free movement of common piping support shall be from a
common hanger bar fabricated from Galvanised steel sections.

Pipe hangers shall be provided at the following maximum spacings:

Signature of Contractor Page 174 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

Spacing between
Pipe Dia Hanger Rod Dia Supports
(mm) (mm) (m)
80 to 100 10 2.5
125 to
150 10 3.0

The end of the steel rods shall be threaded and not welded to the threaded bolt.

All pipe work shall be carried out in a proper workman like manner, causing minimum
disturbance to the existing services, buildings, roads and structure. The entire piping
work shall be organized in consultation with other agencies work, so that area can be
carried out in one stretch.

Cut-outs in the floor slab for installing the various pipes area are indicated in the
drawings. Contractor shall carefully examine the cut-outs provided and clearly point out
wherever the cut-outs shown in the drawings, do not meet with the requirements. Pipe
sleeves, larger diameter than pipes, shall be provided wherever pipes pass through
walls and slab and annular space filled with fibreglass and finished with retainer rings.

The contractor shall make sure that the clamps, brackets, saddles and hangers
provided for pipe supports are adequate or as specified / approved by Consultants.
Piping layout shall take due care for expansion and contraction in pipes and include
expansion joints where required.

All pipes shall be accurately cut to the required sizes in accordance with relevant BIS
codes and burrs removed before laying. Open ends of the piping shall be closed as the
pipe is installed to avoid entrance of foreign matter. Where reducers are to be made in
horizontal runs, eccentric reduces shall be used for the piping to drain freely. In other
locations, concentric reduces may be used.

Automatic air valves shall be provided at all high points in the piping system for venting.
All valves shall be of 15mm pipe size and shall be associated with an equal size gate
valves. All pipes shall be pitched towards drain points. Pressure gauges shall be
provided as shown on the approved drawings. Care shall be taken to protect pressure
gauges during pressure testing.

Jointing

Signature of Contractor Page 175 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications
Welded Joints
All pipes above 65mm dia and above shall be jointed with welded joints. Joints between
MS pipes and fittings shall be made with the pipes and fittings having “V” groove and
welded with electrical resistance welding in an approved manner. But welding without
“V” groove shall not be permitted.

Screwed Joints
All joints in the pipe line with screwed fittings shall be seal welded after testing and the
weld plus the adjoining portion shall be given two coats of zinc rich primer.

Flanged joints (65 mm dia and above)

Flanged joints with flanges conforming to IS: 6392 shall be provided on

Straight runs at intervals not exceeding 25-30m on pipe lines of 50 mm dia and above
and as directed by the Project Manager.
For jointing all types of valves, appurtenances, pumps, connections with other type of
pipes, to water tanks and other places necessary and as required for good engineering
practice and as shown/noted on the drawings.
Flanges shall be with GI bolts and nuts and 3mm insertion gasket of natural rubber
conforming to IS: 11149.

Fire Brigade Connection

The storage tank shall be provided with a 150 mm fire brigade pumping connection to
discharge at least 2275 litres / minute into it. This connection shall not be taken directly
into the side of the storage tank, but arranged to discharge not less than 150 mm above
the top edge of the tank such that the water flow can be seen. The connection shall be
fitted with stop valve in a position approved by the Project Manager. An overflow
connection discharging to a drain point shall be provided from the storage tank.

The fire brigade connection shall be fitted with four numbers of 63mm instantaneous
inlets in a glass fronted wall box at a suitable position at street level, so located as to
make the inlets accessible from the outside of the building. The size of the wall box
shall be adequate to allow hose to be connected to the inlets, even if the door cannot
be opened and the glass has to be broken. Each box shall have fall of 25mm towards
the front at its base and shall be gl`assed with wired glass with ”FIRE BRIGADE INLET”
painted on the inner face of the glass in 50 mm size block letter. Each such box shall
be provided with a steel hammer with chain for breaking the glass. In addition to the

emergency fire brigade connection to the storage tank, a 150mm common connection
shall be taken from the four 63mm instantaneous inlets direct to hydrant main so that

Signature of Contractor Page 176 PWD-GOR

 the fire brigade may pump to the hydrants in the even of the hydrant Vpoulum ps being out
me 5 Te ch nic al Sp ec ifications

of commission. The connection shall be fitted with a sluice valve and reflux valve.
Location of these valves shall be as per the approval of the Project Manager.

Valves
Butterfly Valve
The butterfly valve shall be suitable for waterworks and rated for PN 1.6. The body
shall be of cast iron in circular shape and of high strength to take the water pressure.
The disc shall be heavy duty cast iron with anti corrosive epoxy or nickel coating. The
valve seat shall be of high grade elastomer or nitrile rubber. The valve is closed position
shall have complete contact between the seat and the disc throughout the perimeter.
The elastomer rubber shall have a long life and shall not give away on continuous
applied water pressure . The shaft shall be EN 8 grade carbon steel. The valve shall
be fitted between two flanges on either side of pipe flanges. The valve edge rubber
shall be projected outside such that they are wedged within the pipe flanges to prevent
leakages. Valve above 150mm dia shall be provided with Gear assembly . Codes for
different material used in valves shall be as under

Non-Return Valve

All Non-Return valves used in pump’s delivery shall be suitable for water works cast
iron double flanged with cast iron body and gunmetal internal parts conforming to
IS:5312.

MATERIAL OF CONSTRUCTION
Body Disc Cover : Cast Iron
Hinge Pin : SS AISI 316
Disc Face : SS AISI 316
End connection:BS 10 Table D, E & F

PRESSURE SWITCH

The pressure switches shall be employed for starting and shutting down operation of
pumps automatically, dictated by line pressure. The Pressure Switch shall be
diaphragm type. The housing shall be die cast aluminium, with SS 316 movement,
pressure element and socket.

PRESSURE GAUGE
Pressure gauge shall be provided near all individual connections of the hydrant system
with isolation valves. Pressure gauge shall be 100 mm dia gunmetal bourdon type with

Signature of Contractor Page 177 PWD-GOR

 gunmetal isolation ball valve, tapping and connecting pipe and [Link] 5gTaeu ge shall
ch ni cal S pe ci fications

be installed at appropriate height for easy readability.

PAINTING

All Hydrant pipes shall be painted with post office red colour paint. All M S pipes shall
first be cleaned thoroughly before application of primer coat. After application of primer
coat two coats of enamel paint shall be applied. Each coat shall be given minimum 24
hours drying time. No thinners shall be used. Wherever required all pipe headers shall
be worded indicating the direction of the pipe and its purpose such as "TO RISER
NO.1" etc. Painting shall be expertly applied, the paint shall not over run on surfaces
not requiring painting such as walls, surfaces etc. Nuts and bolts shall be painted black,
while valves shall be painted blue.
Contractor shall provide external hydrants. The hydrants shall be controlled by a cast
iron wheel. Hydrants shall have instantaneous type 63mm dia outlets. The hydrants
shall be single outlet conforming to IS:5290 with bend and riser or required height to
bring the hydrant to correct level above ground.

Contractor shall provide for each external fire hydrant two numbers of 63mm dia. 15 m
long

controlled percolation hose pipe with SS male and female instantaneous type couplings
machine wound with copper wire (hose to IS:636 type certification) , SS branch pipe
with nozzle to IS:903. This shall be measured and paid for separately.

Each hose cabinet shall be conspicuously painted with the letters “FIRE HOSE”.

Internal Hydrants
Contractor shall provide on each landing and other locations as shown on the drawings
double headed SS landing valve with 100 mm dia inlet as per IS:5290, with shut off
valves having cast iron wheels as shown on the drawings. Landing valve shall have
flanged inlet and instantaneous type outlets as shown on the drawings.

Instantaneous outlets for fire hydrants shall be standard pattern and suitable for fire
hoses.

Contractor shall provide for each internal fire hydrant station two numbers of 63 mm
dia. 15 m long rubberized fabric lined hose pipes with SS male and female
instantaneous type coupling machine would with copper wire (hose to IS:636 type A
and couplings to IS:903 with IS certification), fire hose reel, SS branch pipe with nozzle
to IS:903. This shall be measured and paid for separately.

Contractor shall provide standard fire hose reels of 20mm dia high pressure rubber
hose 30 m long with gunmetal nozzle, all mounted on a circular hose reel of heavy duty

Signature of Contractor Page 178 PWD-GOR

 mild steel construction having cast iron brackets. Hose reel shall be cVoonlunmee c5 tTeecdhndiciarleSpcetcliyfications
to the wet riser with an isolating valve. Hose reel shall conform to IS:884 and shall be
mounted vertically.

Each internal hydrant hose cabinet shall be provided with a drain in the bottom plate.
The drain point shall be lead away to the nearest general drain. Each internal hydrant
hose cabinet containing items as above shall also be provided with a nozzle spanner
and a Fireman’s Axe. The cabinet shall be recessed in the wall as directed. This shall
be measured and paid for separately. Each hose cabinet shall be conspicuously
painted with the letters “FIRE HOSE”.

Hose Reel
Hose reel shall conform to IS : 884, heavy duty, 20 mm dia length shall be 30 metre
long fitted with SS chromium plated nozzle, mild steel pressed reel drum which can
swing upto 170 degree with wall brackets of cast iron finished with red and black
enamel complete.

Fire Hose
All hose pipes shall be of 63 mm diameter RRL as required, conforming to IS : 636.
The hose shall be provided with SS delivery coupling. The hose shall be capable of
withstanding a bursting pressure of 35.7 Kg/[Link] without undue leakage or sweating.
Hose shall be provided with instantaneous spring-lock, type couplings.

Branch Pipe, Nozzle

Branch pipes shall be of SS with loaded tin bronze ring at the discharge and to receive
the nozzle and provided at the other with a leaded tin bronze ring to fit into the
instantaneous coupling. Nozzle shall be of spray type of diameter of not less than 16
mm and not more than 25 mm. Nozzle shall be of loaded tin bronze branch pipe and
nozzle shall be of instantaneous pattern conforming to Indian Standard -

Hose Cabinet
Hose cabinet shall be provided for all internal and external fire hydrants. External Hose
cabinets shall be fabricated from 14 gauge MS powder coated sheet of fully welded
construction with hinged double front door partially glazed (3 mm glass panel) with
locking arrangement, stove enamelled fire red paint (shade No. 536 of IS:5) with “FIRE
HOSE” written on it prominently (The word `FIRE HOSE’ shall be in letters of at least
35mm in height. The words shall be painted white on red back ground). Cabinet
surfaces in contact with the walls shall not be powder coated but instead given two
coats of anti-corrosive bitumastic paint.

Internal Hose Cabinet

Signature of Contractor Page 179 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications
Hose cabinet shall be of glass fronted with hinged door & lock. The cabinet shall be
made of hollow box section, powder caoted to shade No. 536 of IS:5. The hose cabinet
shall be of size to accommodate the following and size is :

i. Landing Valves (Single headed)

Hose pipe
Hose reel (30 mtr.)
Branch pipes, nozzles (1 sets)

Fire extinguishers shall be counted in numbers and include installation of all necessary
items required as given in the specifications.

Signature of Contractor Page 180 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

ABC Type Dry Powder Extinguisher

It shall be operated upright, with a squeeze grip valve to control discharge. The plunger
neck shall have a safety clip, fitted with a pin, to prevent accidental discharge. It shall
be pressurised with Dry Nitrogen, as expellant. The Nitrogen to be charged at a
pressure of 15 Kg/cm2 Body shall be of mild steel conforming to relevant IS Standards.
The neck ring shall be also mild steel and welded to the body. The discharge valve
body, shall be forged brass or leaded bronze, while the spindle, spring and siphon tube
shall be of brass. The nozzle shall be of brass, while the hose shall be braided nylon.
The body shall be cylindrical in shape, with the dish and dome welded to it. Sufficient
space for Nitrogen gas shall be provided inside the body, above the powder filling.

The Neck Ring shall be externally threaded - the threading portion being 1.6 cm. The
filler opening in the neck ring shall not less than 50 mm. Discharge nozzle shall be
screwed to the hose. The design of the nozzle shall meet the performance requirement,
so as to discharge at least 85% of contents upto a throw of 4 mtrs, continuously, at
least for 15 seconds. The hose, forming part of discharge nozzle, shall be 500 mm
long, with 10 mm dia internally for 5 Kg capacity and 12 mm for 10 Kg capacity. It shall
have a pressure gauge fitted to the valve assembly or the cylinder to indicate pressure
available inside. The extinguisher shall be treated with anti-corrosive paint, and it shall
be labelled with words ABC 2.5 cm long, within a triangle of 5 cm on each face. The
extinguisher body and valve assembly shall withstand internal pressure of 30 Kg/cm2
for a minimum period of 2 minutes. The pressure gauge shall be imported and suited
for the purpose.

Water Type Extinguisher (Gas Pressure Type)

The Extinguishing medium shall be primarily water stored under normal pressure, the
discharge being affected by release of Carbon Dioxide Gas from a 120 Gms cylinder.
The capacity of Extinguisher, when filled upto the indicated level, shall be 9 ltr +/- 5%.
The skin thickness of the Cylinder shall be minimum 4.0 mm, fabricated from Mild Steel
sheet, welded as required, with dish and dome, being of same thickness, and of size
not exceeding the diameter of body. The diameter of body to be not less than 150 mm
and not exceeding 200 mm. The neck shall be externally threaded upto a minimum
depth of 16 mm, and leaded tin bronze. The cap shall be of leaded tin bronze, and
screwed on the body upto a minimum of 1.6 cm depth, with parallel screw thread to
match the neck ring. The siphon tube to be of brass or G.I. and the strainer of Brass.

Signature of Contractor Page 181 PWD-GOR

 The cartridge holder, knob, discharge fittings and plunger to be of VBorlases5/L
um Teechand
ice
al d
Spetcin
ifications

bronze, and plunger of stainless steel, spring of stainless steel. The cap to have handle
fixed to it. The discharge hose shall be braided nylon, of 10 mm dia and 600 mm long,
with a nozzle of brass fitted at end.

FIRE PUMPS AND ALLIED EQUIPMENTS

Scope

Work under this section shall consist of furnishing all labour, materials, equipment and
appliances necessary and required to completely install electrically operated and diesel
driven pumps and as required by design drawings .

Electrically operated pumps with motors and diesel engine driven pumps with diesel
engine, common base plates, coupling, coupling guard and accessories.
Automatic starting system with all accessories, wiring and connections and pressure
switches.
Motor control centre.
Annunciation system with all accessories wiring and connections.
Pressure gauges with isolation valves and piping, bleed and block valves.
Suction strainers and accessories.
Vibration eliminator pads and foundation bolts.
Leak-off drain shall be led to the nearest floor drain. The extinguisher shall be treated
for anti-corrosion internally and externally, and externally painted with Fire Red paint.
The paint shall be stove enamelled/powder coated. The cartridge shall be as per IS,
and have 60 gm net carbon dioxide gas for expelling. The extinguisher, body and cap
shall be treated to an internal hydraulic pressure of 25 Kg/cm2. It shall have external
marking with letter A, of 2.5 cm height, in block letters within a triangle of 5 cm each
side. The extinguisher shall be upright in operation, with the body placed on ground
and discharge tube with nozzle held in one hand to give a throw of not less than 6 mtr,
and continue so for atleast 60 secs. The extinguisher body shall be clearly marked with
ISI stamp (IS 15683-2006).

Carbon Dioxide Extinguisher

Signature of Contractor Page 182 PWD-GOR

 The Carbon Dioxide Extinguisher shall be as per IS: 15683:2006 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

The body shall be constructed of seamless tube conforming to IS: 7285 and having a
convex dome and flat base. Its dia shall be maximum 140 mm, and the overall height
shall not exceed 720 mm.

The discharge mechanism shall be through a control valve conforming to IS: 3224. The
internal siphon tube shall be of copper aluminium conforming to relevant specifications.
Hose Pipe shall be high pressure braided Rubber hose with a minimum burst pressure
of 140 Kg/cm2 and shall be approximately 1.0 meter in length having internal dia of 10
mm. The discharge horn shall be of high quality unbreakable plastic with gradually
expanding shape, to convert liquid carbon dioxide into gas form. The hand grip of
Discharge horn shall be insulated with Rubber of appropriate thickness. The gas shall
be conforming to IS: 307 and shall be stored at about 85 Kg/cm2. The expansion ratio
between stored liquid carbon dioxide to expanded gas shall be 1:9 times and the total
discharge time (effective) shall be minimum 10 secs and maximum 25 secs. The
extinguisher shall fulfill the following test pressures:

Cylinder: 236 Kg/cm2

Control Valve: 125 Kg/cm2

Burst Pressure of Hose: 140 Kg/cm2 minimum and fittings; Pre-condition the metal
surfaces to resist reaction with water or air. Establish an initial protective film; after pre-
treatment, the system shall be drained and refilled with fresh water and left until the
system is put into operation. Details and procedures of the pre-treatment shall be
submitted to the Consultant/Client for approval.
Check all clamps, supports and hangers provided for the pipes .Check all the
equipment, piping and valves coming under hot water system and operate each and
every valve on the system to see if the valves are functioning properly. Thereafter
conduct & hydro test of the system. Fill up pipes with water and apply hydrostatic
pressure to the system as given in ther elevant section of the specification. If any
leakage is

COMMISSIONING & GUARANTEE

Work under this section shall be executed without any additional cost. The rates quoted
in this tender shall be inclusive of the works given in this section.

Contractor shall provide all tools, equipment, metering and testing devices required for
the purpose.

Signature of Contractor Page 183 PWD-GOR

 On award of work, Contractor shall submit a detailed proposal giving mVeoltuhmoe d s of testing
5 Te chni c al S pe cifications

and gauging the performance of the equipment to be supplied and installed under this
contract.
All tests shall be made in the presence of the Consultants or his representative or any
inspecting authority.
At least five working days notice in writing shall be given to the inspecting parties before
performing any test.

Water flow rates of all equipment and in pipe lines through valves shall be adjusted to
design conditions.
Complete results of adjustments shall be recorded and Contractor shall ensure proper
balancing of the hydraulic system and for the pipes / valves installed in his scope of
work by regulating the flow meters.

Required pressure gauge, temperature gauge & rotameter for system commissioning
and balancing. The balancing shall be to the satisfaction of Consultant / Project
Manager.

Three copies of all test results shall be submitted to the Engineer in A4 size sheet paper
within two weeks after completion of the tests.

PRECOMMISSIONNIG

On completion of the installation of all pumps, piping, valves, pipe connections,

insulation etc. the
Contractor shall proceed as follows:

Prior to start-up and hydraulic testing, the Contractor shall clean the entire installation
including all fitments and pipe work and the like after installation and keep them in a
new condition. All pumping systems shall be flushed and drained at least once through
to get rid of contaminating
Reasonably clean, a pre-treatment chemical shall be introduced and circulated for at
least 8 hours. Warning signs shall be provided at all outlets during pretreatment. The
pre-treatment chemical shall remove oil, grease and foreign residue from the pipe work

Commissioning and Testing

Signature of Contractor Page 184 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

Pressurise the fire hydrant system by running the jockey pump and after it attains the
shutoff pressure of the pump then.

STATUTORY AUTHORITIES' TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

As and when notified in writing or instructed by the Consultants, the Contractor shall
submit shop drawing and attend all tests and inspections carried out by Local Fire
Authorities, Water Authority and other Statutory Authorities, and shall forthwith execute
free of charge any rectification work ordered by the CFO as a result of such tests and
inspections where these indicate non-compliance with Statutory Regulations. Some of
these tests may take place after the issue of Practical Completion of the Main Contract
and the Contractor shall make all allowances in this respect.

The Contractor shall be responsible for the submission of all necessary forms and shop
drawings to the Statutory Authorities which shall conform in layout to the latest
architectural plans submitted to and kept by these Authorities.

The submission shall comply with the requirements set forth in the current Codes of
Practice and circular letters of the Statutory Authorities. The shop drawings to be
submitted shall be forwarded to the Architect/Consultants for checking before
submission.

The Contractor shall allow for at least two submissions of complete sets of shop
drawings to the Authorities, one to be made within six months after the award of the
Contract but not less than six weeks before the inspection. The Consultants may at his
discretion instruct the Contractor for additional submissions to the Local Authorities
whenever necessary.
Contractor shall adjust, modify and if necessary replace the equipment without further
payment in order that the required performance is obtained.

Where acceptance tests are required by the relevant Authorities having jurisdiction,
these tests shall be carried out by the Contractor prior to the issue of Completion
Certificate to the acceptance of the Authorities.

REJECTION OF INSTALLATION / PLANT

Any item of plant or system or component which fails to comply with the requirements
of this Specification in any respect whatsoever at any stage of manufacture, test,
erection or on completion at site may be rejected by the Consultants either in whole or
in part as he considers necessary/appropriate.

Signature of Contractor Page 185 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications
Adjustment and/or modification work as required by the Consultants so as to comply
with the Authority's requirements and the intent of the Specification shall be carried out
by the Contractor at his own expense and to the satisfaction of the
Authority/Consultants.

After works have been accepted, the Contractor may be required to carry out assist in
carrying out additional performance tests as reasonably required by the
Consultants/Employer.

WARRANTY AND HANDOVER

The Contractor shall warrant that all plant, materials and equipment supplied and all
workmanship performed by him to be free from defects of whatsoever nature before
handover to the Owner.

HANDING OVER OF DOCUMENTS

All testing and commissioning shall be done by the Contractor to the entire satisfaction
of the Owner’s site representative and all testing and commissioning documents shall
be handed over to the Owner’s site representative.

The Contractor shall also hand over all maintenance and operation manuals, all
certificates and all other documentation as per the terms of the contract to the Owner’s
site representative.

Fire Protection System

Check all hydrant & other valves by opening and closing. Any valve found to be open
shall be closed.
Check all clamps, supports and hangers provided for the pipes.
All the pump sets shall be run continuously for 30 minutes (with temporary piping back
to tank from the nearest hydrant, using canvas hose pipes).

Fire Hydrant System - Pressurize the fire hydrant system by running the jockey pump
and after it attains the shutoff pressure of the pump, then Open bypass valve and allow
the pressure to drop in the system. Check that the jockey pump cuts-in and cuts-out at
the preset pressure. If necessary adjust the pressure switch for the jockey pump. Close
by-pass valve. Open hydrant valve and allow the water to flow into the fire water tank
in order to avoid wastage of water. The main fire pump shall cut-in at the preset
pressure and shall not cutout automatically on reaching the normal line pressure. The

Signature of Contractor Page 186 PWD-GOR

 main fire pump shall stop only by manual push button. However the joVcolkumeey5 pTeucm p shall
hni cal S pe ci fications

cut-out as soon as the main pump starts. Operate booster pump continuously for 30
minutes with piping back to underground tanks from the hydrant nearest to plant room.
Check each landing valve, male and female couplings and branch pipes, for
compatibility with each other. Any fitting which is found to be incompatible and do not
fit into the other properly shall be replaced by the Contractor. Each landing valve shall
also be checked by opening and closing under pressure.

Signature of Contractor Page 187 PWD-GOR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

Signature of Contractor Page 188 PWD-GoR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

VOL. 5(e) TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

ELECTRICAL AND LV WORKS

Signature of Contractor Page 189 PWD-GoR

INTRODUCTION: It is proposed to Supply, Installation, Testing and CommisVsoiloumnein5 gTecEhnle ctrical
ica l S pecifi cations

Work D.G. Set, Exhaust Piping, D.G. Set neutral & body earthing, Cabling, 11KV/0.415KV
Substation, Main L.T. Panel, Floor Distribution Panel & Distribution Board, Main & Sub main
Cables, Point Wiring, Light Fixture, Lightning Protection System, UPS System, Earthing, &
External Lighting System etc. as per Schedule of Quantities given in the tender. The Electrical
Work shall comprise of following.

a) Supply of D.G. Set

b) Installation of D.G. Set.

c) HT & LT Cabling

d) Earthing System.

e) D.G. Set Exhaust Piping

f) Safety Equipment

g) SIT&C of 11KV/0.415KV Substation

h) Main L.T. Panels

i) Floor Distribution Panel

j) Distribution Boards

k) Main & Sub main Cables

l) Point Wiring

m) Light Fixtures

n) Lightning Protection System

o) UPS System

p) External Lighting

q) Lift Work

r) All other item as detailed in Schedule of Quantities.

1.1 GENERAL:

A) This specification covers manufacturer, testing as may be necessary before dispatch,

delivery at site, all preparatory work, assembly and installation, final testing,
commissioning, putting into operation including one year guarantee period for the
following Work.

B) Name of Work: Electrical Work

C) The work shall be executed as per Latest CPWD General Specifications as amended
up to date, relevant IE rules, relevant IS Code, NBC-2016 and as per directions of
Engineer-in-Charge. These additional specifications & conditions are to be read in
conjunction with above and in case of variations; specifications given in the Additional
Specifications & Conditions shall apply. However, nothing extra shall be paid on
account of these as the same are to be read along with schedule of quantities for the
work.

Signature of Contractor Page 190 PWD-GoR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications
1.2 COMMERCIAL CONDITIONS:

As per main Contract.

1.3 GUARANTEE:

As per main Contract.

1.4 PAYMENT TERMS:

As per main Contract.

1.5 VALIDITY:

As per main Contract.

1.6 COMPLETION PERIOD:

As per main Contract.

1.7 SHOP DRAWING:

On the award of the work, the Contractor shall immediately proceed with the preparation
of detailed working drawings showing the detail of each equipment that are to be installed
and the associated works that are to be carried out. All the works are deemed to be
included in various items of bill of quantities as applicable.

Three sets of all such working drawings dully signed by the head of the planning & design
department of the tenderer shall be submitted to the consultants / Engineer-in-charge for
approval to ensure that the works will be carried out in accordance with the specifications
and drawings, including such changes as may have been mutually agreed upon. All the
drawings shall be received by the Consultants/ Engineer-in-charge for approval within 04
(Four) weeks from the date of award of work. The approval of the drawings by the
Consultants / Engineer-in-charge shall in no way relieve the Contractor form his
obligations to provide a complete and satisfactory plant installation, testing and
commissioning as per intent and purpose as laid down in the specifications.

Any omissions and / or errors shall be made good or rectified whether or not the drawings
are approved. Contractor shall obtain written approval for samples as cable tray, cable
tag, and other materials before placing the order.

The Contractor shall also fix operation schedule chart, in the Operating / Maintenance
Room, neatly typed and framed, instructions in details, for the starting and running of the
electrical equipment.

The shop drawings shall be prepared by the electrical contractor based on GFC Drawing
approval of Architect / Consultant.

The all equipment manufacturing drawings shall be prepared by the electrical contractor /
manufacturer for approval of Architect / Consultant.

1.8 AS BUILT DRAWING:

At the completion of work and before issuance of certificate of virtual completion the
contractor shall submit three (04) sets to the Engineer-in-charge, layout drawing drawn at
appropriate scale indicating the complete Electrical System “as installed”.

1.9 INSTRUCTION/MAINTENANCE MANUAL:

Signature of Contractor Page 191 PWD-GoR

 The Contractor shall prepare and produce instruction, operationVolaumned5 Tm echa
niicnalte
Spnecaifn
icc
ate
ions

manuals in English for use, operation and the maintenance of the supplied equipment and
installations, and submit to the Engineer-in-charge in three copies at the time of handing
over. The manual shall generally consist of the following:

a) Description of the Project.

b) Operating instructions.
c) Maintenance instructions including procedures for preventive maintenance.
d) Manufacturers catalogues.
e) Spare parts list.
f) Trouble shooting charts.
g) Drawings.
h) Type and routine test certificates of major items.
i) One (1) set of reproducible ‘as built’ drawings.

1.10 VARIATION IN QUANTITIES & TENDER DRAWINGS:

The quantities for ancillary works given in the schedule and / or in drawings are for the
guidance of the tenderer. The contractor shall be paid on the basis of actual quantities of
works carried out. However, the contractor shall check these quantities before quoting and
will bring to the notice of Consultants / Engineer-In charge for any major variation. Drawing
issued with the tender are diagrammatic only and indicate the general arrangement only.
The data given in the drawings and specifications is as exact as could be secured, but its
accuracy is not guaranteed. The contract shall be on works contract basis and the Client
reserves the right to add / delete any items of work during the currency of contract.

1.11 REPAIRS / REPLACEMENT OF PARTS DURING GAURANTEE:

Any defects or other faults which may appear within defect liability / guarantee period of
twelve months from the date of handing over the system in a satisfactory working
conditions to the Client (except for normal wear and tear) arising in the plant from material
or workmanship not in accordance with the contract specification will be rectified by the
contractors free of cost & nothing shall be paid extra on any account.

1.12 TESTING:

All testing instruments, Meggar, Current Clamp Tester, Multimeter, digital / electronic
electric energy meter, equipment for D.G. Set & Cooling Tower testing, tools, scaffolding
and ladders etc, that may be required for taking measurements shall be arranged by
electrical contractor at his own cost.

All types of specified & routine tests of the equipments shall be carried out at the works of
the Contractor or the manufacturers of the components. The Client shall be free to witness
any or all tests, if they so desired. The Contractor has to inform to the Client before
dispatch of any material / equipment.

On the completion of the installation the Contractor shall arrange to carry out various initial
tests as detailed below, in the presence of and to the complete satisfaction of the
Consultants or his representative / Engineer-In-charge, any defect or short-coming found
during the tests shall be speedily rectified or made good by the Contractor at his own
expenses. The initial tests shall include, but, not be limited to the following:

a. To operate and check proper functioning of all equipment.

b. To test and check the proper functioning of all equipment, electrical switchgears,
safety and other controls to ensure their proper functioning.

c. To check & set the all relay as per design data.

Signature of Contractor Page 192 PWD-GoR

 d. Contractor shall have to submit the capacity test of all equipmVeonlutma t site.
e 5 T ech nical Specifications

e. On the satisfactory completion of all ‘Initial’ tests the plant shall be considered
‘Virtually Complete’ for the purpose of taking over by the Client & balance payment
shall be released against BG.

It is clarified that guarantee period shall start after successful completion of

commissioning & handing over.

1.13 TRAINING OF PERSONAL:

The contractor shall impart training to the minimum three technical staffs appointed by the
Department free of cost during erection and commissioning of the plant.

1.14 INSPECTIONS & TESTING:

All the major equipments may be got inspected & tested before dispatch if desired by the
client at the manufacturers work.

The Contractor shall intimate to the Department minimum 10 days in advance about the
date of readiness of equipment for inspection & testing at a date to be mutually agreed
upon by the client & the Contractor.

The manufacturer of these equipments must have a facility of testing the equipments at
the test bed on full load at their works. All the test readings mutually taken shall be
recorded & evaluated with the technical data furnished by the Contractor.

1.15 STORAGE OF MATERIAL / EQUIPMENT:

The Site office, Storage Yards etc. and the labour camps shall be established by the
CONTRACTOR outside site premises.

1.16 LIASIONING WORK:

All the Liasioning Work with Goverment Authority related to complete electrical work shall
be done by contractor.

1.17 CONTRACT AGREEMENT:

As per main Contract.

1.18 INSURANCE:

As per main Contract.

1.19 LABOUR LAW AND SAFETY REGULATION:

As per main Contract.

END OF SECTION – 01

Signature of Contractor Page 193 PWD-GoR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

BASIS OF DESIGN ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS)

1.20 SITE LOCATION – Rajasthan House, Delhi

1.21 11 KV H.T. CONNECTION FROM STATE ELECTRICAL BOARD:

We have designed the Substation based on Single Point 11 KV H.T. Connection from
SEB.

1.22 LOCATION OF D.G. SET & SUBSTATION:

D.G. Set shall be installed on Ground Floor Level as per drawing attached.

1.23 CAPACITY OF D.G. SET:

D.G. Set (As per Actual Calculation) with acoustic enclosure shall be installed on Ground
Floor Level to provide the power backup as per requirement in case of power cut / break
down of Grid Supply.

1.24 CAPACITY OF 11KV / 0.415KV SUBSTATION:

11KV/0.415KV, 3 Phase, 4 Wire, 50 Hz, Dry type transformer (As per Actual Calculation)
with off load tap changer shall be installed on Ground Floor Level to provide the power to
entire complex with required H.T. Panel etc. The standby transformer of similar load shall
be provided as per CPWD Spacificatiopns

1.25 STARTING METHOD FOR D.G. SET:

D.G. set shall be suitable for Manual/Auto start through D.G. Set Controller.

1.26 D.G. COOLING METHOD:

D.G. Set shall be radiator cooled.

1.27 EARTHING SYSTEM:

The Advance Maintenance Free Chemical gel earthing system to be provided for the D.G.
set system as required as per IS: 3048.

1.28 Main L.T. PANEL:

Main L.T. Panel to be installed in Basement area for Electrical distribution for entire
campus.

Signature of Contractor Page 194 PWD-GoR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF EQUIPMENTS

2.1 D.G. SET

2.1.1 INTENT OF SPECIFICATION:

This specification covers the design, manufacture, assembly, shop testing, packing,
dispatch, transportation supply, erection, testing, commissioning, performance and
guarantee testing of Diesel Gen-Sets, complete in all respects with all equipment, fitting
and accessories for efficient and trouble-free operation as specified here under.

2.1.2 CODES AND STANDARDS:

The equipment furnish under this specification shall conform to the following latest
standard, except where modified or supplemented by this specification:

BS:5514 : Specification for reciprocating internal combustion engine.

BS:5000 : Rotating electrical machines of particular type or for particular applications.

IS:1239 (Part - I&II): Mild steel tubes and fittings.

IS:1651 : Stationary cells and batteries lead acid type (with tubular positive plates).

IS:9224 : Specification of low voltage fuses, General Purpose.

IS:4540 : Mono-crystalline semi-conductor rectifier assemblies and equipment.

IS:5 : Colours for ready mixed paints.

IS:4722 : Rotating electrical machines

IS:1248 : Specification for electrical indicating instruments.

IS:10000 : Methods of tests for internal combustion engines.

IS:10002 : Specifications for performance requirements for constant speed

compression ignition (Diesel) engine for general purposes (above 20 KW).
IS:2147 : Degree of protection provided by enclosure for low voltage switchgear and
control gear.

IS:1600 : Code for type testing of constant speed IC engines for general purposes.

IS:1601 : Performance of constant speed IC engines for general purposes.

ASME Power : Internal combustion engines.

Test Code PTC-17

2.1.3 ENGINE:

Diesel Engine shall be stationary, compression, ignition, totally enclosed, water cooled,
stroke cycle, cold battery starting, turbo charged and after cooled heat exchanger cooled
1500 RPM in accordance to BS and IS specification complete with all accessories

2.1.4 COOLING SYSTEM:

Cooling system shall be radiator cooled.

Signature of Contractor Page 195 PWD-GoR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications
2.1.5 FUEL SYSTEM:

Fuel System shall have PT Fuel Pump, Injectors, Fuel filters, Self contained piping &
houses, Complete piping.

2.1.6 LUBRICATING SYSTEM:

Lubricating system shall have Oil pump, Strainer, Lube oil cooler, Oil filter, Bypass filter,
Self contained piping, Lube oil priming pump.

2.1.7 AIR INTAKE SYSTEM:

Air intake system shall have dry type filter, Air intake manifold with necessary connections,
Turbocharger with after cooler.

2.1.8 EXHAUST SYSTEM:

Exhaust system shall have Exhaust Manifold, Flexible piping, Hospital silencer to limit the
noise level and extending silencer outside the canopy.

2.1.9 STARTING SYSTEM:

Starting system shall have Starter 24V with suitable ampere capacity, Charging Alternator
with inbuilt regulator 24 V minimum 30 AMP DC or as per battery capacity, Connecting
links between battery & alternator. The engine shall be suitable for black start.

2.1.10 COUPLING ARRANGEMENT:

Coupling arrangement shall have Flexible coupling, Flywheel, Flywheel Housing, Coupling
Guard

2.1.11 INSTRUMENT PANEL:

Instrument Panel shall have-

- Lube oil pressure gauge
- Water temperature gauge
- RMP Indicator & Hour Meter.
- Battery charger ammeter.
- Starting switch with key

2.1.12 SAFETY CONTROL TRIP:

- Low Lube oil pressure

- High Water temperature
- Engine over speed.
- Lub oil temperature.

2.1.13 ALTERNATOR:

MANUFACTURER : STAMFORD / LEROY SOMER IS: 4722/BS 2613

Output : Suitable KVA self excited, self regulated foot mounted fitted
with ball and roller bearings. Dg Set shall give full output of
at 40 deg. C as per CPWD specifications. Similar raiting DG
sets with synchronization panel to cater 100% Demad Load.

Power factor : 0.8

Rated Generating

Signature of Contractor Page 196 PWD-GoR

 Voltage : 415 Volts, 3 phase 4 wire system Volume 5 Technical Specifications

Voltage regulation : +/- 1.0% all load between no load to full load & power factor
0.8 to unity. AVR shall be mounted in alternator.

Frequency : 50 HZ

Speed : 1500 RPM

Overload Capacity : 10% for one hour in any 12 hours of operation without
exceeding temperature rise limits specified in BS: 2613
when corrected to ambient temperature at site

Class of Insulation : H and temperature rise limited to class H

Winding connection : Star connection (all six leads will be brought out of stator
frame).

Termination : Termination box shall be amended to connect the bus duct.

The alternator shall be self-excited, self regulated, self ventilated in brush less for suitable
automatic voltage regulator and shall conform to BS: 2613 or equivalent standard and shall
give rated output at NTP conditions. The alternator shall have space heater which shall
be connected with breaker NO/NC contacts and this should be able to cut off with
thermostat.

2.1.14 OTHER ACCESSORIES:

FUEL TANK:

Day service fuel tank shall be made of 2mm thick MS sheet of 990 litres capacity for each
set with all accessories such as oil level indicator, inlet pipe connection, outlet pipe
connection, trough to collect split oil, air vent pipe with air filter, manhole with cover, low
level and full level float valve arrangements with all fittings interconnections between tanks.
The tank shall be provided with suitable calibration scale.

BASE FRAME:

M.S. Fabricated adequately machined base frame complete with lifting, facilities pre-drilled
foundation holes suitable for permanent installation on foundation shall also be supplied.
The base frame shall be manufactured with steel and shall be stress relieved.
Manufacturer shall specify what measures are taken to reduce the stresses.

BATTERIES

For electrical control ckt of 24V & 12V D.C. of suitable ampere hour complete with battery
charger, leads and wooden base plate and shall be placed inside canopy.

FUEL SYSTEM:

The engine shall be capable of running on High Speed Diesel fuel oil. The fuel consumption
of the engine at full, three quarters and half of its rated power output shall be indicated by
the Contractor in the bid. A fuel service buffer tank, common for two DG set with 990 litres
capacity shall be provided on a suitably fabricated steel platform. The tank shall be
complete with level indicator marked in litres, filling inlet with removable screen, an outlet,
a drain plug, an air vent and necessary piping. The fuel tank shall be painted with oil
resistant paint. Service tank level switches (2 Nos. per tank) for alarm & trip shall also be
provided by the bidder. All pipe joints should be brazed/welded. A hand pump for pumping
the fuel into the fuel service tank together with necessary pipes or tubing shall be provided.

SILENCER:

Signature of Contractor Page 197 PWD-GoR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

Exhaust silencer shall be residential type to reduce the noise level.

2.1.15 COOLING:

The diesel engine shall be radiator cooled.

2.1.16 ENGINE GOVERNER:

The governor shall be Electronic type suitable for class A-1. This shall control the generator
frequency, and shall be suitable for operation as per the selected battery voltage ( 24 V
DC). The governor shall be provided with a manually adjustable over speed trip mechanism
to automatically shut-off the engine or the fuel supply if the set reached 120 % of rated
speed. Governor shall be capable to maintain zero speed rate or regulation and shall be
Al type as per BS:5514 in order to take care of heavy motor starting. It shall have necessary
characteristics to maintain the speed substantially constant even with sudden variation in
load. However, a tripping shall be provided if speed exceeds maximum permissible limit.

2.1.17 TURBO CHARGER:

It shall be of a robust construction, suitable of being driven by engine exhaust having a

common shaft for the turbine and blower. It shall draw air from filter of adequate capacity
to suit the requirements of the engine.

2.1.18 STARTER BATTERY:

The battery shall conform to the requirement of IS: 1651. Starting battery sets of 24 V,
heavy duty high performance approved make/quality shall be provided to enable crank &
start the engine even in cold/winter morning conditions. Type/voltage/AH capacity of same
on 20 hour rated discharge period shall be indicated in the offer. The battery shall be
capable of performing at least (6) six normal starts without recharging.

The battery shall be provided with 2 Nos. cables, minimum 1.5m long heavy duty PVC
insulated cabling with brazed tinned lug at one end and with brazed tinned brass terminal
lug at battery end - for connecting batteries to cranking system - with 0.25 m long inter
battery connecting cable.

The lugs shall be clearly stamped (+) or (-) and positive cable also red sleeved for easy
identification.

2.1.19 ENGINE SAFEGAURD:

Safeguards shall be provided and arranged when necessary to stop the engine
automatically by the following:

The operation of the safeguard shall at the same time give individual warning of the failure
by illuminating an appropriate local visual indicator and remote alarm at generator panel.

The contactors, relays and other devices necessary for signal and control, for above
purposes shall be provided at Generator panel.

At the set at a easily accessible place an “EMERGENCY STOP” mushroom head stay put
type P.B shall provided to stop the set in emergency mode.

The safe guard to “STOP THE SET” shall stop the set irrespective of mode selection of the
set viz Auto, Manual or test for following cases, with simultaneous isolation of alternator
ckt.

Emergency stop P.B’s operation

Signature of Contractor Page 198 PWD-GoR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications
2.1.20 SOUND ATTENUATING ACOUSTIC ENCLOSURE:

Sound Attenuating Acoustic Enclosure should have pleasant and aesthetical looks and
should be able to bring down the noise to 75 decibels when measured at a distance of 1
meter away from the set.

The DG set should be supported on a base frame in an MS Sheet enclosure with suitable
ducting for air inlet and outlet. The door and enclosure should be given corrosion resistant
treatment and painted to be weatherproof and long lasting. Resin bonded Glass / Mineral
/ Rock wool of high density (greater than 45 Kg / Cu. M) with minimum thickness of 75 mm
covered with perforated MS Sheet should be provided and covered with tissue paper.
Enclosures should be provided with durable locking system with doors duly gasketed with
neoprene rubber.

Exhaust gases should be taken out from the DG Set by means of MS Pipe and a noise
suppressor.
Proper care should be taken for engine heat rejection in order to have safe working
temperature inside the enclosure by provision of fans etc, as required. The design aspect
should ensure free and uninterrupted flow of suction and exhaust air in order that the
temperature rise of the enclosure with respect to the ambient is less than 7C.

Radiator hot air shall be throughout on top instead of front. The arrangement to be made
accordingly in acoustic enclosure.

2.1.21 ERECTION, TESTING & COMMISSIONING OG D.G. SETS:

ERECTION, TESTING, COMMISSIONING AND PERFORMANCE OF DG TESTS:

The entire work of erection, testing and commissioning of equipment supplied under this
package shall be carried out by contractor and performance and guarantee tests to be
conducted at site are also included under the scope of this specification. For this purpose
the contractor shall depute suitable qualified technical supervisor to site on advance
intimation to the Owner along with all special testing equipment required for testing and
performance and guarantee tests. The supervisor(s) shall be responsible for the
installation, testing, commissioning checks and performance & guarantee tests mentioned
in relevant clauses of this volume and the checks recommend by the contractor.

The successful contractor shall submit sufficiently in advance the bio-data of the supervisor
giving details of his experience for Owner’s approval.

The contractor shall ensure that the equipment supplied by him are installed in a neat
workman like manner such that they are leveled, properly aligned and well oriented. The
tolerances shall be established in Contractors drawings and/or as stipulated by the Owner.

All special tools and tackles and spares required for erection, testing and commissioning
of equipment shall be supplied by the contractor. The bid shall include a list of these special
tools, tackles and spares along with their item wise prices. The total cost for these tools,
tackles and spares shall be included in the bid price.

Erection, testing and commissioning manuals and procedures shall be supplied, prior to
dispatch of the equipment.

The contractor shall ensure that the drawings, instruction and recommendations are
correctly followed while handling, setting, testing and commissioning the equipment.

COMMISSIONING CHECK TESTS / PERFORMANCE AND GAURANTEE TEST:

In addition to the checks and test recommended by the manufacturer, the contractor shall
supervise the following acceptance tests to be carried out on each test.

LOAD TEST:

Signature of Contractor Page 199 PWD-GoR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

The engine shall be given test run for a period of at least 6 hours depending upon the
actual power factor of the load and set shall be subjected to the maximum achievable load
without exceeding the engine or alternator capacity.

This full load test is to be followed immediately by a 10% overload run for one hour. The
performance of the engine, alternator and exciter shall be satisfactory at the end of this
overload run.

At the end of the full-load run, and again at the end of the over-load run, tests for
temperature rise and insulation resistance of the alternator as specified shall be taken.

Full load test can be performed at site or at manufacturer’s works before dispatch and shall
be monitored by the Client/Consultants/Representative. 1x100 Ltrs Automatic Low
Pressure Water Mist Fire detection and suppression system shall be installed in DG set for
protection.

REGULATION TEST:

The automatic and manual regulation of the alternator load at half and full rated load shall
be tested for a nominal volts of 240 Volts, between phase to neutral and at 0.8 p. f. to
verify the requirements of voltage and frequency variation as per IS:4722.

SPEED AND GOVERNING:

The speed of the engine shall be verified to ensure that it conforms to the requirement of
BS:5514.

VIBRATION:

The vibrations shall be measured during full load test as well as during the overload test
and the limit shall be as per relevant standards.

CHECK FOR FUEL CONSUMPTION:

A check of the fuel consumption shall be made through out the test run of full load and
overload. The D.G. Set shall generate minimum 3.6 unit / litre under 50% to 100% load
condition.

2.2 CABLE WORK

2.2.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

Supply, laying, testing and commissioning of cables as per specifications, schedule of

quantities and drawings.

2.2.2 APPLICABLE CODES & STANDARDS

IS: 10242 (Part-3, Section-12) : Installation of cables for low voltage

System

IS: 7098 (Part-1&2)/IS: 5831/

IEC: 60502/BS: 6746/BS:5467 : Cross linked polyethylene insulated
PVC sheathed cables.

Part-I : For working voltages up to & including

1100 Volts.
Part-II: For working voltage from 3.3 KV up
to & including 33 KV.

Signature of Contractor Page 200 PWD-GoR

 IS: 10810 : Method of test foVr ocluambe l5eTsechnical Specifications

IS: 1255 : Code of practice for installation &

maintenance of power cables up to &
including 33 KV rating.

IS: 8130/IEC: 60228 : Conductors for cables

IS: 10418 : Drums for electric cables.

IS: 2062, IS: 800, IS: 816 : Structural wedding steel

2.2.3 SUBMITTALS

Cable schedule as per site conditions & good for construction drawings.

Layout of various cables on cable tray / trench along with sections showing no. of cables,
distance between cables etc, size of cable trays etc.

Cable tray layout, as per site condition, duly coordinated with other services.

2.2.4 TEST REPORTS

Routine test certificates for each drum of cable brought to site.

2.2.5 SPECIFICATIONS

GENERAL

Cable shall be supplied inspected, laid, tested and commissioned in accordance with
drawings, specifications, relevant Indian Standards Specifications and cable
manufacturer's instructions. The cable shall be delivered at site in original drums with
manufacturer's name clearly written on the drum.

MATERIAL

The MV power cable of 1100 V. grade shall be FRLS Aluminium conductor armoured cable
as per relevant IS.
The MV control cables shall be PVC insulated copper conductor armoured cable.
The HT power cable of 11 KV grade shall be XLPE insulated Aluminium conductor
armoured cable.

2.2.6 INSTALLATION

GENERAL

The cable installation including necessary joints shall be carried out in accordance with the
specifications given herein. For details not covered in these specifications, I.S. 1255 shall
be followed. No straight through joint shall be permitted in the system. The cables shall be
supplied as per cable schedule submitted by the contractor & approved by Engineer-in-
Charge.

2.2.7 PROXIMITY TO COMUNICATION CABLES

Power and communication cables shall as far as possible cross at right angles. Where
power cables are laid in proximity to communication cables the horizontal and vertical
clearances shall not normally be less than 30 cm.

2.2.8 CABLE LAYING DIRECT IN GROUND

Signature of Contractor Page 201 PWD-GoR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications
GENERAL

This method shall be adopted where the cable route is through open country along
roads/lanes etc. and where no frequent excavation are encountered and where excavation
is easily possible without affecting other services.

TRENCHING

WIDTH OF TRENCH: - The width of trench shall be determined on the following basis:

a) The minimum width of trench for laying single cable shall be 35 cm.

b) Where more than one cable is to be laid in the same trench in horizontal formation,
the width of trench shall be increased such that the inter-axial spacing between the
cables, except where otherwise specified shall be at least 20 cm.

c) There shall be a clearance of at least 15 cm between axis of the end cables and
the sides of the trench.

DEPTH OF TRENCH:- The depth of trench shall be determined on the following basis:

a) Where cables are laid in single tier formation, the total depth of trench shall not be
less than 75 cm. for cables up to 1.1 KV and 1.20 m for cables above 33 KV.

b) When more than one tier of cables is unavoidable and vertical formation of laying
is adopted, depth of trench in a (i) above shall be increased by 30 cm. for each
additional tier to be formed.

EXCAVATION OF TRENCHES

a) The trenches shall be excavated in reasonably straight lines. Wherever there is a

change in direction, suitable curvature shall be provided complying with the
requirements.

b) Where gradients and changes in depth are unavoidable, these shall be gradual.

c) Excavation shall be done by any suitable means-manual or mechanical. The

excavated soil shall be stacked firmly by the side of the trench such that it may not
fall back into the trench.

d) Adequate precautions shall be taken not to damage any existing cables, pipes or
other such installations in the proposed route during excavation. Wherever bricks,
tiles or protective covers or bare cables are encountered, further excavation shall
not be carried without the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge.

e) Existing property exposed during trenching shall be temporarily supported or

propped adequately as directed by the Engineer in charge. The trenching in such
cases shall be done in short lengths, necessary pipes laid for passing cables
therein and the trench refilled.

f) If there is any danger of a trench collapsing and endangering adjacent structures,

the sides should be well shored up with timbering and/or sheeting as the excavation
proceeds. Where necessary, these may even be left in places when back filling the
trench.

g) Excavation through lawns shall be done in consultation with the staff of the
department/Owner concerned.

h) The bottom of the trench shall be level and free from stone, brick bats etc. The
trench shall then be provided with a layer of clean, dry sand cushion of not less
than 8 cm. in depth.

Signature of Contractor Page 202 PWD-GoR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

LAYING OF CABLE IN TRENCH

a) At the time of issue of cable for laying, the cores shall be tested for continuity and
insulation resistance.

b) The cable drum shall be properly mounted on jacks or on a cable wheel, at a

suitable location, making sure that the spindle, jack etc. are strong enough to carry
the weight of the drum without failure and that the spindle is horizontal in the
bearings so as to prevent the drum creeping to one side while rotating.

c) The cable shall be pulled over rollers in the trench steadily and uniformly without
jerks and strains. The entire cable length shall as far as possible be pulled of in
one stretch. However, where this is not possible the remainder of the cable may
be removed by 'Flaking' i.e. by making one long loop in the reverse direction.

d) i) After the cable has been uncoiled and laid into the trench over the rollers, the
cable shall be lifted slightly over the rollers beginning from one end by helpers
standing about 10 m apart and drawn straight. The cable should then be taken off
the rollers by additional helpers lifting the cable and then laid in a reasonably
straight line.

ii) For
short runs and sizes up to 50 Sq. mm of cables up to 1.1 KV grade, any other
suitable method of direct handling and laying can be adopted with the prior approval
of the Engineer-in-Charge.
e) When the cable has been properly straightened, the cores shall be tested for
continuity and insulation resistance. In case of PVC cables, suitable moisture seal
tape shall be used for this purpose.

f) i) Cable laid in trenches in a single tier formation shall have a covering of clean, dry
sand of not less than 17 cm above the base cushion of sand before the protective
cover is laid.

ii)In the case of vertical multi-tier formation after the first cable has been laid, a
sand cushion of 30 cm shall be provided over the initial bed before the second tier
is laid. If additional tiers are formed, each of the subsequent tiers also shall have
a sand cushion of 30 cm. as stated above. The top most cable shall have a final
sand covering not less than 17 cm. before the protective cover is laid.

g) At the time of original installation, approximately 3 m of surplus cable shall be left on

each end the cable and on each side of underground joints (Straight
through/Tee/Termination) and at entries and places as may be decided by the
Engineer-in-Charge. The surplus cable shall be left in the form of a loop. Where
there are long runs of cable length loose cable may be left at suitable intervals as
specified by the Engineer-in-Charge.

h) A final protection to cables shall be laid in accordance with Clause j to provide

warning to future excavators of the presence of the cable and also to protect the
cable against accidental mechanical damage by pick-axe blows etc.

i) Unless otherwise specified, the cables shall be protected by second class bricks of
not less than 20 cm x 10 cm x 10 cm (nominal size) as per CPWD Building
Specification or protection covers placed on top of the sand, (bricks to be laid
breadth wise) for the full length of the cable to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-
Charge. Where more than one cable is to be laid in the same trench, this protective
covering shall cover all the cables and project at least 5 cm. over the sides of the
end cables.

BACK FILLING

Signature of Contractor Page 203 PWD-GoR

 a) The trenches shall be back-filled with excavated earth free fVroolum
me 5stTo
ecnhneicsal o
Spreco
ifitch
ate
iorns

sharp edged debris and shall be rammed and watered, if necessary, in successive
layers not exceeding 30 cm. Unless otherwise specified, a crown of earth not less
than 50 mm. in the centre and tapering towards the sides of the trench shall be left
to allow for subsidence. The crown of earth however should not exceed 10 cm. so
as not to be a hazard to vehicular traffic. The temporary re-instatements of
roadways should be inspected at regular intervals, particularly during the wet
weather, and any settlement should be made good. Further trenches cut through
roadways or other paved areas shall be restored to the same density and material
as the surrounding area and repaved in accordance with the relevant Specifications
to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge.

b) Where road berm or lawns have been cut or kerb stones displaced, the same shall
be repaired and made good except turfing/asphalting to the satisfaction of the
Engineer-in-Charge and all surplus earth or rock removed to places as specified.

ROUTE MARKERS:

a) Route markers shall be provided along straight runs of the cables at locations
approved by the Engineer-in-Charge and generally at intervals not exceeding 100
m. Markers shall also be provided to identify change in the direction of the cable
route and also for location of every underground joint.

b) Route markers shall be made out of 100 mm x 100 mm x 5 mm GI/Aluminium plate,

welded or bolted on to 35 mm x 35 mm x 6 mm angle iron 60 cm. long. Such plate
markers shall be mounted parallel to and 0.5 m or so away from the edge of the
trench.

Alternatively cement concrete [Link] (1 cement : 2 coarse sand : 4 graded stone

aggregate of 20 mm nominal size) marker 60 cm x 60 cm 10 cm in size shall be
laid flat and centred over the cable. The concrete markers unless otherwise
instructed by the Engineer-in-Charge shall project over the surrounding surface so
as to make the cable route easily identifiable.

c) The work 'cable' and other details such as voltage grading, size etc. as furnished
by the Engineer-in-Charge shall be inscribed on the marker.

LAYING IN PIPES/CLOSED DUCTS:

In location such as road crossing, entry to building, on poles, in paved areas etc. cables
shall be laid in pipes or closed ducts.

GI or Hume Pipes (spun reinforced concrete pipes) shall be used for such purposes. In the
case of new construction, pipes as required shall be laid along with the Civil works and
jointed according to the instructions of the Engineer-in-Charge as the case may be. The
size of pipe shall be as indicated in the electrical drawings. GI pipe shall be laid directly in
ground without any special bed. Hume pipe (Spun reinforced concrete pipe) shall be laid
over 10 cm. thick cement concrete [Link] (1 cement: 5 coarse sand: 10 graded stone
aggregate of 40mm nominal size) bed, after which it shall be completely embedded in
concrete. No sand cushioning or tiles need be used in such situations. Unless otherwise
specified, the top surface of pipes shall be at a minimum depth of 1mtr. from the ground
level when laid under roads, pavement etc.

Where steel pipes are employed for protection of single core cables feeding AC load, the
pipe should be large enough to contain both cables in the case of single phase system and
all cables in the case of poly phase system.

The pipes on road crossing shall preferably be on the skew to reduce the angle of bends
as the cable enters and leaves the crossings. This is particularly important for high voltage
cables.

Signature of Contractor Page 204 PWD-GoR

 Manholes of adequate size as decided by the Engineer-in-Charge Vsohluamlel 5bTeechpnircaol vSpideceifd to
icatio ns

facilitate feeding/drawing in of cables and to provide working space for persons. They shall
be covered by suitable manhole covers with frame of proper design. The construction of
manholes and providing the cover is not in the scope of this Contract and shall be got
executed and paid for by the Engineer-in-Charge through another agency.
Pipes shall be continuous and clear of debris or concrete before cable is drawn. Sharp
edges at ends shall be smoothened to prevent injury to cable insulation or sheathing.

Pipes for cable entries to the building shall slope downwards from the building and suitably
sealed to prevent entry of water inside the building. Further the mouth of the pipes at the
building end shall be suitably sealed to avoid entry of water. This seal in addition to being
waterproof shall also be fireproof.

All chases and passages necessary for laying of service cable connections to buildings
shall be cut as required and made good to the original finish and to the satisfaction of the
Engineer-in-Charge.
Cable grips/draw wires and winches etc. may be employed for drawing cables through
pipes/closed ducts etc.

2.2.9 LAYING ON CABLE TRAY

Cables, where indicated in approved shop drawings, shall be laid on overhead cable trays
which are suspended from ceiling or supported from wall, by anchor fasteners as required.

The Contractor shall provide for all accessories for the installation of the cable trays, such
as bends, tees, reducers coupler plates, and structural steel members (comprising of
channels, angles, flats, rods) for structural supports for cable trays etc.

CABLE TRAY MOUNTING

Unless otherwise specifically noted on the relevant layout drawing, all cable tray mounting
works to be carried out ensuring the following:

a) Cable tray mounting arrangement type to be as marked on layout drawing.

b) Assembly of tray mounting structure shall be supplied, fabricated, erected & painted by
the contractor.

c) Cable tray running along the wall should be supported at intervals not exceeding 1.5
m. In case of branching, there should be a support on all branches at a distance of 30 cm
from the point of branching. Support should not be less than 40 mm x 40 mm x 5 mm MS
angle-secured in an approved manner where runs are along the walls. In case of ceiling
suspended cable tray horizontal supports made of 40 mm x 40 mm 5 mm MS angle iron
shall be provided. The horizontal interval between two such supports shall be 1.0 meter.
These supports shall be suspended from C.I. boxes or suitable approved suspension
devices such as dash fastener of suitable sizes in the ceiling by means of 10 mm diameter
GI threaded rods. All above mounting accessories form part of installation of cable trays.

TESTING & COMMISSIONING

INSPECTION

All cables shall be inspected upon receipt at site and checked by the Engineer-in-Charge
for any damage during transit.

TESTING

i. All 650/1100 Volt grade cables before laying shall be tested with a 500 V megger or with
a 2,500/5,000 V megger for cables of higher voltages. The cable cores shall be tested for

Signature of Contractor Page 205 PWD-GoR

 continuity, absence of cross phasing, insulation resistance to eartVho/lsumhee5aTtehch/a
nicm
al o
Spuercifia
can
tiodns
insulation resistance between conductors.

ii. All cables shall be subject to above mentioned tests during laying, before covering the
cables by protective covers and back filling and also before the jointing operations.

COMPLETION PLAN AND COMPLETION CERTIFICATE

a) After completion of the work the Contractor shall draw completion plans to a suitable
scale and shall submit to the Engineer-in-Charge. The completion plans shall, inter-alia,
give the following details

i ) Layout of cable work

ii) Length, size, type and grade of cables.

Iii) Method of laying i.e. direct in ground, in pipes etc.

iv) Location of each joint with jointing method followed.

v) Route marker and joint maker with respect to permanent land marks available at site.

vi) Wherever the previously laid cable is cut and additional joints are introduced etc., the
cable records shall suitably be amended.

TESTING OF CABLES

The cables shall be tested before and after laying. The Megger value in normal dry

weather shall be 50 Mega ohm for 1.1 KV grade cable. This value shall be 100 Mega

ohm for 11 KV grade cable.

CABLE TAGS

Cable tags shall be made out of 2mm thick aluminium sheets. Each tag shall be 2” in dia

or 3” x 3” square with one hole of 2.5mm dia, 6 mm below the periphery, or as approved

by Consultant. Cable designations are to be punched with letters / number punches and

the tags are to be tied to cables with piano wires of approve quality & size. Tags shall be

tied inside the panels beyond the glanding as well as above the glands at cable entries.

Along trays tags are to be tied at all bends. On straight lengths, tags shall be provided at

every 5 meters.

Cables shall be secured to cable trays with 3mm thick x 25mm wide aluminium

strips/suitable GI clamp, or as approved by Consultant, at 1000 mm intervals and screwed

by means of rust proof screws and washers, of adequate but not excessive lengths. Cable

trays for horizontal runs suspended from the ceiling will be supported with mild steel straps

or brackets, at 1000 mm intervals and the overall tray arrangement shall be of a rigid
Signature of Contractor Page 206 PWD-GoR
 construction. External cabling route marker with C.I. plate marked witVhol“uDANGER 1.1 KV
me 5 Te chnic al Spec ifi cations

CABLE” with 0.6 meter long GI angle iron grouting bracket including [Link] ratio cement

concrete base block of minimum size 200 x 200 x 350 mm to be provided or as approved

by Elect. Supply Company.

2.3 CABLE TRAY

All cables trays shall be made of G.I. sheet/ Wire Mesh Type.

Cable trays shall be complete with bends, joints, coupler plates and accessories as may

be required for joining the cable trays. The bends, Tee joint, Cross joint for all sizes of cable

tray shall be factory fabricated.

Cable trays shall be either perforated or ladder type as called for in the schedule of

quantities.

2.4 RACEWAY

All raceway shall be of 1.6mm/2.0mm thick G.P. sheet as approved by Architect. The

raceway shall have Z- section, hole with thread for cover screw, coupler plate, cover,

junction box, fly cover etc as required. The screw for cover fixing shall be counter sunk

type.

2.5 SAFETY MATERIALS

2.5.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Insulation Mats

B. First Aid charts and First Aid Box

C. Danger Plate

D. Fire Extinguishers

E. Fire Buckets

F. Tool Box

G. Caution Board

H. Key Board

2.5.2 APPLICABLE CODES & STANDARDS

A. IS : 15652 Insulation mats

B. IS : 2878 Portable C02 Fire Extinguisher

Signature of Contractor Page 207 PWD-GoR
 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

C. IS : 2546 : Fire Buckets

D. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

2.5.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Catalogues.

2.5.4 SPECIFICATION

[Link] INSULATION MATS

A. Insulation mats conforming to IS: 15652 shall be provided in front of main switch boards
and other control equipment as specified.

[Link] FIRST AID CHART AND FIRST AID BOX

A. Charts (one in English, one in Hindi, one in Regional Language), displaying methods of
giving artificial respiration to a recipient of electrical shock shall be prominantly provided at
appropriate places. Standard First Aid Boxes containing materials as prescribed by St. John
Ambulance brigade or Indian Red Cross should be provided in sub-station.

[Link] DANGER PLATE

A. Danger plates shall be provided on HV and LV equipments. LV danger notice plate shall
be 200 mm x 200 mm made of mild steel atleast 2 mm thick vitreous enamelled white on
both sides and with inscriptions in signal red colour on front side as required.

B. Size of the HV Danger Notice plate shall be 250 mm x 200 mm and 2 mm thick.

[Link] FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. Portable CO2 conforming to IS: 2878-1976 dry chemical (conforming to IS 2171-1976)

extinguishers shall be installed in the sub-station at suitable places (like HT/LT panel rooms)
as specified.

B. Foam type fire extinguisher shall be installed in Transformer Room.

[Link] FIRE BUCKETS

A. Fire buckets conforming to IS: 2546-1974 shall be installed with the suitable stand for
storage of water and sand.

[Link] TOOL BOX

A. A standard tool box containing necessary tools required for operation and maintenance
shall be provided in sub-station.

[Link] CAUTION BOARD

A. Necessary number of caution boards such as "Man on Line" "Don't switch on" etc. shall
be available in the sub-station.

B. The Caution Board shall be of size 300 mm x 200mm made of mild steel, 2mm thick,
vitreous enamelled white on both sides and with inscriptions in original red colour on front
side as required.

[Link] KEY BOARD

Signature of Contractor Page 208 PWD-GoR

 A. A key board of required size shall be provided at a proper place coVnotlaumine i5nTgechcnaicsaltSepleckifeicyatiso,ns
and all other keys of sub-station and allied areas.

B. The Key board shall be made of 12mm thick first class teak wood shall be of size 400 mm
x 300m and with adequate depth to hold the keys. It shall be provided with a lockable type
hinged glass door made of 12 mm. thick first class teakwood frame with 3 mm thick sheet
glass fixed with piano hinges. The key board shall enough number of hooks for hanging the
castle keys and all other keys of the sub-station and allied areas. It shall be painted with one
coat of wood primer and two coats of white enamel paint.

2.6 PIPING WORK (D.G. FLUE GAS EXHAUST SYSTEM)

2.6.1 SCOPE OF WORK

The scope of this section comprises supply, installation, testing & commissioning of D.G.
Flue Gas Exhaust System pipes & pipe fittings etc. as detailed below in specifications. All
pipes and fittings etc. shall conform to relevant Indian standards.

2.6.2 D.G. FLUE GAS EXHAUST PIPING

D.G. Exhaust pipes shall be M.S. Black pipes up to 150 mm and MS ERW Black Pipes
above 150 mm and it shall conform to IS:1239 (Part 1) -1991 & IS:3589 – 1991 Grade 330
with latest amendments.

All piping and their steel supports shall be thoroughly cleaned and primer coated before
installation.

2.6.3 PIPE FITTINGS

The pipe fittings for screwed piping shall be malleable iron and for piping with welded joints
shall of weldable quality. Also the fittings shall be suitable for same pressure ratings as for
the piping system.

All bends up to sizes 150 mm dia shall be ready made of heavy duty wrought steel of
appropriate class.

All bends in sizes 200 mm and above shall be fabricated from the same dia and thickness
of pipe in at least four sections and having a center in radius of at least 1.5 times diameter
of pipes. Fittings such as tees, reducers etc. shall be fabricated from the same pipe and
its length shall be at least twice the diameter of the pipe.

The dead ends shall be formed with flanged joints & shall have 6mm thick blank between
flange pair for 150 mm and over.

2.6.4 FLANGES

All flanges shall be of mild steel as per IS : 6392 / 71 (with latest amendments) & shall be
slip on type welded to the pipes. Flanged thickness shall be to suit Class II pressure.

Flanged pair shall be used on all such equipments which are required to be isolated or
removed for service.

2.6.5 PIPING INSTALLATION

The drawings attached with this tender indicate schematically the sizes, location of pipes
& vertical shafts. The contractor, on award of the work, shall prepare detailed shop

Signature of Contractor Page 209 PWD-GoR

 drawings based on tender drawings, showing the cross-section, loVnolgum
iteu5dTinecahnlicsaleScpetciiofin
cas
tio,ns
details of fittings and all pipe supports.

Piping shall be properly supported on, or suspended from, stands, clamps, springs,
hangers as specified and as required at site. The contractor shall adequately design all
the brackets, saddles, anchors, clamps and hangers and shall be responsible for their
structural sufficiency. A set of piping support calculations shall be submitted for structural
engineer review and approval before site installation wherever critical & required.

Pipe supports shall be of steel, adjustable for height and primer coated with rust preventive
paint and finish coated black. Where pipe and clamps are of dissimilar materials, a gasket
shall be provided in between. Spacing of pipe supports shall not exceed the following:

Pipe Sizes Spacing Between Supports Rod Size

Up to 12 mm 1.2 Meter 8 mm
15 to 25 mm 1.8 Meter 8 mm
32 to 150 mm 2.4 Meter 10 mm
Above 150 mm ---------As Per Approved Shop Drawing------

Vertical pipes passing through floors shall be plumb and parallel to wall. Pipes shall be
supported on all floors. MS cleats shall be welded on pipes and rest on MS channel placed
on the floor with 15 mm thick resistoflex pads between the cleat and channel. U clamps
with resistoflex sheet shall be provided to keep the pipe in position.

T heading in exhaust piping shall be avoided.

Pipe sleeves at least 3 mm thick, 50 mm / 100 mm larger in diameter than exhaust pipes
respectively shall be provided wherever pipes pass through retaining wall and slab.
Annular space shall be filled with fibre glass and finished with retainer rings welded on the
ends of the sleeve. All pipes passing through the retaining wall shall be provided with
suitable water proofing compound.

Wherever pipes pass through the brick or masonry / slab openings, the gaps shall be
sealed with fire sealant.

The Contractor shall make sure that the clamps, brackets, clamp saddles and hangers
provided for pipe supports are adequate. Piping layout shall take due care for expansion
and contraction in pipes and include expansion joints where required.

All pipes shall be accurately cut to the required size in accordance with relevant BIS
Codes, edges beveled and burrs removed before laying. Open ends of the piping shall be
closed as the pipe is installed to avoid entrance of foreign matter. Where reducers are to
be made in horizontal runs, eccentric reducers shall be used for the piping to drain freely.
In other locations, concentric reducers may be used.

2.7 PIPE INSULATION (D.G. FLUE GAS EXHAUST PIPING SYSTEM)

2.7.1 SCOPE OF WORK

The scope of this section comprises supply, installation, testing & commissioning of D.G.
Flue Gas Exhaust Pipe Insulation and Aluminium Cladding as approved by Architect. All
insulation material and aluminium cladding shall conform to relevant Indian standards /
CPCB-II Guidelines / CPWD Specifications.

2.8 H.T. METERING PANEL (INDOOR TYPE):

2.8.1 GENERAL

H.T. Metering Panel shall be made as per regulation of Local Electricity Supply Authority.

Signature of Contractor Page 210 PWD-GoR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications
2.8.2 CODES AND STANDARDS

The 11 H.T. Metering Panel shall comply with the following standards as amended up to
date.

IS: 2544 : Bus Bar Supports

IS: 2705 / IEC – 185 : Current Transformer

IS: 3516 / IEC – 186 : Potential Transformer

2.8.3 SUBMITTALS

SHOP DRAWING AND TECHNICAL DATA

The Tenderer shall furnish relevant technical data on H.T. Metering Panel and associated
equipment along with the offer.

The Contractor shall furnish relevant descriptive and illustrative literature on breakers
and associated equipment and the following for approval before manufacture of the panel.

a) Complete assembly drawings of the panel showing plan, elevation and typical section
views and locations of cable boxes, bus bar chamber, metering and relay
compartment and terminal blocks for external wiring connections.

b) Foundation plan showing location of foundation channels, anchor bolts and anchors,
floor plans and openings for cables etc.

c) All drawings and data shall be in English.

2.8.4 TYPE AND CONSTRUCTION

The metal clad panel shall be made out of 2.0 mm thick CRCA sheet steel. The steel work
should have undergone a rigorous rust proofing process comprising alkaline degreasing,
descaling in dilute sulphuric acid and recognized phosphating process and shall then be
given powder coating (Electrostatic) paint of manufacturer’s standard shade.

a. C.T. & P.T. Compartment

b. Energy Meter Compartment

c. Cable Termination Compartment

The compartments shall be dust & vermin proof and safe to touch. The H.T. Metering
Panel shall be suitable for cable termination from bottom only. The Panel shall be supplied
with all equipment mentioned in BOQ and as per regulation of Local Electricity Supply
Authority.

2.9 11 KV VACUUM CIRCUIT BREAKER:

2.9.1 GENERAL

Vacuum Circuit Breaker shall be incorporated in H.T. Panel wherever specified. VCB’s
shall be suitable for operation on 11KV, 3 phase, 50Hz, AC supply.

2.9.2 CODES AND STANDARDS

The 11 KV VCB Panel shall comply with the following standards as amended up to date.

Signature of Contractor Page 211 PWD-GoR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

IS : 2516 (Part I – Set 3) :Indian Electricity Supply and regulations.

IEC 60298& IEC 60694

IS : 3427 & IS 12729 : Vacuum Circuit Breakers

IEC : 298 (1987) (Annex. AA) : Testing for Internal Arc

IEC : 529 : Degree of Protection – IP 55

IS : 2544 : Bus Bar Supports

IS : 2705 / IEC – 185 : Current Transformer

IS : 3516 / IEC – 186 : Potential Transformer

2.9.3 RATING

The rating of the vacuum circuit breaker shall be as per the drawings and schedule of
quantities. The rated/breaking capacity of the breaker shall be 26.3kA at 11 KV (As per
Actual Calculation). The rated making capacity shall be as per the relevant standards.

2.9.4 ACCESSORIES

Circuit Breakers shall be provided with the following accessories.

i. Auxiliary Switch with minimum 6 NO+ 6 NC auxiliary contacts.

ii. Shunt Trip Coil

iii. Mechanical Operation Counter

iv. Spring Charging motor and handle for manual charging

2.9.5 SUBMITTALS

SHOP DRAWING AND TECHNICAL DATA

The tenderer shall furnish relevant technical data on breakers and associated equipment
along with the offer.

The Contractor shall furnish relevant descriptive and illustrative literature on breakers
and associated equipment and the following for approval before manufacture of the panel.

a) Complete assembly drawings of the panel showing plan, elevation and typical section
views and locations of cable boxes, bus bar chamber, metering and relay
compartment and terminal blocks for external wiring connections.

b) Typical and recommended schematic diagrams for control and supervision of circuit
breakers.

c) Foundation plan showing location of foundation channels, anchor bolts and anchors,
floor plans and openings for cables etc.

d) Type test certificates along with oscillograms for breakers of identical design.

e) All drawings and data shall be in English.

2.9.6 TYPE AND CONSTRUCTION

Signature of Contractor Page 212 PWD-GoR

 The metal clad panel shall be made out of CRCA sheet steel. The steVeolluwork should have
me 5 Te ch ni cal S pec ifications

undergone a rigorous rust proofing process comprising alkaline degreasing, descaling in

dilute sulphuric acid and recognized phosphating process and shall then be given powder
coating (Electrostatic) paint of manufacturer’s standard shade. The Switch Board Shall be
fully extensible with following compartment.

a. Circuit Breaker Compartment

b. Bus bar Compartment

c. CT and Cable Termination Compartment

The compartments shall be dust & vermin proof and safe to touch. A separate metering
chamber for fixing the necessary instrumentation metering and protective equipment shall
be mounted on the top / bottom of the panel at the front. The VCB shall consist of three
air insulated poles incorporating mechanism of interrupters and suitable clearance
between phases. The body of interrupters shall be made of nickel chromium steel
supported on insulators made out of metalized aluminium oxide. The contacts shall be of
chromium copper and butt shaped. Vacuum circuit breaker shall be mounted on truck or
a carriage mechanism. The drawout carriage shall have two position for the circuit breaker
viz isolated/test & service position. Bus bars shall be insulated type made of high
conductivity copper supported on cast epoxy mono block designed to withstand full short
circuit currents and shall be provided all along the length of the H.T. board.

It shall be horizontal draw out & isolation type, fully interlocked, with dust and vermin proof
construction, suitable for indoor installation. The panel shall be supplied with the
manufacturer’s test certificates. Certificates with date of manufacture and shall be
complete in all respects as per details given in the bill of quantities. The switchgear
constructions shall be such that the operating personnel are not endangered by breaker
operation and internal explosions, and the front of the panel shall be specially designed to
withstand these. Pressure relief flaps shall be provided for safely venting out gases
produced inside the high voltage compartment, bus bar compartment and termination
compartment. These flaps shall be vented upwards and cannot be opened from outside.
These relief flaps shall be of such construction as not to permit ingress of dust/water in
harmful quantities under normal working conditions. Enclosure shall be constructed with
sheet steel of at least 2.0mm thickness. It shall have a rigid, smooth, leveled, flawless
finish.

Total height of the H.T. Panel board shall be 2750mm approximately and width 800mm
(approx.). On the incoming breaker panel, a 100VA burden and Class I accuracy potential
transformer 11KV/3 /110V/3 with LT fuses shall be provided. These shall be three single
phase PTs cast resin insulated type. Adequate space at the rear of the panel shall be
provided for termination of power & control cables. The panel shall be provided with
suitable terminating arrangement for termination of cables. The making contact arms
(upper & lower) of the circuit breaker shall be encased in polypropylene tubes. Penetration
type bushings shall be provided in the bus bars & cable compartment for the fixed
contacts. Safety shutters shall be provided to cover up the fixed high voltage contacts on
bus bar and cable sides when the carriage is moved to Isolated/Disconnected position.
The shutters shall move automatically with the movement of the draw out carriage. It
shall, however, be possible to open the shutters of bus bars side and cable side
individually.

Mechanically operated circuit breaker auxiliary switches of minimum 6 NO + 6 NC ways,

shall be provided for control and indication purposes. Control wiring shall be done by using
1.5 sq. mm, 1.1KV grade stranded copper PVC insulated cable. All control fuses shall be
HRC link type.

L.T. Terminal blocks for control wiring shall be clamp type suitable for connection of only
2 wires per terminal and shall be 650 V grade. The L.T. control circuit shall be routine
tested to withstand 2.0KV for one minute. Bus bar compartment shall be provided at the

Signature of Contractor Page 213 PWD-GoR

 rear. Electrolytic copper bus bars shall be of rectangular cross sectionVoalunmde 5inTsecuhnlaictae d. Bus
l S pe ci fications

bars shall be supported properly by cast epoxy resin insulators so as to withstand thermal
and dynamic stresses during system short circuits. Bus bars shall be provided with
necessary colour coding for phases indication. The bus bars shall be designed to
withstand a temperature rise of 60 deg. C above and ambient temperature of 50 deg. C.
The standard clearance between phase bus bars to be maintained.

2.9.7 BUS BAR AND INSULATORS

Bus bars and connections shall be of high conductivity electrolytic copper conforming to
relevant IS standards. They shall be adequately supported on epoxy insulators to
withstand electrical and mechanical stresses due to specified short circuit currents. Bus
bar cross section shall be uniform throughout the length of switch board. Contact surface
at all joints shall be properly cleaned and No-oxide grease applied to ensure an efficient
and trouble free connections. All bolted joints shall have necessary washers for
maintaining adequate contact pressure. All connection hardware shall have high corrosion
resistance. Bus bar insulators shall be of track-resistance, high strength, non-hygroscopic,
non-combustible type & shall be suitable to withstand stresses due to over voltages and
short circuit current. Bus bar shall be supported on the insulator such that the conductor
expansion and contraction are allowed without straining the insulators. The temperatures
of the bus bars and all other equipments, when carrying the rated of relevant Indian
Standards, duly considering the specified ambient temperature.

2.9.8 EARTHING AND PROTECTIVE EARTHING

Advance maintenance free chemical Copper earthing bus shall be provided. Advance
maintenance free Chemical Gel Earthing of 3mtr long 80mm dia electrode filled with
highly conducting metallic compounds with the permanent sealing at both the ends with
compressed at the top along with 50 Kgs mixture of Resistance Lowering Grounding
Minerals. The loss on ignition by mass of the chemical compound shall be less than
22%. The chemical compound should be tested and certified by any International
accredited and BIS (Bureau of Indian Standards) accredited laboratory. The chemical
earth electrode manufacturer shall be an ISO 9001:2015 & ISO 14001:2015 certified
organization. The Earth pit should be covered with heavy duty polyplastic weather proof
chamber. Strip mad all accreesirious shall be of same OEM only. It shall be bolted/
welded to the frame work of each panel. The earth bus shall have sufficient cross time
fault currents to earth without exceeding the allowable temperature rise. Suitable
arrangement shall be provided at each end of the earth for bolting Owner’s earthing
conductors and earth bus shall run inside at the back of the panel for entire length.
Facilities shall be provided for integral earthing of bus bars & feeder circuit.

2.9.9 METERING AND PROTECTION

The VCB Panel Board shall be provided with cast resin current transformers for metering
and protection. The CT’s shall conform in all respects to IS 2705-1964 Part-I, II and III.
These shall have accuracy class of 1.0 for metering of 5P10 for protection. Potential
transformers shall be epoxy cast resin type & conform to specifications of IS: 3156-1965
Part-I, II & III and shall be class-1. Electronic digital type Ammeter and voltmeter to be
installed on panel. Electronic type digital energy analyser having parameter of KW, KWH
power factor, frequency etc. with 30 days memory shall be provided. All meters shall be
tested for 2000V for 1 minute and shall be 96mm square pattern, flush mounting type with
necessary selector switches. Necessary indicating lamps of low voltage type with built in
resistors shall be provided (maximum wattage 2.5W). The electronic digital types IDMT
relay (2 O/C + 1 E/F) to be provided as per B.O.Q. description.

2.9.10 INTERLOCKING, SAFETY AND OPERATING MECHANISM

Vacuum Circuit Breaker shall have electrically operated mechanism for spring charging.
These operating mechanisms shall be of the stored energy type. In the closed state of the
breaker, the energy stored in the springs shall be suitable for O-C-O duty. The drawout
carriage cannot be moved from either test/disconnected to service position or vice versa,

Signature of Contractor Page 214 PWD-GoR

 when the circuit breaker is ‘On’. The circuit breaker cannot be switcVh
oluem
de 5‘O
TeN ’ walhSe
chnic pen
cifitch
ate
ions

carriage is in any position between test & service position. The front door of the panel
cannot be opened when the breaker is in service position or in an intermediate position.
The low voltage plug & socket cannot be disconnected in any position except test/isolated
position. The door cannot be closed unless the LV plug has been fitted. It shall be possible
to mechanically close and trip the circuit breaker through push buttons with the circuit
breaker in service position and the door closed. Individual explosion vents shall be
provided for breaker, bus bar, cable chambers on the top of the panel to let out the gases
under pressure generated during an unlikely event of a fault inside the panel. Circuit
Breaker & sheet metal enclosure shall be fully earthed. Self locking shutters shall be
provided which close automatically and shall be interlocked with the movement of the
drawout carriage mechanism.

2.9.11 ADDITIONAL ACCESSORIES

The loose items to be supplied with the 11KV VCB Panel Board shall comprise of the
following:

a. Maintenance Manual.

b. Racking in/out handle.

c. Foundation bolts.

d. One number Earthing Trolley for cable side.

2.9.12 CONTROL SUPPLY

a. The tripping circuit shall be at 24 Volt D.C. through a power pack unit.

2.9.13 INSTALLATION

a. 11 KV switch board shall be installed and leveled on the foundation as per

manufacturer's drawing. Bus bar connections shall be checked after installation.
Cable end boxes shall be sealed after the cable work is completed to prevent
absorption of moisture.

2.9.14 TESTS

FACTORY TESTS

The circuit breakers panel shall be subjected to routine tests at manufacturers works in
accordance with the details specified in the relevant IS specifications.

The vendor shall submit the type test certificate for following along with the offer.
a. Temperature rise test.
b. Impulse & power frequency voltage test
c. Short time current test on circuit breaker.

SITE TEST

GENERAL

1. Verification for completion of equipment, physical damage/ deformities.

2. Alignment of panel, interconnection of bus bars & tightness of bolts & connection
etc.

3. Interconnection of panel earth bus bar with plant earthing grid.

4. Inter panel wiring between transport sections.

Signature of Contractor Page 215 PWD-GoR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

5. Cleanliness of insulators and general Cleanliness of panel to remove traces of

dust, water etc.
6. Control wiring verification after interconnecting of panel.

7. Check for free movement of circuit breaker, lubrication of moving part & other Parts
as per manufacturers manual.

8. Manual/Electrical operations of the breaker and Functional test as per drawings.

9. Meggar before the Hi Pot test.

10. Meggar after the Hi Pot test.

11. CT/PT ratio/polarity primary injection test.

12. Secondary injection test on relays to practical characteristics.

These tests as per the clauses above will be witnessed by the owner/consultant at
the works for which necessary information has to be given in advance to the owner/
consultant.

2.10 11KV/0.415KV DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER-

GENERAL
The technical specifications in this section cover specifications for Step Down Double
Wound Naturally Cooled Dry Type 11000/433 volts Transformer with dry type off load
tap change. The transformer and OLTC shall be guaranteed for operation, integration
and satisfactory performance by the transformer manufacturer in conditions prevailing at
site.

STANDARDS
Updated and current Indian Standard Specifications and Codes of Practice will apply to
the equipment and the work covered by the scope of this contract. In addition the relevant
clauses of the Indian Electricity Act 2003, Indian Electricity Rules 1956, National Building
Code 2005, National Electric Code 1985, Code of Practice for Fire Safety of Building
(general) :General Principal and Fire Grading – IS 1641 as amended upto date shall also
apply. Wherever appropriate Indian Standards are not available, relevant British and/or
IEC Standards shall be applicable.

Dry Type Power Transformers IS 11171 – 1985

IEC 726
Fittings and accessories for power transformer IS 3639
Bushing IS 2099
Current transformer IS 2705
Making and arrangement for switchgears bus bars main
connections and auxiliary wiring IS 375
Code of practice for installation and maintenance of
transformers IS 1886
Degree of protection for enclosure IS 2147

TYPE

Signature of Contractor Page 216 PWD-GoR

 The transformer shall be Dry type, Naturally air cooled, 3 phase, 50 HVzol,um1e150T0ec0hn/4 33 volts,
ical Spe c ifications

solidly earthed system, vector group Dyn-11, tapings on HV side connected delta on 11
kV. side and star on the 415 V. side with neutral brought out for independent earthing.
Transformer shall be suitable for indoor installation and shall be suitable for continuous
operation at rated capacity under site conditions. Insulation class of the transformer shall
not be less than class F with temperature rise of 90 deg C over an ambient of 45 deg C.
The transformer shall have impedance not exceeding 5%. The transformers shall have a
basic insulation level of 28 kV rms/75 kV peak, power frequency withstand voltage shall
be 28 kV rms and impulse withstand voltage shall be 75 kV peak.

CONSTRUCTION DETAILS
Enclosure
Enclosure having an ingress protection of IP23, shall be of welded construction and
fabricated from tested quality low carbon steel of adequate thickness. An open ventilated
steel enclosure shall be provided with metal screens at top and bottom for indoor use, for
outdoor use a sealed type unit with breather shall be provided.
Provision of operating the transformer by providing the blower placed on the bottom side
of the enclosure shall be kept for ventilated units. Each enclosure shall be provided with:
a) Lifting lugs suitable for lifting complete transformer.
b) Suitable numbers of jacking pads in accessible positions, capable of raising or
lowering transformer using jacks.
c) Suitable haulage holes for transformer skidding.
d) Terminal diagram plate.

Earthing Terminals
Two earthing terminals suitable for connecting 50 x 6 mm mild steel flat shall be provided
at suitable positions. These grounding terminals shall be suitable for bolted connection.
The earthing terminals shall be capable of carrying for four (4) seconds the full lower
voltage short circuit current of the transformer.

Core
The core shall be constructed from high grade, non ageing, cold rolled grain-oriented,
silicon steel laminations. It shall be treated with high temperature resistant paint to present
corrosion at edges of the core plates. The design of the magnetic circuit shall be such as
to avoid static discharges, development of short circuit paths within itself or to the earthed
clamping structure and production of flux component at right angles to the plane of
laminations which may cause local heating. The insulation of core to bolts and core to
clamp plates shall be able to withstand a voltage of 2 kV RMS, 50 Hz for one minute.
Adequate provisions shall be made for lifting the core and windings assembly.

Winding
The conductor shall be of electrolytic copper, free from scales and burrs. All windings of
the transformer shall be fully insulated and both completely impregnated and cast under
vacuum into mould with glass fibre reinforced epoxy resin. The core shall be protected
against corrosion by a resin coat and coils shall be noninflammable and self-extinguishing.
Both the HV & LV windings of one phase will be separately casted as one rigid tubular coil
with no rigid mechanical connection between their coaxial arrangement. The winding shall
riot absorb any humidity and shall be suitable for tropical climate with ambient temperature
of 45°C and 100% humidity. The transformers shall be suitable to store during year in
100% humidity climate and after that period to be switched on with full rated voltage and
load without any drying process.
The transformer windings are protected against thermal overload by 1 no. PT-100 type
sensors connected to a winding temperature indicator SCANNER type with alarm & trip
contacts with indications after reaching the maximum temperature settings. Coil assembly
and insulating spacers shall be so arranged as to ensure proper air circulation so as to
reduce the hot spot of the winding. Winding and core shall he capable of withstanding
shocks due to short circuits and other transient condition. Resistance temperature
detectors shall be provided by embedding in the LV winding. A winding temperature
indictor/controller shall be provided which shall be actuated by RTD (Resistance
Temperature Detector).

Signature of Contractor Page 217 PWD-GoR

 The tap change equipment shall be so designed that if the mechaVnoilsumme 5 iTsechn
stiucacl kSpeicnificaatnions
intermediate position, the transformer shall be capable of delivering full load without any
injury. The OLTC gear shall be suitable for local and remote electrical control and local
manual control. Further, there shall be provision of automatic operation through voltage
sensing relay. The hand cranking arrangement shall be such that it can be operated at
standing height from ground level. Further the mechanism shall be provided with a tap
position indicator and an operation counter.
Interlock shall be provided to ensure the following.

a) Positive completion of tap changing step once initiated.

b) Blocking of reverse tap change command during a forward tap change already in
progress until the mechanism rests and vice versa.
c) Cutting out of control circuit / mechanism other than the once being used at any point
of time

Cable Boxes
Wherever Cable connections are specified, suitable Cable boxes shall be provided and
shall be air insulated. They shall be of sufficient size to accommodate cables and to allow
easy termination. Cable boxes shall have drilled busbars of adequate size to receive
cables. Removable drilled gland plates of non-magnetic material shall be provided in the
cable boxes. The additional supports for the cable boxes shall be of galvanised iron. The
contractor shall provide earthing terminals on the cable box, to suit 50 x 6 mm GI flat. The
minimum length provided for terminating 11 kV XLPE cables shall be 600 m (from cable
gland plate to the cable lug), for the cable boxes on HV side. The LV side cable boxes
shall be suitable for terminating 1100 V XLPE cables. All necessary cable terminating
accessories such as, supporting clamps and brackets, power cable lugs, hardware etc.
for cable shall be provided by the Contractor to suit the final cables sizes.

A separate neutral bushing on 415 V side shall be provided for neutral earthing to ground
grid. The connection from this neutral bushing shall be brought to the ground level by GI
ground bar which shall be supported from the tanks by porcelain insulator. The ends of
the bar shall have two bolted neutral grounding terminals and accessories.

Marshalling box
A metal enclosed, weather, vermin and dust proof marshalling box shall be furnished with
each transformer to accommodate temperature indicator, and terminal blocks for incoming
and outgoing control cables. The marshalling boxes shall be fabricated using cold rolled
sheet of at least 1.6 mm thickness. The box shall be tank mounted, with a sloping roof.
The box shall be tank protection of IP-53 as per IS : 2147. The marshalling box and
temperature indicator shall be so mounted that the dials are not more than at 1600 mm
from ground level. The box shall have a glazed door of suitable size for convenience of
temperature Indicator reading.
All terminals of the devices mounted in the marshalling box shall be wired up to the
terminal blocks. The terminal blocks shall be complete with insulating barriers, clip on type
terminals, arid shall be suitable for 2.5 mm2 stranded copper wire. All incoming cables
shall enter the marshalling box from the bottom. A removable undrilled gland plate shall
be provided at the bottom of the box for accommodating glands for incoming and outgoing
cables. All devices and terminal blocks inside the marshalling box shall be clearly
identified by symbol corresponding to those used on applicable schematic or wiring
diagram. Not more than two wires shall be connected to one terminal. At least 20% spare
terminals shall be provided. Terminal connector of control cable shall be of TOSHA make
or equivalent.

Control Wiring
The control wiring shall be done with 1100 volt grade PVC insulated. 2.5 mm 2 stranded
copper conductor with armoured cables.

Painting
The internal and external surfaces to be painted shall be sand blasted to remove all rust
and scale or foreign adhering matter.

Signature of Contractor Page 218 PWD-GoR

 All steel surfaces exposed to weather shall be given a primary coaVtoluomfe z5 iTnechn
c cich
al rSomaictaetio, ns
pecif

second coat of weather resistant varnish of a colour distinct from primary and finally two
coats of glossy oil and weather resistant non-fading paint, the shade of which shall be
shade No. 631 as per IS : 5, unless specified by the Owner otherwise, Primer paint shall
be as per IS : 104 and intermediate and final coats of paint shall be as per IS : 2932. All
paints shall be carefully selected to withstand heat and extremes of weather. The paint
shall not scale off or wrinkle or get removed by abrasion due to normal handling. Nuts,
bolts and washers which may have to be removed for maintenance purposes shall have
a minimum of one coat of paint after erection. Any damage to paint during transport shall
be made good by the Contractor. All iron parts of the transformer except the core provided
with hot dip galvanizing are shall also be acceptable.

FITTINGS
The transformer shall be fitted with :
a) Diagram and Rating plate
b) Lifting Lugs.
c) Two earthing terminals on either side of the tank.
d) Four bidirectional rollers on the under carriage for movement.
e) Winding Temperature Indicator with alarm contacts for alarm and trip circuits.
f) Marshalling Box
g) Terminal marking plate.
h) Jacking Lugs.
i) H.V. cable box for 3 core XLPE cable as required.
j) L.V. termination suitable for bus duct / cables as required

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS

The tenderer shall furnish guaranteed figures for the following technical particulars
pertaining to transformer offered.
a) Percentage impedance (shall not exceed 5%)
b) No load losses
c) Total (no load + copper) losses and overall efficiency at 50% load
d) Total (no load + copper) losses and overall efficiency at 75% load
e) Total (no load + copper) losses and overall efficiency at 100% load
f) Voltage regulation from no load to full load.

INSPECTION AND TESTING

Contractor shall draw up and carry out a comprehensive inspection and testing
programme during manufacture of the transformer. The Contractor shall carry out all type
tests and routine tests on the transformers as per relevant standards and Owner’s
approved testing procedure. Type tests shall be carried out on one transformer of each
rating voltage and class and routine test shall be carried out on all transformers. Three (3)
copies of all routine and type test results shall be submitted for approval before despatch
of Transformers. Owner’s reserves the right to delete the type tests in part or in full and
the payment would be made accordingly. All the type-test certificates shall be furnished.

Inspection

Core
Physical inspection and check of quality of varnish, if used.

a) Sample testing of core material for checking specific loss, bend properties,
magnetisation characteristics and thickness.
b) Check on completed core for measurement of iron loss and check for any hot spot by
exciting the core so as to induce the designed value of flux density in the core.
c) H.V. Test.
Signature of Contractor Page 219 PWD-GoR
 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

Insulating Material
Sample checks for physical properties of material.
Winding

a) Sample check on winding conductor for mechanical properties and electrical

conductivity and on insulation covering.
b) Sample, check on insulation paper for PH value, Bursting strength, Electric strength.

Assembled Transformer

a) Check complete transformer against approved outline drawing provision for all fittings,
finish etc.
b) Jacking test on all the assembled transformers.

The Contractor shall also prepare a comprehensive inspection and testing programme for
all bought out/sub-Contracted items and shall submit the same to the Engineer for
approval, such programme shall include the following components:
a) Winding temperature indicator
b) Marshalling Box
c) Tap change switch

Final testing on Finished Transformers.

All standard routine tests in accordance with latest issue of IS:2026 shall be carried out
on each transformer.
All the type test in accordance with latest issue of lS:2026 shall be conducted on one
transformer of similar rating.
An open ventilated steel enclosure shall be provided with metal screens at top and bottom
for indoor use, for outdoor use a sealed type unit with breather shall be provided.
Following test certificates are to be provided in addition to the routine test.
a) Temperature rise test by no load & short circuit method.
b) Measurement of acoustic noise level.
c) Partial discharge measurement test.
d) Short circuit calculation to be submitted.

Contractor shall carry out the comprehensive inspection and testing as per IS : 2026 & IS
: 11171.
Four sets of each test reports shall be submitted.
Transformer shall be inspected by the client or his representatives before the despatch. It
will be the contractors responsibility to offer a 7 days advance notice for the inspection of
the same.

PERFORMANCE
Operating Conditions
The transformers shall be capable of being loaded upto overloads of 15%, there shall be
no limitation imposed by bushings, tap changers etc.
The transformer shall be capable of being operated without danger on any tapping at the
rated KVA, with voltage variation of ±10% corresponding to the voltage of the tapping.

Fault Condition
The transformer and all its accessories shall be capable of withstanding for two (2)
seconds, without damage, any external short circuit.
The maximum flux density in any part of the cores and yoke at normal voltage and
frequency shall be such that flux density at any tap position, with 10% voltage variation
from the voltage corresponding to the tap, shall not exceed 1.9 wb/m2
Transformers shall accept without injurious heating combined voltage and frequency
fluctuations which produce an over-fluxing condition of 120% for one (1) minute. Bidder
shall indicate 150% over voltage withstand time.
Noise level when energised at normal voltage and frequency with all auxiliary equipment
running shall not exceed, when measure under standard conditions, the value specified in
NEMA Standard publication.

Signature of Contractor Page 220 PWD-GoR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications
SPARE PARTS
The list of mandatory spares for indoor type transformers covered under this specification
shall be as given below for the type of transformer offered:
a) Bushings - 11 KV 250 Amps - Three (3) Nos.
b) Tap changer contacts - One (1) set
The item wise prices for these mandatory spare parts and any special maintenance
equipment shall be indicated in the respective schedule and these shall be considered for
bid evaluation.
In addition, the Bidder shall also recommended optional spare parts and maintenance
equipment, necessary for three (3) years successful operation of the equipment. The
prices of these shall be indicated in respective schedules and these shall not be
considered for purpose of evaluation.

REJECTION
Owner’s/ Consultant may reject any transformer during tests or service if any of the
following conditions arise:
a) No load loss exceeds the guaranteed value by 10% or more.
b) Load loss exceeds the guaranteed value by 10% or more.
c) Impedance value differs the guaranteed value by ± 5% or more.
d) Winding temperature rise exceeds the specified value by 5° C.
e) Transformer fails on impulse test.
f) Transformer fails on power frequency voltage withstand test.
g) Transformer is proved to have been manufactured not in accordance with the agreed
specification.
h) The Owner’s reserves the right to retain the rejected transformer and take it into service
until the Contractor replaces, at no extra cost to corporation the defective transformer by
a new acceptable transformer.
i) The Contractor shall repair or replace the transformer within a reasonable period to the
Owner’s satisfaction at no extra cost to the corporation.

TEST REPORTS
Two copies of test results shall be submitted for the Owner’s approval before despatch of
transformer.
Additional bound copies, as required by the Owner’s contract, of complete test results
including all tests on transformers, bushings, current transformer (if provided), shall be
furnished with the transformer.

Maximum Allowable Power Transformer Losses

Maximum allowable losses for Dry type distribution transformers with highest voltage for
equipment upto 11 KV, at 50 % and 100 % of the load. The transformer losses as per
ECBC guidelines.

2.11 MAIN L.T. PANEL-

2.11.1 GENERAL

This section covers the detail requirements for Design, Manufacturing, Testing at works.
Main L.T. Panel/ DG synchronization panel shall be made out of CRCA sheet steel indoor
type as per IEC 61439 1&2 standrad panel, floor mounted, free standing, totally enclosed,
extensible type, air insulated type for use on 415 Volts, 3 phase with neutral, 50 cycles
/sec systems. D.G. Panel shall have PLC and required Hardware and Software to achieve
the AMF, Synchronizing and Interlocking. Sub Panels shall be as per IS 8623 standrad as
per DBR.

The equipment shall be designed to conform to the requirements of:

i. IS: 8623- Factory Built Assemblies of switchgear and control gear.

ii IS: 4237- General requirements for switchgear and control gear for voltages not
exceeding 1000 volts.

Signature of Contractor Page 221 PWD-GoR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

iii. IS: 2147- Degree of protection.

iv. IS: 375- Marking and arrangement of bus bar.

Individual equipment housed in the Main L.T. Panels shall conform to the
following IS Specification.

i. Air circuit breakers/ moulded case circuit breaker IS: 60947 (Part-II) & IEC
60947(2)

ii. Fuse switch and switch fuse units - IS: 13947 (Part-3) & IEC 947 (3).

iii. HRC fuse links - IS: 13703

iv. Current Transformers - IS :2705

v. Voltage Transformers - IS :3156

vi. Indicating Instruments - IS: 1248

vii. Integrating Instruments - IS : 722

viii. Control Switches & Push Buttons - IS : 6875

ix. Auxiliary Contactors - IS : 13947 (Part-4/Sec.-I) & IEC 947 (4/1)

x. Relays - IS: 3231

2.11.2 SUBMITTALS, SHOP DRAWING AND TECHNICAL DATA

The Contractor shall furnish relevant descriptive and illustrative literature on breakers and
associated equipment and the following for approval before manufacture of the panel.

a) Complete assembly drawings of the panel showing plan, elevation and typical
section views and locations of cable boxes, bus bar chamber, metering and relay
compartment and terminal blocks for external wiring connections.

b) Typical and recommended schematic diagrams for control and supervision of

circuit breakers.

c) Foundation plan showing location of foundation channels, anchor bolts and

anchors, floor plans and openings for cables etc.

a) Type test certificates.

2.11.3 CONSTRUCTION

D. G. Panel shall be

1. Made out of the requisite vertical sections, which when coupled together shall form
continuous dead front switchboards.
2. The degree of protection being not less than IP 52 to IS: 2147.
3. Suitable for extensible on both sides by the addition of vertical sections after
removal of the end covers.

Signature of Contractor Page 222 PWD-GoR

 4. Shall be suitable for cable entry from top / bottom both exceptVowluhmee 5reTvecehnricianl dSpicecaifitceatdions
through removable cable gland plate of 3 mm thick. Compression gland shall be
staggered in alleys so as to maintain necessary clearance between cables.

5. Fire retardant polycarbonate sheet shall be provided for viewing panels housing
MCB’s at eye level. Cable channels are to be used wherever possible for aesthetic
look.

Lifting hooks / angles to be provided on the panel.

Panel shall be provided with louvers having wire mesh inside for ventilation.

Each vertical section shall comprise of:

i. A minimum 2 mm thickness front framed structure of rolled/folded sheet steel channel
section rigidly bolted together. This structure shall house the components contributing
to the major weight of the equipment, such as circuit breaker cassettes, fuse switch
units, main horizontal bus bars, vertical risers and other front mounted accessories. The
structure shall be mounted on a rigid base frame of folded sheet steel of minimum 3 mm
thickness and 100 mm height. The design shall ensure that the weight of the
components is adequately supported without deformation or loss of alignment during
transit or during operation.

ii. Cable chamber housing (In rear of panel) the cable end connections, and power/control
cable terminations. The design shall ensure generous availability of space for ease of
installation and maintenance of cabling, and adequate safety for working in one vertical
section without coming into accidental contact with live parts in an adjacent section.

iii. Front and rear doors fitted with dust including neoprene gaskets with fasteners designed
to ensure proper compression of the gaskets. When covers are provided in place of
doors, generous overlap shall be assured between sheet steel surfaces with closely
spaced fasteners to preclude the entry of dust. All door shall be lockable mounted lock.

The height of the panels should not be more than 2400 mm. The total depth of the panel
should be adequate to cater to proper cabling space and should not be more than
1500mm. Operating handle not higher than [Link] minimum height for operating
handle shall be 300 mm from floor level.

Doors and covers shall be of minimum 2mm thick sheet steel. Sheet steel shrouds and
partitions shall be of minimum 2mm thickness. All sheet panels shall be smoothly finished,
levelled and free from flaws. The corners should be rounded.

The apparatus and circuits in the power control centres shall be so arranged as to facilitate
their operation and maintenance and at the same time to ensure the necessary degree of
safety.

Apparatus forming part of the Main L.T. Panel shall have the following minimum
clearances.
i. Between phases - 32mm
ii. Between phases and neutral - 26mm
iii. Between phases and earth - 26mm
iv. Between neutral and earth - 26mm

For any reason, the above clearances are not available, suitable insulation shall be
provided. Clearances shall be maintained during normal service conditions. Creepage
distances shall comply to those specified in relevant standards. All insulating material used
in the construction of the equipment shall be of non-hygroscopic material, duly treated to

Signature of Contractor Page 223 PWD-GoR

 withstand the effects of the high humidity, high temperature tropicVoalul mae m
5 Tb
ecihenn
ictal S
speecrivficicate
ions
conditions.

Circuit breakers and fuse switches shall be arranged in multi-tier formation, except that
not more than two air circuit breakers shall be housed in a single vertical section. Cable
entry for various feeders shall be from the rear. Panel shall be suitable for termination of
bus duct for incoming breakers.

Metallic/insulated barriers shall be provided within vertical sections and between adjacent
sections to ensure prevention of accidental contact with:

i. Main bus bars and vertical risers during operation, inspection or maintenance of
functional units and front mounted accessories.
ii. Cable termination of one functional unit, when working on those of adjacent
unit/units.
All doors/covers providing access to live power equipment/ circuits shall be
provided with tool operated fasteners to prevent unauthorized access.
Provision shall also be made for permanently earthing the frames and other metal
parts of the switchgear by two independent connections.

[Link] METAL TREATMENT AND FINISH

All steel work used in the construction of the L.T. cubicle panels should have undergone
a rigorous metal treatment process as follows:
i. Effective cleaning by hot alkaline degreasing solution followed by cold water
rinsing to remove traces of alkaline solution.

ii. Pickling in dilute sulphuric acid to remove oxide scales & rust formation, if any,
followed by cold water rinsing to remove traces of acidic solution.

iii. A recognized phosphating process to facilitate durable coating of the paint on the
metal surfaces and also to prevent the spread of rusting in the event of the paint
film being mechanically damaged. This again, shall be followed by hot water
rinsing to remove traces of phosphate solution.

iv. Passivating in de-oxalite solution to retain and augment the effects of phosphating.
v. Drying with compressed air in a dust free atmosphere.
vi. Powder Coating paint of colour approved by Architect/Consultant/ Engineer-in-
charge.

[Link] BUS BAR

The bus bars shall made of high conductivity, high strength aluminium alloy complying
with the requirement of grade E-9IE of IS-5082 and air insulated. The bus bars shall be
suitable braced with non-hygroscopic SMC supports to provide a through fault withstand
capacity of 50KA RMS symmetrical for one second and a peak short circuit withstand
capacity of 105KA. The neutral as well as the earth bar should be capable of withstanding
the above level. Ridges shall be provided on the SMC supports to prevent tracking
between adjacent bus bars. Large clearances and creepage distances shall be provided
on the bus bar system to minimize possibilities of fault.

The Panel shall be designed that the cables are not directly terminated on the terminals
of breaker/switch fuse/fuse switch etc. but on cable termination links. Capacity of
aluminium bus bars shall be considered as 0.8 Amp/[Link] of cross section area of the
bus bar. The main bus bars shall have continuous current rating throughout the length of
L.T. Panel. The bus bar system shall consists of main horizontal bus bar and auxiliary
vertical bus bars run in bus bar alley/chamber on either side in which the circuit could be

Signature of Contractor Page 224 PWD-GoR

 arranged/connected with front access. The minimum size of verticalVboluumse b5 aTerchsnh all be as
ical Specifications

per fault level of panel i.e 50 KA.

In case of copper bus bars, high conductivity electrolytic grade copper with current density
not less than 1.4 Amp/ sq. mm shall be used. Bus Bar shall be tinned.
Connections from the main bus bars to functional circuit shall be arranged and supported
to withstand without any damage or deformation the thermal and dynamic stresses due to
short circuit currents. Bus bars to be colour coded with PVC sleeves.
Cadmium plated G.I. nuts and bolts shall be used for making bus bar to bus bar
connections in aluminium bus bars.
Whenever copper bus bar and aluminium bus bar are connected to each other, bimetallic
strip shall be used. In case of copper bus bar, tinning shall be done.
Bus bar calculation shall be submitted along with manufacturing drawing of panel for
approval with bus bar manufacturer data sheet.

[Link] MEDIUM VOLTAGE AIR CIRCUIT BREAKER

TYPE AND CONSTRUCTION

The ACB shall confirm to the requirements of IEC 60947-2 / IS 60947-2 and shall be
type tested & certified for compliance to standards from–CPRI, ERDA / any accredited
international lab. The circuit breaker shall be suitable for 415 V + 10%, 50 Hz supply
system. Air Circuit Breakers shall be with moulded housing flush front, draw out type
and shall be provided with a trip free manual operating mechanism or as indicated in
drawings and bill of quantities with mechanical "ON" "OFF" “TRIP” indications.

Air circuit breakers shall have a rated operational voltage of 415V AC (50Hz) & impulse
voltage of 12 kV.

The construction of circuit breakers shall be as per pollution degree 3 requirements to

sustain harsh environments

The tests shall be carried out with a breaking performance during operation (Ics) and
admissible short time withstand (Icw) equal to the ultimate breaking capacity (Icu). i.e.
Icu = Ics = Icw = 50KA for 1 Sec.

All 4 Pole ACBs shall have fully rated neutral equal to rating of the breaker & shall be
protected against over-load & short-circuit with provisions for settings at:

› 4P 3d - neutral unprotected,
› 4P 3d + N/2 - neutral protection at 0.5In,
› 4P 4d - neutral protection at In to ensure precise neutral protection.

The Circuit Breaker shall have minimum 4 changeover auxiliary contacts rated at 10 A
240/380V volts 50 Hz. There should exist, facility to add one more set of 4 contacts as
required.

Ready-to-close contact shall exist for indicating that all safety parameters are checked &
enabling closure of breaker, ensuring at-most safety for the user.

The withdraw able circuit breaker shall have the following three distinct and separate
positions, which shall be indicated on the face of the panel.

› "Service" -- Both main and auxiliary circuits are connected.

› "Test" – All auxiliary circuits are connected & main circuits are
disconnected.
› "Isolated" -- Both main and auxiliary circuits are disconnected.

Signature of Contractor Page 225 PWD-GoR

 There should be a positive locking at these positions while racking ouVtoloumr era cking in for
5 T e ch ni cal S pe c ifications

clear & confirmative indications as the position is reached. A release push button shall
be available to release the lock.

A door interlock shall be provided so that it shall not be possible to open the door until
the air circuit breaker moving part is in the disconnected position.

The racking handle shall be stored on the air circuit breaker in such a manner as to be
accessible without defeating the door interlocking.

The Circuit breaker protection shall be through intelligent electronic trip system suitable
to protect the distribution network, against LI (Over load, Instantaneous), LSI (Overload,
Short-Circuit & Instantaneous) & LSIG (Overload, Short-Circuit, Instantaneous & Ground
fault).

The circuit breaker control unit shall be with display. The trip units with display shall be
suitable to measure current and voltage parameters.

Control unit shall have fault history data & store last 10 trip causes.

The trip unit shall have following protection settings, based on the type of trip unit.

› Adjustable over load current (Ir) settings from 40% to 100% of rating of ACB (In).
› Over load time setting (tr) from 3s, 4s…….24s as field selectable curves
› Short circuit setting (Isd) from 1.5 to 10 times of Ir setting
› Short circuit time delay adjustable from 0 to 400 msec.
› Instantaneous (Ii) protection with an adjustable pick-up and an OFF position.
› Earth fault setting adjustable in absolute Ampere with time delay settings from 0 to
200 ms.

PROTECTION

The protection release shall have following features and settings:

(i) TRUE RMS SENSING

The release shall sample the current at the rate of 16 times per cycle to monitor the
actual load current waveform flowing in the system and shall monitor the true RMS value
of the load current. It shall take into account the effect of harmonics also.

(ii) THERMAL MEMORY

When the breaker shall reclose after tripping on overload, then the thermal stresses
caused by the overload if not dissipated completely, shall get stored in the memory of
the release and this thermal memory shall ensure reduced tripping time in case of
subsequent overloads. Realistic Hot/Cold curves shall take into account the integrated
heating effects to offer closer protection to the system.

(iii) DEFINED TIME – CURRENT CHARACTERISTIC

A variety of pick-up and time delay settings shall be available to define the current
thresholds and the delays to be set independently for different protection zones thereby
achieving a close-to-ideal protection curve.

(iv) TRIP INDICATION

Individual fault indication for each type of fault should be provided by LEDs for faster
fault diagnosis.

SAFETY FEATURES

Signature of Contractor Page 226 PWD-GoR

 (i) The safety shutter shall prevent inadvertent contact witVholuim
so
e 5la
Tteicn
hngicacopnectiaficcattisons
lS
when breaker is withdrawn from the Cradle.

(ii) It shall not be possible to interchange two circuit breakers of two different
thermal ratings. For Draw-out breakers, an arrangement shall be provided to
prevent rating mismatch between breaker and cradle.

(iii) There shall be provision of positive earth connection between fixed and
moving portion of the ACB either thru connector plug or sliding solid earth
mechanism. Earthing bolts shall be provided on the cradle or body of fixed
ACB.

(iv) The incoming panel accommodating ACB shall be provided with indicating
lamps for ON-OFF positions, digital voltmeter and ammeter of size not less
than 96 mm x 96 mm, selector switches, MCB for protection circuit and
measuring instrument circuits.

(v) It shall be possible to bolt the draw out frame not only in connected position
but also in TEST and DISCONNECTED position to prevent dislocation due to
vibration and shocks.

(vi) Draw out breakers should not close unless in distinct Service/Test/Isolated
positions.

(vii) The insulation material used shall conform to Glow wire test as per IEC60695.

(viii) The ACB shall provide in built electrical and mechanical anti-pumping.

TESTING

Testing of each circuit breaker shall be carried out at the works as per relevant IS
Code of Practice and the original test certificate shall be furnished in triplicate. The
tests shall incorporate at least the following.

i. Impulse withstand test.

ii. Power frequency withstand test.
iii. Short circuit test.
iv. Temperature - rise test under rated conditions.

[Link] MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER

GENERAL

Moulded Case Circuit Breakers shall be incorporated in sub distribution boards wherever
specified. MCCB’s shall conform to IS 13947-2 and / or IEC 947-2 in all respects.
MCCB’s shall be suitable either for single phase AC 230 volts or three phase 415 volts.
All MCCB shall be provided with rotary operating mechanism.
All MCCBs shall be suitable for 3 Phase 415 Volts AC 50 HZ supply.
All MCCBs shall have rated service breaking capacity (Ics) equal to the ultimate breaking
capacity (Icu) at defined operational voltage.
All MCCBs shall offer class –II front face i.e. main current path of the circuit breaker
should be isolated from auxiliary section
All MCCBs above 250A shall have the following features
› Microprocessor trip unit
› Adjustable overload settings – 0.5-1 In
› Adjustable Short circuit – 2-10 In
› Test connector to check the healthiness of trip unit
› 4000 electrical operations
› ON/OFF/Trip/Push to trip indication contacts
All MCCBs up to 250A shall have following features
› Thermal magnetic trip unit
Signature of Contractor Page 227 PWD-GoR
 › Adjustable overload settings – 0.7-1 In Volume 5 Technical Specifications

› Fixed short circuit settings

› 8000 electrical operations
› ON/OFF/Trip/Push to trip indication contacts.

Circuit breakers shall conform to Electromagnetic compatibility tests (EMC) as specified

in IEC 60947-2, Appendix F.

Manufacturer shall submit the test certificates for the same.

RUPTURING CAPACITY

The Moulded Case Circuit Breaker shall have a minimum fault breaking capacity (Ics) of
not less than 50KA RMS at 415 volts or as specified in BOQ./ Drawing.

TESTING
Test certificate of the MCCB as per relevant Indian Standards (IS) shall be furnished. Pre-
commissioning tests on the sub distribution boards incorporating the MCCB shall be done
as per standard.

[Link] MEASURING INSTRUMENT FOR METERING

GENERAL

The specifications herein-after laid down shall also cover all the meters, instrument and
protective devices required for the electrical works. The ratings, type and quantity of
meters, instruments and protective devices shall be as per the bill of quantities.

DIGITAL AMMETERS

Digital Ammeters shall be confirm to IS: 13875. It shall be digital type 7 segment LED
display. Ammeter shall be suitable for accuracy class 1.0 and burden 0.2 VA approx.
The ammeters shall be capable of carrying sustained overloads during fault conditions
without damage or loss of accuracy. The meter shall be suitable for working in ambient
temp 0 degree to 50 degree and 95% humidity condition.

DIGITAL VOLTMETERS

Digital Voltmeters shall be confirm to IS: 13875. It shall be digital type 7 segment LED
display. Voltmeter shall be suitable for accuracy class 1.0 and burden 0.2 VA approx.
The range for 3 phase voltmeters shall be 0 to 500 volts. The meter shall be suitable for
working in ambient temp 0 degree to 50 degree and 95% humidity condition. The
voltmeter shall be provided with protection MCB of suitable capacity.

CURRENT TRANSFORMERS

Current transformers shall be in conformity with IS: 2705 (Part I, II & III) in all respects.
All current transformers used for medium voltage applications shall be rated for 1KV
Current transformers shall have rated primary current, rated burden and class of
accuracy as required. However, the rated secondary current shall be 15A unless
otherwise specified. The acceptable minimum class of various applications shall be as
given below.

Measuring : Class 1.0

Protection : Class 5 P10

Current transformers shall be capable of withstanding without damage, magnetic and

thermal stresses due to short circuit fault of 50KA on medium voltage system. Terminals
of the current transformer shall be marked permanently for easy identification of poles.

Signature of Contractor Page 228 PWD-GoR

 Separate CT shall be provided for measuring instruments and protVeoclutmioe n5 Treechla ys. Each
nic al Specif ications

C.T. shall be provided with rating plate.

Current transformers shall be mounted such that they are easily accessible for
inspection, maintenance and replacement. The wiring for CT’s shall be copper
conductor, PVC insulated wires with proper termination lugs and wiring shall be bunched
with cable straps and fixed to the panel structure in a neat manner.

[Link] CONTROL SWITCHES

Control switches shall be of the heavy duty rotary type with escutcheon plates clearly
marked to show the operating position. They shall be semi-flush mounting with only the
front plate and operating handle projecting.

Indicating lamps shall be of the LED type, and with translucent lamps covers. Bulbs &
lenses shall be easily replaced from the front.

Push buttons shall be on the momentary contact, push to actuate type fitted with self
reset contacts & provided with integral escutcheon plates marked with its functions.

[Link] CABLE TERMINATION

Cable entries and terminals shall be provided in the sub distribution boards to suit the
number, type and size of aluminium conductor power cable and copper conductor
control cable specified.

Provision shall be made for top or bottom entry of cables as required. Generous size of
cabling chambers shall be provided, with the position of cable gland and terminals such
that cables can be easily and safely terminated. Cable glands shall be brass
compression type, barriers or shrouds shall be provided to permit safe working at the
terminals of one circuit without accidentally touching that of another live circuit.

Cable risers shall be adequately supported to withstand the effects of rated short circuit
currents without damage and without causing secondary faults.

[Link] CONTROL WIRING

All control wirings shall be carried out with 1100V grade single core PVC cable
conforming to IS 694/IS 8130 having stranded copper conductors of minimum 1.5 sq.
mm for potential circuits and 2.5 sq. mm for current transformer circuits. Wiring shall be
neatly bunched, adequately supported and properly routed to allow for easy access and
maintenance. Wiring shall be identified by numbering ferrules at each end. All control
fuses shall be mounted in front of the panel and shall be easily accessible.

[Link] TERMINAL BLOCK

Terminal blocks shall be 500 Volts grade of the stud type. Insulating barriers shall be
provided between adjacent terminals. Terminals block shall have a minimum current
rating of 10 Amps and shall be shrouded. Provisions shall be made for label inscriptions.

[Link] LABELS

Labels shall be of anodized aluminium, with white engraving on black background. They
shall be properly secured with fasteners.

[Link] MISCELANEOUS

Push buttons shall be of the momentary contact, push to actuate type fitted with self
reset contacts & provided with integral escutcheon plates marked with its functions.

Signature of Contractor Page 229 PWD-GoR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications
[Link] BATTERY AND BATTERY CHARGER

A set of 24V DC power supply shall be provided for indication, relay operation etc. for
Main L.T. Panel. DC Power supply shall be sealed maintenance free batteries of
suitable capacity. Suitable battery chargers shall also be provided to charge the battery
to perform during mains failure.

2.12 CAPACITOR BANK PANEL

Medium Voltage Capacitors and Control Panel to be used for improvement of power
factor of the electrical system and shall be connected to Main L.T. Panels through L.T.
Cable / L.T. Bus ducts. Automatic Power Factor Correction Panel shall function to
improve power factor of the system in which it is connected. It shall improve power factor
up to 0.99 from existing value.

2.12.1 CODES AND STANDARDS-

Unless otherwise specified the capacitor and control panel shall conform to following.

a. IS: 2834 - Shunt capacitors for power systems.

b. IS: 2147 - Degree of protection provided by enclosures for low

voltage switchgear and control gear.

c. IS: 4237 - General requirements for switchgear and controlgear for

voltages not exceeding 1000V.

d. IS: 8623 - Specification for factory built assemblies of switchgear

and control gear (Up to 1000 volts).

e. IS: 2208 - HRC cartridge fuse links up to 650 volts.

f. IS: 4064 - Specification for Fuse Switch &

Switch Fuse switchgear and control gear.

g. IS: 2959 - AC contactors for voltage not exceeding 1000 volts.

2.12.2 SUBMITTALS

SHOP DRAWING AND TECHNICAL DATA

Complete technical data sheet including guarantee details giving the temperature rise,
capacitor losses etc, Capacitor panel GA drawing, indicating mounting of capacitor units
shall be furnished with the shop drawing.

2.12.3 SPECIFICATION

CAPACITORS

i. The capacitor shall be 3 phase heavy duty capacitor 525 Volt, 50 Hz, with 14%
detuned reactor.

ii. The temperature rise above the specified ambient (50ºC) of any part of the capacitor
and polyurethane resins associated equipment shall not exceed the permissible
temperature as per IS: 2834.

iii. 50/25/10/5 KVAR capacitor units shall be used to form a bank of capacitors of
desired capacity. All these units shall be connected in a parallel by means of solid
bus bars of adequate current carrying capacity. The combination of capacitor unit
shall be such as not to exceed permissible over voltage across the healthy capacitor

Signature of Contractor Page 230 PWD-GoR

 units in case of failure of one or more units. Capacitor banks sVh all be suitable for
ol um e 5 T echn ic al S pe cifi cati ons

operation at 110% of rated RMS voltage and 150% of rates RMS current. Each unit
shall satisfactorily operate at 135% of rated KVAR.

iv. Construction-
The Capacitor banks shall be floor mounting type using minimum floor space. The
container of capacitors shall be hermetically sealed in sturdy containers made out of
2 mm thick M.S. sheet steel. Dry type or synthetic non-inflammable oil shall be used
for insulation. Each standard unit shall be provided with a built in silvered fuse.

v. Discharge Resistance

Each capacitor unit shall be individually protected by MCCB with indication to show
when it is in operation. The capacitors shall be provided with permanently
connected discharge resistors so that residual voltage of the capacitors shall be
reduced to 50 Volts or less within one minute after the capacitor is disconnected
from the sources of supply.

vi. Earthing

Two separate earthing terminals shall be provided for earth connection for each bank.
All components and frame shall be properly earthed.

2.12.4 CONTROL PANEL

The panel shall be provided with necessary MCCB's, contactors, automatic required steps
relays with associated CT's and power factor meter, indicating lamps, push buttons etc.
Capacitors shall also be housed in the same panel. The panel shall be free standing type,
dead front cubicle and shall be constructed from 2 mm thick sheet steel. The degree of
protection shall be IP 54. This panel shall be integrated with the main L.T. panel unless
specified otherwise.

2.12.5 PAINTING

Capacitor panel is integrated with Main LT panel, it shall be painted as per specification in
relevant Clause above.

2.13 SUB DISTRIBUTION PANEL

2.13.1 GENERAL

Sub Distribution Board shall be metal clad totally enclosed, rigid, floor mounting, air
insulated, cubicle type for use on 415 volts, 3 phase, 50 cycle system. Equipment shall be
designed for operation in high ambient temperature and high humidity tropical atmospheric
conditions.

2.13.2 STANDARDS

The equipment shall be designed to conform to the requirements of:

IS 8623 – Factory Built Assemblies of switchgear and control gear.

IS 4237 – General requirements for switchgear and control gear for voltages not exceeding
1000 volts.
IS 2147 – Degrees of protection provided by enclosures for low voltage switchgear and
control gear.
IS 375 – Marking and arrangement of bus bars.

Individual equipment housed in the sub distribution boards shall conform to the following
IS specifications:

Signature of Contractor Page 231 PWD-GoR

 a) Moulded Case Circuit Breakers - IS: 13947V-o2lu/ImEe C
5 T9
ec4
hn7
ic-a2
l Specifications

b) Miniature Circuit Breaker - IEC - 60898

c) Contractors - IEC – 947-4-1, IS 13947-4-1
d) Current Transformers - IS: 2705
e) Indicating Instruments (Analogue) - IS: 1248,
f) Indicating Instruments (Digital) - IS: 13875
g) Integrating Instruments (Analogue) - IS: 722, IS: 13779-1999
h) Integrating Instruments (Digital) - IS: 13779- 1999, IS: 14697
i) HRC fuse links - IS: 13703 / IEC 269

2.13.3 SUBMITTALS

Shop Drawings And Technical Data-

The tenderer shall furnish relevant technical data of switchgears and associated equipment along
with the offer.

The Contractor shall furnish relevant descriptive and illustrative literature on switchgears and
associated equipment and the following for approval before manufacture of the panel.

a) Complete assembly drawings of the panel showing plan, elevation and typical section
views and locations of cable boxes, bus bar chamber, metering compartment and terminal
blocks for external wiring connections.

b) Typical and recommended schematic diagrams and control wiring.

c) Foundation plan showing location of foundation channels, anchor bolts and anchors, floor
plans and openings for cables etc.

d) All drawings and data shall be in English.

2.13.4 CONSTRUCTIONS

Sub Distribution boards shall be metal enclosed, indoor, floor mounted free standing and/or wall
mounted type made up of the required vertical section, which when coupled together shall form
continuous dead front. Sub distribution boards shall be dust and damp protected, the degree of
protection being no less than IP: 54 to IS:2147. Sub distribution boards shall be fabricated with a
framed structure with rolled/folded sheet steel channel section of Sheet steel shroud and partitions
shall be of minimum 2mm thickness, doors and covers shall also be of 2mm thickness. All panel
doors shall be pad lockable type. All sheet steel work forming the exterior of sub distribution
boards shall be smoothly finished, leveled and free from flaws. The corners to be rounded. Front
and rear doors to be fitted with dust proof including neoprene gasket with fasteners designed to
ensure proper compression of the gaskets. When covers are provided in place of doors, generous
overlap shall be ensured between sheet steel surfaces with closely spaced fasteners to preclude
the entry of dust.

Following minimum clearance to be maintained after taking into account connecting bolts, clamps
etc.

i) Between Phases - 32mm

ii) Between Phases and neutral - 26mm
iii) Between Phases and earth - 26mm
iv) Between Neutral & earth - 26mm

All insulating, materials used in the construction of the equipment shall be of non hygroscopic
materials, duly treated to withstand the effect of high humidity, high temperatures, tropical ambient
service conditions. SMC (Sheet Moulded Compound) supports & shrouds shall be used.

Functional units such as moulded case circuit breakers shall be arranged in multi-tier formation.
The design of the sub distribution boards shall be such that each MCCB unit shall be fully
compartmentalized.

Signature of Contractor Page 232 PWD-GoR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

Insulated barriers shall be provided with vertical section and between adjacent section to ensure
prevention of accidental contact with main bus bars and vertical risers during operation, inspection
or maintenance of functional units. All doors/covers providing access to live power
equipment/circuits shall be provided with tool operated fastness to prevent unauthorized access.
Sub distribution boards shall be so constructed that the cable alley shall be sufficient enough to
accommodate all the outgoing and incoming cables.

For each cable alley, there shall be separate cable gland plate of detachable type at the bottom
and/or top of the panel as required. Gland plate shall be 3 mm thick.

A base frame made out of 75mm x 40mm x 5.0mm M.S. Channel to be provided.

2.13.5 METAL TREATMENT AND FINISH

All metal work used in the construction of the sub distribution boards should have under gone a
rigorous metal treatment process as follows:

a) Effective cleaning by hot non alkaline degreasing solution followed by cold water rinsing to
remove traces of alkaline solution

b) Picking in dilute sulphuric acid to remove oxide scales & rust formation, if any, followed by cold
water rinsing to remove traces of acidic solution.

c) A recognized phosphating process to facilitate durable coating of the paint on the metal
surfaces and also to prevent the spread of rusting in the event of the paint film being mechanically
damaged. This again, shall be followed by hot water rinsing to remove traces of phosphate
solution.

d) Passivating in de-oxalite solution to retain and augment the effects of phosphating.

e) Drying with compressed air in a dust free atmosphere.

f) A finishing coat of powder coating of Siemens grey colour and thickness of powder coating
shall not be less than 50 micron.

2.13.6 BUS BARS

The bus bars shall be air insulated and made of high conductivity, high strength Aluminium
complying with the requirement of grade E-91E.

The bus bars shall be suitably braced with non-hygroscopic SMC supports to provide a through
fault withstand capacity of 50KA/35KA/25KA (as per boq) RMS symmetrical for one second or as
specified in BOQ/Drawing and a peak short circuit with stand capacity of 105 KA.

The neutral as well as the earth bar should be capable of withstanding the above level. Ridges
shall be provided on the SMC supports to prevent tracking between adjacent bus bars. Large
clearances and creepage distance shall be provided on the bus bar system to minimize the
possibility of fault. The main phase bus bars shall have continues current rating throughout the
length of the panel. The cross section of neutral bus bars shall be same as that of the phase bus
bar for bus bars of capacity up to 250 Amp; for higher capacities, the neutral bus bar shall not be
less than half (50%) the cross section of that of the phase bus bars. Connections from the main
bus bars to functional circuits shall be so arranged and supported to withstand without any
damage or deformation the thermal and dynamic stresses due to short circuit currents. Bus bars
shall be colour coded with PVC heat shrinkable sleeves.

The sub distribution boards shall be designed that the cables are not directly terminated on the
terminals of MCCB etc. but are terminated on cable termination links. Capacity of aluminium bus
bars shall be considered as 0.8 Amp per sq. mm of cross section area of the bus bars.

Signature of Contractor Page 233 PWD-GoR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications
[Link] MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER

GENERAL

Moulded Case Circuit Breakers shall be incorporated in sub distribution boards wherever
specified. MCCB’s shall conform to IS 13947-2 and / or IEC 947-2 in all respects.
MCCB’s shall be suitable either for single phase AC 230 volts or three phase 415 volts.
All MCCB shall be provided with rotary operating mechanism.
All MCCBs shall be suitable for 3 Phase 415 Volts AC 50 HZ supply.
All MCCBs shall have rated service breaking capacity (Ics) equal to the ultimate breaking
capacity (Icu) at defined operational voltage.
All MCCBs shall offer class –II front face i.e. main current path of the circuit breaker
should be isolated from auxiliary section
All MCCBs shall have cross bolted termination.
All MCCBs above 250A shall have the following features
› Microprocessor trip unit
› Adjustable overload settings – 0.5-1 In
› Adjustable Short circuit – 2-10 Ir
› Test connector to check the healthiness of trip unit
All MCCBs up to 250A shall have following features
› Thermal magnetic trip unit
› Adjustable overload settings – 0.7-1 In
› Fixed short circuit settings

The trip unit shall have integral test facility to verify the healthiness and to avoid external
calibration.

Circuit breakers shall conform to Electromagnetic compatibility tests (EMC) as specified

in IEC 60947-2, Appendix F.

Manufacturer shall submit the test certificates for the same.

RUPTURING CAPACITY

The Moulded Case Circuit Breaker shall have a minimum fault breaking capacity (Ics) of
not less than 50KA/35KA/25KA (As per BOQ) RMS at 415 volts or as specified in BOQ./
Drawing.

TESTING
Test certificate of the MCCB as per relevant Indian Standards (IS) shall be furnished. Pre-
commissioning tests on the sub distribution boards incorporating the MCCB shall be done
as per standard.

2.13.7 MEASURING INSTRUMENTS, FOR METERING:-

GENERAL

Direct reading electrical instruments shall be in conform to IS 1248. The accuracy of direct
reading shall be 1.0 for voltmeter and 1.5 for ammeters. Other type of instruments direct reading
shall be 1.0 for voltmeter and 1.5 for ammeters. Other type of instruments shall have accuracy
of 1.5. The errors due to variations in temperature shall be limited to a minimum. The meter shall
be of flush mounting type of 96mm square pattern. The meter shall be enclosed in a dust tight
housing. The housing shall be of steel or phenolic mould. The design and manufacture of the
meters shall ensure the prevention of fogging of instruments glass. Instruments meters shall be
sealed in such a way that access to the measuring element and to the accessories with in the
case shall not be possible without removal of the seal. The meters shall be provided with white
dials and black scale markings.

The pointer shall be black in colour and shall have zero position adjustment device which could
be operated from outside. The direction of deflection shall be from left to right.

Signature of Contractor Page 234 PWD-GoR

Suitable selector switches shall be provided for all ammeters and voltmeters Vinoltuemne 5dTeedchntiocalbSepecuifsiceatdions
on three phase supply.

The specifications herein-after laid down shall also cover all the meters, instrument and protective
devices required for the electrical works. The ratings, type and quantity of meters, instruments
and protective devices shall be as per the bill of quantities.

DIGITAL AMMETERS

Digital Ammeters shall be confirm to IS: 13875. It shall be digital type 7 segment LED display.
Ammeter shall be suitable for accuracy class 1.0 and burden 0.2 VA approx. The ammeters shall
be capable of carrying sustained overloads during fault conditions without damage or loss of
accuracy. The meter shall be suitable for working in ambient temp 0 degree to 50 degree and
95% humidity condition.

DIGITAL VOLTMETERS

Digital Voltmeters shall be confirm to IS: 13875. It shall be digital type 7 segment LED display.
Voltmeter shall be suitable for accuracy class 1.0 and burden 0.2 VA approx. The range for 3
phase voltmeters shall be 0 to 500 volts. The meter shall be suitable for working in ambient temp
0 degree to 50 degree and 95% humidity condition. The voltmeter shall be provided with protection
MCB of suitable capacity.
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS

Current transformers shall be in conformity with IS: 2705 (Part I, II & III) in all respects. All current
transformers used for medium voltage applications shall be rated for 1KV Current transformers
shall have rated primary current, rated burden and class of accuracy as required. However, the
rated secondary current shall be 5A unless otherwise specified. The acceptable minimum class
of various applications shall be as given below.

Measuring : Class 1.0

Protection : Class 5 P10

Current transformers shall be capable of withstanding without damage, magnetic and thermal
stresses due to short circuit fault of 50KA on medium voltage system. Terminals of the current
transformer shall be marked permanently for easy identification of poles. Separate CT shall be
provided for measuring instruments and protection relays. Each C.T. shall be provided with rating
plate.

Current transformers shall be mounted such that they are easily accessible for inspection,
maintenance and replacement. The wiring for CT’s shall be copper conductor, PVC insulated
wires with proper termination lugs and wiring shall be bunched with cable straps and fixed to the
panel structure in a neat manner.

2.13.8 CONTROL SWITCHES-

Control switches shall be of the heavy duty rotary type with escutcheon plates clearly marked to
show the operating position. They shall be semi-flush mounting with only the front plate and
operating handle projecting.

Indicating lamps shall be of the LED type, and with translucent lamps covers. Bulbs & lenses
shall be easily replaced from the front.

Push buttons shall be on the momentary contact, push to actuate type fitted with self reset
contacts & provided with integral escutcheon plates marked with its functions.

2.13.9 CABLE TERMINATIONS-

Cable entries and terminals shall be provided in the sub distribution boards to suit the number,
type and size of aluminium conductor power cable and copper conductor control cable specified.

Signature of Contractor Page 235 PWD-GoR

Provision shall be made for top or bottom entry of cables as required. GeneVrooluumse 5sTiezcehniocafl Scpaecbifliicnatg
ions

chambers shall be provided, with the position of cable gland and terminals such that cables can
be easily and safely terminated. Cable glands shall be brass compression type, barriers or
shrouds shall be provided to permit safe working at the terminals of one circuit without accidentally
touching that of another live circuit.

Cable risers shall be adequately supported to withstand the effects of rated short circuit currents
without damage and without causing secondary faults.

2.13.10 CONTROL WIRING-

All control wirings shall be carried out with 1100V grade single core FRLS cable conforming to IS
694/IS 8130 having stranded copper conductors of minimum 1.5 sq. mm for potential circuits and
2.5 sq. mm for current transformer circuits. Wiring shall be neatly bunched, adequately supported
and properly routed to allow for easy access and maintenance. Wiring shall be identified by
numbering ferrules at each end. All control fuses shall be mounted in front of the panel and shall
be easily accessible.

2.13.11 TERMINAL BLOCK-

Terminal blocks shall be 500 Volts grade of the stud type. Insulating barriers shall be provided
between adjacent terminals. Terminals block shall have a minimum current rating of 10 Amps
and shall be shrouded. Provisions shall be made for label inscriptions.

2.13.12 LABELS-

Labels shall be of anodized aluminium, with white engraving on black background. They shall be
properly secured with fasteners.

2.13.13 TESTING AT MANUFACTURING WORK-

All routine tests specified is IS: 8623-1977 shall be carried out and test certificates submitted to
the Engineer – in –Charge.

2.13.14 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING-

Commissioning checks and tests shall be included all wiring checks and checking up of
connections. Primary/secondary injection tests for the relays adjustment/setting shall be done
before commissioning in addition to routine meggar test. Checks and tests shall include the
following:

a) Operation checks and lubrication of all moving parts.

b) Interlocking function check
c) Insulation test: When measured with 500 V meggar, the insulation resistance shall not be less
than 100 mega ohms.
d) Trip tests & protection gear test.

2.13.15 LIGHT FIXTURE:-

SUPPORTS AND FIXINGS

Illumination levels for various building are designed on the basis of BIS No. 10322 Part-5 Section-
I-1985. & the latest ECBC & GRIHA guidelines. Lighting shall be designed as per False ceiling
layout with suitable Lux Calculation reports as approved by Architect.
Energy efficient light fixtures are considered with LED with high efficiency and high power factor.
Also light fixtures used in office areas are direct/ in-direct lighting luminaries to provide a glare-
free environment.
The circuiting for the light fixture is designed such that the maximum daylight is used and lights
could be switched off when there is daylight is present. This is automatically controlled with
daylight sensors.
All exit light signage’s are provided with inbuilt battery backup

Signature of Contractor Page 236 PWD-GoR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

Occupancy sensors with Daylight sensors are provided in corridors, working hall areas, in all
business, conference, meeting rooms and other common areas. Occupancy sensors shall turn
off the light fixtures within 15 minutes of an occupant leaving leaving the space
Solar Lighting shall be used in outdoor areas. External Lighting shall be controlled by a photo
sensor or astronomical time switch that is capable of automatically turning off the exterior lighting
when daylight is available or the lighting is not required. The efficiency of lighting shall be minimum
of 9o lumens per watt.

WIRING CONNECTIONS

Where luminaires, other than those are fixed direct to circular boxes or supported by pendants or
chains, the final circuit wiring shall terminate at a terminal block in the conduit box.

Where luminaires having fluorescent tubes are fixed direct to circular conduit boxes, the final
circuit wiring may be terminated within the luminaire unless otherwise indicated. The wiring shall
enter each luminaire at the conduit entry nearest to the terminal block and where the loop – in
wiring system is used leave by same entry wiring shall not pass through a luminaire.

Where luminaires are mounted on or recessed into a suspended ceiling connection shall be by
flexible cord from a plug in ceiling rose shall be located not more than 500 mm from the access
panel in the ceiling and shall be firmly supported, unless otherwise approved by the consultant.

Cables and flexible cords for final connections to luminaires shall be suitable for the operating
temperature of the luminaire. Flexible cords for chain suspensions, if any shall have a white
sheath unless otherwise indicated.

The size of final connection cables or flexible cords shall be as indicated.

Cables and cords passing close to ballast within a luminaire shall be suitable for the operating
temperature of the ballast. Heat resistant sleeves shall be provided.

A protective conductor shall connect the earthing terminal or earthing contact of each luminaire
to an earthing terminal incorporated in the adjacent conduit box. Where the final connection is by
flexible cord the protective conductor shall form part of the cord.

Where luminaires are recessed in the false ceiling, luminaires shall be suspended with MS conduit
with ball & socket arrangement, check nut etc. Suspension arrangement shall be fixed to
steel/RCC structure with suitable purpose made clamps etc. (Cost of suspension arrangement is
deemed to be included in the rate of installation/erection of luminaires). Contractor shall submit
the shop drawing for proposed suspension arrangement of various types of light fixtures in various
type of ceiling and shall obtain necessary approval from the Engineer-in-Charge.

The light fixtures and fans shall be assembled and installed in position complete and ready for
service in accordance with the detailed drawings, manufacturer’s instructions and to the
satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge. Fixtures shall be suspended true to alignment plumb level
and capable of resisting all lateral and vertical forces and shall be fixed as required. All ceiling
fans shall be provided with suspension arrangement in the concrete slab/roof members. It shall
be the duty of the contractor to make these provisions at the appropriate stage & locations shown
on the drawings. Fan box with MS hook shall be as per CPWD specifications. Suspended type
fluorescent light fixture shall be fixed to circular junction box with a metallic ball and socket
arrangement. Light fixture in general shall be directly fixed to ceiling slab with rawl plugs. All
switch and outlet boxes shall be bonded to earth through connector blocks. MS pipe shall be
fixed with suitable fixing accessories and metal continuity shall be maintained. Point wiring shall
be done as per CPWD specifications.

FAÇADE LIGHTING
Façade lighting shall be achieved with RGBW/RGBNW LED integral floodlight luminaire
made up of Die-cast aluminium. RGBW/RGBNW LED Linear grazing luminaire made up of
extruded aluminium

Signature of Contractor Page 237 PWD-GoR

Façade lighting shall meet architectural requirement of the building. AreasVolluikmee 5aTlelchPniiclallaSrpseciafictations
the front façade, Big & small domes, crown at terrace, entrance pillars, side walls, parapet
walls at floors building shall be covered lighting up the building façade as area specified in
DBR.
Luminaire should be capable of producing dynamic color changing light by DMX/Ethernet
based control.
Luminaire should have architectural floodlighting optics with beam angles of 15-20°,35-40°,
8-12°, Elliptical 20-25x35-40°, 16x35°.
Luminaire should be capable of operating at line voltage without any separate power supply
from 110- 277 V AC.
Life class should be at least 40000-50,000 burning hours at L70@35-30deg C. Lens should
be anti-ageing and anti-UV high optical efficiency.
Luminaire should comply IP 65-66 rating.
Luminaire and DMX controller should be of same make and complete with all accessories
like leader cable and jumper cable. The connectors should be IP67 rated
Façade lighting system shall be supplied complete with lighting fixtures along with all
components/accessories /controllers.

2.13.16 CONDUITING AND WIRING FOR TV SYSTEM: - CONDUITING

Conduiting for TV system shall be carried out in PVC Conduit. Conduiting shall be carried out as
specified in point wiring head as per CPWD specifications.

OUTLETS

All TV outlets shall be provided with modular range of cover plate, box and coaxial outlet. Cover
plate shall match in shape & finish with other light and power accessories.

JUNCTION BOX

Suitable size of metallic junction box shall be provided for termination of conduit for TV system.
Box shall be made of 1.6mm thick MS sheet and shall be treated before painting. Front of the
junction box shall be provided with 3mm thick phenolic laminated sheet cover.

COAXIAL CABLES

The coaxial cable shall be of wideband type (RG-11 for Riser & RG-6 for distribution)

TAP OFF

These shall be of ultra wide bandwidth and of hybrid type. These shall have a flat frequency
response over the entire operating range. These shall have a aluminium cast housing for high
frequency radiation resistance.
The Tap offs shall be in one way, two way and four way configurations.

SPLITTERS

These shall be of ultra wide band width and of hybrid type. These shall have a flat frequency
response over the entire operating range. These shall have a aluminium cast housing for high
frequency radiation resistance.

The splitters shall be in 2 ways, 3 way & 4 way configurations

2.14 AIR INSULATED BUS DUCT:

As per CPWD specifications.

Signature of Contractor Page 238 PWD-GoR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

2.15 UPS SYSTEM-

2.15.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS

PWM IGBT with high frequency (25 KHz or more) or better Technology.

2.15.2 POWER

On-Line UPS with upgradability minimum 50% (specify the limit, process and cost implication for
expanding the power rating).

2.15.3 PRODUCT CERTIFICATION/TESTING

The product shall have certification from any one of the following -

a) ERTL
b) ETDC
c) Sameer
d) STQC
e) IEC
f) ISO 9001

2.15.4 OPERATING TEMPERATURE

0-40 degree Centigrade

2.15.5 HUMIDITY

Upto 95%

2.15.6 OUTPUT FREQUENCY

50 Hz +/- 0.01% Hz

2.15.7 WAVE FORM

Pure Sine Wave

2.15.8 TRANSIENT RESPONSE

+/- 1% maximum under following conditions:

a) Loss or Return of Input AC supply

b) 100% step load

2.15.9 RECOVERY TIME

To nominal voltage in less than 10 milli second.

2.15.10 EFFICIENCY (OVER ALL)

The Energy Efficenecy requirment of UPS system at 100 Load shall be vary from 91.9% to 93.8% or
more

2.15.11 LOAD POWER FACTOR

0.8 lag to unity as per ECBC-107 or Griha guidelines.

2.15.12 CREST FACTOR

Signature of Contractor Page 239 PWD-GoR

Greater than 3:1 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

2.15.13 SWITCH OVER TIME

Zero

2.15.14 NOISE

Less than 65 dB at 1 mtr.

2.15.15 SWITCHING SPEED

Minimum 2 KHZ

2.15.16 INDICATION

Mains ON/OFF, /Battery HIGH/LOW, Battery ON, Invertor ON/TRIP, O/P HIGH/LOW, Battery
HIGH/LOW, Alarm for Battery Discharge.

2.15.17 PROTECTION

Input - Over/Under voltage, Over Current.

Battery - Over/Under Voltage, Over Current, Battery Low Alarm/Trip.
Output - Over/Under Voltage, Over Current.
Output - Short Circuit Over Temperature DC Over Current

2.15.18 CONTROL CIRCUITORY

Microprocessor based control circuitory be provided and all indications will be digitally displayed using
microprocessor based software.

2.15.19 METERING

Digital display with multifunctional key panel indicate.

Output Voltage/Current
DC Voltage/Current
Output Frequency

2.15.20 COMMUNICATION PORT

RS 232

2.15.21 DIAGNOSIS & CONFIGURATION SOFTWARE

Compatible with Unix/Windows.

2.15.22 OUT LOOK

Compact size with aesthetically good look (specify the size and weight)

2.15.23 BATTERY

Lead Acid, S.M.F. for 30 minutes’ back-up under full load. Battery sizing calculations to be
submitted.

2.15.24 UPS FAILURE

During failure in the UPS equipment the static switch automatically transfers the A.C. load directly
to the AC. line in less than 1/4 cycle so that transfer does not affect critical equipment operation.

Signature of Contractor Page 240 PWD-GoR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications
2.15.25 HARMONIC DISTORTION OF WAVE FORM

Total harmonic distortion (THD) should be below 2% for linear load and below 3% for nonlinear
load.

2.15.26 MAINTENANCE BY PASS SWITCH

The portion of UPS module used to connect the alternator supply to critical load while electrically
isolating static switch and inverter for maintenance purpose.

2.15.27 BATTERY DISCONNECT SWITCH

The switch used to electrically isolate the storage batteries from UPS module.

2.15.28 STATIC TRANSFORMER SWITCH

The switch senses an inverter shutdown signal or degradation of inverter output item. It shall
automatically transfer the loads from one inverter to the alternative AC power without interruption.

2.15.29 RETRANSFER TO INVERTOR

The static transfer switch shall be capable of automatically retransferring the load back to inverter
after the inverter has returned to normal voltage and stabilized for period of time.

2.15.30 QUALITY ASSURANCE

The manufacturer shall have quality assurance program with check on incoming parts and final
products. A final test procedure for product shall include a check of all performance specifications
and a minimum 24 hour running.

2.15.31 INSTALLATION DRAWING

After the receipt of order a minimum two sets of installation drawings showing outline dimension,
weights and connections and a one line drawing of the UPS shall be sent to the purchaser to be
used in planning the installation of the system.

2.15.32 PRODUCT DOCUMENTATION

Manufacturer shall supply a comprehensive set of product documentation for:

1. Installation
2. Operation
3. Maintenance

This should include complete outline and external connection drawings and schematic and
physical wiring diagrams as well as parts list and parts layout down to the smallest components
level. It should include startup and service manuals with complete privation and remedial
maintenance and trouble showing instructions. This should include all ancillary equipment and
accessories.

2.15.33 TRAINING

It is important that at least -2 personnel who are to be responsible for operation and maintenance
of UPS be trained at the manufacturer site.

2.15.34 SPARE PARTS

The recommended spare parts for 5 years of maintenance are to be listed and should be quoted
along with main modules.

2.15.35 MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP

Signature of Contractor Page 241 PWD-GoR

1) Workmanship shall be first class in every respect. Volume 5 Technical Specifications

2) All material shall be new and of best commercial grade.

3) Brackets and securing hardware shall be electroplated with corrosion resistance material.

4) Internal wiring conductors shall be combined into cable or bundles and shall be tied
securely together and numbered or coded to correspond with documentation.

2.15.36 STORAGE BATTERY

The storage battery shall be furnished with racks connecting hardware and standard service
resistance material accessories. The battery shall be delivered charged and filled ready for
service.

2.15.37 SERVICE REPORT

Assigned field service report describing start-up and on site testing shall be furnished.

2.15.38 MAINTENANCE

If the battery is taken out of service for maintenance by manually opening battery disconnect
switch the UPS shall continue to function and meet all the performance criteria specified except.

2.15.39 INVERTOR EFFICIENCY

96% minimum

2.15.40 PROTECTION CLASS

IP – 20

End of Section – 03

3 MODE OF MEASUREMENT

The following measurement code shall apply to the Contract:

3.1 BUS DUCT:

a) Bus Duct shall be measured on linear basis in meters.

b) Bends, Expansion Joint etc. shall be measured along the centre line bus duct.

c) No extra price shall be paid on account of structural supports required for Bus Duct
Installation.

3.2 POWER AND CONTROLS CABLES:

1. All power cables / controls cables shall be measured on linear basis in meters.

3.3 CABLE TRAY WORK:

a) The cable trays shall be measured on unit length basis, along the center line of the
cable tray, including bends, reducers, tees, cross joints, etc, and paid for
accordingly.

3.4 STRUCTURAL SUPPORTS:

Signature of Contractor Page 242 PWD-GoR

 No extra price shall be paid on account of structural supports required for Electrical
Vol u m e 5 T echnic al Sp ecifications

Panel Installation etc.

3.5 PIPING WORK:

a) The length of piping accessories & fittings shall be measured along its centre line
in meters and no measurements for bends, elbows, tees etc. shall be made. All
such fittings / accessories shall be treated as part of the piping work.

b) Flanges shall not be measured, as they form part of piping work.

c) For thermometer wells & pressure gauge sockets no measurement shall be done
separately.

d) All kinds of supports, hangers etc shall be part of piping work & no extra
measurements shall be done.

e) No additional price for installation of purge & de-scaling valves as required at site
shall be paid.

3.6 INSULATION:
3.6.1 INSULATION OF EXHAUST PIPES:

i) Insulation of pipes shall be measured in terms of linear length of pipe for each size.

ii) For insulation of bends, elbows, tees etc. it shall be measured along with the
center line of insulation and shall be measured in meters or shall be measured in
sq. meter.

iii) Insulation of valves shall be separately accounted as per bill of quantities.

Note:- The items not specified above or not specified in BOQ & Specification but
technically required shall be part of that particular equipment / material.

End of Section – 04

Signature of Contractor Page 243 PWD-GoR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications
5.0 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS-LIFT WORK

GENERAL

The equipment and installation covered by these specifications shall conform to codes of practice
in force and highest standards of workmanship and materials. This work shall be done in
accordance with the provisions of the Local Lifts Authority rules and shall also conform to
requirements of local municipal by laws, and subsequent provisions, as also any state or local Act
in force and latest Indian Standard 14665 and all latest applicable BIS, NBC code and ‘CPWD
General Specifications for Electrical Works (Part III, Lifts & Escalators) 2003’ as amended up to
date.

The Entire electrical installation shall be done in accordance with the Indian Electricity Act 2003,
Indian Electricity Rules 1956 as amended to-date. The Electrical wiring shall strictly comply with
IS: 732 and latest applicable BIS and NBC code. The electrical works shall also conform to CPWD
General Specification for Electrical Work Part-I (Internal) 2013 as amended up to date.
The Contractor shall follow all Statutory Requirements as well as best trade practices in the
manufacture & installation of lifts. The Contractor shall arrange to obtain the statutory approval of
the Inspectorate of Lifts as may be required for commissioning of the lifts and handover for
operation after satisfactory tests.

DRAWINGS
Before commencing work, the Contractor shall prepare and submit all drawings for individual lifts
in required nos. necessary to show the general arrangement and details of lift installation,
electrical etc. These drawings must be approved by the Engineer-in-charge/Consultants before
installation and shall become part of the contract.
The Contractor shall, within 3(three) weeks of receipt of a Letter of award of contract, submit
4(four) copies of all working drawings showing pit, hoist way and machine room layouts clearly
indicating and specifying all connected structural, electrical and architectural works including
imposed structural static / dynamic loads (including breaking load on guides, reaction of buffers
on lift pits, reaction on support points in machine room, lift well etc.) and electrical ratings including
calculations for selection of kW rating of motor. Within 10 days of receipt of letter of award of
contract, the Contractor shall obtain from the Engineer-in-charge/Consultants all the information
he needs to prepare his drawings and shall have any interaction with the Engineer-in-
charge/Consultants to finalize all parameters and data for design. The Contractor will be
responsible for any discrepancies, errors and omissions in the drawings or particulars submitted
by him even if these have been approved by the Engineer-in-charge/Consultants. On approval of
these drawings (within 2 weeks of submission of full documentation), the Contractor shall submit
8(eight) copies of approved working drawings incorporating corrections / comments, if any, and
shall immediately commence work.
On completion of work, the contractor shall supply four sets of CD’s and 8 (eight) copies of the
detailed wiring diagram, ‘As built’ drawings and equipment operation & maintenance manuals and
original certificates from ‘Inspector of Lifts’ for all the lifts. Further, a copy of such detailed diagram
and a set of instructions for evacuation of passengers in case of breakdown of the lifts shall be
framed and installed in the respective machine room by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall carry out all the work strictly in accordance with drawings, details and
instructions of Engineer-in-charge/Consultants.

Works to be arranged
The following items shall be provided to the Lift Contractor under instructions of the Department
to suit the requirements of the lift Contractor.
i. Hoistways and pits of specified dimensions (within normal building tolerances). The lift
shall be MRL type as per architectureal drawings, Specific panel for Lift shall be in
contractor scope.

ii. Floor, wall and ceiling finishes in hoistways, pits including painting (except painting of
equipment and materials supplied by lift Contractor) and waterproofing, as well as doors
and windows in machine room.

Signature of Contractor Page 244 PWD-GoR

 iii. Cables from Panel Board through the hoistways terminating in andVionlucmleu5dTin
ecg
hniicn
ald
Spiv
ecid
ifiu
caa
tiol ns

Main Switches of required rating for 3 phase and single phase supply including necessary
earthing.

iv. Free 3 phase power supply for group testing and commissioning of lifts after erection is
completed.

v. Lighting installation within hoistways and pits as required by the lift Contractor including
1-phase main switch at machine room.

vi. Ventilation system of machine rooms with heavy duty exhaust fan in each machine room
as per the requirement of NBC / BIS codes.

vii. Providing of hoisting beam in the machine room for hoisting of equipment during erection
and to facilitate maintenance in future.

LIFTS CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES: Ancillary Works

i. All cabling, wiring and earthing from 3 - phase main DB in machine room to Lift
Contractor’s equipment.

ii. Sill tracks including sill supports, supporting protection at all landings.

iii. Screen guards, facia plates and other protection for installation.

iv. To carry out minor civil work, such as chipping & making openings in slabs, grouting of
foundation bolts in shaft, pit and machine room, modification and making rail bracket, hall
buttons indicators and laying of sills in positions. Or any other work required for smooth
operation/ commissioning of lifts. All chiselling and cutting of pockets and making good.

v. Ensuring safety against accidents including barricading all openings and caution signs.

vi. Scaffolding and other Tools & Tackles required for installation in the hoistway required for
erection of lifts.

vii. All other items necessary for satisfactory execution & completion of works, whether
specified or not.

viii. Power shall be provided at incoming of main DB for lifts. Main DB in the machine room
shall be provided by the lift contractor. From main DB to lifts, cables shall be in the scope
of lift contractor. However, lighting for machine room shall be done by others.

ix. Trap doors, floor gratings, steps / ladders and openings in machine rooms and ladders for
pits as required by the lifts Contractor. Contractor shall furnish the details of these items
in the layout drawing for lifts to submit after award of the job.

x. Temporary power supply connection(s) for erection work shall be arranged by the lift
Contractor.

SOUND REDUCTION
The Contractor shall provide necessary sound reduction materials, such as rubber pads/ anti
vibration pads of proper density to effectively isolate the machine from the machine beams and/or
flooring.
Noise level inside cars and in the machine room shall be maintained at minimum levels as laid
down in the relevant codes and in any case not more than specified under PERFORMANCE
PARAMETERS.

TRACTION MACHINE

Signature of Contractor Page 245 PWD-GoR

 The machine shall be worm geared traction type with motor (steel worm, Vborluomnez5eTecghneicaarl sSp,ecsiftie
cae
tiolns

sheave shaft & Ferro molybdenum sheave), electro-mechanical type of brake and driving sheave
mounted in proper alignment on a single heavy cast iron base or steel bedplate.
The worm shaft shall be fitted with roller bearings to take end thrust. The sheave shaft shall also
be fitted with roller bearings to ensure proper alignment. All shafts shall be provided with well-
designed keys.
Rotating parts shall be statically and dynamically balanced.
The drive sheave shall be designed with machined V-grooves to ensure adequate traction with
minimum wear on rope. All sheaves including deflector sheaves, where used, shall conform to I.
S. 14665 (Part 4 sections 3)
Adequate and dust – proof lubrication shall be provided for all bearings and worm gears.
The brake shall be suitably curved and provided with fire proof friction lining. The operation of
brake shall be smooth, gradual and with minimum noise. The brake shall be designed to be of
adequate size and strength to stop and hold the car at rest with rated load. The brake shall be
capable of operation automatically by various safety devices, current failure and by the normal
stopping of the car. The brake shall be released electrically. It shall also be possible to release
the brake manually so as to move the lift car in short stops. Suitable Brake release tools (total 3
nos.) shall be supplied and stored in the machine rooms.
For manual operation of lifts, up & down direction of the movement of the car shall be clearly
marked on the motor or traction machine. A warning plate in bold signal red colour to switch off
the mains supply before releasing the brake and operating the wheel shall be prominently
displayed.

HOIST MOTOR
The motor shall be suitable for 415 Volts +10% to –20%, 50 Hz. + 5%, 3 Phase A.C. Supply. The
motor must be designed for arduous lift duty, rapid reversals and constantly repeated starts &
stops as defined in the relevant codes of practice. All windings must be heavily insulated,
adequately impregnated for tropical climate and mechanically strengthened and must be
specifically designed to have a high starting torque and low starting current characteristics within
the limits acceptable to electricity supply co. requirements and I.E. Rules. The motor shall be
designed in such a way as to withstand occasional overloading above its rated capacity and shall
have overload protection. The motor shall have good speed regulation under different conditions
of load and shall be designed to give a noiseless and vibration-free operation. Insulation shall be
class F.

MOTOR CONTROL AND DRIVE

The lift motor shall be controlled by a variable voltage variable frequency (V.V.V.F.) micro-
processor control system which shall control and monitor every aspect of lift operation at all stages
of the car motion cycle on real time basis.
The A.C. V.V.V.F. drive system shall control A.C. voltage and frequency concurrently with the
hoist motor to regulate the lift’s actual performance to match closely the ideal speed pattern,
obtain maximum efficiency of operation and provide a very smooth ride.
Frequency shall range fully between zero and rated value.
The Controller shall be provided with a self-diagnostic programmed to keep downtime to a
minimum possible.
The controller shall intelligently adjust door times in response to car calls, hall calls and “Door
Open” button operation.
An Inspector’s changeover test switch and set of test buttons shall be provided in the controller.
Operation of the Inspector’s changeover switch shall make both the car and landing buttons
inoperative and permit the lift to be operated in either direction from machine room for test
purposes by pressing corresponding test buttons in the controller. It shall not, however, interfere
with the emergency stop switches inside the car or on the top of the car.

GUIDES AND FASTENINGS

i. Guide-rails for car and counterweight shall consist of machined mild steel Tee sections,
erected plumb, and securely fastened to the lift well framing by heavy steel brackets,
suitably spaced, to limit deflection of guide rails to 3 mm under normal working conditions.

Signature of Contractor Page 246 PWD-GoR

 ii. The guide-rails shall be of suitable section with ends tongued anVdolugmreo5oTvecehndic,al fSoprecm
ifiicn
atg
ions
matched joint and shall be connected with steel fish plates.

iii. Guide-rails shall cover the full height of the hoistway and pit, such that It shall be not be
possible for any of the car or counter weights shoes to run off the guides.

iv. Guides shall be designed to withstand the action of safety gear when stopping a counter
weight or fully loaded car.

v. The max. Deviation from true plumb and alignment of guide rails shall be 2 mm.

vi. All support framing shall be rigid and shall be designed to restrict displacement of the point
of support of brackets to 3 mm under normal working conditions.

vii. The whole guide rail installation, including expansion joints, shall be designed for a smooth
ride.

viii. The guide-rails shall be protected during storage and installation with a rust inhibiting
coating which shall be cleaned off on completion of installation.

ix. Guide-shoes shall be adjustable type & mounted so as to provide continuous contact with
guide rails under all conditions.

Guide shoes shall be provided at top and bottom of each side of car and counterweight and shall
be designed for quiet operation.
Additional guide shoes shall be provided on each side of buffer frame in case of oil buffers.
Each lift shall be equipped with roller guides for up and down travel. There shall not be any metal-
to-metal contact between Car and rail. Roller shall be mounted on ball bearings to provide quiet
operation and excellent ride quality. (It is not required in case the design varies however the ride
quality shall not be compromised for any other design).

SAFETY
In addition to other specifications, the lift shall be provided with safety devices as follows: -

i. Against overload

ii. Safety gear on car so that in the event of rope breaking or loosening, the car will be brought
to rest immediately by means of grips on the guides.

iii. The over speeding car shall be automatically brought to a gradual stop on guide rails and
power supply to the hoist motor shall be switched off.

iv. Over speed centrifugal governor operating the safety gear in case of over speeding of car
in the down direction.

v. Car gate lock so that in the event of car gate is opened when passengers are in the car,
the lift will be brought to rest.

vi. Over travel limit switches at top and bottom limits of travel to disconnect the power supply
and apply brakes to stop the car within a defined safe distance in case of over travel in
either direction

vii. Ultimate terminal switches to stop the car automatically within top & bottom clearances
independently of normal over travel limit switches but with buffers operative.

viii. Protective guards to counterweights in pit, rope sheaves and wherever required.

ix. Toe guard apron to the car platform.

CAR

Signature of Contractor Page 247 PWD-GoR

a. Cabin Size Volume 5 Technical Specifications

The internal clear dimensions of the cabin shall not be less than those specified in IS
14665-Part I, NBC & CPWD General specifications for electric work (Lifts). The car shall
be so mounted on the frame that vibration and noise transmitted to the passengers inside
is minimised.

b. Frame and Safety Device

The car frame shall consist of mild steel channel/structural steel top and bottom securely
riveted or bolted and substantially reinforced and braced so as to relieve the car enclosure
of all strains when the safety device comes into action due to over speed or when the
capacity loaded car is run on the buffer springs at normal speed.

The safety device mounted on the bottom members of the frame operated by a centrifugal
speed governor shall be arranged to bring the car to a gradual stop on the guide rails in
the event of excessive descending speed; and provision shall be made to shut off the
power supply to the motor.
c. Buffers

Substantial spring buffers (2 Nos.) shall be furnished and installed in the pit under the car
and counterweight. These buffers shall be mounted on RCC Pedestals in the pit. The car
buffer spring must be of correct design to sustain the car with capacity load without
damage should the car terminal limits become inoperative. The car buffers must be
located symmetrically with reference to centre of car.
The Contractor may alternatively offer oil type buffers. The plunger shall be mild steel,
designed for a very high factor of safety and accurately machined. A toughened rubber
bumper shall be fitted to the plunger top to cushion the impact of steel buffer plates
attached under the car and the counterweight. An oil gauge shall be provided to check the
oil level.
d. Counterweight

The lift shall be suitably counter-balanced for smooth and economical operation. Cast
iron weights shall be contained in a structural steel frame properly guided with suitable
guide shoes (minimum 4 Nos.). It shall be equal to the total weight of lift plus approx. 50%
of the contract load.
Substantial expanded metal counter-weight screen guard shall be furnished and installed
at the bottom of hoist way, as required by Lift Inspector.
e. Hoisting and Governor Ropes

Bright steel wire ropes with fibre cores suitable for Lift duty as per BIS Code shall be used
for hoisting ropes.
Not less than 3 independent suspension ropes shall be provided and designed to share
load equally by means of adjustable shackle rods with equalizer springs at each end of
hoisting ropes.
Each rope shall have adequate section to provide a minimum factor of safety of 4 based
on the max. Force on the rope.
Governor ropes shall be similar to hoisting ropes. Their ends shall be securely attached
to the car and to the safety gear. The governor ropes shall be tensioned by a weight loaded
device in the pit.
f. Enclosure
The car enclosure shall be as specified in technical data sheet. The cabin floor, roof and
walls shall be free of distortion and undue deflection as per IS 14665 – Part 4, Section 3.
g. Brakes
D.C. brakes will be spring-applied and electrically released. They shall be designed to
provide smooth stops under variable loads.
h. Doors

Provision shall be made for vertical and horizontal fine adjustment of doors as per the
specifications given in technical data sheet.

Signature of Contractor Page 248 PWD-GoR

 i. Door Operators Volume 5 Technical Specifications

The door operators shall be VVVF inverter controlled heavy duty A. C. motor, allowing
variable opening and closing speeds, and full synchronization of car and landing doors.
j. Travelling Cables

The traveling cables shall be multi-core with high conductivity stranded conductors
specifically designed for lift duty. The cables shall be provided with retaining straps and
individual cable clamps.
k. Emergency Lighting

A self-contained, non-maintained emergency light with a trickle boost charger shall be

provided.
l. Intercom
An Intercom system shall be provided between the car, machine room and Fire Console
room linked to EPABX.
m. Manual Cranking Facility

Manual cranking facility shall be provided in the machine room to facilitate evacuation of
passengers in case of power failure. The manual mode shall be in addition to automatic
car failure operation specified elsewhere.
n. Emergency Stop Switch

A stop switch in the machine room / top of car shall be provided for use by maintenance
crew to cancel all car and landing calls for a particular lift.
o. Maintenance Switch

On operation of the maintenance switch located on top of the car by the maintenance crew,
the car shall travel at slow speed not exceeding 0.85 m / sec by continuous operation of a
button
p. Landing Door Interlocks

Electrical interlocks shall be provided to ensure that the car does not operate unless all
doors are closed and unless the car reaches a landing zone.
q. Overload Indicator

An overload indicator with buzzer shall be provided in the cabin to indicate to the
passengers that the car will not start as it is overloaded.
r. Other Features
All features specified in the BIS/NBC/CPWD and in the enclosed technical specifications
shall be provided.
s. Lift for Disabled

All the Passengers lifts shall be suitable for use by disabled persons. The following
additional facilities shall be provided in this lift:
i. Full length handrails shall be provided on the rear and side wall panels.

ii. The door closing time shall be set for min. 5 seconds and the door closing speed shall not
exceed 0.25 m/sec.

iii. The “door open” and “door closed” announcements shall be audibly made in the car.

iv. Braile signs / buttons.

t. Operating Panels, Buttons & Switches

Main and secondary car operating panels, buttons and switches shall be located on one
of the two front wall panels next to the car door and as specified in the Schedule of lifts &
as per approved G.A. drawings.
All buttons and switches shall be clearly legible with fade-proof text and figures, and shall
be easily accessible, (especially for disabled persons in the lift designated for them).

Signature of Contractor Page 249 PWD-GoR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

ELECTRIC WIRING
Necessary insulated wiring to connect all parts of the equipment shall be furnished and installed.
Insulated wiring shall be flame retardant and moisture resistant and shall be run in M.S. conduits.
All cables shall be flame – retardant with copper conductors.

WORKS TESTS
The following tests shall be carried out at Works.

a. High voltage works tests of equipment which is not already tested in accordance with
appropriate IS codes.

b. Buffer test.

Signature of Contractor Page 250 PWD-GoR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications
TESTS ON COMPLETION
The following tests shall be carried out to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge.
i. Insulation resistance and earth test for all electrical apparatus.
ii. Continuous operation of the lift under full load conditions and simulated starts and
stops (150 nos. per hour each) for one hour at the end of which time the service
temperature of the motor and the operating coils shall be tested. This shall be as
per B.I.S. specification.
iii. The car shall be loaded until the weight on the rope is twice the combined weight
of the car and the specified load. The load must be carried on for about 30 minutes,
without any sign of weakness, temporary set or permanent elongation of the
suspension rope strands.
iv. The following items shall be tested:
a. Levelling accuracy at each landing in conditions of fully loaded and empty car.

b. No load current and voltage readings both on ‘Up’ and ‘Down’ Circuits.

c. Full load current and voltage readings both on ‘Up’ and ‘Down’ Circuits.

d. One and quarter load current and voltage readings both on ‘Up and ‘Down’
Circuits.

e. Stalling current and voltage and time taken to operate overload.

f. Overload protection.

g. Gate sequence relays, if provided and installed.

h. Car and landing door interlocks.

i. Collective control and priority sequences, if installed.

j. Safety gear mechanism for car and counterweight with fully loaded car and
also with only 68 kg load.

k. Speeds on Up and Down travel with full load, half load and empty car.

l. Door contacts.

m. Final terminal stopping device.

n. Normal terminal stopping device.

o. Car and counterweight buffers with contract load and contract speed.

p. Operation of controllers.

q. Manual operation of lift at mid-way travel.

r. Emergency operation.

u. Tests on completion shall also be performed to the satisfaction of Inspector of Lifts and a
certificate will be obtained from the ‘Lift Inspector ‘by the contractor.

STATUTORY APPROVALS
All statutory approvals from commencement to commissioning of lifts shall be obtained by the
Contractor from the Inspector of Lifts and / or other authorities. However, the client will provide all
necessary assistance for providing documents, drawings and certificates pertaining to other
contractors, if required.
The contractor shall pay necessary fees in connection with the approval of installation of lifts.

Signature of Contractor Page 251 PWD-GoR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

FEATURES REQUIRED FOR VVVF LIFTS

a. Group / Independent / Attendant Operation

It shall be possible to group specified cars in a group wherever required with dynamic
disposition of cars as required by the traffic pattern. A smart car dispatching system with ring
communication shall be provided for optimum passenger comfort and lift performance under
all traffic conditions. Any defective car shall be automatically eliminated from the group.
Each car shall be provided with a key switch for independent operation housed in a service
cabinet. In this mode, the lift shall respond only to car calls. Hall calls will not be registered.
It should be possible for an attendant to operate any car.
b. Fireman’s Switch

A fireman’s toggle switch shall be provided in a break glass for the specified lift at ground
floor to enable firemen to bring the lift non-stop to ground floor from any location and to cancel
hall calls until the car is operated on attendant control.
c. Emergency Power Operation

In case of power failure, standby power equipment shall enable lifts to reach a pre-
determined floor, in a pre-determined sequence, and then permit operation of one or more
lifts on emergency power.
A trickling battery shall be provided to supply power to light fixtures, fan, alarm and intercom.

d. Profile Generator

A profile generator or similar device shall be provided to use the car at an optimum speed
level and to improve leveling accuracy.
e. Predictive Car Selection

Once a hall call is registered, a dynamic car algorithm shall transfer the call to an optimally
selected car to provide the maximum traffic efficiency.
f. Home Landing Facility

A car shall return to a pre-determined landing after the last call is answered.
g. Door Safety

Multi-beam infrared / ultrasonic electronics curtains shall be provided to scan the doorway
and reverse the door closing in case of any obstruction.

h. Double Door Operation

If both up and down calls are registered at a hall which is the last registering hall in the
direction of the car, the lift shall travel to that hall and open / close the doors. After this, the
car shall reverse its travel and shall open / close the doors again unless no car calls are
registered at that floor.
i. Nudging Door Operation

When the doors remain open for more than a predetermined period, a buzzer shall sound
and the door shall close automatically. The door sensing device shall be rendered inoperative
but the Door Open button and the safety shoe shall remain operative.
j. Selective floor Service

Programming for selective floors services shall be software driven.

k. Manual Cranking & Slow speed Travel

A manual cranking facility shall be provided.

Slow speed operation shall be possible from machine room and car top.
l. Auto Fan Off

In case no calls are registered for a pre-set time, the cabin fan shall be automatically switched
off.

Signature of Contractor Page 252 PWD-GoR

m. Automatic Rescue Device Volume 5 Technical Specifications

In case of mains power failure and Lift control system failure, the Lift’s own rechargeable and
maintenance free battery power shall move the car to the nearest floor and the door shall
open automatically for automatic rescue of passengers. A battery run-down indicator shall
be provided.

PERFORMANCE PARAMETERS
The following parameters shall be achieved in the installation:
* Jerk level 0.9 – 1.5 m/s3
* Noise level in car 58 dB
* Noise level at 1 M in machine room 60 dB
* Acceleration rate 0.6 – 1.0 m/s2 (adjustable)
* Max. car vibration 20 milli gals.

MAINTENANCE DURING DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD

Comprehensive maintenance during Defects Liability Period inclusive of periodic servicing,
prompt attention to client complaint, prompt rectification of all malfunctions and equipment
failures, replacement of defective equipment / parts, replacement of light fittings, lubrication
including lubricants, maintaining correct alignment and leveling of cars and ensuring smooth
running, starts and stops etc. all complete to the client satisfaction shall be done.

a. LIGHTING PROTECTION AND EARTHING

Lightning Protection Devices as per IEC 62305 & NBC-2016

Standards:
IEC 62305- 2 – Risk Management
IEC 62305-3 – Protection against Lightning.
IS/IEC 62305 - Protection Against Lightning Part 2 Risk Management.
IS 2309 – Code of Practice for the protection of Building.
IEC 62561 -2 & 7 – Earthing and Bonding.
Lightning Protection:
This part of IEC 62305 provides the requirements for protection of a structure against
physicaldamage by means of a lightning protection system (LPS), and for protection against injury
toliving beings due to touch and step voltages in the vicinity of an LPS.

Lightning is one of the most devastating natural phenomena. There are many discharges during
lightning storms and some of them can evenreach hundreds of kilo amperes. The electrical
discharges are a great hazard to people, animal, buildings and electronic equipment’s. Until now,
there is no device that can prevent lightning formation or lightning strikes. However, it is possible
to create a path (divert) for the lightningdischarge to the ground which will minimise the damage
to the environment through a well-designed Lightning Protection System (LPS). Thepurpose of a
lightning protection system is to protect buildings from direct lightning strikes and possible fire or
from the consequences oflightning currents (non-igniting flash). If national regulations such as
building regulations, special regulations or special directives require lightningprotection
measures, they must be implemented. If these regulations do not specify a class of LPS, a
lightning protection system which meetsthe requirements of class of LPS III according to IEC
62305-3 (EN 62305-3) is recommended as a minimum. In principle, a risk analysis, which
isdescribed in the IEC 62305-2 (EN 62305-2) standard (see chapter 3.2.1), should be performed
for an overall assessment.
Signature of Contractor Page 253 PWD-GoR
 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

An external LPS is intended to:

a) intercept a lightning flash to the structure (with an air-termination system);
b) conduct the lightning current safely towards earth (using a down-conductor system);
c) disperse the lightning current into the earth (using an earth-termination system).
An internal LPS prevents dangerous sparking within the structure using either
equipotentialbonding or a separation distance (and hence electrical insulation) between the
external LPScomponents and other electrically conducting elements internal to thestructure.

Lightning Current & Protection levels.

In order to define lightning as a source of interference, lightning protection levels I to IV are laid
down. Each lightning protection level requires aset of
• maximum values (dimensioning criteria used to design lightning protection components to meet
the demands expected to be made of them).
• minimum values (interception criteria necessary to be able to determine the areas with sufficient
protection against direct lightning strikes(radius of rolling sphere).

Maximum value of rolling sphere radius, mesh size and protection angle corresponding
to the class of LPS

Protection Method
Class of LPS Rolling Sphere Mesh size W Protection angle α
Radius r m m
I 20 5x5 As per figure below
II 30 10 x 10
III 45 15 x 15
IV 60 20 x 20

Signature of Contractor Page 254 PWD-GoR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

LPL levelsbasic design consideration:

Class Lightning current Interceptio Rolling sphe Mesh size Down
of n radius (m) (m) Conductor
LPS MINIMUM MAXIMU probability Spacing
M
1 3 kA 200 kA 98% 20 5x5 10
2 5 kA 150 kA 95% 30 10 x 10 10
3 10 kA 100 kA 88% 45 15 x 15 15
4 16 kA 100 kA 81% 60 20 x 20 20

Protection Class for the structure as per LPL (Lightning Protection Level)

Application LPL*
Computer Data Centres, Military Applications, Nuclear Power Stations, High I
raise Hotels/Hospitals, airports, essential services such as telecom towers
EX-Zones in the industry and chemical sector, Low raise Hospitals & Hotels, fuel II
retail outlets, gas station, compressor station etc.
Schools, Banks, Residential Buildings, Temple, Churches, Mosques III or IV

Air Terminal System:

An air-termination system shall be installed to protect the upper part of tall structures from direct
lightning strike([Link] the topmost 20 % of the height of the structure) and the equipment
installed on it.
for positioning air-termination systems on roofs shall also apply to those upper partsof
structures.
In addition, for structures taller than 120 m, all parts which may be endangered above 120 m
should be protected.

Materiel Description: For Mesh (Horizontal) arrangement 25X3MM SS(304) strip.

For Vertical Air terminal: 16 mm dia, 10 mm dia APS make solid SS(304) rod with base plate
150X150X6mm.

Connectors & Joints:

Materiel details Connector Type

SS to SS SS
SS to Steel SS

Air Terminal Holder:

For Concrete / RCC Roof: The fixing of roof conductor holder for25X3MM SS strip at every 1
meter and shall made of gun metal APS make with DMC (Draught mould compound) min height
of 50 mm. The Holder can be fixed with glue and screw.
For Metal shed: The fixing of roof conductor 25X3MM SS strip at every 1 meter and shall made
of gun metal with DMC (Draught mould compound) min height of 50 mm. The Holder can be fixed
with heavy duty glue.

If any structure like AC panel, Vent, ducts etc need to protect from Vertical Air Terminal after
calculation of separation distance.

Down Conductor:
In order to reduce the probability of damage due to lightning current flowing in the LPS,
thedown-conductors shall be arranged in such a way that from the point of strike to earth:

Signature of Contractor Page 255 PWD-GoR

a) several parallel current paths exist; Volume 5 Technical Specifications
b) the length of the current paths is kept to a minimum;
c) equipotential bonding to conducting parts of the structure is performed according to the
requirements.

Typical value of the distance between down- conductor and between ring conductors
according to the class of LPS

Class of LPS Typical distance

m
I 10
II 10
III 15
IV 20

Down Conductor Holder:

For Concrete wall: The fixing of down conductor holder for 25X3MM SS. strip at every 1 meter.
The Holder can be fixed with screw and fastener.

Test Joint:
At the connection of the earth termination, a test joint should be fitted on each down conductor,
except in the case of natural down-conductors combined with foundation earth electrodes.
For measuring purposes, the joint shall be capable of being opened with the aid of a tool. In
normal use it shall remain closed. The test joint shall be in IP 65 rated box and copper bus bar
of 25 x 3 x 150 mm.

Earthing arrangement:
An earthing system or grounding system connects specific parts of that installation with the
Earth's conductive surface for safety and functional purposes.

For earth-termination systems, two basic types of earth electrode arrangements apply.

Type A arrangement:
This type of arrangement comprises horizontal or vertical earth electrodes installed outside
the structure to be protected connected to each [Link] type A arrangements, the total
number of earth electrodes shall be not less than two.

Type B arrangement

This type of arrangement comprises either a ring conductor external to the structure to
beProtected, in contact with the soil for at least 80 % of its total length, or a foundation earth
electrode. Such earth electrodes may also be meshed.

Materiel used for Type A and B:

Earthing Rod: JKChemrode Low carbon high tensile copper bonded ground rod ul listed & CPRI
Tested of dia25.4 mm, length 3000 mm with pure copper 99.9 % coating of 250 micron as per
IEC 62561 – 2. CPRI Tested for 50 KA fault current.
JK Reslow Earth Enhance Material as per IEC 62561 – 7 is used along with the ground rod to
reduce earth resistance value.

Lightning Counter: At least two lightning strike counters need to installed in two down
conductors as per IEC 62561. The Counter shall have facility to record 7 digitsLSR2.

Class B/Class I (according to IEC 61643)

3 numbers of Hakel make lightning arrester for the connection between Phase and Neutral and
one number of lightning arrester between Neutral and Earth with the following ratings: (1 no for
each phase)

Parameters Specifications

Signature of Contractor Page 256 PWD-GoR

 Sl. Line to Neutral (3 NeutrVaollutmoe 5ETaecrhth
nic(a1
l Spe cifications

No nos) no)
1. Type Encapsulated/Non-exhausting Spark
Gap
2. Nominal Voltage, Un 230V, 50/60 Hz
3. Over Voltage withstanding capacity 320 V
4. Lightning Impulse Current 50 KA(10/350 sec) 100 KA(10/350
sec)
5. Voltage Protection Level, Up < 1.3 KV
6. Response Time < 100 nano seconds
7. Operating temperature range -40C to +85C
8. Mounting on Din Rail
9 LED Indication
10 Remote Function No/Nc
11 Degree of Protection IP 20
OEM shall verify the Lighting protection system after completion.

advance Chemical Gel Earthing System for all services.

GI Earthing (Dual Pipe Technology)

Advance maintenance free Chemical Gel GI Earthing of Dual Pipe Technology (GI) of 3mtr long
80 mm dia of outer shell with the 50mm dia of inner shell of galvanized CHEMRODE filled with
highly conducting metallic compounds with the permanent sealing's at both the ends with the
lead terminal of 50x10mm size at the top along with 50 Kgs of Earthing Enhancement
compound mixture of Resistance Lowering Grounding Minerals. The loss on ignition by mass of
the chemical compound shall be less than 22%. The chemical compound should be tested and
certified by any International accredited and BIS (Bureau of Indian Standards) accredited
laboratory. The CHEMRODE shall be duly tested & certified by CPRI (Central Power Research
Institute), Govt of India for a minimum short circuit current of 30 KA rms 60 KA peak. The
chemical earth electrode manufacturer shall be an ISO 9001 & ISO 14001 certified organization.
The Earth pit should be covered with heavy duty polyplastic weather proof chamber cover. earth
pit chamber cover should be tested & certified for 9-ton load bearing capacity from central
Government lab.

Copper Earthing
Advance maintenance free Chemical Gel Earthing (Copper) of 3mtr long 80mm dia
CHEMRODE filled with highly conducting metallic compounds with the permanent sealing at
both the ends with compressed at the top along with 50 Kgs of Earthing Enhancement
compound mixture of Resistance Lowering Grounding Minerals. The loss on ignition by mass of
the chemical compound shall be less than 22%. The chemical compound should be tested and
certified by any International accredited and BIS (Bureau of Indian Standards) accredited
laboratory. The chemical earth electrode manufacturer shall be an ISO 9001:2015 & ISO
14001:2015 certified organization. The Earth pit should be covered with heavy duty polyplastic
weather proof chamber.

Copper Bonded Rod

Advance chemical gel Earthing system for the proper dissipation of fault / leakage current to the
ground and ensure the continuous electrical connectivity and proper functioning to the electrical
system. The earth rod shall be of UL listed & CPRI tested 3 meter long 25.4 mm dia 250 microns
copper bonded steel rod with the connecting clamp (ss - rod to tape). The UL listed copper bonded
rod also should be tested &certified from CPRI for a short circuit current of 50 KA or more. The UL
listing shall be punched / engraved on the rod for the physical verification at site. The engravings
shall contain the following details - UL Control number, Dimension details of the rod, Product model
number & UL certificate reference number as per detailed technical specification attached. To ensure
the electrical conductivity, 50 Kgs (per pit) or more resistance grounding minerals per earth pit / earth
rod shall be used along with the copper bonded rod. As per IEEE 80-2013 (Clause 14.5 d), the
grounding minerals shall be tested & certified for the resistivity of less than 0.12 ohm-mtr. The

Signature of Contractor Page 257 PWD-GoR

 grounding minerals should be ROHS certified to ensure it does not pollute Vth e ground water.
olu me 5 Te chnical S pe c ifications

Earthing Strip shall shall be of same make of earthing material.

LIGHTING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

STANDARDS
The Lighting Management System(LMS) and associated equipment including HMI, photocells,
timers, astronomical time clocks, etc., shall comply with the latest applicable IEC / IS standards.
The control system shall be designed and manufactured to comply with the CE Standard. The
KNX standard has been built on the OSI-based EIB communication stack extended with
the physical layers, configuration modes and application experience of BatiBUS and EHS.
KNX installations can use several physical communication media:
 Twisted pair wiring (inherited from the EIB standard. (The before
inherited BatiBUS communication medium (TP0) is no longer part of the KNX
Specifications.)
 Power-line networking (inherited from EIB standard. (The before
inherited EHS communication medium (PL132) is no longer part of the KNX
Specifications.)
 Radio (KNX-RF)
 IP (also referred to as EIBnet/IP or KNXnet/IP)
KNX is not based on a specific hardware platform and a network can be controlled by anything
from an 8-bit microcontroller to a PC, according to the demands of a particular building. The
most common form of installation is over twisted pair medium.
KNX is an approved standard by the following organisations,
 International standard (ISO/IEC 14543-3)
 European standard (CENELEC EN 50090 and CEN EN 13321-1)
 US standard (ANSI/ASHRAE 135)
 China Guobiao (GB/T 20965)
It is administered by the KNX Association cvba, a non-profit organisation governed by Belgian
law which was formed in 1999. The KNX Association had 500 registered hardware and software
vendor members from 45 nations as at 1 July 2021. It had partnership agreements with 100,000
installer companies in 172 countries and more than 500 registered training centres. This is a
royalty-free open standard and thus access to the KNX specifications is unrestricted.

General

Building Control technology as provided by KNX is a specialized form of automated

process control, dedicated to the needs of home and building applications. One premise
for KNX is to furnish a radically decentralized, distributed approach; hence the term
network. The KNX Device Network results from the formal merger of the 3 leading
systems for Home and Building Automation (EIB, EHS and BatiBus) into the specification
of the new KNX Association. The common specification of the “KNX” system provides,
besides powerful runtime characteristics, an enhanced “toolkit” of services and
mechanisms for network management. On the KNX Device Network, all the devices
come to life to form distributed applications in the true sense of the word. Even on the
level of the applications themselves, tight interaction is possible, wherever there is a need

Signature of Contractor Page 258 PWD-GoR

or benefit. All march to the beat of powerful Interworking models with sVtaolnumdea5rTdeiczhenid
cal Specifications

Datapoint Types and “Functional Block” objects, modelling logical device channels. The
mainstay of S-("System”) Mode is the centralized free binding and parameterization
(typically with the PC-based ETS tool). It is joined by E (“Easy”)-Mode device profiles,
which can be configured according to a structured binding principle, through simple
manipulations – without the need for a PC tool. These configuration modes share
common run-time Interworking, allowing the creation of a comprehensive and multi-
domain home and building communication system. The available Twisted Pair and
Powerline communication media are completed with Radio Frequency (868 MHz band).
KNX explicitly encompasses a methodology and PC tools for Project Engineering, i.e. for
linking a series of individual devices into a functioning installation and integrating different
KNX media and configuration modes. This is embodied in the vendor-independent
Engineering Tool Software (ETS) suites for Windows. In contrast to the “one size fits all”
creed, the KNX system is entirely independent of any specific microprocessor platform or
even architecture. Depending on the profile chosen by the manufacturer, he can select
any suitable industry-standard chip, or opt for available KNX OEM solutions like Bus
Coupling Units, BIM’s, chip sets etc. Some KNX profiles allow a tiny system footprint (say
< 5 kb), and easily run on an 8-bit processor. Other implementations use 16- or 32 bit
processors or even PC’s in the full sense of the word. Through all of the above, KNX
Device Networks may be flexibly adapted to present an optimal solution for each
application domain and installation. Furthermore, they have also the capability to be
inserted in a “Service Network” environment (usually based on broadband networks
running IP, the Internet Protocol), to further amplify and leverage the benefits of our
intelligent home, office or business environment. Joining all these requirements into one
common, streamlined system – fulfilling stringent compatibility requirements with a large
installed base – is no mean feat. The next section summarizes the essential bricks KNX
uses to accomplish all this, while further sections zoom in more closely on some
distinctive features and characteristics of the KNX system.
A computerized networked lighting control system shall be provided using the operator
workstation as the head end. The operator workstation shall enable management and
monitoring of the lighting and emergency lighting control and test systems, while project
specific graphics display active status of luminaires against a background building
layouts. The software shall operate within the latest Windows NT environment. The
lighting management system (LMS) shall be compatible for further integration with the
Building management system(BMS).

The system software and hardware shall be designed, tested, manufactured and
warranted by a single manufacturer. The control shall be workable in all the climatic
conditions and shall be designed and tested to withstand the EMC as per thestandards.

The lighting control system shall include but not limited to the following:

 Floor controller in electrical risers

 Ceiling mountedsensors;

 Photocells;

 ELVswitches;

 Ethernet Cable between Ethernet Modules and already existing

LAN network.

 Twisted pair cable between floor controllers, and other items,

accessories, hardware, software etc., as required for a complete
stand-alone lighting control and monitoring system.

 The lighting control system shall be capable of working with an

array of differing lampsources.

Type of Lighting Control

Signature of Contractor Page 259 PWD-GoR

The LMS workstation shall take control of the whole building lighting as a Vsota
lun
med5-T
aelcohn e Specifications
nical

system and shall interface the same to the BMS workstation in the Terminal Control
Centre which will provide the mechanism for manually over-riding lighting states, i.e.
manual intervention at the BMS workstation will cause the BMS to send instructions to
the lighting control system, which will then implement them.
The system shall possess power failure memory such that if power is interrupted and
subsequently returned, lights will automatically return to same levels prior to power
interruption.

However, various functions within the terminal require that staff have the ability to control
certain lighting equipment locally which will correspond to different lighting scenes within
the local zone of that area.

Cleaning and maintenance staff may require local over-ride in order to carry out their
duties. The Lighting Management System must be able to provide such local over- ride
through the provision of switch plates, key switches, interfaces to security systems, and
other such triggers.
Detailed engineering of the system shall be carried out by the vendor.

Software Control and Monitoring Functions

These software functions will be executed by Building Management Systems which

needs to have all the feature mentioned.

The software shall allow full management control and monitoring of the lighting and
emergency lighting systems including:

 Calendar timing schedule.

 Addressing of luminaries’.
 Time and date
 Naming of scenes, Loads and controllers.
 Allocation of zone / cost centers within a building.
 Weekly reports detailing kW hours per zone /department.
 Active status of luminaries.
 Run time data (the cumulative number of hours luminaries
have been in operation).
 Recommend re-lamping schedules based upon a comparison
of actual lamp usage to the manufactures recommended lamp
life.
 Software enabling local switching arrangements to be easily
reconfigured.
 Facility to test emergency lighting on each floor and to
schedule emergency tests at regula rintervals.
 Facility to test and monitor central battery systems including
static inverters and associated DC battery systems.
 Manual control and override
 Monitor and control scene settings, zone intensities.
 Password protection with various levels of access.
 Software shall be offered in standard separate modules. Single
bundled or custom software is not acceptable.
 Allow user in real time to monitor and control all aspects of the system
 Web-browser based Inputs to the lighting control system will
come in various forms:
 Local over-rides by means of button panels / key switches /
presence detectors. These input units are to be supplied as part
of the lighting control system.
 Over-rides from the Terminal Control Centre workstation.

Signature of Contractor Page 260 PWD-GoR

  Externally mounted photocell units, which will triggVeorlumceh5aTnecghe
nicsal Specifications

according to daylight level, and which will be referred to so as to

ascertain appropriate scenes when reacting to other inputs.

 Direct signals from other emergency /fire alarm systems.

Central Automatic Control Functions

Central automatic commands are to be generated by a calendar software program. The

calendar program enables different switching and scene regimes to be allocated for
different times of the day or year and programming of weekend and special event
planning. Timing software shall include as standard an astronomical time clock.

The system shall be capable of providing a load shedding facility such that each luminary
circuit can be designated an essential (operable during loss of mains) or nonessential
(held off).

Scene’s reflecting time of day and daylight in zones can be automatically controlled via
the central commands.
The system shall be capable of providing corridor linking linked to occupation of adjoining
spaces and is held on while associated areas are in use.

The system shall provide complete daylight linking to enable energy savings to be
achieved when adequate daylight is provided.

The lighting control system shall record the numbers of hours run by each switchable
group of lighting; this information will be used for monitoring lamp life and producing
planned maintenance schedules.

A global input from a number of photoelectric cells forming part of the general lighting
shall be used to operate the general lighting installations, the external lighting
installations.

The layout of the buildings shall be shown on the workstation graphics in plan form and
shall show the major components of the general lighting system. Navigation buttons/icons
shall allow the lighting control zones of the center to be displayed at larger scales and
give control of individual lighting circuits.
The system shall be capable of producing planned maintenance schedules. The system
shall provide a management tool for monitoring status and historical performance of the
sub-project and load center.

Logical Grouping / patching requirements

In order to simplify programming and maintenance of lighting control, the system should
allow for the patching of physical lighting circuits/luminaries’ into logical groups in
software. The scale of this installation is such that it is not a requirement for each luminary
or physical circuit to require individual programming or addressing.

Luminaries and circuits must be patchable into different logical areas / zones. Each zone
must then be capable of independent scene-setting.

Scene-setting requirements

The majority of scene-setting requirements relate to daylight tracking (see below), but in
some areas , there is a requirement to utilize different lighting scenes at different times
of day. This condition relates generally to passenger- occupied areas by day and by night.
Outside hours of occupation, scene-set requirements must accommodate suitable
scenes for cleaning and security.

Daylight Tracking Requirements

Signature of Contractor Page 261 PWD-GoR

In order to balance artificial and natural light levels so as to save energy anVdolupmreo5vTid ea
echni cal Specifications

high-quality experience, the lighting design requires complex daylight tracking. The
lighting control system must be able to monitor external daylight levels via roof-mounted
photocells, and to respond by changing lighting scenes at pre-determined daylight levels.
Furthermore, this function will not be fulfilled by a simple on/off photocell switch – different
artificial lighting states need to be selected at different light levels, with the system
recognizing, say, 4 different ranges of brightness. This daylight monitoring must work in
conjunction with time-based scene selection
With respect to the check-in and departures concourse and given the extensive glazing
of facades and roof lights, alongside the north-south orientation of the buildings, it is also
important to have the system monitor several separate photocells and to react intelligently
to the sun’s daily path.

System Graphic Topology

The system shall allow users to pick on the workstation graphics illustrating areas of the
building to assess the lighting control status. The software shall support a history log,
used for data trending and audits, time schedule programs, logic controller, ability to
customize screens and graphics, features a various levels of security and authorization
for access and control functions and provides an Internet connection for remote
connection

Pop-up data windows shall illustrate a stream of data on the operation of the luminary
including:
 Time and date
 Actual hours run.
 Lamp output healthy.
 Address/location
 Scene and circuit control, group control
 Integration of daylight linking and simulation with scene control.
 Allocation of cost centre.

Further pop-up windows active from icons shall illustrate historical trending,
recommended re-lamping schedules, weekly reports detailing KW hours per location as
determined by the operator.

The workstation screen displays shall be prepared in conjunction with the BMS hierarchy
of windows.

During design development the workstation graphics shall be presented in the form of a
story book complete with written and pictorial views of all screens, together with a flow
diagram showing the links to othersystems.

All graphics 'pages' shall have a standard format and shall be schematic in presentation.
The preferred format shall be as shown in the schedules and:

 Page title, logo, and active clock - top 10% of the page

 Active window (display graphics) showing real time

 Read out of values - upper centre 60% of pages.

 Alarm status box showing a scrolling list of alarms

 Lower center 20% of page

 Navigation buttons - bottom 10% of page

An alarm 'page' shall be included to which shall allow access and reading of previous
alarms, storing alarms to a spreadsheet (e.g. Excel), or removing alarms. All alarms shall

Signature of Contractor Page 262 PWD-GoR

time out after five minutes if no keyboard activity is sensed, returning the diVsoplulay to the
me 5 T ech nical Specifications

main title 'page'.

The system shall include full icon to enable the operator to retrieve help topic functions
including full operating and maintenance instructions. Select icons on their graphic
screen to access the lighting management web page and which can switch lighting or
select a dimming level in their area by clicking the relevant button on or sliding bar the
web page.

1.1.1- KNX IP Router

The device is for Connecting KNX IP and KNX TP. Integration KNX IP / Ethernet with TP Bus
system Supporting KNXnet / IP routing and tunneling functions
Indicated operation and filtering statuses by LEDs Connecting KNX IP devices by a standard
RJ45 connector directly and also via Ethernet networks. A rail-mounted device for installation in
distribution boards on 35 mm DIN rails
Integrated bootloader function for remote firmware updates via IP / Ethernet Temporary
deactivation of filtering by a single button press (Eases-commissioning because of short-time
access to other lines.) No need for an additional power supply.

1.1.2- KNX AREA / LINE COUPLER

These devices will be responsible to establish a data link between two KNX lines and ensures
electrical separation between these lines. It can also be used as backbone coupler, or amplifier.

As a Line coupler connecting a line with a main line, alternatively it should be able to do so with
or without filter function.

As a Backbone coupler it shall connect a main line with a backbone line, & alternatively with or
without filter function.

As a Amplifier the device shall used for repetition of telegrams on a line, no filter function.

1.1.3 – KNX Dali Gateway Tunable White

The KNX DALI Gateway shall form an interface between a KNX installation and a digital DALI
(Digital Addressable Lighting Interface) lighting system. The DALI Gateway shall allow the
switching and dimming of a maximum of 64 lights with a DALI operating device (e.g. electronic
ballast). It shall work on both AC – 110V to 240V 50/60Hz or DC 110V to 240V, with a maximum
power consumption of 6W. It should allow up to 6 different addressing types which will be
enable to address group-orientated and individually-address control of DALI lights via KNX
telegrams. Depending on the configuration, it shall support up to 32 independent DALI groups
for group addressing. For alternative control, this device shall also be supplemented with 64
individually-addressable DALI device channels. As when necessary the device shall also allow
master control of all connected DALI components through broadcast.

DALI emergency lighting systems: The DALI Gateway shall be fully integrated into DALI
emergency lighting systems. It shall allow interference-free operation of operating devices,
general lighting systems and emergency lighting operating devices of the same DALI system.
The device shall also be able to integrate standard DALI operating devices for lighting control
according to IEC 62386-101 and IEC 62386-102 into centrally-supplied emergency lighting
systems as an emergency light.

Color temperature control (DALI Device Type 8): The device shall be able to support the control
of DALI operating devices of DALI Device Type 8 in the specific version "Tunable White (TW)"in
accordance with IEC 62386-209. By adhering to this, it shall be possible to control the color
temperature of a lamp by means of suitable DALI operating devices and luminaries. The
Gateway shall also allow the color temperature control via relative or absolute dimming as well

Signature of Contractor Page 263 PWD-GoR

as via scenes and effects. The color temperature control shall be largely indeVpoleumned5eTnecthnoicfalthe
Sp ecifications

brightness control and luminaries used.

1.1.4 – KNX Universal Dimmer - 2 GANG 300W, 4 GANG 250W

The device used for switching and dimming of lighting, mounting on DIN rail according to EN
60715 in distribution boxes. The dimmer shall possesses electronic over temperature and short-
circuit protection. It shall also allow the settings "LED trailing edge phase control" and "LED
leading edge phase control through the software and also it should be able to learn the type of
fixture if it’s in self learning mode. The Universal Dimmer module shall also support to combine
the outputs for dimming greater lamp loads.

1.1.5- 1-10V CONTROL UNIT 4 GANG

This device shall allow switching and brightness setting for lamps with operating devices with 1-
10-V interface. It shall be possible to manually switching of the relays which is independent of
the bus supply. It shall also have a flexibility of assigning of control inputs to switching outputs
e.g. to control RGBW lamps. The device shall allow the switching outputs, which can be used as
switching actuator & also have the ability to receive the feedback of switching state and
brightness value, operating hours counter along with Burn-in function for fluorescent lamps. The
Time functions shall be made available ie: switch-on delay, switch-off delay, staircase lighting
timer with run-on time. Device shall be fully integrated/ configured into scene function with the
help of ETS software. The device shall have a control current per output of max.100 mA. &
supports high inrush current of 600A for 150 μs& 300A for 600 μs

1.2.4- KNX POWER SUPPLY UNIT 320 mA / 640 mA -

The power supply unit KNX 320 mA / 640 mA shall be with an integrated choke, which supplies
the bus with a stabilized DC voltage of 30 V DC, providing a current of 320 mA or 640 mA
output with integrated inductance for supplying KNX bus lines.

The functionality of the devices shall not be limited to above said function but with other support
parameters like
- Additional DC 30 V output for supplying additional devices
- Reset button function
- Short-circuit proof
- Overvoltage proof
- No-load proof
- Suitable for operation of the systems with emergency power supply
- Potential-free signal contact for operating and diagnostic message

It shall also allow connecting two identical power supplies can in parallel.

1.2.5 - 4/2, 8/4, and 12/6 Channel Switching/Blind Actuator

The switching/blind actuator shall be a freely configurable relay unit. The basic usage areas of
the same would be for switching of lightning systems or blind/shutter mechanisms (awnings,
blinds, shutters and various sun and visibility protection devices) either used in residential
projects or for commercial buildings. The module shall be configurable, as per the usage
mechanism, which is either for on/off or blind/shutter mechanism. The modules shall have the
switching capacity of 16A with a high-inrush current capability of 80A for 20 ms. The device
shall consists of two parts, lower part which has the relay unit and upper part which runs the
application, where in the upper part can be freely removed with unlocking of the switches. The
device shall also allow for possible integration of the channels into a maximum of 8 scenes.

The devices shall support for adjusting the functionality by setting the parameter function in the
software, which is like “Switching”, “On/Off Delay", “Pulse”, “Staircase” for switching actuator
and “Blind”, “Shutter” for blind actuator. In addition, the devices shall allow to be parameterized
for each channel: Input logic, type of contact (NC/NO) and participation in central commands
such as continuous ON, continuous OFF, central switching and access/recall scene for

Signature of Contractor Page 264 PWD-GoR

switching actuators and central up/down for blind/shutter actuators. It shall alVsoolumhea5vTeech3nicsalaSfpeectiyfications
objects (Safety1, Safety2 and Safety3) which can be used to drive sun and visibility protection
devices to a defined position (e.g. during a storm or when it is raining).

1.2.6 -KNX Universal Interface – Binary Input -2 Way/4Way/6 Way

The KNX universal interfaces shall be available in 2-WAY, 4-WAY and 6-WAY, as binary input
modules for floating switch/push button contacts binary signals. The device shall be available to
be installed in combination with conventional switches in flush mounted boxes, by doing that it
will allow the integration of conventional switches into KNX system. The devices shall also
support to be configurable for below operations
 Switching
1 or 2 button Dimming
 1 or 2 button Shutters/Blinds Control
 Value (Percentage, HWAC, Brightness, Temperature, Priority, 8bit values)
 Value for blinds
 Scene

1.2.7 -KNX Push Buttons 1/2/3/4 gang MD

There shall be a modular series of wired KNX Switches which shall go along with modular
series Wiring Devices, with same style/modules fit and finish. It shall be made available in 1
gang MD, 2 gang MD, 3 gang MD and 4 gang MD with up to 4 rockers and 1 LED per rocker.
The devices shall support to be configured as to send commands to actuators, to dim or switch
lights on/off, to move blinds up-down or to save/recall light scenes.

Apart from the above said features the following functions shall also be configured through the
ETS software:
 Switching operations
 Dimmer control
 Blinds control
 Scene control
 Single button operations

Each LED shall be controlled via an object or display the actual status or remain permanently on
or off, or the telegram type (switching, priority, value, temperature value etc.)which can be
specified individually.

1.2.8 – Soft & Touch Operation KNX Switches

Wired KNX switches shall be available as a soft operation feather touch button, which can also
be customized on wide variety of RAL and Pantone surface color options. The user can be
made to select the color of RGB backlights through software and also can choose icons and
control functions to create a personalized design. The switches shall be available in different
control configurations up to 12 control touch-points and shall also have options available for
Thermostat control panels with built-in temperature and humidity sensor.

There shall also be soft operation push button KNX switches which can be made available as 2
– 4 – 8 Button operation switch. A simple touch should allow you to control an entire home or
building automation system. It shall also support a variety of RAL and Pantone surface color
options, making it customizable as per the user needs. The user can be made to select the color
of RGB backlights through software and also can choose the icons and control functions to
create a personalized design. The keypad buttons and faceplates shall flush to each other, thus
creating a perfectly smooth surface. The buttons should be large and easy-to-use with engraved
icons and texts with a subtle click/tactile feedback confirming user input.

1.2.9- KNX wired Ceiling Type Presence Detector

Signature of Contractor Page 265 PWD-GoR

  The device shall be a presence detector with integrated brightness seVnolsumoer.5 TItecshh all be
nic al S pe cifications

powered via wired KNX bus. The device shall be programmed by ETS to transmit a data
telegram when a movement is detected to control the lighting, blinds, or heating, for
example. It shall also to be allowed to be programmed to control dimmers to adjust the
brightness in the room and keep it in a desired level. The device will work as smart
sensor and shall also measure brightness, temperature, humidity and air quality and
send it to BMS/LMS system.

 The PIR sensor on the product shall have a moving lens (mechanical adjustment) and a
shade ring allowing users to easily customize the coverage area and detection range.
 The sensor will have RGB Led which can be used to indicate movements or/and one of
the measurements value.
 It shall be suitable for Mixed light measurement fluorescent (FL/PL/ESL),
halogen/incandescent lamps and LEDs.
 KNX programming button of the product should be under the front cover for easy
access.
 Product can be flush mounted installed in ceilings with clamps.
 It should also support Ceiling installation with the help of surface-mounted frame
 It shall have 8 independent channels can be used for presence or/and brightness
dependent control for lighting, HVAC control etc...
 The device shall have Test mode for checking function and detection area
 All sensors measurements can be calibrated before ETS programming by parameters or
after ETS programming by communication objects
 Additional function for measurements
 Presence dependent channels can work in parallel (Master/ Slave or Master/Master)
 Short presence function reduces the time delay when device detects movement briefly
 It shall have Brightness switching value or set point value which can be set in lux before
ETS programming by parameters or after ETS programming by communication objects
 Channel’s presence and brightness sources can be from internal or/and external
sensors
 It shall have independent lock function for each channel
 It shall allow channels which can be programmed to work with manual
switching/dimming (by push buttons for example).
 It should also allow to be integrated into scene function.
 Reduce hot and cold pocket by controlling the air flow within office areas based on
sensor temperature and humidity points,
 Control the light intensity based on daylight sensing near façade or sun facing areas of
the building.
 Control treated air or fresh air by pervasively sensing the air quality typically eCO2 in
various areas of occupied spaces. BY measuring eCO2 ventilation fans can be switched
on in case input measurement crosses user defined threshold value.

Integration capability:

This Lighting Management System should be capable of integrating with Building

Management System on BACnet / IP of KNX IP Interface.

LOW VOLTAGE SPECIFICATIONS

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The LV system under this tender comprises of all LV works from the source to complete
distribution till end user. It includes all active and passive components (except server), Public
addressable (PA) system, CCTV system, Fire Alarm System, Lan System, Telephone system,
Fire suppression system, Very Early Smoke Detection System and Building Management system,
AV System, BMS, Stage lighting etc. Some items of LV work shall be changed detailed at the
Signature of Contractor Page 266 PWD-GoR
time of documents/ Shop drawings approvals. All items shall be used as per CVPoW D specifications/
lum e 5 T echn i c al S pe ci fi catio ns

NBC-2016 and ECBC-2017 guidelines.

1. Fire Detection / Alarm System: -

Addressable Intelligent fire detection and alarm system shall be of UL 86410’th edition, multi
sensor detectors (UL 268 7’th Edition), smoke detectors, heat detectors (UL 268 7’th Edition),
beam detectors, responsible indicators, manual call point and hooters, light strobe etc. shall be
provided. It shall meet the requirement for the complex. There shall be proper zoning of the
complex/buildings considering the non-critical & critical areas in the buildings. Repeater panels
shall be provided in guard room/ each floor. There shall be independent fire panel for individual
building. The monitoring of whole complex shall be in Main fire control room. The detail of the
system proposed shall be as follows:

Provide Fire Detection and Alarm System in accordance with Fire System (Latest edition) and
requirements of the Contract Documents. Provide a complete operable and intelligent analog
addressable Fire Alarm and Detection System with associated communication and notification
systems. The system shall include interfaces for foreign systems, as described herein and in
accordance with the Contract Documents, and all applicable Codes, Standards and local
Regulations, and be approved by Fire Services

The system shall include all materials, equipment and wiring required to install the complete Fire
Detection and Alarm System. The system shall include but not be limited to one or more control
panels, repeater panels, sensors, call points, audible and visual alarm indicating devices and
relays. The system shall have advantages such as:

 Accurate quick response to emergencies.

 Early fire warning
 Individual Device identification/location
 Analog Signal feed back
 Pre-alarm notification

 Eliminates nuisance alarms

 Powerful operator interface
 Reliable

 Advance on line diagnostics i.e.

 Continuous circuit supervision
 Detection and isolation of faults
 Continuous processing of analog value sensor data
 Maintenance diagnostics
 Panel test
 Control Board self-test

The system components shall be freely available from a number of sources, (i.e. not a closed
protocol system). The control panel shall be capable of expansion via up to SLC modules.

The controllers and the software for the fire alarm system must be laid out in such a way that
a single error of any electronic element or of an external device does not compromise the fire
alarm system from functioning normally. In the event of a failure, a short circuit or a wire break
in any detector in the fire alarm system cable, all other detectors and connected input and
output modules must remain fully functional.

In the event of fire alarm but not in a fault condition, the exact location shall be shown on the
main fire alarm panel, local sounder automatically sounded; the complete information is
printed along with time and date of occurrence. Air handling units on the effected zones shall
be automatically switched OFF and simultaneously respective fire dampers shall get closed.
Pressurization fans on the evacuation shafts i.e. stairwells, etc. shall automatically switched
ON. All system output program assigned via control by event programs that shall be activated

Signature of Contractor Page 267 PWD-GoR

by a particular point in the alarm are executed, and the associated sysVtoelum me 5oTu
ecthp
niu
catl S(pa
eclia rm
fica tions

notification appliance and/ or relays) are activated. The audio portion integrated to the system
shall directs the proper signal (tone or Voice) to the appropriate speaker circuits. Pre-recorded
alarm messages are played on the public address system.

All the loop elements shall be able to isolate the short circuits on the loop wiring and thus no
element shall isolate in the event of single short circuit and the exact location of the short circuit
shall be indicated on the respective fire alarm panel.

Fire alarm management system in an intelligent addressable Fire Alarm and Detection System
shall comprises of Graphical Management System which will be multi-user, with a lot of
facilities. It shall have two screen display the left screen dedicated to display the graphic
(building floor plans, Alarm panels etc.) and the right screen lists all events (alarm reports,
Fault massages, information about disable detectors etc.)

Building management system provides bidirectional monitoring and operation of the attach
devices of the Fire Alarm and Detection Systems. Besides, other components/devices in the
building like AHU's Pressurization Doors, lifts etc. can also be monitored and operated from
the graphical fire alarm management software.

The installation shall include the laying of all cables required for connection of the detection,
alarm indicating and other devices along with connections to the power supply as appropriate
to the design.

The Drawings shall serve to indicate the general arrangement of the various Plant and their
generic functional interconnections. However, layout of Plant, accessories, specialties, conduit
system and wiring, are diagrammatic and do not necessarily indicate every required device,
fitting, etc., required for the complete installation.

The system shall be designed such that no more than 80% of the available signaling/detection
loop capacity is employed to allow for future requirements.

Standards: -

IS 2175: 1988 Specification for heat sensitive fire detectors for use in automatic fire alarm system
(Second revision)

IS 11360: 1985 Specification for smoke detectors for use in automatic electrical fire alarm system.

IS 2189: 2008 Code of Practice for selection, installation and maintenance of Automatic fire
detection and alarm system (second revision)- Code of Practice

UL 50 Cabinets & Boxes

UL 268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
UL 864 Control units for Fire protective signaling system
UL 268A Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications
UL 521 Thermal Detectors for fire protective Signaling systems
UL 464 Audible Signaling Appliances
UL 38 Manually Activated Signaling Boxes
UL 1971 Visual Notification Appliances
FM Factory mutual
EN -54 respective part for Fire Alarm System
Loss Prevention Certification Board (LPCB)
National Building Code of India 2016

FACP shall provide monitoring and control of one floor or area or for multiple floors or areas.
FACP shall meet the following requirements to assure the integrity and reliability of the system:

1. The FACP shall have proper listing and / or approval from the following one of the
recognized agencies:

Signature of Contractor Page 268 PWD-GoR

 1.1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) -USA. This will Vcoo vee5r Tteh
lum che
nicafloSlplo
ecw
ificiantig
ons
approval:
 UL(Underwriters Laboratories Inc.)
 ULC {Under writers Laboratories Canada)
 FM {Factory Mutual)
 CSFM {California State Fire Marshal)

1.2. EN {European) This will cover the following approval:

 LPCB {Loss Prevention Council Board)
 VDS {Vertauen Durch Sicherheit)
 BRE

FACP shall be NFPA/EN listed independently and shall comply as per relevant IS code
mentioned above.

The fire detection system shall be designed, installed and commissioned in accordance with,
and all elements shall meet the requirements of UL/FM/VDS/LPCB approved. The responsible
company should be able to demonstrate their competence to design, install and commission
the system, e.g. by certification.

The system installer shall have in accordance with ISO 9001.

All detection devices shall be independently certified as complying with the relevant NFPA
/EN54 standard complied with UL/FM/LPCB/VDS approved.

Each detector & devices shall have integrated short circuit isolator.

Cabling shall be with fire survival cable. Cable shall be Low Smoke Zero Halogen Silicon
Insulated Fire Survival Cable with Drain Wire, solid copper conductor cable approved by LPCB
as per BSEN 50200:2015 PH 120 (Fire, Mech Shock & Water 120 Minutes @ 830 deg Celsius,
Fire & Mech Shock every 5 Min for 2 Hours- Both tests conducted on same sample) and BS-6387
CWZ The cable shall sustain 950 deg. All wire and cable shall be listed or approved by LPCB &
BASEC for use with a protective signaling system.

Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP)

Functional Description

The FACP shall be the central controller of the complete system. It shall receive and process
analogue information from the detection devices, provide audible and visual indication of alarm
and other conditions to the user, automatically initiate alarm response sequences and provide the
user interface for interrogation and user programming of the system.

Updates to the FACP operating software shall be simple to undertake and shall not require the
use of replaceable components. The operating program and configuration memory shall be stored
in non- volatile memory and shall not rely on batteries for retention. The FACP shall incorporate
separate microprocessors for signaling loop control and central operation.

 The FACP shall provide a user interface from which; controls can be operated, manual
operations can be carried out, indications are audible and/or visible and system
information can be obtained. The addressable Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) shall
function as a network panel & also as a fully standalone panel. FACP shall have its own
microprocessor, s o f t w a r e and memory. In the event of failure of panel or
communication breakdown between the networked panels the FACP shall
automatically operate on stand-alone mode without sacrificing any functions (The
networking should be peer to peer). Information of all panel in the network should be
available on all individual panels. FACP shall supervise detection circuits and shall
generate an alarm in case of abnormal conditions. FACP shall provide general
purpose inputs for monitoring such functions as low battery on AC power failure. FACPs
shall provide tamper protection and commandable outputs, which can operate relays or
logic level devices. The FACP should have integrated power distribution module and
Signature of Contractor Page 269 PWD-GoR
 fixed cabling done internally to guarantee a clear and tidy cable feedV.olTumhee5 Tpeachnne l should
ical Specifications

have a 230V AC power supply unit in plug in design with rack and panel connector and
24VDC /6Amp. LCD display at the FACP shall be provided to indicate point of alarm or
trouble. In Such systems means for manual scanning the points in trouble shall be
provided and a trouble and alarm LED shall be used to indicate that there are points in
alarm/ trouble. The alarm/trouble LED shall only get switched off when all alarm/trouble
are cleared from the loop. In Such systems means for manually scanning the points in
trouble shall be provided and a trouble and alarm LED shall be used to indicate that there
are points in alarm/ trouble. The alarm/trouble LED shall only get switched off when all
alarm/trouble are cleared from the loop.

It shall also be capable of unambiguously indicating the following functional conditions:

 In the event of fire alarm but not in a fault condition, the exact location shall be shown on
the Main Fire Alarm Panel (MFAP} on the 6’inch touch enabled panel screen of Main FAS
panel.
 Local sounder should sound automatically.
 Complete information shall be printed with time and date of occurrence.
 Air handling units on the effected zones shall be automatically switched OFF and
respective fire dampers shall also be closed.
 Pressurization fans of staircase shall automatically be switched ON.
 The panel shall have the facility to process the input signals and control the output
functions either directly or through interface modules as per the requirements
 The panels shall have necessary interface units for addressable detectors alarm output
modules for external actuations through fail safe programmable relays.
 The system shall store all basic information and job specific data in memory.
 Different password shall protect any change to system operations.
 The design of the panel hardware and software shall incorporate the capability to accept
additional input from fire protection system such as sprinkler and water flow switch,
operation of fire dampers, pressurization fans etc.
 Each loop should not be divided into more than 8 fire zones
 The length of loop shall not exceed more than 3000 meter for wire size [Link] mm. as
per manufacturer recommendations.
 The panel shall have an extra loop card to serve as standby in case of burn out or
malfunctioning of any operating loop cards.
 It shall be possible to command test, reset and alarm silence from the FACP

Monitoring modules shall be provided to monitor and address contact-type input devices.
The monitor m odu l e shall be housed in the FACP supervised by FACP.

There shall be minimum 20% spare capacity in the looping system for future expansions. The
firm has to intimate the maximum number of devices/ detectors can be connected in one loop
based on the manufacturer design . Some devices need external supply and some devices
supported by loop power.

Panel Construction

The Fire Alarm Control Panel shall be of metal construction. It shall be capable of surface or semi-
flush mounting. Wiring terminations are to be situated towards the top of the unit.

The panel shall be totally enclosed, dust and vermin proof.

The FACP should have variants of small, medium, large and deep enclosures with the facility to
also provide rack mounted options.

Panel Indications

Signature of Contractor Page 270 PWD-GoR

The Fire Alarm Control Panel shall be equipped with a white backlit dispVlaolyume a5 Tec
s thhniecal pSpreim
cifia
cartiyons

indicator giving information. The Display should enable a flexible design of the operating menu
with variable keys and message windows fixed keys should be used for standard operating
steps e.g. for fire alarm securities supervisory trouble and other events. The current status of
the system should be displayed by LED's interfaces {RS232) enable the connection to a PC.
The display shall illuminate upon any event (excluding mains failure) or button press. The display
must provide an energy efficient software adjustment and be able to be dimmed and provide the
option of giving the facility of ‘More Alarms’.

The display on FACP shall provide indication for AC power, system alarm, system
trouble/security alarm, display trouble and signal silence to this would mean that in the event
of change of any detector/zone sequence alterations, the operator can initiate these by use
of the LCD & alpha -numeric keys on the FACP panel to reconfigure the above parameters.

The primary display shall be simultaneously capable of indicating the presence of Fire Alarms,
Faults, Disablements and Tests in accordance with the requirements of NFPA/EN54

LCD display at the FACP shall be provided to indicate point of alarm or trouble.

In Such systems means for manually scanning the points in trouble shall be provided and a
trouble and alarm LED shall be used to indicate that there are points in alarm trouble. The alarm
/trouble LED shall only get switched off when all alarm trouble are cleared from the loop.

Panel Controls

FACP switches shall allow authorized personnel to accomplish the following, independent
of the central console.
(a) Acknowledge a general alarm condition.
(b) Silence the local audible alarm.
(c) It shall be possible to silence the alarm indicating devices {hooters).
(d) Reset all zones {logical Point Group) I points, after all initiating devices have returned to
normal.
(e) Perform a complete operational test of the memory with a visual indication.
(f) Test all panel LED’s for proper operation without causing a change in the condition of
any zone (Logical Point Group).
(g) Walk test – The system shall provide both a basic and advanced walk test for testing the
entire fire alarm system including testing of all devices, detectors module etc. in the
complete system.

Networking

The Fire Alarm Control Panel shall be capable of networking ,

Simply adding and connecting a network card will allow any node/control panel or remote terminal
to be networked. All other nodes on the system will be instantly aware of a panel as soon as it is
given a valid network node address, allowing additional panels to be added at any time with a
minimum amount of reprogramming with the facility to prevent the transmission of fires or faults
during commissioning on network systems.

For more complex systems, Windows based PC configuration software (see below) allows sector-
based programming for Mute, Silence, Resound and Reset control keys as well as investigation
delays, group disablement and test instructions. All panels within the same sector will share
common controls and each panel or remote terminal can also be programmed to show specific
network information on a zonal basis.

For cause and effect, any input device can be programmed to operate any output device on any
panel and, to simplify the programming, all the configuration data is contained within one user-
friendly network configuration file.

Signature of Contractor Page 271 PWD-GoR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

Fig.1

Fig.2

False Alarm Management

The fire detection and fire alarm system shall be provided with the necessary features and
functions to aid in the reduction of false alarms and to meet the recommendations in BS 5839-1.

The fire detection and fire alarm system shall be capable of three types of false alarm
management.

Alarm verification – automatic smoke alarm confirmation

Alarm verification – manual confirmation
Alarm verification – multiple alarms

The fire detection and fire alarm system shall provide the facility to automatically confirm alarms
from smoke detectors by means of; further signals from the same or other smoke detector, alternate
signals sensing a different fire phenomenon (e.g. heat) from the same or other detector.

The fire detection and alarm system shall provide the capability for the connection of an alarm
acknowledge function located locally for each individual building area. This is to be used to provide
the occupants of the building area with the facility to acknowledge potential false alarms without
affecting occupants in other building areas. This local acknowledge function shall take the form of
a loop powered, single gang, analogue addressable device providing both indication (visible and
programmable audible) and control (acknowledge push button) functions. It shall be possible to
configure the system such that the acknowledgement function can silence local, loop powered,
alarm sounders.

The fire detection and fire alarm system shall provide the facility to manually, after an investigation,
confirm or cancel a fire alarm signal.

The fire detection and fire alarm system shall provide the facility to confirm, by means of multiple
fire alarm signals, before activation of safety critical equipment.

Software

A PC Configuration Tool shall be available for configuration of the FACP and for retention of
configuration data.

Configuration

It shall be possible to configure ALL basic configuration parameters and settings from either the
FACP front panel or from the PC Configuration Tool.

Power Supplies

Power supply unit of FACP shall have following characters:

(a) The main power supply shall be 230V AC ±10% 50Hz ± 3% and shall in turn provide all
necessary power of FACP.

(b) It shall provide a separate battery control module with charger. The battery should last for
24 hours minimum in normal operation upon power failure & 30 minutes in alarm condition.

(c) For ease of service, all wiring terminal blocks shall be plug-in type.

Signature of Contractor Page 272 PWD-GoR

 (d) The fire alarm panels shall have a possibility of being interlinked bVyoludmiree5 cTteccho
nicnan
l Sectifivicaittiyons
pec

or an optical cable link between the various locations and should further have
connectivity to the main control center.

FACP shall be backed up with its built in UPS power or can be powered separately.

Photoelectric Smoke Detector: -

The detectors shall be designed around a fully digital protocol. The analogue addressable
photoelectric smoke detector shall be designed with a unique symmetrical chamber. The chamber
shall ensure optimum air entry from all directions and shall offers immunity to ambient light into
the detectors.

Feature of detector

1. Built-in-response Indicator:
Each detector s h a l l incorporate indicator "LED" at the detector which shall blink on
actuation of the detector to locate the detector which is operated while on fire. The
detector shall not be affected by the failure of the response indicator lamp.
2. The detector shall have preferably 360° visible view of the alarm LED. Tricolor LED enabled
to display different colors as per the event.
3. The detector shall have integrated built in short circuit isolator so that in case of any short
circuit in the detector, the detector can be isolated so that loop should be able to retain
the full functionality or in case built in short circuit isolator not available the manufacturer
a fault isolator unit shall be provided after every detectors in a loop. Isolator unit shall ensure
that the loop is functional except the faulty detector. The detector shall be enabled with
Class-X wiring / polarity sensitive feature.
4. The detector shall be with built in microprocessor capable of making alarm on control
panel based on the information stored in detector.
5. The detector shall confirm to international standard i.e. NF PA/EN with any one of
UL/FM/VDS/LPCB approval
6. The detector shall provide electronic address setting by means of configuration software.
7. The detector shall be plug-in-type and shall have common base to facilitate exchange for
cleaning & maintenance. The base of the detector shall be interchangeable with other smoke
detectors.
8. The detector shall be supplied fully tested and each detector should bear the SI. No. and
seal of the approving laboratory/body.
9. The detectors and control panel shall be of same make.

Multicriteria Detector: -
The detectors shall be designed around a fully digital protocol. The analogue addressable
Multicriteria detector shall combine a photoelectric and thermal sensing element with a very
sophisticated algorithm. A symmetrical smoke chamber shall ensure optimal smoke sensitivity
from all directions. A single, centrally positioned, thermistor shall supervise ambient temperature
with low thermal inertia.

Feature of detector
1. Built-in-response Indicator:
Each detector shall incorporate indicator "LED" at the detector which shall blink on
actuation of the detector to locate the detector which is operated while on fire. The
detector shall not be affected by the failure of the response indicator lamp.

2. The detector shall have preferably 360° visible view of the alarm LED or twin LEDs blink
whenever detector is addressed. Tricolor LED enabled to display different colors as per the
event.
3. The detector shall have integrated built in short circuit isolator so that in case of any short
circuit in the detector, the detector can be isolated so that loop should be able to retain the
full functionality or in case built in short circuit isolator not available the manufacturer a
fault isolator unit shall be provided after every detectors in a loop. Isolator unit shall ensure

Signature of Contractor Page 273 PWD-GoR

 that the loop is functional except the faulty detector. The detector sVhoalulml eb5eTeecn abled with
hn ic al S peci fica tions

Class-X wiring / polarity sensitive feature.

4. The detector shall be with built in microprocessor capable of making alarm on control
panel based on the information stored in detector.
5. The detector shall confirm to international standard i.e. NF PA/EN with any one of
UL/FM/VDS/LPCB approval
6. The detector shall provide electronic address setting by means of configuration software.
7. The detector shall be plug-in-type and shall have common base to facilitate exchange
for cleaning & maintenance. The base of the detector shall be interchangeable
with other smoke detectors.
8. The detector shall be supplied fully tested and each detector should bear the SI. No. and
seal of the approving laboratory/body.
9. The detectors and control panel shall be of same make.

Heat Detector: -
The detectors shall be designed around a fully digital protocol. The analogue addressable
photoelectric heat detector shall incorporate a single, centrally positioned thermistor, which shall
supervise ambient temperature with low thermal inertia.

Feature of detector

1. Built-in-response Indicator:Each detector shall incorporate indicator "LED" at the detector

which shall blink on actuation of the detector to locate the detector which is operated
while on fire. The detector shall not be affected by the failure of the response indicator
lamp.

2. The detector shall have preferably 360° visible view of the alarm LED or twin LEDs blink
whenever detector is addressed. Tricolor LED enabled to display different colors as per the
event.
3. The detector shall have preferably with integrated built in short circuit isolator so that in
case of any short circuit in the detector, the detector can be isolated so that loop should
be able to retain the full functionality or in case built in short circuit isolator not available
the manufacturer a fault isolator unit shall be provided after every detectors in a loop.
Isolator unit shall ensure that the loop is functional except the faulty detector. The
detector detector shall be enabled with Class-X wiring / polarity sensitive feature.
4. The detector shall be with built in microprocessor capable of making alarm on control
panel based on the information stored in detector.
5. The detector shall confirm to international standard i.e. NF PA/EN with any one of
UL/FM/VDS/LPCB approval
6. The detector shall provide electronic address setting by means of configuration software.
7. The detector shall be plug-in-type and shall have common base to facilitate exchange
for cleaning & maintenance. The base of the detector shall be interchangeable
with other smoke detectors.
8. The detector shall be supplied fully tested and each detector should bear the SI. No. and
seal of the approving laboratory/body.
9. The detectors and control panel shall be of same make.

Manual Call Point: -

The Manual Call Point shall be loop powered device designed around a fully digital protocol. A
manual call point shall mimic the feel of breaking glass whilst offering the user the benefits and
environmental advantages of a re-settable operating element. The unit shall provide a fast and
secure response.

Constructional requirements of: -

i. It is used to trigger a fire alarm manually, and should be suitable for connection to
the system loop technology. The alarm is raised by breaking the glass with the alarm

Signature of Contractor Page 274 PWD-GoR

 carrying on until a replacement glass panel is fitted or alarm to bVeolum
mea5dTeechsniilce
alnStpefcrific
om ations
control panel.
ii. A micro switch within the units is held "off" by the edge of the glass when glass is
broken (Single Action performed on MCP for Single Action MCP providers) the switch
is released and a signal is transmitted to control panel where the alarm is raised.
The glass is preferably plastic coated to eliminate the damage of splinters causing
injury.
iii. For testing without breaking the glass a test key, should be available so as to lower or
remove the glass to release the micro switch. Full functional test is achieved
accordingly.
iv. Facility for reset/adjustment of manual call point alarm triggering.
v. The unit shall be made out of polycarbonate ABS blend with flame retardant & self
extinguishing properties or cast aluminum or ASA plastic or as per manufacturer
design and applicable standards.
vi. It shall preferably contain an integrated short circuit isolator which should ensure
that a fault is localized and that the loop continues to function fully in the event of a
wire break or a short circuit.
vii. The call box shall have suitable provision to knock out of termination of a 20mm
conduit. This shall also have suitable provision for being fixed on surface or semi
recessed in wall.
viii. The word 'FIRE' shall appear embossed in red color on the front.
ix. Acknowledgement LED displays -red for triggered alarm indication (flashing) and I or
maintenance evacuation.

Loop Powered Platform Sounder: -

The platform sounder loop powered addressable device shall be designed around a fully digital
protocol. The sounders volume shall have a choice of eight different operating tones & that can
be adjusted by a DIP switch. The control panel software shall allow two of the different tones to
be activated and each sounder shall be synchronized making them suitable for multistage alarm
applications. (1) Continuous 910Hz (2) Slow whoop tone 300 to 1200Hz, 3s sweep, 0.5s silence
(3) Dual tone 910 & 685Hz,2Hz (250ms - 250ms) (4) Intermittent 910Hz, 1Hz (500ms ON / 500ms
OFF) (5) Sweep (DIN) tone 1200Hz to 500Hz, 1Hz (6) Intermittent 910Hz, 3x500ms pulses
followed by 1.5s silence (7) Sweep 800 to 1000 hz, 500ms Cycle (8) Sweep 800 to 970 hz, 1HZ.
The unit shall provide a fast and secure response, and incorporates a bidirectional short circuit
isolator. The operating temperature of detector shall be 0°C to +38°C.

All Loop powered sounder shall be independently certified as complying with the relevant
NFPA /EN54 standard complied with UL/FM/LPCB/VDS approved.

Loop Powered Sounder Beacon Base: -

The loop driven sounder beacon base series addressable device shall be designed around a fully
digital protocol the sounder beacon base shall be an acoustic output device which shall supports
up to 32 tones ranging from a slow whoop, pulsed and continuous tone with synchronization of
both the sounder and beacon. The device shall have four fixed volume levels ranging from 85 dB
to a maximum of 92dB. The unit shall provide a fast and secure response, and incorporates a
bidirectional short circuit isolator. The operating temperature of detector shall be 0°C to +38°C.

All Loop powered sounder beacon base shall be independently certified as complying with the
relevant NFPA /EN54 standard complied with UL/FM/LPCB/VDS approved.

Output Module: -
The output modules shall be loop powered, designed around a fully digital protocol and shall
provide control by closing contacts of auxiliary devices such as fire shutters. The output channel
shall be monitored and shall able to detect Open and Short circuit conditions. The unit shall
provide a fast and secure response, and incorporates a bidirectional short circuit isolator. The
operating temperature of detector shall be 0°C to +38°C.

All Output module shall be independently certified as complying with the relevant NFPA /EN54
standard complied with UL/FM/LPCB/VDS approved.

Signature of Contractor Page 275 PWD-GoR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications
Relay Module: -
The output modules shall be loop powered, designed around a fully digital protocol and shall
provide form C changeover contacts for control of auxiliary devices such as fire shutters. The
output channel shall be normally de-energized relay switched on by a command from the control
panel. The unit shall provide a fast and secure response, and incorporates a bidirectional short
circuit isolator. The operating temperature of detector shall be -30°C / to +70°C.

All Relay module shall be independently certified as complying with the relevant NFPA /EN54
standard complied with UL/FM/LPCB/VDS approved.

Input Module: -
The output modules shall be loop powered, designed around a fully digital protocol and shall
monitor fire alarm and auxiliary devices. The input channel shall monitor and detect Normal / Short
/ Alarm and Open conditions. The unit shall provide a fast and secure response, and incorporates
a bidirectional short circuit isolator. The operating temperature of detector shall be -30°C / to
+70°C.

All Input module shall be independently certified as complying with the relevant NFPA /EN54
standard complied with UL/FM/LPCB/VDS approved.

Wire:

All fire alarm system wiring shall be new.

Cable shall be Low Smoke Zero Halogen Silicon Insulated Fire Survival Cable with Drain Wire,
solid copper conductor cable approved by LPCB as per BSEN 50200:2015 PH 120 (Fire, Mech
Shock & Water 120 Minutes @ 830 deg Celsius, Fire & Mech Shock every 5 Min for 2 Hours-
Both tests conducted on same sample) and BS-6387 CWZ The cable shall sustain 950 deg. C.
For 3 hours approved along with accessories/ termination glands and all necessary materials to
complete. The cable shall be approved for. The cable shall be BS EN 60332-1-2:2004 for Bunched
Flame Retardancy (installed as a single or bunched cable self-extinguishes leaving the upper
cable sheath unaffected showing the cable does not propagate fire). Cable shall be guaranteed
for 10 years from the date of manufacture marked on the cable.

All wire and cable shall be listed or approved by LPCB & BASEC for use with a protective signaling
system. Fire Survival cable shall be included in low voltage pacakage.

Additional System Components

The following additional system components shall be provided as optional equipment.

It shall be possible to connect the following standardized I/O equipment to the network:

Remote Control : Providing features and functions described in EN54 Part 2 clause 11.
Terminals
Remote Display : Providing features and functions described in EN54 Part 2 clause 11.
Terminals
Mimic Module : Providing a bespoke solution for graphical presentation, using LED
Indicators, to indicate either zone-based fires or output groups
activated.
Graphics Interface : Providing a gateway to 3rd party graphics packages with full reporting
Module and control features and functions. It shall be possible to install
multiple graphics gateways in the network and have the facility to
have IP based workstations.
Touch Screen Terminals : Providing features and functions described in EN54 Part 2 clause 11,
from a 10” touch screen unit that provides a graphical display and
options for site schematics, zone maps and the ability for promotional
/ informational slide-shows.

Signature of Contractor Page 276 PWD-GoR

It shall be possible to connect the following modules to the FACP for locally baVsoeludmein5pTu t and output
echnic al Spec ifi catio ns

extensions:

Input and Output Module : Providing 16 inputs and 48 outputs connected by the FACP internal
peripheral bus
Printer : Providing the capability to select and automatically print fire, alarm,
fault and test events and the capability to manually print the historic
log. The printer arrangement shall be such that it is not required to
open the enclosure to change the paper roll. The printer shall not
use replaceable ink ribbons or cartridges.
Integral Modem : Providing remote connection to the FACP.
Zone Monitoring : Peripheral device that can monitor up to 8 conventional zones.
General Routing : Providing routing outputs in compliance with EN54-2clauses 7.9,
Interface 7.10 and 8.9.
ESPA Interface : Providing a serial data interface with the industry standard ESPA
4.4.4 protocol.

It shall be possible to connect the following modules for locally based input and output extensions:

Programmable : Extending the FACP on-board circuits in variants of 4 up to a

Sounders maximum
of 64 additional sounder circuits per multi-loop.
Programmable Relays : Providing 4 individual programmable relay output circuits per card
with up to a maximum of 16 cards per multi-loop panel.
Sounder Splitter : Providing 4 additional outputs to fire alarm devices from one of the
panel outputs. Operation of all additional outputs is to follow the
programmed operation of the selected panel output.
Sounder Booster : Providing a 4-ampere output to fire alarm devices from one of the
panel outputs. Operation is to follow the programmed operation of the
selected panel output.

Service Tool

The facility shall be provided to extract information from the FACP to a PC Based Service Tool.
The service tool shall: -

 Download device information

 View drift status of detectors
 Provide a device history of every device – last activated, tested, disables, when created
 Extract event log information
 Be able to group data
 Provide Use defined reports

Maintenance

Maintenance features are to be included within each FACP. Each FACP shall:

 Have an in-built scope function for each loop

 Provide device history for every device
 Be able to view software versions of all pcb’s on the control panel
 Provide Cross-network viewing of each panel’s status
 View battery charger and temperature
 Provide drift and warning states for the devices

Aspirating Smoke Detection / Very Early Smoke Detection System

Signature of Contractor Page 277 PWD-GoR

 System Specifications Volume 5 Technical Specifications
General
A Very Early Smoke Detection System shall be installed throughout the areas nominated on the
drawings.
The system shall consist of highly sensitive LED-based smoke detectors with aspirators
connected to networks of sampling pipes.
The detector shall be equipped with dedicated sensing devices for each of the two channels and
thus be able to identify instantly which pipe is carrying smoke.
The detector shall be easy configurable to the most widely used sampling pipe network
topologies, as defined by EN54-20.
When required, an optional display unit shall be provided to monitor each detector, and a PC
based programming tool shall be supplied to configure the system.
Approvals
The very early smoke detection system must be tested according to the European Standard
EN54 Part 20 and bear the CE mark. It must be of a type submitted to, tested, approved, and/or
listed by VdS (Verband der Sachversicherer e.V.), Germany. It should be UL & FM approved.
Codes, Standards or Regulations
The entire installation shall be installed to comply with one or more of the following codes or
standards:
 European Standard EN54 Part 20 for Aspirating Smoke Detectors
 British Fire Protection Systems Association, Code of Practice for Category
1 Aspirating Detection Systems
 NFPA Standards, US
 Local codes and standards
 Year 2000 compliancy standards including, LPS2000, GTE PA96014T
System Description
Design Requirements
1. Shall consist of an aspiration unit and two highly sensitive LED-based smoke
detectors, each one forming an independent measuring device for the two pipe
networks.
2. The detection unit shall be able to identify which sampling pipe is carrying smoke.
3. It shall be modular, with each detector optionally monitored by a display featuring LED
bar graphs indicating the smoke density of each pipe network. The system shall be
configured by a built-in programming device for standard configurations and a PC
based Programmer for more demanding applications.
4. The system shall allow programming of:
 Five smoke threshold alarm levels per pipe (sector);
 time delays;
 faults including airflow, detector, power, filter and network as well as an indication
of the urgency of the fault;
 three (3), eight (8) or thirteen (13) configurable relay outputs for remote indication
of alarm and fault conditions.
1. It shall consist of an air sampling pipe network to transport air to the detection system,
supported by calculations from a computer-based design modelling tool.
2. Optional equipment ay include SD card-based event tracing and data logging, loop
interface and/or a high-level interface with the building fire alarm system.
3. Performance Requirements
 Shall be tested and approved according to EN54-20 to cover up to 2,000 sq.m.
 Shall be approved to provide very early smoke detection and provide four output
levels per channel / pipe network. These levels shall be programmable and able to
be set at sensitivities ranging from 0.002 – 10% obs. / m.
 Shall report any fault on the unit by using configurable fault output relays or via
addressable loop to a Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP).
Signature of Contractor Page 278 PWD-GoR
  Shall incorporate a flow sensor in each pipe and provide stagedVoaluirmfelo5 w
Tecfhanu
icaltl s
[Link]

Submittals
Product data and site drawings shall be submitted and shall include pipe layout, operational
calculations (PipeFlow™) and performance criteria.
A copy of the manufacturer’s installation, operation and maintenance manuals shall be
supplied upon completion of the installation.
System commissioning data shall be supplied (in a format recommended by the manufacturer
and per the instructions provided by the manufacturer) within 30 days of completion of the
installation.
Quality Assurance
Qualifications
1 Manufacturer
The manufacturer shall have a minimum of 20 years production experience in the manufacturer
and design of high sensitivity aspiration-type smoke detection systems.
The manufacturer shall be certified as meeting ISO 9002 for manufacturing.
2 Technology
Both Light Scattering and Particle Discrimination shall be utilised in this device as follows:
The Detection Chamber shall be of the mass Light Scattering type and capable of detecting a
wide range of smoke particle types of varying size. A particle discrimination method shall be
employed for the purposes of preventing large particles from affecting the true smoke reading.
The Detection Chamber shall be specifically designed for aspirating systems providing smooth
air flow for keeping dust contamination and noise dissipation at negligible level.
The detector shall use adaptive algorithms to adjust the sensitivity from that set during
commissioning (auto learn mode).
3 Equipment Supplier
The equipment supplier shall be authorised and trained by the manufacturer to calculate/design,
install, test and maintain the air sampling system and shall be able to produce a certificate
stating such on request.
Products
Manufactured Units(s)
Many configurations are possible combining any of the following base units with suitable
smoke sensing devices and up to four I/O boards for the purpose of data logging and
communication:
Detector Assembly
1. The unit shall be housed in a mounting box and shall be arranged in such a way that
air is drawn from the fire risk and a sample passed through the Smoke Sensing
Devices by the aspirator.
2. The system shall utilise the principle of sampling each of the two pipe networks
(sectors) individually and simultaneously. If an alarm threshold level is reached an
alarm is indicated and signalled.
3. The Smoke Sensing Device shall be LED-based type and shall have an obscuration
sensitivity range of 0.002 – 10 % Obs. / m.
4. The Detector shall have four independent field programmable smoke alarm thresholds
per pipe (sector) and a programmable time delay assigned to each threshold.
5. The Detector shall also incorporate facilities to transmit the following faults and
warnings
 Smoke Sensing Device
 Air flow
 System
 Communication
 Power
Faults and Warnings: Warnings shall be considered as servicing or maintenance
signals. Faults indicate the unit may not be able to detect smoke.
6. The detector shall have two separate sample pipe inlets (flow circuits) and must
contain a flow sensor for each pipe inlet.

Signature of Contractor Page 279 PWD-GoR

 7. The aspirator shall be a purpose-designed air pump. It shall be capVaoblulmee o
5 fTea
chllno
icw
al iSnpegciffio
cartions
an aggregate pipe length up to 600m in total, (2 pipe runs per Smoke Sensing Device)
with a transport time as appropriate EN54-20 codes dictate or as specified by VdS
approved design software, typically of less than 120 seconds.
8. The Assembly must contain 8 relays for alarm and fault conditions. The relays shall be
software programmable to the required functions. The relays must be rated at 1 AMP
at 30 VDC. Additional 5 relays shall be offered as an option and shall be individually
programmable to the desired function.
9. The Assembly shall be able to be surface mounted to a wall or recessed in the wall
cavity (the unit may be inverted in either option).
10. As an option, the assembly shall have built-in event logging on a removable media
(SD card). It shall store smoke levels, contamination / compensation levels, alarm and
pre-alarm conditions, operator actions and faults. It shall be capable of storing up to 16
million events.
11. As an option, the assembly shall have built-in data logging on a removable media (SD
card). It shall store smoke level, alarm threshold settings and contamination level at
one (1) Second interval. Each detector (zone) shall be capable of logging data
spanning a period of more than 80 days. Logged data should be recorded using Excel
format (.xls) for easy processing.
Displays
1. A detector Display module located within the detector shall provide the following
features at a minimum:
 Three independent LED indicators per zone for detector fault, system fault and fire
alarm
 A Reset button for unlatching all latched alarm conditions.
2. When required, a smoke level display module may be located within the detector
featuring a 2 x 10 segment bar graph display.
Programmers
1. A programmer module located within the detector shall support the following features
at a minimum:
 System configuration according to EN54-20 pipe networks and response classes (A,
B or C).
 Initiation of self setup cycle, to automatically configure the detector’s alarm threshold
settings to suit the current environment.
 Setting of date and time
 Viewing of the 99 most recently logged events
2. Programming may be performed using a Windows® application running on a PC
connected through a USB interface. It shall feature a multi-level password control to
support the following features at a minimum:

Programming of any device on the SecuriPro system.

Viewing of the status of any device in the system.

Adjustment of relative alarm thresholds for each pipe

Software configuration for either 3, 7 or 12 relays

Setting of day/night sensitivity thresholds.

Initiation of adaptive learning algorithm, to automatically configure the detector’s
alarm threshold settings to suit the current environment.
 Programmable latching or non-latching relay operation.
 Programmable energised or de-energised relays.
 Programmable high and low flow settings for airflow supervision.
 Programmable aspirator speed control.
Device Networking Requirements
1. The devices in the smoke detection system shall have loop connectivity as to configure
and operate up to 100 aspirating devices by means of a fire alarm control panel
(FACP).

Signature of Contractor Page 280 PWD-GoR

 2. The network shall be capable of being configured in a fault tolerantVlooluompe 5foTrechbnoictahl Sspehcioficrattions
circuit and open circuit. Any communication faults shall be reported unambiguously
and shall be clearly attributable to an individual device or wire link in the fault
messages.
Digital Communication Port
Transmission shall comply with SecuriLine protocol for addressable loop devices.
Application
Detection Alarm Levels
The LED based aspirating detection system shall have four (4) alarm thresholds per pipe
(sector). The four alarm levels may be used as follows:
 Alarm Level 1 (Pre-Alarm)
Alert someone and activate a visual and audible alarm in the fire risk area.
 Alarm Level 2 (Pre-Alarm)
Activate the electrical/electronic equipment shutdown relay and activate visual
and audible alarms in the Security Office or other appropriate location.
 Alarm Level 3 (Pre-Alarm)
Activate an alarm condition in the Fire Alarm Control Panel to call the Fire
Brigade and activate all warning systems.
 Alarm Level 4 (Alarm)
Activate evacuation action or shut down of systems.
NOTE: The alarm level functions as listed are possible scenarios. Consideration should be
given to the best utilisation of these facilities for each application and the
requirements of local authorities.
Initial Detection Alarm Settings
Initial settings for the alarm levels shall be determined by the requirements of the fire
zone. However, the setting for Alarm Level 4 shall always appear as 100% on the
bargraph scale. Default settings of the unit shall be:
 Alarm Level 1 30% of Alarm Level 4
 Alarm Level 2 50% of Alarm Level 4
 Alarm Level 3 70% of Alarm Level 4
 Alarm Level 4 0.13% Obs/m
Fault Alarms
The Detector Fault relay shall be connected to the appropriate alarm zone on the Fire Alarm
Control Panel in such a way that a detector fault would register a fault condition on the FACP.
The warnings and isolate relays shall also be connected to the appropriate control system.
(Check local Codes, Standards or Regulations to determine whether compliance with this set-up
is required).
Power Supply and Batteries
Power consumption of the device should be below 0.9 Watt (900 mW) under all circumstances
(worst case with all LED lit).
The system shall be powered from a regulated supply of nominally 24V DC. The battery
charger and battery shall comply with the relevant Codes, Standards or Regulations. Typically
24 hours standby battery back up is required followed by 30 minutes in an alarm condition.
Local Power Supply Standards that may apply: EN54-4
Sampling Pipe Design
4 Sampling Pipe
The sampling pipe shall be smooth bore with an internal diameter of 25 mm. Normally, pipe
with an outside diameter of 25 mm and internal diameter of 21 mm should be used.
The pipe material should be suitable for the environment in which it is installed, or should be the
material as required by the specifying body.
All joints in the sampling pipe must be air tight and made by using solvent cement, except at
entry to the detector.
The pipe shall be identified as Aspirating Smoke Detector Pipe (or similar wording) along its
entire length at regular intervals not exceeding the manufacturer’s recommendation or that of
local codes and standards.
All pipes should be supported at not less than 1.5 m centres, or that of the local codes or
standards.
The far end of each trunk or branch pipe shall be fitted with an end cap.

Signature of Contractor Page 281 PWD-GoR

5 Sampling Holes Volume 5 Technical Specifications

Sampling holes of appropriate size and spacing shall be drilled according to calculations by the
engineering tool an in compliance with the local code or standard.
Each sampling point shall be identified in accordance with Codes or Standards.
Consideration shall be given to the manufacturer’s recommendations and standards in relation
to the number of Sampling Points and the distance of the Sampling Points from the ceiling or
roof structure and forced ventilation systems.
Installation
The Detection system
The contractor shall install the system in accordance with the manufacturer's System
Design Manual.
The Capillary Sampling Network
Where false ceilings are installed, the sampling pipe shall be installed above the ceiling, and
Capillary Sampling Points shall be installed on the ceiling and connected by means of a
capillary tube.
The Capillary tube shall terminate at a Ceiling Sampling Point specifically designed and
approved by the manufacturer. The performance characteristics of the Sampling Points shall be
taken into account during the system design.
Air Sampling Pipe Network Calculations
Air Sampling Pipe Network Calculations shall be provided by a sampling pipe aspiration
modelling program such as PipeFlow. Pipenetwork calculations shall be supplied with the
proposed pipe layout design.
Transport Time
The manufacturers recommended transport time (time taken for the smoke to enter the pipe and
reach the detector) for the least favourable sampling point is 120 seconds or less.
Local codes or end users standards may also apply. The maximum transport time must never
exceed the local codes

OEM AUTHORIZATION: OEM Authorization letter for this tender must be submitted.

2. IP Closed circuit television System (CCTV system): -

The CCTV and surveillance system shall control and monitor different buildings. All the buildings
shall have IP based dome cameras, bullet camera, 360 degree cameras and PTZ camera for
surveillance. The indoor Dome cameras and bullet cameras are proposed to be installed at all
entry & exit points, main corridors, lift lobbies & common areas of building. All the outdoor camera
shall be IP-66 housing & junction box. All camera shall have Poe connectivity. The network
connectivity for all outdoor camera shall be of ruggred switch.
There are three types of cameras shall be installed to monitor the movement of the people
as follows:
 IP fixed dome camera indoor type.
 IP fixed box camera indoor/outdoor type.
 IP PTZ camera outdoor type

Supply, Installation, Testing & Commissioning of ONVIF S/G Profile Compliance based Indoor
2MP PoE True IP IR Dome Camera with latest H.264 or H.265 Compression with 1/2.9" CMOS
Sensor with built in IR Illuminator 40 Mtrs or more having automatic varifocal lens from 3.2 to 10
mm lens with autofocus for both day/Night operation with Camera Built In Video Analytics like as
Line Crossing, Enter/Leave Field, Follow Route, Idle/Removed, object, The 802.1x network
authentication with EAP/TLS, supports TLS 1.2 with updated cipher suites including AES 256
encryption. Camera should have UL, CE, FCC, IP66, IK10 certification in all respect

Supply, Installation, Testing & Commissioning of ONVIF S/G Profile Compliance based Indoor
2MP PoE True IP IR Bullet Camera with latest H.264 or H.265 Compression with 1/2.8" CMOS
Sensor with built in IR Illuminator 40 Mtrs or more having automatic varifocal lens from 3.2 to 10

Signature of Contractor Page 282 PWD-GoR

mm lens with autofocus for both day/Night operation with Camera Built In VidVeoolumAen5aTleychtnicicsal Slipkeecifiacastions
Line Crossing, Enter/Leave Field, Follow Route, Idle/Removed, object, Camera should have
intelligent stream management and Bandwidth reduction facility for storage management and
better bit rate optimization facility. The 802.1x network authentication with EAP/TLS, supports
TLS 1.2 with updated cipher suites including AES 256 encryption. Camera should have UL, CE,
FCC, IP66, IK10 certification in all respect

Supply, Installation, Testing & Commissioning of 30X 2MP IP IR ONVIF S/G Integrated Pan, Tilt,
Zoom Camera: 30X IP IR Integrated Pan, Tilt, Zoom Camera with latest H.265 Video
Compression with intelligent stream management capability for Bit rate optimization and storage
management with 1/2.8" Progessive Scan CMOS sensor having lens of 4.5mm to 135mm (F1.6-
F4.4) with optical zoom field of view from 2.4°−60.9°. Camera housing should be of complete
outdoor type with IP 66 rating in all respect, this is inclusive of GI Pole with RCC foundation
required for mounting of PTZ camera - as per approval of site engineer
Supply Installation Testing & Commissioning of VMS & Storage device, The device shall be
RAID-5/6 protected, Recording, viewing and management solution for network surveillance
system with 96 channels pre-licenced including mobile viewing license. The digital video storage
array shall have inbuilt 96 TB HDD Storage, 7200 rpm, SATA, HDD, with two (2) redundant
power supplies. The system shall have minimum 8 GB DDR3 RAM, and per channel min 3 - 4
M bits per seconds band width.

The detail of the system proposed shall be as follows:

Megapixel IR Bullet/ Box Camera: -

The HD megapixel IR IP Bullet camera shall adopt 1/2.8" or better progressive scan CMOS sensor
or better with H.264 /M-JPEG video compression format allows image output resolution up to
2592x1944p@[Link] camera shall support minimum two simultaneous video streams
functioned with ICR day/night switch, motion detection, privacy mask, alarm input/output, the
camera shall be bound to enhance security and convenience for your CCTV surveillance system.
The built-in motorized zoom lens with the focal length of minimum 2.7-13.5mm should adjusts vari
focal length remotely. The high-power LED illuminators shall provide with long lifespan, allowing
a minimum of 80m illumination distance. With Smart-IR technology, it shall change power
consumption of IR illuminators according to the ambient light.

Camera
Image Sensor 1/2.8" CMOS
Signal System PAL/NTSC
Min. Illumination Color: 0.01Lux@ (F1.2-1.6 , ACG ON), B/W: 0Lux with IR
Shutter Time 1s to 1/100,00s
Day & Night Dual IR Cut Filter with Auto Switch
Wide Dynamic Range 120dB as per IEC62676
Angle Adjustment pan 0~330°, tilt 0~75°, roate 0~350°
Lens
Lens Type Motorized
Lens 3.2-10mm
Lens Mount Φ14
Illuminator

IR Range Minimum 40 meter m

Wavelength 850nm
Compression Standard
Video Compression H.265+/H.265/H.264/M-JPEG
Video Bit Rate 32Kbps~16Mbps
Audio Compression G.711A/G.711U/ADPCM/AAC
Audio Bit Rate 8K~48Kbps
Image
Signature of Contractor Page 283 PWD-GoR
 Max. Resolution 1920 x1080 @ 25 fps Volume 5 Technical Specificatio ns

Main Stream 1920 x1080 @25fps

Sub Stream PAL: 25fps (704×576,

PAL: 25fps(1920x1080, 1280x720, 704x576, 704x288, 640×480,

Third Stream
352x288)
Saturation, brightness, contrast, sharpness, adjustable by client
Image Setting
software or web browser
Image Enhancement BLC/3D DNR/HLC/Corridor Format
ROI Support 8 fixed regions of coding

OSD 16×16, 24×24, 32×32, 48×48, 64x64, 96x96, adaptable size, Letters
Such as Week, Date, Time, Total 8 Regions
Picture Overlay Yes
Privacy Mask Yes, 8 regions
Smart Compression Yes
Feature
Event Input, Event Output, Motion Detection, Mask Alarm, Disk Full,
Alarm Trigger Disk R/W Error, IP Address
Con ict, MAC Address Con ict, FTP Server Exception

line crossing, object removal, counting, direction, motion detection

Video Analytics

Network
Yes, auto store video in SD card when NVR disconnected, and
ANR
upload video to NVR when resumed connection
TCP/IP, ICMP, HTTP, HTTPS, DHCP, DNS, DDNS, RTP, RTSP,
Protocols RTCP, PPPoE, MULTICAST, UPnP, FTP, IPV4,
NTP, SMTP, IGMP, 802.1x, QoS, IPV6, ARP, UDP, SNMP, SSL,
SIP, Telnet, SNTP, RTMP, SFTP, NFS
System Compatibility ONVIF S,G,T
Remote Connection ≤7
Client Station, View
Web Version Web6
Interface
Communication
Interface 1 RJ45 10M/ 100M self-adaptive Ethernet port
Audio 1/1,
Alarm 1/1
Reset Button Yes
On-board storage Built-in Micro SD card slot, minimum 256 GB
General
Web Client Language English
Operating Conditions -35°C~65°C, 0~95% RH -10°C~60°C
Power Supply DC12V±25%/PoE
Power Consumption MAX: 7.5W (12V) MAX: 9W (PoE)

Protection IP67, IK10, NEMA 4X

Approval UL, CE, FCC

Signature of Contractor Page 284 PWD-GoR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

IR Dome Camera: -

Camera
Image Sensor 1/2.8" CMOS
Signal System PAL/NTSC
Min. Illumination Color: 0.01Lux@ (F1.6, ACG ON), B/W: 0Lux with IR
Shutter Time 1s to 1/100,00s
Day & Night Dual IR Cut Filter with Auto Switch
Wide Dynamic Range 120dB as per IEC62676
Angle Adjustment pan 0~330°, tilt 0~75°, roate 0~350°
Lens
Lens Type Motorized
Focus 3.2-10 mm
Lens Mount Φ14
Aperture F1.6~F3.3, Fixed
FOV Horizontal field of view: 103.4°~23.8°
Illuminator
IR Range Minimum 40 meter
Wavelength 850nm
Compression Standard
Video Compression H.265+/H.265/H.264/M-JPEG
Video Bit Rate 32Kbps~16Mbps
Audio Compression G.711A/G.711U/ADPCM/AAC
Audio Bit Rate 8K~48Kbps
Image
Max. Resolution 1920 x1080 @25fps

Main Stream PAL: 25fps, 1920 x1080

Sub Stream PAL: 25fps (704×576,

Third Stream PAL: 25fps(1920x1080, 1280x720,

Saturation, brightness, contrast, sharpness, adjustable by client

Image Setting
software or web browser
Image Enhancement BLC/3D DNR/HLC/Corridor Format
ROI Support 8 fixed regions of coding
16×16, 24×24, 32×32, 48×48, 64x64, 96x96, adaptable size, Letters
OSD
Such as Week, Date, Time, Total 8 Regions
Picture Overlay Yes
Privacy Mask Yes, 8 regions
Smart compression Yes
Feature
Event Input, Event Output, Motion Detection, Mask Alarm, Disk Full,
Alarm Trigger Disk R/W Error, IP Address Con ict, MAC Address Con ict, FTP
Server Exception

Signature of Contractor Page 285 PWD-GoR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

Video Analytics
line crossing, object removal, counting, direction, motion detection
Network
ANR Yes, auto store video in SD card when NVR disconnected, and
upload video to NVR when resumed connection
TCP/IP, ICMP, HTTP, HTTPS, DHCP, DNS, DDNS, RTP, RTSP,
Protocols RTCP, PPPoE, MULTICAST, UPnP, FTP, IPV4, NTP, SMTP, IGMP,
802.1x, QoS, IPV6, ARP, UDP, SNMP, SSL, SIP, Telnet, SNTP,
RTMP, SFTP, NFS
System Compatibility ONVIF S.,G,T
Remote Connection ≤7
Client Station, View
Web Version Web6
Interface
Communication
Interface 1 RJ45 10M/ 100M self-adaptive Ethernet port
Audio 1/1, Mic in
Alarm 1/1
Reset Button Yes
On-board storage Built-in Micro SD card slot, up to 256 GB
General
Web Client Language English
Operating Conditions -10°C~55°C
Power Supply DC12V±25%/PoE
Power Consumption MAX: 7.5W (12V) MAX: 9W (PoE)

Protection IP66, IK10, NEMA 4X

Approval UL, CE, FCC

Pan- tilt-zoom Camera: -

Camera
Image Sensor 1/2.8" CMOS
Signal System PAL/NTSC
Min. Illumination Color: 0.05 lux@ (F1.5, ACG ON), BW: 0lux with IR
Shutter Time 1s to 1/100,00s
Day & Night Dual IR Cut Filter
Wide Dynamic 90Db
Range
Optical Zoom 30×
Digital Zoom 12×
Lens
Focal Length 4.5- 135mm
Zoom Speed <5s
Angle of View Horizontal field of view: 69.5° (w)~2.7° (t)
Aperture Range F1.5~F4.0
Pan & Tilt
Pan Range 360°
Pan Speed Pan Manual Speed: 0.1°~100 °/s, Pan Preset Speed: 240°/s
Tilt Range 15 °C~90° (Auto ip)
Tilt Speed Tilt Manual Speed: 0.1°~50 °/s, Tilt Preset Speed: 140°/s
Signature of Contractor Page 286 PWD-GoR
 3D Position Yes Volume 5 Technical Specification s

Presets 256
Preset Accuracy ±0.4°
Scan 8
Cruise 16, up to 32 presets per cruise
Pattern 8, each with 600s memory or 1000 orders
Power off Memory Yes
Illuminator
IR LEDs 2/4
IR Range Up to 150m
IR Irradiation Angle Adjustable by Zoom
Compression Standard
Video Compression H.265+/H.265/H.264/M-JPEG
Video Bit Rate 32 Kbps to 16 Mbp
Audio G.711A/G.711U/ADPCM/AAC
Compression
Audio Bit Rate 8K~48Kbps
Image
Max. Resolution 1920x 1080@25fps
Main Stream 1920 x 1080
Sub Stream PAL: 25fps (704×576, 704×288, 640×360, 352×288)
NTSC: 30fps (704×480, 704×240, 640×360, 352×240)\
Third Stream PAL: 25fps (704×576, 640×480, 352×288) NTSC: 30fps (704×480,
640×480, 352×240)
Image Setting Saturation, brightness, contrast, sharpness, adjustable by client software
or web browser
Image Enhancement BLC/3D/DNR/HLC
ROI 7 Dynamic Areas for Both Main and Sub Stream
OSD 16×16, 24×24,32×32, 48×48, 64x64, 96x96, adaptable size, Letters
Such as Week, Date, Time, Total 5 Regions
Picture Overlay Yes
Privace Mask Yes

Feature

Network
Protocols TCP/IP, ICMP, HTTP, HTTPS, DHCP, DNS, DDNS, MULTICAST,
UPnP, FTP, IPV4, NTP, RTSP, SMTP,IGMP, QoS,
System Compatibility ONVIF (PROFILE S),

ANR Auto store video in SD card when NVR disconnected, and upload video
to NVR when resumed connection (Only Support RoyalShield ANR
NVR)
Remote Connection ≤7
Client Royal Station, Royal View
Web Version Web5
Communication 1 RJ45 10M/100M self-adaptive Ethernet port
Interface
Audio 1/1
Alarm 1/1
Reset Button Yes
On-board Storage Built-in MicroSD card slot, up to 128 GB
General
Web Client English
Language
Operating Conditions -30°C~ 60 °C, 0-95% RH
Power Supply AC24V±15%
Power Consumption 21W (IR OFF), 44W (IR ON)
Protection IP66, NEMA 4X, UL, CE, FCC, IK10

Signature of Contractor Page 287 PWD-GoR

 s

NVR & Intelligent Network Video Management Software.

A Network video recorder (NVR) shall be inclusive of computer system & a software program
that records video in a digital format with mass storage device. An NVR shall be typically deployed
in an IP video surveillance system.

The NVR shall be useful for Various Applications

 Centralized management of IP cameras, including configuration, information
import/export, real-time information display, upgrade, etc.
 Connectable to smart IP cameras and the recording, playing back, and backing up of VCA
alarms can be realized
 VCA detection alarm is supported
 Smart search for the selected area in the video and smart playback to improve the
playback efficiency
 Web6 supports plug-in free browsing and can preview videos on all browsers

3. IPABX SYSTEM: -

RJ-45 telephone socket outlets with suitable IP instruments shall be provided in all building at
convenient locations as required cat-6 wiring shall be provided in recessed/surface
conduits/raceways from each telephone point up to the rack panel (Patch panel & switch) at each
floor or nearest rack panel of all buildings/blocks as per dbr. The maximum length of the Cat-6
cable shall be 80M.

IPABX system shall be expandable up to 15000 extensions with single server and up to 100000
in network mode.

IP Phone type 1 shall be 2 X 10/100/1000 MBPS ports, 128X64 graphical display with backlit or
better, temperature support of -5 to 45 C. IPv6 compliant, PoE

IP Phone type 2 shall be 2 X 10/100/1000 MBPS ports, 240X320 graphical display or better, RJ9
and 3.5 mm Jack for headsets, 68 Soft keys, alphanumeric Keyboard, temperature support of -5
to 45 C , IPv6 compliant, PoE

Signature of Contractor Page 288 PWD-GoR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications
The detail of the system proposed shall be as follows:

Redundant Industry Standard Server based on IP at core with hot standby configuration equipped upto
700 IP extensions. Each System should be expandable up to 15000 Extensions with single server and
up to 100,000 in network mode.

1 System Architecture
1.1 The telephony system should be designed with IP at the core Server & Gateway type
communications system, allowing fully distributed IP solutions across data networks. The
system will be call servers based and it should support traditional TDM or mixed IP-TDM or full
100% IP configurations, telephony, gateway, end points & all telephony application should be
from same OEM & PRI card should not be installed in any PC / Server

It should support the following devices :-

(i) IP Communication Devices e.g. IP Phones, Video Phones, Multimedia PCs, SIP phones,
Softphones or H.323 terminal devices etc.
(ii) Legacy TDM communication devices (Digital and analog 2 Wire telephone instruments with
Caller-ID
1.2 The call control servers should be fully redundant solution The solution must provide
geographical redundancy by separating the servers over LAN/WAN. I.e. if the server in the
main data center fails, the other server, which is installed at geographically different location
over LAN/WAN should take over the entire communication network load.

1.3 Call control server / appliance should be Intel based hardware with necessary configuration to
support the desired expandability. No proprietary hardware is acceptable. It is desired to have
support for virtualization. Call Server should be from industry standard vendors like
HP/DELL/LENOVO. Virtualization technologies i.e. VMware to be supported for call server with
V-Motion. The solution must be delivered in a virtualized environment, however for redundancy,
two separate physical servers to be considered..

Call control server / appliance must be 19” rack-mountable solution & should have following
specification.
i. Intel Xeon 3 GHz Processor or higher
ii. Shall have 4 Cores or higher
iii. Shall have min 8 GB RAM
iv. Shall have 1 TB HDD
v. Dual Gigabit Ethernet Port
vi. Shall have DVD+/-RW
vii. Shall Support RAID
1.4 The system should be capable of supporting analog and IP Telephones. Necessary licenses
for the asked users should be enabled from day-1. However, the IP EPABX system should
have the capability to scale up to 15000 users to achieve the future capacity on the same
hardware that is supplied as part of this RFP.

1.5 The system should manage CAC (Call Admission Control) mechanisms to optimize the usage
of the bandwidth in the WAN for multi-site configurations.
1.6 The system should be capable of supporting a very high traffic and should support a Busy Hour
Completion (BHCC) of 2,50,000 per hour.
1.7 The IP PBX should be day one ready with full telephony Feature/Functionality, all necessary
hardware should be provisioned from day one for this. Full SIP (able to connect 3rd Party SIP
Phone & SIP Trunk (Public & Private) capability. The main functions of SIP capability should
provide SIP networking (Public & private) and support SIP endpoints in a converged
communications network.
1.8 All the users to be managed in a single database, which is managed centrally, no multiple
databases & bundling of Telephony system will not consider to meet Specification & scalability.
Signature of Contractor Page 289 PWD-GoR
 1.9 The voice network architecture and call control functionality should support both SIP & H.323.
1.1 The system should be based on server gateway architecture with external server running on
Linux OS.
1.11 The system should be able to operate with H.323/SIP compliant device and it should be able
to support internal gatekeeper for the same.
1.12 The SIP proxy, SIP registrar should be inbuilt in the system and should support open SIP stack
compliant hard phones or soft phones also.
1.13 IPv6 support from day one & The quoted model should be TEC approved. Vendor to submit
TEC approval certificate along with the bid.
1.14 The system should have non blocking architecture at all levels & must support more than 512
time slot
1.15 The system should support for voice encoding using following standards:-
(i) G.711
(ii) G.729A
(iii) G.722
1.16 Call Switching. Internal calls: Based on the G.711 uncompressed PCM standard.
1.17 The System should support Network Time Protocol V4.1.2 (RFC 1305) to synchronize the
system date/time of network devices.
1.18 The system should be suitable to accommodate both Decadic Pulse (DP) and DTMF
telephones. The system should support outgoing DTMF transmission even from Digital phones.
1.19 The system should have non- blocking architecture at all levels like System processing,
Switching fabric, power supplies, other resources like DTMF receivers, R2 Receivers, unlimited
3 or more party conference circuits.
1.2 VoIP Support. System should support VoIP solutions as an integral part of the system.
(i) The system should be fully compliant to VoIP standards like H.323 and SIP (Session Initiation
Protocol). Vendor to give clear compliance for the requested standards.
(ii) The system should be able to operate with any H.323/SIP compliant device and it should
be able to support internal gatekeeper for the same. If required, it should be able to inter operate
with H.323 standard based external gatekeepers.
(iii) The SIP proxy, SIP registrar should be inbuilt in the system and should support any open
SIP stack compliant hard phones or soft phones.
(iv) System should support the QOS features for the VOIP implementation. It should be
compliant with both QOS standards (Layer 2 – 802.1 p/q) and Layer 3- Diffserv/TOS).

1.21 IPv6. IPv6 support from day one. Solution should support dual stack environments. The quoted
model should be TEC approved. Vendor to submit TEC approval certificate along with the bid

1.22 The proposed system should Support Automatic Route Selection (ARS) and Least Cost
Routing (LCR) features to route the calls based on priorities related to user profile and network
availability, along the most cost-effective path. This service should be transparent for users and
irrespective of the physical carrier connection.

1.23 Should provide a cloud-based, enterprise-grade, Communication Platform thus delivering a

collaborative business application extending features viz. Instant Messaging/Telephony
Presence, click to call (dial by name, answer, release), Call Log, P2P Audio/Screen Sharing.
The same should be included in BOQ for all extensions

1.23.1 Cloud based UC should have the following UC features

- Customizable Logo
- Local Administrator
- User self-enrolment & profile management

Signature of Contractor Page 290 PWD-GoR

 - Instant Messaging / Presence Volume 5 Technical Specifications

- Peer to Peer Audio / Video / Screen Sharing

- Minimum 1GB storage space
- Team/Group with minimum 20 users
1.23.2 Telephony Services of the UC solution should support
- Click to call, dial by name, answer and release
- Call logs
- Presence management
1.24 The system must support an IP Softphone application that allows the users to manage their
calls from a PC or MAC/iPhone/iPAD/Android. This user must have access to the full set of
telephony services without any degradation. The voice should be manage by the multimedia
resources of the PC.

1.25 Offered solution must support at least 200 remote media gateways
1.26 OEM Should be present in Gartner Magic Quadrant
2 System Security
2.1 The System must support Syslog services for both internal and external command and
configuration control accounting with a minimum of 30 day history.
2.2 The Call Server must be provided adequate protection from possible virus, worm and Trojan
infestation
2.3 The Call Server must be provided adequate protection from possible virus, worm and Trojan
infestation points such as internal e-mail servers and they must be updated every month. In
case customized hardened linux distributions are being provided this clause will not be
applicable.

2.4 The password and access control must include at least :-

(i) Management console access to be provided by dual role based authentication (one of user
rep and one of administrator rep).
(ii) Management console access must allow only access to level of viewing of running
configuration and status of current configurations and sys logs.
(iii) For any configuration changes again, a dual role based authentication system for write
access fully integrated with the management console application for carrying out the authorized
configuration changes must be provided.

(iv) Logs of all activities to include configuration change, housekeeping activities and any
other action on the system grouped user wise and specifying the time of activity must be
available for each day.

(v) Account access authentication/ restriction using external RADIUS/ LDAP/ AD resources.
2.5 Media Gateways should not host services such as proxy, FTP or local dynamic routing except
those required for software Up-gradation /backup etc. to prevent exploitation in Distributed
Denial of Service attacks.

2.6 IP Phones should not support direct, external initiated, connections via HTTP, telnet, FTP,
TFTP or any other protocol as means to prevent distributed Denial of Service attack
exploitation, except those required for software Up gradation/backup etc.

2.7 IP Phones must support 802.1 x (EAP-MD5 or better) for authentication and access control to
the network, this mechanism must allow the user to be connected to the call server once he
has passed the authentication process, not before.
2.8 The system should have the capability to, based on standard mechanism (such as 802.1Q and
DHCP), assign automatically the corresponding voice VLAN number to the IP station clients
during IP station initialization, allowing for the separation of voice and data traffic at IP station.

Signature of Contractor Page 291 PWD-GoR

 Support for Commercial grade encryption security with minimum 128 bit key security for both
signaling and voice with in a node for all IP subscribers – IP subscriber communications.
2.1 Support for Commercial grade secrecy with minimum 128 bit key encryption security for both
signaling and voice for inter-node communication between same type of exchs over IP trunks
in which all traffic between analog/digital/IP over the IP trunk must be encrypted for both
signaling and data.

2.11 Supported Commercial grade encryption System should use randomly generated keys
derived from base keys for every voice and signaling session established by the system.
Supporting documents to be provided for the same.
3 System Management
3.1 Should provide a dedicated management server/platform that will be based on the latest
technologies. This server should support a minimum of five or more clients having different
access rights to the applications.

3.2 The management platform should provide a single graphical client (Graphical User Interface
(GUI)) as well as a web based interface for all voice elements used in the IP PBX network.

3.3 The Management platform should provide web access allowing the administrator to manage
the system to use any PC with an internet browser.
3.4 The management platform should provide the following tasks, as per the ask :-

3.5 (i) Configuration and programming

(aa) Services, users, categories and all system parameters and features.
(ab) Provide centralized management in local or remote environments of a single system or a
network.
(ac) The network manager will be able to quickly and easily edit, create or delete any subscriber
profile/network object by the use of import/export functions and multiple operations.

(ii) Faults and Alarms management

(aa) All the incidents and fail reports generated by the system itself informing date, hour and
severity.
(ab)This module must be able to centralize the alarms and Events of the System and give
colors according to the severity level of the alarm.
(ac) Notify an alarm depending on the severity level sending an e-mail or activating a script
performing a specific action.
(ad) Register and generate statistics for the alarms and events in the network on a daily basis.
(iii) Fault diagnosis Generate reports and graphics about the statistics of the alarms.

(v) Directory module should offer directory module to manage the telephone directory. This
must be LDAP compatible and the exchange directory should be available on web. The LDAP
server and web server application should be integral to the exchange synchronized with other
directory applications, must also allow web access and provide information on all desktops
allowing click to call features to the users.

(vi) Integrated Directory. It shall be possible to provide display equipped voice terminals with
access to system directory on digital and IP phones. Also System should support internal and
external LDAP directory. Any internal user can use it by browsing the URL link from his
laptop/PC to see the directory and dial the required no by selecting under LDAP directory.

Signature of Contractor Page 292 PWD-GoR

 (vii) Call Metering and Accounting The log of local to local call should be supported The log of
local to trunk call in both directions (incoming as well as outgoing) should be maintained in the
exchange in the hard disk. Should support Malicious Call Trace.

(viii) Reports The management platform must allow the administrator to generate reports and
graphics of the activity per period of time in terms of traffic, accounting and alarms and giving
the possibility to generate statistic of all this analysis. Those reports must be predefined but the
option to personalize the reports must be also available. These reports should be exportable in
HTML, pdf, excel and TXT formats.

(ix) Monitoring Module which allows the administrator to easily monitor the accounting
thresholds of the users of cost centers in graphical interface and must allow to send an e-mail
or an alarm in case of threshold crossing.
4 System Survivability
4.1 The system should offer maximum availability, with the switchover of call control processing
functions to an alternate or redundant processor in the event of significant fault. The
redundancy scheme should conform to the model used in most computer systems: the
complete "mirroring" of the information (both static and dynamic data.) The switch over between
2 call servers in LAN (L2 network) or WAN location (L3 Network) should not interrupt existing
and established communications to include all analog, digital, hard, soft and Video IP Phones.
The complete set of programs and software modules must be duplicated in real time. In case
of failure of the main Server (hardware or software), the standby Server (emergency mirror)
must take over the control of communications instantaneously.

4.2 All critical resource elements (call server, hard disks, data bases, IP interfaces, DSP resources,
clocking sources, Processor, RAM, Tone generators, All the IO ports – serial and Ethernet
TCP/IP ports, Ring generators, resources like DTMF receivers, Tone detectors, Media Gateway
Control Cards etc.) must be redundant and in a hot-standby configuration

4.3 Remote Media Gateway should support survival mechanism that allows them to maintain
minimum number of essential telephony services for their users, in case of failure in the WAN
links where the signaling with the call server drops.

4.4 The management platform must provide a backup mechanism for all critical system information
in a both manual and an automatic/schedule archival and a Disaster Recovery Mechanism.

4.5 Replacement of cards without switching off exchange (hot swappable) including the control
cards and peripheral/interface cards.
4.6 All the tone generation and tone detection should be local to the gateway.
4.7 The system should be able to restart automatically without human intervention when the
external ac power supply is resumed after complete power failure i.e Even after batteries are
discharged.

4.8 The call server should support the two or more different Geographically locations more than 10
Kms in the network.
4.9 Life Cycle of entire exchange system being provided should be minimum Five years, 1-year
warranty & 5 year AMC support
4.1 OEM should have Technical Assistance Center based in India with Toll free number
5 Physical
5.1 Call Server Should support expansion up to 15000 subscriber ports.
5.2 System should have minimum 24 universal slots in single cabinet/chassis for trunk and TDM
extension interfaces
5.3 Media Gateway shall work on 48V DC. Should have backup batteries powering it for 4 hrs.
5.4 Environmental Conditions

Signature of Contractor Page 293 PWD-GoR

 The equipment offered shall be capable of maintaining its guaranteed performance when
operating continuously for 24 hours a day and 365 days a year under the following
environmental conditions: - MTBF Document to be provided
(i) Operating temperature: 0 to 45-degree C.
(ii) Storage -5 degree C to +45 degree C.
(iii) Humidity 20% to 80% without condensation
5.5 The exchange cabinet should have top/side fans (integrated with system) for cooling the system
rack/cabinet.
5.6 Must have universal slots and cards should be interchangeable without switching off the
exchange or removing power supply for the shelf.
6 System Features
6.1 Numbering Scheme The IP PBX should be suitable for up to 8-digit extension numbering
scheme. This numbering scheme should be flexible. System should also allow mixed
numbering scheme.

6.2 The system should provide distinctive ringing for internal calls, junction calls, auto call backs,
back up service and emergency reporting service.
6.3 The system should support the attribution of an external number DDI or individual line or a
bundle head to a trunk, a bundle, an attendant, a group of attendants, a subscriber, a group of
subscriber or virtual equipment. The unanswered DDI communication can overflow, to
Attendant or attendant group, Local subscriber, Network subscriber, Voice mailbox, automated
attendant, abbreviated number, External number.

6.4 The proposed system should support automatic route selection (ARS) and least cost routing
(LCR) features to route the calls based on priorities related to user profile, tariff, and network
availability, along the most cost-effective path. This service will be transparent for users and
irrespective of the physical carrier connection.
6.5 Voice guidance Telephone features to be offered as standard.
6.6 DTMF and Busy Tone Resources As many busy tone detectors are to be offered as the number
of trunks.
6.7 Basic Telephone Features
(i) Abbreviated dialing, Appointment reminder, Automatic call-back on busy
trunk/bundle/network link, Automatic DISA, user authentication, call forwarding unconditional
on busy/no reply to extension, hunting group, Voice mail, operator, paging etc.
(ii) Immediate forwarding Call pick-up. Call parking, Call waiting indication/ voice prompt.

(iii) Calling line identification restriction for internal calls Camp on busy telephone/hunting
group/voice mail, Controlled private call by Pin code and password.
(iv) Do not disturb, Dynamic call baring General night service Hunting group (fix head cyclic,
longest idle time, parallel)
(v) Internal/external music on hold internal/external inquiry call individual hold instrument
locking to prevent the outgoing.
(vi) 28 Party Meet-me Conferencing. Should support 20 such Meet-Me Conference Bridges
(vi) Last internal/external number redial, Personal code modification, Store and redial external
number, Transfer in conversation on free/busy telephone.
6.8 CLI coming in from ISDN PRI trunks should be displayed on Analog Telephones, Digital
Telephones and IP Telephones.
6.9 External Holding Tone The offered system should be ready to accept music on hold from an
external PC of CD player.
6.1 When all attended consoles are engaged, the external caller shall be informed of this situation
by voice message. The call should be routed to the least loaded operator.
6.11 System should have embedded Call Center with 5 agent, 1 supervisor and MIS Reporting.

Signature of Contractor Page 294 PWD-GoR

 - Configuration of the call routing and distribution rules Volume 5 Technical Specifications

- Real-time supervision of the agents

- Real-time observation of the traffic
- Production of statistics in an Excel compatible file
6.12 System should have internal directory for up to 12000 entries for independent directory access
7 System Network Support
7.1 Should Support Q SIG standards over IP/ TDM/ WAN trunks.
(i) Heterogeneous, open numbering plan.
(ii) Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation and Restriction
(iii) Calling/Connected Name Identification Presentation and Restriction.
(iv) Call Forwarding Unconditional, Busy, No Reply ,Call Transfer.
(v) Call Completion to Busy Subscriber, on No Reply, call Offer.
7.2 The system should have options to network over any of MPLS, IP, ISDN
7.3 The system must support the following external telephony interface signaling:-
(i) E1 CCS PRI
(ii) E1 CAS (R2 MFC )
(iii) ISDN PRI (ETSI)
(iv) Analog Loop Start and Ground Start
8 Voice Mail Features
8.1 General. The system should offer a software based voice mail of the same OEM, offering the
best interactivity with user. The voice mail must work as a centralized resource in case remotes
are connected to the main exchange.
8.2 The Voice Mail provided by the vendor should be based on industry standard server. Card
based or 3rd party Voice Mail solution are not Acceptable/Disqualified
8.3 Service Support
(i) Must support Voice messaging features allowing the owner of a mailbox to send messages to
other mailbox users, whether they are part of the same system or remote users.
(ii) Should support Automated attendant (automatic switchboard) features allowing the voice mail
system to act like an attendant: answer incoming calls, transfer them to a requested or
predefined number or mailbox, using addressing by name or by number.
(iii) Shall support e-Messaging service, allowing mailbox owners to access their voice mail from a
remote PC (e-mail client) via the IP network.
(iv) Should support E Mail Messenger - A client-server application dedicated to Lotus Notes and
Microsoft Outlook for voice message manipulation right from the e-mail client.
8.4 Mailboxes and Access Control.
(i) Number of mailboxes as per requirement.
8.5 Voice Messaging System.
(i) Call answering or call/record answering function with time stamp.
(ii) Customization of an announcement.
(iii) Call forwarding to the voice mail.
(iv) System should support on line live conversation recording.
(v) Message notification.
9 Analog Subscriber card.
Should have 16/24/32 or more ports
Each port should support CLIP features (FSK or DTMF)
Loop Resistance >1700 ohms
Should have 16/24/32 or More ports.
Each port should support CLIP features (FSK or DTMF).

Signature of Contractor Page 295 PWD-GoR

 Loop resistance > 400 Ohms Volume 5 Technical Specifications

Provide digital ports for connecting digital telephones

10 SIP /IP Telephone (Type-1)
10.1 Display: 132 x 64 pixel graphic monochrome
display, 5 simultaneous lines shown with backlight, View area: 31.5 mm X 61mm (1.24 in X 2.4
in) or better
Gigabit Ethernet 10/100/1000 connectivity for LAN and PC
802.3AF Power over Ethernet (PoE) - Class 0
2 SIP account keys
• Conference key
• Redial key
• Transfer key
• Hold key
Audio codec: G.711 (A-law and μ-law), G.723.1, G.729AB, G.722, Supports VAD, CNG, AEC,
AJB, Volume controls, Mute control
• Message key with LED
• Headset key with LED
• Call indication LED
• Cancel key
• 4-way navigation and OK key
Management
• Auto-provisioning via FTP/TFTP/HTTP/ HTTPS (for settings and firmware upgrade/download)
• Configuration via Browser/phone/auto- provisioning
• Support Telnet
• Support LLDP
• Trace package and system log export
Support DHCP and static IP
QoS
• 802.1p (SIP and RTP QoS)
• DSCP
Security
• 802.1x
• Support VPN
• VLAN tagging (802.1q)
• Transport Layer Security (TLS)
• Digest authentication using MD5/MD5-sess
• Secure configuration file via AES, encryption
• Admin/user 2-level configuration mode
Phonebook
• Individual phonebook (300 entries)
• LDAP/XML directory service
Phone should be from same EPABX OEM.
10.2 SIP /IP Telephone (Type-2)
Display: 3.5-inch color,
240 x 320 pixels, effective display area
size 70.08 x 52.56 mm2, LD Backlight, Ambient light sensor, back shell busy light indicator

Gigabit Ethernet 10/100/1000 connectivity for LAN and PC

Signature of Contractor Page 296 PWD-GoR

 Class 2 Power over Ethernet (IEEE 802.3af), Energy Efficient Ethernet 802.3 az support
Full-duplex speakerphone, acoustic echo cancellation
Upto 68 Soft keys.
Wideband G722, G711 (A-law and Mu-law), G729 AB, voice activity detection (VAD), comfort
noise generation (CNG)
Support DHCP and static IP
QoS support: IEEE 802.1p/Q tagging (VLAN), Layer 3 TOS, and DSCP
Magnetic Alphabetic Keyboard.
Operating Temperature: - -5C to +45C.
Ipv4/IPv6 support
10.3 Operator Console
Hardware Based Operator Consoles
Display: 3.5-inch color,
240 x 320 pixels, effective display area
size 70.08 x 52.56 mm2, LD Backlight, Ambient light sensor, back shell busy light indicator

Gigabit Ethernet 10/100/1000 connectivity for LAN and PC

Class 2 Power over Ethernet (IEEE 802.3af), Energy Efficient Ethernet 802.3 az support
Full-duplex speakerphone, acoustic echo cancellation
Support for Wideband BLUETOOTH handset
Wideband G722, G711 (A-law and Mu-law), G729 AB, voice activity detection (VAD), comfort
noise generation (CNG)
Support DHCP and static IP

4. Computer /LAN Networking/ Wi - fi points: -

RJ 45 data outlets points will be provided for computers, Networking, telephone, wi-fi, Access,
CCTV, Information display, BMS, Scada etc. as per requirement in rooms and other area at
various floors in all the blocks/buildings. The data outlet points shall be connected to rack
Panel/Computer hub with cat 6 wiring raceways, recessed/surface conduit as required. Ups
Power supply shall be provided to Network Rack, Servers & Computers wherever required. The
maximum length of the cat6 cable from end user point to Hub or Edge switch shall not be more
than 90M. Beyond 90M length fibre optic cable shall be used.
Switch Shall be of following configuration
 20 Nos. of SFP+ (10G) Port and expansion slot for additional module
 48 x 1/10G SFP/SFP+ Ports and 6 x 40/100G QSFP Ports
 28 Nos. of SFP+ (10G) Port and additional 4 SFP+ Ports
 24 10/100/1000Base-T ports + 2 1/10G SFP+ + 4 10G SFP+ ports, L2 Stackable Managed
Switch Power Budget of 600 Watts
 8 Port Rugged switch having at least 3 HPOE port +4 SFP port
 22 Port Rugged switch having at least 8 HPOE port
 4 Port POE+ Rugged switch at least 2 HPOE port

Signature of Contractor Page 297 PWD-GoR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

The detail of the system proposed shall be as follows:

Core & distribution Layer-3 Switch with minimum 20 Nos. of SFP+ (10G) Port and expansion slot
for additional module

Sr. No. Parameters Minimum specification

Port Density & 20 x 10G SFP+ Ports
1 Redundancy Chassis or Virtual chassis 1+N redundant supervisor manager
Redundant Hot Swappable Power Supply - AC/DC
2 Power Supply Redundant Fan module
Should support additional module to support 12SFP+ or 4 SFP+
3 Expansion Support and 2 QSFP module
4 Scalability Unified virtual chassis with support for up to6 switches
5 RAM 2GB or better
6 Switching Capacity 840Gbps or better
7 Throughput 480 Mbps or better
Support for Egress rate limiting, Eight egress queues per port,
8 Quality of Service IEEE 802.1Qbb, 802.3x, Diff Serv Ipv4/IPv6

IGMP Snooping V1, V2, V3, MLD, PIM-SM/PIM-SSM/PIM-

DM/PIM-Bidirectional, DVMRP, OSPF, RIP, BGP, IS-IS, ITU-T
G.8032, IEEE 802.1s, IEEE 802.3ad/802.1AX Link Aggregation
Control Protocol (LACP), Ipv4/Ipv6, DHCP Option 82, BPDU,
9 Protocol Support STP Root Guard, SPB Support
SNMP V1,V2,V3, Web GUI, CLI, USB or equivalent memory
card, IP v6 management feature on open standards,
10 Management IEEE802.1ag, TDM or equivalent standards

Should support Access Control Lists (ACLs), DHCP snooping,

IEEE802.1x based port authentication, RADIUS/ TACACS+,
11 Security SSL, SSH, port mirroring,NTP, IEEE 1588, AES/TLS, MD5
IEEE802.1q, IEEE802.1d, IEEE802.1s, IEEE802.1w, ring
12 Resiliency resilience/ring protection, 802.3AD, 802.1AX, VRRP

Should support FCoE transit switching, FC to FCoE gateway,

FC tunneling over FCoE, HBA tunneling to SAN, ISL tunnel,
13 FCoE/SAN Dynamic session load balance, FC-PI-4 and FC-PI-5
Operating
14 Temperature 0 to 45Deg

CE, EN 55022/55024,
US UL 60950, CSA22.2
FIPS 140-2, EAL2 or equivalent
EN 60825-1/2 Laser
15 Safety Certifications Surge protection of 1.5KV on all copper ports
The bidder shall be OEM of the switch or an authorized
distributor of the OEM. In case of bidder being a distributor,
OEM authorization
authorization certificate from the OEM to quote against the
tender shall be submitted by the bidder.
16
Warranty certificate shall be submitted at the time of supply. The
Warranty certificate
17 warranty certificate shall be from the OEM of the item.

Signature of Contractor Page 298 PWD-GoR

  Distribution Layer-3 Switch for Lan network with minimum 48 x 1/10GVoSluFmP /SFP+ Ports
e 5 Tech ni cal Sp ec i fications

and 6 x 40/100G QSFP and expansion slot for additional module

Sr. No. Parameters COMPLIANCE

The Switch Should have 1+N redundant supervisor manager in
1 Virtual chassis with In-Service Software Upgrade (ISSU)
It should have 48 x 1/10G SFP/SFP+ Ports and 6 x 40/100G QSFP
2 Ports from day one.
3 The switch must be stackable upto 6 Units
4 The switch must support Port mirroring capability.
The switch must be supplied with all stacking modules, cables etc.
5 for at least 2 switches from day 1.
40 Gigabit optical QSFP+ to support maximum link length of 10km on
single mode fiber over 1310 nm wavelength. SFP Should be from the
6 same OEM
7 SFP Should be from the same OEM
Switching Capacity should be 2.1Tbps or more with not less than
8 1500 Mpps Throughput
9 Switch should have 16GB Flash and 8GB RAM
10 Switch should provide latency of <650ns or better
The switch must support minimum 200K MAC address entries with
11 32K IPv4 and 16K Ipv6 Routes.
It should support 40K and 20K IPv4 and Ipv6 Multicast groups
12 respectively
13 ITU-T G.8032/Y1344 2010: Ethernet Ring Protection (ERPv2)
IEEE 802.1D, IEEE 802.1w, IEEE 802.3ad/802.1AX Link
14 Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)
Support for 802.1Qbg, 802.1Qbb, 802.1Qaz,IEEE 802.1Qbb, IEEE
15 802.3x, 802.1aq, BPDU, STP Root Guard and VXLAN
16 SDN support thru restful API, Openflow 1.3.1 and 1.0 agent
Multiple VRF, Internet Control Message Protocol version 6 (ICMPv6),
17 PIM-SSM, PIM-SMm PIM-BiDir
Static routing, RIP V1&V2, RIPng, OSPF v2&v3 with graceful restart,
IS-IS with graceful restart, BGP v4, GRE, VRRP v2&v3, NDP,
18 DHCPv6 server, ARP

IEEE 802.3ba, IEE 1588, 802.3ac, 802.3az, IEEE 802.1p CoS, IEEE
802.1Q VLANs, IEEE 802.1ad Provider Bridges Q-in-Q/ VLAN
stacking, IEEE 802.1ak (MVRP), IEEE 802.1aq Shortest Path
Bridging (SPB), IEEE 80.1ab LLDP, IEEE 802.1ag OAM, IEEE
802.1Qaz ETS/DCBX, IEEE 802.1 CEE 1.01, IEEE 802.1Qbb PFC,
IEEE 802.1s MSTP, IEEE 802.1w RST, IEEE 802.1X Port-based
Network Access Control (PNAC), IEEE 802.3x Flow Control, IEEE
802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP), VRRP and inbuilt
19 CPU protection against malicious attacks
The switch must support interfaces with VMware vCenter® and
Citrix™ XenServer® for discovery and inventory. VMware vCenter
20 integration
21 The switch must support Web-based Management (GUI), SSH v2

22 The switch must support Broadcast & Multicast Rate limiting per port.
23 The switch must support IPv4/IPv6 management.

Signature of Contractor Page 299 PWD-GoR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications
Switch shall conform to following standards
- UL 60950 or IEC 60950 or CSA 60950 or EN 60950
- EN 55022 Class A/B or CISPR22 Class A/B or CE
24 - Certified for EAL 2/NDPP or above
25 Vendor to be present in Gartner Magic Quadrant
26 5 Years from OEM with Toll free number for support in India

24 Port POE+ L2 Switch

Minimum
Sr. No. Parameters
specification
L2 switch with 24 x 1G Base T Port PoE+ with 2 RJ45/SFP combo
1 port and 2 x 1/10G SFP+ with PoE Budget of 380W
2 The switch must be stackable upto 4 Units
3 SFP Should be from the same OEM .
Switching Capacity should be 128 Gbps or more with not less than
4 135 Mpps Throughput
5 Switch should have 1GB Flash and 1GB RAM
The switch must support minimum 16K MAC address entries and 4K
6 VLAN with latency of less than < 4 µs
802.1AB, LLDP-MED, NTP, DHCPv4 and DHCPv6, ISSU, 802.1D,
7 802.1W, PVST+, 802.3ad/802.1AX, MVRP
Same switch should work with onpremise NMS and Cloud based
NMS without change in software and hardware. It should also
8 support automation using JSON, Restful web services and MIB
Static Routing for IPv4 and IPv6, Support NAC solutions from all
leading vendors, 802.1x, Captive portal, SSH with PKI, TACACS+,
9 Radius, LDAP, ACL, BYOD onboarding using all leading vendors
IGMP v1, v2 and v3 snooping with 1000 Multicast groups, UDLD,
MLD Snooping, SPQ and WRR, Eight hardware based queues per
10 port, ARP, Mac address lockdown & Learned port security
The switch must support Web-based Management (GUI), SSH v2,
SNMP v1, v2 and v3, File upload using TFTP, FTP, SFTP or SCP
11 over Ipv4 and Ipv6
Should support Perpetual PoE to power IoT devices during restart
12 with support for following standards - 802.3af, 802.3at and 802.3bt
Switch shall conform to following standards
- UL 60950-1 or IEC 60950-1 or CSA 60950-1 or EN 60950
- EN 55022, EN 55024:2010, EN61000-3-2, Class A/B or CISPR22
Class A/B or CE
- IEC 62368-1:2018
13 - Certified for EAL 2/NDPP or above
14 Vendor to be present in Gartner Magic Quadrant
15 SFP should be of same make as switch.
16 3 Years from OEM with Toll free number for support in India

8 Port POE+ Rugged switch

Sr. Parameters Minimum specification
No.
1 Port Density & 8 x Gigabit Port
Redundancy 4 x SFP Port
2 PoE Standard 3 x HPoE Port
2 x IEEE 802.3af/ IEEE 802.3at or better on all ports simultaneously
3 Stacking Option Minimum 4 units in a stack/Virtual stack or better

Signature of Contractor Page 300 PWD-GoR

 4 Operating -10C to 60C Volume 5 Technical Specifications
temperature
5 RAM 1GB
6 Switching 24 Gb or better
Capacity
7 Quality of Support for Egress rate limiting, Eight egress queues per port, Voice
Service VLAN, DSCP for IP-based QoS, Differentiated services architecture,
IEEE 802.1p Class of Service with strict and weighted round Robin
scheduling.
8 Protocol IGMP Snooping V1, V2, V3, , ITU-T G.8032, IEEE 802.1s, IEEE
Support 802.3ad/802.1AX Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP), Ipv4/Ipv6,
DHCP Option 82, BPDU, STP Root Guard
8 Management SNMP V1,V2,V3, Web GUI, CLI, USB or equivalent memory card, IP v6
management feature on open standards, IEEE802.1ag, TDM or
equivalent standards
9 Security Should support Access Control Lists (ACLs), DHCP snooping,
IEEE802.1x based port authentication, ADIUS/ TACACS+, SSL, SSH,
port mirroring ,NTP, IEEE 1588v2, MACSEC on all ports
10 Resiliency IEEE802.1q, IEEE802.1d, IEEE802.1s, IEEE802.1w, ring
resilience/ring protection
11 Power Supply Redundant Hot Swappable Power Supply - AC/DC
12 Enclosure IP 30 or equivalent Industrial Grade Rating
Rating
13 Operating -40 to 75 deg
Temperature
14 Safety UL 508, UL 61010
Certifications EN 50021, EN 55032
ISA 12.12.01, CSA22.2/213
IEC 60255-21-2, IEC 60255-21-1
RoHS standards
NEMA –TS2

Surge protection of 6KV on all copper ports

Distribution Layer-3 Switch with minimum 28 Nos. of SFP+ (10G) Port and additional 4
SFP+ Ports

Sr. No. Parameters Minimum specification

28 SFP Ports
1 Port Density 4 x 1/10G SFP+ Ports
2 x 40G Stacking Ports
2 Power Supply Redundant Hot Swappable Power Supply - AC/DC
3 Stacking Option Upto 8 Switch
4 RAM 2GB or better
Switching
5 220Gb or better
Capacity
Support for Egress rate limiting, Eight egress queues per port, IEEE
Quality of
6 802.1Q, 802.3x, DiffServ, Jumbo frame
Service
Ipv4/IPv6, MACSEC on 10G uplink ports

IGMP Snooping V1, V2, V3, MLD, PIM-SM/PIM-SSM/PIM-DM/PIM-

Bidirectional, DVMRP, OSPF, RIP, BGP, IS-IS, ITU-T G.8032, IEEE
7 Protocol Support 802.1s, IEEE 802.3ad/802.1AX Link Aggregation Control Protocol
(LACP), Ipv4/Ipv6, DHCP Option 82, BPDU, STP Root Guard, SIP
detection, SPB or MPLS, IEEE 802.1ae, MIB, NTP,

Signature of Contractor Page 301 PWD-GoR

 SNMP V1,V2,V3, Web GUI, CLI, USB or equVivolaumleen5 tTem
chneicm
al o
Spreycifc
ica
atriodn,s
IP
8 Management v6 management feature on open standards, IEEE802.1ag, TDM or
equivalent standards
Should support Access Control Lists (ACLs), DHCP snooping,
9 Security IEEE802.1x based port authentication, RADIUS/ TACACS+, SSL,
SSH, port mirroring, NTP, IEEE 1588, AES, Syslog, MD5, LLDP-MED
IEEE802.1q, IEEE802.1d, IEEE802.1s, IEEE802.1w, ITU-T G.8032
10 Resiliency
ring resilience/ring protection, VRRP
11 Backup/Memory Working memory/ Recovery memory
Operating
12 0 to 45Deg
Temperature
CE, EN 55032, RoHS
Safety US UL 60950, CSA22.2
13
Certifications FIPS 140-2, EAL2 or equivalent
EN 60825-1/2 Laser

Wireless devices parameter

Minimum
Sr. No. Parameters
specification

1 AP shall work with on-premise and cloud based controller without

change in hardware/software with inbuilt BLE/Zigbee capability

2 The WLAN solution shall propose an outdoor 802.11ax MU-MIMO

indoor dual radio AP Access Point (2.4, 5G)
Access Point shall offer up to 1.2 Gbps throughput on the 5Ghz band
3 (low and high bands) and up to 573 Mbps throughput on the 2.4GHz
band.

2 x 10/100/1000Base-T autosensing (RJ-45) port for uplink and 1 x

4 10/100/1000 Base-T for downlink. Partner can propose alternate switch
if downlink port is not available
AP should support ACL, wIPS/wIDS and DPI application, 802.11i,
5
802.1x, 802.11e and 802.1Q
6 Access Point shall propose a Factory reset button
7 Access Point shall support up to 16 SSIDs (8 per radio).
Distributed Radio Management, Radio Dynamic Adjustment (RDA),
8 Transmit Power Control @ 18 dBM(TPC), DFS, HT20, HT40, VHT20,
VHT40, VHT80, HE20, HE40, HE80
9 L2 Roaming & Transmit beamforming
10 802.11r Roaming, 802.11K, 802.11v

11 It should support Advanced Cellular Coexistense (ACC), BPSK, QPSK

and 1024QAM
12 Operating temperature must be 0°C to 45°C
13 Humidity must be 10% to 90% non-condensing.

14 WiFi6 Certified from day 1, Passpoint, EMC as per 2014/30/EU

directive, RoHS as per 2011/65/EU directive, EN55032
15 FCC and CE approval and certificates

Signature of Contractor Page 302 PWD-GoR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

Wireless controller
Sr. No. Parameters Minimum specification
Redundant Controller should be appliance or server (physical or virtual)
1 Architecture based to support upto 4000 AP or more. The proposed solution should be
premise based and not cloud based
For this “large deployment” scenario, the WLAN solution shall include a
built-in RADIUS server for 802.1x and MAC authentication that shall not
be proposed as a separate product.
The built-in RADIUS server shall support at least following EAP types:
EAP-PEAP, EAP-GTC, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS.
The wireless LAN solution shall support following link layer encryption
standards: WPA2_AES, WPA2_TKIP, WPA_AES, WPA_TKIP,
DYNAMIC_WEP, WPA_PSK_AES, WPA_PSK_TKIP,
WPA_PSK_AES_TKIP, WPA2_PSK_AES, WPA2_PSK_TKIP.
The wireless LAN solution shall support following 802.1x supplicants:
Windows 7, 10, MAC OS, IOS, Android, Chromebook
the wireless LAN solution shall propose a “Guest” management solution
based on an embedded and built-in Captive Portal providing web based
Access authentication for guests and visitors.
Control, The Guest management solution shall allow non-IT staff (e.g., a
2
Authentication receptionist) to create temporary guest accounts.
and Encryption the WLAN solution shall allow guest self-registration and employee
sponsored access.
the Guest management solution shall allow setting a validity period for an
authenticated device, in order to avoid entering credentials each time a
guest access the network
the WLAN solution shall support BYOD and be able to provide device
onboarding that is as simple as possible and without requiring additional
thirdparty components
The on-boarding process of employee devices shall be based on
employee corporate accounts.
The BYOD application shall allow setting the validity period for the device,
and the maximum number of devices per account.
The licensing model of the BYOD application shall be based on the number
of on-boarded devices.
The WLAN solution have wIDS/wIPS capabilities with no additional and
dedicated equipment nor additional license.
The WLAN solution shall be able to identify Interfering APs.

The WLAN solution shall be able to identify and contain Rogue APs.
Intrusion
3 Detection and The WLAN solution shall allow the definition of flexible policies to classify
Prevention an AP as a Rogue AP.
the WLAN solution shall be able to blacklist a WLAN client, either manually
or automatically after a client attack has been detected.
the WLAN solution shall allow to configure a blacklist duration.
the WLAN solution shall allow to configure an authentication failure times
threshold.

Signature of Contractor Page 303 PWD-GoR

 The WLAN solution shall allow automatic and/or manual RF management
(channel and power).
The WLAN solution shall support Short Guard Interval.
If no band/channel (2.4GHz/5GHz) is overloaded (high medium utilization)
or crowded (high client count), an AP shall by default guide a new client to
the 5GHz band.
Even if the 5GHz band is not overloaded but is crowded (high client count),
an AP shall guide a new client to the 2.4GHz band.
If all bands/channels (2.4GHz/5GHz) are overloaded (high medium
utilization) and the 5GHz is crowded, an AP shall guide a new client to the
2.4GHz band.
RF
4
Management When a new client discovers multiple APs to associate to, the new client
shall be guided to the AP that has the fewest associated clients, thus
allowing smart/dynamic load balancing.
The WLAN solution shall deny connection to an AP when the signal of the
client becomes too weak and disconnect a client when the signal becomes
too weak.
The WLAN solution shall propose APs that have the ability to scan the air
in order to provide interfering/rogue APs and wireless attacks detection,
and shall not rely on dedicated scanning equipment.
The scanning function of the APs shall not impact active voice or video
calls (SIP and H.323).
The WLAN solution shall support both Opportunistic Key Caching
(802.11k).
4 Mobility & LBS The WLAN solution shall comply to the 802.11r standard.
the centralized management function shall allow to display the Wi-Fi
coverage quality within a given area (“Heat Map”).

Network management software

Sr. No. Parameters Minimum specification
The proposed solution should be premise based and not cloud based. This
should be based on standard server (Physical/Virtual)

Redundant solution shall be proposed. The centralized management

function shall allow to display the physical topology of the network.
The centralized management function shall be able to handle wired
equipment (switches) and wireless (Access Point) management for a
“unified management” approach.
The solution shall be able to automatically discover new Switch or APs
added to the network.
1 Management The solution shall be able to blacklist a client, either manually or
automatically after a client attack has been detected.
The centralized management function shall allow per equipment
configuration and software backup and restore, and bulk backup and
restore.
The centralized management function shall allow access to all wIPS/wIDS
features.
the centralized management function shall offer, on the basis of an
application signature file, insight at application layer (e.g. [Link],
[Link], [Link]…) even if the applications run on top of the
HTTP or HTTPs protocols. It shall also allow control of those applications.

Signature of Contractor Page 304 PWD-GoR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications
The solution should allow the admin to easily provision,
manage and maintain a network infrastructure with alarms, unified access
security policies
The solution should provide full visibility into wireless, devices and
applications, as well as predictive analysis for
forward planning
The management solution should act as comprehensive tools for
infrastructure configuration, monitoring, security, device configuration,
alert management, to accelerate, downtime resolution, and overall
management.
It should be web based interface with customizable dash board
Provide details about problematic devices including temperature, memory
etc
Monitor network bandwidth and end device traffic pattern
2 Analytics Provide top applications/users usage analytics real time and historical
Port utilization details and threshold limits
Provides threat mitigation through a secure perimeter against intrusion and
malware attacks
Third party
3 support Should support third party network devices for basic SNMP and report

4-PAIR CAT-6 COPPER UTP CABLE COLORED (305 METER)

Conductor 23 AWG solid bare copper with a Diameter ≥0.56 mm
Separator Cross-member (+) fluted Spine/isolator for uniform
separation for all pairs.
Cable Diameter 6.1 ± 0.3
Maximum Attenuation 32.8 dB per 100m
Min Next (dB) 30.2
ACRF (dB/100m) 20.7
Return Loss (dB) 24.6
PSACR-F 20.4
TCL 36.1
Insertion Loss 54.9
Standards ROHS complied and U/L listed EC Verified to ISO 11801 IEC
60332-1 EN 50173-1 TIA/EIA 568A in accordance with NFC
32062 with flame retardant effect & NFC 32070. The cable
NEXT, PSNEXT, FEXT, ELFEXT, PSELFEXT test result
should meet & exceed the performance requirement as per
ANSI/TIA 568C.2.
All UTP Components should be from the same OEM.
The OEM should be ISO 9001:2000 Certified.
In the changing needs of the global resources if the company
has environmental management systems in place like ISO
14001 accreditation the same shall be added advantage.
Certifications 3P, UL, ETL and RoHS
Copper Gauge 23AWG
Frequency Minimum 700Mhz

Signature of Contractor Page 305 PWD-GoR

Characteristic Impedance from 1 100 Ohm ± 15% Volume 5 Technical Specification

to 100 MHz
Sheath PVC
Colour Blue box of 305 Mrs.

CAT6 UTP INFORMATION OUTLET

Standards and Approvals The electrical performance of installation outlet shall meet or
exceed requirement as per
- ISO/IEC 11801 Edition 2
- CENELEC EN 50173-1 2007
- ANSI/EIA/TIA 568-C.2
- IEC series 60603-7
Certifications 3P, UL, ETL and RoHS
Connection of RJ 45 Should accept RJ11 (4 contacts), RJ12 (6 contacts), RJ45 (9
contacts).
Conductors Supported Single-wire: 0.5 to 0.65 mm, AWG 22 to 25
Multiple-wire: AWG 26
Polyethylene conductor insulation: max Ø with insulation 1.58
mm
Shutter Information outlet should have transparent shutter for
protection against dust when not used.
Tool Less Crimping The information outlet termination should be of built in self
crimping type without use of 110 punching tool requirements
Body Contacts: gold/nickel, minimum thickness of gold > 0.8 μm
Metal parts: bronze, nickel, platinum, gold
The information outlet shall be made of high impact PBT
Polycarbonate plastic material
Break Down Voltage Greater than or equal to 1000V
Contact Resistance Less than or equal to 20mOhms
Insulation Resistance Greater than or equal to 500 M Ohm at 100 V DC
Load Testing Connector should be tested and guaranteed under PoE
restrictions, IEEE 802.3af standard and PoE+, standard
802.3at, up to 2500 on-load connections / disconnections.
Tested with 2 simultaneous PoE+ circuits for a minimum total
power of 50W
Endurance 2500 mating cycles (plug insertion/withdrawal). IK03
Performance Warranty 25 years warranty

FACE PLATE-SINGLE/DUAL/QUAD
Material Polycarbonate Hi-Grade Plastic FR Grade & UV Resistant
850 degree C/ Glow Wire Test
No. of Ports 1 Module to 4 Module
Size Single/Dual – 86mmx86mm
Quad – 86mmx146mm
Compatibility Should be Modular and compatible to Cat5e, Cat6 and Cat6A
range of UTP, STP I/O modules and AV connectors, HDMI
connectors, BNC connectors

24 PORT CAT 6 PATCH PANEL

Detail Technical Specification

Signature of Contractor Page 306 PWD-GoR

Type 24-port, Unshielded Twisted Pair, Catego ry 6, TIA / EIA 568-
V olum e 5 Tec hnica l S pec ifi cations

6.2
Ports 24
Port arrangement Each port to be modular and be able to remove & plug in from
front.
Configuration The panel configuration shall be of minimum 6 connectors in
19” & maximum 24connectors in 1U design with rear cable
manager design.
The patch panel connector of 6port shall be of back
removable type for ease of maintenance.
Earthing The patch panel shall provide through body earthing while
installed in cabinet.
Height 1 U (1.75 inches)
Port Identification Labelling provision to be on blank port inbuilt in the jack panel
Number of plug insertion cycles 2500
(Endurance)
Max. number of connections and 5 without refreshing the wiring.
disconnections
Accessories Integrated bend-limiting strain-relief unit for cable entry or
other mechanism to reduce the strain and bends at cable
entry
Material Housing Polyphenylene oxide, 94V-0 rated
Wiring blocks RAL 9005 polycarbonate
Jack contacts Gold/nickel, thickness of gold > 0.8 μm
Panel DC01 galvanised steel sheet
Approvals UL / ETL /3P Certified
Termination Pattern Tool less - TIA / EIA 568 A and B
ROHS Compliant ROHS/ELV Compliant

CAT6 UTP PATCH CORD COLOURED-1/2/3/ 5MTRS

Type The patch cord shall provide air-tight connection for cross-
connection and shall meet or exceed Unshielded Twisted
pair, Categary6, TIA/EIA 568.B.2-1, EN 50173-1,
Conductors 24 AWG 7/32, multi stranded copper conductors 100 Ω
Plug Protection Over-molded boot at each end maintains minimum bend
radius of the cable
Jacket PVC / LSZH
Insulation Polyethylene
Construction of Patch cords Assembled with RJ45 50μ” gold plated contacts.
Operating temperature range: -10°C to +60° C
Separator Cross separator within patch cord
Copper Multistrand copper in conductor
colour blue, Green, Red, Yellow
Performance Warranty 25 years warranty
Approvals UL listed / ETL Verified
Make

5. Gas Suppression System: -

Gas suppression system shall be installed for Class C hazard. Gas based fire extinguishing
installation shall be provided where water cannot be used for fire extinguishing because of the
special nature of the contents of the buildings/area to be protected. Gas Suppression system
shall be provided in: -

Signature of Contractor Page 307 PWD-GoR

 1. All type of Control & Server Room that might be BMS/CCTV/ACESSVolume 5 Technical Specifications
2. UPS and Battery Room
3. Dry type transformer Room
4. Machine & Equipment Room
5. Data & Record Room, other if any

1. SCOPE OF TENDER

Fire suppression system is fire detection and quenching system. This is proposed for flooding
entire room with Environment friendly clean gas FK-5-1-12. The Valve Assembly and Electric
Solenoid must be UL/FM/VDS approved and cylinder must be Seamless CCOE & BIS 7285
approved.

2. SYSTEM DETAILS

 The amount of FK-5-1-12 to be for provided shall be the amount required to obtain a
uniform (minimum) design concentration Class 4.5% required to extinguish the fire at
minimum anticipated temperature with the risk and as required by NFPA 2001, 2015
Edition with a hold time for 10 minutes. The system design shall not exceed 10% for
normally occupied areas, adjusted for maximum area temperature anticipated with
provision for room evacuation before agent release.

 Necessary warning signs shall be displayed in and near such risk (entry and exit)
envisaged for clean agent Gas suppression.

 The Pipe used should be MS, Seamless ASTM Schedule 40.

 Each cylinder shall have pressure gauze and low-pressure switch to provide visual and
electrical supervision of the cylinder pressure. The low-pressure switch shall be wired to
the control panel to provide audible and visual trouble alarm in the event of drop of
pressure. The pressure gauze shall be color coded to provide an easy, visual indication
of cylinder pressure.

 Furnish a welded steel bracket with each cylinder assembly for holding the cylinders in a
saddle with a front bracket place that secures the cylinders depending on installation
requirements.

 The cylinder shall have pressure relief provisions that automatically operate before the
internal nominal pressure exceeds desired 60-100 Bar.

a. Extinguishing Agent:

 FK-5-12 (Dodecafluoro-2-Methylpentan-3 One – CF2CF2C(I)CF(CF3)2. The Agent shall

not contain any Hydrofluorocarbons (HFC).The Agent must be UL/FM approved.

 Comply with requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction.

 Filling facility should be CCOE approved.

b. Design Criteria

1. Standard Code : NFPA-2001 (Latest Addition)

2. Temperature of Risk : 20oC to 27oC
3. Design Concentration : 4.5%
4. Flooding Factor : As per Manufacturer
5. Discharge Time : 10 Seconds
6. Cylinder Capacity : 34 Ltr., 80 Ltr., 120 Ltr., 150 Ltr, 180 Ltr.
7. Nozzle Type : 360o / 180oC made of Brass

Signature of Contractor Page 308 PWD-GoR

 8. Altitude correction factor : As per Manufacturer Volume 5 Technical Specifications
9. Hold Period : 10 Minutes

c. SUBMITTALS:

The Contractor must submit mechanical Working Drawing showing Pipe, Pipe Size, Bends,
Reducer, Splits, Tee Connection, Valves, Fittings, supports etc which should be supported
with Hydraulic Flow Calculation.

d. Sequence of Operation

a) Activation of the First Smoke Detector (the crossed-zoned laser detector)

i) Illuminate the respective circuit lamp on the control unit.
ii) Energize a pre-alarm audible alarm bell.
iii) Treatment remote alarm to the building Fire Alarm Panel.
iv) Activation of the Second Smoke Detector (the cross-zoned laser detector).
v) Illuminate the respective circuit lamp on the control unit.
vi) Energize an evacuation audible alarm horn device.
vii) Shut down the stand-alone air conditioning units serving the protecting area.
viii) Closes the supply and exhaust / return dampers serving the protected area.
ix) Activates a time delay mechanism which delays release of the clean agent for up to
20 seconds from the time the 2nd loop is activated. The Fire Suppression clean
agent is released at the end of the time delay interval unless a “dead man” type abort
switch is operated between the 1st and 2nd detection loops. A timed-out system
discharges upon abort disengagement unless the system is cleared and reset.

b) Discharge of the Fire Suppression Clean Agent.

i) Operates strobe light outside the protected area.
ii) The system may be activated by manual discharge switches located in the protected
area. Operation of a manual discharge switch causes immediate discharge of the
fire suppression agent and causes alarm and shut-down devices to operate the
same as if the system had operated automatically operation of a manual discharge
switch overrides all time delay and abort system devices in the system.

Gas Suppression system for Panel; -

In order to detect fire at micro level in electrical panel Direct low pressure Gas suppression
system shall be installed inside the electrical panel. Gas Suppression system shall be provided
in all floor mounted electrical panel.

The detail of the system proposed shall be as follows:

Electrical Panel Protection System: This includes Supply, Installation, Testing and
Commissioning of Novec-1230 gas Suppression system in accordance with the Contract
Documents.

1.0 Scope of Work:

a. Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of clean Agent (Novec 1230) Fire
Suppression system designed to provide a uniform concentration within the electrical
panels in accordance with NFPA 2001 and requirements of the contract documents).

b. Provide all engineering design and materials for a complete agent suppression system
including Novec 1230 storage cylinders with steel bracket, extinguishing agent, detection
tube, cylinder valve and associated accessories including but not limit to; adaptors,
pressure switch, tube fittings etc, required for complete operation of system.

c. All necessary safety requirements such as warning signs, discharge alarm shall be part of
system.

Signature of Contractor Page 309 PWD-GoR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

d. The necessary nomenclature such as pressurization level, agent volume, gross/net weight
of cylinder shall be clearly marked on cylinder.
e. Prior to supply of material at site. Contractor must submit following documents for approval
of Engineer-in-charge.

a) Drawing in A-4 size, clearly showing the panel, routing of tube inside the panel,
location and fixing arrangement of cylinder & system components.

f. All doors and holes in the enclosed/equipment’s should be closed or sealed to maintain
the tightness of enclosure.

2.0 System Description:

a) The detection tube shall be fixed with cylinder valve at top of cylinder. The tube shall be
pressurized with dry nitrogen. In case of reach of pre-determined temperature (100-
120oC), the tube shall rupture gas shall be released from tube over the protected area.

b) Pressure Gauge with dual Pressure Switch points, one for leakage and another for
discharge to be provided for automatic signals in case of system pressure falls at 9
bar(leakage) and 5 bar(Discharge) . This system to give output to stand alone hooter cum
flasher.

c) The Extinguishing Agent shall be stored in cylinder as liquefied compressed gas, super
pressurized with dry nitrogen at 15 Bar.

d) The stainless steel cylinder shall be equipped with brass valve, pressure gauge (to monitor
agent pressure) and isolation valve for maintenance purposes. The cylinder bracket shall
be of steel construction with quick release clamp.

e) The detection tube shall be installed throughout the compartments of panel. The location
and spacing of tube shall be above the hazard, to be protected.

f) In case of fire, the tube shall rupture at a point. The rupture of tube shall result in formation
of discharge point and release the agent in uniform pattern.

g) With system activation, a signal should be generated via Audio Visual Alarm installed at
convenient location as per Engineer-in-Charge.

h) The system must be service for minimum of 5 years.

3.0 System Components:

The bidder shall provide an under taking from Principle Manufacturer of CE marked product they
intent to install, that manufacturer will fully support the bidder for this specific project.

a) Cylinder of seamless construction. Cylinders shall be accompanied by original

manufacturers test certificate confirming the contents of the cylinder and must have serial
no punched on the cylinder body. Cylinders shall be super pressurized with dry nitrogen
to an operating pressure and temperature as per manufacturer recommendations. Furnish
a welded steel bracket with each cylinder assembly for holding the cylinders in a saddle
with a front bracket piece that secures the cylinders. Cylinder shall be provided with a
certificate provided by the company who charge with the FK-5-1-12 gas mixture. The
certificate shall be secured around the cylinder with chain fastener.

a. The cylinder should be manufactured as per seamless specifications and tested

as per UL

b) Pressure Monitoring Device - Each cylinder shall have pressure gauze integrated dual
low pressure switch to provide visual and electrical supervision of the cylinder pressure.

Signature of Contractor Page 310 PWD-GoR

 The low pressure switch shall be wired to the Audio Visual Alarm to Vporluomveid5 e audible and
Technic al Specif ications

visual trouble alarm in the event of drop of pressure. The pressure gauze shall be color
coded to provide an easy, visual indication of cylinder pressure.

c) Detection Tube - LPCB/UL approved to be Red Color and pressurized at 15 Bar. The
Detection Tube to rupture between (100-120oC). The Tube should pass following test as
per ISO 62

I. Moisture Absorption 23Deg Celsius at 50% Relative humidity = less than 1

II. Water absorption immersion at 23Deg Celsius = less than 2
III. Hydraulic Bust Strength of the Tube must be = 50 bar

d) Extinguishing Agent - FK-5-1-12 (Dedecafluoro-2-Methylpentan-3 One – CF2CF2C

(O) CF (CF3)2

I. The agent shall not contain any Hydroflurocarbons (HFC).

II. The ozone depletion potential should be zero.
III. The Global warming potential should be equal to or less than 1.
IV. The Extinguishing Agent should be UL Listed & FM approved.
V. The extinguishing agent should be filled in an UL Listed or FM or PESO approved
filling station.
VI. The extinguishing agent must not be in touch with any corrosive metal to avoid
corrosion in long run.

e) Valve - Valve must be brass forged or Stainless Steel. The valve must be approved from
BAM Europe/UL/LPCB. It should have pressure relief device set at 30 bar, port for
pressure gauge with dual pressure switch.

4.0 Installation

a) The system shall be installed on basis of approved drawing with no more than 40 meters
of tube in one system complying to no more than 10 meter of single largest length of tube
end from valve.
b) Maximum 4 Tee connections are allowed in one system.

c) The installation / final connections shall carry out in direct supervision of representative of
Manufacturer/authorized distributors.

d) The installation contractor should be a proven source with minimum 5 years of installation
of Trace Tube Systems in India.

e) Cylinder shall be located so that they are not subjected to mechanical, chemical or other
damage.

f) All system components shall be capable of withstanding heat of fire and severe weather
conditions.

g) Detection Tube to be properly secured inside the panel by Clips/Tie etc.

h) The Detection Tube outside the panel should be protected in flexible conduit.

i) Inspection certificate should be pasted on cylinder clearly marking next due date of
inspection.

EMERGENCY LIGHTENING SYSTEM

Signature of Contractor Page 311 PWD-GoR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

Every building shall be so designed, constructed, equipped, maintained and operated as to

provide adequate means of egress to avoid undue danger to the life and safety of the occupants
from fire, smoke, fumes or panic during the time period necessary for escape.
For high occupancy areas, Emergency Lighting & exit signage shall be provided to avoid situation
of panic during distress. Every main occupancy may have certain occupancies which may be
incidental to the main occupancy. The exit requirements pertaining to such incidental occupancies
from the floor of the occupancy to the level of exit discharge shall be calculated to meet the
requirement of the actual occupancy of such type, tonsure adequate means of egress of the
occupants.

Emergency Lighting shall be provided for use when the supply to the normal lighting fails.
Emergency Lighting System is a complete but discrete emergency lighting installation also fed
from the standby power source to the emergency lighting lamp(s), for example, self -contained
emergency luminaire or a circuit from central battery (with or without monitoring system)
connected through wiring to several escape lighting luminaries.

Escape Lighting is a part of the emergency lighting which shall be provided to ensure that the
escape route is illuminated at all material times, for example, at all times when persons are on
the premises, or at times the main lighting is not available, either for the whole building or for
the means of egress. The distance to be travelled from any point in a building to a protected exit
or external escape route or final exit measured along the line of travel shall be shortest path.

Exit access, exits and exit discharge shall be properly identified, with adequate lightening
maintained in the elements of the egress systems so that all occupants shall be able to leave the
facility safely. Open structures that are designed for occupancy by not more than three persons
shall be permitted to be served by fire escape ladders & shall be exempt from emergency lighting
requirements.

STANDARDS: -

The Emergency Lighting & exit signage system for escape route during fire shall be designed,
installed and commissioned in accordance with

1. NBC-Part 4 2016 Fire & Life safety

2. NFPA 101 Life safety code
3. NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm and Signalling Code
4. NFPA 110 - Emergency and Standby Power System
5. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code

EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY

With respect to NBC part 4 clause [Link] Emergency power supplying distribution system for
critical requirement for functioning of fire and life safety system and equipment shall be planned
for efficient and reliable power and control supply to the following systems and equipment where
provided:

o Exit signage lighting.

o Emergency lighting.
o Fire alarm system.
o Lighting in fire command center and security room.

The power supply to the panel/distribution board of these fire and life safety systems shall be
through fire proof enclosures or circuit integrity cables or through alternate route in the adjoining
fire compartment to ensure supply of power is reliable to these systems and equipment. It shall
be 'ensured that the cabling from is protected within the compartment of vulnerability. Cable shall
be Low Smoke Zero Halogen Silicon Insulated Fire Survival Cable with Drain Wire, solid copper
conductor cable approved by LPCB as per BSEN 50200:2015 PH 120 (Fire, Mech Shock & Water

Signature of Contractor Page 312 PWD-GoR

120 Minutes @ 830 deg Celsius, Fire & Mech Shock every 5 Min for 2VoH oeu5rTse-chnBicoaltShpectieficsattisons
lum

conducted on same sample) and BS-6387 CWZ The cable shall sustain 950 deg. C. For 3 hours
approved along with accessories/ termination glands and all necessary materials to complete.
The cable shall be approved for. The cable shall be BS EN 60332-1-2:2004 for Bunched Flame
Retardancy (installed as a single or bunched cable self-extinguishes leaving the upper cable
sheath unaffected showing the cable does not propagate fire). Cable shall be guaranteed for 10
years from the date of manufacture marked on the [Link] wire and cable shall be listed or
approved by LPCB for use with a protective signaling system.

The location of the panel/ fire and life safety system during supply of power to Circuits of such
emergency system shall be protected at origin by an automatic circuit breaker with its no-volt coil
removed. Master switches controlling essential service circuits shall be clearly labelled.

The back-up/emergency power supply shall have a capacity to cater all critical loads such as
emergency lighting, protective signaling system, communication system; fire station and control
room, lifts providing required egress capacity, etc. The maximum-to-minimum illumination shall
not exceed a ratio of 40 to 1.

Central Monitoring Panel: -

The Emergency Lighting Monitoring Control Panel shall be of a touch screen, offering excellent
man-machine interaction experience & shall be controlled by sound and light The central
monitoring panel shall automatically conduct real-time and efficient testing and inspection of
operating states and faults of emergency lights. The panel shall log the events & record of the
events and history shall be retrieved.

Logs can be displayed. History events can be viewed on the screen and imported into the
computer.

Timed automatic testing, which can test lights’ emergency functions according to the set time
period.

Control panel shall be able to maintain battery timely, which can charge and discharge batteries
according to the set time period so as to prolong the battery life.

Emergency Lighting Monitoring Control Panel and interfaces shall be connected by CAN bus. The
interface and its subordinate devices shall be able to be connected by RS485 bus. The panel
shall have capacity to connect at least 64 interfaces within a system, and each interface shall be
able to connect up to 254 devices. The emergency state will be triggered when external fire
signals are received by the controller. The central monitoring unit shall be UL listed.

LUMINIARS

The exit, exit access and exit discharge systems shall be illuminated continuously. The floors of
the means of egress shall be illuminated at all points, including angles and intersections, in
corridors and passageways, stairwells, landing of stairwells and exits. Emergency lighting shall
be powered from a source independent of that supplying the normal lighting.

Escape lighting shall be capable of

o Indicating clearly and unambiguously the escape route.

o Providing adequate illumination along such routes to allow safe movement of persons
towards and through the exits and
o Ensuring that fire alarm call points and firefighting equipment provided along the escape
routes can be readily located.

The horizontal luminance at floor level on the centerline of an escape route shall not be less than
10 ·lumen/m2. In addition, for escape routes up to 2 m wide, 50 percent of the route width shall
be lit to a minimum of 5 lumen/m'. In auditoriums, theatres, concert halls and such other places
of assembly, the illumination of floor exit/access may be reduced during period of performances
to values not less than 2 lux. Required illumination shall be arranged such that the failure of any

Signature of Contractor Page 313 PWD-GoR

single lighting unit, such as the burning out of one luminaire, will not leave aVnolum
y aer5eTaecihnnicdalaSrpkecnife
icastis
ons
and does not impede the functioning of the system further.
The emergency lighting shall be provided to be put on within 5 s of the failure of the normal lighting
supply. Also, emergency lighting shall be able to maintain the required illumination level for a
period of not less than 90 min in the event of failure of the normal lighting even for smaller
premises. The luminaires shall be mounted as low as possible, but at least 2 m above the floor
level.

Escape lighting luminaires should be sited to cover the following locations:

o Near each intersection of corridors,
o At exits and at each exit door,
o Near each change of direction in the escape route,
o Near each staircase so that each flight of stairs receives direct light,
o Near any other change of floor level,
o Outside each final exit and close to it,
o Near each fire alarm call point,
o Near firefighting equipment, and
o To illuminate exit and safety signs as required by the enforcing authority.

Note: - For the purpose of this clause 'near' is normally considered to be within 2 m
measured horizontally. Exit passageway (at ground) and staircase lighting shall also be
connected to alternative supply. The alternative source of supply shall be provided by
emergency lighting.

The emergency lighting system shall be arranged to provide the required illumination
automatically in the event of any interruption of normal lighting due to any of the following:

o Failure of a public utility or other outside electrical power supply

o Opening of a circuit breaker or fuse
o Manual act(s), including accidental opening of a switch controlling normal lighting facilities

Suitable arrangements shall be made by installing double throw switches to

ensure that the Lighting installed in the staircase and the corridor does not get connected
to two sources of supply simultaneously. Double throw switch shall be installed in the
service room for terminating the stand-by supply. The emergency lighting system shall be
well maintained by periodical inspections and tests so as to ensure their perfect serviceability
at all times.

Fire command center shall be provided with emergency lighting. All controls and monitoring of
fire alarm systems, pressurization systems, smoke management systems shall happen from this
room. Monitoring of integrated building management systems, CTVs or any other critical
parameters in building may also be from the same room.

Artificial lighting shall be employed at such locations and for such periods of time as are necessary
to maintain the illumination to the minimum criteria values herein specified. Automatic lighting
control devices shall be permitted to temporarily turn off the illumination within the means of
egress, provided that each lighting control device complies with all of the following:

o In new installations, the lighting control device is listed.

o The lighting control device is equipped to automatically energize the controlled lights upon
loss of normal power and is evaluated for this purpose.
o Illumination timers are provided and are set for a mini‐ mum 15-minute duration.
o The lighting control device is activated by any occupant movement in the area served by
the lighting units.
o In new installations, the lighting control device is activated by activation of the building fire
alarm system, if provided.
o The lighting control device does not turn off any lights relied upon for activation of photo
luminescent exit signs or path markers.
o The lighting control device does not turn off any battery equipped emergency luminaires,
unit equipment, or exit signs.

Signature of Contractor Page 314 PWD-GoR

The emergency lighting system shall be either continuously in operation orVsolhumaell5 bTeechcnicaap able of
l Sp eci ficatio ns

repeated automatic operation without manual intervention.

Functional testing shall be conducted monthly, with a minimum of 3 weeks and a maximum of 5
weeks between tests, for not less than 30 seconds, except as otherwise permitted. Functional
testing shall be conducted annually for a mini‐ mum of 11∕2 hours if the emergency lighting system
is battery powered. Written records of visual inspections and tests shall be kept by the owner for
inspection. The luminaire unit shall be UL listed UL924.

6. EXIT SIGNAGE: -

Where exit access is provided through corridors/paths, the occupants shall be able to easily
identify the way to exits. Exit signs shall be provided such that no point in an exit access is
more than 30 m from a visible exit directional sign. New sign placement shall be such that no
point in an exit access corridor is in excess of the rated viewing distance or 100 ft (30 m),
whichever is less, from the nearest sign. An 'exit sign indicating the direction to an exit shall be
provided at all changes in direction. Exits shall be clearly visible and the route to reach the exits
shall be clearly marked and signs posted to guide the occupants of the floor concerned. Signs are
required at all exits, emergency exits and escape routes, which should comply with the graphic
requirements of the relevant Indian Standards.

Signs shall be illuminated and wired to an independent electrical circuit on an alternative source
of supply. The colors of the exit signs shall be in accordance with good practice shall be as per
IS 12349:1988. The color of the exit signs shall be green.

The exit signs with arrow indicating the way to the escape route shall be provided at a suitable
height from the floor level on the wall and shall be illuminated by electric light connected to corridor
circuits. All exit way marking signs should be so installed that no mechanical damage shall occur
to them due to moving of furniture or other heavy equipment. Further, all landings of floor shall
have floor indicating boards prominently indicating the number of the floor. Photo luminescent
markings shall be pasted at internal hydrant boxes.

Every exit, exit passageway and exit discharge shall be continuously maintained free of all
obstructions or impediments to full use in. the case of fire or other emergency.

A sign shall be posted and maintained in a conspicuous place on every floor at or near. the lift.
landing in accordance with the requirements, indicating that incase of fire, occupants shall use
the stairs unless instructed otherwise. The sign shall contain a diagram, showing the location of
the stairways except that such diagram may be omitted, provided signs containing such diagram
are posted in conspicuous places on the respective floor.

“A sign shall read 'IN CASE OF FIRE, USE STAIRS UNLESS INSTRUCTED OTHERWISE'. “
The luminaire unit shall be UL listed UL924.

7. PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM:

General description
The contractor shall design, supply, install, test, connect and commission a high quality fast-
acting Public Address and Voice Alarm System complying strictly with BS 5839 part8 and
EN60849 and shall be TUV or Equivalent Agency approved. The Public Address and Voice
Evacuation System shall comprise of Audio Matrix Units, High quality speakers, Audio rack all
mounted on a 19” Rack and fully connected and integrated on the fire alarm loop. The system
shall be used for Professional Sound Reproduction for all the areas where possible special
events take place.

Signature of Contractor Page 315 PWD-GoR

Prior to placing order for any equipment, the contractor shall submit comprVeoh ensive document
lu me 5 T echni cal Sp e cifi cati ons

comprising working drawings, catalogues and descriptive literature of components, acoustic

calculation to meet with BS5839 part8 RASTI (Room Acoustic Speech Transmission Index)
requirements of 0.5 on the STI scale and 0,7 on the CIS scale. The contractor shall be required
to train and instruct client's personnel in the correct use, operation and supervision of the system,
preferably prior to the handing over of the project.
In order to ensure whole site integration capability, the fire and voice alarm system shall be
executed by a single specialist local supplier who will be responsible along with main contractor
for the design, global operation, management and interfacing of the system. The contractor shall
make sure that all power tapping of the speakers must be carried out as specified and approved,
even if the acoustic calculations indicates less power tapings. The contactor must endure
minimum of 10dB above the ambient noise levels are achieved.
The system shall be fully programmed to accommodate fire alarm and voice communication
zones as indicated on the approved drawings and schematics. The system shall be configured
to allow on site modifications with the minimum of disruption using the PC based software to
facilitate future changes or alterations to the buildings.

APPLICABLE STANDARD:
EVAC Compliant with IEC/EN60849
Loudspeakers -Rated power IEC 60286-Part 5
Tested in accordance with BSEN60268-5
Acoustic models ready for CATT, ULYSSES & EASE
Compliant with BS5839 Part 8
Battery backup/charger compliant with EN54 part 4
Scope of Work
The scope of work under this head shall include designing, supplying and installing of
Public Address System. The work under this system shall consist of furnishing all
materials, equipment’s and appliances and labor necessary to install the said system,
complete with Speakers, Amplifiers, Microphone, Zone Selection Panel etc. for interfacing
with other systems.
The PA system shall be designed to serve the dual purpose of making general
announcement and Voice Evacuation at the time of Fire alarm activation.
System Design
The PAVA (Public Address/ Voice Alarm) system shall be connected on the same Fire
Alarm loop with in-built isolators to protect the system in case of any cable faults. The
system shall be de-centralized in nature, each distributed rack DAU (Distributed Amplifier
Unit) shall have all the DSP (Digital Signal Processing), messages, amplifiers, monitoring
etc. in such a way that it can work in a stand-alone mode in case the master rack is faulty
or down.
The Man Machine Interface (MMI) shall be connected back to the control room, to monitor
and control the entire PAVA system. The MMI shall be fully BS5839 part 8 and EN60849
compliant and TUV approved. The DAU shall play background / Foreground music and in
case of Fire Alarm / Paging announcement, the system shall go to full power as
programmed to provide the enough SPL (Sound Pressure Level) levels to comply with
BS5839 part8, with minimum of 10dB above the noise levels.
All system components shall be digitally monitored including and not limited to, Messages,
Amplifiers, and back up amplifiers, Speaker Circuits, Audio Matrix units, Paging
Microphone, Battery Charger and the 230VAC line. Each amplifier / line circuit shall be
monitored individually and shall report any faults back to the Master Audio Matrix Unit as
well as the Paging Microphone.
The system shall be capable of sending messages automatically to any zone at any time
interval, without affecting the music in the other areas. Each Zone and circuit speaker shall
have separate amplifier, system sharing two amplifiers to multiple circuit speakers are not
acceptable. There shall be one back up amplifier for every eight amplifiers, the system
shall automatically change over to the backup in case of any amplifier failure, and the
backup amplifiers shall be monitored as well. In case of any system component failure,
the paging microphone shall override any defective unit and provide paging to the required

Signature of Contractor Page 316 PWD-GoR

 zone. The System can provide any Cause & Effect programs after inteVgolruamtein5 gTew ith the Fire
chn ic al S peci fications

Alarm System, thus Alert/Evacuate messages can be programmed and delayed as well
as played on any zone / floor as per the Cause & Effect approved by the Engineer.
The Battery Backup shall provide 24 hours of back up and 30 min of alarm operation. The
power supply / charger must comply with EN54 part 4 and shall be 19” rack mounted.
Battery calculation must strictly comply with BS5839 part 8 and shall be based on the
amplifier size and not the speaker circuit load.
The PAVA system shall be properly integrated with the fire alarm system. The integrated
PAVA system shall cover all normally accessible areas including the car parks. All stair
cases shall have dedicated zone riser. The system shall be capable of being used for
everyday background music and public announcement duties with the fire alarm initiated
emergency announcements overriding all other facilities. Initiation of voice alarm shall take
immediate priority and shall cancel all other PA operations.
In addition, a FIRE DRILL, BOMB ALERT, EARTHQUAKE ALERT and an ALL CLEAR
message shall be incorporated into the operation. A fire alarm broadcast signal shall cancel
any public address operation and shall override it. When a fireman’s microphone is operated,
this shall override any automatic voice alarm signal being transmitted to the zone selected.
The Alert and Evacuate pre-recorded messages shall be maintained in other zones while live
voice fire announcements shall be broadcast to selected loudspeaker zones as per
requirement.
All amplifier gain shall be monitored and measured for open, short or earth faults. The
Entertainment Rack shall be located in the Control/Security Room enabling the operator to
select music from the CD player, FM tuner or the double cassette deck to transmit music to
selected zones or all the zones in the building from the touch screen paging microphone. A
public address announcement shall override the music transmission to selected zones or all
zones. Paging any zone shall not interrupt music in other zones. The Speakers shall be
distributed in the entire floor and shall be configured in different zones. The announcement
shall be made in zone wise or to all the speakers simultaneously in ALL CALL mode. Fire
Alarm shall be announced immediately on receipt of Fire signal from the panel to all zones
or group of Zones.
System shall have following functions:
a. Voice Evacuation and Public Address system integration includes paging system and
background music system.

b. Monitoring of microphone, controller, amplifier, fireman microphone, source modular, and

amplifier changeover, AC&DC power Supply, Loudspeaker Line and Volume Control.

c. The Amplifier shall be used only Class-D with Digital switching power technology

d. System shall have facility for Backup amplifier for at least one backup amplifier over
Working Amplifier.

Class-D Digital Amplifier

All amplifiers shall be power amplifier with High quality speech and Music broadcast. The
power amplifiers shall have adequate continuous (RMS) power output to meet the
requirement of the configuration. The unit shall can deliver the rated output power with less
than 0.1% harmonic distortion in the design bandwidth. The amplifier shall have a broad
band frequency response of 40 Hz to 20 KHz. The output voltage and impedance shall
meet with the system requirements. Amplifiers shall be protected against over loads and
output shorts and a special thermal overload on the heat sink.
The Amplifier shall be Class –D Amplifier have one channel, Two Channel, Three Channel
and four channels’ each channel have rated power 120/240or 500W. The Amplifier shall
have switch power technology for power electricity saving, sleep mode is automatically
enabled when no signal input is detected.
Amplifier shall have AC 115V or 230V power supply and DC 24V input, having separate
fuse for each channel. The Amplifier shall be connected through balanced audio input and
shall work on 100V Speaker Line.
Technical Specifications
 Rated Output Voltage(RMS) 120W
 Amplification Class-D

Signature of Contractor Page 317 PWD-GoR

  Battery Voltage 24VDC Volume 5 Technical Specifications
 Frequency Response 40Hz to 20KHz
 S/N Ratio >80 dB
 Total Harmonic Distortion <0.1% @ 1kHz
 Power Efficiency >85%

Speakers
a. Speakers shall be especially designed for broadcasting high quality, integrated
emergency fire alarm signals and voice communications and approved by an appropriate
authority for use in such situations.
b. Speakers shall be ceiling, wall mounted or Horn Speaker as per approved drawings and
shall be completed with mounting brackets accessories etc. Speakers shall be in metal
enclosures only.

c. Speakers shall be of high efficiency providing maximum output at minimum power across
120 – 14000 Hz frequency range for Indoor Speakers. Speakers shall have a line matching
transformer for direct connection to amplifiers with multiple taps.

d. Speaker external appearance shall be approved by Consultant/Employer/Engineer-in-

charge.

e. Speakers shall be interconnected in the zone configuration.

6W Ceiling Mounted Speaker
The ceiling mounted 6 W speakers shall be installed as per approved drawings. The
speakers shall support EASE, CATT or ULYSSES models for acoustic studies. This
means, the acoustic model shall be designed to simulate the sound quality and distortion
prior to installation. The Speaker should be in compliance BS/EN 60065, 2003 and EMC
(BS EN 61000-6-Part 1/2/3/4). The Ceiling speaker shall work on 100V line so that it can
reduce line losses over long distance and allow easy parallel connection of multiple
loudspeakers. The Speaker shall have multiple tapping for different application according
to room size and ambient noise environment. The Speaker shall have aluminum grille and
metal baffle and shall have spring clip clamp for easy installation.
Technical Specifications
 Rated power 6W
 Tapings 100V line 6/3/1.5W
 Operation Voltage 100V or 70V
 Effective frequency ranges 120 ~ 14kHz
 SPL @ 1W/m >91 dB
 S.P.L., @Full power/ 1m, dB >100 dB
 Color White
 Ceiling Cut-out 170mm
 Dimensions ` 200 mm x 55 mm
6W Wall Mounted Speaker
 Rated power 10 W
 Effective frequency range 150 ~ 15kHz
 Sensitivity 98dB
 Power Handling 10W
 Line Input 100V
 Component 6.5”
 Material ABS
 Grille Power coated Iron mesh
Directional Speaker
 Rated power 20W
 Power Taps 20/10/5W
 Effective frequency range 100 ~ 20KHz
 SPL 95dB
 Power Handling 10W
 Line Input 100V/70V
 IP Rating 1P66
 Max. SPL 115dB

Signature of Contractor Page 318 PWD-GoR

  Speaker Driver 5” X 2 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

Voice Alarm Controller

The network controller shall be a control unit for a public address and emergency sound
system. It shall control and route audio channels on a CAT6/fiber network, with audio
signals comprising e.g. announcements made via call stations or background music
from a connected CD-player. The network controller shall have an RJ-45 Ethernet
connection for connecting a configuration PC, directly or via an Ethernet network. After
the configuration, the network controller shall be able to run stand-alone without PC,
although it shall be possible to keep the network controller connected to the network or
PC for additional functions, such as logging of call and fault events or remote control.
The network controller shall provide power to connected equipment on the network. It
shall provide 6 analog audio input channel.
The controller shall have a supervision system to monitor its operation conditions.
Network connectivity status and fault conditions of the network controller itself and all
network-connected units shall be stored inside the network controller. The network
controller shall have 8 control inputs for activation switches, with configurable for open
and short circuits. The control inputs shall have configurable functionality, such as
automatically starting an emergency alarm in case of activation by a fire alarm. The
network controller shall have relay outputs, that can be configured for integration with
the third party. The Network controller should have 2 Separate players for alert and
EVAC and should have SD Card to store the prerecorded messages. The Controller
shall have message recording in following format MP3 or WMA format, two separate
players of SD card with protection cover, programmable voice message up to 255.
The unit shall be able to operate at a maximum operating temperature of 55°C to
accommodate high density rack mounting. The network controller shall be as per the
international standard IEC 60849 for emergency sound systems. The unit can be free-
standing on a tabletop or mounted in a 19" rack.

The following features shall be available or supported by Network controller.

1. The Controller shall have Class-D 500W Digital amplifier
2. EN54 Approval for the controller
3. The controller shall comply standards of BS EN54-32 & EN608409.
4. Controller should have EN54 Certified
5. 6 zone AB speaker line low impedance supervision.
6. Red button EVAC message push to activate with priority except fireman mic.
7. 6 zone speaker outputs.
8. 6 zone separate indicator for EVAC, fault, music/paging & select.
9. System indicators of AC, DC, fault and indicators for EVAC, alert & fireman mic.
10. Zone capacity of 120 zones by cascaded routers.
11. Priority level: fireman mic, EVAC, input 1, remote microphone, timer & BGM.
12. Two RJ45 for cascade router, two RJ45 for remote microphone input and two RJ45
for . . LAN/WAN/Internet network.
13. AC 230V and DC24V battery input. Auto switch into the battery backup when AC
fails.

Technical Specification:
1. Power Supply AC 220V – 250V/24VDC, 50/60Hz
2. Power Consumption 650W
3. Fireman Impedance 600Ohm
4. Fireman Microphone: 5mV, 600 Ohm
5. Line 1 – 2 input: 385mV
6. Frequency Response: 80Hz – 20kHz
7. Line 3 – 6 input: 350mV
8. THD <0.1%

Signature of Contractor Page 319 PWD-GoR

 Volume 5 Technical Specificatio ns
9. S/N Ratio >70dB
10. Relative Humidity 95%

Remote Paging Microphone

The Remote Paging Microphone should be fully digital connected via CAT6 Cable with
Controller. The Microphone should have capability to make announcement in 8 Zones and have
all call facility. The Microphone shall have ability to control music and should be able to route
the music in zones. Microphone should have maximum zones capacity up to 120 Zones. The
Microphone should have LED indication for the different faults, the unit shall be able to indicate
AC, DC, Fault, Mic and Test status through LED. The Microphone shall have 6 input & Mic/line
Selection buttons. The unit shall have 12 Selection buttons with three colored indicators. The
Microphone have reset/channel, All call & Call buttons. The Unit shall have 2 RJ45 ports for
Microphone so that the other microphone shall be able to link with the unit. The Microphone
shall have Ability to Communication limit up to 600 Meters
The Microphone shall have following features:
1. AC 230V and DC24V battery inputs.
2. Built-in monitor speaker.
3. Paging mode: PTT & Normal paging
4. Phantom Power: 20V – 27.5V
5. Power Consumption: < 2.4A
6. Line input Sensitivity: 775 mV
7. Microphone input Sensitivity: 5 mV
8. S/N ratio: >70dB
9. Humidity: <95%

PAVA Software
PAVA Software with following Features: Should be connected with CAT5 Cable, Shall provide
Zone control, status monitor, Offline Program, Event Recording, System Configuration, User
Management. Software shall allow automatically playing and timing function to achieve timing
programmed playing in the designated zones for unattended operation, Built-in Automatic
Timing Corrector. Support Export and Import easily to save Data.

19” Rack
The equipment shall be housed in a standard rack of suitable height, with Plexiglas door or
metal mesh and lock. Ventilation panels of 1U height shall be provided between each item of
equipment.
Details of the proposed equipment shall be forwarded to the Consultant with performance
specifications, dimensions, construction and finish for approval.
Rack should comply with ANSI/EIA RS-310-D; DIN41491; DIN41494; IEC297-2; and
GB/T3047.2-92.
The Rack should have DIN Rail Mounted Terminal Blocks for termination of Speaker Zone
cables on the rear.
All cables coming from Speaker zones, Call Stations, Power supply should enter from Bottom.
Rack should be installed at location which has minimum 600mm space from front & back for
accessing it easily.
Rack should be installed in well ventilated room preferable Air conditioned. The unit should have
Fans from top.
The unit should have Lockable Glass door at front
Dimensions
Height as per the Quantity of PA Processor & Amplifiers
Depth 600mm Deep
Width 19”
PAVA Testing

Signature of Contractor Page 320 PWD-GoR

 Volume 5 Technic l Specifications
Sr. No. Description Visual Test Readings Documentation
OEM Authorization Should be Provided before
Any Delivery of Material
All cables are tested for continuity, insulation,
1 √
resistance etc.
2 System installation proper as per drawing √
Carry out visual checks on all speakers &
Processors are free from any mechanical
3 √
damage, cables, inter phase modules [Link]
ensure they are properly installed.
Check for proper termination of bootlace lugs
4 √
& feruling
5 Check Input A/C Supply Voltage √
Check location / spacing of loudspeakers as
6 √ √
in drawing.
7 Check Distribution of Zones as per Drawing. √ √
Check full load speaker sound quality &
8 measure Sound pressure level (SPL) in dB. √ √
Check if local loudspeakers overrides by voice
9 messages in case of emergency evacuation. √ √
If power fails, whether Voice evacuation
10 system is working on battery supply if yes for √
what time
Check if recorder messages are CLEAR, free
from any noise distortion & easy to
11 √ √
understand with Room acoustic speech
transmission Index (RaSTI) value >0.5.
Processor LED’s and all keys are working
12 √
properly
Check for Microphone locations & the
13 sensitivity by paging √ √
14 Play a soft music & check sound quality √

8. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (BMS)

The BMS system for shall be a peer-to-peer networked, distributed control system with the
capability to integrate both the ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-1995 BACnet, Lan Works and
Modbus TCP technology communication protocols in an interoperable system.

Given the Criticality of the BMS controls and Monitoring, a Network for BMS shall be set up
independently for the IBMS operations, from the Perspective of achieving Concurrent
Maintainability of the Premise.

The BMS System shall have the Complete Monitoring and Control Functionality over the Utilities
and functions as shall be defined in the Data Point Schedule (IO Summary)

The System shall present a Single Graphics Interface to the user for Control and monitoring of
all the utilities in the Premises.

The system shall offer enhanced functionalities such as Alarms management, Maintenance
management, Trending and logging of Data, along with Data Analysis. Consumption Patterns of
the Building shall be presented in a Dashboard format for easy monitoring.

Signature of Contractor Page 321 PWD-GoR

The system design shall utilize the latest technology in “open” network architVeoclutmuere , of the
5 T e chni cal Specifications

following type:
 BACnet over IP (BTL Approved)

With distributive intelligence and processing, the system shall ensure that there is no single
point of failure for the system.

The Direct digital controllers shall have maximum limit of 480/ 160 IOs on One Controller for
Plant Room and Electrical panel Application and for AHU/ CSU/ TFA application only 2 AHU per
Controller need to be considered and the controller shall have maximum limit of 40 points on
One DDC (even if used with expansion IO Modules) and the Protocol Integrators shall have
minimum limit of 500 Soft points.

The BMS system offered should be from the latest offering of the BMS Product Line and should
be a freely programmable management and automation system for the full spectrum of today’s
building application services.

The BMS system shall meet the Tender Specification Document herewith, and shall fulfill and
exceed the requirement of the complete Data Point Summary Schedule, I/O summary shall be
provided by contractor for approval of Architect.

The facility shall also have an Email alarm notification device as a part of the Building
Management System intended to be installed in the Premises.

The System shall mainly comprise of Direct Digital Controllers, Protocol Integrators and relevant
field level instrumentation.

The BMS shall Control or monitor such as, AHU, TFA, CSU, Fans, Electrical Breakers,
Multifunction Meters, Fire Alarm, Fire Fighting Systems, Gas Suppression, Air Sampling
Systems and Water Leak system.

The System shall present a Single Graphics Interface to the user for Control and monitoring of
the above. The system shall offer enhanced functionalities such as Alarms management,
Maintenance management, Trending and logging of Data, along with Data Analysis.
Consumption Patterns of the Building shall be presented in a Dashboard format for easy
monitoring, if required.

The BMS shall provide for Extensive Graphics Functionality for HVAC / Electrical / Auxiliary
Systems, with online display of parameter values, and allow for Direct Control on certain
process parameters.

Environment / HVAC Controls for the Premise:

The Building Management System (BMS) will control and monitor all building mechanical
equipment using either of the following, or both as per Data point Schedule:

 Networked Direct Digital Controls (DDC) for Hardwired Controls / Hardwired

Monitoring for Low side HVAC equipment such as CSUs, Fans etc.
 Protocol Integrators and Data connection interfaces to interface with Low Side such
as, Variable speed drives.

The BMS shall monitor/control critical and non-critical air and water HVAC equipment including
Standard air handling units, fans, etc. The BMS will deploy sensors and user interface devices
mounted within mechanical rooms and occupied areas.

Scope of Work

General

The BMS supplier shall provide new, latest technology, high speed, network able, interoperable,
user friendly fully operational BACnet protocol Building Management System

Signature of Contractor Page 322 PWD-GoR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

In the building operates the following utilities & services to be integrated to achieve Monitoring,
control, scheduling, operational control, maintenance, and ease of operation, energy
conservation, & remote interface. The integrated system network architecture shall offer the
maximum operational systems.

The System shall mainly comprise of Direct Digital Controllers, Protocol Integrators and relevant
field level instrumentation. The BMS shall provide design the system with DDC Controls
distributed at all floors to minimize Cabling and to achieve maximum operational system high
speed communication.

The DDC`s offered shall be intelligent type with self-storage of data & expanded memory. The
BMS shall ensure that all critical / medium alarm generation points of any one service not to be
linked to one DDC. This will avoid failure of entire data of particular services in case of failure of
the corresponding DDC.

The BMS shall include Client Workstation Software’s.

Commercial
Further to the above technical specification laid down in the Tender, the BMS Vendor shall also
satisfy following technical requirements and scope of works:-

 Design, supply, installation, testing and commissioning of all hardware, software,

controls wiring, containment, conduit, trunking.
 Design, supply, installation, testing and commissioning of all sensors (Refer IO Schedule
for Scope definition and use): wall/duct temperature and humidity sensors, tank level
sensors, liquid differential pressure switches etc. as described in IO summary.
 Transportation, off-loading, crane age and moving into position of all of the above.
 Warranty all Equipment Supplied and the Complete Installation for 12 months from date
of issue of the Certificate of Practical Completion.

Product Specifications:-

This section defines the Basic Materials and Methods used in the installation of Digital Control
products to provide the functions necessary for control of the systems on this project.

 Provide a Control System incorporating a open Protocol, Direct Digital Control,

equipment monitoring, and control consisting of microprocessor based plant control
processors interfacing directly with sensors, actuators, and environmental delivery
systems (i.e. Electrical/HVAC units); electric controls and mechanical devices for all
items indicated on drawings described herein including panels, sensing devices; a
primary communications network to allow data exchange between microprocessor
based devices.

 It is a requirement that all Controllers and Unitary Controllers utilize a protocol which can
communicate within the site wide, and Enterprise integrated system.
All Bidders shall propose control products ensuring that these products are able to
integrate seamlessly with the future Project installations, utilizing one of the following
preferred protocols:
o Fully BACnet compliant (note, native BACnet unit shall be used)
o OPC compliant.
 Hierarchal systems consisting of master or global controllers (Supervisory Controllers)
that poll and/or control less intelligent unitary controllers on a secondary bus will not be
considered.

 The system installed shall seamlessly connect devices throughout the building
regardless of subsystem type, i.e. Electrical breakers ,HVAC, Fire and auxiliary systems
as detailed in the IO Summary should easily coexists on the same network channel
without the need for Third Party gateways. These components shall share common
Software for Network communications.

Signature of Contractor Page 323 PWD-GoR

  GUI (Graphical User Interface) workstations shall provide complete aVcocluemses5 Tto any point
ech ni cal Spe cifications

in the system at any time.

 The control system shall be able to accommodate multiple user operation. Access to the
control system data should be limited only by operator password. Multiple users shall
have access to all valid system data.

 The control system shall be designed such that equipment will be able to operate under
stand-alone control. In General, the Operation of any Controllers on the Network shall
not rely on any other Controller for its Operation.

 Functionality such as scheduling and trending shall be resident in each and every
controller including both programmable and configurable controllers regardless of where
they reside on the network.

 System controllers that require a master computer, or a dedicated function module such
a schedule, trend or data-logging module are not acceptable, although function specific
modules may be used to supplement the functionality resident in each controller.

 In the event of a network communication failure, or the loss of any other controller on the
Network, the control system shall continue to independently operate under control of the
resident time clock in each controller and the resident program stored in nonvolatile
memory as detailed herein. In such a case, each individual controller shall continue to
trend data commensurate with the data storage capabilities of each controller until a
network connection can be restored.

 System configuration and monitoring shall be performed via a PC-type computer. Under
no circumstances shall the PC be used as a control device for the network. It can be
used for storage of data.

 All Controllers and Terminal Controllers supplied and installed by the Contractor shall
connect and communicate directly via the BMS Ethernet network, not via a
proprietary/dedicated system wise controls network. As a Minimum, all Controllers and
Unitary Controllers shall comply with the following:
o Shall be fully configurable in terms of IP address, subnet mask and default
gateway settings.
o Shall be fully TCP/IP compliant
o Shall connect to an Ethernet LAN at 10Mbps / 100 Mbps.
o There shall be no restrictions on the number of controllers supported and
associated system/software licensing.
o Confirm what redundancy options the controllers can provide (e.g. dual network
connections etc.).
o Confirm whether dual connections are offered and if so, how switch over is
triggered
o Controllers shall support RSTP Rapid Spanning tree Network Protocol.
o Controllers shall be complete with power supplies, a real time clock, input and
output modules, memory, processors and all other items necessary for proper
and correct interfacing and operation of the control functions described in this
document.
o All controllers shall have peer to peer communications. All controllers shall have
a standalone capability such that a failure of networked system shall still permit
the plant and controls associated with the controllers, to continue to operate
normally with the controllers continuing to communicate with one another.
 In the event of transmission failure in the system network the controllers shall continue to
operate with all sequence interlocks and control strategies operating normally accepting
those which require global information. Either user adjustable default values or the last
sensed value (user selectable) shall then be assumed for these global parameters.
 Each controller or controller location shall be provided with spare hardware capacity for
future additions of at least 10% of each type of point. Universal inputs may be counted
as either a spare digital or analogue point, but not both. Note that this spare capacity

Signature of Contractor Page 324 PWD-GoR

 may be accomplished by the addition of input/output modules. MemoVroylusmhe a ll also be
5 T echn ical Specifications

sufficient to allow all programs associated with these points to be run in the controller.
 Multiplexing boards to convert analogue inputs to multiple digital inputs and analogue
outputs to multiple digital outputs shall not be used.
 The controllers shall be provided with their own internal battery backup power supply,
capable of maintaining all memory including the real time clock for not less than 72
hours.
 All microprocessor based controllers and unitary controllers must be capable of
withstanding transient disturbances from the input power supply.

TECHNICAL SPECS OF GRAPHICS SOFTWARE:

The BMS software shall be simple, flexible and convenient to use such that an operator with
minimal programming knowledge can use it to perform control / monitoring and generation of
management information systems (MIS) reports. The operating system shall be the Windows 7,
Windows 8, Windows 10, Windows Server 2008 and Windows Server 2012. The scalable building
management system software shall have seamlessly integration that combines all functions from
installation and configuration of automation stations for HVAC and room automation, input and
output modules, gateways, DALI constant light controllers, touch panels and infrastructure
products. Software for Integrated Building Management System with dynamic graphics. The
building management system uses client-server architecture and thereby consists of a building
management server application and one or more client applications as a user interface. As a
central component, the server manages and stores system and operating parameters, historic
data, access rights, and device configurations (backup) in an SQL data base. The server shall
allow the sharing of data via SSL-encrypted Web Services with other high-end
software/applications. The Web-Based Server software shall permit use of Standard Web-
Browsers such as Microsoft Internet Explorer, Firefox, Chrome, etc. With minimum 5
simultaneous users/client on LAN and 20 User/Client licenses for remote operation.

The Software shall be compatible with PC, Mobile & tab i.e. system is to be compatible with
Android / IOS etc. Software should be fully scalable to cater future expansion i.e. if required than
the existing software could be upgraded up to unlimited IOS / user licenses.

Alarming:

Alarms from different sources can be visualized and managed in a uniform manner; these alarms
are presented in a common way which enables the user to maintain an overview. The user can
acknowledge or disable alarms. When an alarm occurs, one or multiple receivers can be notified
via e-mail/SMS. If the alarm is not acknowledged within a configurable amount of time, an
alternative action can be triggered.

Scheduling:

Schedules can either be executed in devices or Server. Software shall have the possibility of
organizing schedules executed on different devices in a hierarchical way and configuring them
efficiently. Schedulers are organized in a tree structure. Entries on the highest hierarchical level
have an impact on all schedulers. Entries on a lower hierarchical level affect only the schedulers
below that level. Local changes on the device are identified and can either be accepted or
rejected.

Trending:

Software shall read the trend data from the devices periodically and storing everything in the
database. A user can also create ad-hoc trend logs directly in Software. Software periodically
polls the data point value from the device and stores the value in the database. Trend logs can
be viewed either as tables or as charts or exporting the Trend Data as CSV Files.

Energy Management & Reporting:

Software should have built-in feature for energy management to create reports based on trend
logs for energy & other data points. Reports can be generated in PDF, Excel, or Word format.

Signature of Contractor Page 325 PWD-GoR

They can be automatically distributed via e-mail. The generation of a reportVcoluamne 5bTeecthrniigcagl Sepree d in
cifications

one of the following ways:

• Periodically: Reports can be generated daily, weekly, monthly, or yearly.
• Event: The change of a data point value can trigger a report.
• Manually: A report can be triggered manually by the user.

Event Log:

Events include alarms, alarm acknowledgements; log-in and log-out of users, change of
operational parameter, change of device configuration, system messages, etc. shall be logged
directly in Software Database. The event log view offers a large variety of filters to efficiently
analyze all activities.

Parameter View:
The parameter view allows configuring operational parameters, which are distributed over multiple
devices, efficiently. Each parameter view is a matrix where each cell represents a parameter.
Parameters can be organized freely in the matrix depending on space layout and function.

Device Manager:

Software gives a clear overview of the status of all devices and provides detailed information for
each device (e.g. device type, name, IP address, firmware version, configuration file, program file,
etc.). A firmware update can be performed for individual devices or groups of devices. A backup
feature ensures a regular backup of all relevant device configurations. If a defective device needs
to be replaced, the configuration can be easily restored.

User Management:

Software provides a separate work environment for each user. A user has to log on to the system
and is presented with a perspective tailored to his individual requirements. A perspective defines
which windows are open and how they are arranged. In this way, a user can define separate
perspectives which are optimized for different tasks and quickly switch between them.

COMPLIANCE SHEET OF Graphics SOFTWARE:

Complied
Description
(Y/ N)
The Software shall be compatible with Windows 10, Windows Server 2008 and
Windows Server 2012. The networking software shall use the TCP / IP LAN
protocol.
Software shall have seamless integration to exchanges real time data within the
Ethernet/IP network distributed autonomous automation stations for HVAC and
room automation, input and output modules, gateways, DALI constant light
controllers, touch panels, and infrastructure products, independently of the
underlying field bus technology (CEA-709 (LonMark), BACnet, KNX, DALI, M-Bus,
Modbus, , etc.).
Compatibility with Internet Explorer, Firefox, Chrome, etc. With minimum 5
simultaneous users/client on LAN and 20 User/Client licenses for remote
operation. Software shall support Multi-browser support (web access).
Software uses client-server architecture and thereby consists of a building
management server application and one or more client applications as a user
interface.
Software shall Manage multi users and access rights via ACL.
Software shall be compatible with Mobile & tab i.e. system is to be compatible with
Android / IOS etc.
Software should have built-in feature for energy management to create reports
based on trend logs for energy.

Signature of Contractor Page 326 PWD-GoR

 Software should be fully scalable to cater future expansion i.e. if required thVaonlumthe e
5T echnical Specificatio ns

existing software could be upgraded up to unlimited IOS / user licenses.

Software shall be capable of managing and Storing Operating Parameters, Historic
Data, Access Rights and Device Configurations in an SQL Database.
Software shall have Data bases: SQLite (included) or Microsoft SQL server or
MySQL.
Software shall Displays customized graphical pages with dynamic content.
Each schematic can consist of a large number of dynamic display elements which
reflect the current status of the facilities in real time. It is also possible to directly
integrate alarms, trend logs, schedules, web links, dynamic pages, and MP3
streams into the graphics.
Dynamic information is shown in the form of numeric values, text, changing icons,
bar graphs, trend logs, alarm and event lists, or schedule controls.
Software shall support Alarming from different sources, and time- and event based
forwarding via e-mail to several recipients.
Software shall support Hierarchical organization of calendar and scheduler
parameters.
Software shall support Presentation of trend data in the form of charts or tables.
Software shall support Structured representation and efficient adaptation of
system and operating parameters.
Software shall support Fast and system-wide access to real time data.
Software shall support Supports Global Connections.
Software shall have Reporting module to generate reports from trend logs using
templates.
Software shall support web services for communication (OPC XML-DA, SOAP/
XML)
Software shall support Easy communication across firewalls and NAT routers on
the Intranet and Internet
Software shall Import/Export of trend logs and Identification keys scheme.
Software shall support installation of Client in Same PC as of Server.
Alarms have to be acknowledged and sent, dependent on the weekday and time
or free definable rules, to one or multiple recipients via e-mail or as a notification.
If the alarm is not acknowledged within a configurable amount of time, an
alternative action like an escalation can be triggered.

HVAC equipment DDC:

A. 32 bit microprocessor Programmable Modular DDC controller with expandable IO

Modules. Capable of processing information from BACnet networks, KNXnet/IP networks,
and Modbus devices. Optionally, KNX TP1 and M-Bus are supported. The WAN interface
should extend the Modular DDC controller with a wireless LAN connection.
1.) The modular DDC should have in buit web server. This allows for both local configuration
and monitoring of the correct function and also local override. Remote access is provided
via VNC.
2.) DDC should have possibility of offline simulation and online testing of an application via
network access.
3.) The Modular DDC controller manages pages with dynamic content for the visualization of
information. The visualization of dynamic pages to be carried out PC Application or Web
browser on one or more PCs or mobile devices.
4.) The Modular DDC controller (DDC) can be accessed over an IP connection by several
users simultaneously.
5.) The Modular DDC controller features scheduling, alarming, and trending. These functions
should also be accessible via the graphical user interfaces with Building Management
System software. Additionally, the user can access schedules and alarm lists via the
integrated web server.
6.) The Modular DDC controller should be UL listed and BTL certified BACnet Building
Controller (B-BC) conform to the ANSI/ASHRAE–135-2012 and ISO 16484-5:2012
standard. It should be connected to BACnet/IP and BACnet MS/TP concurrently. Binary,
analog and multi-state objects (inputs and outputs) can be created as BACnet server
Signature of Contractor Page 327 PWD-GoR
 objects or can be accessed via BACnet client functions (Write PropVeorltuym,e 5RTeecahndicaPl Srpoep erty
cif ications

and COV Subscription).

7.) I/O Modules could be integrated to extend the Modular DDC controller s with physical I/O
(inputs, outputs).

B. For the integration of Modbus devices, the Modular DDC controller implements a Modbus
Master that communicates via Ethernet Modbus TCP or EIA-485 Modbus RTU.
1.) The Modular DDC controller should be redundantly powered by using two power supplies.
2.) The Modular DDC controller should equip with two Ethernet ports. It can be configured to
use the internal switch to interconnect the two ports.
3.) If required than using the internal switch, a daisy chained line topology for minimum of 15
devices could be built, to reduce costs for network installation. The IP switch should also
allow the setup of a redundant Ethernet installation (ring topology), for higher reliability.
The redundant Ethernet topology is enabled by the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP),
which is supported by most managed switches.
4.) The gateway functionality should allow data communication between all communication
technologies available on the device.
5.) All data points can be displayed and set via the web interface in a tree structure.
6.) The Modular DDC controller should support remote packet recording and troubleshooting
with Wireshark. In addition, the recording of BACnet communication via BACnet MS/TP
and BACnet /IP port is supported for network diagnosis.
7.) An integrated web server should provide access to configuration parameters and
statistical information via a standard web browser. Additionally, data points, schedules,
and calendars that have been created during device configuration can be accessed via
the web server. Current operating conditions can be queried and parameters such as set
points and switching times can be set by means of the web server. The configuration can
also be done via the provided configuration software.
8.) The Modular DDC controller should have Built-in network diagnosis LEDs to provide a
display of the status of OPC connection, BACnet MS/TP channel, TP/FT-10 channel,
Ethernet connection, and Ethernet/IP (BACnet/IP, IP-852) channel. Additionally, network
statistics information is to be mapped to OPC data points.

COMPLIANCE SHEET OF HVAC CONTROLLER:

Complied
Description
(Y/ N)
Modular DDC controller shall directly communicate with BMS Software on BACnet
I/P or OPC.
Modular DDC controller Shall capable to connect IO Modules on Lon TP/ FT-10,
LON-IP, BACnet-IP or Proprietary Protocol.
Modular DDC controller Shall have in Built Port for Modbus RS-485/BACnet/LON
TP/FT-10 for third Party Integration.
Modular DDC controller should equip with two Ethernet ports. It can be configured
to use the internal switch to interconnect the two ports
Modular DDC controller shall support Network Redundancy and for this controller
or Modular DDC controller shall be equipped with 2 Ethernet Ports.
Modular DDC controller s shall have features like Scheduling, Alarming &
Trending.
Modular DDC controller shall support Local and remote access to information
about device status and data points.
Modular DDC controller shall support Configurable via Ethernet/ IP.
Modular DDC controller shall be futuristic with having following features
Connection to WLAN.
Modular DDC controller shall be UL Listed, BTL Certified BACnet Building
Controller (B-BC) conform to the ANSI/ASHRAE–135-2012 and ISO 16484-
5:2012 standard.
For quicker response of Modular DDC controller program, cycle time should be:
Down to 10 ms. It should not be event-driven.

Signature of Contractor Page 328 PWD-GoR

 Modular DDC controller shall be capable of connecting minimum 40 IO [Link] 5 T echnical Specificatio ns

Power supply should be UL listed, modular & same make as of modular DDC
controller.
I/P power to the modular DDC controller shall be 24V DC.
Each IO module should have inbuilt LCD Screen.

Stand- Alone DDC Controller:

1.) 32 Bit microprocessor based Programmable standalone DDC with BACnet/IP, LON/IP
interface. As BACnet Building Controller (B-BC) compliant to ANSI/ASHRAE–135-2012
and ISO 16484-5:2012 standard/An LON controller should comply with CEA-852 and
ISO/IEC 14908 standard.
2.) Each DDC should have physical IOs and IP port for connecting one additional module.
3.) The DDC should have possibility of offline simulation and online testing of an application
via network access.
4.) DDC should manage pages with dynamic content for the visualization of information.
Pages could be carried out through PC Application or Web browser on one or more PCs
or mobile devices. DDC controller should be assessed over an IP connection by several
users simultaneously.
5.) The DDC should have following features –
a.) Alarming,
b.) Trending
c.) Time synchronization
d.) DDC controller should be capable of sending an event-driven e-mail notification, as the
result of a predefined action, informs about the operating status. The e-mail text can be
freely designed. The placement of dynamic values in the text is possible. Also stored trend
data (CSV file) is to be forwarded as attachment to the authorized persons.
6.) Binary, analog and multi-state objects (inputs and outputs) can be created as BACnet
server objects or can be accessed via BACnet client functions (Write Property, Read
Property and COV Subscription).
7.) Binary, analog, and multi-state objects (inputs and outputs) can be created as
BACnet/LON server objects or can be accessed via client functions (Write Property, Read
Property and COV Subscription). The BACnet client configuration is done via the provided
Configuration Software (network scan or EDE import).
8.) An integrated web server should provide access to configuration parameters and
statistical information via a standard web browser. Additionally, data points, schedules,
and calendars that have been created during device configuration can be accessed via
the web server. Current operating conditions can be queried and parameters such as set
points and switching times can be set by means of the web server. The configuration can
also be done via the provided configuration software.
9.) The DDCs should have two 100Base-T Ethernet ports with integrated Ethernet switch. Up
to 10 DDCs with dual Ethernet can be operated in an Ethernet ring, if the Ethernet ring is
connected with an Ethernet switch featuring RSTP function (Rapid Spanning Tree
Protocol).
10.) The DDC should have three colored LED that shows the current device status. The
LED should inform about pending errors and inputs or outputs in manual mode. Moreover,
the network status is indicated.

COMPLIANCE SHEET OF STAND-ALONE CONTROLLER:

Complied
Description
(Y/ N)
Controller shall directly communicate with BMS Software on BACnet I/P or OPC.
For quicker response of controller program, cycle time should be: Down to
10 ms. It should not be event-driven.
Controller shall have In- Built Real Time Clock.

Signature of Contractor Page 329 PWD-GoR

 Controller shall have features like Scheduling, Alarming & Trending. Volume 5 T echnical Specificatio ns

Controller shall have more than 15 On-Board IO Points & can be extended up to
35 I/O points.
Universal Input: 1% Accuracy at 1-10 V can configured in following ways:
- Digital Input (impedance >20 kΩ, sampling period 10ms)
- Voltage Metering 0-10 V (impedance >20 kΩ, sampling period 1s)
- Current Loop 4-20 mA (impedance 249 Ω (if internal shunt available), sampling
period 1s)
- Resistance Measurement (impedance 10 kΩ, sampling period 1s)
Controller shall be UL, BTL Certified BACnet Building Controller (B-BC) conform
to the ANSI/ASHRAE–135-2012 and ISO 16484-5:2012 standard.
Controller shall support Network Redundancy and for this controller shall be
equipped with 2 Ethernet Ports.
Power supply should be UL listed, modular & same make as of DDC.
I/P power to the modular DDC controller shall be 24V AC/DC.
Each IO module should have inbuilt LCD Screen.

9. Audio Visual System

A. VIDEO CONFERENCING & AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEM

Product Introduction (Video wall)

Video Wall Display (2x2 matrix, total 4 units of 55Inch display arranged in 2 x 2
matrix) nos. displays with wall mount bracket) 1920 × 1080 resolution, 178° viewing
angle, Ultra-narrow 1.8 mm bezel designate-glare, high definition, high brightness, high
color gamut, and vivid images with rich colors, Stable and 24-hour continuous working
along with required wall mount bracket in respect

Video Conferencing system also includes (A) with 4-way SIP/H.323 video conferencing (B)
Wireless presentation (1-User) Upgradeable to 6-users (C) Recording and streaming (D)
Dual Display support (E) PTZ Camera - 12x optical zoom and (F) Speakerphones. Skype for
Business client activation can be purchased separately. Two years warranty fro hardware.
Extended warranty also available for purchase and Multipoint upgrade (4-way to 9-way).

1. DELEGATE UNIT:
Wired Table Top Delegate Unit Dimensions
185 x 63 x 140 mm (without gooseneck) THD,
total harmonic distortion 0,03 % at 50 mW/16 Ω
Weight approx. 700 g
Power consumption max. 3,
8 W Pick-up pattern Super-cardioid Operating temperature +10°C to +40°C
Operating voltage (stand alone) 35 V to 52,8 VDC

2. CHAIRMAN UNIT

Wired Table Top Chairman Unit

The digital chairperson unit offers high speech-intelligibility in a modern design.
The gooseneck microphone is equipped with a super-cardioid capsule.
A twin-loudspeaker system guarantees a homogenous sound level in the meeting room.

3. CONTROL UNIT

Signature of Contractor Page 330 PWD-GoR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

Central Unit to connect 40 participants

with USB Recording Capability

powers up to 40

controls up to 400 connected delegate and chairperson units.

Supplies up to 40 and controls up to 400 discussion units

Integrated PC with pre-installed control software Graphical user menu in 13 languages Open
Media Control Protocol over Ethernet (compatible to other brands)

4. STRAIN RELIFE / Conference Bus Cables)

5. SPEKAERS:

Wall speaker with CleverMount™ 6" Black version - 8Ω and 100V Speaker type Full range Max.
Power 100 W
RMS Power 35 W
Impedance 8 Ω
Sensitivity (1W/1m) 86 dB
Connectors 6-pin Custom Terminal Block
Drivers 1” Dome tweeter 4” MF / LF Woofer
Incline angle Left 30° Right 30° Bottom 30° Top 5°
Line Transformer Tappings 1 24 W / 417 Ω 2 12 W / 833 Ω 3 6 W / 1667 Ω 4 3 W / 3333 Ω
Sound Pressure (Max. W/1m) @ 8 Ω 101 dB @ 100 V 100 dB
Frequency Response (± 3 dB) 100 Hz - 20 kHz Range (-10 dB) 65 Hz - 20 kHz
Dispersion Horizontal 130° Vertical 130°

6. AMPLIFIER
Power amplifier 100V
RMS Power 240 W Signal / Noise > 90 dB THD+N (@ 1 kHz) < 1% Technology Class A/B
Protection DC Short circuit Over heating Over load Signal limiting
Cooling Dual speed controlled FAN
Operating temperature 0° ~ 40° @ 95% Humidity
Frequency Response (± 3 dB) 70 Hz - 18 kHz
Power Supply Conventional (Transformer) Source 230 ~ 240 V AC / 50 ~ 60 Hz (110~115 V AC
/ 50~60 Hz after connection change) Inputs Sensitivity (1W/1m) -12 dB ~ 0 dB
Impedance 10 kΩ balanced Connector XLR female with Male Linkthrough Outputs Voltage /
Impedance 100 V / 42 Ω
70 V / 21 Ω 31 V / 4 Ω Connector 4-pin Euro Terminal block (Pitch - 5.08 mm with locking)

7. Digital Sound Processor :

Multi–Channel DSP
AEC (Acoustic Echo Cancellation)
Microphone automixer
Intuitive and Comprehensive Configuration and Control
Mini USB Connector
Built–in Power Amp — 2x60W @ 8Ω and 1x120W @ 70V / 100V
HDMI audio embedding and de–embedding
4x4 Dante interface

8. HANDHELD MICROPHONE:

Signature of Contractor Page 331 PWD-GoR

 supply installation wirless handheld microphone digital microphone Volume 5 Technical Specifications
Digital transmission operating in the UHF
spectrum greatly enhances range, reliability and scalability
Smart Assist App connects via Bluetooth
Low Energy for a streamlined setup and operation at a distance Auto scan creates reliable
connections with minimal time and effort
134 dB audio input dynamic range eliminates need for sensitivity adjustments and preserves
every detail Elimination of intermodulation enables channels to be placed in an equidistant
tuning grid 600 kHz apart

9. COLLOR MIC / LAPEL MIC

 Digital transmission operating in the UHF spectrum greatly enhances range, reliability and
scalability
 Smart Assist App connects via Bluetooth Low Energy for a streamlined setup and operation at a
distance
 Auto scan creates reliable connections with minimal time and effort
 134 dB audio input dynamic range eliminates need for sensitivity adjustments and preserves
every detail
 Elimination of intermodulation enables channels to be placed in an equidistant tuning grid 600
kHz apart
 56 MHz of tuning bandwidth and equidistant spacing enables up to 90 channels
 2,240 selectable frequencies allow for fine tuning
 Lithium-Ion battery pack (sold separately) delivers up to 12 hours of operation (up to 8 hours of
operation with 2x provided AA batteries)

Cable Cubby: -

Smart solution for conference table.

Convenient access of different types of cables.
Hydraulic Mechanism is used
Self-fitting clamp easy to install
Available in Rectangular shape
Available in Black / White anodized Top Surface
Below features should be available min.
VGA, HDMI, AUDIO, VIDEO, LAN, POWER

BOOM BARRIER, DFMD, ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM AND BAGGAGE SCANING

SYSTEM:

Technical specification for Boom Barrier

[Link]. Details Specification Remark
Reliable gear motor and sturdy steel case, Motwane
Boom Barrier has been carefully tested to ensure its
1 Design
correct functioning both in very cold and very hot
climate and its functional compatibility.
2 Functionality Interfaces for Opening, Closing and Stopping
Micro Controller Based Boom Barrier controller with
3 Technology Logic for Motor, Safety Sensors and Loop detector etc.
The Boom Arm is lifted up by 360 degree gearbox.
4 Housing material Mild Steel Powder coated

Signature of Contractor Page 332 PWD-GoR

 Corrosion Free : Dry finishing process that usesVofluinmee 5lyTech nical Specificatio ns

5 Housing ground particles of pigment and resin that are

Aesthetic
electrostatically charged and sprayed onto Housing
Protection All Housing and internal parts are be rust & corrosion
6 free metals and alloys of high strength with suitable
Epoxy coating.
The new wind-resistance Arm is extruded aluminium
Material of
7 with octagonal profile.
Boom Arm
White painted with red reflective stickers
8 Boom Arm types Straight / Telescopic
Boom arm
9 100mm*45mm*1.5mm
Dimension
Boom Arm
10 2.5 mtr / 3 mtr / 4.5 mtr / 6 mtr
Length
Boom Arm
11 1 sec / 3 sec / 6 sec
Speed
12 Housing Height 925 mm approx.
13 Housing Width 335 mm approx.
14 Housing Length 290 mm approx.
15 Power Supply 230V±10%, 110V±10%, 50/60HZ
Control Circuit
16 operating 12 V DC
voltage
Nominal power 50 W in Standby condition
17
Consumption < 300 W in operating condition
PIC 8-bit CMOS FLASH Microcontrollers Controller
18 Intelligence
based with High performance RISC CPU.
19 Display 2 * 7 segment display
Safety Logic An advanced system for reversing boom arm on
20
Control obstacle
Compression spring, the compression spring can avoid
21 Spring type
accidents caused by broken spring due to great force
Mode of
22 Normally closed
Operation
23 BoomArm Rest Available in 4.5 mtr and 6 mtr
RF remote control, specially for carrying security
24 Wireless control guards.
Wireless Push Button, specially for security cabind
Remote control
25 ≥30m
distance
Potential free inputs for both entry and exit operation.
Access Control
26 Functions seamlessly after integration with any third
Integration
party access control systems through NO input.
27 Interface RS485 Communication module
28 MTBF 10 Million Cycles
29 MTTR 30 Min
Clutch key
Receiver
Accessories Remote Controller (2 pieces)
30
included Boom Rest(Available in 4.5 mtr and 6 mtr)
Wireless Push Button
Foundation bolts * 4
31 Photcell safety sensor

Signature of Contractor Page 333 PWD-GoR

 Photcell safety sensor Stand * 2 Volume 5 Tech nical Specificatio ns

Vehicle Loop detector

Optional UHF Reader
accessories UHF Reader Controller
Windshield tags
Traffic light
In case of power failure Boom Barrier can be
configured either fail safe or fail locked mode.
32 Fail lock / Safe
Advanced manual clutch key provided for fail safe
operation.
33 Hold Open Time Is adjustable from 3 to 59 seconds
In case of power failure, using advanced manual clutch
34 Power failure
key the boom Arm can be opened.
100% , Barriers works 24 Hrs*7 *365 days without any
35 Duty Cycle
resting time.
Ambient
36 Operating - 45° to +75° C
Temperature
Relative
37 ≤90%
humidity
38 Net Weight 60 Kg*
39 Protection IP 54
40 Certification CE

Technical specification for DFMD

Sr. No. Features Technical Specifications Remark
1 Principal of Operation Microprocessor Based Operation, Digitally
Controlled, Voltage Very Low Frequency
2 Dimensions Net Passage clearance is 0.71m wide & 1.9m
high.
3 Rugged Structure, not susceptible to false alarms
due to mechanical Vibration ABS Side panels
should have ribbed design for additional support
to structure and should be detachable for ease to
Frame install & transport.
4 Power Operating voltage: Mains 230 V + 10% 50 Hz. AC
connecting socket near the top of the side panel,
for AC supply connection so that power frequency
does not affect the detection capability
of DFMD in long run.
5 Should have minimum 9 overlapping detector
Zones zones in DFMD
6 Multi-loop search coils housed in two side panels
Search Coil only.
7 Control Control panel should be built inside the frame on
the top with all the operating controls built in. It
should have plug -in card system for easy
maintenance.
8 Control Unit Display The DFMD Panel should have digitally controlled
Panel membrane touch button pads for selection &
programming of the system.
a) LCD: Should have 4 lines Backlight LCD,
which should display the security level settings,
traffic, counters etc.
Signature of Contractor Page 334 PWD-GoR
 b) Metal Locator Display: There should be Alarm nical Specificatio ns
LEDs on Control panel on a symbolic body
showing the alarming zone. This would display
whether the point of detection is in the right / left /
centre of the body at the corresponding height
level.
c) Metal Intensity Level Indicator: There should
LEDs on the display panel for graphical
indication of the detection level of metal. The size
of threat level shall be indicated by the colour of
the LED’s. More threat shall make the RED LED’s
glow. This display should operate only when the
Infra-Red beam is broken when a person passes
through the detector.
d) Battery Indicator: The control panel should also
have battery indicator.
e) Traffic Light Status Indictor: An LED indicating
Green / Red status of the traffic light should be
installed on the:
i) Control unit display panel
ii) Top and bottom of both side Panels on the exit
side of the metal detector
iii) Sensitivity Level – should have at least 9
security levels and further provision for
adjustments to a fine step.
iv) While in operation the LCD should always
display the IN and OUT counters separately,
along with security level.
9 Detection a) Capable to detect all Metals, Zinc & Metal
Alloys using single detection Program should be
able to detect ferrous / non-ferrous metals at any
location.
b) Shall be tested to IS: 14132: 1992
c) Shall have Continuous active detection
capability, also quick reset capability after each
detection.
d) Should allow minimum 30 people per minute to
pass through it.
e) Should have uniform sensitivity throughout the
door frame.
f) Should have Error Free reliable operation for
various object speeds (slow walk speed)
g) Should have Minimum Nine zones, all zones
shall be overlapping to each other: Left Top,
Centre Top, Right Top, Left Middle, Centre
Middle, Right Middle, Left Bottom, Centre Bottom,
and Right Bottom.
h) The unit should have Intelligent 5-digit traffic
Counter display on LCD.
i) The unit should show separately IN and OUT
counter. The counters should have provision for
selection of visible / invisible mode.
10 Sensitivity a) The unit shall provide for Individual zone
sensitivity settings for all 9 overlapping zones.
b) The unit shall provide for Overall zone
sensitivity adjustment.

Signature of Contractor Page 335 PWD-GoR

 c) The unit shall be capable of 20 different nical Specificatio ns

adjustable sensitivity levels.

d) Sensitivity The Magnetic field of the DFMD
Equipment should be harmless to magnetic
media, electronics device supported by Test
certificate from NABL (India) or other accredited
labs from the country of origin of equipment,
wearers of heart pacemakers and pregnant
women (by recognized medical institute). Bidder
should provide the certificate for the same along
with bid.

Technical specification for BAGGAGE SCANING SYSTEM

[Link]. Details Specification Remark
Reliable and sturdy steel case, Baggage scanner has
been carefully tested to ensure its correct functioning
1 Design
both in very cold and very hot climate and its functional
compatibility.
X-Ray
2 100 KV, 160 KV
Generator

Multilingual operation, Automatic built-in test & self-

diagnosis, Secure access key, Uninterruptable power
supply (ups), Threat alert & material classification, Auto
3 Technology
archiving, Network-ready, Energy-saving design, One
key turn off, Drugs & explosives inspection, Indication of
the date & time, Baggage Counter

Housing
4 Mild Steel Powder coated
material
Tunnel Size
5 500x300mm, 600x400mm, 650x500mm
(MM)
Conveyor
6 Speed 0.22 m/s
Conveyor load
7 Upto 150 kg
capacity
8 Power Supply 230V±10%, 110V±10%, 50/60HZ
9 Penetration Typical 38mm steel, Guarantee 34mm steel
Wire
10 Typical AWG 40, Guarantee AWG 38
Resolution
X-Ray
11 Leakage Less than 0.1mR/hr
Power
12 Max 0.8 KVA
Consumption
13 Film Saftey Guarantee ASAIISO 1600 Film

Image Color / BW, negative, high/low penetration, stripping,

14
enhancment general enhancement & pseudo color, etc.

Up to 5,00,000 images stored automatically, enable

15 Image archive transferring to USB disk & converting to JPG, BMP &
Other general formats

Signature of Contractor Page 336 PWD-GoR

 Fault diagnosis, System time setting, Detection blVinoldumde o5 tTsech nical Specifications
delete, X-Ray source setting (analoge or digital), alarm
Other
16 setting, image setting, software register, user
Function
management, TIP report, data setting (machine working
time, X-Ray source working time, baggage counter, etc.)
Multiple remote applications available based on Ethernet
Network LAN & windows platform, such as image centralized
17
Application storage & identify, recheck workstation & network TIP,
etc (Optional)
18 Net Weight 600 Kg

Technical specification for ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM

1. System Overview
Minimum System Capacities and Features
SYSTEM CAPABILITY
Number of Cards per ADC 1,00,000
Online Remote Site LAN/WAN
ADC with RS-485 / RS-232 / TCP/IP Unlimited
Card/Keypad readers Unlimited
Monitored Points (Inputs) Unlimited
Door Lock Outputs (Relays) Unlimited
Access Groups Unlimited
Daily Schedule 250 max
Weekly Schedule for 7 days and Holidays 125 max
Holidays and Special Days 150
Multiple Operators per Workstation Yes
Operator profiles / Security Levels Unlimited
System Operators with Usernames and Passwords Unlimited
Strong Operator Password rules Unlimited
Integration with Microsoft Active Directory Yes
Multi-Language Yes
Translation Tool for Software Localization Yes
License License Key Activation
ARCHITECTURE
Operating System / Compatibility
Windows Server 2016 and higher
Windows approved software Yes
Graphic user interface Advanced (WPF)
Multi Task Yes
Multi-process (N-tier) architecture Yes
Communication motor as service Yes
Communication load distribution between several PCs Yes
Database type MS-SQL
Web client application Yes
FUNCTIONS & FEATURES
USB reader enrollment support Yes
QR code reading and printing support Yes
User Database Import Via Excel spreadsheet
User Defined User Fields 20
User ID Photo Capture Yes
Real Time Photo Display Yes
Automated tasks/Global Reflex Triggering Yes

Signature of Contractor Page 337 PWD-GoR

 Anti Passback feature local / timed / global
Volume 5 Technical Specifications

Integrated Badge Printing view / print / edit layout

Advanced Report wizard view / print / export
Basic Time and Attendance Reporting Yes
Send an e-mail on event Yes
Muster report sent by e-mail Yes
Multiple change on users’ definitions Yes
Integration with Visitor management Yes
Diagnostic tools Yes
Backup/Restore database tool Yes
Automatic Journal archiving Yes
Third Party protocols OEM to provide API
ALARMS AND GRAPHICS
Reader Sabotage Detection Yes
Alarm Priority Levels 255
Alarm zones management Yes
Site Maps Yes
Icons for Inputs, Relays, Doors, etc. Yes
Real Time Animated Icons Yes
Icon Tooltips Yes
Graphic Display Events (Alarm/Access) Yes
ACCESS DOOR CONTROLLER
Doors 2
Readers 4
Reader Interface Wiegand
Each controller should be Intelligent
Controller Type Independent
Inputs Min 8
Outputs Min 4
I/O diagnostic LEDs Yes
Onboard TCP/IP Ethernet Port Yes
Up to 200,000 according to the no. of cards
Max. Number of Events in ADC Memory
in the system
Multi Technology Cards per Reader Yes
Multiple cards per user Yes
32-bit CPU Yes
PSU failed monitoring Yes
Removable connectors Yes
Housing tamper detection Yes
2. Access Control and Security management system (ACS)
2.1. ACS General Features
The functional requirements of the ACS shall be as follows:
2.1.1. The Access Control and Security management system (ACS) shall provide a
number of security automation functions, including the ability to regulate access
through specific doors and gates to secured areas.
2.1.2. The ACS shall be designed to perform a wide variety of feature rich functions as
part of an integrated security automation and management system.
2.1.3. The ACS shall have the following functions:
a) Access control configuration and management
b) Web client interface
c) User location tracking
d) Biometric verification
e) Operator and User definition
f) Visitor management

Signature of Contractor Page 338 PWD-GoR

 g) Card designing and printing facility Volume 5 Technical Specifications

h) Basic Time & attendance recording

i) Intrusion detection and alarm monitoring
j) Pre-defined automatic actions
k) Live graphics
l) Event history
m) Third-party interfaces
2.1.4. The ACS shall be developed so that all modules (access control, alarm
monitoring, intrusion detection, etc.) shall seamlessly integrate into a single
application with GUI.
2.1.5. The ACS shall be modular in nature and easily scalable without any
hardware/software limitations.
2.1.6. ACS capacity parameters and security items shall be as follows:
a) Graphical site plans: unlimited.
b) ADC: unlimited.
c) Access point (readers): unlimited.
d) Fully supervised alarm inputs (4 states): Up to 8 per ADC.
e) Output relays: Up to 64 per ADC.
f) Access control zones (access groups): unlimited.
g) Time zones per day: 4
h) Holidays and special days: Up to 180
i) Operators: unlimited
j) Users: Up to 100,000
k) User customized fields: 20
2.1.7. The ACS shall support distributed architecture with central monitoring and
control.
2.1.8. The ACS shall have a Central Control Server (CCS) that supports many Clients
with all functionality available from Client on the network.
2.1.9. The Client shall provide a fully integrated ACS application with a user-friendly
Windows Graphical User interface (GUI).
2.1.10. The ACS shall provide a fully multilingual software package with menus, system
descriptions and device descriptions in multiple languages. Different Clients shall
be configured with different languages. A user-friendly tool shall be provided for
translating the GUI into other languages. This tool shall not require any
knowledge of databases or programming.
2.1.11. The GUI shall be adapted for each category of operator: Technicians, Security
Guards and Card managers. Each operator type should have its own set of
screens.
2.1.12. Each site shall be able to use the ACS independently. From any Client GUI, any
operator shall be able to control his own site only. In this mode, each operator
shall be able to consult the ADC, the User data, the access events and the alarms
of his own site only. Some operators shall control several or all the sites according
to their authorization rights.
2.1.13. The ACS shall allow to be shared by independent tenants. In this mode, each
company shall have one or more operators that shall be able to consult the ADC,
the User data, the access events and the alarms of their own company only. For
real time events, the system background process shall read all events – but
display only those relevant for the current operator according to his/her company.
For common parts like building entrance readers, it shall be possible to share
ADC with two or more companies, allowing other tenants to use same ADC.
2.1.14. The CCS shall have services in order to be launched automatically when the PC
starts up. A watchdog should check that the services are always running.

Signature of Contractor Page 339 PWD-GoR

 2.1.15. It shall be possible to relocate the ADC communication servicVeoslumaell5oTwecin g the CCS
hnical S pec ifi cations

load to be distributed among several to third-party machines. A communication

service shall be selected to manage all the data processing that takes place in a
specific ADC network.
2.1.16. The system shall support Microsoft SQL as database engine.
2.1.17. The ACS shall be able to install its own database engine as well as use an
existing SQL Server.
2.1.18. The ACS shall have a separated database for all events and logs.
2.1.19. The ACS shall allow the administrator to backup the database manually and
automatically.
2.1.20. The CCS shall support Microsoft Server 2016 and higher operating systems.
2.2. Access control configuration and management
2.2.1. The ACS shall provide means to configure control access to nominated doors
and to secure areas of premises by configuring the access privileges stored in
Access Door Controllers (ADC). These privileges define the access rights of
cards presented at readers.
2.2.2. The software shall include built-in default setting for quick setup, such as: default
ADC(s), access group(s), and two weekly programs: Always & Never.
2.2.3. The ACS shall provide a setup wizard to create and to activate of a large
amountof ADC in a single operation.
2.2.4. When a new ADC is being defined by the operator, the ACS shall automatically
define, according to the ADC type, all its components: readers, inputs and relays.
The following basic ADC parameters should also be automatically defined and
configured: door alarm inputs, door open times, request to exit inputs, reader
weekly programs. The newly created readers should be automatically added to
the default access group which allows door pass on all doors, at any time.
2.2.5. The ACS GUI shall display the ADC(s) in a tree with its readers, inputs and relays.
The tree shall have a search function to find any component easily. The tree shall
display the communication status of each ADC.
2.2.6. The ACS GUI shall display the list of the ADC that are in communication failure.
2.2.7. The following features shall be a part of the ACS application:
a) Time Zones with intervals.
b) Multiple Access Groups
c) Holidays
d) Field hardware communication
e) Field hardware configuration
f) Area controls with local Anti Passback
g) Alarm and event logging
h) Schedule operations
i) Multiple card formats
j) On-line help with a powerful search engine
k) Monitor zones
l) Text instructions
m) Alarm priorities
n) Alarm event mapping
o) System download ability
2.2.8. Each user shall have a Personal Identity Number (PIN) to be used on readers
with keypad.
2.2.9. The ACS shall support the following operations:
a) PIN code and/or Card management. It shall be possible to change the door
access mode at certain times of the day.
b) Fingerprint and/or face management.
c) Change PIN/Card status to: valid/invalid/lost/stolen
Signature of Contractor Page 340 PWD-GoR
 d) Program unlimited access groups Volume 5 Technical Specifications

e) Assign or add temporary user access rights

f) Allow door to be constantly unlocked at given times according to time zones.
g) Allow door to be constantly locked at given times according to time zones so
that it cannot be opened even with a valid PIN code / Card / fingerprint.
h) Program more than 250 daily programs for various applications. Each weekly
program schedule shall be composed of a 4 'on' (or 'green') time intervals.
Any time not included in these intervals is considered 'off' (or 'red). Hence,
there will be a total of 9 intervals: four 'on/green' and five 'off/red' times.
i) Change system time and date. In addition, the system must automatically
adjust for time changes as necessary.
j) Define more than 150 holidays or 'special days'. These days shall be
assigned to the weekly programs in order to allow auto switching of security
mode during these days.
2.2.10. The ACS shall provide an option to define users that should be escorted by
another user. When a user must be escorted, the access at the relevant reader
should be granted only after presenting two valid credentials at the same reader
successively. This option shall be applied according to time zones (eg. from 8:00
to 17:00 only). It shall be possible to deactivate this option for certain people.
2.2.11. The ACS shall provide an option to define Local Anti Passback as well as Timed
Anti Passback in order to prevent users from passing their credentials back to a
second person to access a same door. This option shall be applied according to
time zones (eg. from 8:00 to 17:00 only). It shall be possible to deactivate this
option for certain people.
2.2.12. The ACS shall provide an option to define Global Anti PassBack feature on
readers that must be used in a sequence to enter or leave a defined area. This
option would help the operator to create rules to force users to follow a
predetermined path in the facility. It shall be possible to remotely reset this option
for any user if necessary.
2.2.13. The ACS shall provide an option to link a reader to an Alarm Zone for restricting
the access at this reader to specific people only when the Alarm Zone is armed.
When authorized people present their credentials at such reader, if the Alarm
Zone is armed, the access shall be granted and the Alarm Zone shall be
temporarily disarmed during a pre-defined Entrance delay. This provides a grace
time to allow these people to access and to disarm the zone manually from a
keypad. After this delay, if the Alarm Zone is not disarmed, it shall be armed
automatically.
2.2.14. The ACS shall provide an option to activate two different relays upon a granted
access for different durations.
2.2.15. It shall be possible to schedule an Access Zone for a 'First Card Unlock' mode,
whereby the defined area is scheduled to switch to Free Access when a suitably
card is badged at the reader. A second card swipe shall allow to secure the
Access Zone again.
2.2.16. The system shall allow to define readers that support multi-technology credentials
(eg. 125kHz, 13.56MHz and NFC).
2.3. Web client interface
2.3.1. The ACS shall provide a dedicated Web client interface allowing to monitor
access control information from any machine on the LAN via any standard web
browser without installation on the PC.
2.3.2. Remote connection shall be also possible through Secured Internet access.
2.3.3. Accessing this Web client interface shall require login. The number of operators
connected to the Web client interface at the same time shall be restricted.
2.3.4. The Web client interface shall support multiple operator languages. The
languages shall be available via the browser settings.
2.3.5. This interface shall be adapted to Smartphones. It shall work on any device that
supports HTML5.
2.3.6. The Web client interface shall be able to display all access events and alarms in
real time.

Signature of Contractor Page 341 PWD-GoR

 2.3.7. The Web client interface shall allow operators to view/adVdolu /emdei5t/Tdee
chlneictae
l Spuecsife
icras
tio, ns

lock/unlock doors remotely, acknowledge/confirm alarms and monitor ADC

communication status.
2.3.8. The Web client interface shall provide the possibility to view event histories.
2.4. User location tracking
2.4.1. According to the operator restrictions, the Client GUI shall be able to display all
access events in real time.
2.4.2. It shall be possible to have the user’s information (eg. his name, department and
company). The operator shall be able to open the user details for more details.
2.4.3. The operator shall be able to sort the access events by date, filter them by reader
name and group them by type of events.
2.4.4. ACS operators shall have an option to display each access event type (e.g.,
Granted / Denied) in the real time log and another one to save them in the
database for the ability to generate future reports.
2.4.5. Each denied access shall be displayed with the denied reason (e.g., Access
group, unknown card, stolen card, etc.)
2.4.6. The operator shall be able to select the text color of each event type in the real
time log.
2.4.7. Photo Identification: Upon swiping a card/finger at any reader, the software shall
be capable of automatically displaying in a separate window the relevant user
information with a picture of the user, in order to positively identify the owner of
the card. This feature shall allow to filter access events by one or more selected
readers, based on operator preferences.
2.4.8. It shall be possible to open multiple photo identification screens simultaneously
and use each screen to view a different set of readers. The screen shall store the
latest access events for easy browsing with a Play/Pause button to control the
display.
2.4.9. If using the option where users must be escorted by another user, the picture of
the escort shall be displayed too.
2.4.10. It shall be possible to open the user details from the photo identification screen.
2.4.11. The ACS shall be able to provide the name of the last reader where the user
swiped including the date/time of this event.
2.4.12. For each door, the ACS shall display the total number of users authorized at this
door.
2.4.13. The ACS application shall allow to define the different areas of the facility in order
to be able to know which people are located in which area of the building in real
time. It shall be possible to enter the maximum capacity of each area in order to
automatically lock the area entrance when the area is full.
2.4.14. The areas shall be presented in a tree structure to have a hierarchy such that it
shall be possible for one area to be the sub-area of another.
2.4.15. The ACS shall provide an option to enable Global Anti PassBack feature for
predefined Areas to force users to follow a predetermined path in the facility.
2.4.16. The system shall include a tracking screen providing the location of every user in
the site. This screen shall allow viewing, for each defined area (and sub area),
the real time list of users currently present in the area and show their total count.
The areas and sub areas should be shown in a tree view. Area icons of the tree
shall change when the maximum capacity of the relevant area has been reached.
2.4.17. It shall be possible to display the name of the users within the areas along with
their entry time, their company, their department and their employee number.
2.4.18. From the tracking screen, ACS operators shall have the possibility to manually
change the location of a user by drag and drop without the need to physically
present the card at a reader.
2.4.19. If using the option where users must be escorted by another user, the ACS shall
provide an option to update the escort area also or to remain his location
unchanged after both badges are swiped at the door’s reader.
2.4.20. It shall be possible to print the list of users currently present in a specific area.
The ACS shall provide an option to automatically send the list of users currently
present in a specific area by mail.
2.5. Biometric verification
2.5.1. An integrated Biometric module shall support the following modes:
a) ‘Finger only’ mode / ‘Face only’ mode / ‘Card only’ mode
Signature of Contractor Page 342 PWD-GoR
 b) ‘Card & Finger’ mode / ‘Card & Face’ mode / ‘Finger & FVaoluce’ mode
me 5 T echnical Specifications

c) ‘Card or Finger or Face’ mode

2.5.2. Fingerprints and face enrollment shall be an integral part of the user screen. Each
user may enroll up to 10 fingerprints and 2 faces. It shall be possible to select the
finger to enroll.
2.5.3. The system shall provide the ability to enroll Mifare 32-bit from the biometric
readers.
2.6. Operator definition
2.6.1. The system shall provide the ability to prohibit / allow any screen of the software
for each operator including the possibility to authorize screens in read only mode.
2.6.2. The operator shall be able to save/load a layout snapshot of his current screen
setup. In addition, it shall be possible to automatically load a layout snapshot
when the operator logs in to the system.
2.6.3. The operator shall be required to enter a user name and password to log into the
system. These credentials are assigned a security level which authorizes or filters
access to certain system functions/screens.
2.6.4. The ACS shall provide an option to force operators to use a strong operator
password. Operator password rules shall be customizable and follow Standard
Policies and Guidelines: Password History policy, Maximum Password Age
policy, Minimum Password Length policy, Password Complexity Requirements
policy.
2.6.5. At any moment, any operator shall be able to change his password at his
discretion.
2.6.6. The ACS shall provide an option to force any operator to change his password
the next time he logs in.
2.6.7. All the operator passwords shall be hashed in the database in order to protect the
software from possible hackers.
2.6.8. The ACS shall provide an option to login with Windows Active Directory
credentials too. It shall be possible to link any ACS operator to an existing Active
Directory user and import his personal data like Email, Phone, Address, etc.
2.6.9. The operators’ permissions in the software shall include an option to define the
list of the doors for which the operator is authorized to give the access to the
users.
2.6.10. The ACS shall allow to display menus and screens in the relevant operator
language. Different operators may have different languages, so the GUI shall be
translated into the right language according to the operators' settings.
2.7. User definition
2.7.1. The following minimum features shall be a part of card enrolment and personal
data management:
a) Creating and maintaining a user database with photo attributes
b) Modify existing field names of the user form
c) Assigning of access rights to the readers
d) Bulk assignment/modification/deletion of access rights
e) Record searching
2.7.2. The system shall allow to add/edit/delete users.
2.7.3. The ACS shall allow to define an unlimited number of user types: Employee,
Guard, Visitor, etc. The software shall provide a way to filter users by type.
2.7.4. The ACS shall allow the ability of assigning users with different cards for each
reader technology type (Magnetic, Wiegand, etc.). It shall be possible to assign
to a same person several cards of the same technology.
2.7.5. It shall be possible to associate a user picture by attaching a photo file or by taking
a still image using a web cam or other camera. The picture taking process must
be operated directly from within the access control software.
2.7.6. The ACS shall allow setting cards status to: In use, Free, Canceled, Lost or
Stolen. It shall be possible to change the status of many cards manually in a
single operation.
2.7.7. The system shall include a function enabling the operator to view cards' list with
their status (e.g. free, in use, lost, etc.). The ACS shall provide the possibility to

Signature of Contractor Page 343 PWD-GoR

 filter and order the cards by code or by status. There shall bVeoluamed5yTneachm ic search
nic al Spec ifi cations

function for a card code in order to find a card quickly.

2.7.8. Allow creating of two or more users with the same first name and last name. The
distinction in these cases shall be based on a special administrative number.
2.7.9. It shall be possible to validate or invalidate users manually or automatically.
2.7.10. It shall be possible to validate users for a given period by setting the start date
and end date. In addition, the operator shall be able to give/restrict user access
rights on specific doors for a short period.
2.7.11. The ACS shall allow the global change (in a single operation) for many users
simultaneously, like validate or invalidate many users manually, adding access
at a new door to many users, changing access rights, department, validation
date, etc.
2.7.12. The operator shall be able to define a default set of access rights for each
department. Thus, new users will automatically have access to the set of doors
relating to their department.
2.7.13. The ACS shall allow a group of users to access the same door but according to
their own personal time slot.
2.7.14. The ACS shall support an import utility that provides importing of user information
into the ACS database via an Excel file.
2.7.15. The ACS shall provide an option to archive users. The program should not
remove these users from the database but it should mark them as ‘archived’,
remove their card and hide them from the list of users (unless the operator
explicitly asks to show the archived ones). Operators shall be able to revert the
status back to normal. There shall be a special option to delete all archived users
in one operation.
2.7.16. There shall be a special option to delete all users that do not have any card in
one operation.
2.7.17. In addition to the standard information fields (address, phone, etc.) in the user
screen, the operator shall be able to create customized fields (e.g. height, eye
color, army rank, etc.) that may take the form of a text field, a Yes/No slider, a
number field or a date & time field.
2.7.18. The system shall include a function enabling the operator to view and print the
users' list with information fields (e.g. photo, company, employee number, car
license plate, etc.). Any field shall be sortable and filterable.
2.7.19. There shall be a dynamic search function for a user’s name, company name or
department name in order to find people quickly.
2.7.20. The users' list shall be exportable in PDF or XLS (MS-Excel) format. The operator
shall be able to select which fields to display / export.
2.7.21. The ACS shall provide the possibility to filter, group and order the users by any
field. The operator shall be able to print or export exactly what he sees on the
screen.
2.7.22. When several sites are using the ACS independently, the ACS shall distinct
between 3 types of users: Local, Shared & Global:
a) Local users are people who are authorized to access the doors of their own
site only.
b) In addition to doors of their own site, Shared users are people who are
authorized to access other sites from time to time. For this purpose, the data
of those users shall be accessible by other sites' operators in 'read only'
mode.
c) Global users are people that shall be editable by any operator from any site.
2.8. Card designing and printing facility
2.8.1. The ACS shall allow to create and design an unlimited number of card layouts
in order to print the users’ badge with the required information on a badge
printer. Any field shall be able to be added to badge templates.
2.8.2. It shall be possible to include a barcode or a QR code in the badge layouts.
2.8.3. An operator shall be able to define a card layout for each user type (eg.
employees, visitors, contractors, etc.) so when printing a badge, the default layout
will be used according to the user type.
2.8.4. It shall be possible to print a badge by right click on the user/badge list.

Signature of Contractor Page 344 PWD-GoR

 2.8.5. The ACS shall allow to allocate or update the users' badge lVaoyluomue t5 Tfreochm the User
nical S pecifi cations
interface or via an Excel file.
2.9. Time & attendance recording
2.9.1. The system shall provide a Time & Attendance (T&A) report. For each reader it
shall be possible to define whether it is an IN (entrance), OUT (exit), or None (i.e.,
its events should not be included in the attendance report).
2.9.2. The T&A report shall contain the total work hours for each user based on all the
relevant access events.
2.9.3. Operators shall be able to export the T&A report in PDF or CSV format.
2.10. Intrusion detection and alarm monitoring
2.10.1. The ACS shall allow monitoring intrusion detection alarms with the ability to
manually arm and disarm the devices remotely.
2.10.2. According to the operator restrictions, the Client GUI shall be able to display all
alarms in real time.
2.10.3. It shall be possible to have the alarm information (eg. name, origin, status).
2.10.4. The operator shall be able to sort the alarms by date, filter them by origin and
group them by status.
2.10.5. ACS operators shall have an option to display each alarm status (e.g., Start Alarm
/ End Alarm) in the real time log and another one to save them in the database
for the ability to generate future reports.
2.10.6. The operator shall be able to select the text color of each alarm status in the real
time log. In addition, to stand out the alarm text of a specific alarm, it shall be
possible to change the text color of an individual alarm.
2.10.7. An Alarm window shall display a table listing all the current alarms of the system
with the alarm date and time, the relevant ADC name, the relevant input name,
the relevant status and the relevant priority.
2.10.8. The system shall allow to associate a specific instruction text to each alarm in
order to display it upon alarm activation in the Alarm window.
2.10.9. Any authorized operator shall be able to acknowledge and confirm alarms by
right-click on the relevant alarm. The Acknowledge time shall be displayed in the
Alarm window.
2.10.10. In the Alarm window, the operator shall be able to sort out alarms by date and
time, ADC name, input name, alarm status, alarm priority, instruction or
Acknowledge time.
2.10.11. The central application shall display the total number of new alarms and the total
number of acknowledged alarms in the top taskbar. When new alarms are
acknowledged, the new alarm counter shall be decreased and the acknowledged
alarm counter shall be increased accordingly. When an acknowledged alarm is
confirmed, the alarm shall be removed from the active alarm list and the relevant
counter shall be updated accordingly.
2.10.12. The ACS shall provide the following alarm features:
a) Alarm handling & reporting
b) Arming status
c) Physical and logical status of the inputs
d) Possibility to bypass (i.e. omit) an input
e) Alarm priorities
f) Alarm acknowledgement & processing with valid comments
g) Alarm sorting capabilities
h) Sending an e-mail on alarm
i) Activating the buzzer of the reader when the door is forced open or open too
long.
j) Generating an alarm if the reader is torn, the power is in failure, the housing
is open and the battery level is low.
k) Option to ignore unnecessary repeating alarms caused by a malfunctioning
detector.

Signature of Contractor Page 345 PWD-GoR

 2.10.13. The ACS shall provide the list of all the Alarm zones with thVeoilrumree5sTpeechcnticivaleSpa larm
ec i fications

status and the current arming status. It shall be possible to filter the Alarm zone
list by name or by date.
2.10.14. Authorized operators shall be able to arm/disarm Alarm zones manually.
2.10.15. The ACS shall allow to arm/disarm an Alarm Zone automatically upon an event
or according to time zones.
2.10.16. Upon an alarm from a specific Zone, the ACS shall provide the possibility to
automatically activate specific relays or send by mail the list of people present in
the relevant Zone.
2.10.17. The ACS shall allow to manually arm/disarm any Alarm Zones from any keypad
reader.
2.11. Pre-defined automatic actions
2.11.1. The ACS shall allow the operator to define automatic actions that will be triggered
when pre-defined conditions are true, i.e., automatic activation of some relays
upon a specific event or a pre-defined schedule.
2.11.2. The pre-defined conditions capable to activate automatic actions shall be:
a) Any granted/denied access event from any or predefined users from any or
selected department at any or specific readers,
b) Any or specific alarm from any or selected Alarm Zone,
c) Any alarm acknowledgment,
d) A predefined occupancy rate of a specific area,
e) Unknown card events from any or specific readers
f) A specific time & date or a specific period.
2.11.3. The pre-defined conditions shall allow “OR” and “AND” logical operators. By
selecting the AND operator, all conditions in the event trigger group must be true,
within a specified time, for the assigned action(s) to take place.
2.11.4. The ACS shall allow the following automatic actions:
a) Relay activation/deactivation,
b) Unlock/Secure all doors temporarily or constantly,
c) Alarm zone arming/disarming,
d) Validate/invalidate a specific user,
e) Display a predefined message on the screen,
f) Play a selected sound,
g) Insert a predefined comment in the journal,
h) Backup the database,
i) Run a specific external application,
j) Display the list of people present in a specific area, or export this report by
mail,
k) Send a predefined email.
2.11.5. It shall be possible to execute different actions simultaneously.
2.11.6. The operator shall be able to add/remove conditions and actions with the mouse.
2.11.7. The ACS shall provide an option to add buttons on the main toolbar for executing
pre-defined actions manually like open a door in remote, etc.
2.12. Live graphics
2.12.1. The ACS shall provide a graphical map window that allows operators to import
customized maps of the facility and place animated custom icons on them.
2.12.2. The graphics display shall be capable of displaying the floor plan layout of the
building where the system is installed.
2.12.3. Graphical imagery of the site plan supplied by the site owner shall be imported
into the software in one of the following formats: BMP, JPG, JPEG, GIF, WMF,
RLE, PNG.

Signature of Contractor Page 346 PWD-GoR

 2.12.4. The maps shall be presented as a tree in order to jump fromVom ap to map easily.
lu me 5 T echni cal S pe ci fi cations

The tree shall have a hierarchy in such a way that it shall be possible for one map
to be the sub-map of another.
2.12.5. The ACS shall provide an option to group some maps together in the tree.
2.12.6. The tree shall have a Map search function in order to find a specific map on the
tree quickly.
2.12.7. The screen shall have navigation buttons to go backward to the previously visited
maps, or forward.
2.12.8. The operator shall be able to view many maps simultaneously.
2.12.9. Each graphic map shall be able to contain an unlimited number of icons. The
operator shall be able to show the icon on the screen in different sizes according
to his preferences.
2.12.10. The operator shall be able to zoom in/out the map with the mouse.
2.12.11. A button shall allow to view the map in Full screen mode.
2.12.12. The display shall be capable of displaying icons for: ADC, alarms, Alarm zones,
doors, relays, areas and maps.
2.12.13. These icons shall display the following status in real time:
a) ADC: communication status, Box Open, Low Battery and Power Supply
Failure.
b) Alarms: physical input status (open/close), arming status and alarm status.
c) Alarm zones: arming status and alarm status.
d) Alarm associated instruction text upon alarm activation as popup text
e) Doors: physical door status, arming status and alarm status.
f) Relays: physical relay status.
g) Areas: current number of people in area and the area capacity status.
h) Maps: alarm status.
2.12.14. The operator shall execute the following actions from these icons:
a) ADC: open ADC properties
b) Alarms: acknowledge, confirm, bypass, open input properties
c) Alarm zones: arm/disarm, open alarm zone properties
d) Doors: acknowledge, confirm, bypass, unlock/lock door, open reader
properties
e) Relays: activate/deactivate, open relay properties
f) Areas: display the list of people in area, open area properties
g) Maps: go to the relevant map
2.12.15. The screen shall have an option to show/hide all the icons of doors, inputs, relays
or areas.
2.12.16. The ACS shall provide predefined icons for the following categories: ADC,
alarms, doors, relays and maps. The operator shall be able to design new icons
for each category.
2.12.17. The operator shall be able to design linked geometric shapes and freehand
shapes that may be linked to maps, Alarm zones, areas, or left free.
2.12.18. Exact location of monitored alarms and controlled doors shall be displayed with
a corresponding icon identifying the condition of the device, e.g., opened/closed
door.
2.12.19. Icon search function shall allow to locate a specific icon in any map.
2.12.20. Monitor point status shall be available in real time and any device state change
shall be updated automatically on the graphics while displayed. The icons shall
change according to their physical status (ex. Door open/close, input open/close).
2.12.21. If an ADC has lost its communication with the CCS, the corresponding icon of its
readers, alarms and relays shall be marked as inactive.
2.12.22. When a monitored input, alarm zone or door is on alarm, its icon shall blink and
turns red. The icon color shall change following to its arming status (armed,
disarmed, acknowledged, omitted).

Signature of Contractor Page 347 PWD-GoR

 2.12.23. It shall be possible to omit, acknowledge and confirm an alaVrom by right-click on
lume 5 T e chnic al Spe c ifications
the relevant icon.
2.12.24. It shall be possible to unlock/lock a door manually by right click on the relevant
door icon. The door icon shall change when the door is unlocked/locked.
2.12.25. It shall be possible to activate/deactivate an ADC relay manually by right click on
the relevant relay icon. The relay icon shall change when the relay is
activated/deactivated.
2.12.26. It shall be possible to display the number of users within areas in real-time. This
shall be in the form of a numerical display on the site plan.
2.12.27. The border of the area icon shall turn red when the area is occupied at full
capacity.
2.12.28. It shall be possible to display the list of people currently inside an area by clicking
on the relevant area icon.
2.12.29. It shall be possible to display jump to another map by clicking on the relevant map
icon. The map icon shall change following to the alarm status (when there is one
alarm at least on this map or when all the alarms of this map are acknowledged/
confirmed).
2.12.30. It shall be possible to execute a pre-defined automatic action by clicking on an
icon of the map.
2.12.31. An alarm pane shall display all alarms in real time. Alarms shall be displayed in
red. Right-click on an alarm shall allow to acknowledge or confirm the alarm.
There shall be an option to navigate to the relevant map of the selected alarm.
2.12.32. The operator shall be able to set the system to auto select the last active alarm.
Whenever an alarm is occurred, the system shall pop up the relevant map and
show the relevant alarm icon.
2.12.33. An access pane shall display all access events in real time. There shall be an
option to open the user details from this pane.
2.12.34. From the real time log or from the Alarm window, the ACS shall provide an option
to display the map containing the icon of any selected alarm to locate it.
2.13. Event history
2.13.1. The system shall include a report function enabling the operator to view and print
reports containing the history of access events and alarms and all hardware
components like ADC, readers, etc.
2.13.2. The reports shall be exportable in PDF or XLS (MS-Excel) format.
2.13.3. The ACS shall provide the possibility to filter, group and order the data by any
field. The operator shall be able to print or export exactly what he sees on the
screen.
2.13.4. For avoiding to manually rebuild a report each time, the operator shall be able
tosave report templates with the filtering rules for future use.
2.13.5. Upon a selected event or a pre-defined schedule, the system shall allow
automatic export and email sending of any predefined report containing the
current updated values (e.g., recent events).
2.13.6. The ACS shall provide an automatic archive process for the active event journal
in order to secure older journal entries. Archived events shall be easily
searchable.

2.14. Third-party interfaces

2.14.1. The ACS shall be able to be integrated with third-party software products.
2.14.2. The ACS shall have a API that provide commands for creating/editing/deleting
cards and users from third-party software.
2.14.3. The API shall provide the ability to subscribe to alarms and ACS events from
third-party software.
2.14.4. The API shall provide commands for opening doors remotely from third-party
software.
2.14.5. The API shall be hosted as a Microsoft Windows service.

3. Access Door Controller (ADC)

3.1. Hardware
3.1.1. The ADC shall contain the following items:
a) Flash Memory for firmware updates via communication port.

Signature of Contractor Page 348 PWD-GoR

 b) Card capacity up to 100,000 cards Volume 5 Technical Specifications

c) High speed microprocessor with on-board real-time clock (RTC)

d) Support for minimum four Card/Keypad Readers
e) Shall interface with any standard Wiegand or Clock&Data card reader.
f) Shall control the three LEDs (‘On’, ‘Pass’, Fail’) of each reader and the reader
buzzer.
g) Shall provide at least 4 supervised (EOL Monitored) 4-state inputs and 4
relays.
h) Inputs and outputs shall have +/- 50V surge protections
i) Shall provide a dedicated input for the box tamper (housing control)
j) Shall provide a dedicated input for power status.
k) A lithium battery shall maintain data in RAM and supply power for the on-
board RTC, for the duration of 10 years even while no other power source is
available.
l) Shall have 12V DC input power.
m) In case of a power failure, a 12V/7A battery shall maintain the system in
function for up to 2 hours.
n) Shall provide a ‘Battery low’ signal to alert the operator.
o) Shall support plug-in modules to expand the I/O number.
p) Shall provide LED’s for power status and I/O status
q) The ADC PCB shall provide increased protection against communication
interferences, lightening, and other electrical noises.
r) Failure of one ADC may not affect the rest of the system.
s) Shall provide removable connectors.
3.2. Communication with the CCS
a) The communication between ADC and CCS shall be done via RS485 link or TCP/IP
link.
b) The communication baud rate shall be programmable.
c) Each serial port shall have protection against ESD and surge currents. There shall be
an option for Lighting protection.
d) The ADC shall provide LED’s for monitoring the communication.
3.2.1. If the communication with the Central Control Server (CCS) fails, the ADC shall
continue providing access based on the predefined security configurations until
the communication is restored. All event logs and alarms shall be stored locally
(based on ADC capacity). These events shall be sent to the CCS, when the
communication is regained.
3.2.2. In a case of global communication failure, each ADC shall continue to grant
access following to the card number (site code included), i.e. downgraded mode
shall not exist.
3.3. Firmware
3.3.1. The ADC shall provide fully distributed processing of access control & alarm
monitoring operations.
3.3.2. Access levels, hardware configurations, and programmed alarm outputs
assigned at the administration client workstation shall be downloaded to the ADC,
which shall store this information and function using its high speed, local
microprocessor.
3.3.3. All access granted/denied decisions must be made at the ADC to provide fast
responses to card reader transactions.
3.3.4. A fully configured ADC shall require less than one-half (0.5) seconds to grant
access to an authorized user or deny access to an unauthorized user.

Signature of Contractor Page 349 PWD-GoR

 3.3.5. Downloading of all the parameters, including users (up to 10V,0ol0um0e)5, Tfreo m the ACS
ch nica l S pec ifi cations

to the ADC with a standard memory download shall require no more than a couple
of minutes.
3.3.6. All ACS software or firmware upgrades shall be downloadable through the
network to the ADC.
3.3.7. The ADC shall continue to function normally (no downgraded mode in stand-
alone) in the event that it loses communication with the ACS Server.
3.3.8. The ADC must contain the full card database to allow full operation in case of lost
of communication with the ACS server.
3.3.9. While in this off-line state, the ADC is required to make access granted/denied
decisions and maintain a log of the events that have occurred. Events shall be
stored in local memory, and then uploaded automatically to the ACS database
after communication has been restored.
3.3.10. The ADC shall support multiple card technologies with various card formats and
facility codes. It shall support at least Magnetic ISO1 & ISO2 and Wiegand
technologies. The technology shall be set by on-board DIP switches and the
format within the chosen technology shall be programmable from the ACS server.
3.3.11. The ADC shall support readers with a built-in keypad. The keypad must have the
capacity to operate alone or in conjunction with a card reader for PIN verification.
It must be possible to assign a different PIN to each user.
3.3.12. ADC shall automatically detect a card reader disconnection.
3.3.13. ADC shall have up to 16 inputs which can be allocated (from the ACS server) to
monitor door position, request to exit button and standard alarm inputs. Door
alarm shall be raised immediately if the door is forced or after a pre-defined delay
in case the door was left open for too long.
3.3.14. ADC shall support up to 255 daily schedules of 8 intervals each and up to 127
weekly schedules.
3.3.15. ADC shall support up to 180 holidays and special days.
3.3.16. Up to 127 Weekly Schedule of 7 Daily Schedules, Holiday and special days
schedules
3.3.17. Each individual input should be able to be programmed either as Normally Open
(NO) or as Normally Closed (NC).
3.3.18. Output relays shall be capable of responding to:
a) ADC control (Door control, alarms, etc.). Door open times shall be adjustable.
b) Input alarms from the same ADC, or another ADC connected to the same
communication bus.
c) Commands from ACS server
d) Time zone control for automatic operation.
3.3.19. Inputs must have the possibility to trigger a set of relays of the same ADC. This
feature shall work even when the ACS server is down.
3.3.20. ADC shall have an option to register access event only after the door was actually
opened (and not immediately after the card/code/finger pass).
3.3.21. ADC shall manage Mantraps, like in the following examples.
Example 1: In a system of 2 doors, the first door is allowed to be opened only
whilst the second door is closed.
Example 2: Same as above, but the 2nd door is automatically opened as soon
as the first one is closed.
3.3.22. ADC shall have an option to allow access only after presenting two valid
credentials at the same reader successively. This option shall be applied
according to time zones (eg. from 8:00 to 17:00 only). It shall be possible to
deactivate this option for certain people.
3.3.23. ADC shall support local Anti Passback as well as Timed Anti Passback in order
to prevent users from passing their credentials back to a second person to access
a same door. This option shall be applied according to time zones (eg. from 8:00
to 17:00 only). It shall be possible to deactivate this option for certain people.
3.3.24. ADC shall allow the readers to work in the following modes:
a) Card only
b) PIN code only

Signature of Contractor Page 350 PWD-GoR

 c) Card or PIN code Volume 5 Technical Specifications

d) Card and PIN code

3.3.25. ADC shall allow the readers to work following to two different modes according
to time zones (eg. ‘Card only’ mode from 8:00 to 17:00, then ‘Card and PIN code’
are required from 17:00).
3.3.26. Door open time and door close time (i.e. the delay the door may be left open
before triggering an alarm) must be programmable.

4. Biometric Reader Specifications

Description Required Paramaters

Biometric Fingerprint
Live Finger Detection (Fake finger detection) for Supported
enhanced security
RFID Option EM Prox, MIFARE, MIFARE
Plus, DESFire EV1/EV2,
FeliCa
NFC Supported
BLE Supported
CPU 1.2 GHz Quad Core
Memory 2GB Flash + 256 MB RAM
LED Multi Color
Sound Multi-tone Buzzer
Operating Temperature (-)20 °C to 50 °C
IP rating IP67
IK rating IK09
Certificates CE, FCC, RoHS
Fingerprint Image Dimension 272 x 320 pixels
Fingerprint Image bit depth 8bit, 256 grayscale
Fingerprint Resolution 500 dpi
Fingerprint Template ISO 19794-2 / ANSI 378
Fingerprint Extractor / Matcher MINEX certified and
compliant
1:N Matching capacity 1,00,000 in 1:N Mode
matching
1:1 Matching capacity 5,00,000 in 1:1
Max. Fingerprint Template 10,00,000 in 1:1 & 2,00,000
in 1:N
Max. Text Log 10,00,000
Ethernet Supported
Reader Interface Wiegand
Relay Yes
Minimum Relay Duty Cycle 5,00,000 operations
TTL Input 2
Tamper Supported

5. Reader Specifications

Operating voltage: 12 – 24.0 VDC

Approval: CE/UL
Tamper protection: Yes
Interface to controller: Wiegand

Signature of Contractor Page 351 PWD-GoR

 Operating temperature: -40°C to +50°C Volume 5 Technical Sp ecifications
Housing protection: IP65
Card compatibility: MIFARE Classic
Card technology: MIFARE
Card read distance: Min Up to 3 cm

Signature of Contractor Page 352 PWD-GoR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

VOL. 5(f) TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

HVAC WORKS

Signature of Contractor Page 353 PWD-GoR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

Section 1 Aircooled Variable Refrigerant Volume System

1.1 SCOPE

The scope of this section comprises the supply, erection testing and
commissioning of Variable Refrigerant Volume System conforming to these
specifications and in accordance with the requirements of Drawing and Schedule
of Quantities

1.2 TYPE

Units shall be air cooled, variable refrigerant volume air conditioner consisting of
one outdoor unit and multiple indoor units. Each indoor units having capability to
cool or heat independently for the requirement of the rooms as per season
requirement.
.

It shall be possible to connect minimum 10 indoor units on one refrigerant

circuit. The indoor units on any circuit can be of different type and also
controlled individually. Following type of indoor units shall be connected
to the system:

 Ceiling mounted cassette type (Double flow)

 Ceiling mounted cassette type (Multi flow)
 Ceiling mounted Low static Duct type
 Ceiling mounted Built In Ductable type
 Ceiling mounted Duct type
 Ceiling suspended type
 Wall mounted type
 Floor standing type

Outdoor unit shall be equipped with 100% inverter compressor and

minimum two inverter compressors above 12 HP modules for higher
reliability, improved life, better backup and duty cycling purpose. The
system shall be capable of changing the rotating speed of inverter
compressor by inverter controller to follow variations in cooling and
heating load.

Outdoor unit shall be suitable for mix match connection of all type of indoor units.

The refrigerant piping between indoor units and outdoor unit shall be possible to
extend up to 150m with maximum 50m level difference without any oil traps.

Both indoor units and outdoor unit shall be factory assembled, tested and filled
with first charge of refrigerant before delivering at site without any oil traps.

1.3 OUTDOOR UNIT

Signature of Contractor Page 354 PWD-GoR

 The outdoor unit shall be factory assembled, weather proof ca sing, constructe d
Volume 5 Te chnical Spec ifications

from heavy gauge mild steel panels and coated with baked enamel finish. The unit
should be completely factory wired, tested with all necessary controls:

 All outdoor units above 12 HP shall have minimum two scroll compressors and
be able to operate even in case one of compressor is out of order.
 Each outdoor unit shall have 100 % inverter compressor for variable speed.
 It should also be provided with duty cycling for multiple inverter compressor
switching starting sequence for better stability and prolonging equipment life.
 The outdoor unit shall be modular in design and should be allowed for side by
side installation
 The unit shall be provided with its own microprocessor control panel.
 The outdoor units should have anti-corrosion paint free gal barium base plate
for easy mounting of unit.
 The machine must have a sub cool feature to use coil surface more effectively
thru proper circuit/bridge so that it prevents the flushing of refrigerant from long
piping due to this effect thereby achieving energy savings.
 For improvement in efficiency other than IEER value, the units should comply
with minimum COP 3.1 at 100% load and 7.3 at 50% load in cooling mode at
following conditions: Outdoor Condition 35 Deg C DBT and Indoor condition:
27 deg C DBT and 19 Deg C WBT and evaporating temperature of refrigerant
at 6 deg C, and each module should have all inverter compressor/unit.
 VRV unit and compressor should be of same OEM make.
 The outdoor unit shall have refrigerant cool PCB chamber for better operation
at high ambient temperature.
 The outdoor unit shall have feature to change the evaporative temperature with
respect to load for better comfort and energy efficiency.
 The systems shall have free phase technology & operation shall be continuous
in case of phase reverse in supply electricity.
 The system shall have automatic refrigerant charge function for optimal
charging for additional refrigerant.
 The system shall deliver at least 87% of mentioned nominal capacity at 43 Deg
C ambient temperature.

The outdoor unit should be fitted with low noise, aero spiral design fan with
aerofittinggrill for spiral discharge airflow to reduce pressure loss and should
be fitted with DC fan motor for better efficiency. The unit should also be
capable to deliver minimum 75 Pa external static pressure to meet long
exhaust duct connection requirement.

The condensing unit shall be designed to operate safely when connected to multiple
fan coil units.

NOTE : The Outdoor machines shall be preferably compact machines for

purpose of space saving and smaller foot print shall be
preferred.

1.4 COMPRESSOR

The compressor shall be highly efficient scroll type and capable of inverter control. The
inverter compressor shall change the speed in accordance to the variation in
cooling or heating load requirement:

Signature of Contractor Page 355 PWD-GoR

  All outdoor units shall have multiple steps of capacity con trol to me et load
Volume 5 Technical Specifications

fluctuation and indoor unit individual control. All parts of compressor shall be
sufficiently lubricated stock. Forced lubrication may also be employed.
 Oil heater shall be provided in the compressor casing or as per manufacturer
standard.

 The Inverter compressor shall preferably be Reluctance DC inverter

compressor for higher efficiency and improved reliability.

1.5 HEAT EXCHANGER

The heat exchanger shall be constructed with copper tubes mechanically

bonded to aluminum fins to form a cross fin coil.

 The aluminum fins shall be covered by anti-corrosion resin film.

 The unit should be with e-pass heat exchanger to optimize the path of heat
exchanger and for better efficiency of condenser.
 The unit shall be provided with necessary number of direct driven low noise
level propeller type fans arranged for vertical discharge. Each fan shall have a
safety guard.

1.6 REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT

The refrigerant circuit shall include liquid & gas shut-off valves and a solenoid valves at
condenser end.
The equipment must have in built refrigerant stabilization control for proper

refrigerant distribution.

All necessary safety devices shall be provided to ensure the safely operation of
the system.

1.7 SAFETY DEVICES

All necessary safety devices shall be provided to ensure safe operation of the
system.

Following safety devices shall be part of outdoor unit; high pressure switch, fuse, fan drive
overload protector, fusible plug, over load relay, overload protection for inverter.

1.8 OIL RECOVERY SYSTEM

Unit shall be equipped with an oil recovery system to ensure stable operation with long
refrigeration piping lengths.

The system must be provided with oil balancing circuit to avoid poor lubrication.

1.9 INDOOR UNIT

This section deals with supply, installation, testing, commissioning of various type of
indoor units confirming to general specification and suitable for the duty selected.
The type, capacity and size of indoor units shall be as specified in detailed Bill Of
Quantities
Signature of Contractor Page 356 PWD-GoR
 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

GENERAL

Indoor units shall be either ceiling mounted cassette type, or ceiling mounted ductable
type or floor standing type or wall mounted type or other as specified in BOQ. Each
unit shall have electronic control valve to control refrigerant flow rate respond to
load variations of the room.

a) The address of the indoor unit shall be set automatically in case of individual and

group control.

b) In case of centralized control, it shall be set by liquid crystal remote controller

The fan shall be dual suction, aerodynamically designed turbo, multi blade type, statically
& dynamically balanced to ensure low noise and vibration free operation of the
system. The fan shall be direct driven type, mounted directly on motor shaft having
supported from housing.

The cooling coil shall be made out of seamless copper tubes and have continuous
aluminum fins. The fins shall be spaced by collars forming an integral part. The
tubes shall be staggered in the direction of airflow. The tubes shall be hydraulically/
mechanically expanded for minimum thermal contact resistance with fins. Each
coils shall be factory tested at 21kg/sqm air pressure under water.

Unit shall have cleanable type filter fixed to an integrally molded plastic frame. The
filter shall be slide away type and neatly inserted.

Each indoor unit shall have computerized PID control for maintaining design room
temperature. Each unit shall be provided with microprocessor thermostat for
cooling or cooling and heating.

Each unit shall be with wired LCD type remote controller. The remote controller shall
memorize the latest malfunction code for easy maintenance. The controller shall
have self-diagnostic features for easy and quick maintenance and service. The
controller shall be able to change fan speed and angle of swing flap individually as
per requirement.

All indoor Units should have force shut option to connect with fire alarm adaptor, so
that the unit can be integrated with other systems to stop automatically such as in
case of fire.

The CONFRENCE ROOMS, Theatres, OPD Area, waiting area shall have
cassette type Indoor Units and OT, ICU, Laboratories shall be air conditioned with
AHU’s.

1.9.1 CEILING MOIUNTED CASSETTE TYPE UNIT

The unit shall be ceiling mounted type. The unit shall include pre-filter, fan section and

DX-coil section. The housing of the unit shall be powder coated galvanized steel. The

Signature of Contractor Page 357 PWD-GoR

 body shall be light in weight and shall be able to suspend from fouVrolcumoer5nTeecrhsnica
. Tl Shpeecifficaatnions

shall be aerodynamically designed diffuser turbo fan type.

Unit shall have an external attractive panel for supply and return air. Unit shall have
four way supply air grilles on sides and return air grille in center.

Each unit shall have high lift drain pump, fresh air intake provision (if specified)
Low gas detection system and very low operating sound.

All the indoor units regardless of their difference in capacity should have same
decorative panel size for harmonious aesthetic point of view. It should have
provision of connecting branch ducts.

The cassettes units shall have multi zone sensor (minimum two sensor’s) which
detect the presence of people and floor temperature to provide comfortable air-
conditioning and energy saving. The sensor should detects human presence and
adjust the airflow direction automatically to prevent drafts. Room temperature should
be increase upto 4 deg C or the indoor to be switched off when no people are
detected or as per user preference. The sensor should detects the floor temperature
and automatically adjusts the operation of the indoor unit to reduce the temperature
difference between the ceiling and the floor. All 4 louvers of the unit shall be
independently adjustable for position as per user preference.

1.9.2 CEILING MOIUNTED DUCTABLE TYPE UNIT

Unit shall be suitable for ceiling mounted type. The unit shall include pre filter, fan section
& DX coil section .The housing of unit shall be light weight powder coated
galvanized steel. The unit shall have high static fan for Ductable arrangement.

1.9.3 CEILING SUSPENDED TYPE

Unit shall be suitable for ceiling suspended arrangement below false ceiling.
The unit include pre filter , fan section & DX coil section . The housing of unit shall be light
weight powder coated galvanized steel.

1.9.4 HIGH WALL MOUNTED UNITS

The units shall be wall-mounted type. The unit includes pre filter, fan section & DX

coil section. The housing of unit shall be light weight powder coated galvanized

steel.

Unit shall have an attractive external casing for supply and return air.

1.9.5 FLOOR STANDING TYPE

Signature of Contractor Page 358 PWD-GoR

 Unit shall be suitable for floor standing arrangement. The unit incluVdoelumpe r5eTefcihlntiecarl,Spfeacinfications

section & DX coil section. The housing of unit shall be light weight powder coated

galvanized steel.

1.10 CENTRALIZED TYPE REMOTE (TOUCH SCREEN TYPE) CONTROLLER

(Option if specified in BOQ)

A multifunctional compact centralized controller shall be provided with the system.

The controller must be necessarily a graphic Controller type to act as an

advanced airconditioning management system to give complete control of
VRV airconditioning Equipment, It should have ease of use for the user and
must have a user friendly colored touch screen, icon display and color LCD
display.

It shall be able to control up to 64 groups of indoor units with the following functions
:-

a) Starting/stopping of Airconditoners as a zone or group or individual unit.

b) Temperature settling for each indoor unit or zone.

c) Switching between temperature control modes, switching of fan speed and

direction of airflow, enabling/disabling of individual remote controller
operation.

d) Monitoring of operation status such as operation mode & temperature

setting of individual indoor units, maintenance information, trouble shooting
information.

e) Display of air conditioner operation history.

f) Daily management automation through yearly schedule function with

possibility of various schedules.

The controller shall have wide screen user friendly color LCD display and can be
wired by a non polar 2 wire transmission cable to a distance of 1 km. away from
indoor unit.

1.11 HEAT RECLAIM VENTILATION UNIT

(Option if specified in BOQ)

In order to achieve the purpose of better indoor air quality, the Heat Reclaim ventilation
(HRV ) unit must exchange the heat between supplied fresh air and exhausted air
in order to bring the outside air closer to indoor temperature and humidity
conditions. Thus it must recover the thermal energy of exhaust air and reuse it for
supplied fresh air. This must lead to ventilation without increasing the load and
thus saving in running cost.

It shall be possible to interlock this HRV system with operation of VRV system to simplify
installation and improving the efficiency of [Link] shall be possible to

Signature of Contractor Page 359 PWD-GoR

set automatic ventilation mode so that heat exchange mode and ventilVaotliuomne 5m ode can b e
Technical Specifications

automatically selected to enhance energy conservation.

The casing of the HRV unit shall be made of galvanized steel plate, insulation with

self extinguishable polyurethane foam. The must have air filters of multo directional

fibrous fleeces type.

The heat exchanger element must be designed without any moving parts for higher
durability and reliability, It should have high permeability high efficiency specially
processed paper which is flame retardant and fungi proof to keep air clean.

The unit must be provided with built-in multidirectional fibrous filter.

The Unit must have optimized design of fan and air flow passage to make it
compact and supply air & exhaust air passage must be arranged in such pattern
so as to prevent mixing of supply (fresh ) and exhaust air.

The unit must be suitable for single phase power supply and have their control
panel.

End of Section 2

Section 2 Ventilation System

1. General :

The ventilation fans shall be complete in all respects and shall generally comply
with the following specifications given below :

2. Exhaust Fans (Axial flow type) :

2.1 The exhaust fans shall be Axial flow type with steel hub and blades, mounted
directly on the shaft of a totally enclosed motor.

2.2 The fan blades shall be of pressed steel of aerofoil design for high efficiency
and static pressure.

2.3 The mounting frame shall be of cast/sheet steel with steel brackets to connect
the frame with the fan/motor assembly. Rubber mounts shall be provided between
the mounting frame and the mounting brackets.

2.4 The fan motor shall be to totally enclosed Class “H” insulation and shall be IE-
3 Type.

2.5 The fan shall be completely rated for fire @250°C for 2 [Link] Fan shall be
AMCA Certified.
Signature of Contractor Page 360 PWD-GoR
 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

2.6 The fan shall be selected for lowest noise level and it shall not exceed more than
80 db(A) at a distance of 1 m around the equipments.

3. Fresh Air / Pressurization Fans (Axial flow type) :

3.1 The exhaust/ fresh air / pressurization fans shall be Axial flow type with steel hub
and blades, mounted directly on the shaft of a totally enclosed motor.

3.2 The fan blades shall be of pressed steel of aerofoil design for high efficiency
and static pressure.

3.3 The mounting frame shall be of cast/sheet steel with steel brackets to connect
the frame with the fan/motor assembly. Rubber mounts shall be provided between
the mounting frame and the mounting brackets.

3.4 The fan motor shall be to totally enclosed Class “F” insulation and shall be IE-3
Type.

3.5 The fan shall be selected for lowest noise level and it shall not exceed more than80
db(A) at a distance of 1 m around the equipments.

4 Exhaust Scrubber :

4.1 The centrifugal scrubber shall be double/single inlet, double/single width, non
overloading type, be suitable G.S.S. construction. The blower performance must
be rated in accordance with approved test codes and procedures.

4.2 The blower housing comprising of scroll & side plates shall be accurately
cut, heavy gauge all welded sectional construction and reinforced with
angle bracing. Outlets shall be flanged to assure proper duct
connections. Inlet cones shall be spun venturi type or curved vane type to
ensure smooth air entry. The base frame shall be of angle iron in
bolted/welded construction.

4.3 Impeller shall be fabricated from sheet steel with backward curved, properly
designed. Blades, heavy C.I. hub and shall be both dynamically and statically
balanced, to a close tolerance for quit and vibration free performance.

4.4 Shaft shall be hot rolled steel or forged steel, sized adequately, but in no case less
than 40 mm diameter and shall be accurately ground and polished to a close
tolerance.

4.5 Bearings shall be self aligning, heavy duty ball or tapered roller type with
intergral dust and grease seals.

4.6 After assembly, the complete fan shall be painted with rust proof primer and two

coats of synthetic enamel paint.

4.7 Fan having wheel diameter of 1220 mm or more, shall be supplied with split,
bolted housing for convenience of handling and installation.

Signature of Contractor Page 361 PWD-GoR

4.8 The scrubber shall be provided with pump of required capVaocluimtye 5 Taeschniscapl Sepceciifficieatdions
quantity.

4.9 Scrubber shall be provided with nozzles, eliminators, distribution pipes and shall
be coated inside as well as outside.

5. Blower Drive Assembly :

5.1 Drive assembly for each blower shall consist of blower pulley, motor pulley, a set
of `V' belts, belts, guards and belt tension adjusting device.

5.2 Pulleys shall be selected to provide the required speed. They shall be
multi-grove type, with section and grooves selected to transmit 33% more
load than the required power and shall be statically balanced.

5.3 The belt guards shall be M.S. sheet with angle iron reinforcement and expanded
metal screen.

6. Motors and Starters :

6.1 The motor for each blower, shall be squirrel cage induction type and
conform to specifications as given under section on control panel,
motors and switchgear. The motor H.P. shall be at least 20% more
than the limit load of fan and of minimum rating as given under
`Schedule of Equipments'.

7. Accessories :

All necessary accessories shall be provide for proper operation and shall also
include :

7.1 Vibration isolators for the blowers.

7.2 Double canvas connections at the outlet of each fan.

7.3 Nuts, bolts, shims etc. as required for the grouting of the equipment.

7.4 Slide rails for mounting the motor and belt adjustments.

End of Section 2

Section 3 IN - LINE FANS

1. General :

Signature of Contractor Page 362 PWD-GoR

 The Inline fans shall be complete in all respect and shall complyVow ith the following
lume 5 Technical Specifications

specification.

2. Inline Fans :

The fan shall be complete with centrifugal impeller, casing, direct driven motor,
vibration isolators.

2.1 Housing

The housing shall be constructed of hot rolled GSS sheet metal construction.
Housing metal parts shall be either spot welded or screwed or mounted together
with Rivets. The housing shall indicate arrow showing rotation, make, model and
duty conditions.

2.2 Fan Wheel

Fan wheel shall be forward/backward curved type, fan wheel shall be statically and
dynamically balanced.

2.3 Ball Bearing

The ball bearing shall be completely maintenance free and can be used in any
mounting position, at maximum indicated temperature. The bearing lubricant shall
be suitable for a minimum ambient temperature of minus 15 O C. For application at
maximum indicated ambient temperature life expantancy LIO is 40,000 hours
minimum.

2.4 Fan Motor

Fan shall be supplied with built in Thermal contact (TK). At the critical high
temperature point (`B’ = 130O C or `F’ = 155O C) the Thermal contact will open and
break the power supply to the fan. Fan motor shall have insulation class `B’ or
class `F’ and protection class IP44 or IP54.

2.5 Fan Drive

The fan shall be direct driven type.

2.6 Painted

Complete fan assembly and other steel components shall either be GSS and
expoxy painted.

End of Section 3
Signature of Contractor Page 363 PWD-GoR
 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

Section 4 Control Panel, Motors and Switchgears

1. General :

1.1 The motor and switchgears required for various items shall generally be as per
specifications given below all electric motors shall be suitable for 3 phase, 50
cycles, 415 volts A.C. Supply +/- 10%.

2. Switch Panel Board :

2.1 The main L.T. Panel board shall be extendible type on both sides, having in it all
switches, starters and accessories and completely factory prewired. It shall be
suitable for voltage systems upto 500 volts, 3 phase, 50 Hz, 4 wire supply capable
of functioning satisfactorily in temperatures of 45oC and rupturing capacity not
below 35 MVA.

2.2 The boards shall be fabricated from 2.0 mm thick, cold rolled M.S. sheets. The
front opening door panels shall be from 2 mm thick, cold rolled M.S. Sheets.
Suitable stiffners shall be used in fabricating the housing. A clear space of 450
mm shall be left at the bottom. All steel members shall first be degreased, then
descaled using dilute sulphuric acid and a suitable phosphating process then the
boards shall be given 2 coats of red oxide primer and finished with stove enamel
finish. The switch board shall be dust proof and vermin proof. The panel shall
generally confirm to is 8623 (fully confirmity not called for). It shall be flush in front
and back. The panel shall have front and rear access.

2.3 Cable compartment of adequate size shall be provided in the main distribution
board for easy termination of all incoming and outgoing cables entering from
bottom or top. Adequate support shall be provided in cable compartment to
support cables. All incoming and outgoing switch terminals shall be brought out
to terminal blocks in cable compartments.

2.4 Air break draw out type circuit breakers shall be conform to IS : 2516

2.5 All switches below upto 32 Amps. shall be MCB of required rating and all switches
63 Amps and above shall be MCCB.

2.6 No MCCB/MCB, starter or accessories shall be provided in the bottom 450 mm

of the panel.

2.7 The bus bars shall be of aluminium strips of minimum specified ratings
with PVC sleeves of appropriate colour. There shall be adequate
clearance between phase to phase and phase to neutral strips.

Signature of Contractor Page 364 PWD-GoR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

2.8 Items such as ammeters, switches etc shall be located close to the corresponding
switchgear, and otherwise all items shall be arranged in a neat symmetrical
pattern.

2.9 Every starter/contactor etc. shall be controlled by a switch of adequate rating

as listed above.

2.10 A voltmeter and ammeter shall be provided to indicate incoming voltage alongwith
a rotary phase selection switch.

2.11 Ammeters shall be provided for all motors of 10 HP and higher ratings. An ammeter
to measure total current consumption should also be provided in such cases.

2.12 Each switch, ammeter etc. Shall be provided with a name plate to indicate
controlled items.

2.13 Panel fabrication drawings shall be got approved before fabrication.

2.14 All ammeters and voltmeters where specified shall be of 144 x 144 mm size.

2.15 LED type indicating lamps in approved colours shall be provided for the 3 phases
and for on status of all controlled devices.

2.16 All the switches/breakers shall be interlocked with door so that the unit cannot
be closed unless the unit door is closed. The interlock shall also prevent opening
the unit door unless the switch/breaker is in off position.

2.17 Defeat arrangement shall be provided for deliberate inspection of switch/breaker

without having to switch off the unit.

2.18 All the units pertaining to a motor shall be incorporated in one cabin i.e. switch,
starter, cts ammeter single phasing preventor, indicating lamps, etc.

2.19 All the switch gear shall be earthed to the earth bus.

2.20 Earth shall be extended to each compartment to the door by means if a flexible,
insulated copper conductor with crimped legs on either side.

2.21 Etched plastic name plates shall be provided for all the incoming, outgoing switch
gears etc.

2.22 The doors of the switch compartments and cable access shall be hinged type and
that of busbars shall be fixed type.

2.23 The knobs of the hinged doors shall be provided with a locking arrangement to
prevent them from falling down when they are unscrewed for opening the doors.

2.24 All panel doors shall have rubber gasket.

2.25 All the control and auxiliary wiring shall be carried out with PVC insulated copper
conductor of proper colour code.

2.26 Ammeters for all the motors upto 50 HP shall be direct reading type.

Signature of Contractor Page 365 PWD-GoR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

2.27 Ammeters for motors of 50 HP and above and for incoming current shall be
operated with a selector switch.

2.28 Each panel shall be provided with suitable size of earth bus at the rear of the panel
and two earth terminals on either side.

2.29 Suitable printed PVC ferrules shall be provided for all the conductors for easy
identification.

2.30 The power wiring from the switches/unit breakers to the starters shall be carried
out using colour coded, PVC insulated copper conductors crimped with lugs.

2.31 The out going of starter shall also be PVC insulated colour coded copper conductor
crimped with lugs and terminated on a terminal block of proper rating.

2.32 A danger notice plate of 200 mm x 150 mm of mild steel at least 2 mm thick
vitreous enamelled white on both sides and with inscriptions in signal red colour
on front side shall be provided on the panel board.

3. Subsidiary Panels (With Multiple Switches) :

3.1 Subsidiary panels shall be provided for equipment located away from the plant
room, such as air handling units, cooling towers etc.

3.2 The construction of these panel should be similar to the main panel.

3.3 The sub panel shall be wall hung type and as compact as possible.

3.4 The bus bars shall be of aluminium strips of minimum specified ratings with PVC
sleeves of appropriate colour. There shall be adequate clearance between phase
to phase and phase to neutral strips.

3.5 Every starter/contactor etc. shall be controlled by a switch of adequate rating.

3.6 A voltmeter and ammeter shall be provided to indicate incoming voltage alongwith
a rotary phase selection switch.

3.7 Each switch, ammeter etc. shall be provided with a name plate to indicate
controlled items.

3.8 Panel fabrication drawings shall be got approved before fabrication.

3.9 All ammeters and voltmeters where specified shall be of 96 x 96 mm size.

3.10 All the switches/breakers shall be interlocked with door so that the unit cannot
be closed unless the unit door is closed. The interlock shall also prevent opening
the unit door unless the switch/breaker is in off position.

3.11 Defeat arrangement shall be provided for deliberate inspection of switch/breaker

without having to switch off the unit.

3.12 All the switch gear shall be earthed to the earth bus.

Signature of Contractor Page 366 PWD-GoR

3.13 Etched plastic name plates shall be provided for all the incominVgol,umoeu5tTgecohinnicg switch
al Specifications

gears etc.

3.14 The doors of the switch compartments and cable access shall be hinged type and
that of busbars shall be fixed type.

3.15 The knobs of the hinged doors shall be provided with a locking arrangement to
prevent them from falling down when they are unscrewed for opening the doors.

3.16 The doors shall have rubber gasket.

3.17 All the control and auxiliary wiring shall be carried out with PVC insulated copper
conductor of proper colour code.

3.18 Each panel shall be provided with suitable size of earth bus at the rear of the panel
and two earth terminals on either side.

3.19 Suitable printed PVC ferrules shall be provided for all the conductors for easy
identification.

3.20 The power wiring from the switches/unit breakers to the starters shall be carried
out using colour coded, PVC insulated copper conductors crimped with lugs.

3.21 The out going of starter shall also be PVC insulated colour coded copper conductor
crimped with lugs and terminated on a terminal block of proper rating.

3.22 A danger notice plate of 200 mm x 150 mm of mild steel at least 2 mm thick vitreous
enamelled white on both sides and with inscriptions in signal red colour on front
side shall be provided on the panel board.

3.23 LED type indicating lamps in approved colours shall be provided for the 3 phases
and for on status of all controlled devices.

4. Subsidiary Panels (With Single Switch) :

4.1 Subsidiary panels shall be provided for equipment located away from the plant
room, such as air handling units, cooling towers etc.

4.2 The construction of these panel should be similar to the main panel and shall have
all related accessories.

4.3 The sub panel shall be wall hung type and as compact as possible.

4.4 Every starter shall be controlled by a switch of adequate rating.

4.5 A voltmeter shall be provided to indicate incoming voltage alongwith a rotary phase
selection switch.

4.6 Each switch, voltmeter etc. shall be provided with a name plate to indicate
controlled items.

4.7 Panel fabrication drawings shall be got approved before fabrication.

Signature of Contractor Page 367 PWD-GoR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

4.8 The voltmeter where specified shall be of 96 x 96 mm size.

4.9 All the switches shall be interlocked with door so that the unit cannot be closed
unless the unit door is closed. The interlock shall also prevent opening the unit
door unless the switch is in off position.

4.10 Defeat arrangement shall be provided for deliberate inspection of switch without
having to switch off the unit.

4.11 All the switch gear shall be earthed to the earth bus.

4.12 Etched plastic name plates shall be provided for all the incoming, outgoing switch
gears etc.

4.13 The doors of the switch compartments and cable access shall be hinged type and
that of busbars shall be fixed type.

4.14 The knobs of the hinged doors shall be provided with a locking arrangement to
prevent them from falling down when they are unscrewed for opening the doors.

4.15 The doors shall have rubber gasket.

4.16 All the control and auxiliary wiring shall be carried out with PVC insulated copper
conductor of proper colour code.

4.17 Each panel shall be provided with suitable size of earth bus at the rear of the
panel and two earth terminals on either side.

4.18 Suitable printed PVC ferrules shall be provided for all the conductors for easy
identification.

4.19 The power wiring from the switches/unit breakers to the starters shall be carried
out using colour coded, PVC insulated copper conductors crimped with lugs.

4.20 The out going of starter shall also be PVC insulated colour coded copper conductor
crimped with lugs and terminated on a terminal block of proper rating.

4.21 A danger notice plate of 200 mm x 150 mm of mild steel at least 2 mm thick vitreous
enamelled white on both sides and with inscriptions in signal red colour on front
side shall be provided on the panel board.

4.22 Neon type indicating lamps in approved colours shall be provided for the 3 phases
and for on status of all controlled devices.

5. Squirrel Cage Motors :

5.1 The squirrel cage motors shall be either screen protected or totally enclosed fan
cooled, depending on the application and as stated in “schedule of equipment” all
motors shall conform to IS 325/1978 motors shall also cobform to IS=1231 for foot
mounted motors and IS:2223 for flange mounted motors.

Signature of Contractor Page 368 PWD-GoR

5.2 The stator windings shall be with class b insulation. Volume 5 Technical Specifications

5.3 Motors shall be provided with ball/roller bearings. Bearings shall have ample
capacity to deal with any axial thrust. Suitable grease nipple shall be provided for
regreasing the bearings.

5.4 Motors shall be provided with a cable box for terminating the PVC insulated, PVC
sheathed armoured aluminium cables.

6. Starters :

6.1 The type of starters to be provided for the motors shall be as follows :

6.1.1 Squirrel cage motors upto 7.5 HP : direct on line

6.1.2 Squirrel cage motors above 7.5 HP:automatic star delta. (Except compressor
motor)

6.1.3 Compressor motor: automatic auto transformer starter.

6.1.4 All starters shall have auxiliary contacts for interlocking different machines,
connecting indicating lights, controls, alarms, etc.

6.1.5 All starters shall be provided with separate single phasing preventors.

6.2 Direct On-Line Starters

6.2.1 These starters shall have heavy duty air break contactors of suitable rating.

6.2.2 These starters shall be complete with adjustable overload relays on all three
phases, single phase preventing device and under voltage release. The starters
should be "hand reset" type.

6.2.3 The "No Volt Coil " of these starters shall be 220 volts whenever any controls
on safety devices are connected in the starters circuits, otherwise standard 415
volts coils may be used. There shall be on-off push button for each starter unless
remote operation of the starter is required.

6.3 Motor starter shall be in accordance with IS 1882 the starter shall be totally
enclosed metal clad , dust and vermin proof construction. The starter shall be of
continuous rating.

6.4 Contactors shall have the number of poles as required for appropriate duty. The
making capacity of the starters shall be as per AC 23 of ISS.

6.5 Installation of Motor

6.5.1 Installation of the motor shall be in accordance with IS-900.

6.5.2 The motor along with its driven machine or equipment shall be provided with
vibration isolation arrangement motors shall generally be provided with slide rails

Signature of Contractor Page 369 PWD-GoR

 fixed to the base units nuts and bolts to facilitate belt installatioVnoluamn d subsequent
e 5 Tech nical Specifications

belt tension.

6.5.3 Motors shall be wired as per the detailed specifications and drawings all
the motor frame shall be earthed with 2 Nos. of earthing conductors.

6.5.4 Motors shall be tested at works in accordance with the relevant indian standard
specifications and test certificates shall be furnished in tripticate.

Note :Rubber mats of 1100 volts capacity shall be laid in front of panel as per site
requirement, and no extra shall be paid.

End of Section 4

Section 5 Duct Work and Outlet

1. General :

1.1 The work under this part shall consist of furnishing labour materials, equipment
and appliances as specified necessary and required to install all sheet metal
and other allied work to make the air conditioning supply, ventilating, and exhaust
system ready for operation as per drawings.

1.2 Except as otherwise specified all duct work and related items shall be in
accordance with these specifications.

Signature of Contractor Page 370 PWD-GoR

1.3 Duct work shall mean all ducts, casings, dampers, access doorVsol,umjoe i5nTtesch,nsictalifSfpeecnife rs
ications

and hangers.

2. Duct Materials :

2.1 The ducts shall be fabricated from galvanized steel sheets class VIII conforming
to ISS:277-1962 (revised) or aluminium sheets conforming to ISS:737-1955
(wherever aluminium ducts are specified).

2.2 All duct work, sheet metal thickness and fabrication unless otherwise directed,
shall strictly meet requirements, as described in IS:655-1963 with amendment-I
(1971edition)

The thickness of the sheet shall be as follows :-

Sheet thickness Type of Bracing if any

Joint
Size of Duct G.I. Aluminium

2.2.1 Upto 750mm 0.63 mm 0.80 mm G.I. Flange --

2.2.2 751 mm to
1000 mm 0.80 mm 1.00 mm 25x25x3 mm 25x25x3 mm
angle iron frame angle iron
with 8 mm dia frame
at the nuts & bolts
rate of 1mt.

2.2.3 1001 mm to 0.80 mm 1.00 mm 40x40x5 mm 40x40x3 mm

angle iron frame angle
iron
with 8 mm dia frame at the
nuts & bolts rate of 1 mt.

2.2.4 1501 mm to 1.00 mm 1.50 mm 50x50x5 mm 40x40x3 mm

2250 mm at angle iron at the rate
of
with 10 mm 1.2 mt. to
be
dia nuts & crossed braced
bolts at 125 diagonally
mm centre.
2.2.5 2251 mm
and Above 1.25 mm 1.80 mm 50x50x6 mm at 40x40x3 mm
angle iron the at the rate of
rate of frame 1.2 mt. to be
with 1.6 crossed braced
10 mm nuts & diagonally
bolts at 125 mm
centre.

Signature of Contractor Page 371 PWD-GoR

2.3 The gauges, joints and bracings for sheet metal duct work shVaolllumfue 5rtThecehnriccal oSpnecfioficram
tions

with the provisions as shown on the drawings.

2.4 Ducts larger than 450 mm shall be cross broken, duct sections upto 1200
mm length may be used with bracing angles omitted.

2.5 Changes in section of duct work shall be affected by tapering the ducts with
as long a taper as possible. All branches shall be taken off at not more than 45
Deg. Angle from the axis of the main duct unless otherwise approved by the
engineer-in-charge.

2.6 All ducts shall be supported from the ceiling/slab by means of M.S. Rods of 9
mm (3/8") Dia with M.S. Angle at the bottom. The rods shall be anchored to
R.C. Slab using metallic expansion fasteners.

3. Installations :

3.1 During the construction, the contractor shall temporarily close duct openings
with sheet metal covers to prevent debris entering ducts and to maintain opening
straight and square, as per direction of Engineer-In-Charge.

3.2 Great care should be taken ensure that the duct work does not extend
outside and beyond height limits as noted on the drawings.

3.3 All duct work shall be of high quality approved galvanized sheet steel
guaranteed not to crack or peel on bending or fabrication of ducts. All joints shall
be tight and shall be made in the direction of air flow.

The ducts shall be re-inforced where necessary, and must be secured in place
so as to avoid vibration of the duct on its support.

3.4 All air turns of 45 degrees or more shall include curved metal blades or vanes
arranged so as to permit the air to make the abrupt turns without an appreciable
turbulence. Turning vanes shall be securely fastened to prevent noise or vibration.

3.5 The duct work shall be varied in shape and position to fit actual conditions at
building site all changes shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer-In-
Charge. The contractor shall verify all measurements at site and shall notify the
engineer-in-charge of any difficulty in carrying out his work before fabrication.

3.6 Sponge rubber or approved equal gaskets shall be installed between duct flanges
as well as between all connections of sheet metal ducts to walls, floor columns,
heater casings and filter casings. Sheet metals connections shall be made to walls
and floors by means of wooden member anchored to the building structure with
anchor bolts and with the sheet screwed to them.

3.7 Flanges bracings and supports are to be black, mild steel and are to be
galvanized on all surfaces before erection. Accessories such as damper blades

Signature of Contractor Page 372 PWD-GoR

 and access panels are to be of materials of appropriate thicknVeolsumse 5aTnecdhntichaleSpfeicnifiicsathions
similar to the adjacent ducting, as specified.

3.8 Joints, seams, sleeves, splitters, branches, takeoffs and supports are
to be as per duct

3.9 Joints requiring bolting or riveting may be fixed by Hexagon nuts and bolts,
stove bolts or buck bolts, rivets or closed centre top rivets or spot welding. Self
tapping screws must not be used. All jointing material must have a finish such as
cadmium plating or Galvanized as appropriate.

3.10 Flexible joints are to be fitted to the suction and delivery of all fans. The
material is to be normally double heavy canvass or as directed by
Engineer-In-Charge. On all circular spigots the flexible materials are to be
screwed or clip band with adjustable screws or toggle fitting. For
rectangular ducts the material is to be flanged and bolted with a backing
flat or bolted to mating flange with backing flat.

3.11 The flexible joints are to be not less than 75 mm and not more than 250 mm
between faces.

3.12 The duct work should be carried out in a manner and at such time as not to
hinder or delay the work of the other agencies especially the boxing or false ceiling
contractors.

4. Dampers :

4.1 At the junction of each branch duct with main duct and split of main duct, volume
dampers must be provided. Dampers shall be two gauges heavier than the gauge
of the large duct and shall be rigid in construction.

4.2 The volume dampers shall be of an approved type, lever operated and
complete with locking devices which will permit the dampers to be adjusted and
locked in any positions.

4.3 The dampers shall be of splitter, butterfly or louver type. The damper blade shall
not be less than 1.25 mm (18) gauge, reinforced with 25 mm angles 3 mm thick
along any unsupported side longer than 250 mm. Angles shall not interfere with
the operation of dampers, nor cause any turbulence.

4.4 Automatic and manual volume opposed blade dampers shall be complete
with frames and bronze bearings as per drawings. Dampers and frames shall be
constructed of 1.6 mm steel sheets and blades shall not be over 225 mm wide.
The dampers for fresh air inlet shall additionally be provided with fly mesh
screen, on the outside, of 0.8 mm thickness with fine mesh.

4.5 Wherever required for system balancing, a volume balancing opposed blade
damper with quadrant and thumb screw lock shall be provided.

Signature of Contractor Page 373 PWD-GoR

4.6 After completion of the duct work, dampers are to be adjustedVaolunmde 5 sTeechtnticoal Sdpeecliifvicaetirons
air flow as specified on the drawings.

4.7 Automatic fire dampers shall be provided wherever shown on the drawings. The
damper shall be multiblade curtain type. The blades should out of the air stream
in open position and shall be constructed with minimum 1.8 mm thick aluminium
sheets. The frame shall be of 1.6 mm thickness. Other materials shall include
return spring, locking device, solenoid actuator, etc.

The fire dampers shall be capable of operating automatically with the actuation of
smoke/heat detector. Units fans shall be interlocked with the damper.

5. Access panel :

5.1 A hinged and gasketed access panel measuring at least 450 mm x 450 mm shall
be provided on duct work before each reheat coil and at ach control device
that may be located inside the duct work.

6. Miscellaneous :

6.1 All duct work joints are to be true right angle and with all sharp edges removed.

6.2 Sponge rubber gaskets also to be provided behind the flange of all grilles.

6.3 Each shute from the duct, leading to a grille, shall be provided with an air deflector
to divert the air into the grille through the shoot.

6.4 Diverting vanes must be provided at the bends exceeding 600 mm and at branches
connected into the main duct without a neck.

6.5 Proper hangers and supports should be provided to hold the duct rigidly, to keep
them straight and to avoid vibrations. Additional supports are to be provided where
required for rigidity or as directed by Engineer-In-Charge.

6.6 The ducts should be routed directly with a minimum of directional change.

6.7 The duct work shall be provided with additional supports/hangers,

wherever required or as directed by the Engineer-In-Charge, at no extra
cost.

6.8 All angle iron flanges to be welded electrically and holes to be drilled.

6.9 All the angle iron flanges to be connected to the gss ducts by rivets at 100 mm
centres.

6.10 All the flanged joints, to have a sponge rubber packing stuck to the flanges with
suitable adhesive.

6.11 The G.S.S. Ducts should be lapped 6 mm across the flanges.

Signature of Contractor Page 374 PWD-GoR

6.12 The ducts should be supported by approved type supports Vaoltumae 5 Te
dicshtna nce not
ical Specifi cations

exceeding 2.4 metres.

7. Standard Grilles :

7.1 The supply and return air grilles shall be fabricated from extruded aluminium
sections. The supply air grilles shall have single/double louvers. The front
horizontal louvers shall be of extruded section, fixed/adjustable type. The rear
vertical louvers where required shall of aluminium extruded sections and
adjustable type. The return air grille shall have single horizontal extruded section
fixed louvers. The grilles may or may not be with an outer frame.

7.2 The damper blades shall also be of extruded aluminium sections. The grill flange
shall be fabricated out of aluminium extruded section. Grilles longer than 450 mm
shall have intermediate supports for the horizontal louvers.

8. Diffusers/Slot Diffusers :

8.1 The ceiling type square diffusers shall be of aluminium extruded sections with
flush or step down face, as specified with fixed pattern and neck.

8.2 All supply diffusers shall be provided with extruded aluminium dampers, with
arrangement for adjustment from the bottom.

8.3 The slot diffusers shall be of Aluminium extruded sections with diffusion plate and
sliding damper.

9. Linear Diffusers/Grilles :

9.1 The linear diffusers/grilles shall be fabricated from Aluminium extruded sections.

9.2 The diffusion blades shall be extruded, flush mounted type with single or double

direction air flow.

9.3 The frame shall be of aluminium extruded section and shall hold the louvers tightly
in fixed position.

9.4 The dampers as described under grilles shall be provided wherever specified.

10. Painting :

10.1 All grilles, and diffusers shall be powder coated, before installation, in approved
colour.

10.2 All ducts immediately behind the grilles/diffusers etc. are to be given two
coats of black paint in matt finish.

Signature of Contractor Page 375 PWD-GoR

11. Testing : Volume 5 Technical Specifications

11.1 After completion, all duct system shall be tested for air leakage.

11.2 The entire air distribution system shall be balanced to supply the air quantity as
required in various areas and the final tabulation of air quantity through each
outlet shall be submitted to the engineer-in-charge for approval.

End of Section 5

Section 6 Flexible Duct

1. General :

The scope of this section comprise supply, installation, testing and commissioning
of flexible ducting conforming to these specification and in accordance with
requirements of drawings and schedule of quantities.

2. Duct Materials :

2.1 Wherever specified, uninsulated flexible duct shall be made of double lamination
of metalized polyester film permanently bonded to a coated spring steel wire helix.
Duct shall be in tear and puncture resistant construction.

2.2 Wherever insulated flexible duct are specified inner core for the same should be
made of double lamination of metalized polyester film permanently bonded to a

Signature of Contractor Page 376 PWD-GoR

 coated spring steel wire helix. Fibre glass insulation of minimuVm
olum1
e45 Tk
ecg
hn/ic
cau
l [Link]
ecie
fictaetirons

density, having R-value 4.2 F-FT -hr/Btu and 25 mm thickness shall be wrapped
O 2

over the inner core & covered with strong outer jacket cum vapour barrier made of
fibre glass reinforced metalized polyester film laminate.

Duct should conform to fire rating standards AS 4254.

3. Installation :

Care must be taken to install all the flexible duct in fully extruded position and
bends made with adequate radius as per manufacturer recommended practices.

3.1 Hangers and Supports

The flexible duct must be installed fully extended to produce optimum results.

The maximum allowable sag, between any two adjacent suspension points, should
not exceed 50 mm per meter.

The distance between any two adjacent suspension points may vary from 1.50 to

3.00 meter, depending upon the type of flexible duct in use.

Flexible ducts mounted above suspended ceiling should always be independently

supported. Ducts mounted in these locations are susceptible to damage whenever
ceiling panels need to be periodically interchanged, unless they are separately
supported.

3.2 Bending Radius

All bends should be made as large as possible and should have a radius of not
less than the diameter of the duct in use. This reduces un-favorable pressure
losses and is particularly important for metal based products which are more
susceptible to stress rupturing. Double bends should be avoided, however if un-
avoidable, ensure that each radius is not less than R = 2 x D.

3.3 Straps

Ideally the hanging straps should supports the flexible duct with a minimum of half
the circumference surface in contact, and without reducing the effective inside
diameter of the duct. It is also recommended that the minimum width of material to
be used for the hanging straps should be at least 25 mm.

3.4 Flexible Duct to Conventional Duct Connection

Extra care should be taken when making connection to fixed conventional ducts,
etc., and ensure that they do not become too stressed. An additional support is
recommended to obviate this potential problem.

Signature of Contractor Page 377 PWD-GoR

 Metal based flexible duct products are particularly prone to fractVuorluinmeg5 dTeuchenictaol Sspetcrifeicsations
s
caused as a result of sharp connection.

Connections to ceiling illumination “troffer boxes” should be served in the most

direct manner similar to that described for conventional ducts.

Too many bends, when connecting to “troffer boxes” and / or any other type of air
supplying component, may result in excessive pressure loss and the generation of
noise.

3.5 Longer Length Installation

In the event where extreme length of flexible duct is to be installed, round duct
connectors made of galvanized sheets of at least 30 cm long should be used to
connect the duct at every distance of 10 meters. Use metal or galvanized hangers
as recommended (point 3) to support the point where connections are made. Light
railing is a good alternative hanging support when using long length of flexible duct.

3.6 Direct Contact

It should be emphasized that the flexible duct must not be in direct physical contact
with un-insulated heating or hot process pipes. If in the event where such situation
can not be avoided, additional 1” thick insulation should be wrapped around pipes
that are in contact with the duct.

End of Section 6

Signature of Contractor Page 378 PWD-GoR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

Section 7 Insulation

1. General :

The Insulation of water piping, ducting, etc., shall be carried out as per
specifications given below :

2. Materials :

The materials to be used for insulation shall be as follows, unless some other
material is specifically mentioned elsewhere.

2.1 Duct Insulation and Drain Pipe :

The insulation for drain piping, and duct shall be carried out from closed cell
electrometric nitrile rubber having a `K' value of 0.034 W/(M.K) at mean
temperature of 10O C. and a density of not less than 40 kgs/cubm. Water vapour
permeability 4000 U and above. Fire rating class I/O as per British standard BS
476 part VII/- - 1997 building regulation. Approval of sample to be obtained in
writing prior to execution.

2.2 Other Insulation :

2.2.1 The material for acoustic treatment of ducts, rooms, roofs etc. shall be resin
bonded fibre glass, as described earlier, conforming to I.S. 8183 of 1976. The
density of fibre glass shall be 32 kg/cub.m and the material shall be in the
form of rolls of uniform density. The `k' value at 10O C. shall not be less than
0.028 kcal/mhr/O C. Wherever insulation is to be carried out inside the duct, fibre
tissue is to be installed and contractor to ensure that no fibers of insulation material
get mixed up with supply/return air.
3. Drain Piping :

3.1 Insulation of drain piping shall be carried out using 6 mm thick insulation tube of
closed cell electrometric nitrile rubber having a `K’ value of 0.034 W/(M.K.) at mean
temperature of 10O C and a density of not less than 40 kg/cubm.
3.2 Installation

3.2.1 The pipe shall be thoroughly cleaned with a wire brush and rendered free from all
rust and grease.

3.2.2 Cut insulation tube longitudinally and put on pipe and sealed the joints with
adhesive and Aluminium tape (as approved by manufacturer).

Signature of Contractor Page 379 PWD-GoR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

4. Refrigerant Piping :

4.1 The suction line of refrigerant piping shall be insulated with 13 mm thick insulation
as specified for chilled water pipe lines.

5. Ducting :

5.1 The ducts shall be insulated with the insulation sheets as follows.

5.2 Duct insulation thickness shall be as follows :

Duct in conditioned space - 6 mm thick

Duct in unconditioned space - 9 mm thick

Duct with treated fresh air - 9 mm thick

6. Acoustic Lining :

6.1 The acoustic lining shall consist of 25/50 mm resin bonded glass wool of density
32 KG/CUB.M (min) then it shall be covered by 0.5 mm perforated aluminium
sheets having 3 mm perforation at 6 mm centers.

6.2 Insulation

6.2.1 The duct surface shall first be cleaned from inside.

6.2.2 Then the insulation shall be fixed inside the duct.

6.2.3 The insulation shall be covered with RP tissue.

6.2.4 The insulation shall then be covered with 0.5 mm perforated aluminium sheets.

6.2.5 The sheet and the insulation shall be secured to the duct by means of cadmium
plated bolts, nuts and washers. The ends should be completely sealed off, so
that no insulation material is exposed.

End of Section 7

Section 8 Electric Wiring

1. General :

The electric wiring of motors for compressors, pumps, air handling units etc. As
well as controls, heaters etc. And earthing of all equipment shall be carried out as
per specifications given hereunder.

2. Wiring for Motors, Heaters etc :

2.1 The wiring for above equipment shall be carried out in conduits or using PVC
armoured cables.

Signature of Contractor Page 380 PWD-GoR

2.2 The PVC armoured power cable for use on 415 volts system shall be 3 or 3.5
Volume 5 Technical Specifications

core with aluminium conductors and be of 650/1100 volts grade, as per IS

1554 part I-1964. The cross section of the cable shall be to suit the load or rating
of the equipment. The cable shall be aluminium conductor PVC insulated single
wire/strip armoured with overall PVC sheathing.

2.2.1 The cables shall be laid as per IS-1255/1967, Indian Standard Code of Practice.

2.2.2 The cables shall be laid, as per drawings or along a short and convenient route
between switch board and the equipment, either in trenches, on wall or on
hangers, supported from the slab. Cable routing shall be checked on the site
to avoid interference with structure, equipment etc. Where more than one cables
are running close to each other, proper spacing should be provided between
them.

2.2.3 The radius of bends of the cable should not be less than 12 times the radius
of cable to prevent undue stress and damage at the bends, the cables should be
supported with wooden cleats fixed on M.S. Supports, when running in trenches,
wall or ceiling suspended hangers. When laid under ground the cables should
be covered with fine soft earth and protected with cement concrete covering.
Suitable G.I. Pipe shall be used wherever the cable comes out of the connected
surface and clamped properly.

2.2.4 Wooden bushes shall be provided at the ends of pipes through which cables are
taken in walls and floors.

2.2.4 All cables shall be terminated using suitable size cable glands and packing.

2.3 The wiring in conduits shall be 1100 volts grade.

2.3.1 The conduits used shall be of high quality, all joints shall be made with sockets.
The bends and elbows shall have inspection covers fixed with grease free screws.
The joints

shall be water tight. Approved metal saddles shall be used to secure the exposed
conduits at a space of 1 meter or less. The connection of the conduit to switches
etc., shall be secured by a check nut and ebonite bushes provided at the ends
of conduits.

2.3.2 Flush inspection covers shall be provided in case of concealed, recessed

conduits. The staples for the conduits shall not be spaced more than 0.60
meters apart. Before filling up the chase with concrete the conduits should be given
a coat of rust proof paint.

2.3.3 The wires shall be drawn only after all the conduits have been properly fixed in
position.

3. Control Wiring :

3.1 Control cables shall be 1100 volts grade as per IS 1554 made from copper
conductor of 1.5/2.5 sq. mm PVC insulated single multi core unarmoured with an
overall PVC sheathing.

Signature of Contractor Page 381 PWD-GoR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

3.2 The cables and conduits wiring shall be carried out as per details given under
2.2 and 2.3 above.

4. Earthing :

4.1 All equipment connected with electric supply shall also be provided with double
earthing continuity conductors. The size of copper earthing conductors shall be :-

Size of phase wire [Link] size of copper conductor

Aluminium tape/wire (swg)

185 20 Mm x 3 mm (strip)
150 20 Mm x 3 mm (strip)
120 12 Mm x 3 mm (strip)
95 4 Swg
70 4 Swg
50 6 Swg
35 8 Swg
25-6 8 Swg
4 10 Swg

Note :- GSS earthing conductors of equivalent size may be used in lieu of copper
earth mentioned above.

5. Miscellaneous :

5.1 The final connections to the equipment shall be through flexible connections in
case of conduit wiring and also where the equipment is likely to be moved back
and forth, such as on slide rails.

5.2 An isolator switch shall be provided at any motor which is separated from the main
switch panel by a wall or partition or other barrier or is more than 15 metres away
from the main panel.

5.3 Two separate and distinct earthing conduits shall be connected from the
equipment upto the main switch board panel.

5.4 The branch lines from the main panel to each equipment shall be separated and
should not criss cross other lines.

5.5 The entire installation shall be tested as per electricity rules and I.S.S 732-
1973 with amendments 1,2&3 prior to the commissioning of the plant and a
suitable test report furnished by a competent and authorized person. The test
report will be obtain by contractor himself at his own expenses.

5.6 All exposed switch board panels, conduits, hangers etc. shall be given 2 coats
of suitable paint of approved colour, when all work has been completed.

Signature of Contractor Page 382 PWD-GoR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

End of Section 8

Section 9 Testing, Balancing & Commissioning

1. General :

The contractor must perform all inspection and tests of the system as a whole and
of components individually as required, under the supervision of the CHC, in
accordance with the provisions of the applicable ASHRAE standards or approved
equal.

2. Compressors/Condensers/Evaporators etc.

Complete unit shall be factory tested for leaks.

Complete unit shall be factory tested for performance at rated conditions.

All controls shall be tested for proper functioning and set for design value.

3. Indoor Units :

3.1 Blowers

Dynamic/static balancing of impeller.

Performance test as per applicable codes.

3.2 Coils

Pneumatic test or as per manufacturer.

3.3 Instruments and Controls

Visual examination.

4. For Associates Works at Site :

Inspection of raw materials to be used for fabrication and assembly and inspection
of manufacturer’s certificates.

Pressure testing of pipe fit used for the refrigerant and water services.

Signature of Contractor Page 383 PWD-GoR

 Pressure testing, leak testing of complete piping [Link] on de nser for
e 5 Technical Specifications

refrigerant/ services.

Checking of electrical circuits (power & controls) and checking functioning of

controls of refrigerant systems and other circuits of air conditioning system.

Checking of calibration of controls and instrumentation

Checking of assemblies for electrical control panel, instruments panels, local

panels (dimensional and functional) annunciator panels etc.

Inspection of complete electrical installation at site.

Installation of main equipments like compressor, condenser, evaporator.

Performance testing of complete A.C. system as per specifications.

5. Duct Work :

All branches and outlets shall be tested for air quantity, and the total of the air
quantities shall be within plus five percent (5%) of fan capacity.

Volume dampers shall be tested for proper operation.

6. Balancing and Adjustment :

Indoor unit, duct work and outlets shall be adjusted and balanced to deliver the
specified air quantities as indicated, at each outlet, on the drawings and shall be
recorded and submitted to the CHC. If these air quantities cannot be delivered
without exceeding the speed range of the sheaves or the available horse power,
the CHC shall be notified before proceeding with the balancing of air distribution
system.

7. Electrical Equipment :

All electrical equipment shall be cleaned and adjusted on site before application of
power.

The following tests shall be carried out :

Wire and cable continuity tests.

Insulation resistance tests, phase to phase and phase to earth, on all circuits and
equip- ment, using a 500 Volts mega. The mega reading shall be not less than
one megohm.

Signature of Contractor Page 384 PWD-GoR

 Earth resistance between conduit system and earth must noVt oeluxmce 5eTeecdhnh alf (1/2)
ical Specifications

CMH.

Phasing out and phase rotation tests.

Operating tests on all protective relays to prove their correct operation before
energizing the main equipment.

Operating tests on all MCB’s.

8. Performance Tests :

The installation as a whole shall be balanced and tested upon completion,

and all relevant information, including the following shall be submitted to the
architects.

Air volume passing through each unit, duct, grilles, apertures.

Differential pressure readings across each filter, fan and coil, and through each
pump.

Static pressure in each air duct.

Electrical current readings, in amperes of full and average load running, and
starting, together with name plate current of each electrical motor.

Continuous recording over a specified period, of ambient wet and dry bulb
temperatures under varying degrees of internal heat loads and use and
occupation, in each zone of each part of the building.

Daily records should be maintained of hourly readings, taken under varying

degrees of internal heat load and use and occupation, of wet and dry bulb
temperatures, upstream "on coil” of each cooling coil. Also suction temperatures
and pressures for each refrigerating unit. The current and voltage drawn by each
machine.

Any other readings shall be taken which may subsequently be specified by the
architect.

9. Miscellaneous :

The above tests are mentioned herein for general guidance and information
only but not by way of limitation to the provisions of conditions of contract and
specification.

The date of commencement of all tests listed above shall be subject to the
approval of the Engineer and in accordance with the requirements of this specification.

The contractor shall supply the skilled staff and all necessary instruments and carry
out any test of any kind on a piece of equipment, apparatus, part of system or
on a complete system if the architect requests such a test for determining
specified or guaranteed data as given in the specification or on the drawings.

Signature of Contractor Page 385 PWD-GoR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

Any damage resulting from the tests shall be repaired And/or damaged material
replaced, all the satisfaction of the Engineer.

In the event of any repair or any adjustment having to be made, other than
normal running adjustment, the tests shall be void and shall be recommended
after the adjustment or repairs have been completed.

The contractor must inform the Engineer when such tests are to be made, giving
sufficient notice, in order that the Engineer or his nominated representative may
be present.

Complete records of all tests must be kept and 3 copies of these and location
drawings must be furnished to the Engineer.

The contractor may be required to repeat the test as required, should the ambient
conditions at the time not given, in the opinion of the architect, sufficient and
suitable indication of the effect and performance of the installation as a whole or
of any part, as required.

End of Section 9

Section 10 Tests at Site/Works

1. General :

The contractor must perform all inspection and tests of the system as a whole
and of components individually as required, under the supervision of the Architect/
Consultants/Owner representative, site engineer-in-charge in accordance with the
provisions of the applicable ASHRAE standards or approved equal and furnish
necessary test certificates from manufacturers at the time of delivery of
requirement at side.

2. Compressors/Condensers etc.

Signature of Contractor Page 386 PWD-GoR

2.1 Hydraulic test for various components and assembled equipmVoelunmtes5 Taecthn1ic.a5l Spteicm es
ifications

design pressure or double the operating pressure whichever is higher.

2.2 Pneumatic leak test after assemblies at design pressure.

2.3 Static and dynamic balancing on electronic precision machine for rotating parts,
links, impellor/crank shaft assemblies etc.

2.4 Testing of oil passages in compressor at 1.5 times pump discharge pressure.

2.5 Pressure drop test for condenser, evaporator.

2.6 For compressor assembly, electronic leak, air running test, pneumatic test with dry
nitrogen and leak test in water.

3. Airhandling Units/Fan Coil Units

3.1 Blowers

3.1.1 Dynamic/static balancing of impeller.

3.1.2 Performance test as per applicable codes.

3.2 Coils

3.2.1 Pneumatic test.

3.3 Filters

3.3.1 Test of filter elements as per B.S. 2831 B.S. 1701 as applicable. This is to
ascertain filtration efficiency by weight at inlet and outlet.

3.4 Manufacturer’s test certificates also to be produced for the assembled F.C.U.
Final dimensional check will be done. Inspection will be done during assembly
of components for quality of workmanship, painting etc.

3.5 Piping

Materials check for specifications and size.

3.6 Valves

Hyd./pneumatic test certificates.

3.7 Motors

Manufacturer’s test certificate as per motor data sheet.

3.8 Instruments and Controls

Signature of Contractor Page 387 PWD-GoR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

Visual examination.

4. For Associates Works at Site :

4.1 All electrical items will be subjected to inspection at any stage during
manufacturing activity. Routine electrical test as per relevant codes. Inspection
of manufacturer’s test certificates.

4.2 Inspection of raw materials to be used for fabrication and assembly and inspection
of manufacturer’s certificates.

4.3 Inspection of welding including welders qualification as desired by inspection

engineers. Inspection of fabricated items.

4.4 Pressure testing of pipe fittings used for the refrigerant and water services.

4.5 Pressure testing, leak testing of complete piping network for chilled water.
Condenser water and refrigerant/services.

4.6 Vaccumising and gas/oil charging for refrigeration system.

4.7 Checking of electrical circuits (power & controls) and checking functioning of
controls of refrigerant systems and other circuits of air conditioning plant.

4.8 Checking of calibration of controls and instrumentation

4.9 Checking of assemblies for electrical control panel, instruments panels, local
panels(dimensional and functional) annunciator panels etc.

4.10 Inspection of complete electrical installation at site.

4.11 Performance testing of complete A.C. Plant as per specifications.

5. The above inspection procedure is given for general guidance and

information of vendors and inspection of purchaser/consultant is strictly not
limited to these and inspection engineer of purchaser/consultant will have full
right to have detailed inspection at any stage right from placement of order
to completion of project as desired by inspection engineer, co-ordination of
inspection agency of purchaser/ consultant with his factory/ subvendor’s
factory/erection site will be the sole responsibility of successful vendor after
placement of order for complete air conditioning plant covered under these
technical specifications.

6. Piping System :

6.1 In general pressure tests shall be applied to piping only before connection of
equipment and applicances. In no case shall piping, equipment or appliances
be subjected to pressur exceeding their test ratings.

6.2 Tests shall be completed and approved before any insulation is applied.

Signature of Contractor Page 388 PWD-GoR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

6.3 After tests have been completed, the system shall be drained and cleaned of
all dust and foreign matter. All strainers, valves and fittings shall be cleaned of
all dirt, fittings, and debris.

6.4 Water Piping

All water piping shall be tested and proven tight under Hydrostatic pressure of 1
1/2 times the design pressure unless stated otherwise in the specifications.
prescribed pressure shall be maintained for four hours.

7. Duct Work :

7.1 All branches and outlets shall be tested for air quantity, and the total of the air
quantities shall be within plus five percent (5%) of fan capacity.

7.2 Fire dampers, volume dampers and splitter dampers shall be tested for proper
operation.

8. Balancing and Adjustment :

All airhandling and ventilation equipment, duct work and outlets shall be
adjusted and balanced to deliver the specified air quantities as indicated, at each
outlet, on the drawings and shall be recorded and submitted to the consultant. If
these air quantities cannot be delivered without exceeding the speed range of
the sheaves or the available horse power, the consultant shall be notified
before proceeding with the balaning of air distribution system.

9. Electrical Equipment :

9.1 All electrical equipment shall be cleaned and adjusted on site before application of
power.

9.2 The following tests shall be carried out :

9.2.1 Wire and cable continuity tests.

9.3 Insulation resistance tests, phase to phase and phase to earth, on all circuits and
equip- ment, using a 500 Volts meggar. The meggar reading shall not be less
than one megohm.

9.4 Earth resistance between conduit system and earth must not exceed half (1/2)
OHM.

9.5 Phasing out and phase rotation tests.

9.6 Operating tests on all protective relays to prove their correct operation before
energizing the main equipment.

9.7 Operating tests on all starters, circuit breakers, etc.

Signature of Contractor Page 389 PWD-GoR

10. Performance Tests : Volume 5 Technical Specifications

10.1 The installation as a whole shall be balanced and tested upon completion,
and all relevant information, including the following shall be submitted to the
architects.

10.1.1 Air volume passing through each unit, duct, grilles, apertures.

10.1.2 Differential pressure readings across each filter, fan and coil, and through
each pump.

10.1.3 Static pressure in each air duct.

10.1.4 Electrical current readings, in amperes of full and average load running, and
starting, together with name plate current of each electrical motor.

10.1.5 Continuous recording over a specified period, of ambient wet and dry bulb
temperatures under varying degrees of internal heat loads and use and
occupation, in each zone of each part of the building.

10.2 Daily records should be maintained of hourly readings, taken under

varying degrees of internal heat load and use and occupation, of wet and dry
bulb temperatures, upstream "on coil” of each cooling [Link] suction
temperatures and pressures for each refrigerat- ing unit. The current and voltage
drawn by each machine.

10.3 Any other readings shall be taken which may subsequently be specified by the
architect.

11. Miscellaneous :

11.1 The above tests are mentioned herein for general guidance and information
only but not by way of limitation to the provisions of conditions of contract and
specification.

11.2 The date of commencement of all tests listed above shall be subject to the
approval of the architect, and in accordance with the requirements of this specification.

11.3 The contractor shall supply the skilled staff and all necessary instruments and
carry out any test of any kind on a piece of equipment, aparatus, part of system
or on a complete system if the architect requests such a test for determining
specified or guaranted data as given in the specification or on the drawings.

11.4 Any damage resulting from the tests shall be repaired And/or damaged material
replaced, all the satisfaction of the architect.

11.5 In the event of any repair or any adjustment having to be made, other than
normal running adjustment, the tests shall be void and shall be recommended
after the adjustment or repairs have been completed.

Signature of Contractor Page 390 PWD-GoR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

11.6 The contractor must inform the architect when such tests are to be made, giving
sufficient notice, in order that the architect or his nominated representative may
be present.

11.7 Complete records of all tests must be kept and 3 copies of these and location
drawings must be furnished to the architect.

11.8 The contractor may be required to repeat the test as required, should
the ambient conditions at the time not given, in the opinion of the
architect, sufficient and suitable indication of the effect and performance of
the installation as a whole or of any part, as required.

End of Section 10

Section 11 Mode of Measurements

1. Unit Prices in the Schedule of Quantities :

1.1 The item description in the schedule of quantities is in the form of a condensed
resume. The unit price shall be held to include every thing necessary to complete
the work covered by this item in accordance with the specifications and drawings.
The sum total of all the individual item prices shall represent the total price of the
installation ready to be handed over.

1.2 The unit price of the various items shall include the following :

1.2.1 All equipment, machinery, apparatus and materials required as well as the cost of
any tests which the consultant may request in addition to the tests generally
required to prove quality and performance of equipment.

Signature of Contractor Page 391 PWD-GoR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

1.2.2 All the labour required to supply and install the complete installation in accordance
with the specifications.

1.2.3 Use of any tools, equipment, machinery, lifting tackle, scaffolding, ladders etc.
Required by the contractor to carry out his work.

1.2.4 All the necessary measures to prevent the transmission of vibration.

1.2.5 The necessary material to isolate equipment foundations from the building
structure, wherever necessary.

1.2.6 Storage and insurance of all equipment apparatus and materials.

1.3 The contractor’s unit price shall include all equipment, apparatus, material and
labour indicated in the drawings and/or specifications in conjunction with the item
in question, as well as all additional equipment, apparatus, material and labour
usual and necessary to make in question on its own (and within the system as a
whole) complete even though not specifically shown, described or otherwise
referred to.

2. Measurements of Sheet Metal Ducts, Grilles/Diffusers etc.

2.1 Sheet Metal Ducts

2.1.1 All duct measurements shall be taken as per actual outer duct surface area
including bends, tees, reducers, collars, vanes & other fittings. Gaskets, nuts,
bolts, vibration rotation pads are included in the basic duct items of the BOQ.

2.1.2 The unit of measurements shall be the finished sheet metal surface area in metres
squares. No extra shall be allowed for lapse and wastages.

2.1.3 All the guide vanes, deflecters in duct elbows, Branches, grille collars quadrant
dampers etc. Shall be measured for actual sheet metal surface and paid for at the
same rate as duct of same thickness.

2.1.4 The unit duct price shall include all the duct hangers And supports, exposing of
concrete reinforcement for supports and making good of the same as well as any
materials and labour required to complete the duct frame.

2.2 Grilles/Diffusers :

All grilles/diffusers as per tender requirements shall be treated as a lump sum item.
Where extra grilles diffusers are ordered upto award of work, they should be
measured as follows :

2.2.1 All measurements of grilles/diffusers shall be the Actual outlet size excluding the
outer flanges.

2.2.2 The square or rectangular grilles/diffusers shall be Measured in plain sq.m.

2.2.3 All round diffusers shall be measured by their diameters in cm.

Signature of Contractor Page 392 PWD-GoR

2.2.4 All linear diffusers shall be measured as per actual Length in Vmoleumtre e5 [Link] Specifications

3.3 Structural Supports

Structural supports including supports fabricated from pipe lengths for pipes
shall be measured as part of pipe line and hence no separate payment will be
made. Rates shall be inclusive of hoisting, cutting, jointing, welding, cutting of
holes and chases in walls, slabs or floors, painting supports and other items as
described in specifications, drawings and schedule of quantities or as required at
site by project co-ordinator.

3.4 Copper Connections for Fan Coil Units

3.4.1 Copper connection assembly for making connections to the fan coil units shall be
measured, as part of the fan coil unit price and shall include brass flare nuts, brass
straight connector, brass tees, brass reducting fittings, fixing of automatic 2 way
valve, making connections and leak testing, complete assembly as per
specifications and drawings. Nothing extra shall be payable on account of any
variation in the length of copper pipe.

4. Insulation :

4.1 The measurement for vessels, piping, and ducts shall be made over the bare
uninsulated surface area of the metal.

4.2 Pipes, Ducts & Vessels

4.2.1 Pipes

The measurements for installation of piping shall be made in linear metres

through all valves, flanges, and fittings. Pipes/bends shall be measured along
the centreline radius between tangent points. If the outer radius is R1 and the
inner radius is R2. The centre line radius shall be measured as (R1+R2)/2.
Measurement of all valves, flanges and fittings shall be measured with the running
metre of pipe line as if they are also pipe lengths. Nothing extra over the
above shall be payable for insulation over valves, flanges and fittings in pipe
line/routings. Fittings that connect two or more different sizes of pipe shall be
measured as part of the larger size.

4.2.2 Ducts

The measurements for insulation of ducts shall be made in actual square metres
of bare uninsulated duct surface through all dampers, flanges and fittings. In
case of bends the area shall be worked out by taking an average of inner and
outer lengths of the bends. Measurements for the dampers, flanges, fittings shall
be for the surface dimension for the connecting duct, nothing extra over the
above shall be payable for insulation over dampers, flanges and fittings in duct
routing.

4.2.3 Vessels

Signature of Contractor Page 393 PWD-GoR

 The area of standard dished and flat ends of vessels shall be Vtohlueme 5sTqecuhnic
a rael Spoecfiftichateions
diameter of the uninsulated body of the shell. Areas for other shapes shall be the
actual calculated area. There shall be no deduction or additions for nozzles,
handles ribs, dampers, expansion joints etc. All projections on vessels or tanks
shall be measured separately as pipe/duct.

4.3 Accessories Insulation

4.3.1 The unit of measurement for accessories such as expansion tank, pumps, chiller
heads etc. shall be uninsulated area in square metres.

4.3.2 In case of curved or irregular surfaces, measurements shall be taken along the
curves.

4.3.3 The unit insulation price shall include all necessary adhesives, vapour proofing
and finishing materials as well as additional labour and material required for fixing
the insulation.

4.4 Acoustic Duct Lining

4.4.1 In case of acoustic lining of air ducts, measurements of the bare inside duct surface
in square metres, shall be final for billing purposes.

4.4.2 The insulation/acoustic panels shall include cost of battens, supports, adhesives,
vapour proofing, finished tiles/boards/sheets as well as additional labour and
materials required for completing the work.

4.5 Roof and Wall Insulation & Acoustic Treatment

4.5.1 The unit of measurement for all underdeck roof insulation, wall
insulation, wall/roof acoustic panel shall be the uninsulated area of walls,
roofs, to be treated, in square metres.

4.5.2 The insulation, acoustic panels shall include cost of battens, supports, adhesives,
vapour proofing, finished tiles/boards/sheets as well as additional labour and
materials required for completing the work.

End of Section 11

Signature of Contractor Page 394 PWD-GoR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

Section 12 Technical data

[Link]. Description Unit Condition of

Services

1. Variable Refrigerant Flow Air-cooled units

1.1 Outdoor units (Heat Pump Type)

1.1.1 Make and model

1.1.2 HP of Outdoor Unit

1.1.3 Capacity (each) Tons (Nominal)

1.1.4 Quantity Nos.

1.1.5 Type --

1.1.6 Permissible length of

refrigerant piping

1.1.7 Type of compressor --

1.1.8 No. of compressor No.

(each unit)

1.1.9 No. of inverter

compressor

1.1.10 Air entering temp. on Deg C

condenser

1.1.11 Dimension of Machine mm

(H x W x D )

1.1.12 Current characteristic --

1.1.13 Power input (Total) kw

as per specified IDU
connection

[Link]. Description Unit Condition of

Services

1.2 Indoor Units

1.2.1 Manufacturer --

Signature of Contractor Page 395 PWD-GoR

 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

[Link] Type --

[Link] Capacity Tons

[Link] Airflow Min/Max. Cfm

1.2.2 Sound level Hi/Lo

1.2.3 Overall Dimensions lxwxh

1.2.4 Unit weight kg

1.2.5 Is remote controller

(corded) provided
for each indoor unit Yes/No.

1.3 Local Remote Controller

Detail of operation --

1.4 Heat Reclaim Ventilation Unit

1.4.1 Type --

1.4.2 Make --

1.4.3 Capacity CMH

1.5 Temp. Exchange Efficiency

1.5.1 Ultra light %

1.5.2 High %

1.5.3 Low %

[Link]. Description Unit Condition of

Services

1.6 Enthalpy Exchange Efficiency

1.6.1 Ultra light %

1.6.2 High %

1.6.3 Low %

1.7 Sound Level

1.7.1 Heat exchange mode

(Ultra light, High &

Signature of Contractor Page 396 PWD-GoR

 Low) dB(A) Volume 5 Technical Specifications

1.7.2 Material of casing --

1.7.3 Insulation material --

1.7.4 Dimension mm
(HxWxD)

1.7.5 Weight kg

1.7.6 Heat exchange medium --

1.7.7 Material of heat

exchanger --

1.7.8 Type of air filter --

1.7.9 Material of air filter --

1.7.10 Fan

1.7.11 Type --

1.7.12 External static

pressure mmwg

[Link]. Description Unit Condition of

Services

1.7.13 Motor rating kw

1.7.14 Duct connection dia mm

2.15 Control panel included/ --

not included

3. Fresh Air / Exhaust Fan

Axial

3.1 Type and make Nos.

3.2 Dia/speed mm/rpm

3.3 Material of impeller --

3.4 Material casing --

3.5 Air quantity at given

speed cfm

Signature of Contractor Page 397 PWD-GoR

3.6 Static pressure mmwg Volume 5 Technical Specifications

3.7 Motor rating kw

3.8 Current characteristic --

4. Inline Fans

4.1 Type and make Nos.

4.2 Airquantity cfm

4.3 Air quantity at given

speed cfm

4.4 Dia/speed mm/rpm

4.5 Motor rating kw

4.6 Fan static pressure mmwg

4.7 Silencer Included/Not included

4.8 Current characteristic --

5. HRV unit

5.1 Air quantity cfm

5.2 Fan static pressure mmwg

5.3 Motor Kw

5.4 Current characteristic --

5.5 Quantity Nos.

Section 14 Test Proforma

[Link]. Item Unit Test Result

1. Operating Conditions

1.1 Ambient conditions

-Temp. D.B. OC

1.2 -Temp. W.B. OC

1.3 -R.H. %
Signature of Contractor Page 398 PWD-GoR
 Volume 5 Technical Specifications

2. VRV Indoor Unit

2.1 Air quantity across coil cmh

2.2 Coil face area sqm

2.3 Air temperature -Entering OC

dry bulb
wet bulb

-Leaving OC

2.4 Water temperature -Entering OC

-Leaving OC

2.5 Water pressure -Entering mmHg.

-Leaving mmHg.

2.6 Water flow rate lpm

2.7 Motor rating kw

2.8 Motor current at full load Amps

2.9 Specified cooling capacity TR

2.10 Computed cooling capacity TR

[Link]. Item Unit Test Result

3. HRV UNIT

3.1 Airflow CMH

3.2 Cooling pad face area Sqm

3.3 Air temperature -Entering OC

wet bulb
dry bulb

-Leaving OC

3.4 Water flow rat LPM

3.5 Motor rating/

Power consumption kw

4. Axial flow/Inline Fans

Signature of Contractor Page 399 PWD-GoR

4.1 Air quantity Volume 5 Technical Specifications

4.2 Rated capacity kw

4.3 Rated voltage Volts

4.4 Rated current Amp

4.5 Current rating Amp

(Actual)

5. Outside Air Intakes

5.1 Face area sqm

5.2 Air quantity cum/hr

6. Room Conditions at Designed Parameter

6.1 Date & Time

[Link]. Item Unit Test Result

6.2 Temperature OC DB;

WB

(A No. of readings shall be

taken and averaged)

7. Controls
Report on test and
functioning of all
controls.

Notes :

a. Test Instructions :

1. All instruments for testing shall be provided by the HVAC contractor.

2. Thermometer used for measurement of temperature of water/refrigerant shall

have graduations of 0.1O C and shall be got calibrated from N.P.L. or any
recognized test house before hand.

3. Thermometers used in the psychrometers shall have graduations of 0.2O C and

shall be calibrated as at (2) above.

Signature of Contractor Page 400 PWD-GoR

4. Pressure gauges and other gadgets shall also be got calibVroa ted before han d
lume 5 Technical Specifications

from a recognized test houses.

5. Orifice type of flow meters shall be used for measuring flow rate through the
condensers and chillers.

6. Air flow rates shall be measured in the supply duct using pitot tube.

End of Section

Signature of Contractor Page 401 PWD-GoR

 PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION OF MAIN BUILDING AND STAFF RESIDENCE
FOR RAJASTHAN HOUSE AT NEW DELHI
LIST OF MAKES

PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT

GOVERNMENT OF RAJASTHAN
As Executing Agency
Invites
E-Tender For

“Construction of Rajasthan House”

At
Delhi on EPC Basis
Tender No. : ACE PWD Zone I Jaipur
NIT No 04/2022-23 DATED 12.05.2022
Volume-5
Technical Specifications – List of Makes
Instructions to Bidders (MAY, 2022)

Email: [Link]@[Link]
Website – [Link]
Page 1

Signature of Contractor PWD-GoR

 PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION OF MAIN BUILDING AND STAFF RESIDENCE
FOR RAJASTHAN HOUSE AT NEW DELHI
LIST OF MAKES

LIST OF APPROVED MAKES FOR CIVIL WORKS

[Link] Details of equipment/ material Make/Manufacturer

A. CIVIL WORKS
1 Acoustical Panelling Armstrong/ Anutone/ PROLAD/ Nittobo/ PLADUR/ Silenzo/ Durlum
2 Wall Panelling Armstrong/ PROLAD/ Nittobo/ PLADUR / SAS International
3 Perforated Gypsum Panel Armstrong/ Knauf/ Plading Danogps Ltd.
4 Adhesive for Ceramic/Vitrified tiles CAPA IC / Laticrete/ Fosroc/ ALSTONE/ Kajaria
5 Joint Filler / Epoxy Grout MAPEI/ Laticrete/ RDEC/CAPA IC/ ACME/ BERGER/ TREMCO
6 Concrete Additive Fosroc / TREMCO / BASF/ MAPEI/ Asian Paints/ ECMAS/
BERGER
7 Epoxy Flooring Fosroc/ MAPEI/ BASF/ ASIAN PAINTS/ BERGER/ TREMCO
8 Floor Hardener Fairmate / BASF/MAPEI/FOSROC/ BERGER/ TREMCO
8 Grout: Non-Shrink Fosroc / BASF / MAPEI / Alstone/ Asian Paints/ BERGER/ TREMCO
9 Grouting Compound Laticrete/ BASF/ MAPEI / Alstone/ ACME/ BERGER/ TREMCO
10 See through Silicon Paint BASF/ FOSROC/ ECMAS/ MAPIE/ BERGER/TREMCO
11 Crystalline Waterproofing MAPEI/ ECMAS/ BASF/ ASIAN PAINTS/ BERGER/ TREMCO
12 Sealant: Poly-sulphide & Polyurethene Fosroc / Alstone/ MAPEI/ BASF/ Asian Paints/ BERGER/TREMCO
13 Silicon sealants /Weather Sealant / Structural GE- Silicon / Forsoc /Dow Corning / Alstone/ MAPEI/ BASF/ ASIAN
Glazing Sealant PAINTS/ BERGER/TREMCO
14 Tile/ Stone Adhesives Fosroc / Alstone/ MAPEI/CAPA/ ACME/ BERGER/ TREMCO
15 Sunken Portion Waterproofing Treatment BASF/ MAPEI/ ECMAS/ ASIAN PAINTS/ FOSROC/ BERGER/
TREMCO

16 Super plasticizer /BASF/ MAPEI/ ASIAN PAINTS/ FOSOC/ ECMAS/

BERGER/TREMCO
17 Water Proofing Materials (Membrane) BASF/ Fosroc / ASIAN PAINTS/ ECMAS/ MAPIE/
BERGER/TREMCO
18 Overdeck Puff Spray applied foam insulation ASIAN PAINTS/ BASF/ ECMAS/ FOSROC/ MAPIE/
BERGER/TREMCO
19 Drainage Board/ Protection Boards with 13 mm Virendra Textiles
studs
20 Adhesive for Wood Work Fevicol/Vamicol/Dunlop
21 Aluminium Accessories and Hardware Classic/ Crown /EBCO /Earl Bihari
22 Aluminium Composite Panels Aludecor / Alucobond /Alstone
23 Aluminium Die-Cast handles &two point locking Giesse / Securistyle / Alu – alpha
kit
24 Aluminium Extrusion/ Sections Hindalco / Jindal / Indal
25 Façade Treatment / Fabrication Work SPFAB/ Ganpati Innovation/ Glasswall Systems (Pvt) Ltd.
26 Anchor Fastner/Dash Fastner Hilti / Fischer /Bosch
27 Anti – Termite Treatment It should be done by permanent members of IPCA as approved by
Engineer-in-Charge.
28 Back up rod Supreme Industry or equivalent
29 Batch Mix Concrete (BMC) / Ready Mix The contractor to install his own computerized batching plant of
Concrete (RMC) suitable capacity and arrange for Transit Mixers, pumps etc. as per
approval of Engineer – In- Charge.

Or
The RMC shall be procured from the source as approved by
Engineer – in Charge. RMC Producing plants of the main Cement
producers shall be preferred.
(ACC India/ Ultratech/ Lafarge/ Andicone Constructions/ RMC India)
30 Bitumen Indian Oil, Hindustan Petroleum, Bharat Petroleum

Page 2

Signature of Contractor PWD-GoR

 PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION OF MAIN BUILDING AND STAFF RESIDENCE
FOR RAJASTHAN HOUSE AT NEW DELHI
LIST OF MAKES

31 Cement ACC / Ultra tech / JK Cement / Jaypee-Rewa

/ Ambuja /Bangur/ Birla/ Shree/
32 Cement: White Birla White / JK
33 Clean Room Wall Panels with/ without return air CLESTRA/ NICOMAC / HEMAIR / GMP / EPACK
risers, Doors/ windows etc.
34 Clear Glass / Clear Float Glass / Toughened Saint Gobain (SG) / Asahi India Safety Glass Ltd /Modiguard/
Glass SISECAM
35 Cover /Spacer Block FARROUS CRETE/ BAL ENDURA/ ROFF PIDILITE
36 Curtain Rod/ Drapery Rod/ Venetian Blinds Vista work / Mac Décor or equivalent

37 Crash Guard/ Corner Guard/ Hand Rail C-S GROUP/ INPRO/ GRADOUS
38 Door closer / Floor spring Hardwyn/ Dorma/ Everite/OZONE
39 Door Locks Godrej / Harrison / Dorma/Link
40 Door Seal – Woolpile Weather Strip Anand Reddiplex/ Enviroseal/ PUNJ LLOYD
41 Door Shutters- Flush Greenply/ Mayur / Archidply / Century / Merino
42 Doors & Windows Fixtures / Fitting. Everite / Classic/ Crown / Earl Bihari
43 Extruded Polystyrene Board Styrofoam by DOW Chemicals / Insuboard by Supreme Industries/
Berger
44 False Ceiling – Light Weight Calcium Silicate Armstrong / Aerolite/ PROMAD
Tiles
45 False Ceiling – Anti Bacterial Metal Perforated Armstrong / LINDER/ SAS / Silenzo/ Durlam
Ceiling
46 False Ceiling - Anti Bacterial Mineral fibre Armstrong / PROLAD/ Saint Gobain/ Nittobo

47 FRP Doors Navair / Shakti-Hormann / Pacific/Promat

48 Fire Rated Glass Asahi India Safety Glass Ltd./ Saint Gobain/ Pilington, Schott,
Pyroguard, Glaverbel
49 Fire Retardant Paint Viper FRS 881/ Nullifire/ Berger
50 Fire Seal Sealz, Alstroflam/ Abacus
51 Fire: Door Closures, Mortice Dead locks Becker Fire Solution/ Inersoll Rand/ Dorma/Godrej/ Geze/ Hafele

52 Fire: D-Type Pull Handles Becker Fire Solution/ Dorma/ Hardwyn

/Godrej
53 Fire: Hinges, Becker Fire Solution/ Inersoll Rand/ Dorma/Godrej/ Geze/ Hafele

54 Fire: Panic Exit Devices Becker Fire Solution/ Inersoll Rand LCN Series/ Dorma PHA Series/
D-line/Godrej
55 Fire: Sealant Birla/ 3M/ Hilti/MAPEI
56 Fire: Tower Bolts Suzu/ Nulite, Dorset/ Dorma/Godrej
57 Glass : Float & Mirror Modiguard / Saint Gobain/ Asahi India Safety Glass Ltd / Sisecam

58 Glass for Aluminum Doors/ Windows/ Structural Modiguard / Saint Gobain / Asahi India Safety Glass Ltd/ Sisecam
Glazing
59 Glass Wool / Insulation Rockwool / UP Twiga / Lloyd Insulation / ARMSTRONG
Boards/PufInsulatedRoofing
60 GRC Jali Unistone/ KuberFibrostone/Everest Composites/ Birla white

61 Gypsum Board / Gypsum False Ceiling/ USG-Boral Gypsum / India Gypsum / Lafarge
Gypsum Partitions
/ Saint Gobain (Gyproc)

Page 3

Signature of Contractor PWD-GoR

 PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION OF MAIN BUILDING AND STAFF RESIDENCE
FOR RAJASTHAN HOUSE AT NEW DELHI
LIST OF MAKES

62 Laminates Greenlam/ Century/ Greenply/ Merino

63 Veneers Greenlam/ Mayur / Century/ Greenply
64 Lead Lined Door REBBON, Kutty‘s, AHALDA
65 Modular Grab bars and Disabled Hardware Dorma / D-line
66 Modular SS Railing System Metallica India / D – Line International Denmark
/ Mobel Hardware/ OZONE
67 Neutron Shielded Door Ray-Ban Enggcorp/A-FabcoIn/A7L shielding INC/Accurate Radiation
Shielding

68 Night Latch Godrej / Dorma/ Ozone/Harrison/Link

71 Self Levelling Compound MAPEI/ LATICRETE/ SICA/ FORBO

72 Paints - Cement Based Snowcem Plus/, Berger (Durocem Extra)/ Nerolac (Super Acrylic)/
TATA Cem, Asian

73 Paint – Fire Retardent Viper FRS 881/ Nullifire/ BERGER

74 Paints - Epoxy paint ICI Dulux/ Nerolac / Cico / Sikka / BASF / Asian Paints / Pidilite/
BERGER

75 Epoxy Paint Coating in STP/ETP/WATER MAPEI/ SICA/ FOSROC

TANK

76 Paints - Oil Bound Distemper / Acrylic ICI Dulux/ Asian Paints (Tractor)/ Berger (Bison)/ Nerolac (Super
Washable Distemper Acrylic), ICI (Maxlite)

77 Paints - Other Paints / Primer ICI Dulux/ Asian Paints/ Berger/ Nerolac
78 Paints - Plastic Emulsion Paint ICI Dulux/ Asian Paints/ Berger/ Nerolac
79 Paints - Plastic Emulsion Paint (exterior) Asian (Apex Ultima)/ Berger (Weathercoat all Guard)/ ICI
(Duluxweathershield max)

80 Paints - Synthetic Enamel Paints ICI Dulux (Gloss), Berger (Luxol Gold), Asian Paints (Apcolite),
GoodlasNerolac (Full gloss hard drying), Jenson & Nicholson
(Borolock)
81 Paints - Texture paint Berger / Spectrum /Asian
82 Paver blocks (All Types) KK / Uni Stone Products (India) Pvt. Ltd/ Hindustan Tiles

83 Pavement Tiles DURATO/ PAVIT

84 Plywood/Block board/Ply board Greenply/ Mayur / Century/ Merino

84A Marine Ply Mayur/ Greenply/ Century/ Merino

85 Polycarbonate Sheets Danpanlon India/Gallina/ GE Plastic/Tuflite

86 Pre-coated Galvanised Steel Sheet Tata BlueScope / Llyod Insulations India Ltd / [Link]
87 Pre-Laminated Particle Board Novapan /Century /Green Ply/ Merino

Page 4

Signature of Contractor PWD-GoR

 PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION OF MAIN BUILDING AND STAFF RESIDENCE
FOR RAJASTHAN HOUSE AT NEW DELHI
LIST OF MAKES

88 Pre-Laminated MDF Century /Green Ply/ Merino/ Greenlam

89 WPC Door Frames Century /Green Ply/ Merino/ Greenlam

90 PVC continuous fillet for periphery packing of Roop / Anand / Forex Plastic/ Nagalia/Trading Company
glazings / Structural/ Glazing
91 PVC Doors Sintex/ Polyex
92 PVC Flooring Floor Master / FORBO/ DLW/ Mannington/ Armstrong/ Uppo Floor
93 Stone Polymer Composite Flooring DLW/ Mannington Armstrong
94 Flocked Carpet Flooring FORBO/ CARUS/ MODULYSS/ ARMSTRONG/ FLOOR MASTER
95 Powder Coating Material pure Polyester Jotun / Berger / GoodlassNerolac

96 PVC Water Stops Prince /Supreme/ Finolex

97 RF Shielded Door ETS Lindgern/ Synchrony Agency/ Huaming EMC India

98 Reinforcement Steel / Structural Steel SAIL/ RINL/ TATA Steel Ltd./ Jindal Steel & Power Ltd./ JSW Steel
Ltd./ Gallant

99 Restroom Cubicles Merino/ Century/ Greemlam

100 Sandwich Puff Panel JSW/SINTEX or equivalent
101 SFRC / RCC Manhole Covers/ Perfect RCC KK Manholes / SK Precast Concrete/ Advent concreteovision / Daya
Grating concrete

102 Stainless Steel Salem Steel/ Jindal or equivalent

103 Outdoor Sports Flooring Great Sports Infra/PORPLASTIC/Sunflex
104 Stainless Steel bolts, Screws, Nuts & Washers Kundan / Puja / Atul

105 Stainless Steel Clamps Hilti /IntellotechKoncept or equivalent

106 Stainless Steel CP Grating Chilly / Camry/ Neer or equivalent
107 Stainless Steel D-handles D-line / Giesse /Dorma
108 Stainless Steel Friction Stay Earl Bihari / Securistyle / EBCO
109 Stainless Steel Hinges Hettich/ Godrej/ Dorma
110 Tiles: Ceramic Tiles Somany/RAK/Johnson/ Varmora/Kajaria
111 Tiles: Glass Mosaic Tiles MRIDUL/ BIZZARE
112 Tiles: Glazed (Ceramic) tiles Somany/RAK/Johnson/ Varmora/Kajaria
113 Tiles: Heat Resistant Terrace Tiles/ Solar Roof ASIAN / VERMORA / KAJARIA/ SOMANY/ JOHNSON
Tiles
114 Tiles: Vitrified Tiles (Double / Multi Charged)/ Somany / RAK/Johnson/ Varmora / Kajaria
Germ free

115 Vacuum Dewatered Flooring Tremix / Sun Build / Avcon technics

116 Veneered Particle Board Duro / Greenply / Century / Novapan / Century
117 Vinyl Flooring Armstrong/ FORBO/ DLW/ Mannington/ Wonder Floor
118 Hard Wood Flooring Armstrong/ Kahrs/ Admonter/ Floor Master/ Amorim

Page 5

Signature of Contractor PWD-GoR

 PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION OF MAIN BUILDING AND STAFF RESIDENCE
FOR RAJASTHAN HOUSE AT NEW DELHI
LIST OF MAKES

119 Wooden Engineered Flooring Kahrs/ Admonter/ Liston Giordano/ Vito Flooring
120 Bamboo Wood Flooring/Wall Panelling EPITOME BAMBOO PRODUCTS/ Evergreen Flooring/ Floor India
121 FUrnitures Godrej /Spacewood /Indo Innovation/ Veils
122 Expansion Joints CS GROUP/ [Link]/ NYSTROM BLDG PRODUCTS/
VEXCOLT
123 Aluminium Based HPL Alstone/ Greenlam
124 Aesthetic Louvres – Vision Barrier with Bird C-S Group/ Industrial Louvres/ AIROLITE.
Mesh
125 Entrance Mats C-S Group/ Kadee/ Matsinc/ 3M
126 Wood based High Pressure Laminate Century/ Greenlam/ Alstone
127 Lifts OTIS/ Schindler/ Kone/ Mitshubishi
128 Wardrobe Space Wood/ Godrej/ Veils
129 Kitchen Cabinets Space Wood/ Godrej/ Veils
130 UPVC Doors & Windows Occotech/ Plastone/ Sudhakar
131 High Quality Aluminium Door & Window) Alupure/ Eternia/ Aluminco / TOSTEM / SCHUCO
132 Wooden and Steel Furniture Spacewood/ Herman Miller/ VEILS/ Haworth
133 Facade System Fisher/ Blick System or Eq.

B. PLUMBING & SANITARY WORKS

1 Automatic variable temperature control / fixed Jaquar / Hindware/ Cera
temperature control faucets

2 Central Control Rain Bird, USA/Toro/Nelson,

3 Ball Cock Sant / L&T/Audco/GPA
4 Ball valves with floats Zoloto / Leader / Sant/ Audco/GPA
5 Brass - Stop & Bib Cock Zoloto / Sant / Jaquar
6 C. I Pipes & Fittings SKF/RPMF/KesoRam/MIco
7 Centrifugally Cast Iron Hubless Pipes & Fitting SKF/RPMF/KesoRam/MIco

8 C.I Sluice Valve &Non Return Valve Kirloskar /Leader /Zoloto/ Audco/ Sant
9 C.I Valves (Full way, Check and Globe Valves Leader / Kirloskar / SKF / Zolto / Sant / Castle

10 C.I. Manhole Covers SKF/RPMF/KesoRam/MIco

11 C.P. Fittings: Mixer / Bib Cock/ Pillar taps/ Angle Jaquar /Cera / Hindware/Kohler/Grohe
valve/ Valves Washers / Waste/ Urinal /
Spreaders / Accessories etc.

12 Centrifugally C.I Rainwater Intel fitting , Bronze SKF/RPMF/KesoRam/MIco

gratings

13 Centrifugally casted C.I. Pipes SKF/RPMF/KesoRam/Mico

Page 6

Signature of Contractor PWD-GoR

 PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION OF MAIN BUILDING AND STAFF RESIDENCE
FOR RAJASTHAN HOUSE AT NEW DELHI
LIST OF MAKES

14 Chlorinator Thermax Ltd/ Watcon, lon exchange/ Sigma DH Combine Inc./

Siemens/ Techcon/ Jesco / Prominent Heidelberg

15 Chlorine Dosing System Toshcon / Chloromax

16 Cockroach Trap Chilly/ Player/ Camry/kingston
17 Copper Fittings (Capillary) Mexflow./ Rajco Metal Works Mumbai / IBP Conex Ltd.

18 Disc Filter Azud, Spain/ Amaid / Arkal,

19 Ductile Iron Fittings (IS:9523) Electrosteel/Kesoram/Tisco/Jindal/HEPCO
20 Ductile Iron Pipes (IS:8329) Electrosteel/Kesoram/Tisco/Jindal/HEPCO
21 E.P.D.M Gaskets Anand Reddiplex / Enviro Seals / HANU
22 Forged Steel Fittings & Flanges (For Welded Gogan Impex /Kanwal/ Vijay Cycle & Steel (VS)
joints)
23 Geyser JAGUAR/Infra MARKET/ANCHOR/Rallison
24 Hand Drier Kopal / Utech Systems / Euronics Automat
25 HDPE Pipes / Moulded Fittings Emco /Polyefins/Pioneer Plyfab/ Jain/ Hndware/ Appolo
26 HDPE Solution tank Watcon / Ion Exchange / Water Supply Specialist Pvt. Ltd.

27 Inbuilt Drip Line Azud/ Rainbrid-USA/ Netafim

28 Insulation of Hot water pipes Vidoflex insulation / Superion insulation Kaiflex
– Kaimann/Armoflex/Thermaflex
29 Liquid Level Controllers / Indicators Advance Auto / Sridhan International / Minilec
/ Radar / Femac / Switzer / 21st Century
30 Liquid Soap Dispenser Euronics/Utec/Kopal
31 MS Saddle with G.I. Riser Harvel/Alprene/Rain Bird, USA
32 PVC flushing cistern Hindware/ Cera/Jaquar
33 P.R.S. Dials Rain Bird, USA/ Toro, USA/ Nelson,
34 P.T.M.T. Fitting Jaguar /Grohe / HINDWARE / KINGSTON
35 Pipe coat material (pipe protection) RPG Raychem/Pypkote/Makphalt/Lwl
36 Pipe Fittings: G.I. Rpg/Unik/Zoloto/K.S./Goagan implex
37 Pipe:- G.I. Jindal / Tata / Prakash Surya/SAIL/ Goagan impex
38 Pipes & fitting: PVC for SWR Soil, Waste & Vent ASTRAL/TRU FLOW(HINDWARE)/SFMC
Pipes and fittings, Type B PVC Casing & Screen
Pipes
39 Pipes & Fittings: CPVC ASTRAL/TRU FLOW(HINDWARE)/SFMC
40 Pipes & fittings: UPVC ASTRAL/TRU FLOW(HINDWARE)/SFMC

41 Pipes & Gully Trap: Stone ware SKF/RPMF/KesoRam/Mico

42 Pipes and Accessories: PE-A Kitec/ Mexflow/ Kissan/Rehau
43 Pipes: Copper Rajco Metal works, Mumbai / IBP Conex Ltd.
44 Pipes: M.S. Jindal / Prakash – Surya /TATA
45 Pipes: PP-R (PN – 16) POLOPLAST/ REHAU / ASTRAL
46 Pipes: R.C.C &Man Hole Cover RPMF / MICO/ Engineers Hume Pipe (EPH) / Jain spun pipes

47 Plastic seat cover of W.C Cera/Hindware //Kohler/Grohe/

48 Polyethylene Storage Tank Sintex / Polycon/ Fusion

Page 7

Signature of Contractor PWD-GoR

 PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION OF MAIN BUILDING AND STAFF RESIDENCE
FOR RAJASTHAN HOUSE AT NEW DELHI
LIST OF MAKES

49 Pop up Connecting Assembly Rain Bird/Dura/Lasco,

50 Popup Spray Head Rain Bird/Toro, USA/Nelson,
51 RQRC Hydrant Harvel/Alprene/Rain Bird, USA
52 RQRC Key Harvel/ Aqua/ Drip& Drip

53 Sensor Operated Auto Flushing System Urinals Jaguar / HINDWARE/CERA/

54 SS Gratings/ Soap Dish/Towel Rail etc. Jaquar/ Grohe/ Cera/ Hindware/Kohler/Kingston

55 Stainless Steel Sink Hindware / Neelkanth / Nirali / Jayna/Kingston
56 Valve Box Rain Bird, USA/Carson Brook, USA/Dura,
57 Valve: Air Release Azud/ API/ Bermad/ BIR/ Kirloskar / Venus / Zoloto
58 Valve: Butterfly Zolato/Audco /Sant/ KSB
59 Valve: Gun metal Kilburn /Leader /Zoloto/ Sant/ Kartar/ AIP/ Audco
60 Valve: Flush Gem/ Jaquar / Marc
61 Valve: Mainline Isolation Sant /Leader /Zoloto,
62 Valve: Pressure Relief Sant/Leader/ Zolato / Audco
63 Valve: Sluice / NRV Kirloskar/IVC/Kilburn /Zoloto/Castle/ Leader
/ L&T/ Audco
64 Valve: Solenoid Rain Bird, USA/Toro/Nelson,
65 Valve: Non Return Sant/ Leader/ Zoloto / AIP / Kirloskar/ IVC/ Leader/ Audco

66 Valves: Gunmetal / C.P brass angle Zoloto / Leader / Kilburn / Sant / NMC
67 VFD Pump KSB/ Grundfos/ Lubi

68 Vibration Eliminator Resisto-flex Pads & Relay Corpn./Kanwal

Connections

69 Vitreous China Sanitary wares Hindware / / Cera / Kohler/RAK/Grohe

70 Water Cooler Blue Star/ Voltas/ Usha/ Godrej
71 Water Meter Capstan / Kranti/ Anand/ Kant
72 Water supply pumps KSB/ Grundfos/ Lubi
73 White Glazed Fire Clay Sink Hindware / Parryware / Cera
74 STP/ETP/WTP Toshiba Water/ BS Enviro/ Jaywater
75 Wet Composter Bioneer/ BS Enviro/ Reddonatura
76 Bio-Medical Waste Bioneer/ BS Enviro/ Reddonatura

DRINKING WATER PUMPING SYSTEMS /WATER TREATMENT PLANT / REVERSE OSMOSIS ETC.

[Link]. Details of equipment/ material Make/Manufacturer

DRINKING WATER PUMPING SYSTEMS /WATER TREATMENT PLANT / REVERSE OSMOSIS ETC.

Page 8

Signature of Contractor PWD-GoR

 PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION OF MAIN BUILDING AND STAFF RESIDENCE
FOR RAJASTHAN HOUSE AT NEW DELHI
LIST OF MAKES

1 Anti-Vibration Mounting & Flexible Connections Dunlop/Flexionics/Kanwal/Industrial Corporation/Resistoflex

2 Butterfly Valve Zoloto/Audco/Kirloskar/AIP/Advance

3 Cartridge Filter Milton Roy/Grundfos/Big Blue
4 Centralized RO Plant Ion Exchange/ Thermax/ Pentair/PAMM/AWMS
5 Chain Pulley Block Indef/ Ardee/ J.K. Morris
6 Check Valve – Dual Plate Advance/Honeywell/Audco/Zoloto
7 Check Valve – Wafer Type Advance/Danfoss/Zoloto/Honeywell
8 Conductivity Meter Fox/Rosemount/Aster/Digital
9 Couplings Lovejoy/Dunlop/Burgmann
10 Dosing Pumps LMI/Pulser Feeder/Toschon/Grundfos/CRI/LEO/KSB
11 Dosing Pumps LMI/Pulser Feeder/Toschon/Grundfos CRI/LEO/KSB
12 Electronic Flow Meter Krohne (Forbes Marshall)/Rockwin Cirrus Engineering

13 Fastener Fisher/Hilti/Canon
14 Filter Ion Exchange/ Thermax/Pentair
15 Flow Meter Energy/Honeywell/Cirrus Engineering
16 GI / MS Pipes Tata Steel/Prakash Surya
17 GI pipes fittings Unik/ Jain Sons/Zoloto /DRP
18 GM / Forged Brass Ball Valves Zoloto/Honeywell/RB/ Prakash Surya
19 HDPE Tanks Sintex/Amitex/Sheetal
20 High Pressure Pumps DP/Grundfos/ITT/Willo-Mather Platt
21 Hydro-pneumatic System HBDGM/ Grundfoss / Salmson / Nocchi / Kirloskar/ DP
Holland / Wilo

22 Level Controller & Indicator (Water) Auto Pump/Cirrus Engineering/Technika

Techtrol
23 Mechanical Seal Burgmann/Sealol/Dunlop
24 Non return valve Zoloto/Honeywell/RB
25 ORP Meter Fox/Rosemount/ Rapid Control/ Maharaja / Waltronics

26 Paints Asian/Berger/ICI/Shalimar Paints

27 pH Meter Fox/Rosemount/Aster/Digital
28 Pipe clamp & supports Chilly/Euroclamp/Kanwal
29 Pipe clamp & supports Chilly/Euroclamp/Kanwal
30 Portable RO Plant Bluestar/Usha/Eureka Forbes/ Kent/ Prestige/ Voltas/ AO Smith

31 PP PIPES Fiebig/ Emerald/H. Guru/Baumer/Rehau

32 Pressure Switch Switzer/Honeywell/Indfoss

Page 9

Signature of Contractor PWD-GoR

 PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION OF MAIN BUILDING AND STAFF RESIDENCE
FOR RAJASTHAN HOUSE AT NEW DELHI
LIST OF MAKES

33 Raw Water Pump Set/ Treated Water pump set/ KSB/ Grundfos/ Lubi
Drainage Pump Set or any other type of pump
sets.

34 Resin Ion Exchange/Thermax/3M/Pentair

35 RO Membrane with Housing Dow/Hydranautics/Tricep/G.E/Mitsubishi
36 Sluice Valves IVC/Kirloskar/ Zoloto
37 Sodium Hypochlorite Dosing System Asia LMI/ Grundfos/ Seiko/ E – Dose
38 Softener Vessel Ion Exchange/Thermax/Pentair
39 SS Pipes Jindal/ Viega/alfapress
40 SS Strainer Normax/Swadeshi/Worth valve
41 SS Valves Audco/ Zoloto /Leader/ALFA PRESS
42 Storm Water Drainage & Sewage Sump Pumps KSB/ Grundfos/ Lubi
(Submersible)

43 Transfer Pumps KSB/ Grundfos/ Lubi

44 Water Meter (Mechanical Type) As per Plumbing & Sanitary make list
45 Welding Rods ADORR/Esab/ Advani/ Victor
46 Y Strainer Emerald/Zoloto /Sant
SOLAR PV/ HOT WATER SYSTEM
1 Solar PV System TATA Power Solar / Havells Solar Edge/ Jackson Solar

2 Solar Hot Water System HoneyWell / Solahart / Sol. Power/ TATA Power Solar/Bosch/
Jackson Solar

3 Butterfly Valve Audco/Danfoss/Honeywell/Zoloto

4 Check Valve – Dual Plate Advance/Honeywell/Audco/Zoloto
5 Check Valve – Wafer Type Advance/Danfoss/Zoloto/Honeywell
6 CPVC pipes Supreme/Ashirwad/Astral/AKG
7 GI Pipes Tata Steel/Jindal (Hissar)/ SAIL
8 GM / Forged Brass Ball Valves Danfoss/Honeywell/Zoloto
9 Heat Exchanger GEA Eco flex/Alfa Level or equivalent
10 Hot Water Re circulation OR other Pumps DP – Holland/Grundfos /Xylem –ITT/ Wilo – Mather Platt/KSB/LEO/CRI

11 Insulation for Hot Water Pipes Armacell – Armaflex/Eurobatex – Union Foam

K-Flex/ Thermaflex
12 Level Controller & Indicator (Water) Auto Pump/Cirrus Engineering/Technika /
Techtrol
13 Pipe clamp & supports Chilly/ Euroclamp/ Kanwal
14 Sluice Valves IVC/ Kirloskar/ Advance

Page 10

Signature of Contractor PWD-GoR

 PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION OF MAIN BUILDING AND STAFF RESIDENCE
FOR RAJASTHAN HOUSE AT NEW DELHI
LIST OF MAKES

15 Solenoid Valve Danfoss/ Avcon/ Honey well

16 Water Meter As per Plumbing & Sanitary make list
17 Y Strainer Leader/ Zoloto/ Audco/ Castle/ Emerald/ Rapid cool/ Advance

18 Heat Pump Daikin/Emerson/ AO SMITH

SEWAGE/ EFFLUENT TREATMENT PLANT

1. Air Blowers Beta/ Everest/ Kulkarni / TMVT
2. Air Diffussion System Airfin/Usha Ruba/Rehau
3. Air Vent Valve Oven trop (Germany) / CIM / Rapid Control
4. Bar Screen KSP/AWMS/PAMM
5. Centrifuge Apollo/United/B.A Engineering
6. Chemical Cleaning Pump WILO / Grundfos/Xylem/KSB
7. Chemical Cleaning tank Polycon / Sintex/Vectus/Supreme
8. Electrical Panel Diamond Heavy Electrical Power Control/SPC Electrotech
/Risha/Krypton/ ABB
9. Flow Meter (Digital) Aster (Totalized) / VATS /Scientific
10. Flow Rota Meter for Suction Pump UKL / Aster /Scientific
11. Foot Valve Sant / Zoloto/Advance/DRP
12. G.I. fittings (malleable cast iron) Unik/Zoloto/New/DRP
13. Level Controller Aster/Cirrus Engineering/Rockwell Automation
14. Level Indicator Aster/Cirrus Engineering/Rockwell Automation
15. Level Switch Aster/Cirrus Engineering/Rockwell Automation
16. Media Cooldeck/Usha Ruba/MM Aqua/Pharmatech
17. Multiport Valve Pharer (U.S.A)/ ORG/Astar
18. PH Meter VATS / Hanna/Aster/digital
19. PLC / HMI Schneider / Allen 11radley /Mitsubishi
20. Semi Auto Fine Screen Toro/KSP / AWMS/PAMM
21. UV Systems Alpha UV/ Creative UV/ Pentair/Eureka Forbes
22. VFD Danfoss/Allen Bredly/Siemens/ABB
23. MBR Module GE/Koch/Torray
24. DO Meter Hanna/Toshniwal/Hach
25. Air Diffuser Rehau/EDI
26. STP Vendors BS Enviro/Aldee Water/Toshiba Water/ envitech solutions

ELECTRICAL WORKS
1 11 KV/33 KV Vacuum Circuit Breaker (VCB)/SF6 L&T/ ABB / Schneider/ Siemens
BREAKER

2 11KV/33KV/66KV HT PANEL SPC ELECTROTECH/PEATON Electricals/ ABB

3 MCCB (TP, 4P) L&T/ ABB / Schneider/ Legrand

4 ACB (TP,4P) with variable microprocessor L&T / Schneider / ABB / Legrand

5 Automatic Transfer Switch (ATS) L&T/ ABB/ Siemens/ Schneider / Socomec

Page 11

Signature of Contractor PWD-GoR

 PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION OF MAIN BUILDING AND STAFF RESIDENCE
FOR RAJASTHAN HOUSE AT NEW DELHI
LIST OF MAKES

6 Auxiliary relays compatible with PLC etc. Siemens/ L&T/ ABB/ Areva/ Schneider

7 Batteries Hitachi/Panasonic/ Exide/ Amco/ Amaraja

8 Battery Charger Amaraja/ Sabnife/ Statcon/ Voltstat/ HBL

9 Battery Charger-cum-DCDB Amaraja/ Volstat/Caldyne/ Expo-Fyn/ BCH/ HBL
10 Boom Barrier, DFMD, HHMD, X-RAY FAAC/Vigiguard/ /Gunnebo/ motwane
BAGGAGE SCANNER Etc.
11 Brass compression Gland (Heavy duty) Commex/ Gripwell/ Dowell

12 Bus bar Jindal/ Hindalco/ Indalco

13 Bus Duct – Sandwich/Air Insulated SPC Electrotech/ Schneider/ABB
14 Bus trunking , rising mains, end feed unit, top-off box SPC Electrotech/ Schneider/ABB

15 Cable Jointing Kit / HT termination Kit Reychem/ Xicon/ 3M

16 Cable Lugs & Glands Dowel/ Johnson/ Gripwell/ Comex/ APS/ Comet
17 Race ways / Floor trunking / wall channels / MK /OBO Betterman /Legrand
DLP Trunking

18 Capacitors with harmonic filters L&T/ Siemens / Schneider/ ABB/ Ducati

19 Ceiling /Exhaust/Wall fans Crompton/ Usha/ Havells / Panasonic
20 Chemical Earthing Furse/ Erico / JK Chemrode / LPI
21 Coaxial Wires Finolex/ havells/ Polycab/ RR kabel
22 Colour Monitor for Dektop Samsung/ LG/ Sony
23 Compression Gland and Lugs / thimbles Dowel/ Comet/ Gripwell / aps

24 Contactors ABB/ L&T/ Schneider/ Siemens

25 Control fuse base with HRC fuse / HRC Fuse L&T/ Siemens/ ABB/ Alstom/ Schneider

26 Crimping Lugs/ Thimbles Dowells/ Hex/ Commet

27 CT/ PT‘s L&T/ Kappa/ C&S/ CGL/ AE / Meco
28 Cubicle Type Fuse Unit/ RMU Siemens/ L&T/ ABB/ Schneider
29 Data/Telephone/TV Outlets Systimax/ Amp / Commscope / Panduit pannet / corning

30 DB‘s / Pre-wired DB‘s Legrand/ L&T/ Schneider/ Siemens / Panasonic –Uno

31 DG Set – Assembler Jakson& Company / Jakson Ltd/ Sterling Generators / Sudhir

Gensets/ C&S Himoinsa/ Kirloskar (KOEL authorized OEM)

Page 12

Signature of Contractor PWD-GoR

 PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION OF MAIN BUILDING AND STAFF RESIDENCE
FOR RAJASTHAN HOUSE AT NEW DELHI
LIST OF MAKES

32 DG Set – Alternator Stamford/ Leroy Somer / Kirloskar (KOEL Green)

33 DG Set – Engine Cummins/ Perkins/ Volvo/ Caterpiller/ Kirloskar (KOEL Green)

34 DG Synchronizing Controller Woodword/ Dief/ Deep sea

35 Digital Lighting Control System Wipro/ Siemens/ Philips/ Schneider/ ABB/ L&T
36 Digital Numerical Relays L&T/ ABB / Siemens/ Schneider/ Areva
37 DWC HDPE Pipe DURA-LINE / REX / CARLON/ EMTELLE
38 Digital Energy Meters including Dual Source Energy L&T/ Schneider/ HPL/ Siemens/ ABB/ Socomec/ Neptune
Meters

39 Electrical Motors L&T/ ABB/ Siemens/ Kirloskar

40 Optical Fiber Cable Systimax/ Amp / Commscope / Panduit pannet / corning

41 Fire Extinguisher Ceasefire/ Minimax/ safe fire

42 Fire Survival Cables No Burn / Lapp / Pyrotemax
43 PVC insulated FRLS – Aluminum / Copper Finolex/ havells/ Polycab/ RR kabel

1.1 KV grade flexible wires

44 G.I./Cu. Strip & earthing material Bharati/ Indiana/ Slotco / aps
45 Hand Gloves & Rubber Mat Premier Polyfim Ltd/ Polyelectrosafe/ Challenger/ Electromat/ Safe
Hold

46 HRC Fuse Siemens/ L&T/ ABB/ Schneider

47 HT & LT Cables (Power & Control Cables, Solar Finolex/ havells/ Polycab/ RR kabel
Cables)

48 Indicating Lamps AE/ Kaycee/ L&T/ Siemens/ Schneider/ ABB

49 Industrial Socket Outlets ABB/ L&T/ Legrand/ Siemens/ Panasonic
50 Insulated Rubber Mat Premier Polyfilm Ltd/ Polyelectrosafe/ Challenger/ Electro Mat/ Safe
Hold

51 Insulators Jaya Shree/ Modern/ IEC/ WSI

52 Jointing Kit Reychem/ Xicon/ Birla-3M

53 Aspirating Smoke Detection Notifier / Siemens / Tyco / Securiton / Bosch

54 Inverter Microtek / Luminous / Su-Kam/ Eaton

55 Isolators Siemens/ L&T/ ABB/Socomec/ Schnieder
56 Decorative lights Philips /Havells / jaquar / Luster / kapoor
57 LED Light Fixtures and Lamps Philips/ Wipro/ Trilux /Havells
58 Lighting for Facade Philips/ iGuzzini / Ligman, LT

Page 13

Signature of Contractor PWD-GoR

 PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION OF MAIN BUILDING AND STAFF RESIDENCE
FOR RAJASTHAN HOUSE AT NEW DELHI
LIST OF MAKES

59 Lightening Arrestors / Lighting Protection ABB-FURSE / LPI/ APS / ERICO

60 Electrical panels, LT panel, Capacitor Panel,Synchronising SPC Electrotech/ Peaton electricals/ havells/ABB
Panel, Sub panels, feeder pillars, fire figting panel etc

61 MCBs / RCCB/Isolaters / RCBO / Change over Legrand/ L&T/ Schneider/ Siemens/ Panasonic –Uno
switch

62 MCCB with Variable Microprocessor based L&T (D-sine)/ Siemens(3 VL)/ABB (T max)/ Schneider (NSX)/ Legrand (DRX)
(O/C, S/C, E/F) / Thermo magnetic releases

63 Measuring Instruments (Analog Meter) L&T/ AE/ MECO/ Rishabh/ Schnieder

64 Measuring Instruments (Digital Type)/ L&T/ Ducati/ Conzerv/ Secure/ Siemens/ Schnieder/ ABB
MFM/KWH meter

65 Modular Switches/ Socket outlets and wiring MK (Aspect) / Legrand (Arteor)/ Schneider (NEO C-Metro)/
accessories with mouldular cover plate Panasonic (Europa)

66 MPCB L&T/ Siemens/ ABB/ Schneider/ Legrand

67 MS Conduit / Cable tray BEC/ AKG/ Steel Kraft
68 MS Conduit accessories BEC/ AKG/ Steel Kraft
69 Multi-function Meter L&T/ ABB / Siemens/ Schneider
70 Lighting Automation Legrand / Schneider / Panasonic

71 Occupancy Sensors/ Lighting Control System Panasonic / Schneider/ Legrand

72 Overload relay &Single phase preventer ABB/ L&T/ Siemens/ Schneider

73 Package/ Unitised Substation ABB/ Siemens/ Schneider/SPC

74 Panel Accessories L&T// Rishabh/ Siemens/ Schneider
75 Power Capacitor L&T/ EPCOS/ Siemens/ Schneider
76 Programmable timer (self-powered electronic digital) L&T/ Siemens/ Legrand/ Schneider
/Astronomer

77 Protective relays (Microprocessor based compatible Siemens/ L&T/ ABB/ Areva/ Schnieder
with PC & PLC)

78 Push Buttons Siemens/ L&T/ ABB/ Schneider/ C&S

79 PVC Conduit & Accessories Clipsal/ Norpack / AKG / Anchor-Panasonic
80 Relay / Contractors/ Timers / Starters and Control Siemens/ L&T/ Schneider/ ABB
Panel

81 Selector Switch Siemens/ L&T/ Teknic/ Salzer/ Schnieder/ ABB

82 Street Light Poles & Light Fixtures – Solar & Philips/ Keselac/ Luster / Thorn / Homdec
Conventional

Page 14

Signature of Contractor PWD-GoR

 PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION OF MAIN BUILDING AND STAFF RESIDENCE
FOR RAJASTHAN HOUSE AT NEW DELHI
LIST OF MAKES

83 Surge Diverter Tercel/ ABB/ Siemens/ Emerson/ Hager/ Phoenix/ Legrand

84 SCADA & BMS System Schneider/ Delta/ Honeywell / Siemens

85 Tap-off/ Splitter box Zinwell/ Novatron/ Catvision
86 Telephone Tag Block/Jack Panel/ Face Plate Krone/ Panduit Pannet / Amp/ Systimax / CommScope

87 Terminal Strip Connect well/ Phoenix/ WAGO

88 Termination Kits Raychem/ Birla/ 3M
89 Transformer (Oil Type / Dry Type) ABB/ Siemens/ Kirloskar/ Areva/ Schneider
90 Trivector – Meter (Digital type) only for L&T/ Secure meter/ Enercon/ Siemens/ Socomec/ Schnieder
SEBsupply

91 UPS Emerson (Vertiv)/ Schnieder (APC)/ Numeric

92 EV Charger Panasonic / ABB/ Siemens

FIRE FIGHTING WORKS
1 Air Release Valve/Air Cushion Tank Zoloto/Advance/Leader/Audco/Castle
2 Alarm valve & Hydraulic (Alarm motor with coupling) HD fire protect/TYCO/VIKING/Newage

3 Alternator (fire) Stamford/ Lorey Somer/ Kirloskar

4 Ammeter/ Voltmeter/ PF/ kW/ Hz/ meter As per respective electrical make list

/Energy Meter/ Multimeter

5 Anchor Fastener Fischer / Hilti or equivalent
6 Ball Valves L&T/ Audco /Zoloto/ Advance/Emerald/ KSB
7 Battery Exide/ AMCO /Amararaja/ Panasonic
8 Butt welded fitting (UL Listed) & accessories V.S. Forge/True Forge / DRP-M

9 Butterfly valves L&T/ Audco/ Zoloto / Advance/ KSB

10 Cable lugs and glands As per electrical make list
11 Cables As per electrical make list
12 Check Valve/Foot Valve/Sluice Valve/ NRV L&T/Audco / Zoloto Advance/KSB

13 Control / Potential / Current Transformer As per respective electrical make list

14 Deluge valve/ Solenoid valve/ Spray nozzle HD / Tyco/Viking

15 Diesel engine (Fire) KSB/ Grundfos/ Lubi

Page 15

Signature of Contractor PWD-GoR

 PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION OF MAIN BUILDING AND STAFF RESIDENCE
FOR RAJASTHAN HOUSE AT NEW DELHI
LIST OF MAKES

16 ELCB As per electrical make list

17 Epoxy Paint As per Civil Works make list
18 Fire Buckets EXFLAME /SAFE FIRE/MINIMAX
19 Fire Extinguisher EXFLAME /SAFE FIRE/MINIMAX

20 Fire Hydrant Valves/ Fire RRL Hose Pipes

/ Fire Hose Reels/ Fire Man‘s Axe/ Gun metal EXFLAME /SAFE FIRE/MINIMAX
short branch pipe/ 2/ 3/4 FB inlet/ draw Out
connection/Hose Box/ Hose reel drum /Nozzle/
blank Caps & Chains / Coupling

21 Fire Pumps KSB/ Grundfos/ Lubi

22 Electrical Motors ABB/ Siemens/Kirloskar/C&G/BALDOR / Bharat Bijli

23 Flow Meter Scientific Equipments(p) Ltd./System Sensor or equivalent

24 Flow switch Potter / Rapid flow/Danfoss/Viking/Belimo/Honeywell

25 Foot Valve (Cast iron/ Gunmetal) Kirloskar / Zoloto/Advance/L&T
26 Forged steel fitting & accessories [Link]/True Forge / DRP-M
27 GI clamps Chilly/Hilti or equivalent
28 Gl / MS Pipes Tata / Jindal- Hissar/ SAIL / Prakash-Surya
29 Gunmetal Valves (Globe Valves) Audco / Zoloto Advance/L&T
30 Over Load Relays As per electrical make list
31 Pipe coat material (pipe protection) Pypcoat / Makphalt / Safex
32 Pipe Hangers/ Clamps/Supports Chilly/ GMGR /CAMRY/Hilti
33 Power/auxiliary Contactors As per electrical make list
34 Pressure Gauge Fiebig/ [Link]/HD/BRC
35 Pressure Switch Indfoss/ Switzer/ Danfoss/Honeywell
36 Push Buttons/ Indicating lamps LED As per respective electrical make list
37 Single Phase Preventer As per electrical make list
38 Solenoid valve/ Spray nozzle HD / Tyco/Danfoss/ Honeywell
39 Sprinkler Heads (Sidewall/ Upright/ Pendant) Tyco / Newage / HD

40 Steel flexible extension Eversafe /Newage/Tyco/Viking

41 Vibration Eliminator Resistoflex / D‘wren / Kanwal

Page 16

Signature of Contractor PWD-GoR

 PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION OF MAIN BUILDING AND STAFF RESIDENCE
FOR RAJASTHAN HOUSE AT NEW DELHI
LIST OF MAKES

42 Weld Electrodes Advani/ ESAB/ L&T/Victor

43 Pot strainer Emerald/ VTM/ Rapid Cool
44 Y- Strainer Zoloto/Audco /Emerald/Advance
45 Rubber Bellows Resistoflex/Easyflex/Kanwal
46 Fire Suppression System/Gas Flooding Sytem Tyco Hygood / firetrex /Minimax SSP

47 Clean Agent Fire Extinguisher Tyco hugood/SVS Buildwell / firetrex /Minimax SSP

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Note: All fire alarm components/ Panels shall be UL listed & confirm to NFPA standards.

1 Control Cable RR Cable/ Havells/ Polycab/ Finolex

2 Intelligent Addressable Fire Alarm Notifier by Honeywell/ Cerberus by Siemens / Simplex by Tyco /
Panel/Detectors/ Hooters/ Manual Call Point Bosch
UL Listed/ Talkback/ Control Module/ Monitor
Module/ Control relay Module/ Short Ckt.
Isolator/

3 Intelligent Addressable Fire Alarm System Notifier by Honeywell/ Cerberus by Siemens / Simplex by Tyco /
Bosch

4 Response Indicator Notifier by Honeywell/ Cerberus by Siemens / Simplex by Tyco /

Bosch / SAC

5 Fire Survival Cable (LPCB approved) No Burn / Lapp/ Pyrotemax

6 Fire Annunciation Panel Notifier by Honeywell/ Cerberus by Siemens / Simplex by Tyco /
Bosch
7 Panic Button Eureka Forbes/ Siemens / Tyco / Ncom
8 Photo Chromatic Switch Bajaj/ Wipro/Phillips/L&T
9 Splitter Box Shyam Antenna/ CAT vision or equivalent
10 Termination Control Cable Dowell‘s/ Elemex/ Wago/ Phoenix
LIFTS
1 Lifts OTIS/ Kone / Mitsubishi/ Schindler

LV System/ PA System/ CCTV System/ Access Control System/ Door Interlocking System
1 Door Controller, Access Control server Software,
Smart card
Honeywell/ DDS/Bosch/ Lenel
2 Card Reader, Biometric Reader Suprema, Vanderbilt, Morpho, HID
3 Amplifier Bosch/ /Bose / TOA
4 CAT 6A Wire/Accessories –Jack panel / Panduit Pannet / Amp/ Systimax / CommScope / Corning
FacePlate

Page 17

Signature of Contractor PWD-GoR

 PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION OF MAIN BUILDING AND STAFF RESIDENCE
FOR RAJASTHAN HOUSE AT NEW DELHI
LIST OF MAKES

5 CCTV Camera/ NVR/ Central Monitoring Pelco /Bosch/ Axis

Software / Other Items

6 CD Player Bosch/Bose / TOA

7 Door Interlocking System NRH/Eltech/Avon or equivalent
8 PA Speaker, Voice controller, paging, station, Bosch /Bose / TOA
Microphone

9 RG 6,RG 11/Wire/Coaxial Cables RR Cable/ Havells/ Polycab/ Finolex

10 Speaker Wire RR Cable/ Havells/ Polycab/ Finolex
11 Data Storage device Quantum/ HP/ DELL/ IBM
HVAC SYSTEM

1 Adhesives for Insulation Pidilite/Superlon / Armacell

2 Air & Dirt Separator/Dirt Separator Spirotech/ Calefi/ Optivent
/Spirotherm/Flamco/Armstrong
3 Air Distribution (Ducting) –GI/GSS Sheets SAIL / TATA Steel/ Jindal-Hissar

4 Air Handling Units with Coils etc. Zeco/ Edgetech/ Waves/Flaktwood

5 Air washer Zeco/ Waves/ Edgetech/Humidin
6 Aluminium Sheet for Ducts Jindal/ Hindalco/ Indal
7 Axial Flow Fans Wolter/ Kruger / Systemair /Greenheck/ Nicotra
8 Cable Lugs/Thimbles/Glands As per Approved Makes of Electrical Works
9 Cable Tray As per Approved Makes of Electrical Works
10 Centrifugal Fans/Fan section/Plug Fans Kruger / Greenheck /Comefri/ Wolter/ Nicotra/Systemair

11 Control Cables As per Electrical Makes

12 DRY Scrubber Waves /Rydair/ Trion/ Honeywell
13 Packaged Type Air Washer Waves / Zeco/ Edgetech
14 Duct Dampers/ Grills/ Diffuser/ VCD/ Collar Damper Caryaire /Systemair/ Conaire/ Dynacraft /Airflow (Mapro)
etc.
15 Electric Motor ABB/ Siemens/ Crompton Greaves
16 Electric motor (Fire Rated) Marathon/ Havells-Lafert/ alstrom / ROTOMOTIVE

17 Factory Fabricated Duct & Flanges Rolastar / Zeco / Ductofab / Technofab/GPS Spiro
18 Fasteners-Dash HILTI / Fischer / Cannon / Wurth
19 Filters –Pre/ Fine/ Hepa& BIBO Thermadyne / Spectrum/ Camfil/ American Air Filter
20 Fire Damper Actuator Belimo/Siemens/Danfoss/Honeywell
21 Fire Dampers / Smoke Dampers Trox/ Greenheck/Ruskin Titus/Systemair
22 Flexible Duct Connection Airflow/Pyroguard / Rolastar/ UP Twiga

Page 18

Signature of Contractor PWD-GoR

 PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION OF MAIN BUILDING AND STAFF RESIDENCE
FOR RAJASTHAN HOUSE AT NEW DELHI
LIST OF MAKES

23 GI/ MS Piping Jindal-Hissar/TATA/SAIL

(chilled/condenser/drain/hot)

24 Inline Fans Kruger / Nicotra/ Greenheck/ Ostberg

25 Insulation Material
26 a) Fiber Glass – Aluminium faced Insulation UP Twiga / Owens Corning/Kimmco

27 b) Polyurethane Foam (PUF) Insulation Styrene Packaging & Insulations/Lloyd Insulations/Supreme

28 c)Nitrile Rubber /EPDM Insulation with antimicrobial K-Flex /Armacell /Supreme / Aflex

29 d) XLPE Insulation Supreme/ Vidoflex/ Trocellene/Paramount / Trocelin

30 e) Expanded Polystyrene Insulation Styrene Packing/MetturBeardsell/ Toshiba/Trocellin/ Paramount

31 Paints As per Civil Works Makes

32 Pipe Supports EASYFLEX/Resistoflex/Diamond/Armacell
33 Power Cables As per Electrical Makes
34 Propeller Fans Crompton/ Khaitan/ Alstom/ Bajaj/Hevells
35 PVC /uPVC pipe Polypack/ Supreme/Astral/Finolex
63 Red Oxide/ Zinc Chromate Primer As per Civil Works Makes
36 Refrigerant Copper Pipes MANDEV Tubes/Rajco Metal/Mehta Tubes (Max Flow)/Kwality
Tubes (Raj State)

37 RP Tissue UP Twiga/ Styrene Packing or equivalent

38 Split AC Units /Precision AC Hitachi /Daikin/ O General/ Mitsubishi Electric
39 Starters/ change over switch/ push buttons/ As per respective Electrical Makes
Indication Lamps/ Rotary switches/ 1-phase
preventor/ Soft starter/ MCB/ MCCB/ ACB/ Contactor
etc.

40 V Belt Dunlop/ Fenner/ Hilton

41 Variable Frequency Drive Siemens/Danfoss/ABB/ Schneider/ L&T
42 VRV/ VRF Outdoor/ Indoor Units/ Refnet Mitsubishi Electric/ Daikin/ Hitachi / O General
Joints/Remote Controllers

43 Vibration Isolators Easyflex/kanwal/ResistoFlex

44 HVAC PANEL, AHU PANEL, VFD PANEL As per respective Electrical Makes
45 Cable trey, raceway, junction boxes As per respective Electrical Makes
IBMS SYSTEM
1 Operator Workstation Dell/Lenovo/HP/IBM
2 Printer Canon/Xerox/HP/Epson
3 Network Switch Cisco/HP/Avaya / Alcatel

Page 19

Signature of Contractor PWD-GoR

 PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION OF MAIN BUILDING AND STAFF RESIDENCE
FOR RAJASTHAN HOUSE AT NEW DELHI
LIST OF MAKES

4 Capacitive Touch Panel Siemens-PX /Honeywell EBI/Schneider AS/Carrier-ALC

5 BMS Software Siemens Desigo /Honeywell EBI/Schneider Structure ware /Carrier-ALC
6 System Integration Units Siemens-PX /Honeywell-Comfort Point/Schneider-AS /Carrier-ALC

7 Direct Digital Controller Siemens /Honeywell Comfort Point/Schneider AS /Carrier ALC

8 Immersion Temperature Sensor RTD Greystone / Honeywell / Siemens / Schneider

9 Outside Air Temperature+ Humidity Sensors Greystone / Honeywell / Siemens / Schneider

10 Ultrasonic Waterflow meter Kampstrup/Landis+Gyr/Shenitech/Siemens/ Honeywell

11 Differential Pressure Switches for Air/ Water Greystone / Honeywell / Siemens / Schneider /Kele

12 Water Flow Switch Greystone / Honeywell / Siemens / Schneider /Veksler

13 DP Sensor for Water Honeywell / Siemens / Schneider

14 pH Analyser Hach/Omicron/Forbes Marshall
15 TDS Analyser Hach/Omicron/Forbes Marshall
16 DP Switch for Filter Status Honeywell / Siemens / Schneider
17 Air/ Water Sensors / Switches / Pressure Greystone / Honeywell / Siemens / Schneider
transmitters/Differential Pressure Switch Air/
Water /Differential Pressure Transmitter

18 Colour Monitor LG/Samsung/ HP

19 Communication Cables / Signal Cable Havell/ Polycab RR kabel/ /Finolex
20 Copper Conductor Control Cable Same as per Electrical make list
21 Current Relay Same as per Electrical make list
22 Duct Mounted Temperature + RH sensor/ Duct Greystone / Honeywell / Siemens / Schneider
Temperature Sensor

23 Level Switch / Level Transmitter Honeywell / Dwyer/ Radix/ Weksler

24 Flow & BTU Meter Schenitech / Honeywell / Kampstrup
25 GI Conduits Same as per Electrical make list
26 LAN cables for BMS Network Same as per Electrical/LV make list
27 MS Conduits Same as per Electrical make list
28 Sensor- CO2/ CO / PH / TDS Honeywell / Hach / Greisinger / Siemens
29 PVC Conduits Same as per Electrical make list
30 Voltage / Current / Power Factor Transducer Siemens / Schneider/ Omicron / Greystone

Page 20

Signature of Contractor PWD-GoR

 PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION OF MAIN BUILDING AND STAFF RESIDENCE
FOR RAJASTHAN HOUSE AT NEW DELHI
LIST OF MAKES

IPABX & TELEPHONE SYSTEMS

1 Data/ Telephone cable (2/4 /10 / 20/ 50/ 100 FINOLEX/ Polycab/ havells / RR kabel
PAIR CABLES)

2 Digital/ANALOG PHONES/ Handsets PANASONIC/ SIEMENS/ ALCATEL

3 IPABX Server and Gateways / Digital IP ALCATEL/ CISCO / AVAYA

Phones with HOT redundancy (expendable up
to 15000 lines)
4 MDF/IDF Panduit Pannet / Amp/ Systimax / CommScope / Corning
5 Telephone tag block/Jack Panel/ Face Plate Krone/ Panduit Pannet / Amp/ Systimax / CommScope /
Corning

6 VOICE BOX – RJII KRONE/ TVS/ FINOLEX/ Panduit Pannet / Amp/ Systimax
DATA NETWORKING & WIFI SYSTEM

1 Active Components – Core and Edge switch CISCO/ AVAYA / ALCATEL

2 Enclosures – Distribution rack and server rack Netrack / Rittal / Legrand/ MTS

3 Ethernet Switch / Indoor & Outdoor WIFI device/ CISCO/ AVAYA / ALCATEL
Trans receivers

4 Routers CISCO/ AVAYA / ALCATEL/ Juniper / Nokia

5 Server IBM / Dell/ HP/CISCO
6 Firewall CISCO/ Alcatel /Palo Alto / Avaya / Sophos/Fortinet
7 Passive Components – Cat 6/Cat 6A/ Patch Panduit Pannet / Amp/ Systimax / CommScope / Corning
panel/ Patch Cord/ Information outlets/
Optical fiber Cable/ Fiber patch cord/
pigtails/ LIU/ Adapters/ Connectors

Audio Visual System & Conference System

1 Table Mount Solution/ Wireless Presenter / Digital Kramer / Light ware /Extron / Bose
Sound Processor/ Power Amplifier / Ceiling
Speaker etc.

2 DVD cum USB Player Kramer / Light ware /Extron / Bose

3 Equipment Rack Rittal/ Netrack/ Cisco/MTS
4 LED Videowall Christie / Barco/ Unilumin / Panasonic / Samsung
5 LED Dimmable Lights Philips/ Wipro/ Lutron/Trilux
6 LED Signage Board Wipro/ Philips/ Luster

Page 21

Signature of Contractor PWD-GoR

 PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION OF MAIN BUILDING AND STAFF RESIDENCE
FOR RAJASTHAN HOUSE AT NEW DELHI
LIST OF MAKES

7 Sound Mixer Kramer / Sennheiser / Bosch / TOA

8 Projection Screen Draper/ Da-Lite/ Grandview/ Harkness
9 Conference PA system Kramer / Sennheiser / Bosch / TOA
10 Video Conferencing Unit Polycom// Cisco / Panasonic
11 Collor / Codless Mikes Shure / Sennheiser / Bosch / TOA
12 Optical Fibre Cable, HDBT Bulk Cable Extron/ Crestron/ Kramer/Amp/Belden
13 VGA Cable Kramer/ Beldon/ Klotz
14 Digital Recorder (1000-hour recording Sony / Cenix
capacity)
15 Junction Box ABB/L&T/Havells/Schneider/Legrand
16 Controller, Touch Panel Kramer / Light ware /Extron
17 Mixing Amplifier Bosch / Bose / Kramer
18 Cable cubby Kramer / Light ware /Extron
19 Switches, HDMI Cables, HDBT Transmitter, HDBT Kramer/ Light ware /Extron
Receiver, Audio De-Embedder

20 Lamps Osram/ Philips/ GE/ Wipro

21 LED Display (TV) LG / Panasonic / Samsung
22 Document Camera Aver vision /Epson/ Lumens
Solid Waste Management System
1 STP/ETP/WTP Toshiba Water/ BS Enviro/ Jaywater
2 Integerated Sterilizer with Shredder Celitron / Ecodas / Cisa
3 Organic Waste Converter ENVIcare Soln. Pvt. Ltd/ Excel Industries Ltd/ Greenvironindia

4 Air Blowers Everest/Kay/Ingersal rand

5 Air Diffussion System Rehau/EDI

6 Air Vent Valve Oven trop (Germany) / CIM / Rapid Control

7 Bar Screen KSP/AWMS/PAMM/BS ENVIRO

8 Centrifuge/Filter press Apollo/United/B.A Engineering/Universal/W2P

9 Screw Pump Roto/Rotomac

10 Chemical Cleaning Pump WILO / Grundfos/Xylem/KSB

Page 22

Signature of Contractor PWD-GoR

 PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION OF MAIN BUILDING AND STAFF RESIDENCE
FOR RAJASTHAN HOUSE AT NEW DELHI
LIST OF MAKES

11 Chemical Cleaning tank Polycon / Sintex/Vectus/Supreme

12 Electrical Panel Spc electrotech, havells, abb

13 Flow Meter (Digital) Aster (Totalized) / VATS /Scientific

14 Flow Rota Meter for Suction Pump UKL / Aster /Scientific

15 Foot Valve Sant / Zoloto/Advance/DRP

16 G.I. fittings (malleable cast iron) Unik/Zoloto/New/DRP

17 Level Controller Aster/Cirrus Engineering/Rockwell Automation

18 Level Indicator Aster/Cirrus Engineering/Rockwell Automation

19 Level Switch Aster/Cirrus Engineering/Rockwell Automation

20 MBBR Media Cooldeck/Usha Ruba/MM Aqua/Pharmatech/

21 Advance MBBR media (PVA Gel Media)) Kuraray/AnoxKaldnes

22 Multiport Valve Pharer (U.S.A)/ ORG/Astar

23 PH Meter VATS / Hanna/Aster/digital

24 PLC / HMI Schneider / Allen 23radley /Mitsubishi/Delta/Siemens

25 Semi Auto Fine Screen Toro/KSP / AWMS/PAMM

26 UV Systems Alpha UV/ Creative UV/ Pentair/Eureka Forbes

27 Ozonator System Ozone Engineer/Creative/Wapp

28 VFD Danfoss/Allen Bredly/Siemens/ABB/L&T

29 MBR Module GE/Qua/Torray

30 DO Meter Hanna/Toshniwal/Hach

Page 23

Signature of Contractor PWD-GoR

 PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION OF MAIN BUILDING AND STAFF RESIDENCE
FOR RAJASTHAN HOUSE AT NEW DELHI
LIST OF MAKES

31 Air Diffuser Rehau/EDI

32 STP Vendors (DSITC) BS Enviro/Aldee Water/Toshiba Water

33 STP PANEL SPC ELECTROTECH/ ABB/ HAVELLS

Note:

1. The contractor will use one of the approved makes as approved by the Engineer-in-charge. .
2. In case of different quality/pattern of same make, the pattern/quality shall be approved
Engineer – in – charge. MCB DB and SP/ TP/FP MCB shall be of same make, only prewired DB shall be used.
3. For materials/equipment / to be used in items of work for which approved makes are not
Given here in,the makes of such materials / equipment’s hall be as decided by Engineer–in- charge.

4. If any major equipment is using a small component of make other than that given as a
Standard component with the equipment, the same shall be accepted subject to approval of Engineer–in-charge.

5 If there is any anomaly/confusion in mentioned of list of makes/specifications of tender document, the

make/specifications decided by Engineer In Charge shall be final.

Page 24

Signature of Contractor PWD-GoR